Page 1

2014-2015

School Sports 路 Club Sports 路 Fitness 路 Therapy

2014-2015 SINCE 1949

Over 65 years experience

MADE IN GERMANY

We manufacture many products ourselves

HUGE SELECTION

Over 10,000 products

Find more at: sport-thieme.com

We use climateneutral printing


Top brands at Sport-Thieme

Dr. Hans-Rudolf Thieme

Katharina Thieme-Hohe

Maximilian Hohe

Dear Sports Enthusiasts,

The major sporting events of the Winter Olympics in Sochi and the FIFA World Cup in Brazil are now well and truly behind us. Whether you follow such sporting highlights as an active athlete, as a fan or in another capacity, we share this passion for sport with you. Our fresh, new catalogue, as always, contains a wealth of new products and ideas for fitness, sport and therapy. We are also continuously focussing on social responsibility and sustainable operations. This is a fundamental cornerstone of our company philosophy. We began to combine environmental, social and economic objectives with our core business at an early stage and aspire to combine best possible product quality and service with effective environmental protection and social responsibility. We hope you’ll enjoy browsing through our 2014-2015 catalogue and discovering all the products on offer. Best wishes, Dr. Hans-Rudolf Thieme

Katharina Thieme-Hohe

Maximilian Hohe

Our service to you Quick and easy ordering with Sport-Thieme. Ordering by phone is the quickest way to get your questions answered. We will also provide you with a precise delivery date for your goods. You can reach us by telephone on

+49 5357 181-543

uhlsport®

during the following times: Monday to Friday 8.00 to 12.30 and 13.30 to 16.00 or order by fax

+49 5357 181-921

Order by post. Simply fill in the order form and send it to:

Sport-Thieme GmbH Helmstedter Straße 40 D-38367 Grasleben GERMANY Order by e-mail. E-mail us! Our address is:

info@sport-thieme.com Click to buy! Visit our online shop at:

www.sport-thieme.com

Order around the clock:

www.sport-thieme.com · Tel. +49 5357 181-543 · Fax +49 5357 181-921


The Catalogue at a Glance! Balls

Accessories..............................43-44 Ball Compressors and Blowers.......42 Ball Pumps....................................43 Ball Sets...................................18-19

Ball Storage..................................44 Basketballs.................................9-11 Exercise Balls........................... 33-35 Footballs......................................4-8

Fun / Therapy Balls................... 36-41 Handballs.................................12-13 Medicine Balls...............................21 Soft Foam Balls.................. 22-26, 32

Volleyballs................................ 14-17

4

Team Sports

Badminton............................106-109 Baseball, Softball, Intercrosse................................51-52 Basketball................................ 45-50

Floorball..................................84-87 Football...................................53-69 Goal Nets, Goal Accessories......63-64 Handball.................................. 70-73

Hockey.....................................88-89 Speedminton............................... 113 Table Tennis........................... 90-105 Tennis....................................110-112

Volleyball................................. 74-82

45

Athletics

Discus, Shot Put....................122-123 Hammer Throw.............................122 High Jump.............................124-125 Hurdles..................................118-119

Javelin.................................. 120-121 Starting Blocks............................. 117 Long Jump..............................115-116

Teaching and Training Aids

Reivo Vario Resistance Bands....... 129 Sport-Thieme Floor Markings....... 128 Tactics Boards..............................127 Training Aids............................... 130

127

Referee Equipment....................... 131

131

Sportswear Starting, Measuring and Marking

Boundary Poles........................... 139 Crown Stoppers........................... 133 Digital Stopwatches............... 131-135 Marking Cones............................ 138

Interiors

Changing Benches.................146-148 Storage and Transport Trolleys..................143-145

Marking Machines.................140-142 Measuring Tapes..........................137 Table Stopwatches.......................135 Team Identification...................... 136

114

132

Starting Numbers........................ 136

143

Swimming

Aqua Aerobics............................. 169 Aqua Cycling............................... 168 Aqua Jogging.........................162-166 Diving...................................149-150

Lifesaving............................. 180-181 Pool Fun................................ 170-172 Swimming Aids.....................154-156 Swimming Floats.................. 153, 156

Swimming Lanes and Marking Lines........................175-177 Swimming Pool Equipment.... 173-174 Training, Fins........................ 156-161

Water Polo...................................179

149

Fitness, Weights and Boxing

Balance, Aerobics, Pilates and Yoga....................197-203 Barbells........................ 209, 212-213 Boxing.................................. 214-217

Cardio Equipment..................218-227 Dumbbell Racks.......................... 210 Dumbbells and Weights........ 206-213 Nordic Walking......................182-183

Resistance Tubes and Bands.....................192-193, 195 Small Dumbbells..................206-207 Step Aerobics........................198-199

Strength Equipment.............230-233 Thera-Bands............................... 194

182

Gymnastics and Children‘s Gymnastics.................255-259 Benches............................241 Children‘s Gymnastics Gymnastics Gymnastics Mats..........................270-274 Ceiling and Wall Mounts......................260

Gymnastics Walls.........................252-253 Landing Mats...............................278-280 Modular Gymnastics Systems......238-239 Parallel Bars.................................246-247

Rolling Bar Slides..................................261 Soft Mats.......................................275-277 Springboards...............................242-243 Trampolines, Mini Trampolines...249-250

Vaulting Boxes......................234-237, 240 Vaulting Bucks, Pommel Horses......... 245 Vaulting Tables....................................244 Wall Bars...............................................251

234

Exercise, Aerobics

Ballet...................................294-295 Bean Bags................................... 287 Exercise Stools............................ 293 Exercise Mats..............................283

Gymnastics and Dance Ribbons... 292 Gymnastics Balls......................... 287 Gymnastics Bars.......................... 291 Gymnastics Clubs........................ 291

Gymnastics Hoops.......................290 Therapy & Exercise Mats..............282 Skipping Ropes....................288-289

Movement and Psychomotor Therapy

Balance Discs and Tops....301-308, 326-327 Balance Training........................................300 Balancing...........................................332-335 Ball Cushions............................................. 297

Ball Pools...................................................345 Bean Bags................................................. 337 Building Blocks..................................340-341 Coordination Training..........................310-311

Hand, Feet and Leg Trainers..............312-314 Massage.....................................................315 Parachutes.........................................318-319 Pedalos...............................................320-321

Recreational and Movement Games

Billiards, Pool....................... 376-377 Children’s Vehicles............... 347-349 Darts.......................................... 378 Frisbees, Throwing Discs.............. 365

Recreational Game Sets...............363 Slacklines.............................370-371 Table Football Tables................... 375 Target and Other Games....... 356-359

Trampolines......................... 372-374 Unicyles, Stilts.....................351, 353

Service

Index........................................ N 2 Order Form...................................N 8 Ordering, Paying and Delivery....... N 1

Our Service.................................. ??? Sport-Thieme Manufacturing......... ??? Sustainability Report.................... ???

Terms and Conditions................. N 7

Images, text and drawings may only be used with our written permission. © 2013-2014 by Sport-Thieme.

Comprehensive Index

282 Resistance Bands.....................296, 298-299 Resting Support..........................................315 Roller Boards.....................................322-325 Trampolines........................................316-317

296 347

pages N2-N6


SPORT-THIEME® FOOTBALLS

In a new design for improved visibility Our footballs are made from PU material and have excellent bounce characteristics. The balls are abrasion-proof, do not absorb water and are therefore suitable for all surfaces and weather conditions. The double laminating process and extremely long-lasting butyl bladder ensure that the

balls have minimal pressure loss. Our footballs are made to the official measurements and we provide a 2 year guarantee on the roundness and seams. In addition, we submit our balls to regular quality testing carried out by an independent testing institute.

SPORT-THIEME® BALL QUALITY We provide you with high quality which is why our footballs are individually tested, by an independent testing institute,

to meet the FIFA ball requirements for International Matchball Standards (IMS).

® G CRITERIA SPORT-THIEME TESTIN

1. Circumference

The ball‘s radius is measured at different points. The circumference must meet the requirements and sit between 68 and 70 cm. A consistent circumference provides the best ball control.

2. Roundness

The radius of the ball is measured at different points. The difference between the smallest and largest radius measurements should not be more than 2 percent. A uniform roundness provides the best bounce.

3. Rebound

The ball must be dropped ten times, from a height of 2 m, onto a steel plate in cold (5 °C) and warm (20 °C) temperatures. The ball must rebound between a height of 110 or 115 and 165 cm. The difference between the highest and lowest rebound measurement should be a maximum of 10 cm.

New! b

4. Weight

Each ball must be weighed several times in a sealed environment. The required weight of an official size 5 ball should be between 410 - 450 g.

5. Water Absorption

The ball is turned and squeezed in water approx. 200 times. The requirements state that the ball must not absorb more than 20% of its weight in water.

6. Pressure Loss

The ball is inflated to a pressure of 1 bar. Over the following 72 hours it must not lose more than 25% of its air. Loss of air has a negative effect on the flight properties of the ball.

4

New! Sport-Thieme® “Air Mat-

ress” Football

Sport-Thieme competition football for all weather conditions and surfaces. The sealed seams make this ball resistant to water even on the inside. The special micro foam structure between the polyester layers conserves the characteristics of the ball: perfect flight, more flexibility and liveliness, perfect trajectory and it is well suited for header training. White/coloured, men‘s size 5, 420 g. 71 106 9310 Each

4 For all weather conditions and pitch types 4 Perfect flight 4 Special micro foam structure 4 Well suited for header training 4 2 year guarantee on seams

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Sport-Thieme® Footballs Balls d

Great Value!

b

Buy now! a

Test Winner

“Great quality for a great price!”

a Sport-Thieme® “Premium”

b New! Sport-Thieme®

High quality top competition ball that meets the toughest demands. Five layers of material with the Air Tress System: a special micro foam for excellent flight characteristics, more precision, remarkable energy return and great to touch. High durability through a seam sealing system and special valve. Suitable for all weather conditions. Top quality design in honeycomb look. Size 5, 420 g. 71 107 8275 Each

The ball for a new generation. Size and weight comply with FIFA and DFB guidelines. A specially developed material makes this ball stronger and more durable than other footballs. Porvair is shiny, with two layers of polyester and cotton. It has the same characteristics as other top footballs and is suitable for any surface or weather condition. This ball will not absorb water. 32 panels, white/blue/red. Size 5, 420 g. 71 107 8031 Each

Football

c

4 High gloss surface 4 Shape-retaining

“M. Collins II” Football

d c

New! Sport-Thieme®

New! Sport-Thieme®

“Ortero” Football

Abrasion-proof PU material, 4 layers of 1.5 mm thick polyester, laminated. Brilliant “Supreme” Football Special high gloss coating, 1.5 mm, white/ shine as a result of special surface treatment. This inexpensive training football is blue. Four polyester layers, laminated to retain the shape well. Suitable for all pitch suitable for all types of surface and weather conditions. 32 panels with butyl bladand weather conditions. Butyl bladder. der. White/blue/red. Size 5, 420g. Size 5, 420 g. 71 107 8969 Each 71 107 8972 Each

g

290 g

Test Result very good “Perfect value for money”

e 350 g

h

Top Rated

f

e

New! Sport-Thieme “Kids” ®

sport-thieme.com

4 High  visibility ball ideally suited for snow and dull weather conditions 4 Stays soft even in subzero temperatures g New! Sport-Thieme® “Soccer” Football

Football

The high quality workmanship provides this ball with excellent durability. It will not absorb any water and the synthetic leather holds its shape well. Thanks to its great flight characteristics it is a perfect training and competition ball for youth players. Suitable for all types of surfaces. Made in men‘s size 5 so that the teens get used to the adult size. 290 g, white/blue. 350 g, white/red. 71 186 4654 Kids 290, size 5, 290 gEach 71 186 4667 Kids 350, size 5, 350 gEach

f

New! Sport-Thieme® “Soccer

Flash” Floodlight Ball

Made of PU material, fluorescent orange. Extremely durable, the ball stays soft even in sub-zero temperatures. Ideally suited for all surfaces and weather conditions, especially in snow and fog. Size 5, 420 g. 71 107 5319 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

h

New! Sport-Thieme®

“Training” Football

Sport-Thieme leisure and training ball, size The ideal training football from Sportand weight comply with FIFA and DFB guiThieme, official size and weight complying delines, synthetic leather. Abrasion-proof, with regulations. Synthetic leather, double does not absorb water and suitable for knotted seams, laminated four times with all pitch conditions. Thanks to our bulk Corex clear coating. Two year guarantee on purchasing and large warehouse capacity shape and seams. Recommended for all we can offer this ball at a very competitive pitch and weather conditions. White/blue. price. White/black. Men, size 5, approx. 420 g Men, size 5, approx. 420 g 71 241 6003 Each 71 107 7748 Each Youth, size 4, approx. 360 g Youth, size 4, approx. 360 g 71 241 6016 Each 71 107 7751 Each Boys, size 3, approx. 330 g Boys, size 3, approx. 330 g 71 241 6029 Each 71 107 7764 Each

5


Balls Derbystar® & Uhlsport® Footballs, Indoor Balls

a

b

New! Uhlsport® “M-Konzept Level”

Football

New! Uhlsport® “M-Konzept

Resistent” Football

New match and training ball ideal for hard pitches and A ball meeting the most demanding requirements and artificial turf. Attractive Uhlsport design with 22 panels. branded with the FIFA inspected seal. Very good playaAbrasion-proof thanks to its TPU upper material and the bility thanks to its seamless surface. Perfect roundness, additional foam layer. Perfect roundness and very low very durable TPU material, new bladder with low pressure water absorption as a result of thermo-bonding technoloss. Size 5. logy. FIFA inspected. Size 5. 71 240 8200 Each 71 240 8213 Each

c

e Derbystar “Chicago TT” Football ®

A durable training ball with good playing properties, IMS approved. Top training ball with exceptional playability, IMS • Finely  grained high-tech PU material approved. 32 panel surface made of glossy high-tech PU • Very robust and durable material. Stable flight path thanks to zero-wing latex blad- • Water repellent der. For all types of surface and weather conditions. Size 5. • Particularly  suitable for hard pitches and artificial turf 71 106 9899 Each 71 107 7490 Size: 5, 420 gEach

d

New! Derbystar “Brillant TT“ Football

Challenger” Football

New match and training ball with seamless structure. Excellent playing characteristics thanks to its 22 panel design. Perfect roundness, hardly any water absorption. Durable PU-like material, low pressure loss bladder. In accordance with international matchball standards (IMS). Size: 5. 71 240 8226 Each

New! ®

New! Uhlsport® “M-Konzept

f

4 For F youth and bambini 4 300 g Derbystar® “Brillant S-light” Football

A new youth ball in an attractive design with top playing properties and reduced weight. • Glossy PU material • Very durable and water repellent • Size 5, 300 g for F youth and bambini 71 106 9873 Each

Great Value!

Buy Now! 4 The futsal ball “sticks” to your foot

g

New! Sport-Thieme® “Futsal”

Indoor Football

A FIFA version for indoor football. The game is played into 3x2 m goals without any boards. This ball was developed especially for this sport with greatly reduced rebound. It “sticks” to the foot and is therefore ideal for halls. Futsal particularly develops technical skills. Its special rules also encourage fair play. White/yellow/red/grey. Size 4, approx. 400 g. 71 241 6205 Each

6

4 Indoor football made from felt

h

New! Sport-Thieme® “Ortero Indoor”

Indoor Football

With reduced rebound for a quicker indoor game. The yellow colour makes the ball easier to spot. Hand-stitched, smooth synthetic suede with the best playing properties. 71 241 6218 Men, size 5, 420 gEach 71 241 6221 Youth, size 4, 360 gEach

i Sport-Thieme® Indoor Football

Top quality indoor football! The bounce and speed of the ball have been reduced to the ideal level. Easy to spot thanks to its yellow colour. Shell made of nylon/wool, original English upper material, 32 panels. 71 107 8611 Youth, size 4, 360 gEach 71 107 8608 Men, size 5, 420 gEach

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Adidas® Footballs Balls

a

New! Adidas® “Finale 12 Top Sportivo”

Football

High-quality training ball with seamless surface thanks to its patented TSBE technology. The star panel design corresponds with the original match ball. Perfect grip and high durability thanks to its temperature regulating material (100% polyurethane). White/lab lime, size 5. FIFA inspected. 71 241 1112 Each

c

New! Adidas® “Torfabrik 2012

b

New! Adidas® “Finale 12” OMB Football

d

New! Adidas® “Torfabrik 2012

UEFA Champions League‘s official match ball for 2012/2013. Temperature regulating materials (70% polyurethane, 30% polyester) with a seamless surface ensure precise flight path and better ball control. Its unique star panel design with perfect grip provides excellent aerodynamics and great effect. 100% watertight. White/lab lime, size 5. FIFA approved. 71 241 1109 Each

Competition” Football

Top Training” Football

High-quality training ball in the same design as the official match ball. Thanks to heat-sealed panels (100% polyureHigh-quality ball with seamless surface made of tempethane), it features a seamless surface with perfect grip rature regulating material (100% polyurethane) for best and is highly abrasion-proof. White/infra red, sizes 4 + 5. playability and flight properties. It is perfectly balanced FIFA inspected. thanks to the power balance technology with counterweight to the valve. White/infra red, size 5. FIFA approved. 71 241 1141 Size 5Each 71 241 1138 Each 71 241 1154 Size 4Each

The official match ball of the first and second Bundesliga for the season 2012/2013! 4 Extremely abrasion resistant surface

f

New! Adidas® “Torfabrik 2012 Junior”

Football

Special, light youth training ball. Hand-stitched design made of abrasion resistant material (68% polyurethane, 32% synthetic leather) with perfect grip. Design corresponds with official match ball. White/infra red, size 5. e Adidas® “Tango SHS” Indoor Football New indoor ball in classic Tango design. The surface Available in two weight categories: F juniors 290 g, D and is extremely abrasion resistant, enabling perfect indoor E juniors 350 g. play. Lemon peel/black. Size 5. 71 241 1167 290 gEach 71 107 8695 Each 71 241 1170 350 gEach

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

g

New! Adidas® “Torfabrik 2012”

OMB Football

The official match ball of the first and second Bundesliga for the season 2012/2013. The seamless surface made of temperature regulating materials (70% polyurethane, 30% polyester) provides the ball with best playability and flight characteristics. White/infra red, size 5. FIFA approved. 71 241 1125 Each

7


Balls Football Sets & Training Balls 4 Weatherproof 4 Easily  visible thanks to fluorescent colours

a

f

d

c

g b

New! e 4 Ideal  for soccer court and street football

a

4 Ideal for reflex training 4 Unpredictable rebound properties 4 Develops ball handling skills

New! Sport-Thieme®

Beach-Soccer Ball

In luminous yellow/orange, 32 hand sewn panels, latex bladder. Weatherproof, robust and holds shape well. Size 5, 400 g. 71 107 4026 Each

d

New! Sport-Thieme®

New! Sport-Thieme® “Mini-

Play” Football

Football, 32 panels, easy grip material. In an attractive colourful design. Circumfef PU Foam Football “Low Bounce Competition” New! theeggball Classic c Yellow/black. This ball has all the rence 42 cm. Size 2. The latest trend. Ideal for reaction Football 71 106 9655 Each advantages of foam balls with coating and coordination training in football, basThe ideal ball for soccer courts and street (skin) through closed pore PU foam. Very ketball or volleyball. This egg shaped ball football. The reduced bounce means it is e Uhlsport® Reflex Ball robust and hard wearing. ø 20 cm, 330 g. Use the ball like a football but it will is an innovative and pedagogically valuavery easy to control. 71 191 9208 Each ble sports product and you‘ll have fun trai- present the player with unusual challen• Abrasion resistant ges. This leads to significant improvening sessions with it. Its unusual shape • Multi-layered structure g Original Volley® Elé Football Football with elephant skin coating, a • Material: Duksung 1.6 mm, laminated on features exceptional flight and bounce cha- ment of ball handling skills and supports very strong sealed PU coating. This makes reflex training. The ball improves eye-legracteristics. Very durable and soft double three layers of polyester and one layer the foam ball washable and disinfectable. fabric surface material. Suitable for indoor coordination, is fun and provides variety of cotton Non-toxic in strong yellow football design, in training. Very robust TPU. Bright yellow. and outdoor use.22x22x27 cm, 255 g, • Grey/yellow ø 21 cm, 255 g. 21.5x21.5x19 cm, 290 g. white/blue. • 32 panels, size 4, 400 g 71 241 6104 Each 71 107 8741-1 Each 71 107 8738-2 Each 71 107 1304-1 Each

b

Test our products!

Sets

We offer taster packs so you can experience the products for yourself. Our taster packs will provide you with the opportunity to see the products for yourself and to be won over by their quality. If the design does not meet your expectations, the products can be returned within 100 days. Please note, used items and products that have been played with cannot be returned; we must invoice you for these items.

New! 4 Set of 7

h Men's Football Set

The set consists of: • 2 Adidas “Torfabrik 2013 Competition” footballs • 5 Sport-Thieme “Training” footballs, size 5, page 5 h 71 242 7241 Set

8

4 Set of 7

i

New! Youth Football Set

The set consists of: • 2 Adidas “Torfabrik 2013 Junior 350” footballs • 5 Sport-Thieme “Training” footballs, size 4, page 5 h 71 242 7238 Set

k j

New! Indoor Football

New! Football

Taster Pack

The set consists of: • 1 Adidas “Torfabrik Top Training” Taster Pack football, size 5, page 7 d The set consists of: • 1 Sport-Thieme “Air Mattress” football, • 1 Adidas indoor football, size 5, size 5, page 4 (blue box) page 7 e • 1 Sport-Thieme “Soccer” football, • 1 Sport-Thieme indoor football, size 5, size 5, page 5 g page 6 i • 1 Sport-Thieme “Supreme” football, • 1 Sport-Thieme Futsal indoor football, size 5, page 5 c size 4, page 6 g 71 242 7225 Set 71 230 3097 Set

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Ballen a Spalding® “Official WNBA All Star Pro” Basketball

Women‘s size 6 basketball. This is a new ball with the well known Spalding quality, which combines the excellent grip from the NBA Tack Soft with the quality of the WNBA Gameball. This is the indoor ball that can also be used outdoors. Exclusive composite synthetic leather with“Touch Microfibre Technology”, DBB approved. Circumference 66 cm, 560 g. 71 108 5222 Each

b Spalding® Basketball “Beko BBL TF 1000 Legacy”

Official game ball of the BEKO Basketball-Bundesliga. This indoor basketball is the successor of the “ZK Pro” and comes with a newly developed surface that gives you perfect grip. In addition, the optimised Deep Channel Design guarantees a top feel and great ball control. Circumference 75 cm, 600 g, size 7. 71 108 5307 Each

Professional basketball units in our online shop: sport-thieme.com

c Molten® “GG7” Basketball

Easy grip, synthetic leather basketball, Dual Cushion Technology. Suitable for indoor and outdoor use. 12 panels instead of 8, excellent ball control, orange/ cream, size 7. DBB approved. 71 108 4333 Each

d Molten® “GL7” Basketball

Official match ball for World and European championships and the 2012 Olympics. An exclusive top class competition ball. Leather, excellent gripping qualities. It offers excellent ball control when catching, on rebound and in other ball situations as a result of its Dual Cushion Technology. This great ball will allow every player to achieve their potential. Orange/cream, size 7. 71 108 4346 Each

a

Buy Now!

c

Buy Now!

Official Game Ball rear

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

b

Buy Now!

d

Buy Now! 9


Balls Spalding®, Molten® & Mikasa® Basketballs a

b

c

New! c Spalding® Replica of the b a Spalding® “Neverflat” Basketball

4 Mixture of air and gas increases playing time 10-fold

d

Ten times longer lifespan. Suitable for indoor and outdoor use, the ball will not go flat prematurely, no need to re-inflate thanks to a mixture of air and gas inside. Premium composite synthetic leather for excellent grip and ball control. Can also be used with a standard ball pump (without the NitroFlate effect). Size 7, circumference 75 cm, 600 g. 71 108 5235 Each

New! Spalding®

“NBA Marquee” Basketball

High-quality indoor/outdoor ball. Very durable thanks to its innovative panel design and exclusive composite leather. Excellent playing characteristics and perfect ball control. Size 7, circumference 75 cm, 600 g. 71 108 5310 Each

Official NBA “Platinum” Basketball

“Street Game Ball” The Spalding replica of the international NBA street game ball. Made from very strong double rubber surface, non-slip with deep wide grooves. Perfect for street basketball thanks to its durability. Size 7. Circumference 75 cm, 600 g. 71 108 5424 Each

d Spalding® Official NBA

“Tacksoft Pro” Basketball

Multi-purpose ball for indoor and outdoor use. Innovative composite leather (synthetic) surface, very good grip and handling, with wide grooves. DBB (German Baskete Spalding® “TF 500 ball Federation) approved. Composite” Basketball Size 5, circumference approx. 69 cm, 480 g 71 108 5251 Each This high quality indoor/outdoor ball has excellent playing characteristics thanks to Size 6, circumference approx. 72 cm, 520 g its “White Channel Design” and durable 71 108 5248 Each composite leather surface. Circumference Size 7, circumference approx. 75 cm, 600 g 75 cm, size 7, 600 g. 71 108 5206 Each 71 108 5277 Each

g

h

j

h

Molten® “B982 D” Basketball

Master” Basketball

Accessories l i Mikasa “Permalast 1500” ®

Basketball

DBB (German Basketball Federation) approved, excellent bounce, non-slip, High quality nylon competition ball, especially easy to grip, DBB (German Basketball natural rubber cover over a nylon body, double laminated butyl rubber bladder. Federation) approved. Great ball control Size 7, circumference 75 cm, 600 g. thanks to its surface structure. Size 7. 71 107 6602 Each 71 108 4203 Each

10

New! Molten® “School

Official ball used by the Olympic youth training team. Synthetic leather basketk Molten® “B985” Basketball ball, good grip and ball control. Mini basketball, non-slip, very popuSize 7, circumference approx. 75 cm, 600 g lar school basketball, DBB (German Bas71 107 6644 Each ketball Federation) approved. Size 5, cirSize 6, circumference approx. 72 cm, 520 g cumference approx. 69 cm, 480 g. 71 107 6657 Each 71 186 1219 Each

g Molten® “GF6” Basketball

Top quality basketball made from synthetic leather, easy to grip, indoor/outdoor, 12 panels, FIBA and DBB (German Basketball Federation) approved, orange/cream, size 6, circumference 72 cm, 520 g. 71 108 4359 Each

Basketball

The indoor/outdoor ball used in schools because of its great properties. All Surface Composite Leather. 71 108 5479 Size 5Each 71 108 5264 Size 6Each 71 108 5466 Size 7Each

New!

j

i

f Spalding® “TF 250”

New! Molten® Ball Bag

For 6 basketballs. Very durable and tough polyester basketball bag. Additional 4 cm wide, adjustable shoulder strap. Comfortable and non-tear carrying handle. Shoulder strap and carrying handle are multi-sewn and riveted to prevent tearing. Strong edge reinforcement. Washable surface. 71x46x19 cm. 71 107 5410-1 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Sport-Thieme® Basketballs Balls

New!

New! a

4 Street basketball 4 Good grip and tough

New! Sport-Thieme®

“Training” Basketball

Non-slip surface. In 4 sizes for our “minis” up to official competition size. Size 3, circumference approx. 56 cm, 300 g Size 6, circumference approx. 72 cm, 520 g 71 108 5147 Each 71 108 5163 Each Size 5, circumference approx. 69 cm, 480 g Size 7, circumference approx. 75 cm, 600 g 71 108 5150 Each 71 108 5176 Each

b

j 4 Size 5 for children's training

New! Sport-Thieme®

“Street“ Basketball

Excellent street basketball for schools and clubs. Good grip and durable surface. Size 7, circumference 75 cm, 600 g. 71 108 4144 Each

k 4 Size 6 for women's basketball Size 2

c

Sport-Thieme® “Playground” Basketball

4 Non-slip surface

e Sport-Thieme® “Rainbow 2000” Basketball

These basketballs are suitable for use in halls and on the street. The special rubber Stand out with this ball‘s contrasting ® colours. The size is ideal for training begin- d Sport-Thieme Basketball in mixture makes them very robust and provides a very good grip. An excellent rainUS design ners. Non-slip surface. Circumference 44 bow coloured basketball. 16 panels in 16 Size and weight comply with international cm, 160 g, size 2. different colours. Size 7, circumference 75 71 109 2442 YellowEach regulations, non-slip surface, blue/white/ cm, 600 g. 71 109 2455 GreenEach red. Size 7, circumference 75 cm, 600 g. 71 109 2471 RedEach 71 108 4809 Each 71 108 3705 Each

l 4 Size 7 4 Ideal training ball

j

“Youth” Mini Basketball

High quality mini basketball made of nylon. Size 5, circumference 68 cm, 520 g. 71 108 4913 Each

f

g

Size 7

Size 7

k

f Seamco® “Super K78” Basketball

One of the best known competition balls world-wide, suitable for all types of courts and certified by the DBB (German Basketh ball Assoc.). Made of 5 layers of AAA bonded nylon. Natural rubber surface. Size 7. Size 5 Circumference 75 cm, 600 g. 71 108 4607 Each

g Seamco® “Super K74” Bas-

New! Sport-Thieme®

4 F or all types of courts

h Seamco® “K98” Basketball

4 PU foam 4 Will not cause damage 4 Good bounce

i PU Foam Basketball

Made from closed cell PU foam which works like a coating (skin). No damage to ketball Popular youth basketball, mini basequipment, good bounce thanks to the For competition and training, durable ketball, DBB (German Basketball Associastructure, nylon AA bonded. Perfect grip tion) approved. With five layered AAA bon- thick foam. Can also be used for therapy or in disabled sports. Circumference approx. thanks to the natural rubber surface. Suided nylon, butyl rubber bladder, natural 63 cm, approx. 300 g. table for all court surfaces. Size 7, circumfe- rubber surface. 69 cm circumference, 480 71 212 1811-1 OrangeEach rence 75 cm, 600 g. g. Size 5. 71 108 4001 Each 71 108 5004 Each 71 212 1824-1 RainbowEach

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

New! Sport-Thieme®

“Women” Women's Basketball

Ideal beginner‘s ball, non-slip surface material. Size complies with the new women‘s basketball regulations for competitions from the 2004/2005 season. Circumference approx. 72 cm, approx. 520 g, size 6. 71 108 4128 Each

l

New! Sport-Thieme®

“SP Champion” Basketball for Beginners

Ideal ball for beginners, non-slip nylon surface. Size 7, circumference 75 cm, 600 g. 71 108 4131 Each

11


Balls Handballs b Molten® “HX 2700” Handball

a Molten® “HX 4000” Handball

A top level competition ball made from synthetic leather, “X” design. Very good bounce and flight characteristics, soft ball touch and perfect grip. IHF approved, yellow/blue. 71 306 6342 H3X 4000, men size 3Each 71 306 6355 H2X 4000, women size 2 Each

d New! Adidas Stabil Team

c

“Champions League” Handball

Top training ball made of hard-wearing PU material for ideal grip and excellent feel for the ball. Soft neoprene foam layer for ideal bounce. Prolonged precision thanks

HX2 2700, women size 2 71 306 6313 Each HX1 2700, school children size 1 71 306 6326 Each HX0 2700, mini size 0 71 306 6339 Each

New!

New!

®

A training ball made from soft PU material, “X” design, non-slip surface, very good playing characteristics. Orange. IHF approval on women‘s and men‘s sizes. HX3 2700, men size 3 71 306 6300 Each

New! Kempa® “Match-X

e

Omni Profile” Handball

New ball with outstanding grip for a perfect game. Soft PU surface for good handto latex bladder. Official EHF Champiling, ideal bounce characteristics thanks ons League match ball design. Lab lime/ to special HAR bladder. Low deflation. IHF dark blue. seal of approval. 71 241 1008 Men, size 3Each 71 240 8604 Men, size 3Each 71 241 1011 Women, size 2Each 71 240 8617 Women, size 2Each 71 241 1024 School children, size 1Each 71 240 8620 School children, size 1Each

Training Handballs

New!

New! Kempa® “Pro-X

Training Profile” Handball

Excellent training ball with outstanding grip. Soft and elastic PU material for perfect ball control. Low deflation and ideal bounce characteristics thanks to HAR bladder. IHF certification. 71 225 1468 Men, size 3Each 71 225 1471 Women, size 2Each 71 225 1484 School children, size 1Each

h

g

k

j

f

Recommended by DHB for training children and teens

New!

4 Non-slip surface

New! l

j Colibri Supersoft Handballs f Soft Foam Softball

ø 180 mm, 180 g, very good bounce, yellow. 71 109 7506-1 Each

g Volley® Mini Handball

i New! Kempa®

i Circumference 50 cm, white, 150 g, Street Handball good bounce. 71 108 2409-2 Each New fun and educational ball for schools, clubs and leisure use. Made of durable PU material without bladder. Ball does not h Mini Handball bounce, but can be squeezed and is easy Made from PU foam. High grip surto handle. For indoor and outdoor use. ø 13 face with very good bounce. Red, ø 160 cm, 140 g. mm, 160 g. 71 107 1548-1 Each 71 241 0005 Each 12

Super soft… non-slip… super safe! With extra fine foam material as well as special surface treatment. The balls are really easy to grip and abrasion resistant. The super soft design removes the fear of catching the ball. It is strong, has a long lifespan and its hardness can always be regulated using the needle valve. Can also be used in water. Pink.

Togu® Colibri Ladies' Handball

k

New! Sport-Thieme®

“Mini-Play” Handball

Handball, 32 panels, easy grip material. In an attractive colourful design. Circumference 42 cm. Weight approx. 190 g. 71 106 9655-1 Each

l

New! Sport-Thieme®

Mini Schools Handball

300 g, ø 16 cm A handball specially designed for the 71 107 2017-2 Each requirements of our “minis”. Tough mini Togu® Colibri Men's Handball handball made from soft PU synthetic lea400 g, ø 18 cm ther, non-slip. White/blue, size 0, 270 g. 71 107 2020-2 Each 71 108 7693 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Ballen

New! a

Handball Tip:

Handballs for men and men‘s youth A: Circumference 58-60 cm, 425-475 g. Size 3

New! Sport-Thieme “Blue Line II” ®

Handball

Handballs for women and men‘s youth B, ladies‘ youth A and B: Circumference 54-56 cm, 325-400 g. Size 2

High quality handball made from PU material with golf ball style texture. Excellent grip, even without resin. Very good bounce and flight characteristics. Soft to catch thanks to additional soft lamination. 32 panels, marine blue. Men, size 3, approx. 450 g 71 240 0772 Each

Youth handballs: • For men‘s youth D and E • For ladies‘ youth C and D

Women, size 2, approx. 350 g 71 240 0785 Each Kids, size 1, approx. 300 g 71 240 0798 Each

b

New!

New! Sport-Thieme® “Grippy” Handball

Competition-quality ball made of PU material meeting most demanding requirements. The “rubber grip” surface offers excellent grip, no resin necessary. Good catching, bounce and playing characteristics. Soft ball feel thanks to additional soft lamination. 32 panels, dark blue. Men, size 3, approx. 450 g 71 212 2957 Each Women, size 2, approx. 350 g 71 212 2960 Each Kids, size 1, approx. 300 g 71 212 2973 Each

c

New! Sport-Thieme® “Play” Handball

d

New! Sport-Thieme® “Blue” Handball

Strong mini handball made from soft PU synthetic leather. Ideal for competitions and training in schools and clubs. Good grip and pleasant ball feel. 32 panels, white/blue/red. Size 1, 300 g. 71 108 7521 Each

c

Durable, super strong handball in a new design. Non-slip rubber grip surface. 32 panels, light blue/blue. Men, size 3, approx. 450 g 71 240 0802 Each Women, size 2, approx. 350 g 71 240 0815 Each

New!

Kids, size 1, approx. 300 g 71 240 0828 Each Mini, size 0, approx. 250 g 71 240 0831 Each

Set

4 Compact storage, collapsible

New!

New!

Set Buy Now!

Also take a look at:

Team Identification, page 136

e Ball Carrier

Collapsible trolley for transportation and storage of balls. The ideal “training partner” as a collection basket. Approx. 62x62x84 cm, sufficient for approx. 30 handballs, 168 litres. 71 130 8701-2 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

f

New! Handball Set

The set consists of: • 2 Sport-Thieme Mini Schools handballs, size 0, page 12 l • 2 Sport-Thieme “Play” handballs, size 1 c • 2 Sport-Thieme “Grippy” handballs, size 2 b • 2 Volley® Mini handballs, page 12 g 71 242 7401 Set

13


Balls Recreational and Competition Volleyballs a

b

c

e Molten® “IV 58 L” Volleyball

This ball‘s patented “sensi-touch” technology is absolutely precise and is easy on the arms during the game. Made of white, American top quality leather, 18 panels, circumference 65-67 cm, 260-280 g, DVV approved. 71 108 1608 Each

a

d

Molten® “V5M5000” Volleyball

A competition ball made from super soft composite leather in a new design. Honeycomb structure for better grip and safe, precise passing. Newly developed Flistatec® technology for stable flight and very good playing characteristics. White/green/ red, size 5, circumference 65-67 cm, 260280 g. FIVB approved, DVV 1 approved. 71 108 2021 Each

Advanced Volleyball Technology 1.

2.

3.

4.

b Molten® “V5M4500” Volleyball

A competition ball made from soft composite leather in a new design with very good playing characteristics, official size and weight. White/green/red, size 5, circumference 65-67 cm, 260-280 g. DVV 2 approved. 71 108 2018 Each 1. Super soft composite leather with soft microfibre layer 2. Rubber layer 3. Nylon wound 4. Dual-layer laminated butyl bladder

Conti® “Super Soft” Volleyball Made of premium leather

c Molten® “V5M4800” Volleyball

Premium leather competition ball in a new design, official size and weight. White/ green/red, size 5, circumference 65-67 cm, 260-280 g. DVV 2 approved. 71 108 2034 Each

f Molten® Volleyball Bag

For 6 volleyballs, size 5 or 6 basketballs. Very durable and tough polyester volVolleyball leyball bag. Additional 4 cm wide adjustable A competition ball made from soft syntheshoulder strap. Comfortable and non-tear tic leather in a new design, durable, suita- carrying handle. Shoulder strap and carrying ble for club sports, official size and weight, handle are multi sewn and riveted to prevent white/green/red, size 5, circumference tearing. Strong edge reinforcement. Washa65-67 cm, 260-280 g. DVV approved. ble surface. 71x46x19 cm. 71 108 2047 Each 71 107 5410 Each

d Molten® “V5M4000”

j

h Real Leather

g i Real Leather

i Conti® “Super Soft

Microfibre 5000” Volleyball

Real Leather

h Conti® “Super Soft Leather 5000” Volleyball

Super soft structure, good ball control and excellent rebound. Absolutely precise g Conti “Super when passing. White/yellow/green for therefore easy on the arms. Made of speSoft” F.I.V.B. Volleyball improved visibility. 18 panels, size 5. Circially selected leather, 18 panels, size 5, Made from high quality cowhide. Super cumference 65-67 cm, 260-280 g. DVV I circumference 65-67 cm, 260-280 g. DVV soft construction with excellent rebound approved. I approved. when controlling the ball. Absolutely pre71 186 4902 Each 71 107 5609 Each cise and at the same time easy on the arms ®

14

Synthetic leather, made in Japan, top quality. Also suitable for hard courts. Size 5. Circumference 65-67 cm, 260-280 g. DVV I approved. 71 107 5801 Each

j Conti® “Super Soft” Mini“ Volleyball

Super soft construction, excellent rebound and easy on the arms. Size 4, circumference 62-64 cm, 240-260 g. 71 107 5700 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Balall b y le ol V ” 0 0 2 A V Mikasa “M me ball for London 2012 an d for len ®

The official Olympic ga ampionships World and European Ch 4 Size 5  cumference 65-67 cm 4 Cir 4 260-280 g

a Mikasa® “MVA 200” Volleyball

The new MIKASA MVA 200 indoor volleyball with the newly developed dimpled surface for even better flight and ball control. The new soft material and the revolutionary 8-panel design let the MVA 200 absorb much more impact energy than standard balls (18-panel) and extend the contact time. An additional bonus: The innovative design increases ball visibility. The MVA 200 - the official game ball of the Olympic Games in London 2012, of World and European Championships, and of the 1st and 2nd German Bundesliga. Size 5, circumference 65-67 cm, 260-280 g. FIVB Official Game Ball, DVV Official approval. 71 186 1033 Each

d

b b Mikasa® “MVA 310” Volleyball

c Mikasa® “MVA 320” Volleyball

This new Mikasa training and competiNewly designed high performance compe- tion ball is made of particularly soft syntition ball with the tried and tested Mikasa thetic material with increased grip thanks to its dimpled surface. Very durable and “MicFiber” synthetic surface. Very durable and long-lasting. Very precise and great long-lasting. Very precise because of the 8 panel construction. Butyl rubber bladflight thanks to the 8 panel construction with a super tight special valve. Size 5, cir- der and super tight special valve. Size 5, circumference 65-67 cm, 260-280 g. DVV cumference: 65-67 cm, 260-280 g. DVV1 2 approved. approved. 71 186 1046 Each 71 186 1062 Each

d Mikasa® “MVA 330”

e Mikasa® “MVA 350SL

Newly designed premium training volleyball with a very soft synthetic surface providing the best playing characteristics (8 panel construction). Great value for money. Size 5, circumference: 65-67 cm, 260-280 g. DVV approved. 71 186 1059 Each

A reduced weight top level exercise and training ball for children, teens and older people. In a new design. Soft PU surface material for excellent handling. Particularly nice feel. Size 5, circumference 65-67 cm, 200-220 g, DVV approved. 71 107 5511 Each

Volleyball

c

e

g

h

Light” Volleyball

Set g Sport-Thieme® “School” Volleyball

f Volleyball Set

Consisting of: • 3 Sport-Thieme “Magic” volleyballs, 18 panel, DVV 2 approved i • 2 Conti “Super Soft Microfibre 5000” volleyballs, 18 panel, white synthetic leather, page 14 i 71 106 8900 Set

Made from high quality synthetic material on a microfibre base. Super soft structure for arm friendly passes. Complies with FIVB regulations. Size 5, red/blue/white. Circumference 65-67 cm, 260-280 g. 71 108 2119 Each

h "Gold Cup" Volleyball

A superb value for money ball for beginners. PU surface material, very soft in white/yellow/green and therefore easier to see. Durable ball retaining its shape well. The ideal training ball. 18 panels, size 5, circumference 65-67 cm, 260-280 g. 71 108 2106 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

i i Sport-Thieme® “Magic” Volleyball

High quality volleyball, synthetic leather, made in Japan, with butyl rubber bladder in a nylon body. Size 5, circumference 65-67 cm, 260-280 g. DVV 2 approved. 71 108 2500 Each

15


Balls Recreational and Competition Beach Volleyballs 0 Micro” “Beach Champ VLS 30 e World and Official game ball of th ips European Championsh

rear

a Mikasa® “Beach Champ VLS 300 Micro” Beach Volleyball

rear

c

Official ball for: • Olympic Games 2012 in London • FIVB World Tour • CEV European Championship Tour • German Beach Volleyball National Championships (ladies, men & juniors) • 11 state associations in Germany Cover made of finest micro material in machine stitched 10-panel design. Soft and non-slip surface for perfect ball control. Low “rebound effect” increases the contact time for precise passing. Reinforced panels thanks to two-part textile layer ensuring ideal shape retention. Improved ball visibility thanks to its panel design and colours. Improved water resistance. Circumference 67 cm (±1 cm). 260-280 g. DVV Official approval. 71 108 5903 Each

d

b Mikasa® “Beach Champ VXT30” Beach Volleyball

The successor to the “VS 200” beach volleyball and the new replica ball for the official ”VLS 300“ ball in the new design for better visibility. 10 panel ball cover with revolutionary panel shape made from high quality synthetic leather, machine sewn with patented TwinStlock stitching technology for perfect shape retention and durable stitching. The super tight special valve as well as the double layered ”no leak“ butyl rubber bladder ensure excellent durability. 100% waterproof. Circumference 66-68 cm, 260-280 g. DVV Beach 1 approved. FIVG Official ball. 71 108 3851 Each

e

New! f

g

h

Top Rated

sport-thieme.com Don’t forget to order:

Beach volleyball sets from page 74

c Mikasa® “Beach Classic VXL 20” Beach Volleyball

New super soft PU surface material Mikasa beach volleyball made of new PU soft upper material, needless to say in Mikasa typical tricolour structure: blue/white/ yellow. Sewn, 18 panel ball cover, weather and seawater proof. Double layered “No Leak” butyl rubber bladder. Super tight special valve. F.I.V.B. regulation size and weight. Circumference 66-68 cm, 260-280 g. DVV Beach 2 approved. 71 108 1914 Each

d

New! Mikasa® “Grand Slam”

Beach Volleyball

Beach volleyball in modern white/yellow/blue design. Tried and tested PU soft surface material for superb handling. 18 panel ball cover, butyl rubber bladder for excellent durability, special valve. Weather and seawater proof. Circumference 66-68 cm, 260-280 g. 71 108 3864 Each

g Sport-Thieme® “Soft” Beach Volleyball

18 panels, hand stitched, comes in bold luminous f Sport-Thieme® “Super” Beach Volleyball colours: yellow, orange and white. Very soft synthetic leaIn modern, attractive luminous colours. Very easy to ther guarantees long lasting playing qualities, weathersee when playing. Durable as made from synthetic leather, proof, retains shape well, robust with a latex bladder. Cirmachine stitched. Circumference 66-68 cm, 260-280 g. cumference 66-68 cm, 260-280 g. 71 108 0012 Each 71 108 5714 Each

16

e Mikasa® “Soft Sand” Beach Volleyball

Super Soft PU Cover Mikasa beach volleyball with soft PU surface, needless to say designed in the three colours typical for Mikasa. Sewn. 18 panel ball cover, weather and seawater proof. Double layered “No Leak” butyl rubber bladder. Super tight special valve. F.I.V.B. regulation size and weight. Circumference 66-68 cm, 260-280 g. DVV Beach approved. 71 108 3822 Each

h Molten® “Beach Master” Volleyball

A top competition ball used by many clubs. The surface is made from a newly developed high-tech material. Premium flight characteristics, retains its shape well even in bad weather conditions. White/blue/yellow, size 5, circumference 66-68 cm, 260-280 g. DVV Beach 1 approved. 71 108 5932 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Training and Youth Volleyballs Balls bigger a 25% 40% lighter

a

New! Sport-Thieme®

“VB Trainer” Volleyball

For beginners. Its realistic 18 panel volleyball design makes this ball a revolutionary volleyball trainer. It removes the fear and makes beginners feel comfortable because it is 25% bigger and 40% lighter than conventional volleyballs. No matter what the situation, the ball is always easy to see, to throw and to control. Stitched from synthetic leather, with butyl rubber bladder. Circumference 93 cm, 130 g. 71 108 2614 Each

b

New! Sport-Thieme®

Training Volleyballs

Ideal reduced weight exercise ball for children and beginners. The ball allows beginners to have a better ball control thanks to the ball‘s slower flight properties. Depending on where the ball is used, the colour and size offer additional safety and take any fears away from the beginner.

c

“Super Light” Volleyball

size b Original 60% lighter

New!

New! Sport-Thieme®

“Light” Volleyball

A training ball the same size as original This volleyball is the same size as a normal volleyballs but 20% lighter. This ball is for volleyball but it is 60% lighter. It is particu- beginners but is especially suitable for larly suitable for beginners because of its children. Its light weight makes the ball slow flight (slow motion effect). Great ball easy to control and the bright colours mean visibility thanks to its appealing colours that it can be seen easily in any conditions. white/blue/yellow. Very soft synthetic leaMade from synthetic leather, 18 panels, ther, 18 panels, machine stitched. Size 5, stitched, with butyl bladder. White/blue/ circumference 65-67 cm, approx. 110 g. red. Size 5, circumference 67 cm, 190 g. 71 108 2630 Each 71 108 2627 Each

New! New!

size b Original 20% lighter

d e f

New!

4 Pleasantly soft 4 Particularly safe

g

d Volley Elé Special ®

New! Mikasa®

“SKV5” Kids' Volleyball

Volleyball specially designed for children from 4 years of age. This ball is lightweight and moves slower than a normal volleyf Soft Foam Volleyball ball. Very soft foam surface for gentle pasPleasantly soft ball that has a great ® bounce. The slow motion effect it produces sing. In the official “MVA 200” match ball e Volley Elé Volleyball helps beginners to learn the game. No dan- design. Size 5. Circumference 65-67 cm, ø 210 mm, very good bounce, white. 160-180 g. 71 109 7708-1 220 gEach ger of injury. 280 g, ø 210 mm. 71 107 1506-1 335 gEach 71 109 7405-1 Each 71 107 5524 Each ø 210 mm, approx. 235 g, very good bounce, white. 71 108 2207-1 Each

New!

New!

New! h

New! Mikasa® “School

SV-3” Volleyball

A reduced weight children and youth volleyball for indoor use in the current MVA design. Made of high-grade synthetic leather for excellent grip. Fewer seams and 8-piece panel construction leads to perfect ball control. Size 5, circumference 65-67 cm, 200-220g. DVV approved. 71 107 5537 Each

New!

4 Super soft and super safe

i Colibri Supersoft Volleyball

Super soft, non-slip and super safe! This ball removes the fear from passing and catching. It cuts out painful ball contact. It is strong, has a long lifespan and thanks to its needle valve the pressure can be regulated to suit different requirements e.g. made softer, more bounce, etc. All balls are pink. 200 g, ø 210 mm. 71 107 2004-1 Each

j

New! Mikasa® “MVA 123SL''

Volleyball

k

New! Mikasa® “VSV 800”

Volleyball

Exercise and training ball for both indoor Perfect entry level volleyball. Reduced and beach volleyball use. The soft surface weight so suitable for children up to 10 material made from EVA foam makes the years old. Extremely soft EVA foam. Suiball comfortable to touch. With a double table for a variety of ball games, such as bedded butyl rubber bladder and special dodge ball or others. Size 5, circumference valve. Waterproof. Size 5, circumference 65-67cm, 200-220 g. 65-67 cm, 260-280 g. 71 107 5540 Each 71 108 3877 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

l

New! Molten®

“School Master” Volleyball

Official ball for the Olympic youth training team. A very durable ball made from soft synthetic leather, perfect ball control. Size 5, circumference 65-67 cm, 260-280 g. DVV 2 approved. 71 108 2050 Each

17


BalTest out our products! len We offer taster packs so you can experience the products for yourself. Our taster packs will provide you with the opportunity to see the products for yourself and to be won over by their quality. If the design does not meet your expec-

tations, the products can be returned within 100 days. Please note, used items and products that have been played with cannot be returned; we must invoice you for these items.

Gymnastics Ball Taster Pack a

Sets

Buy Now!

Taster Packs a Gymnastics Ball Taster Pack

The set consists of: • 2 high gloss gymnastics balls, 1 blue and 1 red, ø 16.5 cm, page 31 a • 3 high gloss gymnastics balls, 1 blue, 1 red and 1 yellow, ø 19 cm, page 31 b • 3 WV rubber gymnastics balls, 1 blue, 1 red and 1 yellow, ø 16 cm, page 30 d • 1 WV rubber gymnastics ball, yellow, ø 19 cm, page 30 d 71 191 5280  Taster Pack

b

New! Sport-Thieme® Handball

Taster Pack

The set consists of: • 2 “Mini Schools” handballs, children‘s size 0, page 12 l • 2 “Grippy” handballs, women‘s size 2, page 13 b • 2 “Grippy” handballs, children‘s size 1, page 13 b • 2 Sport-Thieme “Blue” handballs, children‘s size 1, page 13 d • 2 Sport-Thieme “Blue” handballs, women‘s size 2, page 14 d 71 242 7414  Taster Pack

Try it out now!

Handball Taster Pack b

Volleyball Taster Pack

Basketball Taster Pack

c

New! Volleyball Taster Pack

d

New! Sport-Thieme® Basketball

The set consists of: • 1 Sport-Thieme “Soft” beach volleyball , page 16 g • 1 Conti “Super Soft Leather 5000” volleyball, page 14 h • 1 Sport-Thieme “Light” volleyball, page 17 c • 1 Sport-Thieme “Super Light” volleyball, page 17 b • 1 Sport-Thieme “School” volleyball, page 15 g 71 106 8913  Taster Pack

Taster Pack

The set consists of: • “Training” basketball, size 7, page 11 a • “Rainbow” basketball, size 7, page 11 e • US design basketball, size 7, page 11 d • “Youth” mini basketball, size 5, page 11 j • “SP Champion” mini basketball, size 7, page 11 l 71 191 4913  Taster Pack

d

c

18

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Save money with ball sets! BalSets

Sets a Volleyball Set

The set consists of: • 2 Conti “Super Soft” volleyballs, DVV 1, page 14 g • 2 Conti “Super Soft Leather 5000” volleyballs, DVV 1, page 14 h • 2 Sport-Thieme “Magic” volleyballs, DVV 2, page 15 i 71 191 5105 Set

Volleyball Set a

lenBuy

Great deals for customers looking for entry level pricing: Instead of purchasing the items individually, benefit from great discounts by purchasing ball sets. The sets consist of competition as well as training balls and therefore will cover all needs for different types of ball games. The balls are also available individually at the regular price.

Now!

Beach Volleyball Set b

b Beach Volleyball Set

The set consists of: • 1 Mikasa “Beach Champ VLS 300 Micro” volleyball, page 16 a • 1 Mikasa “Beach Classic VXL 20” beach volleyball, page 16 c • 1 Mikasa “Soft Sand” beach volleyball, page 16 e • 2 Sport-Thieme “Soft” beach volleyballs, page 16 g • 2 Sport-Thieme “Super” beach volleyballs, page 16 f 71 191 5118 Set

c Break-Time Set 1,

Balls in a Carrying Bag

c

The primary school set for active school breaks encouraging an interest in physical activity. The products have been chosen for children from 5 years of age. This set consists of: • 1 ball bag for transport and storage, page 44 j • 3 Sport-Thieme “Playground” basketballs, size 2, page 11 c • 3 Sport-Thieme “Mini Play” footballs, ø 42 cm, page 8 d • 3 footballs made from PU foam, ø 20 cm, page 8 f • 3 neon rainbow balls, ø 23 cm, page 36 b • 2 Kogelan “Yellow Line” volleyballs, page 36 g 71 242 7502 Set

d

Break-Time Set 1 & 2 4 Both include a ball bag

Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Contains individual parts that may be swallowed. Danger of suffocation.

d

New! Break-Time Set 2,

Balls in a Carrying Bag

A school set for active breaks. These products have been chosen with children from 12 years of age in mind. The set consists of: • 1 ball bag for transport and storage, page 44 j • 2 Sport-Thieme “Kids” footballs, size 5, page 5 e • 2 Sport-Thieme “Training” basketballs, size 7, page 11 a • 2 Sport-Thieme “Super” beach volleyballs, page 16 f • 2 footballs made of PU foam ø 20 cm, page 8f • 2 multi balls ø 21 cm, page 30 a • 1 pack of foot bags (containing 5), page 41 g • 1 football, size 9, page 27 e 71 242 7515 Set

Youth

Basketball Sets

e

Men‘s

Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Contains individual parts that may be swallowed. Danger of suffocation.

f

e Sport-Thieme Youth Basketball Set

The set consists of: • 5 “Training” basketballs, size 5, page 11 a • 5 “Youth” basketballs, size 5, page 11 (blue box) 71 191 5017 Set

f

New! Men's Basketball Set

The set consists of: • 2 “Super K78” basketballs, page 11 f • 2 “Training” basketballs, size 7, page 11 a • 2 Molten “B982 D” basketballs, page 10 h • 2 US style basketballs, page 11 d 71 191 4926 Set

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

g Ball Pump Set

Great Value!

To make sure you always pump with the right valve. You will easily find the replacement adaptors, as they are neatly divided in a strong wooden box. The set consists of: • 2 nickel plated 28x270 mm ball • 3 needle valves, page 43 n pumps, page 43 b + c • 1 flexible hose to protect the needle • 1 strong storage box 71 110 0408-1 Set • 3 replacement adaptors, page 43 l valves, page 43 m

Buy Now!

19


Balls Sling Balls, Throwing Balls Throwing Balls

a

DLV (German Athletics Association) regulations: Throwing balls are made of leather or rubber, weighing 200 g, with a ø of 7.5-8.5 cm.

i

h

d b

e

h Sport-Thieme® Sling Ball

Made of leather, hand stitched, strong loop and top quality filling. With internal metal cap to reinforce strap. 71 108 8524 800 g, ø approx. 16 cmEach 71 108 8511 1,000 g, ø approx. 18 cmEach 71 108 8508 1,500 g, ø approx. 20 cm Each

c a Throwing Ball

A throwing ball made from porous rubber, ø 6.5 cm, red, 80 g. 71 108 0504 Each

For use as a training ball, doesn‘t f Sport-Thieme® Competition bounce, made from plastic, ø 7.5 cm, pink, Throwing Ball 200 g. Competition throwing ball made from lea71 108 0403 Each ther ø 7.6 cm, does not bounce, 200 g. 71 108 0618 Each WV Throwing Ball

c

Training throwing ball made of rubber, doesn‘t bounce, with filling, ø 6.5 cm, red, 80 g. 71 108 0302 Each

This foam ball with an ‘Elé elephant skin’ cover is particularly suitable for learning the game. It takes away any fear of catching the ball, does not hurt and is easy to catch. ø 16 cm, 115 g. 71 107 2916 Each

j

New!

k

Made from rubber, ø 7.6 cm, pink, 200 g. 71 108 0201 Each

l Effet Dodge Ball

A top game and training ball for use in schools and clubs. Made from suede, yellow complying with the DTB (German Tennis Federation) regulations. In tennis ball design, regulation size and weight, circumference 62-68 cm, 320-380 g. 71 107 2903 Each

g Carrying Net for Balls

and Throwing Ball

Competition throwing ball. Made from leather, white, ø 6.5 cm, 80 g. Does not bounce. 71 108 0605 Each

New! Youth Dodge Ball

Made from suede and in yellow with 6 colourful spots. NTB accredited and recommended for younger people. 6 piece pattern. Weight and dimensions as per the regulations, circumference 62-68cm, 290-300 g. 71 107 2929 Each

k

d Competition Throwing Ball e Sport-Thieme Rounders

Made from thick, water resistant rubber material, in blue, with sewn-on leather strap. Advantages: very durable, 2 year durability guarantee. 71 108 8902 800 g, ø 18 cm Each 71 108 8915 1,000 g, ø 18 cm Each 71 108 8928 1,500 g, ø 20 cmEach

j Volley® Dodgeball

f

b Throwing Ball

®

i WV Sling Ball

Tightly meshed, for approx. 30 rounders balls. 2 mm thick polypropylene. Mesh width approx. 3 cm. Hemp colour. Balls not included. 71 110 1023 Each

l Real Leather

4 Official DTB (German Tennis Federation) competition ring

m n

Top Rated

m DTB Tournament Tennis Ring

Official DTB (German Tennis Federation) competition ring. Excellent flight characteristics, stable flight, solid micro-cellular rubber. Yellow, regulation size and weight. Inner diameter 10.5 cm, outer diameter 17 cm, approx. 220g. 71 135 3509 Each

n

Rings

sport-thieme.com

p

Air filled, in blue and red. 71 135 3802-4 BlueEach 71 135 3815-4 RedEach

4 Non-slip 4 Small size 4 Textured surface

p Tournament Tennis Rings

Micro-cellular rubber, inner ø 10.5 cm, outer ø 17 cm. For throwing training, rubber, 300 g, 71 135 3512-1 BlueEach 71 135 3525-1 RedEach 29 cm long, grey. 71 124 8207-2 Each 71 135 3538-1 WhiteEach 26 cm

o Throwing Bar

20

q Heavy Med

Small compact plastic medicine balls. Thanks to their small size, these balls are very well suited for children‘s handball and basketball training sessi-

ons. Long life span, durable, hygienic, washable, gel filled, good bounce. 71 107 3515 1,000 g, ø 12 cm, redEach 71 107 3528 2,000 g, ø 15 cm, yellowEach 71 107 3531 3,000 g, ø 17 cm, blueEach

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Medicine Balls Balls Great Product! 4 Hand-stitched, made of cowhide

Real Leather

4 Special hair filling

b

a Sport-Thieme® The Classic Medicine Ball!

Made of durable bovine leather, hand-stitched and with a top quality cork granulate filling. No problems with valves! 71 108 9240 1 kg, ø 18 cmEach 71 108 9237 1.5 kg, ø 22 cmEach

71 108 9224 2 kg, ø 24 cmEach 71 108 9208 3 kg, ø 28 cmEach 71 108 9253 4 kg, ø 30 cmEach 71 108 9211 5 kg, ø 32 cmEach

Real Leather

Sport-Thieme® Medicine Ball

Hand-stitched, made from leather, 8 panels, with special hair filling. 71 107 6048 1 kg, ø 19 cmEach 71 107 6006 1.5 kg, ø 25 cmEach 71 107 6019 2 kg, ø 28 cmEach 71 107 6022 3 kg, ø 33 cmEach 71 107 6035 4 kg, ø 37 cmEach

New! Great Value!

Buy Now!

4 Washable 4 Easy to look after 4 Shape-retaining 4 Anti-static

c Sport-Thieme®

Rubber Medicine Ball

d Togu® Medicine

Non-slip, medicine ball made of rubber, bounces well. Textured surface, hygienic, washable. Needle valve for bounce adjustment. Very hard-wearing and durable. Outstanding abrasion resistance. 71 239 0606 0.8 kg, ø 19.5 cmEach 71 239 0619 1 kg, ø 19.5 cmEach

71 239 0622 1.5 kg, ø 19.5 cmEach 71 239 0635 2 kg, ø 22 cmEach 71 239 0648 3 kg, ø 22 cmEach 71 239 0651 4 kg, ø 24 cmEach 71 239 0664 5 kg, ø 24 cmEach

ø 20 cm

ø 16 cm

Balls made from Ruton®

Extremely resistant to abrasion, retain their shape well, washable, easy to look after, with valve (rubber-like plastic). The balls bounce well, have a needle valve and can be re-inflated.

71 109 6604 0.8 kg, ø 21 cm, blueEach 71 109 6617 1 kg, ø 21 cm, redEach 71 109 6620 1.5 kg, ø 28 cm, brownEach 71 109 6633 2 kg, ø 28 cm, brownEach 71 109 6646 3 kg, ø 28 cm, blueEach 71 109 6659 4 kg, ø 34 cm, greenEach 71 109 6662 5 kg, ø 34 cm, redEach

ø 12 cm

New! 4 Easy to grip

e Soft Medicine Ball / Weight Ball

Easy to grip with one hand and won’t slip! Provides more options for strengthening and coordination exercises than a standard medicine ball. Can be easily

balanced on top of the head when playing a game. Filling: gel with polymer balls. 71 107 3557 1 kg, ø 12 cm, yellowEach 71 107 3560 2 kg, ø 16 cm, greenEach 71 107 3573 3 kg, ø 20 cm, purpleEach

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

4 5 year guarantee on material

f The Original WV Medicine Ball

With thick rubber cover, non-slip and nice to handle. Washable, with vulcanised valve. Advantage: extremely durable. 5 year guarantee!

71 108 9703 71 108 9716 71 108 9729 71 108 9732 71 108 9745

0.8 kg, ø 18 cm, brownEach 1 kg, ø 20 cm, greenEach 1.5 kg, ø 22 cm, redEach 2 kg, ø 27 cm, brownEach 3 kg, ø 27 cm, blueEach

21


PU Foam Balls

a

c b

4 Closed cell PU foam 4 No damage to surroundings 4 Very good bounce and rebound characteristics 4 Ideal for therapy use 4 Washable, can be disinfected

e

Great Value! h

d

f

Buy Now!

i g

k

l

PU Foam Balls

Non-slip surface thanks to special high-density foam coating, very good rebound and bounce characteristics. These distinctive features prevent injuries and damage to surroundings. The balls combine all advantages that are needed in therapy, disability sports or training. Designs are adapted to individual sports. CE certified.

j

m

Taster Packs n Sport-Thieme® PU Foam Ball Taster Pack

PU Foam Balls Ill.

a b c d e f g h i j k l m

Product Code 71 107 1519 71 107 1522 71 107 1535 71 212 1853 71 107 1548 71 212 1866 71 107 1551 71 212 1808 71 212 1811 71 212 1824 71 107 1577 71 107 1564 71 191 9208-1

Characteristics: • low level bounce, •• medium level bounce, ••• high level bounce Product Description Tennis ball Tennis ball Recreational ball Recreational ball Mini handball Handball Volleyball Volleyball Basketball Basketball Football Football Football

Size ø mm 70 mm 90 mm 120 mm 150 mm 160 mm 180 mm 200 mm 200 mm 200 mm 200 mm 200 mm 200 mm 200 mm

Weight 30 g 40 g 80 g 135 g 160 g 200 g 305 g 290 g 290 g 300 g 295 g 295 g 300 g

Bounce •• ••• •• ••• •• •• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• •••

4 Non-slip surface

o Togu® Colibri Supersoft

p Togu® Supersoft Colibri

Colour Yellow Red Green Blue Red Orange Yellow Red/yellow/white Orange Rainbow Orange/black White/black Yellow/black

Price Each Each Each Each Each Each Each Each Each Each Each Each Each

The set consists of: 1 Tennis ball a 1 Tennis ball b 1 Playing ball c 1 Mini handball e 1 Volleyball g 1 Football l 71 107 1580 Set

Also take a look at: More foam ball sets on page 24-25

Colibri Supersoft Balls - Premium Range Super soft, super grippy, super safe. Extra fine foam material and a special surface treatment make the new Colibri Supersoft balls from Togu the perfect ball series for pre-schools, schools, rehabilitation centres and therapy purposes. The balls have a non-slip surface and are abrasion resistant. Their softness takes

q Togu® Colibri Supersoft

away fear of catching and can give tactile stimuli. Pain caused by ball contact is avoided. The balls are hard-wearing and durable. Thanks to the needle valve the balls can be adjusted to suit different needs e.g. to add bounce, make them softer, etc. Anti-static. All balls are red.

r Colibri Aero Ball

Universal ball for all occasions. Smooth surface without any structuring. Size 5, ø 21 cm, 200 g Size 3, ø 18 cm, 400 g Size 2, ø 16 cm, 300 g 300 g, ø 16 cm 71 107 2004 Each 71 107 2020 Each 71 107 2017 Each 71 107 2033 Each

Volleyball

22

Handball for Men

Handball for Women

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Elé and Soft Foam Balls Balls l

k

a

m

g h

n m Volley® Elé Football

b e

c

j

n Volley Elé Mini Football

f

d

Length 20 cm, circumference 40 cm, 112 g. 71 107 2714-1 Each

4 Volley®'s non-slip Elé 'elephant skin' for great ball control!

Original Volley® Elé Balls Ill.

a

Original Volley® Elé Balls

Volley Elé balls are coated with an ‘elephant skin’, a very hard-wearing, non-porous polyurethane coating. This non-toxic coating makes the foam ball washable, it can be disinfected and is very durable. A variety of foams are used in these balls to meet a wide range of demands. Suitable for indoors and outdoors.

b c d e f g h i j k l

Product Code 71 108 3503 71 108 3516 71 108 3529 71 108 3532 71 108 3617 71 108 3604 71 108 2311 71 108 2308 71 108 2409 71 108 3545 71 108 2207 71 109 7708 71 107 1506 71 107 1304 71 107 1607

American football - child‘s play with the Volley Elé football, as it is made for children‘s hands. It has excellent flight characteristics. The strong sealed PU coating means the Volley Elé football can be washed and disinfected, it is non-toxic and has a long lifespan. L: 26 cm, circumference 47 cm. 71 107 2701-1 Each

Characteristics: • low level bounce, •• medium level bounce, ••• high level bounce

Product Description Volley Softi Volley Softi Volley Softi Volley Softi Volley Super Volley Super Volley Playball Volley All-Round Volley mini handball Volley Fun Volley Special Volley volleyball Volley volleyball Volley football Volley medicine ball

Size ø mm 160 mm 160 mm 160 mm 160 mm 70 mm 90 mm 160 mm 180 mm 160 mm 200 mm 210 mm 210 mm 210 mm 210 mm 300 mm

Weight 65 g 65 g 65 g 65 g 16 g 32 g 115 g 145 g 150 g 185 g 235 g 220 g 315 g 255 g 350 g

Bounce • • • • ••• • •• •• ••• •• •• ••• ••• •• •

s

r

}

Colour Blue Yellow Green Red Red, blue, pink, yellow, green, orange assorted Red Blue White Pink White White, no ill. White Yellow Red

Price Each Each Each Each Each Each Each Each Each Each Each Each Each Each Each

w

v

q u

o

t

p Soft Foam Softballs

High level of bounce. Success and safety for your training. The special slow motion effect helps beginners with their learning process. Children feel safe with this soft ball straight away. That’s why teachers and coaches like to use the soft balls for dodge ball, football and particularly for sports therapy and disability sports. We recommend the volleyball, the gymnastics ball and the handball size for training. These balls have a very good bounce. ø 70 and 90 mm in tennis ball design.

4 Slow motion effect 4 Will not cause any injuries 4 Training balls for all types of sports Soft Foam Softballs Ill.

o p q r s t u v w

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

Product Code 71 109 8105 71 109 8118 71 109 7519 71 109 7506 71 109 7405 71 109 8206 71 109 8219 71 109 8222 71 109 7825

Product Description Tennis practise ball Tennis practise ball Playball Handball Volleyball Recreational ball Recreational ball Recreational ball Medicine ball

Characteristics: • low level bounce, •• medium level bounce, ••• high level bounce Size ø mm 70 mm 90 mm 150 mm 180 mm 210 mm 120 mm 150 mm 200 mm 300 mm

Weight 14 g 22 g 110 g 180 g 280 g 34 g 65 g 160 g 300 g

Bounce ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• • • • ••

Price Each Each Each Each Each Each Each Each Each

23


Sets

Save money with

Buy Now! a

4 Closed cell PU foam  o damage to the 4N surroundings

Sets

a Sport-Thieme® “School” PU Foam Ball Set

The set consists of: • 2 handballs, page 22 f • 2 volleyballs, page 22 g • 2 basketballs, page 22 i • 2 footballs, page 22 k 71 108 2904 Set

b Sport-Thieme® Soft Foam Ball Set

The set consists of: • 1 tennis practice ball, page 23 o • 1 tennis practice ball, page 23 p • 1 recreational ball, page 23 q • 1 handball, page 23 r • 1 volleyball, page 23 s • 1 recreational ball, page 23 t • 1 recreational ball, page 23 u • 1 recreational ball, page 23 v 71 108 2920 Set

b

c Softball Set

c

The set consists of: • 1 PU foam football, page 22 m • 1 Volley Softi, ø 160 mm, page 23 a • 1 Volley Super, ø 70 mm, page 23 b • 1 Volley Super, ø 90 mm, page 23 c • 1 Volley All-Round, ø 180 mm, page 23 e • 1 Volley mini handball, ø 160 mm, page 23 f • 1 Volley Special, ø 210 mm, page 23 h • 1 Volley football, ø 210 mm, page 23 k 71 191 5248 Set

Set

d Soft Foam Balls in a Golf Ball Design

With very little bounce this ball is ideal for throw and return ball games. No injuries or damage to surroundings. The players develop a feel for the ball and bat, whether they are beginner or advanced. The textured surface operates like a coating, high foam density. 71 107 1623 ø 95 mm, 175 g, yellowEach 71 107 1636 ø 73 mm, 73 g, blueEach 71 107 1649 ø 63 mm, 40 g, redEach

24

e Soft Foam Balls in Golf Ball Design

The set contains 5 balls of each size ø 95, 73, and 63 mm. 71 107 1652 Set

f PU Foam Sports Ball Set

In the design of various sports balls such as volleyballs, footballs, rugby balls and basketballs. Good bounce. 12 balls in

a net with a pull cord. There is no risk of injury or damage to objects. ø 10 cm, basketball ø 12 cm. 71 212 1837 Set

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Ballen

Sets

PU foam ball sets!

Buy Now!

4 Very good bounce and rebound characteristics 4 Ideal for therapy purposes

a

Sets

a Sport-Thieme®

“Maxi” PU Foam Ball Set

The set consists of: • 1 tennis ball, page 22 a • 1 tennis ball, page 22 b • 1 recreational ball, page 22 c • 1 recreational ball, page 22 d • 1 mini handball, page 22 e • 1 handball, page 22 f • 1 volleyball, page 22 g • 1 volleyball, page 22 h • 1 basketball, page 22 i • 1 basketball, page 22 j • 1 football, page 22 k • 1 football, page 22 l 71 108 2917 Set

b

New!

b

c

New!

New! Sport-Thieme®

“Volleyball” PU Foam Ball Set

The set consists of: • 3 volleyballs, page 22 g • 3 volleyballs, page 22 h 71 108 2933 Set

c

New! Sport-Thieme®

“Basketball” PU Foam Ball Set

The set consists of: • 3 basketballs, page 22 i • 3 basketballs, page 22 j 71 108 2946 Set

d

New! Sport-Thieme®

“Football” PU Foam Ball Set

The set consists of: • 3 footballs, page 22 k • 3 footballs, page 22 l 71 108 2959 Set

e

e d

New!

New! Sport-Thieme®

“Mix” PU Foam Ball Set

The set consists of: • 2 volleyballs, page 22 g • 2 basketballs, page 22 j • 2 footballs, page 22 l 71 108 2962 Set

New! Also take a look at: Foam balls on pages 22-23

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

25


Bala len

Save money with Original Volley® Elé Ball Sets! ts Volley Elé balls are coated with ‘elephant skin’, a very hard-wearing, non-porous polyurethane coating. This non-toxic surface makes the foam ball washable, it can be disinfected and is very durable. A variety of foams are used in these balls to meet a wide range of demands. Suitable for indoors and outdoors.

Se

Buy Now!

b

c

Sets a

Volley® All-Round Set

ø 180 mm, 130 g, good bounce. 8 balls. 71 108 2324 Set

b Volley® Softi Set

ø 160 mm, 65 g, balls bounce. 3 balls of each colour: blue, yellow, green, red. 71 108 2353 Set

d

c Volley® Special Volleyball Set

ø 210 mm, 235 g, good bounce, 5 balls. 71 108 2337 Set

d Volley® Mini Handball Set

ø 160 mm, 150 g, very good bounce, 6 balls. 71 108 2340 Set

Bell Balls for blind and visually impaired people e

e WV Bell Ball

f g

i

Special rubber ball for blind and visu- h ally impaired people. These balls are also fun for those with good vision: play with closed eyes, follow the ball with your ears, roll ball (a game with rules), differentiate between noises. Material: rubber. Gymnastics balls with bells 6’’ (ø 16 cm), 340 g, h Hedgehog Sound Ball for children. A small, easily gripped massage ball 71 109 8903 BlueEach with bells on the inside and holes to let the 71 109 8916 YellowEach sound out. The long pimples on the sur71 109 8929 RedEach face of the ball are used to stimulate tac tile awareness, in therapy and in games f WV Bell Ball with visually impaired as well as with peoGymnastics balls with bells, 7 1/2’’ ple with hearing damage. Orange, ø 10 (ø 19 cm), 420 g, for teens and adults. 71 109 8932 BlueEach cm, 180 g. 71 109 8945 RedEach 71 109 3748 Each 

g Bell Ball

Special foam, pleasant to hold firmly. With 20 sound holes, ø 15 cm, approx. 200 g. Material thickness 15 mm. Orange. 71 109 9111 Each

26

i WV Goal Ball

This ball has been specially developed for blind and visually impaired people. It is a team game. Rubber ball ø 25 cm, 1,250 g, blue, with bells and sound holes. 71 109 9108 Each

j Blindfold

Anyone who does not want to see, can hear and feel! A whole new way of “seeing” - for intensive work in perception, simple relaxation, feeling and learning. The sense of hearing is very important to the success of the game while at the same time all the senses are trained. Soft, padded eyepiece with nose padding and

Game ideas

Goalball: Try to throw a bell ball into the opponents’ goal. Played on the floor, on a rectangular pitch that is separated with a centre line.

adjustable rubber band. Will not slip down and lets no light through. Outer 100% cotton, middle PUR foam, inner 100% rayon. Washable up to 30 °C. 71 204 0006 For children: 18x8.5 cmEach 71 204 0019 For adults: 21x10 cmEach

Blind man’s bluff: Cover the eyes of the “blind man” who then has to try and catch other children in the group.

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Football, Rugby Balls a Wilson® “Duke

Game Ball” Football

Official NFL ball since 1941. It is called “The Duke” after the famous player “The Duke” Wellington Mara. It has been developed to the highest competition level. Exceptional hold and durability. It is hand made from real leather. Optimal grip for the best playing conditions. Size 9. 28 cm long, 397-425 g, official size. 71 107 2352 Each

Now Even Better

4 Comes in a storage bag 4 Velcro belts 4 Order the colour of your choice 4 High quality material

d

b Sport-Thieme® Flag Football

The non-contact form of American football. When the flags are pulled off, a clear noise can be heard making it easier for the referee and the spectators to know what is happening. Flag football is a great variation from the norm in school sports. It can be played to the rules of football. Instead of targeting the body, the opponent is tackled by pulling the flag. Can also be used in team sports for fitness and endurance training. 1 set consists of: • 5x 110 cm long belts • 10 flags of one colour • Instruction manual 50% polyester, 50% polypropylene. 71 186 9301 RedSet 71 186 9343 YellowSet

c Gilbert® “Dimension” Rugby Competition Ball

Excellent grip due to its special “Gilbert Grip” surface. The patented Truflight bladder ensures perfect flight characteristics. Blue/silver, size 5. 71 108 8449 Each

d Conti “American” Football

Size 5

Official size and weight. Competition ball with nylon lining and non-slip rubber surface.

Conti “American” Football

Size 6, 26 cm long, 320-340 g, children up to 15 years old. 71 186 1336 Each

Set

Conti “American” Football

e e Wilson® “NFL Tackified Composite” Football

Size 7, 27 cm long, 345-380 g, youth size. Made from premium composite leather for 71 186 1323 Each the best playing conditions. Patented ACL lacing system with non-slip surface. Size 9, Conti “American” Football Size 9, 28 cm long, 397-425g, official size. 28 cm long, 397-425 g, official size. 71 186 1310 Each 71 107 2323 Each

Size 4

ij

f Gilbert® “Zenon”

Rugby Training Ball

A high quality training ball, non-slip rubber surface. White/red/black. 71 108 8423 Size 4 (8-13 years)Each 71 108 8436 Size 5 (14 years +)Each

k

New! g Sport-Thieme® Flag Football Team Set

The set consists of: • 2 belt sets = 2 x 5 belts with 2 flags on each (50% polyester, 50% polypropylene) red and yellow b • 1 football, size 6 d • Instruction manual 71 186 9369 Set

Also take a look at: Team identification on page 136

i Volley® Elé Football

American football can be child‘s play with the Volley Elé football, as it is made for children‘s hands. It has excellent flight h New! Omnikin “Super” characteristics. The strong, sealed PU coaRugby Ball k Sport-Thieme® Competition ting means the Volley Elé football can be Rugby Ball This oversized rugby ball is ideal for indoor washed and disinfected, it is non-toxic and The best quality and workmanship, made and outdoor games. Due to its size and has a long lifespan. Length 26 cm, circumfrom completely weatherproof material. light weight it is also really easy for childference 47 cm, 230 g. Surface of extra strong PU material with ren to use. Ideal for a variety of active 71 107 2701 Each many layers of waterproofed polyester fibgames or flag football. Promotes speed, res for additional shape retention. Made teamwork and fair play. Made from 100% j Volley® Elé Mini Football up of four panels, size 5, 400-440 g, cirnylon with a latex bladder. 51x33 cm, Length 20 cm, circumference 40 cumference 57 cm, length 36 cm. 200 g. cm, 112 g. 71 108 8452 Each 71 107 2714 Each 71 108 8407 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

27


Balls Redondo®, Massage Balls

a

The “foldable” Redondo Ball! Inflatable with the enclosed plastic tube very soft, smooth and waterproof.

a Redondo® Ball

The “foldable” ball for many exercises. Its space saving size allows for easy transportation. Makes body toning and relaxing simple no matter where you are. Can also be used in water. Very soft and smooth, foam material. The ball is inflated using the enclosed plastic tube and sealed with a stopper. In a presentation box with exercise instructions. Will support up to 120 kg.

Exercises for: • Strengthening stomach muscles • Relaxing the spine b New! “Touch” Redondo® • Strengthening neck muscles Ball • Strengthening leg and bottom muscles The popular Redondo ball now available • Relaxation and deep relaxation with soft pimples! Its pimpled surface is ø 18 cm, 150 g, anthracite 71 176 0053 Each great for sensory stimulation and for additional types of exercises. Comes in a preø 22 cm, 150 g, blue sentation box. Resilient up to 110 kg. 71 176 0037 Each 71 242 8808 ø 18 cm, anthraciteEach 71 242 8811 ø 22 cm, blueEach ø 26 cm, 160 g, red 71 176 0040 Each 71 242 8824 ø 26 cm, ruby redEach

New!

c

b

New! Sport-Thieme® Spiky

Double Massage Ball

Double your sense of well-being with this double massage ball. Whether at home, in the office or when exercising, this plastic ball will relax your muscles and promote circulation. It is also an ideal tool in therapy to improve perception or for grip strengthening exercises. Length: 15 cm, 150 g, blue. 71 109 4190 Each

28

New!

d Hedgehog Ring

For exercising and massage. Made from soft, hygienic plastic. Easy to hold. For water exercises. Suitable for small children‘s hands and motor skills exercises. Inner ø 11 cm, outer ø 17 cm. 71 127 3205 BlueEach 71 127 3218 YellowEach 71 127 3221 RedEach 

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Ballen

Top Rated

sport-thieme.com

a d Sport-Thieme® Massage Ball c Soft Sport-Thieme® Soft Massage Ball

71 109 4103 71 109 4116 71 109 4129 71 109 4132

a Massage Ball, Large

Purple, ø 6 cmEach Mint, ø 7 cmEach Bright blue, ø 9 cmEach Pink, ø 10 cmEach

Now you can relax any time and anywhere: after a workout or in the office whenever you feel tension, take your plastic massage ball. For finger massage and grip exercises. 71 109 3735 Green, ø 6 cmEach 71 109 3706 Yellow, ø 7 cmEach 71 109 3719 Red, ø 9 cmEach 71 109 3722 Blue, ø 10 cmEach

b

Inflatable, with needle valve. Rounded pimples, made of Ruton, b Inflatable Massage Ball ø 23 cm, 420 g. Inflatable, bouncing balls with 71 109 4318 RedEach needle valve. You can therefore control the 71 109 4305 BlueEach size and firmness of the ball. Available in a range of colours. Balls are delivered deflated, ø 10 cm, approx. 50 g. Extra soft. Also take a look at: 71 109 4321 Each Hedgehog sound ball on page 26

f g

4 Set of 24 b  alls

f Togu® Senso® Walking Trainer Plus

Set e Great Value Massage Ball Set with Bag

The set consists of: • 12 soft massage balls, 3 of each: ø 6, 7, 9 and 10 cm • 12 firm massage balls, 3 of each: ø 6, 7, 9 and 10 cm • 1 storage bag made from 100% nylon. H: approx. 24 cm, ø 22 cm 71 109 4187 Set

Set Buy Now!

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

The small muli-tool. Simultaneous training for hands, underarm and upper arm muscles. This increases energy usage, which h Togu® Brasil® in turn leads to valuable fat burning. ErgoThe filling of weight and air gives nomic shape, soft, handy, easy to grip and you targeted feedback for your movements can be hygienically washed. 11x5 cm, each (shaking effect) 250 g, blue. • A deep muscle trainer for your health and 71 147 2615 Pair physique • Strengthening of connective tissue and ® ® preventative back training through minig Togu Senso Walking Trainer light mal movement amplitude The handy companion. Small, pleasant and • Joint friendly thanks to the low net weight easy to hold. Ensures increased blood flow • Handy and pleasant to handle because of to the hands. They are hygienic and washits size and shape as well as the pimpled able and can easily be taken anywhere. surface (sensorimotor function) Whether used outdoors or on the treadmill, Made from high quality Ruton with you can‘t be without the Walkers. Approx. pleasant ‘sensory’ pimples. Green/yellow, 7.5x4 cm, 17 g, red. 270 g each. 71 147 2602 Pair 71 147 2631 Pair

29


Balls Gymnastics Balls a

All-Rounder - one for all! Robust, non-slip balls in great colours for lots of fun when playing.

c

b

a Sport-Thieme® Multi Ball

Multi functional and extremely robust. Rubber cover over nylon lining, non-slip textured surface. Can be used as a training ball for volleyball, basketball, football, handball, gymnastics and in the water. Extremely good bounce, ø 21 cm, 400 g, in yellow, green, purple and red. With needle valve. 71 109 2309 YellowEach 71 109 2312 GreenEach 71 109 2325 PurpleEach 71 109 2338 RedEach

b Togu® Touchball made from

Universal, extremely strong ball, in a basketball design. Size and weight 5 1/2“ Completely new surface, with pleasant (circumference 44 cm), 160 g, especially rounded nodules. Suitable for disabled suitable for children. As a training ball for gymnastics, for people who have problems football, basketball, handball, gymnaswith catching, throwing and hitting the tics ball or as a recreational ball. Can also ball, as well as for use in the water. Feeling be used in water. Nylon lining with rubber the ball stimulates the senses. cover provide it with perfect grip. 71 176 0011 ø 10 cm, blueEach 71 109 2400 YellowEach 71 176 0082 ø 16 cm, blueEach 71 109 2413 GreenEach 71 176 0095 ø 16 cm, redEach 71 109 2426 RedEach

Ruton

Tip

There is no need to pump up these multi balls too much; just inflate them normally to get full bounce.

d WV Rubber Gymnastics Ball

WV Rubber Gymnastics Balls

The ball cover is manufactured to a special process and is non-porous, making storage for long periods of time possible. Non-slip balls: the level of grip can be improved even more by rubbing with 400 grade sandpaper. This product has WV certification and is made from rubber, with a patented vulcanised rubber valve. 6’’, ø 16 cm, 320 g 71 109 8600 BlueEach 71 109 8613 YellowEach 71 109 8626 GreenEach 71 109 8639 RedEach 71 109 8642 MulticolouredEach

Well established trusted product – skin friendly and shape retaining!

d

Top Rated

sport-thieme.com

Tip

7.5’’, ø 19 cm, 420 g 71 109 8655 BlueEach 71 109 8668 YellowEach 71 109 8671 GreenEach 71 109 8684 RedEach 71 109 8697 MulticolouredEach

WV Rubber Gymnastics Balls • Ideal for school and general sports • Good bounce characteristics • Basic elastomer natural rubber • Special rubber valve • Robust, therefore comes with 5 year durability guarantee • More than 40 years proven quality • Easy to manage • Shape retaining

30

c Sport-Thieme® Playground

Gymnastics balls

Gymnastics balls 6’’: ø 16 cm = 50 cm circumference, approx. 300-340 g Gymnastics balls 7 1/2’’: ø 19 cm = 59.5 cm circumference, approx. 420 g, competition size All gymnastics balls can also be used in water!

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


! r e n n i w l a A re

Ballen

Sport-Thiem Variety

!

Brilliant Performance

Everything you need for gymnastics from page 268

s balls for leisure, High gloss gymnastic ns training and competitio

a

® High Gloss “420 FIG Gymnastics Ball ball with

b Sport-Thie” me Competition

ics • Official competition gymnast FIG approval “300” Gym • Shape retaining, robust ristics  uge level of bounce •H • Very good bounce characte • Non-slip • Secure valve, good seal • Elastic • Can be used in water • Shape retaining, robust • Non-slip • Can be used in water • Meets highest demands seal good e, • Secure valv • ø 19 cm, 420 g Each • ø 16.5 cm, 300 g 71 109 3908 Blue Each Each  w 71 109 3807 Blue Yello 1 391 109 71 Each 71 109 3810 Yellow Each 71 109 3924 GreenEach 71 109 3823 Green Each 71 109 3937 PinkEach 71 109 3836 Pink Each 71 109 3940 RedEach 71 109 3849 Red

High Gloss

a Sport-Thieme nastics Ball ®

b 31

m 543 · www.sport-thieme.co ne: +49 5357 ·181Pho Telefoon 0297–807877 www.sport-thieme.nl/ballen

31


Balls Lightweight & Soft Balls

Great Value!

4 Ideally suited for group games 4 Light as a feather 4 Floats

Buy Now!

c Sport-Thieme® Floating Ball

Just a little push and the colourful, light ball is up in the air. It will captivate everyone no matter what age they are, as it is easy to manoeuvre. After about 15 minutes, the volume reduces slightly. This makes the game more exciting. Can be used outdoors or indoors and is suitable for every imaginable group game. Particularly strong stitching. ø approx. 120 cm. 100% nylon material. Blue, yellow, red. We recommend the pump on page 42 l for inflating. 71 129 4011 Each

4 With needle valve 4 Moves more slowly than standard balls thanks to slow motion effect

b Sport-Thieme® Original Slow-Mo Ball

4 With valve

a Togu® Slow-Mo Ball

The slow motion movement of the “slow-mo” ball makes it easier to handle. Made of Ruton, in blue and red, with valve. ø 35 cm, approx. 300 g. 71 109 5207 Each

Seamless, made from pure latex, with inflatable push-in valve and stopper. These very strong balls have the same flight characteristics as a balloon. Only inflate with ball pumps as saliva sticks the inflating tube together. Diameter: 20 cm, approx. 60 g  71 127 6406 Each

4 Can be inflated with a normal drinking straw 4 Seal with a stopper

d Gymnic® Over Ball

This ball for all occasions is inflated using a drinking straw and sealed with a stopper. After play time, simply deflate the ball and put it in your pocket. Made from a non-slip, soft material with great bounce, very light. No risk of injury, can also be used in water. ø 26 cm. 71 109 1609 Each

Diameter: 30 cm, approx. 90 g  71 127 6419 Each Diameter: 40 cm, approx. 120 g  71 127 6422 Each

Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Contains individual parts that may be swallowed. Danger of suffocation.

e Japanese Paper Balls

Set

Great fun for young and old. Give this ball a light push and it will float over to your neighbour. You can also push the balls lightly up into the air and balance the ball with your head, finger, foot, etc. Made from coloured Japanese paper with a hole for inflation. ø 17 cm. 71 127 6813  Pack of 10 Attention! To be used under the direct supervision of an adult.

8x 100x

f Sport-Thieme® Neoprene

+

Balloon Cover

Convert balloons into almost indestructible slow motion balls. Simply place the balloon into the ball cover, inflate and close off and the fun can begin. Can also be used for strengthening slow motion balls. Suitable for people with allergies. Washable at up to 30°. From 55 cm circumference, ø 18 cm 71 188 4803 Each From 75 cm circumference , ø 24 cm 71 188 4816 Each Attention! Children under 8 years of age may suffocate on uninflated or burst balloons. Adult supervision is necessary. Keep uninflated balloons out of the reach of children. Remove burst balloons immediately. Use a pump for inflating the balloons. Made from natural latex rubber, which can cause an allergic reaction.

32

g Ball Covers with Balloons

The set consists of: • 8 neoprene ball covers, approx. ø 18 cm f • 100 suitable balloons j 71 188 4832 Each Attention! Children under 8 years of age may suffocate on uninflated or burst balloons. Adult supervision is necessary. Keep uninflated balloons out of the reach of children. Remove burst balloons immediately. Use a pump for inflating the balloons. Made from natural latex rubber, which can cause an allergic reaction.

New! h

New! Sport-Thieme®

Jumbo Ball

This large inflatable ball fits into every bag. Ideal for ball games both indoors and outdoors. 100% nylon cover with an internal bladder and secured stopper. Also suitable for use in the water. ø 40 cm, 200 g. 71 129 4024 Each Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years.

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Sitting Balls, Therapy Balls Balls New!

b Giant Balloons 75 cm

a Giant Balloon with Cover

This giant slow motion ball is great fun for young and old. It just takes one push and this ball is in the air. It is so easy to play with that even “spoil sports” will want to join in. These balls are suitable for group games of all types. If you wish to use the balls on a regular basis it is recommended you order the stoppers at the same time. Washable cover (100% nylon). Comes with two balloons. 71 207 2311 Approx. ø 75 cmEach 71 207 2324 Approx. ø 150 cmEach

d Sport-Thieme®

Gymnastics Roll

Use to correct posture problems. These rolls are suitable for Bobath therapy, for automatic leg reactions, head and core body control. Popular in nurseries, preschools and primary schools used in combination with children‘s exercise mats. Firm foam core, therefore easy to handle. Hygienic, washable (100% polyester) canvas cover.

150 cm

Attention! Children under 8 years of age may suffocate on uninflated or burst balloons. Adult supervision is necessary. Keep uninflated balloons out of the reach of children. Remove burst balloons immediately. Use a pump for inflating the balloons. Made from natural latex rubber, which can cause an allergic reaction.

Indispensable in psychomotor training and over 50s fitness. Natural latex. Can also be used in balloon covers. 71 129 3106 ø 45 cm Pack of 20 71 129 3119 ø 70 cm Pack of 10 71 127 4035 ø 150 cmEach Attention! Children under 8 years of age may suffocate on uninflated or burst balloons. Adult supervision is necessary. Keep uninflated balloons out of the reach of children. Remove burst balloons immediately. Use a pump for inflating the balloons. Made from natural latex rubber, which can cause an allergic reaction.

c Balloon Seals

4 reusable seals for giant balloons. Approx. 8 cm long. 71 127 4455  Pack of 4

4 Firm foam 4 Washable cover

71 127 5807 L: 100 cm, ø 30 cmEach 71 127 5810 L: 100 cm, ø 40 cmEach 71 127 9506 L: 100 cm, ø 50 cmEach

g

e Gymnic® Physio Roll

A new play and therapy roll that can support up to 300 kg. Many different variations of play and exercising are possible: roll on it, jump on to it, balance on it, lie on it on your back or stomach, can be used for vaulting and rocking, etc. With stopper. ø 40 cm, red, 65 cm long 71 109 1700 Each ø 55 cm, yellow, 90 cm long 71 109 1713 Each ø 70 cm, blue, 115 cm long 71 109 1726 Each

g Gymnic® Space Hopper f “Sidewinder” Electrical Pump

A strong pump for 230 V mains supply. For inflating large volume products such as Pezzi balls and air mattresses. Includes an adapter for all standard inlets. For both inflating and deflating. A ø 65 cm Pezzi ball can be inflated in approx. 3.5 minutes. Size: ø 11 cm, height 12 cm, 0.8 kg. 71 109 9225-1 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

Children love this space hopper. Develops coordination of movement. The built-in handle makes it easier to use. For children over 3 years of age up to 145 cm in height: ø 45 cm; up to 155 cm tall: ø 55 cm; over 156 cm: ø 65 cm. Comes in a gift box. 71 108 6603 ø 45 cm, yellowEach 71 108 6616 ø 55 cm, redEach 71 108 6629 ø 65 cm, blueEach Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Contains individual parts that may be swallowed. Danger of suffocation.

h Togu® “Super-Rodeo” Space Hopper

Hop ball made of ruton. With two built-in handles, ø 60 cm, TÜV certified. Supports up to 75kg. 71 109 6200 Each Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Contains individual parts that may be swallowed. Danger of suffocation.

33


Balls Exercise Balls, Therapy Balls 4 Now in 2 sizes

New! ø 80 cm

Great Value!

Buy Now!

ø 60 cm

b Togu® Actisan Balance Ball

Ball a Gymnic The large gym ball, which can sup-

port up to 300 kg. A universal gym ball with stopper seal. Comes with exercise instructions. 71 109 5500 Yellow, ø 45 cm, 700 gEach 71 109 5513 Red, ø 55 cm, 1,000 gEach 71 109 5526 Blue, ø 65 cm, 1,400 gEach 71 109 5539 Blue, ø 95 cm, 2,500 gEach 71 109 5542 Red, ø 120 cm, 4,000 gEach

A new development in back therapy. The oval shaped Actisan balance ball is a great tool for training and therapy sessions. It is also designed to relax the back muscles. In contrast to normal balls, it won‘t roll away thanks to its large contact surface. Users enjoy more stability and safety when rocking away tension and strains. This makes the balance ball an ideal partner in therapy or workouts. The special grip on the floor is an enormous advantage for whole body training. There are many more uses in the area of functional spinal exercises as well as in coordination, balance and fitness training. Equipped with sensory pimples on one side and a smooth soft surface on the other and because of its high bounce characteristics, the balance ball is excellent

Set c

Choose the right ball size

The best way to determine the size of ball for you: Length from the tip of your middle finger to upper arm shoulder joint = recommended ø of ball. Length 46-55: ø 45 cm Length 56-65: ø 55 cm Length 66-80: ø 65 cm

h “Sidewinder” Electrical Pump

h

e

for physiotherapy and occupational therapy. Inflatable, with stopper, made from extremely hard wearing Ruton. The (sitting) height can be adjusted by varying the level of inflation. 71 109 1739 ø 80 cmEach 71 109 1742 ø 60 cmEach

A strong pump with 230 V mains supply. For inflating large volume products such as Pezzi balls and air mattresses. Includes an adapter for all standard air inlets. For both inflating and deflating. A Pezzi ball with a ø of 65 cm can be inflated in approx. 3.5 minutes. Size: ø 11 cm, height 12 cm, 0.8 kg. 71 109 9225-2 Each

d f

Buy Now!

f Fixing Brackets for

DBGM

Universal Shelving System

Fixing brackets for securing ladders, beams or other equipment. 10 cm wide. 71 131 6445-1  Set of 4

c Sport-Thieme® Wall Uprights d Crossbar for Universal Shelfor Universal Shelving System

Registered design. The shelving system consists of galvanised C sections that can be assembled according to your needs. The sections have round and slotted holes for individual adjustment and fixing to the wall. Suitable for the storage of beams, any kind of ladder, roller slides, balls, posts, balancing boards, etc. (supplied without these products). Wall uprights, C section 40x38x2 mm, length 200 cm, with 6 concrete 8 mm screws for fixing. 71 131 6403-1 Pair

34

ving System

Crossbar, C section 30x28x2 mm, length 300 cm, with hammer head bolts for fixing to the brackets, with stoppers at both ends. 71 131 6432-1 Pair

e Brackets for Universal Shelving System

Brackets, C section 30x28x2 mm, with hammer head bolts for fixing to wall uprights. 71 131 6416-1 Length 40 cmPair 71 131 6429-1 Length 68 cmPair

Set i Sport-Thieme® Single ® g Sport-Thieme Universal

Shelving System Set

Set includes: • 1 pair of wall uprights, 200 cm c • 1 pair of brackets, 40 cm e • 2 pairs of brackets, 68 cm e • 3 pairs of crossbars, 300 cm d 71 131 6487 Set

Ball Holder

For large exercise balls such as Pezzi, Gymnic, ABS-Powerballs and others. Suitable for balls with a diameter of 45-90 cm. Inner ring diameter 36 cm, distance from wall 65 cm. More holders can be attached vertically, horizontally or off-set for optimal use of space. Galvanised steel tubing with dowels and screws. Ball not included. 71 106 9932 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Gym balls in different sizes For all requirements - ideally suited as a sitting ball or for physiotherapy!

Top Rated

sport-thieme.com

a c 4 Ideal for exercising,

rehabilitation, fitness training and therapy

b

a Togu® ABS® Powerball®

Safe training guaranteed. A professional product from B.Co (Body Intelligence Concept). The ball meets the highest demands in safety and in use. Will not burst even if the ball gets damaged during use. Patented material. Silver. 71 107 4563 ø 45 cm, 900 gEach 71 107 4576 ø 55 cm, 900 gEach 71 107 4547 ø 65 cm, 1,250 gEach 71 107 4589 ø 75 cm, 1,600 gEach

c Original Pezzi Ball®

A universal exercise ball, which has many uses, from exercising to rehabilitation, fitness training and aerobics. It can be used for dancing, sports and therapy or ® indeed as a sitting ball. Made from resisb Original Physio Ball Cast from soft plastic with stopper, tant plastic. Can support up to 400 kg. individually packed in plastic bag. Comes in plastic bag. 71 109 4741 Blue, ø 85 cm, 1,900 gEach 71 109 4709 Yellow, ø 42 cm, 800 gEach 71 109 4754 Red, ø 95 cm, 2,000 gEach 71 109 4712 Orange, ø 53 cm, 1,100 gEach 71 109 4767 Orange, ø 120 cm, 4,900 g 71 109 4725 Green, ø 65 cm, 1,400 gEach Each 71 109 4738 Red, ø 75 cm, 1,700 gEach

Don’t forget to order: • Compressors, page 42 • Hand pumps, page 43

e Stacking

h

Aid

d

Mobile Stands for Exercise Balls

For large exercise balls up to ø 75 cm, such as ABS, Pezzi or Gymnic balls. This stacking aid is not fixed and therefore can be rearranged at any time to suit your needs. No permanent fittings are necessary in the room and it is simple to use. As the individual rings can be dismantled to lie flat, the ball stacking aid can be stored away to save space. High quality, transparent plastic that is resistant to the cold and heat. One stacking aid consists of 3 rings. Balls are not included. Ring diameters approx. 41 cm and 25 cm, height approx. 16 cm. 71 106 9916 Set

For storage and transport. Suitable for holding 9 exercise balls from 42-75 cm. ø 100 f Stopper cm, H: 192 cm. Holding rings can be indiviRemover dually adjusted. Balls not included. Facilitates the deflation 71 106 9929 Each of large balls with stoppers. Insert lever under the stopper and simply lift it out. Suitable Also take a look at: for all stopper sizes. Ball storage trolleys, page 143 71 150 7007 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

g g Sport-Thieme® Wall Storage System

For large exercise balls with ø of 45 to 100 cm, for 3 to 5 balls. Horizontal design, length 240 cm, depth 75 cm, comes with fixtures and fittings. Balls not included. Galvanised. 71 106 9903 Each

h Net for Large Exercise Balls

Ball carrier and storage net for exercise balls, such as Pezzi or Gymnic balls, up to ø 120 cm. Nylon material with 2 pull cords. Ball not included. 71 109 7317 Each

i

i Ball Base

Made of high quality recyclable polyethylene. An extremely robust synthetic material with a high carrying capacity, easy to clean. Even with the base the ball will still be very flexible and you will feel safer on it. Suitable for all big exercise balls. The ball won‘t roll away when you stand up. Price does not include ball. 71 109 7304 Each

35


Balls Fun and Therapy Balls 4 Non-slip rounded nodules

4 Will support up to 300 kg

b 4 Lightweight gym

and exercise balls

a

Togu® Sunrise Rainbow Ball

Especially good for children, these balls are easy to catch, hold and throw. They can be individually inflated and thanks to their completely new pimpled surface they are pleasant to touch and non-slip. Also suitable for workouts, relaxation, improving circulation and for use in water. 71 109 4334 ø 18 cm, 180 gEach 71 109 4347 ø 23 cm, 220 gEach

Sport-Thieme® Neon Rainbow Balls

A new, amazing feast of colour. The intensive, trendy colours blend into each other. Matt, smooth surface. The “lightweight” exercise balls are suitable for all exercises and games. With needle valve. Can also be used in water. 71 109 1205 ø 18 cm, 90 gEach 71 109 1218 ø 23 cm, 110 gEach 71 109 1221 ø 27 cm, 130 gEach

c Gymnic® Mega Ball 180

• Rock and swing on it • Half inflated it can be used as a jumping cushion • Supports up to 300 kg • ø 180 cm, 9 kg, red 71 135 8924 Each

e Togu® Globe

anti-burst system changes the tearing characteristics of the ball. So much so, that if there is any damage to the ball on the outside, the air only seeps slowly out of the damaged part and therefore the ball cannot burst. Supports up to 80 kg. 71 135 8911-1 ø 100 cm, 3 kgEach 71 135 8908-1 ø 200 cm, 12 kgEach

Offers a wealth of different uses both for groups and individuals. Can be used outdoors and indoors. • Lift it up together and balance it • Roll over it

4 No risk of injury 4 Also suitable for use in water

the fun as first you throw, then race after the disc to catch it. Made from sealed PE d foam, ø 21 cm, 108 g. 71 132 5515-1 BlueEach A motley crew of soft discs cuts through the 71 132 5528-1 YellowEach air but doesn‘t break a single thing. Your 71 132 5531-1 GreenEach windows, cars and vases remain intact 71 132 5544-1 RedEach after being hit by the disc. If someone is Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Construck by one it will not hurt at all. Strong tains individual parts that may be swallowed. Danger wind will provide great flight. It is double of suffocation.

Sport-Thieme® “Soft” Throwing Disc

This ball gets people interested just by its appearance and is very attractive for both young and old to play with. You can lift the globe up together, roll it, bounce it, swing and rock on it. Possibilities are endless! The Crylon material makes this ball impossible to burst. This is because the

Football

g Kogelan “Yellow Line” Soft Balls

Kogelan soft balls have a super soft surface. Their good bounce makes these balls great for children to use in their chosen type of sport without fear. Solid colours and very durable. Ideal for use in the playground. Their size and weight correspond with official competition regulations. With needle valve.

g Handball

Kogelan “Yellow Line” Football

71 203 3411 Size 4Each 71 203 3408 Size 5Each

f

Volley® “Soft Saucer” Throwing Disc

With very good flight characteristics. No risk of injury as it is very soft. Printed one

36

Kogelan “Yellow Line” Handball

colour, colours depend on stocks. Red, blue, green, yellow, ø 25 cm, 25 g. 71 132 5401-1 Each Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Contains individual parts that may be swallowed. Danger of suffocation.

Size 1 71 203 3440 Each Volleyball

Kogelan “Yellow Line” Volleyball

71 203 3453 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Therapy and Playing Balls Balls

4 Soft surfaces 4 Different fillings 4 For squeezing and playing fun

Have fun with the “affectionate” squeeze balls

b Set of 12

a Slush Balls

Slushy without the mess but with at least the same fun. For adults these balls may be hideous but children love them! Each of the 3 balls is filled with a different filling. One is soft and filled with sand, the second is bumpy and filled with plastic beans and the third is knobbly and con-

tains small beads. In addition, every ball has a hidden ‘worm’ inside that needs to be found. These slush balls are for kneading and are great perception and hand trainers. ø 7 to 12 cm. 71 216 5400  Set of 3 Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Contains individual parts that may be swallowed. Danger of suffocation.

b Knead Ball Set

Funny little chaps for kneading, grip exercises and for relaxation. Set of 12 with 4 of each colour (red, yellow and blue). The shell is made from balloon rubber with maize filling. All materials used are non-toxic. Approx. 5x7 cm. Suitable for all age groups over 3 years of age however children up to 8 years of age should only use the ball under supervision. 71 189 1108  Set of 12 Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Contains individual parts that may be swallowed. Danger of suffocation.

c

Set of 24

c Mini Kneading Balls

ø approx. 4.5 cm. 71 189 1111 

Set of 24

Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Contains individual parts that may be swallowed. Danger of suffocation.

e Aroma Balls

These balls with their amusing colourful fruit faces will catch your eye and your nose! Each ball has a different scent e.g. strawberry, apple, lemon or orange. ø 25 cm. 71 176 0301  Set of 6

6 Squeezy little animals

d Squeezy Little Animals

Colourful little rubber animals with bags of character. The soft surface promotes tactile stimulation through the pleasant contact with the skin. Each animal will react to the slightest touch with funny squeaks. Set of 6 animals e.g. caterpillars, hedgehogs and porcupines. Assortment and colours dependent upon stocks. 71 174 1009  Set of 6

Attention! Contains fragrances that may cause allergies.

4 Fruity scents!

Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Contains individual parts that may be swallowed. Danger of suffocation.

Also take a look at: Massage balls, page 29

4 Filled with hundreds of small plastic pearls

f Squeeze Ball

Pure kneading fun. The ingenious allrounder for games, sport and therapy. These Squeeze Balls are perfect for activating fine motor skills and for supporting laterality. The ball can also be used for stimulation of surface perception and deep sensitivity. The balls have an elastic rubber “skin” and are filled with hundreds of small plastic pearls. Comes in assorted colours, ø approx. 7 cm. 71 176 1649 Each Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Contains individual parts that may be swallowed. Danger of suffocation.

g

Knautsch Ball

The ball that will never run out of air! Its super soft inner foam means that it does not bounce and it won‘t roll away too far. Washable with a synthetic leather cover. This ball is particularly suitable for fitness for older people and small children. The strong colours mean that the ball can be seen wherever you are playing. ø 16 cm. 71 186 8047 ø 16 cmEach Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years.

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

i Motor Skills Balls

Games of throwing, rolling, gripping and sensing are all a new experience with these pleasantly flocked balls made from With fascinating tactile effects that natural rubber. Thanks to their new shape, make you want more! Strong balls - grab, the balls bounce away in unpredictable squeeze and hold them. Filled with gel with an extremely resistant, flexible plastic directions or wobble around until they suddenly lie still. Also suitable for groups and coating. Six balls in different colours. Diareaction games. ø approx. 10 cm. meter: 9 cm. Set of 3 71 216 4902  Set of 6 71 214 3200 

h Squash Balls

Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Contains individual parts that may be swallowed. Danger of suffocation.

Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Contains individual parts that may be swallowed. Danger of suffocation.

37


Balls Therapy and Playing Balls ø 7 cm

New! 4 Makes  funny sounds

New!

ø 9 cm

4 Stimulates hearing and sense of touch

New! Ball b Giggle This ball is sure to have you laughing! An interac-

c Baby Balls

tive toy and fun item for use indoors and outdoors. It potters here and there producing funny noises in the process. A game with this soft ball will develop general motor skills. Suitable for all age groups, ø approx. 16 cm. Assorted colours. 71 171 3204 Each

The set contains four different colourful balls for small children to use. There is a funny squeak produced when you squeeze them. These balls will develop a sense of touch and hearing. Ball sizes from ø 9.5 to 11.5 cm. 71 183 4707  Set of 4

Attention! To be used under the direct supervision of an adult.

Attention! To be used under the direct supervision of an adult.

d

ø 11 cm

e a

New! Buschwusch Balls

Adorable, fun koosh balls. Thanks to their bright multi-colour design, the Buschwusch balls can easily be seen and are easy to catch. They are irresistible, soft and versatile. You will not want to let go of your Buschwusch ball. Particularly suited for beginners practising their throwing, catching, carrying, juggling and keepy uppy skills. Fine, multi-coloured silicone threads. Designs will vary, depending on stock. Buschwusch ball, ø 9 cm 71 251 5915 Each Buschwusch mini ball, ø 7 cm 71 251 5928 Each Buschwusch maxi ball, ø 11 cm 71 251 5902 Each Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Contains individual parts that may be swallowed. Danger of suffocation.

38

d Large Fun Ball

This ball bounces more slowly and sideways and thanks to its size and weight it is easier to catch than the standard, smaller fun ball. This makes it very good for all age groups. Solid rubber, ø 10 cm. Assorted colours. 71 132 3607 Each Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. To be used under the direct supervision of an adult.

e Fun Ball / Reaction Ball

The unique 6 sided design develops hand-eye coordination because of the unpredictable bounce. Whether on your own or in a group, on the ground or against a wall, your game will be fast and exciting. The fun ball is made from hard-wearing natural rubber, has a long lifespan and is simple to clean. ø 7 cm. 71 132 3304 Each Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. To be used under the direct supervision of an adult.

f Spiky Ball

A ball with rubber threads that is unique and irresistible. It calms the senses and at the same time increases the level of enjoyment because of its unusual throwing and catching characteristics. It is easy to catch and the special feeling you get from letting it slide through your hands, makes this ball suitable for many purposes. It can be used in pre-schools, schools, retirement homes, therapy and rehabilitation centres. Assorted colours, ø approx. 8.3 cm. 71 180 9901 Each Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. To be used under the direct supervision of an adult.

Don’t forget to order: • Balls for visually impaired people, page 26

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Game and Fun Balls Balls

4 Record throw: over 90 m! 4 Great throwing accuracy 4 Creates howling noises in flight

c a Phlat Ball V2

The ultimate mixture of Frisbee and ball. The Phlat ball begins its flight as a disc and during the flight suddenly changes into a ball. Simply press the ball together either on the top or bottom and off you go. The trick is the time delay: no one knows when exactly the disc will change into a ball. This makes Phlat Ball really exciting and great fun. As well as being used for many throwing and catching games, the ball can also be used as a “reaction implement”, simply press back into a disc and lay it on a smooth floor. After a short while, the disc will spring up and can be caught as a ball… or maybe not! Ball ø approx. 16 cm, disc approx. 23 cm. Includes instructions. 71 180 8908 Each

New! d 4 Ideal for the garden, park or beach

New!

Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Contains individual parts that may be swallowed. Danger of suffocation.

c Nerf Vortex Mega Howler

Record throw: over 90 m! The steering plumes allow it to turn in a perfect spiral. The special notches mean a strong grip with super fast spin and thanks to the aerodynamic design, it can be thrown with great accuracy. You won‘t miss out on fun either as the howling noises create a mega sound. From 5 years, approx. 32 cm long, circumference approx. 28 cm. Weight approx. 130 g. 71 133 4803 Each

4 Ball changes its appearance in flight

Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Contains individual parts that may be swallowed. Danger of suffocation.

d

New! Waboba Flyer

This oversized shuttlecock is a breeze to use and guarantees fun for everyone. Whether there are just two of you or a group, whether it is used on land or in the water, b Colour Changing Ball the aim of the game is to keep the flyer in the air. This is This ball changes its appearance in flight! As it where the physical side comes into it. Either with your flies, the “inners” unfold and the colour changes. When hands, feet, knee or head - the flyer must not touch the it is caught it reverts to its original look. A mini masterground. This versatile invention can also be played using piece worthy of the inventor‘s guild! Selected colours. ø rackets. Height 20 cm, 35 g. 10-12 cm. 71 171 8007 Each 71 134 0613-1 Each

e

New! Success Ball

The absolute best tactile ball that you will ever hold in your hands: easily visible, nice and easy to catch. Observe your children as they enjoy feeling and learning with the ball. Made from EVA plastic granules with a cover made from LYCRA® and mesh. Very soft, floats in water. Set of 6 balls. 71 183 8709 ø 10 cm Set of 6 71 183 8712 ø 15 cm Set of 6 71 183 8725 ø 22 cm Set of 6 Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Contains individual parts that may be swallowed. Danger of suffocation.

Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Contains individual parts that may be swallowed. Danger of suffocation.

A real winner!

Top Rated

m

sport-thieme.co

pies f Loo fun on both dry land and Throwing, catching, having

able for traditional throwing in the water! Particularly suit r. fun or exercising in the wate re leisu es, gam hing catc and the soft 100% polyester r wate h muc how ter mat No t. Their special shape fabric is soaked in, it will floa as well as being a univerdle han to easy ies Loop makes groups. ø approx. 25 cm. age all for able suit uct sal prod urs. colo Assorted Each 71 180 8807  . r the direct supervision of an

Attention! To be used unde

Telefoon+49 Phone: 0297–807877 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.nl/ballen · www.sport-thieme.com

adult

39


Balls Fun Ball Sets Set

Set of 48

Buy Now!

Set

Set of 24

Set

Buy Now!

New! Set of 24

Buy Now!

a Comet Band with Ball

Great fun both indoors and outdoors. Magically create the most fantastic figures in luminous colours by moving the band in circles. As it is so easy to use, it will enchant both young and old. Very good for use in groups at festivals and celebrations. Total length of the comet band: approx. 360 cm. Weight: approx. 50 g. 71 185 4901  Set of 24

b Kick Balls

Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Contains individual parts that may be swallowed. Danger of suffocation. Long cord. Danger of strangulation.

Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Contains individual parts that may be swallowed. Danger of suffocation.

Set

Greetings from Jamaica! 24 colourful rasta style kick balls. Great fun and gets users moving. For even more c Marble Bouncies Bouncing fun in a value box of 48 rubber balls. action in the hall, school yard or when playing in the park. Superb bounce characteristics and funky colours. Great for Surface material: 100% cotton. With granulate filling. ø 5 games indoors and outdoors. ø 3.2 cm. cm. Weight: approx. 50 g. Set of 48 71 189 9506  Set of 24 71 182 7415 

Set

Set of 48

New!

Buy Now!

e

Set

Set 6er of Set 6

11,

New! Set of 6 Scarf-Balls

Set of 6

Buy Now!

95 Buy Now!

nur

A clever combination made from cloth (100% polyamide) and cotton balls! The colourful scarf balls fly very slowly through the air. Their flight path can be followed. Small, colourful and spiky yet pleasant in the hand. Ideal for tactile and basal stimulation and finger exercises. A suitable alternative for a variety of ball return games. ø approx. 5 cm; length approx. 30 cm. 12 g. These balls can also be used in water, ø 3 cm. 71 188 1309  Set of 48 71 183 8406  Set of 6

f Soft Play Balls

Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Contains individual parts that may be swallowed. Danger of suffocation.

Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Only for domestic use.

d Mini Hedgehog Balls

Set

Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Contains individual parts that may be swallowed. Danger of suffocation.

Set

Set of 24

g Solid Rubber Ball with Tails

The neon colours make this fun ball really attractive. These solid rubber balls with the comet tail are great for use both outdoors and indoors. When thrown, the flapping tail will prove very popular with players. Great fun! ø 5 cm, length 40 cm. Weight approx. 45 g. Assorted colours. 71 191 0009  Set of 24 Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Contains individual parts that may be swallowed. Danger of suffocation. Long cord. Danger of strangulation.

Super soft playing and fun balls. Suitable for all types of throwing and catching games. Great value set of 6. ø of each ball 15 cm, red and blue. Weight: approx. 120 g. Suitable for children over 3 years of age. 71 179 6201  Set of 6

Set of 12

Set

Buy Now!

Buy Now!

40

Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Contains individual parts that may be swallowed. Danger of suffocation.

h Super Bounce Balls in Sports Ball Designs

Fun balls in bold fluorescent colours. With great bounce characteristics. Suitable for all throwing and catching games outdoors and indoors. Both young and old jugglers will want to have fun with these balls in various sports ball designs. ø 5.5 cm. Weight: approx. 50g. 71 183 5902  Set of 12 Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. To be used under the direct supervision of an adult.

Set of 24

Buy Now! i Bouncy Eggs

24 crazy rubber egg shaped balls. They bounce just as well and as high as their round cousins, they are however more unpredictable! This means you have to be attentive and need lightening quick reactions. Easy to spot thanks to their colourful design. Great fun is guaranteed for everyone, no matter what age. Approx. 4 cm high and 3 cm wide. 71 188 6304  Set of 24 Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Contains individual parts that may be swallowed. Danger of suffocation.

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Fun Balls Balls 4 Safe, soft vinyl material 4 Also suitable for use in water 4 Available  in different levels of firmness 4 With valve

c Catch Ball 4 Ball with shifted centre of gravity 4 Does not roll in a straight line

a Unball

When playing with the Unball, one thing is guaranteed, it will bounce in a direction you did not predict. Thanks to the shifted centre of gravity, it will never roll straight. This leads to fun surprises that develop skills and reactions in a playful way. Foam with ‘elephant skin’. ø 21 cm, approx. 250 g. 71 199 3514 Each

b Sensation Ball

Transparent ball with two small colourful plastic balls inside. They act as eccentric weights making rolling and bouncing of the ball irregular and unpredictable. Good tool to help develop concentration and to encourage exercising. Also suitable for use in water. ø 17.8 cm. 90 g. 71 183 6309 Each Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Contains individual parts that may be swallowed. Danger of suffocation.

New!

A fun way to develop focus, handeye coordination, memory, behaviour in a group, and maths skills, all at the same time. The ball is inflatable, measures approx. 30 cm end to end. Hand-eye coordination and a little luck are required. Suitable for all games. Feel free to come up with your own ideas. With instructions. 71 132 7306-1 Each

Great Value!

Buy Now!

Attention! To be used under the direct supervision of an adult.

d Feather Football

Trend sport! Football but completely different. There are many ways of playing a game with the feather football. It can be played with the foot (including the sole), knee, hip, head, shoulder but not with the hands. The objective is to keep it in the air as long as possible. It is also good for endurance training, warm-ups, and just to keep fit. 1-5 players, outside or inside, even in the smallest spaces. Weight 60 g. 71 133 0407 Each

4 Official world championship ball

h

i

4 Granules provide the braking effect

j

i e

New! Brake Balls

The ball with brakes! The secret is hidden inside the ball - granules: the brake ball doesn‘t just roll away. Whether swung, kicked or thrown, the brake ball only

moves a few meters away. Easy to grip, soft surface. Ideal for games in small areas but h Neoprene Football also great for learning how to kick, throw Football bladder with a neoprene and catch. ø approx. 17 cm. cover. Very soft and pleasant to play with. 71 219 8604  Set of 6 No risk of injury, will not cause a burning sensation. Ideal for beginners or for use as a games ball. Circumference approx. 69 cm, corresponds with size 5, approx. 275 g, with needle valve. Blue/black. 71 106 9626 Each

New!

Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Only for domestic use.

i Neoprene Volleyball

This ball is very accurate and will not cause any burning sensations. Also suitable for use as a beach volleyball. Size 5, 285 g, with needle valve. Yellow/red. 71 106 9639 Each

k

New! The Classic Eggball

The new trend. Ideal for reaction and coordination training in football, basketA kickball with granulated filling and ball or volleyball. With its combination of artificial leather cover, 14 panels. Can be egg and football shape, this innovative and played with feet, head, shoulders, hips, educational sports ball brings fun to traiAttention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Only and thighs but not with the hands. Suitaning. The special shape creates exceptiof Rubber Balls for domestic use. Good level of bounce. Can be used for ble for individuals or for groups, can be nal flight and bounce characteristics. Hardall types of activities right up to rhythmic used inside and outside; in competitions j Neoprene Mini Volleyballs wearing, soft cover with a robust 2-ply Attractive Flame Design. Size 2, ø 15 gymnastics. Assortment of colours in blue, or for workouts and warm ups. ø approx. 4 fabric. Suitable for indoor and outdoor use. cm, 120 g. yellow, green, red, ø 65 mm, 60g. cm and 45 g. 22x22x27 cm, 255 g, white/blue. 71 108 0807  Set of 12 71 135 0005  Set of 5 71 106 9642 Each 71 107 8741-2 Each

g Foot Bags (Kickball)

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

41


Balls Compressors, Blowers Great Value!

Air Pumps

Buy Now!

4 Oil Free

a 4 Oil Free 4 Maintenance free b 4 Automatic shut off 4 Also for car and bike tyres

a Sport-Thieme®

Ball Compressor

Electric compressor 230 V, can be used anywhere at any time, with air pressure gauge, includes ball adaptors. Filling time for 1 football approx. 30 seconds. Max. pressure 5.5 bar. LxWxH: 20x15x13 cm, 1.75 kg. 71 109 9209 Each

110” Ball Compressor c “MK Oil free single cylinder compres-

d

4 Oil free “MK40” Ball Compressor

A strong membrane-compressor with low RPM (approx. 1700), cast aluminium housing with carrying handle. Capasor. Plastic housing with carrying handle. city approx. 70 litres/min., maximum presCapacity approx. 200 litres/minute, maxisure output: approx. 3.5 bar. Power supply mum pressure output approx. 8 bar. Pres0.25 kW, 230 V/50 Hz. Fully maintenance sure controlled by a control dial. Runs on free and TÜV approved. Comes with a 1.2 1.1 KW, 230 V. Comes with a 1.2 metre air metre air hose, quick release coupling and hose with quick release coupling and ball adaptor. Filling time for a football: approx. two ball valves. Filling time for a football: 9 seconds, 32x17.5x28 cm. Weight: approx. approx. 25 seconds. Weight: approx. 6 kg, approx. 22x14x23 cm. 12.5 kg. TÜV approved. 71 110 0206 Each 71 107 3111 Each

Adaptors b Replacement For ball compressors. Complete

i Airman® “OWL 222”

The multi-functional cordless electrical air pump. It takes approx. 45 seconds to pump up a football. For inflating bicycle and motorbike tyres, wheelchairs, air mattresses, balls and other air-filled items. Air pressure is 10 bar. Rechargeable battery-operated pump with charger, can therefore be used anywhere. 71 107 0109 Set

j Needle Valves

For Airman “OWL 222” electric pump. Set of 12 in a poly bag. 71 109 9919  Price for 12

set consisting of 2 plastic adaptors, 1 needle valve and 1 air release adaptor. 71 110 0714 Set

4 10 year guarantee on pressure tank 4 For continuous use

g “Vigon 240”

4 Oil Free

Ball Compressor

A strong piston compressor with an oil mixture for a longer lifespan. • Motor: 230/1100 W • RPM: 2,850 revolutions/min • Suction capacity: 120 litres/min • Filling capacity: 85 litres/min • Noise level: 80 dB(A) • Max. pressure: 8 bar • Air cylinder: 12 litre • Weight: 18 kg • Size (LxWxH): 51x24x48 cm

With pressure tank. A versatile compressor that needs little maintenance, suitable for more than just hobby use. The piston compressor with oil lubrication guarantees longevity. With pressure gauge, safety valve and regulator, inflation pistol, different ball adaptors, tyre connector and spiral hose. Technical data: suction capacity approx. 240 litres/min, output 160 litres/min, tank 24 litres, weight approx. 26 kg. Operating pressure over 8 bar. Dimensions (LxWxH): 61x60x30 cm. Mains operated on 220/240 V, 1,500 W. Mobile design. 71 110 1401 Each

Standard features: • Pressure gauge for cylinder pressure • Regulator with gauge • Quality pressure switch • Rubber coated handle • Rubber feet for stability • Hose for filling, with pistol • TÜV approval not required 71 107 3124 Each

With quick release coupling for ball compressors f + g, filling hose with pistol for attaching ball adaptors and needle valves via air release adaptor. Measures from 0-12 bar. 71 110 1414 Each

f “Vigon 120”

Ball Compressor

Top Rated

sport-thieme.com

Store needle valves and plastic adaptors practically and safely

e “Volcano” Ball Compressor

A high performance compressor (230 V) that is ready for immediate use. 156 Watt output at 14 bar pressure, 21.5 litres air/min, oil-free, with pressure gauge, includes needle valve and two plastic adaptors. Runs very quietly. Inflating a football takes approx. 15 seconds, a Pezzi ball with ø of 65 cm about 3.5 to 4 min. Also ideal for wheelchair tyres. LxWxH: 30x17x23 cm, 2.9 kg. 71 109 9212 Each

42

a Ball Compressor 5.5 60 yes 30 1.75 95 71 109 9209 Each

e Volcano 14 21.5 yes 15 2.9 156 71 109 9212 Each

f Vigon 120 8 85 no 5 18 1800 71 107 3124 Each

Electrical Pump

A strong pump with 230 V mains supply. For inflating large volume products such as Pezzi balls and air mattresses. Includes adaptor for all standard air inlets. For both inflating and deflating. Pezzi balls with a ø of 65 cm can be inflated in approx. 3.5 minutes. ø 11 cm, height 12 cm, 0.8 kg. 71 109 9225 Each

h Air Pressure Gauge

Comparison Chart Compressors

i Airman Model Pressure (bar): 10 Capacity (litres/min): 10 Maintenance free yes Filling time for a football (sec): 45 Weight (kg): 1.6 Motor output (Watt): 14 Product code 71 107 0109 Price Each

k “Side Winder”

d MK 40 3.5 70 yes 25 12.5 1100 71 107 3111 Each

g Vigon 240 8 240 no 5 26 1500 71 110 1401 Each

c MK 110 8 200 yes 9 12.5 1100 71 110 0206 Each

New! l

New! Air Blower

For inflating and deflating large balls such as the Pushball, the Globe, ball mountains etc. To deflate, the support on the side of the blower must be locked. 10 minutes required to inflate a globe of ø 2 m. Capacity: 2.3 m³/min at 335 Watt, 230 V. 71 242 0208 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Ball Pumps, Accessories, Vests Balls Set

Now Even Better

Buy Now!

a b

Great Value!

c a Sport-Thieme® Ball Pump with Flexible Hose and Needle Valve

For basketballs, volleyballs, handballs, footballs, as well as other balls with needle valves. Tube dimensions 28x270 mm, nickel-plated. 71 109 9863 Each

b Sport-Thieme® Ball Pump with Needle Valve

Ball Valves

Standard Valve (close up)

For basketballs, volleyballs, handballs, footballs and any other balls with needle valves. Tube dimensions 28x270 mm, nickel-plated. 71 109 9818 Each

d Sport-Thieme® Original Ball Pump Set

Patent Valve (close up)

e

c Sport-Thieme Ball Pump

g

with Adaptor

Accessories

l Adaptors

For all balls with patent valves or used with a compressor for large volume balls with a stopper seal. In a plastic bag. 71 110 0701  Price for 12

Ensures that you always have the pump with the right valve. And the replacement adaptors are easy to find, as they are neatly arranged in a strong woo-

den box. The set consists of: • 2 ball pumps, nickel plated, 28x270 mm b + c • 3 needle valves n • 3 adaptors l • 1 flexible hose for protecting the needle valves m • 1 storage box 71 110 0408 Set

h

®

For patent valve (footballs etc. see illustration), tube dimensions: 28x270 mm, nickel-plated. 71 109 9805 Each

4 With a flexible hose

j

e Quick Mini Pump

The quick pocket sized ball pump. This newly developed ball pump both inflates and deflates. Easier and quicker than conventional pumps. Length 21 cm. 71 107 0200 Each

f Needle

Valves for Quick Mini Pump

h Ball Pump

For easy inflation, pump with your foot and hold the ball with both hands. Price for 12 Double cylinder with pressure gauge, 0-7 bar, 420 cm³ output per stroke, cylinder g Hand Pump dimensions 54.5x125 mm. For inflating and deflating particularly m Flexible Hoseb c 71 109 9401 Each For ball pumps and . To prolarge balls and objects such as push balls, tect the needle valve, will neither bend nor inflatable rafts, pezzi balls etc. Output per i Replacement Hose break them. stroke 2x3,000 cm³. For foot pump. 71 109 9850 Each 71 110 0105 Each 71 109 9704 Each

n Needle Valves

12 per plastic bag. 71 109 9919-1 

j Ball Pump with Pressure

Tank and Pressure Gauge

For various types of balls, flexible air hose, 0-7 bar, output per stroke approx. 400 cm³, dimensions of tube 32x500 mm. 71 109 9300 Each

k Replacement Hose

For ball pumps with pressure tanks. 71 109 9502 Each

Team Identification

For balls with needle valves such as basketballs, footballs or volleyballs. Comes in a poly bag. 71 109 9906  Price for 12

r Identification Vests

o Needle Valve

Fits well. Available in five different colours for men, youth and “bambini”. Made from 100% polyamide. Bambini 71 156 9807-1 Red 71 156 9810-1 Yellow 71 156 9823-1 Green 71 156 9836-1 Blue 71 156 9849-1 Orange

Stronger version, 2.5 mm thick needle. Total length 57 mm. To avoid jerking the valve into the ball use valve oil, soap or a similar lubricant. Thread VG5.2 71 109 9922  Price for 6

Set

Youth 71 106 3400-1 Red 71 106 3413-1 Yellow 71 106 3426-1 Green 71 106 3439-1 Blue 71 106 3442-1 Orange

Valve inserter with attached valve Valve extractor

p Ball Repair Tool

So you can repair your volleyballs or basketballs yourself. The set consists of: • Valve extractor • Valve inserter • 3 replacement valves each 71 150 7108 Set

q

Reversible Vests

These vests can be worn on both sides, each side with a different colour. Very pleasant to wear, supple, allows a quick change of players during training, washes well, extremely durable. Material: 100% polyester. Adult size. 71 106 2407-1 Blue/green/navy 71 106 2410-1 Yellow/red/marine 

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

Men 71 106 2104-1 Yellow 71 106 2117-1 Green 71 106 2120-1 Red 71 106 2133-1 Blue 71 106 2146-1 Orange

Don’t forget to order:

Team Sashes on page 136

Great Value!

Buy Now! 43


Balls Mobile Storage

84 cm

4 Easy to move around 4 Sturdy frame 4 Theft-proof storage 4 Single mesh steel construction 4 Collapses down saving space

a Sport-Thieme® “Jumbo

104 cm

XXL” Transport Trolley

10

year

guarantee

Top Rated

sport-thieme.com

cm

Buy Now!

m ,5 c

62

62 cm

62

Great Value!

100 cm

A really useful piece of equipment for transporting and organising storage of balls and other small items. The closemeshed, all steel design has additional cross sections for stability, a lockable folding lid and 4 smooth running castors. Comes with an additional removal flap, ideal for smaller children as they can reach the bottom and remove items themselves. When not filled, the trolley can be folded flat which saves space. Will hold approx. 100 kg. Overall dimensions (WxHxD): 100x104x62.5 cm when assembled; 100x100x20 cm folded down. A padlock is available if necessary. Capacity 600 litres. Contents and padlock not included. Only for use in dry areas. 10 year guarantee! 71 131 1785-1 Each

4 Compact storage, collapsible

b Sport-Thieme® Ball Carrier

Foldable trolley for transportation and storage of balls. The ideal “training partner” as a collection basket. Size: approx. 62x62x84 cm, sufficient for approx. 20 size 5 balls, 168 litres. 71 130 8701 Each

Storage Boxes

Universal boxes for tidy storage of equipment for sports, games, leisure, household, workshop and warehouse.

h Wall Storage System for Exercise Balls

31,5 cm

For large exercise balls ø 45-100 cm, holds 3-5 balls. Horizontal version, length 240 cm, depth 75 cm, comes with fixtures and fittings. Balls not included. Galvanised. 71 106 9903-1 Each

5c m

80 cm

4 Space saving 4 Lockable 4 Can  withstand up to 150 kg c 90 Litre Storage Box Made of high quality polypropylene, WxHxD: 80x31.5x52 cm. Lid not included. 5 year guarantee. 71 186 4700-1 RedEach 71 186 4713-1 YellowEach 71 186 4726-1 BlueEach 71 186 4739-1 GreenEach

d Clip-on Lid

f Net for Large Exercise Balls

Ball carrier and storage net for exerg Ball Carrying Net cise balls such as Pezzi or Gymnic that have Particularly strong, made from polya diameter up to 120 cm. Nylon material ethylene. A practical carrying net for with 2 drawstring cords. Ball not included. approx. 10-12 balls of ø 25 cm. 71 109 7317-1 Each 71 110 1010 For 10-12 footballsEach 71 110 1007 For 1 ball Set of 3

i

For storage box. Made from polypropylene. Five year guarantee! j Sport-Thieme® Ball 71 186 4742-1 RedEach Bag 71 186 4755-1 YellowEach Large bag for sto71 186 4768-1 BlueEach rage and trans71 186 4771-1 GreenEach portation of approx. 10-12 size 5 footballs. With carrying straps so can also e Storage Box - Set of 4 be carried on Consisting of: back. Very • 4x 90 litre boxes strong 100% • 4 lids nylon material One of each: green, blue, yellow and with drawstring red. 5 year guarantee cord. Height 80 cm, ø 40 cm. 71 186 4784-1 Set 71 106 9701 Each

i Sport-Thieme® Ball Net Bag

Suitable for storing and transporting 5x size 5 footballs or volleyballs. The sides are sealed and the middle section is 100% nylon with 100% nylon net material. Comes with carrying handle and shoulder strap and zip. ø 23 cm, L: 100 cm. 71 106 9714 Each

k Holder for One Ball

For large exercise balls such as Pezzi, Gymnic, ABS-Powerballs and others. Suitable for balls with a diameter of 45-90 cm. Inner ring diameter 36 cm, distance from wall 65 cm. Several holders can be attached vertically, horizontally or off-set for optimal use of space. Galvanised steel tubing with dowels and screws. Ball not included. 71 106 9932-1 Each

Set

44

k

l Mobile Stands

for Exercise Balls

l

For storage and transportation. Suitable for 9 exercise balls from 42-75 cm. ø 100 cm, height: 192 cm. Each storage ring can be adjusted individually. Balls not included. 71 106 9929-1 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Basketball Hoops Teamsport a

4 Complies with DIN standards

e Basketball Set With safety net attachment

a Great Product!

With open net eyelets to attach the net

4 Complies with DIN EN1270 4 Made from solid material 4 With net eyelets or with safety fixing

Buy Now!

f 4 With safety net fixing 4 Tiltable 4 Without net eyelets

Set

a Sport-Thieme® “Standard” Basketball Hoop

Made from solid steel and complies with DIN EN 1270. Suitable for indoor and outdoor use. For 12 loop nets. Net not included. Models: • With open eyelets for attaching the net. • With safety fixing – the net is attached with a steel wire that feeds through the eyelets (registered design 202011103887). 71 116 0909 With open eyeletsEach 71 116 4709 With safety fixingEach

Great Value!

Complete set at a top price! Suitable for indoor and outdoor use. The set consists of: • 1 basket with net hooks • 1 basketball net • 1 basketball in rainbow colours, size 7 • 1 ball pump with needle valve 71 116 0202 Set

d Sport-Thieme® Basketball Set

c Bracket for Basketball Baskets

For simple and quick removal and attachment of the basketball hoop. Made from hot dip galvanised steel, to be mounted to the wall or backboard. Suitable for basketball hoops a and g. The hoop is not ® b Sport-Thieme “Standard” directly attached to the backboard. For safety reasons the hoop can also be remoBasketball Net ved from the bracket. The distance from Made from ø 6 mm woven nylon. With 12 the floor to the lower edge must be a minipoint fixing, white, made to international regulations. Suitable for basketball hoops mum of 200 cm. Backboard, hoop and net a, e and g. not included. 71 116 2501 Each 71 116 1407 Each

Now you have more time to play, as the hoop can be removed from the bracket without any tools. The set consists of: • 1 basketball hoop a • 1 basketball net b • 1 bracket c “Standard” hoop 71 116 1902 Set “Standard” hoop, without net eyelets 71 116 1915 Set

Don’t forget to order:

• Basketball backboards, on page 46 • Basketballs, on page 9-11

f Sport-Thieme® “Indoor”

Folding Basketball Hoop

Frequent damage to basketball equipment includes bent baskets and broken backboards. Folding down baskets reduce this danger. The basket tips down 30 degrees when weight is placed on it and smoothly swings back to its original position. • Hoop made from solid 20 mm thick steel • With flat bar steel reinforcement on sides • Safety net attachment that complies with DIN standards: the net fixing is through a steel wire that is threaded through the eyelets Suitable for indoor use only. To be mounted to a backboard on a frame. For nets with 12 point fixing. Net not included. 71 116 4057 Folds down at 45 kgEach 71 116 4060 Folds down at 75 kgEach 71 116 4044 Folds down at 105 kgEach

g h j Top Rated

sport-thieme.com

i

4 Extra reinforcement 4 Can withstand up to 240 kg 4 Vandalism-proof weight ® h Sport-Thieme® “Outdoor” g Sport-Thieme “Premium” Basketball Hoop Basketball Hoop Solid steel, galvanised with an inner dia-

j Sport-Thieme® “Outdoor” Folding Basketball Hoop

The weather-proof hoop that folds down: ideal for outdoor use! Tips down 30 degrees when weight is placed on it and smoothly swings back to its original position. • Made from solid steel, galvanised, 20 mm thick Complies with the latest European stan• With flat steel reinforcement on sides meter of 45 cm. With 12 sealed ring eyedard: 1270. Basket angle is reinforced • Safety net attachment complies with DIN stanlets for attaching the net. Measurements on both sides with additional sheet steel dards: the net is attached with steel wire that is and bore holes comply with DIN 7899. Net plates. threaded through the eyelets not included. • Made from solid 20 mm thick steel 71 117 3909 Each • Bends down when hoop is under a weight of • With flat bar steel reinforcement on sides approx. 65 kg • Bore holes correspond with DIN regui Sport-Thieme® “Out• Maximum weight basket supports approx. 240 lations door” Basketball Net kg Suitable for all basketball units and for Made of galvanised chain, 12 point fixing. To be mounted to a backboard on a frame. Suitaindoor and outdoor use. For nets with 12 Hoop not included. Suitable for “Outdoor” ble for all nets with 12 point fixing. Net not inclupoint fixing. Net not included. basketball hoops h and j. ded. Comes with fixtures and fittings. 71 116 4507 Each 71 114 2509 Each 71 116 0606 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

k

i

4 Low noise 4 Vandalism-proof

k Hercules Rope

Basketball Net

Made from 5 mm thick Hercules rope, which is resistant to cutting and tearing. Its 12 point fixing makes it suitable for baskets with open fixing eyelets. Hoop not included. Suitable for basketball hoops a, e, g and j. 71 116 2514 Each

45


Indoor and Outdoor Basketball Backboards

In various sizes and designs Teamsport glass a Acrylic (transparent)

b Safety glass

(transparent)

c

Fibreglass reinforced plastic

d

MDF

Top Rated

sport-thieme.com

Basketball Backboards

All backboard markings comply with current regulations. We deliver all backboards d, f and g without holes so they can be attached to the frame and baskets on site.

a

Acrylic Glass Basketball Backboard

180x105 cm, this size complies with the latest DBB and FIBA regulations and is recommended for new purchases.

b

Safety Glass Basketball Backboard

c

d Sport-Thieme® MDF Basket-

Sport-Thieme® Fibreglass Basketball Backboard

ball Backboard

A 21 mm thick backboard made from MDF. Made from fibreglass reinforced plastic. Both sides coated white, with sealed Made from 12 mm thick safety glass with Made from 10 mm acrylic glass. Mounted With 16 mm thick solid wood core, holes edges, no pre-drilled holes. Only for use on a tubular steel frame for additional sup- shatter-proof film. Pre-drilled holes and can be drilled anywhere. The ideal backindoors. port for board load. Drill holes and fittings fittings comply with DIN 7899 standards, board for outdoor courts. 71 116 1234 90x60 cm, 21 mmEach transparent. The board for top level comto DIN 7899 standards. With white mar71 116 1029 120x90 cm, 27 mmEach 71 116 1221 120x90 cm, 21 mmEach petitions. king lines. 71 116 2123 120x90 cm, 30 mmEach 71 116 2615 180x105 cm, 12 mmEach 71 116 1016 180x105 cm, 37 mmEach 71 116 1218 180x105 cm, 21 mmEach 71 116 2110 180x105 cm, 30 mmEach 71 116 2602 180x120 cm, 12 mmEach 71 116 1003 180x120 cm, 37 mmEach 71 116 1205 180x120 cm, 21 mmEach

e Edge Protection Pad

To reduce injuries. For 180 cm wide basketball backboards, PEfoam, manufactured in a single piece, with grooves and mitred edges. The pads are fixed to the backboards with a standard contact adhesive. 71 114 5902 For 12 mm thick backboards Each 71 114 5928 For 21 mm thick backboards Each

New!

g 4 Robust and long lasting 4 With edge reinforcement

71 114 5931 For 30 mm thick backboards Each 71 114 5944 For 37 mm thick backboards Each

10

Street Basketball Backboards

10

year

guarantee

year

guarantee

h

10 g Sport-Thieme® Aluminium

f Sport-Thieme® Fibreglass Street

Basketball Backboard

Basketball Backboard

Made from fibreglass reinforced plastic. With 6.4 mm thick solid wood core, holes can be drilled wherever you need them. Weather-proof. 110x73x2 cm, white. 10 year guarantee! 71 116 4318 Each

46

Don’t forget to order: • Basketballs, page 9-11

A 25 mm thick aluminium section, with additional edge reinforcement, no pre-drilled holes, with black inner square. Completely weather-resistant and super strong. 120x90 cm, approx. 17 kg. 10 year guarantee! 71 117 3707 Each

year

guarantee

h Sport-Thieme® Steel Mesh Basketball Backboard

Made from galvanised 50 mm thick steel wire mesh. The mesh considerably reduces noise. 120x90 cm, approx. 23 kg. 10 year guarantee! 71 116 4608 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Great Value!

Height can be adjusted from 2.45 to 3.05 m

Height can be adjusted from 2.45 to 3.05 m

Height can be adjusted from 2.10 to 2.60 m

Height can be adjusted from 2.45 to 3.05 m

Mobile Basketball Systems Teamsport

Buy Now!

d 4 Polycarbonate backboard 4 Tiltable hoop 4 Easy height adjustment

b

4 Ideal for private use 4 Can be adjusted to any height

a “Junior” Basketball Unit

This is an inexpensive set for private use with telescopic square tubing. The board is plastic with a weather-proof nylon net. The base (93x61x17 cm) can be filled with water or sand, approx. 65 kg. Max. height: 308 cm (floor to upper edge of board), 15 kg. 71 134 1300 Each

Great Product!

c

4 Quick  and easy height adjustment 4 Excellent value for money

4 Height is adjustable in 5 levels 4 Extension arm for more space under the basket

c “Los Angeles” Basketball Unit

This mobile system is quick and easy to assemble and can therefore be used anye Spalding® “NBA Gold where at anytime. The height can be adjusExacta High Lift Portable” ted at five levels, making it suitable for Basketball Unit kids to enjoy. Comes with plastic backHigh quality mobile unit made for all weaboard, hoop and net. “San Antonio” b 71 117 1118 Each ther conditions. Rectangular backboard Street Basketball Unit made from acrylic glass with protected Mobile unit with castors on frame. The edges. “H-Frame” backboard strut for d “Orlando” Street Basketbackboard is assembled directly onto the more safety. “Pro Slam Breakaway” basball Unit post. Complete set with steel tubing post, ketball hoop with durable all-weather net. With a transparent rectangular backboard mobile base, plastic backboard, hoop The board can be tilted up to 20 degrees made from polycarbonate. The height of and net. towards the court. With “Helix Lift System” the basket can be easily adjusted to three 71 117 1121 Each levels using the adjusting mechanism. for comfortable and easy height adjustment of the hoop from 228 to 305 cm. The The basket will tilt at a weight of approx. 60 kg. Complete set with backboard, hoop mobile base with wheels can be filled with Don’t forget to order: water or sand (approx. 128 litres). and net. Basketballs, pages 9-11 71 117 1163 Each 71 118 1904 Each a“Junior“ b“San Antonio“ Model Design base base Great Board plastic plastic Product! 110x72 cm Board dimensions (cm) 91x61x3 cm Hoop height (cm) 245-305 cm 210-260 cm telescopic Height adjustment telescopic Adjusting levels infinitely variable every 10 cm Hoop Net Product code Price

• • 71 134 1300 Each

New!

• • 71 117 1121 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

c“Los Angeles“ base plastic 112x73 cm 245-305 cm telescopic 5 levels (240, 255, 270, 287, 305 cm) • • 71 117 1118 Each

d „Orlando“ base polycarbonate 114x72 cm 245-305 cm handle 3 levels (245, 275, 305 cm) folds down • 71 117 1163 Each

e 4 Backboard made from acrylic glass 4 Tiltable hoop

Height can be adjusted from 2.28 to 3.05 m

a

e „NBA Gold Portable“ base acrylic glass 122x80.5 cm 228-305 cm handle infinitely variable folds down • 71 118 1904 Each

47


d

4 40 cm overhang

4 Ground socket ensure a secure stand 4 Easy height adjustment

Set Buy Now! e

h

4 Easy height adjustment

Great Product!

4 Ideal for private use

4 Ideal for private use

d San Antonio Basketball Set

a New York Basketball Set

in Ground Sockets

Height can be adjusted between 2.13 and 3.05 m

a

Height can be adjusted between 1.00 and 3.05 m

Height can be adjusted between 2.00 and 3.05 m

Height can be adjusted between 2.45 and 3.05 m

Teamsport Fixed Basketball Systems

4 120 cm overhang 4 Official competition basket height

5

e Sport-Thieme® ''Jump''

“New York” Set

For basketball unit a. Made from steel Basketball Post tubing, primed. ø 90 mm, L: 500 mm. Not Ideal for school yards, playgrounds and illustrated. outdoor swimming pools. Stable alu71 117 0636 Each minium post including 500mm ground socket. Without backboard, hoop and net. 71 115 9703 Each

h USA Basketball Set

Don’t forget to order: Basketballs, pages 9-11

Set

i Spalding Basketball Stand

“NBA Gold Exacta High Lift In-Ground”

Permanent basketball unit with transparent backboard made from acrylic glass. Unbreakable backboard with protected edges, approx. 5 cm thick. With sturdy aluminium frame. With “H-Frame” backboard struts for more safety and sturdy tiltable “Pro Image Breakaway” hoop. “U-Turn Lift System” for convenient height adjustment of the hoop. Supplied with net and ground socket. 71 118 7700 Each

Great Value!

f Ground Socket for “Jump” Basketball Post

Buy Now!

80x80 mm, L: 500 mm. Not illustrated. 71 115 9716 Each

c

Set

Back

g Basketball System Set “Jump”

c New York Wall Mounted Basketball System

Can be mounted to a house wall or to the garage. The wall fixtures are simply dowelled to the wall, distance from the wall approx. 22 cm. Including weather-resistant backboard, hoop and net. Comes in a box. 71 117 0708 Each Model

j “Home” Unit

Mast

Overhang Backboard Board dimensions Height of basket Height adjustment Adjusting levels Hoop Net Product code Price

48

4 Backboard made from acrylic glass 4 Tiltable hoop

year guarantee

Single mast galvanised steel tubing The attractively priced system for pri- Permanent basketball unit with tubular structure, with powder-coated steel backvate customers. Powder-coated tubular board, solid steel hoop and nylon net. steel post standing in ground socket. The steel posts for concreting in or burying into backboard is attached directly to the post. Includes ground socket. Official competithe ground. With weatherproof backboard, Complete set with post, ground socket, tion basket height 305 cm. Will support up hoop and net. Comes in a box. to approx. 320 kg. 5 year guarantee! plastic backboard, hoop and net. 71 117 0607 Each 71 117 1134 Each 71 117 0610 Set

b Ground Sockets for

i

– GRP 112x73 cm – – – • • 71 115 9527 Each

This complete system consists of: • 1 basketball post e with ground socket f • 1 backboard 120x90 cm, page 46 c • 1 basketball hoop, page 45 a • 1 basketball net, page 45 b 71 116 2006 Set

d “San Antonio” a “New York” c “New York” Wall Mounted System powder-coated steel powder-coated steel tube – ø 90x2 mm tube ø 90x2 mm 40 cm 22 cm GRP GRP GRP 112x73 cm – – – • • 71 117 0708 Each

j "Home" Basketball Unit

This inexpensive set is suitable for private use. With a plastic backboard and a solid steel hoop with nylon net. Comes with assembly instructions. 71 115 9527 Set

e “Jump”

g “Jump” Unit

aluminium 80x80 mm – –

aluminium 80x80 mm – GRP

110x72 cm 112x73 cm – 245-305 cm 200-305 cm 100-305 cm telescopic telescopic telescopic infinitely variable adjustable in 10 cm steps infinitely variable • •  – • •  – 71 117 1134 71 117 0607 71 115 9703 Each Each Each

120x90 cm 100-305 cm telescopic infinitely variable • • 71 116 2006 Each

Great Product!

h “USA”

galvanised steel tube ø 114x4 mm 120 cm powder-coated steel backboard 135x90 cm 305 cm – – • • 71 117 0610 Each

i “NBA Gold In-Ground” powder-coated steel tubing 102x102 mm 45 cm acrylic glass with aluminium frame 137x83 cm 213-305 cm with crank handle infinitely variable tiltable • 71 118 7700 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Outdoor Basketball Units Teamsport Exclusive to Sport-Thieme®

“Fair Play” a 4 Vandalism-proof 4 Complete set including backboard, hoop and net 4 165 cm overhang 4 15x15 cm square tubing

10

Complete Unit b “Fair Play Silent”

year

guarantee

When used with protective padding

4 Reduced noise backboard 4 Vandalism-proof 4 Optional collapsible basket

a Sport-Thieme® “Fair Play” Basketball System

Same system as b with all mentioned features, but with edge-reinforced durable backboard made from strong aluminium sections, 120x90 cm. 10 year guarantee on the post! Prices and options: see table a

10

b Sport-Thieme® “Fair Play

year

guarantee

When used with protective padding

Silent” Basketball System

A particularity robust system for all public games and sports grounds. Suitable for vigorous use and withstanding strain, totally weather-proof and safe against vandalism. Complete set with post, ground socket, backboard, hoop and net. Fully welded construction, hot dipped galvanised post made of square 15x15x0.3 cm tubing, overhang 165 cm, basket height 305 cm. Net made from galvanised chain links with strong fixing hooks. With an especially low noise backboard made from hot dip galvanised steel mesh, 120x90 cm. Our recommendation for fun and sports in residential areas. The system is available with either the “Outdoor” hoop on page 45 h or the collapsible “Outdoor” hoop on page 45 j. Prices and options: see table b

c Protective Post Padding

c Protective Post Padding for Basketball Posts

Indispensable for players‘ safety. The flexible padding material will greatly reduce the risk of injury. Weatherproof. 200 cm long, with durable cover and Velcro fastenings. Square tubing 15x15 cm. 71 116 1726-1 Each

ab Outdoor hoop Collapsible Outdoor hoop

a

Backboard Aluminium 71 117 3505 Set 71 117 3589 Set

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

b

Backboard Steel mesh 71 115 8104 Set 71 115 8159 Set

Recommended basketballs can be found on pages 9-11

49


Teamsport Outdoor Basketball Units

10

10

year

guarantee

year

guarantee

“Fair Play Duo” c 4 Height adjustable

“Fair Play” a 4 With height adjustment

c Sport-Thieme® Basketball Stand “Fair Play Duo”

Basketball stand “Fair Play”- can now be played on two sides. All components are 100% weatherproof and withstand extreme stress. Set includes post, ground socket and two arms, backboards, hoops and nets. • Same unit as page 49 b • Choice of 120x90 cm backboard: aluminium panel or steel wire mesh

Retrofit equipment: Height Adjustment for “Fair Play”

b

Height of hoop can be adjusted between 2.60 and 3.05 m

c Outdoor hoop Folding Outdoor hoop

• Two arms for playing height 305 cm and 260 cm • 165 cm overhang Supplied with “Outdoor” hoop on page 45 h or folding “Outdoor” hoop on page 45 j. 10 year guarantee on the post! Product codes and options: see table c

Backboard Aluminium 71 115 8117 Set 71 115 8162 Set

Backboard Steel mesh 71 115 8120 Set 71 115 8175 Set

Hint:

Do you want to use your set in a builtup area and avoid noise? Our Tip: Noise levels can be significantly reduced with a steel mesh backboard!

a Sport-Thieme®

Basketball Unit “Fair Play” with Height Adjustment

Basketball unit “Fair Play” with height adjustment of 260-305 cm for hoop height. All components are 100% weatherproof and withstand extreme stress. Set includes post, ground socket, backboard, hoop and net. • Same unit as page 49 b • Choice of 120x90 cm backboard: aluminium panel or steel wire mesh • 195 cm overhang • Net made from galvanised chain links with strong fastening hooks.

a Outdoor hoop Folding Outdoor hoop

50

Options: Supplied with “Outdoor” hoop on page 45 h or folding “Outdoor” hoop on page 45 j. 10 year guarantee on Product codes and options: see table a

4 With aluminium or steel mesh backboard

year

guarantee

d Sport-Thieme® Wall Basketball Set “Outdoor”

Extremely robust, all-weather wall unit for b Height Adjustment Mecha- all public play grounds and courts. Intended nism for “Fair Play” Basket- to be mounted onto a solid wall. The complete set comes with a wall frame, backball Set board, hoop and net. All “Fair Play” units from Sport-Thieme • Wall frame made from galvanised steel can be re-kitted with this height adjusting mechanism. The basket is adjustable from • Size (outside edge of panels): approx. 140 cm 260-305 cm. Includes a complete set • Choice of aluminium or steel mesh backof fixing materials. 10 year guarantee! boards, 120x90 cm 71 117 3576 Each

Backboard Aluminium 71 117 3550 Set 71 117 6201 Set

10

Backboard Steel mesh 71 117 3563 Set 71 117 6214 Set

d Outdoor hoop Folding Outdoor hoop

• Overhang approx. 122 cm • Net made from galvanised chain links with strong fixing hooks The set is available with the “Outdoor” hoop, page 45 h or the folding “Outdoor” hoop, page 45 j Product codes and options: see table d

Backboard Aluminium 71 116 4839 Set 71 116 4855 Set

Backboard Steel mesh 71 116 4813 Set 71 116 4842 Set

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Baseball, Softball, Intercrosse Teamsport Sets

“Junior”

Set

Buy Now! “Senior”

c Baseball School Set 1

Tip

Right-handed pitch = left catcher‘s glove Left-handed pitch = right catcher‘s glove

a Junior Baseball Catching Glove

The inexpensive baseball/tee ball glove for children and youth players up to 11 years of age. Made from synthetic leather. Size 10“ (approx. 25.4 cm). Brown. 71 118 4105 Left catcher's gloveEach 71 118 4118 Right catcher's gloveEach

b Senior Baseball Catching Glove

The baseball glove for adults and youth players from approx. 12 years old. Size 12“ (approx. 30.4 cm). Brown. 71 118 3900 Left catcher's gloveEach 71 118 3913 Right catcher's gloveEach

A 35 piece set for beginners. Consisting of: • 16 catcher‘s gloves, left, Junior a or Senior b • 4 catcher‘s gloves, right, Junior a or Senior b • 10 tee balls, page 52 d • 2 tee ball bats 26” (Junior) or 32“ (Senior), page 52 b • 1 batting tee, page 52 j • 1x 5 piece base set, page 52 i • 1 storage bag 71 194 4802 JuniorSet 71 194 4815 SeniorSet

d Baseball School Set II

The 19 piece baseball set for smaller groups. Consisting of: • 8 catcher‘s gloves, left, Junior a or Senior b • 2 catcher‘s gloves, right, Junior a or Senior b • 5 tee balls, page 52 d • 1 tee ball bat 26‘‘ (Junior) or 32“ (Senior), page 52 b • 1 batting tee, page 52 j • 1 base set, five-piece, page 52 i • 1 storage bag 71 194 4903 JuniorSet 71 194 4916 SeniorSet

Intercrosse e 4 Includes net

Intercrosse is similar to Lacrosse • Fast team game • Simple rules allow beginners to participate straight away • Encourages good teamwork - only teams that fully work together can win • It is a fair game because body contact and stick contact is prohibited • Suitable for indoor and outdoor play • Variations possible • It is an ideal game for sports lessons in schools More information available on: www. inter-crosse.com

f g

Set

Buy Now!

h

f Goal Nets for Street Hockey Goals, 127x107 cm

Made from weatherproof polyethylene. Suitable for goals sized 127x107x66 cm. 71 226 4426-1 Each

Set

g Intercrosse Sticks

The stick for schools and clubs. 70 cm long aluminium shaft with strong plasi Sport-Thieme® Intercrosse e tic head. Total length 102 cm. A stable goal made from powderBag 71 116 8671 RedEach coated steel tubing (ø approx. 3.45 cm). 71 116 8668 BlueEach In this strong nylon bag you can accomEasy to fold away and transport. With a modate a complete intercrosse school weatherproof polyethylene net. Assembled h Intercrosse Ball pack. Ideal for storing and transporting Made from soft plastic, ø approx. 70 size (HxWxD): approx. 127x107x66 cm. up to 12 sticks and balls. LxWxH: approx. mm, approx. 62 g. Orange. Approx. 6 kg. 124x19x28 cm. 100% nylon. 71 194 5108 Each 71 116 8697 Each 71 114 0402 Each

Intercrosse Goal

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

j Intercrosse School Set

The ideal set for schools and clubs Consisting of: • 6 sticks with red plastic head e • 6 sticks with blue plastic head e • 3 balls d 71 116 8684 Set

51


Teamsport Baseball, Softball Sets

a

g Junior Baseball/Tee Ball

b

Set

The set consists of: • 1 Junior 10’’ catcher’s glove, left or right, page 51 a • 1 tee ball bat 26’’, beech b • 1 tee ball d 71 118 4453 With left catcher's glove Set 71 118 4479 With right catcher's glove Set

c d e a Aluminium Baseball Bat

High quality aluminium bat. With well distributed weight and an optimally sized sweet spot. This means that the bat is easy to handle, providing you with the power required for “hitting a line drive” and to “get a good jump”. The bat for a high batting average. With special hardened varnish and Power Cap precision weighting. With non-slip rubber band on handle. 28’’ (approx. 71 cm), approx. 480 g 71 226 4107 Each 32’’ (approx. 81 cm), approx. 737 g 71 226 4110 Each

b Beech Tee Ball Bat

Ideal bat for schools and leisure. Made from beech. Ideally suited for soft tee balls. Excellent value for money. 26’’ (approx. 66 cm), approx. 530 g 71 226 4149 Each

h Senior Baseball Set

New!

The set consists of • 1 catcher‘s glove Senior 12’’, left or right, page 51 b • 1 tee ball bat 32’’, beech b • 1 tee ball d 71 118 4466 With left catcher's glove Set 71 118 4482 With right catcher's glove Set

f

d Teeball

Soft, elastic tee ball. Cover made from weather-proof syntex material. With soft strike hollow safety core. Ideally suited for beginners, school children and youth players. Also suitable for indoor training, ø approx. 72 mm, 5 oz. (approx. 141.75 g). 71 118 5300 Each

Set

Baseball

e 32’’ (approx. 81 cm), approx. 600 g Classic baseball with weather-proof 71 226 4152 Each syntex cover. Shock resistant core of rubber and cork. The ideal ball for school children c Ash Baseball Bat and youth training. ø approx. 72 mm, 5 oz. An extremely stable baseball bat (approx. 141.75 g). made from robust ash. For youth and adult 71 118 5502 Each players. With special hardened hitting surface. The long wood grain of the ash is flef Softball xible, enabling fast acceleration of the ball Hand-stitched softball from weatherand making the bat stronger and more proof syntex material. With shock resistant resistant to breakage. Non-slip unvarnicork and rubber core. The 12 cm diameter shed handle. Suitable for hard tournament means the ball is easier to hit than a stanballs. Natural colour. dard baseball. Softballs are therefore ideal 30’’ (approx. 76 cm), approx. 720 g for beginners‘ training in schools and clubs 71 226 4123 Each and of course for softball, a sport mainly played by women. 6 oz. (approx. 170 g). 32’’ (approx. 81 cm), approx. 740 g 71 226 4136 Each 71 118 5401 Each

i Base Set

j Baseball Batting Tee

Weather-proof vinyl bases. Can also be used indoors. Consisting of: • 3 bases • 1 home plate • 1 pitcher‘s plate 71 118 5209 Set

The batting tee enables all players to hit the static ball perfectly. It is an essential piece of equipment for every training session. Robust hard rubber home plate with stable steel flange and height adjustable hard rubber tube, adjustable height 60-90 cm. Ball not included. 71 118 5007 Each

Sets m Softball Set

k Bonkerball Set

The baseball set for school sport - ideal for training the basics. Plastic bats covered with high quality shockproof foam. Corresponds with the weight and size of standard baseball bats. Completely safe to use thanks to the cover. The balls, made from solid foam, do not bounce. The bats and balls come in six colours to differentiate between teams.

52

The set consists of: • 6 bats, length approx. 69 cm, approx. 325 g • 6 balls, ø approx. 9 cm, approx. 40 g Bats and balls in assorted colours. 71 117 7709  Set of 12

Also take a look at:

Advanced players can also use a catcher‘s glove: page 51 ab

l No Bounce Balls

Beginners will be able to practice and play safely with these softball bats and balls. The bat is made of virtually unbreakable plastic with a soft rubber covering. The soft, fleecy ball sticks to the catching plate which is covered with Velcro. The set consists of: • 1 bat • 1 ball • 1 catching plate 71 117 0304 Set

From high quality dense foam material (sponge rubber). The ball can be used with any baseball bat. Drops with no bounce when hitting the ground. Assorted n Replacement Ball For softball set. colours. Approx. ø 9 cm, approx. 40 g. 71 118 3405  Set of 6 71 134 3700-1 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Steel Cage Goals Teamsport 180 cm

120 cm

120 cm

80 cm

Buy Now! 4 Vandalism-proof a Fully Welded Mini Leisure Area 4 Ideal  for street Goal Completely welded aluminium construction 80x80 cm, free-standing, can be bolted to the ground. Ideal for school yards and public playgrounds. Bars ø 3 cm, distance between bars approx. 8 cm. Delivery includes fixtures and fittings. Design complies with DIN EN 15312 standards. Delivery time 2-3 weeks! Inner dimensions: 120x80x65 cm 71 115 2308 Each

c

hockey 4 Fully braced at top, low spaced struts 4 Incl. ground anchors

Inner dimensions: 180x120x65 cm 71 115 2337 Each

Tip

Steel cage goals have to be anchored to concrete foundations.

4 Best possible stability

d 4 Thick-walled tubing

4 ø of struts 3.5 cm 4 Reduced noise levels to DIN standards

Accessories for steel cage goals b Sport-Thieme® Ground Anchors

For steel cage and mini steel cage goals. These steel ground anchors have been designed for free-standing steel cage and mini steel cage goals. Suitable for all goals with factory fitted loops. One set consists of 2 galvanised steel ground anchors with internal thread, hexagon bolts and washers. For a secure and safe goal stand. Depth: approx. 18 cm into ground. 71 238 8801  Set of 2

c Fully Welded Free-Standing

d Fully Welded Leisure

Fully welded aluminium goal. Same as free-standing goal d but also with basketball backboard, hoop and net. Includes ground anchors. The basket is set at the height of 3.05m. 300x200x60 cm. Complies with DIN EN 1176 and DIN EN 15312 standards. Distance between bars: 8 cm. Delivery time approx. 2-3 weeks! 71 111 4616 Each

Fully welded aluminium goal. Extremely robust and vandalism-proof structure. Ideal for public playgrounds and school yards. A completely welded aluminium structure made from thick-walled 80x80 mm tubing, frame of 50x50 cm tubing running right around. 35x3 mm round tubes at the rear give this goal the best possible stability. Closed at the top. 4 loops are welded to the ground frame for fixing the goal to the ground. Fixtures and fittings are included. Complies with DIN EN 1176 and DIN EN 15312, the standards for multisport equipment in public areas. 8 cm distance between the bars, bar ø 3.5 cm. Delivery time 2-3 weeks!

Goal with Basketball Hoop

Don’t forget to order: Footballs, from page 4

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

Area Goal

4 Top of goal completely sealed with strut section

71 111 4515 300x200x60 cmEach 71 111 4528 500x200x60 cmEach

53


Teamsport

c 4 Hinged net brackets 4 Space saving

a 4 One piece construction 4 Very stable

c Sport-Thieme® Portable Aluminium

Mini Training Goals, mesh size 10 cm

a Sport-Thieme® Fully Welded Portable Aluminium Mini Training Goals, mesh size 10 cm

Includes ø 2.3 mm polypropylene net, mesh size 10x10 cm. These fully welded mini goals were developed as a result of the positive feedback gained from the full size ones. Available in three different goal sizes. Extremely stable and durable design. 80x80 mm tubing on 80x40 mm base frame with net brackets made from strong ø 40 mm aluminium tubing.

Available in three different goal sizes: • 1.20x0.80 m, goal depth 0.70 m: includes 30 safety system net fixings • 1.80x1.20 m, goal depth 0.70 m: includes 38 safety system net fixings • 2.40x1.60 m, goal depth 1,00 m: includes 52 safety system net fixings Goal inner dimensions 1.20x0.80 m 71 116 3823 Each

Includes ø 2.3 mm polypropylene net, mesh size 10x10 cm. This really stable goal guarantees a long lifespan and durability and is indispensable for effective games and training programmes for children and adults. Versatile to use. 80x40 mm goal frame tubing, completely welded. The net bracket is made from sturdy ø 40 mm Goal inner dimensions 1.80x1.20 m aluminium tubing and can be folded in for 71 116 3836 Each compact storage of goals using a special hinge to lock it in place. Ground tubing is Goal inner dimensions: 2.40x1.60 m 71 116 3849 Each no longer necessary.

b Sport-Thieme® Fully Welded Portable Aluminium Mini Training Goals, mesh size 4.5 cm

Goal net mesh size 4.5 cm

Available in three different sizes: • 1.20x0.80 m, goal depth 0.70 m: incl. 10 safety system net fixings • 1.80x1.20 m, goal depth 0.70 m: incl. 17 safety system net fixings • 2.40x1.60 m, goal depth 1.00 m: incl. 21 safety system net fixings Goal inner dimensions: 1.20x0.80 m 71 115 2207 Each Goal inner dimensions: 1.80x1.20 m 71 115 2500 Each Goal inner dimensions: 2.40x1.60 m 71 115 2568 Each

d Sport-Thieme® Portable Aluminium

Mini Training Goals, mesh size 4.5 cm

The same as a including, ø 2.3 mm polypropylene net, mesh size 4.5x4.5 cm. Available in two different sizes: • 1.20x0.80 m, goal depth 0.70 m: including 30 safety system net fixings • 1.80x1.20 m, goal depth 0.70 m: including 38 safety system net fixings Goal inner dimensions: 1.20x0.80 m 71 116 3807 Each

The same design as c including polypropylene net, ø 2.3 mm, mesh size 4.5x4.5 cm. (same as in illustration b). Available in two different sizes: • 1.20x0.80 m, goal depth 0.70 m: including 10 safety system net fixings • 1.80x1.20 m, goal depth 0.70 m: including 17 safety system net fixings Goal inner dimensions: 1.20x0.80 m 71 115 2223 Each

Goal inner dimensions: 1.80x1.20 m 71 116 3810 Each

Goal inner dimensions: 1.80x1.20 m 71 115 2526 Each

Safety Fixtures & Fixings · Replacement Nets for Mini Training Goals

h Mini Goal Net

Mesh size 100 mm. From polypropylene, high-strength, approx. 2.3 mm thick. Green. Incl. two 6 m long fastening strings. In two sizes: • 1.30x0.90 m for 1.20x0.80 m goal • 1.90x1.30 m for 1.80x1.20 m goal Goal depth at top and bottom 70 cm. 1.30x0.90 m for 1.20x0.80 m goal 71 115 1800 Each

f Safety Anchoring System e Sport-Thieme® Additional

Safety Weights for Mini Training Goals

These additional safety weights were especially developed for mini training goals when these are used on synthetic surfaces, artificial turf or hard courts. They contain integrated steel weights and guarantee a safe and stable positioning of the goal. Each weight is 1 m long. The additional

54

For mini training goals on grass. Mini goals should also be secured against falling over when in use. This set consists of two anchors for one goal. 71 115 2555 Mobile goalsSet 71 115 2571 Fully welded goalsSet

weights increase the total weight of the goal by 24 kg. One set contains two weights for one goal. Two models available: for portable mini goals with 80x40 cm tubing and for fully welded mini goals with 80x80 cm square tubing. g Mini Goal Net Mesh size 100 mm. From polypropy71 238 9006 80x40 cm system tubingSet 71 238 9019 80x80 cm square tubingSet lene, high-strength, approx. 2.3 mm thick. Green. Incl. 2x 8 m long fastening strings. • 2.50x1.70 m for 2.40x1.60 m goal. Don’t forget to order: Goal depth at top and bottom 1 m. Footballs, from page 4 71 238 8902 Each

1.90x1.30 m for 1.80x1.20 m goal 71 115 1901 Each

i Mini Goal Net

Mesh size 45 mm. From approx. 2.3 mm thick polypropylene, high-strength. Green. Incl. 2x 6 m long fastening strings . In two sizes: • 1.30 x0.90 m for 1.20x0.80 m goal • 1.90 x1.30 m for 1.80 x1.20 m goal Goal depth at top and bottom 70 cm. 1.30x0.90 m for 1.20x0.80 m goal 71 115 1813 Each 1.90x1.30 m for 1.80x1.20 m goal 71 115 1914 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Teamsport

“Kompakt” Vandalism-Proof Goal 4 I mproved net attachment with protective sleeve  ith vandalism resistant net 4W made from Hercules rope! 4 Very strong, welded corner joints t 4 I ncl. ground anchors to preven tilting a

Don’t forget to order:

Compatible ground anchors, 57 B page

-

alism a New! "Kompaktnd" Vand Goal Proof Playgrou

rope and fitting kit and is reinforced with steel. Tensioning from polypropymade is net green The ed. includ also are size is 110 mm mesh The tion. protec g chafin has and lene be damaonly can net The nal. diago a on d and is forme ore is ideal theref and force e extrem of use the ged with nium finish, net for public sports grounds. Natural alumi included. Goal depth 1.15 m. Each 71 206 9539 With vandalism-proof net Each to use. Without net 9526 206 71 acomp tage advan The compact construction offers a great relieves any load red to fully welded goals: its spring effect g to any fatigue put onto the structure, therefore not leadin Net . The entire goal b Goalsteel joints rame post/f d welde the of res fractu inserts. Polypropylene 5 mm. Green. With net brackets The . tubing oval mm 00 120/1 from is made 2 m high. Goal depth: 90 cm at the wide, m 3 size: Net aluminium are made from especially sturdy 50x4 mm . Mesh size 11 cm, with diagobottom the at cm 110 top, 4 is included. be destroyed by extreme force, tubing. A securing net attachment system only can net The . mesh nal each goal. . goal anchoring brackets are welded onto areas ll footba public for ideal lism-proof net. Each The goal is available with an optional vanda ter 71 207 8306  diame mm 5 a has rope, les Hercu from The net is made

d, for example Anywhere where goals are left unsupervise goals are in playgrounds and school yards, very stable goal are a one required. The crossbar and posts of this frame. The two piece welded construction, so is the base l connection sysparts slot together by means of a specia s. Once the net tem and are secured by self locking screw goal is ready brackets and net have been mounted, the

4 Rounded edges 4 Reduces risk of injury 4 Hinged net brackets 4 Space saving Training Goal c Safety Aluminium Mini l fea-

Safer thanks to rounded edges. The specia how the crossbar ture of these safe mini training goals is e arches. The goal and posts are joined, i.e. their 90 degre greatly reduces frame has rounded corners and therefore heads and faces. the risk of injury, especially to children’s s are made from There are no sharp edges. The goal frame ar welded stable ø 60 mm aluminium tubing, the crossb either side. An to the posts with a 90 degree bends on brackets are extremely stable and durable design. Net with 80x40 made from ø 40 mm strong aluminium tubing safety sysground tubing. The nets are attached using

net brackets can tem net fixings; these are included. The using a spegoals of e storag saving space for in be folded is no lontubing d Groun place. in them lock to cial hinge ger necessary. mesh size Includes ø 2.3 mm polypropylene net, 4.5x4.5 cm. 1.20x0.80 m, goal depth 0.70 m Each 71 116 3852  m 0.70 depth goal m, 1.80x1.20 Each 71 116 3865 

Telefoon www.sport-thieme.nl/teamsport · www.sport-thieme.com +49 5357 181-5·43 Phone: 0297–807877

How safe is your goal? – Legal Requirements

if they do not Mobile goal posts are sufficiently stable N is placed in the tilt when a horizontal load of 1,100 In addition, the GUV middle section of the top crossbar. nce) stipulates that (German statutory accident insura with current stangoals have to be labelled complying ed with a warning, dards: each goal must be provid ed exclusively indicating that the goal has been design ited to use the net or for ball games and that it is prohib . Depending on the the goal posts as a climbing frame required to meet design of goal, different weights are accessories can be GUV and DIN standards. Matching found on page 64. Depth of Goal Type of Goal 1.0 m Free-standing goal (3x2 m)

c

Counterweight 200 kg

Buy Now!

Don’t forget to order: Compatible ground anchors and nets, page 54 efhi

55

55


Small Goal 3x2 m - free-standing or in ground sockets

Teamsport Standing in ground sockets, with bolted mitre joints and short net brackets Goals abc:

5

Great Value!

years guarantee

Buy Now! b

a Buy Now!

Goal frame: square tubing (80x80 mm)

Goal frame: oval tubing (120x100 mm)

Free-standing, with bolted mitre joints and full-length net brackets

de Buy Now!

c Buy Now!

Goal frame e: oval tubing (120x100 mm) Goal frame d: oval tubing (120x100 mm), sunken safety tubing

Goal frame: square tubing (80x80 mm)

Small Goal 3x2 m

Model Goal frame profile

Design Goal depth, top: 80 cm

Joint between crossbar and posts

a Oval Tubing (120x100 mm)

b Square Tubing (80x80 mm)

c Square Tubing (80x80 mm)

standing in ground sockets, short net brackets (ø 30 mm)

standing in ground sockets, short net brackets (ø 30 mm)

mobile with base frame, full-length net brackets (ø 40 x 2 mm)

bolted mitre joint

bolted mitre joint

bolted mitre joint

d e Oval Tubing (120x100 mm), deeper Oval Tubing sitting grooves for safe net attachment(120x100 mm)

fully welded, mobile, with base frame, full-length net brackets (ø 50 x 4 mm)

fully welded goal construction

Net attachment

Colour Base frame

net fixing in frame anodised matt silver –

net fixing in frame anodised matt silver –

Goal depth, bottom – – Accessories (incl.) net fixings, ground sockets net fixings, ground sockets 6 6 Nets, page 63 8 8 Accessories, page 64 Delivery time 1 week 1 week Guarantee 5 years 5 years Product code 71 115 8801 71 113 5406 Shipping costs Surcharge for welded on carrying handles

56

net fixing in frame anodised matt silver

net fixing hidden in frame flush fitting of the net aluminium

integrated net fixing rail

ground tube (ø 30 mm) 1.20 m net fixings

rectangular sections 1.50 m net fixings

rectangular sections 1.50 m

1 week 5 years 71 113 5419

2-3 weeks 3 years 71 203 3004

3 years 71 203 3017

71 115 1406 set of 2

71 115 1406 set of 2

8 KL

8 14M

aluminium

8 14M

Applys to all goals on this page:

Top-notch football goal. • Choose between standing in ground sockets, free-standing or fully welded models •  Oval (120x100 mm) or square (80x80 mm) tubing • Extremely stable and robust • With secure net fixings

Very stable

To comply with DIN EN 748 standards, all free-standing goals have to be anchored to avoid tipping over during play and when not in use. You can meet this criterion by using the anti-tipping ground anchors. Order them at the same time: page 64. MNO

We recommend: Net Fixing Rail e

The net fixing rail has several advantages compared to standard net attachment options: • Net can be quickly and easily attached and removed • No need to screw in or insert net hooks • Net hooks can not be lost • Equal distance between attachment points The net fixing rail is fed into the tubes of the frame before the goal is welded together. Frame and rail are then one unit. The net fixing rail surrounds the entire frame, i.e. crossbar, posts and base frame.

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Youth Football Goal 5x2 m in ground sockets

Teamsport

With welded mitre joints Very sturdy corner connection thanks to the welded mitre joint

Applys to all goals on this page: • TÜV approved and complying with DIN EN 748 standards • Choice between oval (120x100 mm) or square (80x80 mm) tubing • Made from high quality aluminium tubing • Particularly weather resistant material • Very durable and long-lasting • Extremely strong and perfectly fitting aluminium moulded corner joints • Simple and quick to set up • Available with bolted or welded mitre joints year • With secure net guarantee fixing

5

Only when used with ground anchors

a Buy Now!

Goal frame: oval tubing (120x100 mm)

With bolted mitre joints and short net brackets

Welded mitre joints • Fully welded joint between posts and crossbar • Bolts together approx. 200 mm below the crossbar •  More stable and longlasting

Great Value!

Buy Now!

b

Set New! Youth's Football Goal Set

The set consists of: • 1 mobile youth football goal in ground sockets a • 1 pair of goal nets, made of 3 mm polypropylene, green, page 63 E This set includes one spare net! 71 115 7824 Set

Youth Football Goal

Goal frame: square tubing (80x80 mm)

5x2 m, in ground sockets, with net brackets

b a c Model Goal frame profile oval tubing (120x100 mm) square tubing (80x80 mm) oval tubing (120x110 mm) Design Goal depth, top: 80 cm

c Buy Now! Joint between crossbar and posts

Net attachment

stands in ground sockets, short net brackets (ø 30 mm)

welded mitre joint, bolts together approx. 200 mm below crossbar

bolted mitre joint

bolted mitre joint

net fixing in frame anodised matt silver net fixings, ground sockets

net fixing in frame anodised matt silver net fixings, ground sockets

5N 7

5N 7

Goal frame: oval tubing (120x100 mm)

We recommend:

net fixing in frame Colour anodised matt silver Accessories (included) net fixings, ground sockets 5N Nets, page 63 7 Accesories, page 64 Delivery time 1 week Guarantee 5 years Product code 71 115 7811

1 week 5 years 71 113 5901

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

1 week 5 years 71 113 5901

d Hinged Aluminium Base Frame

For youth football goals 5x2 m, for net depths 1 m, cannot be adjusted. 71 115 5512-1 Each

Accessories:

• Compatible accessories, on page 64 • Compatible goal nets, on page 63

57


Portable Youth Football Goals 5x2 m

Teamsport 4 Corner connections fit perfectly

4 With patented corner connections or welded mitre joints

Applys to all goals on this page:

Great Value!

Buy now!

• TÜV approved and complying with DIN EN 748 standards • Choice between oval (100x120 mm) or square (80x80 mm) tubing • Made from high quality aluminium tubing • Particularly weather resistant material • Very durable and long-lasting • Extremely strong and perfectly fitting aluminium moulded corner joints • Available with bolted or welded mitre joints • Includes  base frame or ground tube • With secure net year fixing guarantee

ab

4 Ground tube ø 30 mm

We recommend:

5

Goal frame: square tubing (80x80 mm)

Only when used with ground anchors

Patented corner joints b

• Additional corner reinforcement made from galvanised steel laser parts • Very stable and long lasting • Fit extremely well

Welded mitre joints

• Mitre joints of the posts and crossbar are securely welded together • Bolted approx. 200 mm below the crossbar • Improved stability and durability

c Buy now!

d

Buy now!

Welded mitre joint

4 Base frame of 80x40 mm sections

Youth Football Goal Model Tubing of goal frame Design/ Net attachment Goal depth, top 100 cm Joint between crossbar and posts

4 Base frame of square tubing 80x80 mm

Goal frame: oval tubing (120x100 mm)

5x2 m, mobile, with base frame

a square tubing (80x80 mm)

b square tubing (80x80 mm)

c square tubing (80x80 mm)

d oval tubing (120x110 mm)

mobile, with base frame, full-length net bracktes (ø 40 mm)

bolted mitre joints Net attachment

Base frame

Goal frame: square tubing (80x80 mm)

net fixing in frame

bolted mitre joints, patented corner joints

net fixing in frame

bolted mitre joints

net fixing in frame

Sets welded mitre joints, bolts together approx. 200 mm below crossbar

e Youth’s Football Goal Set

The set consists of: • 1 mobile youth football goal a • 1 pair of goal nets, made of 3 mm thick polypropylene, green, page 63, 5 This set includes 1 spare net! 71 113 5969 Set

net fixing in frame

f Youth’s Football Goal Set

Colour Goal depth, bottom Accessories (included) Nets, page 63 Accessories, page 64 Delivery time Guarantee Product code

58

ground tube (30 mm) anodised matt silver 1.20 m net fixings

ground tube (30 mm) anodised matt silver 1.20 m net fixings

aluminium tubing (80x40 mm) anodised matt silver 1.20 m net fixings

square tubing (80x80 mm), adjustable anodised matt silver 1.00 or 1.50 m net fixings

5MN KL

5MN KL

5MN M

45MNO JN

1 week 5 years 71 113 5914

1 week 5 years 71 113 5914-PE

1 week 5 years 71 113 5927

1 week 5 years 71 115 0807

The set consists of: • 1 mobile youth football goal d • 1 pair of goal nets, made of 4 mm thick polypropylene, green, page 63,4 This set includes 1 spare net! 71 113 5972 Set

Accessories:

• Compatible accessories page 64 • Compatible goal nets page 63

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Applys to all goals on this page: Top-notch mobile football goal. Super stable, heavy duty goal. • Entire goal structure is fully welded • Crossbar and posts are made from oval tubing (120x100 mm) • Made from thick-walled, reinforced sections •  Net brackets are made from super strong aluminium tubing with appropriately reinforced welded joints • TÜV approved complying with DIN EN 748 standards • Includes anti-tilt ground anchors for safe and stable stand

3

year guarantee

Only when used with ground anchors

We recommend:

New!

Fully Welded Youth Football Goal 5x2 m

4 F ully welded, portable, free-standing

Teamsport

4 Includes securing ground anchors

Great Value!

Buy now! abc 4 Optional with net clips or integrated net rail 4 Optional goal depth of 2 m or 1.5 m Goal frame ab: oval tubing (120x120 mm), sunken safety tubing Goal frame c: oval tubing (120x100 mm)

d

4 Base  frame with 80x40 mm tubing

Buy now!

e Trolley for Portable Goals

Trolley with three large inflated tyres. Runs smoothly and cannot tip over. Also suitable for uneven surfaces, can move in any direction. Free-standing football goals of any size can easily be moved by one person. For goals with base frame with oval 120/100 mm tubing, square 80x80 mm tubing and rectangular 80x40 mm tubing. Comes with two fastening straps for securing the goal. 71 230 7204 Each

New!

Goal frame d: oval tubing (120x100 mm), sunken safety tubing

Youth Football Goal Model Goal frame Design/ Net attachment Joint between crossbar and posts Net attachment

f Transport Wheels for Free-

Square tubing 80/80 mm 71 242 0918 Pair

5x2 m, fully welded, with base frame

a oval tubing (120x100 mm) safer, deeper groove in frame full-length net brackets (ø 50x4 mm)

b oval tubing (120x100 mm) safer, deeper groove in frame full-length net brackets (ø 50x4 mm)

net fixing hidden in frame; flush fitting net

Base frame

Colour Goal depth, bottom Accessories (incl.) Nets, page 63 Accessories, page 64 Delivery time Guarantee Product code

c oval tubing (120x100 mm) full-length net brackets (ø 50x4 mm)

d oval tubing (120x100 mm) safer, deeper groove in frame full-length net brackets (ø 50x4 mm)

fully welded goal construction

net fixing hidden in frame; flush fitting net

Standing Goals

Transport free-standing goals easily and hassle free. Can be used with any freestanding goal with a base frame made of oval 120/100mm tubing, square 80x80 mm tubing or rectangular 80x40 mm tubing. Made from aluminium with inflated tyres of ø 200 mm. Can easily be bolted onto the goal‘s rear ground tube. To move the goal, just tilt it gently to the back. Can also be used on pre-existing goals. Set consists of 2 transport wheels for 1 goal. Oval tubing 120/100 mm 71 242 0905 Pair

4 Base frame, oval-shaped tubing 100x120 mm

integrated, with net fixing rail

net fixing hidden in frame; flush fitting net

rectangular sections (80x40 mm) rectangular sections (80x40 mm) rectangular sections (80x40 mm) oval tubing (100x120 mm) aluminium aluminium aluminium aluminium 1.50 m 2m 1.50 m 1.50 m net fixings, net fixings, anti-tilt ground anchors net fixings, anti-tilt ground anchors anti-tilt ground anchors anti-tilt ground anchors

4O 45

2-3 weeks 3 years 71 115 0836

PQ 45

2-3 weeks 3 years 71 242 0804

4O 45

2-3 weeks 3 years 71 115 0894

4O 45

2-3 weeks 3 years 71 115 0823

Rectangular tubing 80x40 mm 71 242 0921 Pair

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

59


Teamsport

a

Buy now!

4 With bolted mitre joints

Goal frame: oval tubing (120x100 mm)

Buy now! b With net fixing c With net fixing rail, integrated

4 With welded mitre joints Goal frame: oval tubing (120x100 mm)

Set

Welded Mitre Joint (welded corner) ab Full size goals, standing in ground sockets. Set consists of: • 2 aluminium goals complying with DFB and FIFA regulations a • 3 nets, made of 3 mm polypropylene. Many teams often find damaged nets just moments before a game. This is why we provide a 3rd net in this set as a spare. 71 115 0302 Set

4 Available with bolted or welded mitre joints 4 Standing in ground sockets 4 Short net brackets Football Goals with Net Brackets • Comply with current FIFA and DFB regulations • TÜV approved and complying with DIN EN 748 standards • Made from high quality aluminium oval tubing (120x100 mm) • All weather material • Very durable and long lasting • Extremely stable and precise fitting of

Full Size Goals

aluminium cast corner joints • Choice between safe net fixing or integrated net rail • Simple and quick to set up • Available with bolted year or welded mitre joints

5

• Welded corner joint between posts and crossbar • Bolts together approx. 200 mm below the crossbar • More stable and improved longevity

guarantee

Only when used with ground anchors

7.32x2.44 m, standing in ground sockets, with short net brackets

Model Goal frame Design Goal depth top 80 cm Connection between crossbar and posts

a

b Oval tubing (120x100 mm)

c

Standing in ground sockets

Bolted mitre joints

We recommend:

Set of Football Goals

Full size goal in ground sockets

Welded mitre joint, bolts together approx. 200 mm below crossbar

Net attachment Net fixing in frame

Net attachment Colour Accessories (incl.)

Net fixings, ground sockets

Nets, page 63 Accessories, page 64 Delivery time Guarantee Product code

Net fixing in frame Short net brackets (ø 30 mm) Anodised matt silver Net fixings, ground sockets

Integrated, with net fixing bar

12JK 69

12JK 69

12JK 69

1 week 5 years 71 115 0605

1 week 5 year 71 115 0706

Ground sockets

1 week 5 years 71 115 0780

Full size goal in ground sockets, with loose net suspension

4 Top quality football goal 4 Ground sockets included 4 Used by many clubs throughout Germany and worldwide 4 Complying with current FIFA and DFB regulations

5

Only when used with ground anchors

7.32x2.44 m, standing in ground sockets, with loose net suspension

Full Size Goal Model Frame tubing Design Depth of goal 200/200 cm Connection between crossbar and posts

d –g Goal frame: oval tubing (120x100 mm) Top-notch football goal for high level performance, as used in many clubs throughout Germany but also worldwide. • Complies with current FIFA and DFB regulations • TÜV approved under DIN EN 748 • Made from high quality aluminium oval tubing (120x100 mm) • Standing in ground sockets • All weather material • Very durable and long lasting •  Available with bolted or welded mitre joints

60

Options: •  d With bolted mitre matt silver anodised •e  With bolted mitre white stove-enamelled f •  With welded mitre matt silver anodised g • With welded mitre white stove-enamelled

year guarantee

d e Oval tubing (120x100 mm) Standing in ground sockets, with loose net suspension

f g Oval tubing (120x100 mm) Standing in ground sockets, with loose net net suspension

Bolted mitre joints

Welded mitre joint bolts together approx. 200 mm below the crossbar

Net attachment

joints, joints, joints, joints,

Don’t forget to order:

Hinged base frames for goals in ground sockets, page 64

Net attachment Colour Accessories (incl.) Nets, page 63 Accessories, page 64 Guarantee Product code

Net fixing in frame Integrated, with net fixing rail Net tensioning posts incl. ground sockets, wire, ropes, clip hooks and turnbuckles Anodised matt silver White enamelled Anodised matt silver White enamelled Net holders, ground sockets

39L 69

39L 69

39L 69

39L 69

5 years 71 115 0504

5 years 71 115 0517

5 years 71 242 1100

5 years 71 242 1113

1 week

1 week

1 week

1 week

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


“Compact” Welded Football Goal 3

Teamsport

a – c Buy now!

year guarantee

Only when used with ground anchors

Full Size Goal

Youth Football Goal 5x2 m, mobile, compact, with base frame

7.32x2.44 m, mobile, compact, with base frame Model Goal frame Design Goal depth, top: 80 cm Joint between crossbar/posts and base frame

a

b c Oval tubing (120x100 mm) One piece design of crossbar and posts, welded. Full-length net brackets (ø 50x4 mm)

Bolted together

Net attachment

“Compact” Welded Football Goal

Net fixing in goal frame

Base frame tubing

Colour Accessories (incl.) Goal depth, bottom Nets, page 63 Accessories, page 64 Delivery time Guarantee Product code

Goal frame: oval tubing (120x100 mm)

Square tubing (80x80 mm)

Rectangular tubing (80x80 mm) Aluminium Net fixing 1.50 m 2.0 m

2.0 m

2JK 35KO

4O 45K

4 weeks 3 years 71 242 1504

PQ 45K

1 week 3 years 71 242 1605

4 Welded corner joints 4 Very stable 4 Quick to assemble

1 week 3 years 71 242 1618

“Compact” - Crossbar and posts as well as base frame are both welded together and form two separate parts of the goal. Just bolt the crossbar/posts construction to the base frame with selflocking screws.

its purchasing price. The compact design offers another advantage against fully welded goals: there is less stress on the Then attach the net brackets and the net construction thanks to the spring effect design. The welded joints of the posts/ and the goal is ready to use. This range is a great alternative to the frame will therefore not break as a result fully welded goals, also in terms of stabi- of fatigue. lity and durability. Thanks to its compact design, the freight costs can also be reduced significantly, which greatly reduces

Tilt-Proof Football Goal Without Additional Anchoring 3

Only when used with ground anchors

year guarantee

Full Size Goal

7.32x2.44 m fully welded Model Goal frame Design Goal depth, top: 80 cm Joint between crossbar and posts Net attachment

de Youth Football Goal 5x2 m fully welded

d

e Oval tubing (120x100 mm) Fully welded side sections (posts and net brackets), Full-length net brackets (ø 50x4 mm) Fully welded goal construction

4 Ideal for use on artificial turf and hard pitches 4 Free-standing, complies with EN 748 type 4, fully welded

Net fixing in frame Base frame Square tubing (80x80 mm) Colour Aluminium Goal depth, bottom 2.0 m 1.50 m Accessories (incl.) 2 transport handles, 4 transport wheels 2 transport handles, 3 transport wheels 2JK 4O Nets, page 63 Guarantee Product code

3 years 71 230 7103

Goal frame: oval tubing (120x100 mm)

3 years 71 230 7116

Non-tilting Aluminium Goals Without Additional Ground Anchoring

These goals are stable and fulfil the non-tilt regulations required by DIN EN 748 without any ground anchors. Each goal is secured by 4 steel weights - weights must be ordered at the same time or can be purchased in a local shop at a later stage. The goals are particularly well suited to artificial turf and hard surfaces, where no mechanical means of attachment are possible. Easy transport - just lift and tilt back by using the welded-on handles and move it easily with the castors.

4 Welded on castors for easy transport 4 I ncludes 2 transport handles

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

61


Fully Welded Football Goal, 7.32x2.44 m Teamsport 4 Mobile, top-class football goal! Super stable and able to withstand heavy use.

Reinforced section (net bracket/crossbar/posts)

Great Value!

Buy now!

a –c

4 Fully welded, mobile, free-standing 4 Anti-tilt ground anchors included 4 Entire goal is fully welded

Incl. carry handles

Full Size Goal Model Goal frame Design/ Goal depth top 80 cm Connection between crossbar and post Net attachment

Base frame

Colour Goal depth, bottom Accessories (inkl.) Nets, page 63 Accessories, page 64 Delivery time Guarantee Product code

Fully Welded Football Goal

Goal frames cd: oval tubing (120x100 mm)

7.32x2.44 m  , fully welded, with base frame a b oval tubing (120x100 mm) oval tubing (120x100 mm) deeper sitting grooves for safe net attachment deeper sitting grooves for safe net attachment full-length net brackets full-length net brackets (ø 50x4 mm) (ø 50x4 mm)

d oval tubing (120x100 mm) full-length net brackets (ø 50x4 mm)

fully welded goal construction

net fixing hidden in frame, flush fitting net

net fixing hidden in frame, flush fitting net

Top-notch mobile football goal. Super stable, heavy duty goal. • Entire goal structure is fully welded • Crossbar and posts are made from oval tubing (120x100 mm) • Made from thick-walled, reinforced sections •  Net brackets are made from super strong aluminium tubing with appropriately reinforced welded joints • TÜV approved complying with DIN EN 748 standards • Includes anti-tilt ground anchors for safe and stable stand

3

integrated, with net fixing rail

year guarantee

Only when used with ground anchors square tubing (80x80 mm) aluminium 2.00 m safety anchoring system, welded handles, net fixings

square tubing (80x80 mm) aluminium 1.50 m safety anchoring system, welded handles, net fixings

square tubing (80x80 mm) aluminium 2.00 m safety anchoring system, welded handles

2-3 weeks 3 years 71 115 0908

2-3 weeks 3 years 71 234 6205

2-3 weeks 3 years 71 306 4203

2JK 35

New!

62

Goal frames ab: oval tubing (120x100 mm), deeper sitting grooves for safety

1 35

d

2JK 35

New! Trolley for Portable

Goals

Trolley with three large inflated tyres. Runs smoothly and cannot tip over. Also suitable for uneven surfaces, can move in any direction. Free-standing football goals of any size can easily be moved by one person. For goals with base frame with oval 120/100 mm tubing, square 80x80 mm tubing and rectangular 80x40 mm tubing. Comes with two fastening straps for securing the goal. 71 230 7204-1 Each

We recommend: Net Fixing Rail d

The net fixing rail has certain advantages compared to standard net attachment options: • Net can be quickly and easily attached and removed • No need to screw in or insert net hooks • Net hooks cannot be lost • Equal distance between attachment points The net fixing rail is fed into the tubes of the frame before the goal is welded together. Frame and rail are then one unit. The net fixing rail surrounds the entire frame, i.e. crossbar, posts and base frame.

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Goal Nets Teamsport Knot-Free Net for 7.32x2.44 m Football Goals • Net width: 750 cm •N  et height: 250 cm with tensioning line, all nets comply with DIN EN 748 Cord thickness 3 mm Mesh width 12 cm For free net suspension Polypropylene cord • Polyester cord a See illustration Colours: green 71 116 0303 white green/white blue/white red/white yellow/blue black/white black/yellow black/red Features: Price per pair* single-coloured two-coloured 1 …corresponds with net:

Goal depth: top 80 cm bottom 150 cm 4 mm 12 cm

Goal depth: top 80 cm bottom 200 cm

4 mm 12 cm

5 mm 12 cm

3 mm 12 cm

4 mm 12 cm

3.5 mm honeycomb design

3 mm 4.5 cm

a

a

ab

d

c

71 115 3008 71 115 3011

71 116 0316

71 113 1505 71 113 1518 71 113 1563 71 113 1550 71 113 1576

a 71 115 2715 71 115 2728

71 115 3402

71 113 1589 71 113 1534 71 113 1547

1

1

1

2

Knot-Free Net for 5x2 m Youth Football Goals • Net width: 515 cm •N  et height: 205 cm with tensioning lines, complying with DIN EN 748

Goal depth: top 80 cm bottom 150 cm

71 226 8750 71 226 8763 71 226 8776

• •

3.5 mm honeycomb • •

3 mm 4.5 cm • •

ab

d

c

71 115 3327 71 115 3330 71 115 3112 71 115 3109 71 115 3125

71 226 8806

71 115 3167 71 115 3154

chessboard design small mesh J

K

Goal depth: top 90 cm bottom 200 cm

Knot-Free Net for 3x2 m Small Goals Goal depth: top 80 cm bottom 100 cm

Cord thickness 4 mm 5 mm Mesh width 10 cm 10 cm Polypropylene cord • • Polyester cord Honeycombed Complies with DIN EN749 Additional lower tensioning line Quick release fasteners a a See illustration Colours: 71 115 3604 71 115 3806 green 71 115 3620 71 115 3819 white 71 115 3617 yellow Price per pair* 6 6 …corresponds with net:

4 mm

71 226 8705 71 226 8718 71 226 8721 71 226 8734

71 226 8819

71 226 8747 chessboard design small mesh

3

9

L

New!

Cord thickness 3.5 mm 4 mm 4 mm Mesh width 12 cm 12 cm honeycomb design Polypropylene cord • • • d a b See illustration Colours: green 71 227 3509 white 71 227 3512 green/white 71 115 4809 71 306 4030 blue/white 71 306 4043 71 115 4812 red/white 71 115 4825 71 306 4056 Features: chessboard design Price per pair* single-coloured two-coloured 4 4 O …corresponds with net:

• Net width: 310 cm •N  et height: 210 cm with tensioning lines, complying with DIN EN 749

2

Goal depth: top 200 cm bottom 200 cm

4.75 mm 10 cm • • •

4 mm 12 cm • a 71 242 1908 71 242 1911

P

71 212 0704 6

4 mm 12 cm • b

3 mm 12 cm • a

71 113 1420 71 113 1433

4 mm 12 cm • a

71 115 3907 71 115 3910 71 242 2002 71 242 2015 71 242 2028

Q

Includes: • Upper  and lower tensioning lines with quick release fasteners • E lastic edging Goal depth: top 80/bottom 100 cm 4 mm 4 mm 10 cm 10 cm • • • • • a

c

Goal depth: top 100 bottom 100 4 mm 12 cm • b

a

3 mm 4.5 cm • c

3.5 mm honeycomb design • d

71 227 3525 71 115 6108 71 227 3538 71 228 8202 71 115 6111 71 115 6124

71 306 4001 71 306 4014 71 306 4027 small mesh chessboard design

5

5

Goal depth: top 80 bottom 150 cm 4 mm 10 cm •

• • • a

71 113 1417

• 

5 mm 12 cm

71 206 0200 71 206 0213

7 7 8 * Individual goal nets are available at half the pair price plus 5%

5

5

a polypropylene (knot-free)

M

N

b Two-coloured nets in your club colours

ab Knot-Free Goal Net

Easy to fit: The shape of the net and light weight ensure net fitting is problem-free. Attractive design/long lifespan: The strong polypropylene and the knot-free mesh give the nets their particular shape, prevent the mesh connection points from slipping and make the nets very resistant to abrasion.

c

d

c Tightly Meshed Goal Net

Net Holder

Made of high quality plastic. 115 4506 e 71 White, 14x10x32 mm 115 4519 f 71 Orange, 14x10x32 cm

These nets with a mesh width of 4.5 cm look very smart. Another benefit: they an be used as an anti-hooligan net, as they will protect the goalie against cans, bottles and other objects being thrown. They also prevent misuse of the net as a climbing net.

e Pack of 10 Pack of 10

g Rhombus Shaped Net Holder

With V2A metal hooks, 23x15.2x8 mm. 71 115 4304  Pack of 10

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

d Football Goal Net with Chess-

f g

board Pattern

For Advice and Ordering – give us a call! Phone: +49 5357 181-543

Top quality design, bright colours. Thanks to a new machining technique, knot-free goal nets with honeycomb shaped mesh are now also available in alternating colour scheme.

63


Teamsport Goal Accessories Weights for Securing the Goals 1

1

Goal Anchoring

Sport-Thieme® Weight Bags

For securing goals. The weight bags are used for stabilising free-standing goals. Simply fill the two chambers in the bags with sand, close with the special sealing strip and lay on the base frame. 6 bags are required per goal. Weight per filled bag approx. 20 kg. 50x39 cm, set of 6 bags = 120 kg. Light polypropylene fabric. Coated and UV resistant. 71 115 5440  Price for 6

New! 5

New!

J

K

J Sport-Thieme® Ground Anchoring System

For mobile goals 5x2 m with 80x80mm base frame tubing. Consisting of: • 4 anchoring brackets • 4 ground anchors / fixtures • 1 set is sufficient for 1 goal 71 115 5408 Set

2 34

K Spindle Goal Anchor

Fast and simple to attach. The 30 cm long spindle is screwed into the ground and the Velcro strap is attached to the back of the goal‘s base frame. Assembly is quick and easy and the goals stand solidly. Set consists of 2 spindles for 1 goal. 71 115 2034 Set

L Sport-Thieme® Flexi Goal Anchor

L

Consisting of abrasion and weather resistant webbing with 4 eyelets to accommodate different goal frame tubing. Comes as a set for one goal, with 4 straps and 4 ground pegs. Strap 43 cm long, ground peg 27 cm long. 71 115 5437 Set

Additional Safety Weights

For free-standing goals. A well designed construction ensuring that the goal does not tip. Suitable for all free-standing goals on grass, synthetic surfaces, Astroturf or hard courts. The additional weights sit on either side of the rear base frame tubing. The weights are secured to the goal with 2 brackets with carrying handles. Weighing approx. 55 kg each when filled with quartz sand. Set includes 2 weights (unfilled) for 1 goal. Length 1.50 m. tubing 120x100 mm 2 Oval 71 242 1706 Set

3 4

5 Additional Safety Weights “Fahrbar”

Note on Safety

For free-standing goals. Two transport wheels with extra wide wheel base and a large welded transport handle ensure an easy and trouble-free transport of the additional weights. The weights are simply put on the base frame of the goal. The main advantage: thanks to their special design, the weights are suitable for all shapes of frame tubing. Weighing approx. 80 kg each 80x80 cm square tubing when filled with quartz sand. 1 set con71 242 1719 Set sists of 2 weights (unfilled) for 1 goal. Tank length 1.50 m, total length 1.90 m Rectangular tubing 80x40 mm 71 242 1722 Set 71 242 1807 Set

The TÜV approval “GS” on any mobile goal is only effective when the goal is secured with a safety anchoring system. All mobile goals must be appropriately stabilised so they cannot tip over.

M NO

80x40 mm

For goals with 80/40 mm base frame tubing. Set consisting of 2 anchors for 1 goal. 71 115 8915 Set

Hinged Aluminium Base Frames

N Safety Anchoring System

For mobile goals with 80x80 mm base frame tubing, spiral shaped anchors, fixing bracket with wing nuts. For use on grass. A set consists of 2 anchors for one goal. 71 115 5411 Set

6 Hinged Aluminium Base Frame

6 78

Protection for your nets. For all goals sized 7.32x2.44 m. Makes taking care of your lawn easier and protects the nets and your lawnmower from damage. Depth of net can be adjusted between 1.50 and 2.00 m. Easy to assemble. 71 115 5509 Each

O Safety Anchoring System 120x100 mm

For mobile goals with base frame made of 120x100 mm oval tubing. Set consists of 2 anchors for one goal. 71 115 5424 Set

7 Hinged Aluminium

Buy Now!

Base Frame

For youth football goals 5x2 m, for net depths of 1 m, not adjustable. 71 115 5512 Each

M Safety Anchoring System

Tubing:

8 Hinged Aluminium

For Advice and Ordering – give us a call! Phone: +49 5357 181-543

Base Frame

For small goals 3x2 m, for net depths of 1.00 m, not adjustable. 71 115 5525 Each

M

N

O

Goal Net Suspension

9 “Bundesliga” Aluminium Base Frame, hinged

9

Buy Now! 64

Protection for your nets. For goal size 7.32x2.44 m. A base frame made from super strong 80x40 mm tubing. Net fixings not included. 71 210 9709 Goal depth 150 cmEach 71 210 9712 Goal depth 200 cmEach

P

P Goal Net Suspension: “Super”

Includes 1 set of U-shaped net brackets, 80 cm deep, with diagonal brace. For convenient net suspension, ensuring nets will last for longer as wear is minimised. Complete set of 2 brackets for 1 goal. 71 115 5004 Pair

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Sport-Thieme® Training Aids Practical training aids for school, club and recreational sports

4 Set of 40

Teamsport

4 Set of 30

c a

b

15 cm

4 Set of 40

ø 30 cm

a Marking Plates

ø 19 cm, 5 cm high, 40 plates in 4 different colours on 1 stack and transport holder. 71 130 0808-3  Price for 40

b Marking Saucers

ø 20 cm, 8.5 cm high, 40 saucers in four different colours on a carrying bar. 71 130 0811-2  Price for 40

Marking Plates / Saucers

The practical training aid for school, club and recreational sports. Made from impact resistant plastic, easy to carry, no risk of injury, quick to set up and clear away.

c Marking Cones

Made from durable plastic, with four recesses for poles, so that mini hurdles can be built for training. 30 cones in 3 different colours with a practical carrying stand. Height 15 cm, ø 30 cm. 71 130 0909-1  Price for 30

Don’t forget to order: Gymnastics Bars, page 291

1 set

New!

Set of 6

Set of 4

Buy Now! and Border Cones d Marking 130x130x230 mm

71 130 0664-1 RedEach 71 130 0651-1 YellowEach 205x205x370 mm 71 130 0677-1 RedEach 71 130 0680-1 YellowEach

f

New! Samicap Training Aid

World first in football training. Ideal for football clubs and schools. Train e Marking Cones 10 cones, 2 of each colour. Orange, your goal shots, ball handling, fitness and yellow, red, blue and green. coordination with one device. You can com71 130 0635 130x130x230 mm  Set of 10 bine and add on to these sets as you 71 130 0622 205x205x370 mm  Set of 10 please.

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

One Samicap training set includes: • 1 base • 3 bars • 2 bar holders 71 308 3404 1 setSet 71 308 3417 Set of 4Set 71 308 3420 Set of 6Set

65


Teamsport Football Training Aids Height 29 cm

Includes protective padding

b c

Height 23 cm

d

Height 15 cm

Self-righting

Folding feet

b Return Mini Training Hurdle

4 Can be adjusted at three levels

This new hurdle automatically returns to its upright position after having been knocked down saving time going around putting hurdles up again. It is a perfect training device and can be used in a variety of ways. Stable, light aluminium construction with folding feet. Height adjustable from 40-60 cm in 5x 5 cm stages, width 81 cm. 1.6 kg. 71 124 3114-1 Each

Great Value! Buy Now!

c Return Midi Training Hurdle

Height can be adjusted from 55-84 cm, weight 2.2 kg. 71 124 3101-1 Each

d Return Maxi Training Hurdle

Height adjustable from 66-106 cm. Seven heights: 66, 71, 76, 84, 81, 100 and 106 cm, width 88 cm. 2.6 kg. 71 124 3127-1 Each

Also take a look at: More Training Hurdles, pages 118-119

a Mini Training Hurdles

Training hurdles that can be adjusted at three heights. Very versatile: as a training aid for football but also for running, jumping, sprinting and coordination exercises. Can be set at: 15, 23 and

29 cm. Made from strong, shockproof plastic. 40 cm wide. For indoor and outdoor use. Orange. 71 227 0601 IndividualEach 71 227 0614 Set Set of 6

Set

f Sport-Thieme Saturn Rings

4 Folds  away to save space 4 Easy to assemble 4 Made  from unbreakable plastic 4 1 2 hurdles

e Football Mini Hurdle Set

Made from break-proof plastic. Quick and easy to assemble and disassemble. Ideal in flexible football training sessions for running technique, speed

66

training and training more complex moves. The set consists of 2 mini hurdles of 10 cm, 20 cm, 30 cm, 40 cm, 50 cm and 60 cm in height. 71 217 8367  Price for 12

Patent 19820022. Versatile game and training aid - perfect for both indoors and outdoors! This sports and fun aid will captivate young and old, big and small with its almost endless combinations. Do you want to train and play with new combinations and using your own ideas? With Saturn Rings this is no problem: You simply place the Saturn Rings on the floor or position them on the cones, quickly add the gymnastics bar and hey presto, you‘re ready. Use Saturn Rings for practising agility, skills and speed with the obstacles of your choice at different heights. Great fun. 71 130 0505-3 Each

Set g Saturn Ring Set

Consisting of: • 12 Saturn rings f • 12 marking cones 38 cm high • 12 gym bars 100 cm long 71 130 0518-3 Set

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Football Training Aids Teamsport a 4 Sets of 5

e loosely placed

With plastic spring joint

f tightly secured

Base with cross slot for holding objects such as gymnastics hoops

4 Quickly and easily adjustable to 6 different heights d Multi Height Clip

The crossbar can be placed at six different heights The training aid for all types of in 5 cm steps. Made from sports! A modular system that offers endstrong plastic. Bars not incluless variations with a minimum number of ded. components for pre-schools, schools, gene71 143 7469-1 Pair 4 Can  fit 30 slalom ral sports up to high performance training. A bar, a base and a clip are the basic elepoles ments, that can be assembled in any shape you wish. All parts are made from supple plastic and the weight of the base guaran- e Pole and Crossbar a Slalom Poles tees high stability. The clips can be moved 150 cm long, ø 26 mm. Made of plastic with metal tips, approx. to any height on the 158 cm long pole. The 71 143 7427-1 Each 10 cm long, for sticking into the ground. Ideal crossbar can be fixed firmly onto the clips for co-ordination and dribble training. or can simply rest on them. The clips can be f Rotational Clip Pole length above ground approx. 170 cm, b Shoulder Bag for 71 143 7414-1 Each turned 360 degrees into any position. One ø 3.2 cm. Available in two variations: with Slalom Poles training kit consists of: and without the plastic spring joint. Made from robust nylon, with zip. Suitag Base • 2 bases with 2 poles ø 20 cm, height 11 cm, with slots to Comes in set of 5, in assorted colours. ble for 30 slalom poles a. 175x35x35 • 2 clips with 1 crossbar insert hoops. 71 144 7402 Without spring joint Set of 5 cm. Black. 71 144 7415 With plastic spring jointSet of 5 71 228 7805 Each 71 143 7212-1 Set 71 143 7401-1 Each

c Sport-Thieme® Training Aids

Individual Parts

h 4 Bright, large display 4 Easy to use

h “Speed Trac” Sport Radar

Ideal for additional speed evaluation! Who has the fastest tennis serve? Who the strongest goal shot? - This product guarantees fun at any sporting or other event! • Training aid for football, handball, athletics, etc. • Measures speeds of approaching objects • Clearly legible LED display (3 digits) • Light yet strong casing • Simple to use

Specifications: • Size (LxWxH): approx. 18x16x6.5 cm • Approx. 250 g • Measures from 56-199 km/h • Detection: 40 degrees horizontally and 60 degrees vertically, up to a range of approx. 20 m • Accuracy: ± 2-3 km/h • Mobile operation with six LR14 batteries (not included) 71 146 1132 Without mains adapterEach 71 306 6616 With mains adapter Each

i Mains Adapter

For 230 V mains connection for “Speed Trac”. 71 146 1145 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

j

New! Weight Sled with

Harness

Metal sled for optimal results in speed training. Additional cast iron discs (with a hole diameter of at least 2 cm) can be

added to the sled. Comes with harness and towing rope and has a net weight of approx. 9 kg. Approx. 50x37x6 cm. 71 210 1617 Each

67


Teamsport Fitness and Coordination Football Training The “Agility” Coordination Ladder A Classic for Coordination Training!

Comes in a practical storage and transport bag

Buy Now!

Suction cups Includes ground for fixing to hall pegs for fixing to floors sports grounds

b “Agility” Coordination Ladder

Teaching coordination and fitness is a pivotal part of modern progressive football lessons. This new educational aid will help develop leg work, coordination as well as speed, using different types of exercises. The coordination ladder is ideal for use in developing a sense of rhythm. Width approx. 42 cm, extra flat rungs, adjustable distances. Includes pegs for fixing to ground and suction cups for attaching to the floors of halls. The coordination ladder is supplied in a practical storage and transport bag. 71 137 3934-1 4 mEach 71 137 3921-1 8 mEach

c Coordination Ladder “Agility”, double

Set a 8 m Coordination Ladder + Exercise Handbook

71 137 3950-1 Set

New!

This coordination ladder comes in 4 and 8 m lengths. It is characterised by the 2x 10 or 2x 18 flat and adjustable rungs with a width of approx. 40 cm per rung (total width approx. 80 cm). Includes pegs for sports fields and suction cups for hall floors. The coordination ladder comes in a practical storage and carrying bag. 71 137 3963-1 4 mEach 71 137 3976-1 8 mEach

4 Reliable thanks to Velcro fastening

d Reivo® Resistance Belt

Elastic Reivo band, 4 m long, with extra large Velcro loops. The long Velcro fastenings are very reliable for strength and speed training. 71 210 1301 Each

Set g “Jump” Goalie Trainer

e Set of 8 Coordination Hoops

The set consists of: • 8 hoops, ø 50 cm assorted colours 71 135 5808  Set of 8

68

Newly developed training aid for jump and speed training. Ideal for flanking, diving and side step exercises. Regular training with the belt will greatly improve speed and jumping. Very comfortable to wear, thanks to the wide 100% nylon waist belt. The special rubber rope with enormous stretch f Original Deuserband runs smoothly through the loops that are The classic training band with high tensile strength, perfect for targeting wea- attached. The ends are fixed to the posts using the flaps designed for the purpose. ker muscles and for strengthening exerAlso suitable for other types of sports cises after an injury or illness. Rubber where jumping and speed are important band approx. 35 mm wide and 100 cm components of success. long, instructions included. 71 148 5107-1 Each 71 212 3400 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Football Training Aids Teamsport Great Value!

New!

Buy Now! Top Rated

sport-thieme.com

a 4 Easy to

assemble

b Sport-Thieme® a “Pugg Pop up” Football Training Goal

The perfect solution for professional and recreational sports. Safe and sturdy, no risk of injury caused by tipping or sharp edges. No more space, storage or transport problems. Each goal set includes a bag, foldable to approx. 5 cm. Comes with ground attachments for grass surfaces.

Foldable Mini Goal

4 Collapsible 4 Little space needed 4 Easy to transport 4 Visible net

Easy to transport and strong for training. Can be used as a training goal for football, street hockey or fun sports like beach football and beach handball. Its Quick and easy to assemble and disasspecial folding mechanism means that it semble in just a few simple steps. is easy to transport and erect. This makes Available in 2 sizes. it ideal for different uses. When in use the 71 234 0500 Blue, 122x76x76 cmPair folding mechanism can be locked securely 71 234 0513 Yellow, 183x107x107 cmPair in place. The net is permanently

Mini Goal “Gym”

connected to the goal with a special net pole that covers the whole goal. The frame is made of powder-coated steel tubing, net is made from polyethylene. 60x90x70 cm, approx. 5 kg 71 115 1712 Each 135x100x110 cm, approx. 8 kg 71 115 1738 Each

Buy Now!

4 Lightweight yet robust 4 Portable

160 cm

c “Gym” Mini Goal

110 cm

Made from strong interlocking plastic tubes, ideal for home use but also in pre-schools, schools and as a training goal on the football pitch. Includes net 160x110 cm. 71 197 4153 Each

Don’t forget to order: • Marking cones, page 65 • Footballs, page 4-8

Set

luding official footGame instructions inc ilable in our shop: ava are es ball tennis rul sport-thieme.com

d

New! Football Tennis Set

Design complies with official football tennis regulations. The set consists of two posts with tensioning hooks and one 9 m long net, 1 m high. The posts and the net are tensioned with the aid of a tensioning cord on the side. Posts have metal tips. 71 217 7609 Set

e Football Tennis Set

The aluminium set is quick and easy to assemble and is therefore ideally suited for transport from one place to another. 4 cast iron weights (10 kg each) ensure good stability. Comes with net and quick tensioning system, size: 6.10x0.85 m. 71 136 8811 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

e 4 Aluminium posts 4 Includes 4 cast iron weights

69


Teamsport Handball Goals Indoor Handball Goal 3x2 m, standing in ground sockets

Blue/silver

Black/silver

4 Available in 3 different colours

a

Red/silver

Sport-Thieme® Handball Goal 3x2 m, standing in ground sockets These goals are very sturdy and stable. Come with net brackets, struts and ground frame, post end caps and frame net fixings. • Square 80x80 mm frame sections, goal depth at top 1.03 m, goal depth at bottom 1.20 m • Surface silver anodised, with black, red or blue plastic highlights • Equipped with particularly strong net brackets made from galvanised steel tubes • The net hangs freely between the net brackets, making it impossible for the ball to bounce out of the net

• Extremely sturdy and precision-fitted aluminium cast corner joints • No damage to hall floors – tubing and post end caps mean that the aluminium/steel parts never touch the hall floor • All bolts with integrated safety mechanism – they will therefore not come loose •  Includes safe frame net fixings and ground sockets 80x80 mm – insertion depth 300 mm, with end caps • Quick and easy to assemble and disassemble • 5 year guarantee

Indoor Handball Goal Without Net Brackets

a Sport-Thieme® Indoor

Handball Goal 3x2 m, standing in ground sockets

Made of light alloy to EN 749 standards, for insertion in ground sockets.

With hinged net brackets. Bolted corner joints 71 113 6513 Black/silverEach 71 239 2703 Red/silverEach 71 239 2716 Blue/silverEach

Welded corner joints With fixed net brackets. 71 113 6542 Black/silverEach Bolted corner joints 71 239 2501 Red/silverEach 71 113 6500 Black/silverEach 71 239 2514 Blue/silverEach 71 239 2400 Red/silverEach 71 239 2413 Blue/silverEach Welded corner joints 71 113 6539 Black/silverEach 71 239 2602 Red/silverEach 71 239 2615 Blue/silverEach

Ordering Details

Compatible nets are not included in the price of the goal. For nets see page 73 FG

Wooden Handball Goal 3x2 m c Buy Now!

4 Available in 3 different colours

b Sport-Thieme Indoor ®

Handball Goal, 3x2 m, without net brackets

To be inserted into ground sockets, for free-hanging net suspension via tensioning lines attached to the hall wall. Made from light alloy complying with EN 749 standards. Comes with post end caps, frame net fixings and ground sockets. • Posts and crossbar made of 80x80 mm sections • Surface silver anodised, with black, red or blue plastic highlights • Net suspended from the hall wall

70

• Extremely sturdy and precision-fitted aluminium cast corner joints • All bolts with integrated safety mechanism - they will therefore not come loose • Includes safe frame net fixings and ground sockets 80x80 mm – insertion depth 300 mm, with end caps. 5 year guarantee! 71 113 6526 Black/silverEach 71 239 2804 Red/silverEach 71 239 2817 Blue/silverEach

Also take a look at: Nets: page 73 FG

4 Robust design made from wood 4 Metal frame ensures it is very stable 4 Suitable for indoor and outdoor use 4 Frame and net brackets are hot dip galvanised

Compact storage thanks to hinged net brackets

d Sport-Thieme® “Standard” Indoor Handball Goal

c Sport-Thieme® “Special” Indoor Handball Goal

Wooden goal frame. Compact storage because it is easy to dismantle. Improved design with reinforced and galvanised tubular net brackets, protective rubber feet included. Goal depth 1.25 m. Not illustrated. 71 113 3905 Each

Free-standing wooden indoor handball goal. With hinged net brackets, particularly stable. Posts and crossbar are additionally bolted to a galvanised metal frame. The net brackets are connected with e Replacement Screw Hooks a telescopic crossbar at the top and can be For net attachment to wooden handfolded down. Incl. welded on net hooks. ball goal 71 113 3905. 1 set of 50 screw Goal depth 1.25 m. hooks is needed for one goal. 71 113 3703 Each 71 115 4203  Price for 50

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Handball Goals Teamsport Aluminium Indoor Handball Goals

Aluminium Indoor Handball Goals with patented corner joints Patented Sport-Thieme® steel corner joints

b Buy Now! a Buy Now! 4 Two point ground attachment

b Sport-Thieme® Indoor Handball

4 Available in 3 different colours

Goal 3x2 m

a Sport-Thieme® Indoor Handball Goal 3x2 m, free-standing

Made of light alloy, complies with EN 749 standards, free-standing. Comes with net brackets and ground frame, post end caps. For indoor and outdoor use. • Posts/crossbar made of 80x80 mm sections • Goal depth at top 1.03 m, goal depth at bottom 1.20 m • Surface matt silver anodised, with black, red or blue plastic highlights • Incl. safety system net fixings • Incl. 2-point ground attachment to prevent the goal tipping or sliding • Easy to assemble with accurately fitting accessories and drill holes 5 year guarantee!

With hinged net brackets

With fixed net brackets Bolted corner joints 71 115 0953 Black/silverEach 71 239 2905 Red/silverEach 71 239 2918 Blue/silverEach

With hinged net brackets Bolted corner joints 71 115 0911 Black/silverEach 71 239 3100 Red/silverEach 71 239 3113 Blue/silverEach

Welded corner joints 71 115 0937 Black/silverEach 71 239 3009 Red/silverEach 71 239 3012 Blue/silverEach

Welded corner joints 71 115 0940 Black/silverEach 71 239 3201 Red/silverEach 71 239 3214 Blue/silverEach All mobile goals must be additionally secured against tipping over.

Ordering Details

Compatible nets are not included in the price of the goal. For nets see page 73 FG

Don’t forget to order: Handballs, page 12-13

4 High accuracy of fit 4 Two point ground attachment 4 Available in 3 different colours

Note on Safety

DIN standards request that goals must be secured against sliding and tipping over and that the horizontal crossbar must be able to withstand a force of 950 N. The owner is liable if the goals are not properly secured to the ground and therefore is open to being sued for damages.

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

Made of light alloy with net brackets made of steel tubing complying with EN 749 standards and with patented corner joints. Topclass handball goal. Net brackets made from steel tubing and the patented corner joints make the goal incredibly strong. During handball games, the corner areas of the crossbar/ post structure are subjected to particularly high forces. Sturdy corner joints are therefore extremely important. The patented corner joint is not only precision-fitted, but it also gives the corner joint unprecedented stability and guarantees excellent durability. Another advantage: no visible screw connections on the crossbar/posts, as the net bracket is screwed directly to the corner joint of the goal frame from the rear. • Posts/crossbar  made of 80x80 mm sections • Goal depth at the top 1.03 m, goal depth at the bottom 1.20 m • Surface silver anodised, with black, red or blue plastic highlights • Includes safety system net fixings • Easy  to set up thanks to accurately fitting accessories and drill holes • Sturdy, patented steel corner joints • Includes  2-point floor attachment 5 year guarantee! Free-standing With hinged net brackets 71 201 0902 Black/silverEach 71 201 0944 Red/silverEach 71 201 0957 Blue/silverEach With fixed net brackets 71 201 0915 Black/silverEach 71 201 0960 Red/silverEach 71 201 0973 Blue/silverEach

With hinged net brackets

Standing in ground sockets With hinged net brackets 71 203 4515 Black/silverEach 71 203 4531 Red/silverEach 71 203 4544 Blue/silverEach With fixed net brackets 71 203 4502 Black/silverEach 71 203 4557 Red/silverEach 71 203 4560 Blue/silverEach Without net brackets 71 203 4528 Black/silverEach 71 203 4573 Red/silverEach 71 203 4586 Blue/silverEach

Ground Anchors

c Sport-Thieme®

Floor Anchors for Hall Floors

These floor fixings are sunk into the top layer of the floor and screwed down. The goals are secured using safety screws. Fixings incl. 70 mm threaded star knob screw with plastic head and dowels (2 per goal). 71 115 4900 Each

d Sport-Thieme®

Floor Anchors for Outdoor Equipment

The metal sockets with threaded inserts are cemented directly into the ground (foundation dimensions: 30x30x20 cm). Consists of metal socket and star knob screw. Two are required per goal. 71 115 4913 Each

71


Teamsport Handball Goals Goal Brackets Made to Measure Patented corner joints, patent number: 10135056

b

for short distances between wall and court markings

c Buy Now!

When placing your order, please inform us of the required bracket depths for both top and bottom.

Age-Appropriate Handball Goals

a Sport-Thieme® Mini Handball Goal 3.00x1.60 m

With new, patented corner joints. Free-standing goal. Goal frames and net brackets made from sturdy aluminium special sections. The patented steel corner joints, as in our handball goal 3x2 m, give the goal a high degree of stability and durability. The net brackets are foldable for compact storage. This goal can be set up anywhere, e.g. in school playgrounds, on your drive or in the garden. • Goal frame made from square 80x80 mm sections • Net brackets made from round tubing ø 40 mm • The unique construction allows the net brackets to be folded down for compact storage. Just loosen 2 screws.

The German Handball Federation introduced mini handball for girls and boys between the ages of 6 and 9. The game is played according to simplified rules. The game is all about enjoyment, fun and the experience of working in groups. It is also a playful introduction to technique.

c Indoor Aluminium Handball Goals

With made to measure shortened net brackets. For halls with insufficient space for a standard goal depth due to the short • Internal goal dimensions 3.00x1.60 m distance between the wall and the court • Goal depth 1 m markings. • Aluminium surface • Made to measure goal brackets, ideal for • Net brackets made from aluminium narrow distances from the wall tubing ø 40 mm • When placing your order, just inform us • Safety system net fixings included. of the required bracket depths for both 71 115 1637 Each top and bottom • Goal frame made from aluminium square Goal Nets for Mini Handball b 80x80 mm sections Goals • Exceptionally stable and unbreakable WxH: 3.00x1.60 m, made from knot-free construction with solid corner joints green 4 mm polyethylene. • Net hooks are recessed into frame 71 115 3705 Pair • Net brackets made from steel tubes,

a free net bracket construction guarantees that balls will not hit any metal parts within the goal • Black/silver as standard • Also available in red/silver and blue/silver on request These goals must be anchored to the ground or secured to the wall. 71 115 0924 Each

Ordering Details

Compatible nets are not included in the price of the goal. For nets see page 73 FG

Goal Accessories

f

f Sport-Thieme® Additional

Crossbar for Mini Handball Games

d Buy Now! 4 Easy transport 4 Compact storage

For reducing the size of the goal (from 3x2 m to 3x1.6 m), can be easily attached to existing goals. The additional crossbar can quickly be set up or taken down as it is

attached to the posts with strong brackets using hand wheels. The additional crossbar fits all standard Sport-Thieme handball goals. The gap between the original and the additional crossbar can be covered with a small net (included). 71 113 3400 Each

g

d Sport-Thieme® Goal Trolley

For compact storage of for your indoor handball goals. The majority of damage caused to indoor handball goals occurs during transportation from the equipment room to the place of use. With our trolleys, damage can be prevented because the goal frames are placed onto the trolley in their upright position and

e 72

can be moved around easily and safely. Two foldable goals can be transported and stored conveniently and safely on one trolley. When loaded with the goals, the trolley only has a height of 214 cm and is 50 cm wide. 71 131 1600 Each

Set g Sport-Thieme® Goal Cover

For closing the gap between the original crossbar and the additional crossbar at 1.60 m for mini handball. Made from e Roller Unit strong blue canvas, with 8 double sided For handball goals, with 4 swivel Velcro straps to attach cover to the goal. castors for easy transport of your goals. 316x40 cm. Two are necessary per goal. 71 122 4812-1 Pair 71 115 1305 Each

® h Sport-Thieme Mini

Handball Goal Set

Consisting of: • 1 additional crossbar f • 1 goal cover g 71 113 3413 Set

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Handball Goal Accessories Teamsport a Handball Goal Nets with Chessboard Pattern

New, two-coloured handball goal nets with honeycomb mesh and chessboard pattern. Knot-free goal nets made from very strong polypropylene, approx. 3.5 mm thick with elastic cord, which protects the outer rows of mesh. In the regulation size: 3.10 m wide, 2.10 m high, goal depth at top 80 cm, depth at bottom 100 cm. Mesh width 10 cm. 71 227 1301 White/greenPair 71 227 1314 White/bluePair 71 227 1327 White/redPair

a Buy Now!

b

4 New, 2-coloured handball goal nets with honeycomb mesh and chessboard pattern b Catching Net for Indoor Handball Goals

Size: 2x3 m, includes 8 m cord for attaching to indoor handball goals. Mesh width 10 cm. Polypropylene, 3 mm thick, white 71 227 1529 Pair Polypropylene, 4 mm thick, green 71 227 1503 Pair Polyester, 4 mm thick, white 71 227 1516 

Pair

Knot-free Nets for Small and Indoor Handball Goals

Includes: • Upper and lower tensioning lines with quick release fasteners • Elastic edging

• Net width: 300 cm • Net height: 200 cm with tensioning lines complying with DIN EN 749 standards

Goal depth: top 80 / bottom 100 cm Cord thickness 4 mm 5 mm Mesh width 10 cm 10 cm Polypropylene cord • • Polyester cord Honeycomb Complying with DIN EN 749 Additional lower tensioning line Quick release fastening See illustration Colours: 71 115 3604-2 71 115 3806-1 Green 71 115 3620-2 71 115 3819-1 White 71 115 3617-2 Yellow White/green White/blue White/red Single-coloured • • Two-coloured F F ...corresponds with net: Individual goal nets are available at half the pair price plus 5%

Goal depth: top 80 / bottom 100 cm

4.75 mm 10 cm •

3.5 mm 10 cm •

• •

71 212 0704-1

H

71 227 1301 71 227 1314 71 227 1327 chessboard design •

M

4 mm 10 cm •

4 mm 10 cm

• •

• •

71 113 1420-1 71 113 1433-1

71 113 1417-1

G

G

c Sport-Thieme® Chain Weight for Indoor Handball Goals

Consisting of a chain approx. 800 g/m, in a protective tube and with a tie cord on both ends. To attach, put the hose with the chain through the mesh at the bottom of the goal net. Can be used to weigh down any goal net. For bottom goal depths of 1 m, length: 5 m. Design and material as above. 71 115 4737 Each

d Sport-Thieme® Indoor

d

With 4 corner cut outs

Handball Goal Wall Net

Improve and perfect your throwing and goalie training. Ideal for training throwing precision. The goal wall net can simply be attached to an indoor handball goal using plastic quick release fasteners. Caution: When attaching to free-standing goals, the goals must be secured. 3x2 m. Available in two designs: with four holes ø approx. 38.5 cm or with four cut outs at corners. 71 206 6729 With four holesEach 71 206 6732 With four corner cut-outsEach

d

Also take a look at:

Handballs, page 12-13

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

With 4 h oles

73


Teamsport Beach Volleyball Sets Outdoor Volleyball Sets

Portable and weatherproof outdoor volleyball sets – impressive in every way: • The unique tensioning system guarantees perfect net tension. Quick and easy to assemble and disassemble without any assistance. • Standard net size 9.50x1 m (apart from LC 600). Mesh width 10 cm. • Aluminium poles can be taken apart. • Aluminium base plates prevent the poles from sinking and slipping. • Robust metal pegs for secure ground The reliable Clamcleat anchoring. technology guarantees con• Carrying bag only 1 m long, therefore venient and effective fixing fitting in any standard car. and releasing of the ropes. All sets contain the basics and are suitable for use on grass and with the SunHeight adjustment to Volley SandKit also on sand. standard heights ranging

from 2.10 m to 2.43 m at the touch of a button.

SunVolley® Accessories a

a SunVolley® “Sandkit”

This additional anchoring makes your beach system even more secure when playing on the sand. The set consists of: • 4 metal plates, 120x120 mm, with connecting cable and hook for anchoring court markings • 4 metal plates, 195x195 mm, with connecting cable and hook for anchoring the guy rope. Suitable for all SunVolley sets. 71 115 8508 Set

b SunVolley® “Standard” Beach Volleyball Net

Replacement net for “Standard” beach volleyball set g. LxW: 9.50x1.00 m. Not illustrated. 71 117 9109 Each

c SunVolley® “Plus” Beach Volleyball Net

Replacement net for “Plus” beach volleyball set h, LxW: 9.50x1.00 m. Not illustrated. 71 117 8702 Each

Sets

e SunVolley®

“LC” Beach Volleyball Set

Set Buy Now! d SunVolley®

Beach Volleyball Set

For the beach, field, outdoor pools or leisure centres. This set can be taken anywhere and does not require a lot of space. Consisting of: • 1 SunVolley “Standard” beach volleyball set, incl. 1 beach volleyball net, court markings for 18x9 m courts and storage bag g • 2 “Soft” beach volleyballs made from synthetic leather, page 16 g • 1 quick mini ball pump, page 43 e • 6 rolls of tape • 1 bottle of cooling spray • 1 ball carrying net, page 44 g 71 117 8614 Set

74

For recreational players. Consisting of: • Posts: anodised aluminium tubes, ø 32 mm, three-part, Clamcleat for tensioning the upper net cord • Polypropylene ropes and steel anchors for side tensioning • Net: 9.50 x 1.00, approx. 1.8 mm twisted polyethylene, four point suspension, mesh width approx. 10 cm. Yellow approx. 5 cm wide edging on top and bottom. Continuous polyester rope at the top and bottom. • Comes with storage bag • Weight: approx. 5.5 kg. Options: • Without court markings • With court markings, made from polyester rope for 18x9 m courts 71 135 4704 Without court markingsSet 71 135 4805 With court markingsSet

g SunVolley® “Standard” Beach Volleyball Set

For school and club sport. Consisting of: • Posts: anodised three piece connecting aluminium tubing, ø 40 mm, Clamcleat tensioning system for the upper net rope • Polypropylene rope for side tensioning with steel anchors • Net: 9.50x1.00 m, approx. 2 mm twisted polyester, four-point suspension, mesh width approx. 10 cm. With sewn-in fibreglass rods at both ends and 5 cm wide yellow edging all around. Continuous polyester rope on top and bottom. • Comes in a carry bag • Approx. 9.5 kg. Versions: • Without court markings • With court markings: made from poly rope, for 18x9 m courts. 71 117 8904 Without court markingsSet 71 117 9008 With court markingsSet

f SunVolley® “LC 600” Beach Volleyball Set

Same as described for the “LC” set, but without the court markings and with shorter net (6 m instead of 9.5 m). 71 135 4603 Set

Don’t forget to order: SunVolley SandKit a

h SunVolley® “Plus”

Beach Volleyball Set

For professionals and experienced players. Consisting of: • Posts: three-part anodised aluminium tubing, ø 50 mm, Clamcleat for tensioning the upper net rope • Polypropylene rope and steel anchor for tensioning on the side • Net: 9.50x1.00 m, 3 mm woven polyester, four point suspension, mesh width approx. 10 cm. Fibreglass bar sewn-in on both sides, with yellow edging running right around, approx. 8 cm wide. Continuous Kevlar rope on top, polyester rope on the bottom. • Comes in a carrying bag • Approx. 13 kg Options: • Without court markings • With court markings: made from 5 cm wide webbing, for 18x9 m or 16x8 m courts, page 75 h 71 117 8500 Without court markingsSet 71 117 8601 With court markingsSet

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Beach Volleyball Posts Teamsport

d

35 cm

70 cm

b

a Beach Volleyball

Ground Socket, ø 83 mm

To be concreted in sandy ground. Steel construction, hot dip galvanised, for ø 83 mm posts. Insertion depth 35 cm, total length approx. 70 cm. With cover. 71 117 8106 Each

b Beach Volleyball Ground Sockets ø 83 mm

Ideal for permanent sets! Steel construction with screw on plate, hot dip galvanised, for ø 83 mm posts. To be screwed into foundations. For a perfectly vertical stand when posts are fully tensioned. Insertion depth 35 cm, total length approx. 36 cm. With cover. 71 117 8119 Each

c Ground Socket for

Beach Volleyball Posts 80x80 mm

To be concreted into a sandy ground. Steel construction, hot dip galvanised, for 80x80 mm posts. Insertion depth into ground socket 35 cm, total length approx. 70 cm. With cover. 71 113 8102 Each

d Ground Socket for

Beach Volleyball Posts 80x80 mm

To be screwed to a concrete foundation - for perfectly straight posts when net is used. Ideal for permanent sets. Steel construction with a screw plate, hot dip galvanised, for 80x80 cm posts. Insertion depth into ground socket 35 cm. Total length approx. 36 cm. With cover. Without screws. 71 113 8001 Each

powder-coated

anodised

f

powder-coated

Extremely stable aluminium posts, ø 83 mm, complying with DIN EN 1271, with grooves on both sides. With spindle tensioning device allowing that height of the net can be adjusted individually on each side as required. With net height marking. Ground sockets not included. 71 117 8005 Anodised in matt silverPair 71 117 8018 Powder-coated in yellowPair

f Sport-Thieme®

Beach-Volleyball Posts “Competition” DVV Beach 2

Extremely stable beach volleyball posts made from aluminium 80x80 mm, complies to DIN EN 1271. The new style, non sensitive to sand pulley mechanism allows for a quick raise and lowering of the net. Net can be adjusted to any height ranging between 1.55 and 2.50 m. With net height markings. Ground sockets not included. “DVV Beach 2” approved. 71 113 7907 Anodised in matt silverPair 71 113 7910 Powder-coated in yellowPair

Court Dimensions: Beach Volleyball

5 m to FIVB regulations

service area 5m at least 3 m all round to FIVB regulations Court beach volleyball court: 16x8 m

16 m

New!

e

10 m

0.51m

c

anodised

“Competition” Beach Volleyball Posts

side line

a

e Sport-Thieme®

“Pro Beach” referee‘s stand

Ground Sockets

back line

8m

service area free zone Court: minimum of 22x14 m / 26x18 m (FIVB) min. of 30 cm ground socket to sand fill be bolted on, with base plate concrete foundation

ø 83 mm

ø 83 mm

80x80 mm

80x80 mm

Accessories

i Beach Volleyball Post Prog Sunvolley “Sand ®

Kit” for Edging Border

For anchoring court markings in sand. Four stainless steel metal plates, 120x120 mm, with connecting cable and hooks. 71 117 7800 Set

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

h Sun Volley “Plus” Beach ®

tection Pad

For 80x80 mm and ø 83 mm beach volleyVolleyball Court Markings ball posts. The strong padding material will For beach volleyball courts. Made from 5 greatly reduce the danger of injury. Padcm wide blue webbing. Adjustable to 18x9 ding approx. 200 cm long with a strong m or 16x8 m courts. Ready to use, with cover. Weatherproof. Velcro fastenings seven galvanised steel ground anchors, included. Indispensable for the safety of approx. 12 cm long. your players. 71 117 8803 Each 71 116 1713-1 Each

75


Teamsport Beach Volleyball

Set

a Can be set at any height between 198 and 245 cm

4 Simple and quick net tensioning with Clamcleats

tensioning lines

Set

Great Value!

Buy Now!

Buy Now! 10 year guarantee

close-up

g

lockable

“Comfort” net

j Sport-Thieme® Beach Volleyball Set “Club”

c Can be set at any height between 150 and 250 cm

Set consists of: • 1 pair of beach volleyball posts in ground sockets a • 1 beach volleyball net g 71 115 8058 Set

h

d

ef

b Tubing a

Tubing b:

ø 83 mm

ø 83 mm

Posts and Padding

Nets & Accessories c Sport-Thieme® “Safe” Beach Volleyball Posts

a Sport-Thieme® “Club” Beach Volleyball Posts

Registered design. For stationary or mobile use. Ideally suited for: beach, pools, playgrounds, recreational facilities and sports areas. • Made from galvanised steel tubing, ø 83 mm. • With spindle tensioning mechanism. • Innovative net attachment allows the net to be adjusted to any level between 198 and 245 cm without any tools. • Comes with four ring eyelets for attaching the net. • Optional with 2 ground sockets. Order at the same time: Beach volleyball net g 10 year guarantee! 71 115 8032 To be concreted inPair 71 115 8045 Including ground socketsPair

b Ground Sockets for Volleyball Posts

Made from V2A steel for ø 83 mm posts a and c, 350 mm long. With cover. 71 151 5608-2 Each

76

i

e Beach Volleyball Tournament Net, for 16x8 m Court

For a distance of 10 m between the posts. To be concreted in or to be inserted in Knot-free polyester, approx. 3 mm thick. ground sockets. Ideal for unsupervised With fibreglass/polyester rods sewn in on places on the beach, outdoor pools, playthe sides ensuring a perfect fit of the net. grounds and camp sites. Made from galWith 10.7 m long Kevlar rope at the top, 4 vanised steel tubing, ø 83 mm, can be mm thick tensioning line at the bottom. adjusted to any height between 150 and Four point suspension with two tensioning 250 cm. Comes with spindle tensioning lines and quick release fasteners on both mechanism and several eyelets for attasides. With reinforced edging all round, ching the net. The tensioning mechanism approx. 80 mm wide, neon yellow. Net is covered and secured with a padlock. The dimensions 8.50x1 m, mesh width: approx. lock is not included. 10 year guarantee. 10 cm. Net colour: black. 71 115 8029 Pair 71 117 8311 Each

g “Comfort” Beach Volleyball Net

For court size 18x9 m. Polyethylene, knot-free, approx. 2.3 mm thick. With fibreglass/polyester rods integrated into sides ensuring an exact fit. Six point suspension, with three tensioning lines and quick release fasteners on each side. Simple and quick to tension nets to all posts. Reinforced edging all the way around, approx. 50 mm wide, yellow. Net dimensions (WxH): 9.50x1 m, mesh width: approx. 10 cm. Net colour: black. 71 117 8324 Each

d Beach Volleyball Post Pro-

f Beach Volleyball Tournament h Beach Volleyball Antenna

For beach volleyball posts, ø 83 mm, hexagonal. The strong padding material will greatly reduce the risk of injury. Padding approx. 200 cm long with a strong cover. Weatherproof, with Velcro fasteners. Indispensable for the safety of your players. 71 116 1713 Each

For a distance of 11 m between the posts. Knot-free polyester, approx. 3 mm thick. With fibreglass/polyester rods sewn in on sides ensuring perfect fit of net. With 11.7 m long Kevlar rope at the top, 4 mm thick tensioning line at the bottom. Four point suspension with two tensioning lines and quick release fasteners on both sides. With reinforced edging all round, approx. 75 mm wide, neon pink. Net dimensions (WxH): 9.50x1 m, mesh width: approx. 10 cm. Net colour: black. DVV beach approved. 71 117 8308 Each

tection Pad

Don’t forget to order:

Volleyballs, from page 14

Net, for 18x9 m Court

Set

One-piece, DVV approved, length: 1.80 m, comes with yellow carrying bag made of coated polyester material, includes a marking band. 71 117 8409 Pair

i “Plus” Beach Volleyball Court Markings

For beach volleyball courts. Adjustable to 18x9 m or 16x8 m courts. Made from 5 cm wide webbing, ready to use with ground anchors. 71 117 8803-1 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Volleyball Sets and Posts Teamsport a Sport-Thieme® “Stabil”

Nets available in 2 designs:

Beach Volleyball Posts

Extremely stable, vandalism-proof design. With hot-dip galvanised steel tubing for concreting in. 150x150x3 mm posts, with welded on net eyelets for attaching the net. Net height 224 cm. Comes with 2 ground sockets. Foundation: 200x80x80 cm. No lateral tensioning ropes necessary for these posts. Anti-theft device as standard. 10 year guarantee. 71 115 6414 Pair

4 Plastic coating for more safety when in contact with the net without coating

Sets

plastic coating

Buy Now!

b Dralo® Beach Volleyball Net

10 year guarantee

The cut-resistant volleyball net in an appealing design. Made from galvanised steel wire cables (Dralo), approx. 2 mm thick. Top edging made from coated fabric, approx. 160 mm wide, yellow. 2 steel tensioning ropes on both sides, approx. 100 cm long. The net size complies with international regulations 9.50x1 m. Mesh width approx. 10 cm. Can also be used with standard volleyball posts. Optional with plastic coating, approx. 2.5 mm thick, green. Should players grab the net now and again, coated nets are much softer to touch. 71 115 6427 Without coatingEach 71 116 3908 Plastic coatingEach

a

b 4 Vandalismproof

Don’t forget to order:

tubing a 150x150 mm

Beach Volleyballs, page 16

d Post Protection Pad

d

Indispensable for players‘ safety. The elastic padding material will greatly reduce the risk of injury. Weatherproof. 200 cm long, with strong cover and Velcro fastenings. For 15x15 cm square tubing. 71 116 1726-2 Each

Set c Sport-Thieme “Stabil” ®

Beach Volleyball Set

The set consists of: • 1 pair of “Stabil” beach volleyball posts a

• 1 Dralo beach volleyball net without coating b or 1 Dralo beach volleyball net with coating b 71 115 6430 Without coating Set 71 115 6443 With coating Set

e Fairplay Volleyball Set

Complete volleyball set - perfect for playing volleyball in the park, recreational areas or on the beach. Posts are made from treated Douglas fir logs, approx. ø 180 mm, with net eyelets. These are cemented in the ground and laterally tensioned. The net is made from approx. 2.5/5 mm thick polypropylene with steel inserts. Net dimensions comply with international regulations (WxH): 9.50 x 1 m, mesh width approx. 10 cm. With strong steel ropes and theft-proof turnbuckles. 71 115 6300 Set 9.50 m

f Hercules Volleyball Net

f Buy Now!

2.30 m

11.50 m

Polypropylene with steel inserts, approx. 2.5/5 mm thick. Super strong Hercules rope. Net size complies with international regulations WxH: 9.50x1 m, mesh width approx. 10 cm. With strong steel ropes and theft-proof turnbuckles. Green. 71 115 6401 Each

4 Complete set with net

tubing e

ø 180 mm

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

made of Hercuf net les rope

77


Teamsport

Steel Volleyball Posts a

Volleyball Equipment

The affordable choice made from galvanised steel tubing for school and general sports. Thanks to the innovative ratchet straps, the net can quickly and easily be tensioned. The net can be adjusted to any height. No more worn parts such as crank, joints and spindle. Ground sockets not included. L:300 cm.

ent More Volleyball Equipm in and Posts are available p: sho our sport-thieme.com

What is the difference between DVV 1 and DVV 2 posts? With DVV 1 posts, it is possible to set the net to any height ranging between 1.55 and 2.50 m whilst the net is fully tensioned. Adjusting and re-tensioning thereafter is no longer required. In addition, these posts are very resistant to bending as they are made from particularly thick-walled tubing.

Aluminium Volleyball Posts bcd

• Special aluminium tubing, particularly thick-walled, 300 cm long • Super strong design • Surface technically anodised • All operating elements such as tensioning devices, net hooks and guide pulleys are safely incorporated in the tubing - no protruding parts • The net can be adjusted to any height between 1.55 and 2.50 m • With net height markings • Insertion depth 350 mm • Complies  with DIN EN 1271 • Ground  sockets not included

Great Product! Pulley

Don’t forget to order:

We supply volleyball posts ab and c with two different net tensioning systems: with a spindle including the crank handle or with a pulley.

• Volleyballs, page 16-19 • Wall Storage Bracket, page 143 Illustration

a b

Description Sport-Thieme volleyball posts ø 83 mm

Sport-Thieme volleyball posts ø 83 mm

Material

Tubing

steel

ø 83 mm

aluminium ø 83 mm

c d

Sport-Thieme volleyball posts 80x80 mm

Sport-Thieme volleyball posts ø 105 mm

aluminium 80x80 mm aluminium ø 105 mm

TÜV/GS

For Advice and Ordering – give us a call! Phone: +49 5357 181-543

Advantages of the pulley: • Nets can be tensioned quickly and easily, up to a tension of 150 kg • No more worn parts, e.g. crank, joints and spindle • No twisting or tangling of the blocks/ ropes • Easy to operate • Nets can also easily be tensioned by school children

Target Groups school and general sports

Tensioning Mechanism

Shipping Weight

Product Code

ratchet straps

41 kg

71 115 7244

school and general sports Oberliga, Landesliga and Verbandsliga international competitions, Bundesliga and German regional leagues school and general sports Oberliga, Landesliga and Verbandsliga international competitions, Bundesliga and German regional leagues Oberliga, Landesliga and Verbandsliga international competitions, Bundesliga and German regional leagues

pulley spindle pulley spindle pulley spindle pulley spindle pulley spindle pulley spindle pulley spindle pulley spindle

32 kg 32 kg 32 kg 32 kg 32 kg 32 kg 38 kg 38 kg 38 kg 38 kg 38 kg 38 kg 40 kg 40 kg 40 kg 40 kg

71 109 5816 71 109 5803 71 109 5917 71 109 5904 71 109 6819 71 109 6806 71 109 5614 71 109 5601 71 109 5715 71 109 5702 71 109 6011 71 109 6008 71 118 2242 71 118 2213 71 118 2255 71 118 2226

Accessories e

f

g

h e Auxiliary Adapter for

Aluminium Volleyball Post

j

i

78

Do you want new posts but worry about them fitting your existing ground sockets? This isn‘t a problem with our auxiliary steel adapters. Suitable for posts b and c. Only available pre-assembled. Insertion depth in the socket 225 mm. Adapters with outer ø of 60, 76 and 80 mm available. According to the German Volleyball Federation, the DVV approval is void if adapter is used. Please request dimension sheet before ordering. 71 109 6705 Pair

g Ground Socket for 80x80 mm and ø 83 mm Posts

j Safety Tensioning

Mechanism Made from aluminium, 350 mm long. Suitable for all ø 83 mm volleyball and With cover. 71 109 6503 For ø 83 mm postsEach games posts. Weatherproof design with 71 109 6516 For 80x80 mm postsEach innovative ratchet straps. No more problems with worn out parts like the crank, h Ground Socket for ø 83 mm joint and spindle. 71 115 7231 Each Posts Made from V2A steel, for ø 83 mm posts, k Replacement Tensioning 350 mm long. With cover. Mechanism 71 151 5608 Each Pulley system can also be used as conversion kit. Suitable for aluminium volf Ground Socket for ø 105 mm i Crank Handle leyball posts b and c. No illustration. Posts For aluminium volleyball posts b 71 109 5409 For standard postsEach Made from aluminium, 350 mm long. and c with spindle tensioning mecha71 109 5412 For DVV II postsEach With cover. nism, slotted mounting. 71 115 9019 Each 71 109 6109 Each 71 109 5425 For DVV I postsEach Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Teamsport

Volleyball Posts

4 Made from steel or aluminium 4 With pulley system or clamping device 4 Standard quality or compliant with DVV 1 or DVV 2

a

4M  ade from galvanised steel tubing 4 With ratchet straps

ø 83 mm

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

b

4 Made from aluminium 4 With pulley or spindle tensioning

ø 83 mm

c

4 Made from aluminium 4 With pulley or spindle tensioning

80x80 mm

d

4 Made from aluminium 4 With pulley or spindle tensioning

ø 105 mm

79


Teamsport Volleyball Equipment and Accessories Volleyball Accessories New!

e a

with tensioning mechanism

d

tubing

tubing

ø 83 mm

ø 83 mm

f

counter post

g Volleyball Smash Shot

h Volleyball Post Protective

For learning, practising and improving attacking shots. Volleyball associations agree: this piece of equipment is easy and safe to use and effectively improves skill and technique. The ball support ring is filled with air and therefore offers almost no resistance and helps prevent the risk of injury. Handle approx. 30 cm long, ø 5.8 cm. Hose approx. 53 cm long, ø 4 cm. 71 115 6906 Each

For 80x80 mm and ø 83-105 mm volleyball posts, hexagonal. The strong padding material will greatly reduce the risk of injury. Padding approx. 200 cm long with a strong weatherproof cover. With Velcro fastenings. Indispensable for your players‘ safety. 71 114 6208 Each

Training Device

j

k

j Sliding Clamps

Height adjustable for round posts with a ø of 83 mm. Set consists of: 1 slider with guide pulley, 2 sliders with hooks for net attachment. 71 151 5709 Set

b

detail

i Ring Binder Display Board

For every kind of sport. This new display board in a ring binder displays points from 0-99 and sets from 0-7. 71 115 6007-1 Each

n

m a Sport-Thieme

Padding

k Safety Tensioning Mechanism

Suitable for all ø 83 mm volleyball and games posts. Weatherproof design with innovative ratchet strap system. No more worn parts such as cranks, joints and spindles. 71 115 7231-1 Each

o

®

Universal Posts

An inexpensive set for school and general sports. Made from galvanised steel tubing, ø 83 mm, 300 cm long. The net can be set at any height - ideal for volleyball, tennis, fistball, etc. Each post has 3 adjustable sliders. Ground sockets not included. 71 115 6603 Pair

d

New! Volleyball Posts

for Hanging

Made from steel tubing, ø 83 mm, 300 cm long. Specially designed for hall refitting or replacement of posts. The posts can easily be set up and stored in an equipment room after use. There is no need for expensive floor adaptations or holes. With sliding clamps, therefore height can be set at any level. Optional with tensioning b Ground Socket mechanism. Made from V2A steel, for ø 83mm 71 167 8303 As contra-postsEach posts, 350mm long. With cover. 71 151 5608-1 Each 71 167 8316 With tensioning deviceEach

Set

c

e

New! Sport-Thieme®

“Universal” Volleyball Set

A complete volleyball set with posts, net and ball - a universal set for school and general sports. The set consists of: • 1 pair of universal posts ø 83 mm a • 2 ground sockets b • 1 volleyball DVV net, page 81 d • 1 volleyball, page 15 g 71 114 4000 Set

80

New!

New! Sport-Thieme® Wall

Rail

l

4 For 2 volleyball nets

l Net Hangers

The protective and problem-free p Volleyball Antenna, DVV solution for proper storage of one volleySuitable for all nets, with carrying ball or three badminton nets. Made from bag. DVV approved. steel with rotating handle. 71 115 5727 Two-piecePair 71 115 7000 Each 71 115 5714 One-piecePair

m Wall Holders

For hanging net hangers. Tidy and compact storage for nets on net hangers. Made from galvanised steel. 40 cm long brackets, 35 cm overhang. Net not included. 71 115 7013 Each

To be mounted or concreted into the wall of the hall. With adjustable eyelets. A practical device and must have for every hall. n Net Roller So that volleyball and badminton Flat aluminium section 40x16 mm, with nets can be wound in and out quickly and rounded edges. L: approx. 2 m 71 114 2802 Each easily. Will hold 4 volleyball nets or long nets up to 25 m. Strong steel tubing structure with four wheels. HxW: 120x73 cm. Net f Tensioning Device for not included. Wall Rails 71 115 7026 Each Simple, fast and safe way of tensioning nets. Fully assembled with guide pulo Volleyball Net Bag ley. Can be adjusted to any height. With Ideal for storage and transport of 2 spindle adjuster for rope tension. Includes volleyball nets. LxWxH: approx. 124x19x28 tensioning crank. Suitable for wall rail h. cm. 100% nylon. 71 115 7228 Each 71 114 4606 Each

q Carrying Bags for Volleyball Antenna (DVV approved)

With marking tape made from coated polyester fabric. High frequency welded. DVV approved. 71 151 5813 Pair

r Kevlar Replacement Tensioning Rope

As strong as steel rope, suitable for all nets, 11.70 m long with 2 loops. 71 115 5903 Each

s Kevlar Tensioning Rope

For volleyball and badminton nets, 4 mm thick. 71 300 8209  per m

t Side Tensioning Cord

Polypropylene, 2 m long with quick release fastener. For 1 net, 4-6 cords are required. 71 151 5800 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Volleyball Nets Teamsport

a

4 Approved tournament net

b Volleyball Competition Net, DVV with guide pulleys

a Volleyball Tournament Net (DVV I approved)

Made from approx. 3 mm thick, knot-free polypropylene with 11.70 m long Kevlar tensioning rope. Both sides with integrated fibreglass/polyester rods, ensuring an exact fit of the net. Six point suspension, three tensioning ropes and quick release fasteners on both sides. With approx. 70 mm wide, white polyester edging on top, 50 mm wide, white polypropylene edging on bottom. Net dimensions (WxH): 9.50x1 m. Mesh width: approx. 10 cm. Net colour: black. 71 115 8410 Each

As design a but with 4 mm thick cord and the net has a Kevlar tensioning rope with guide pulleys. The guide pulleys ensure that the net is even throughout and can be tensioned tightly. This also means that the net can be accurately aligned to the court markings when tensioned. Not illustrated. 71 115 8407 Each

d

c Tournament Net, DVV II Standard

As design a, but with a 4 point attachment. Both sides have 2 tension cords and quick release fasteners. Net dimensions (WxH): 9.50x1 m, mesh width: approx. 10 cm. Net colour: black. Not illustrated. 71 115 8205 Each

Training Nets

d Volleyball Competition Net DVV

As design a, but with a 4 point attachment. 2 tensioning lines and quick release fasteners on both sides. Top with white polyester edging, approx. 50 mm wide.

With a strip on the bottom edge of the net for attaching the antenna. Net dimensions (WxH): 9.50x1.0 m, mesh width: approx. 10 cm. Net colour: black. 71 114 7403 Each

f Quickly Set Up Volleyball

4 All net lengths available!

Training Net

Top training net for a quick set up. The net can be attached to any type of post in seconds. Made from 2.5 mm thick Raschel woven polyethylene, with four point suspension and two rubber loops on both sides, approx. 50 m long. Without steel rope and edging. Net dimensions (WxH): 10x0.7 m, mesh width approx. 3 cm. Net colour: green. 71 115 7505 Each

e

f

g Profi Quick Assembly Volleyball Training Net

e Volleyball Long Net for Training

Net length of your choice. Made from knot-free 3 mm thick polypropylene. Four point attachment, two tensioning lines and quick release fasteners on both sides. White polyester webbing on top. Net height

Made from reinforced polyethylene Raschel mesh. Integrated stabilising rods at the approx. 1 m, mesh width: approx. 10 cm. sides, Kevlar net tensioning ropes, ClamNet colour: black. The Kevlar rope is 2 m cleat net tensioners and the rubber loops longer than the net. Please state requiwith snap hooks at both ends ensure optired net length when ordering. Net length mal net tension. Net dimensions (WXH): is calculated as follows: distance between 10x0.4 m. Net colour: green. Not illustposts -1 m. rated. 71 115 7518  per m 71 115 7909 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 路 www.sport-thieme.com

h Volleyball Training Net

Made from approx. 2 mm thick polyethylene, with 11.70 m long nylon tensioning line. Edging on top and bottom made from high quality UV resistant material. Net size (WxH): 9.50x1.00 m, mesh width approx. 10 cm. Net colour: black. Not illustrated. 71 115 7404 Each

81


Teamsport Games Posts Multi-Purpose Posts – for indoor and outdoor use

a

New! Sport-Thieme® Mobile

New!

Games Posts Sets

Mobile multi-purpose posts for all net and rope games. They are suitable for indoor and outdoor use. • Aluminium 80x80 mm posts, approx. 265 cm long • Weight per post approx. 100 kg • With pulley for simple and easy net tensioning • Net height can be set at any level from 1.55-2.50 m With scale • With net height marking • Convenient to transport with the 2 castors integrated at the side Advantages: • Universal use • Stable stand without the need for ground sockets With castors • Optimal net tension thanks to heavy net weight • Easy to transport with the castors Ideally suited for tennis, badminton, Indiaca, fistball, deck tennis, volleyball, football tennis, high jump with Zacharias high jump bar or Revio bands, beach volleyball. The set consists of: • 2 bases with additional weights b Badminton Net Made from polyethylene, approx. • 2 posts 1 mm thick. With 6.60 m long Kevlar rope. Net not included. 71 114 0503 Set WxH: 6.02x0.76 m, mesh width approx. 18 mm. Black. 71 116 6907-1 Each

Game Post System

Great Value!

f

g

Buy Now!

Can be adjusted to any height

4 High level of stability 4 Easy to transport 4 With pulley for optimal net tensioning

c Volleyball Training Net

Made from polyethylene, approx. 2 mm thick. With 11.70 m long nylon tensioning rope. Upper and lower edging made from high quality material, UV-resistant. Net dimensions (WxH): 9.50x1 m,

mesh width: approx. 10 cm. Net colour: black. Not illustrated. 71 115 7404-1 Each

d Zacharias High Jump Crossbar 71 124 1118-1 Each

galvanised

i j h

Mobile

Very stable when filled to 90 kg

f Sport-Thieme®

Ground Socket Set

4 13 different games in one system 4 Height can be adjusted individually 4 Telescopic system

i Sport-Thieme® Basketball Basket

Galvanised, to be attached to the fibreglass telescopic tubing, with net. Hoop ø 55 cm. Post and base are not included. 71 227 0047-1 Each

Sport-Thieme® Net

j You will have maximum flexibility with this Suitable for all games. Nylon, 1 mm set. Simply push and turn the socket into Base thick black cord, 600x76 cm with tension® the ground using the corresponding pole. Can be both filled and transported. To ing lines. Mesh width 20 mm. g Sport-Thieme GRP house GRP telescopic tubing with a ø of 37 Changing location is possible at any time. 71 197 2447-1 Each Telescopic Post System These ground sockets will house poles of mm. 60x60x22 cm. Filled with water 51 kg, With these ø 37/30 mm tubes, you can set 17–55 mm. Length: 60 cm. and with sand up to 90 kg is possible. the height individually to meet your needs. 71 197 2405-1 Each 71 227 0021 Pair The maximum height with the base is 260 cm, and in ground sockets 240 cm. Transporting length 135 cm. Game Post System 71 227 0005-1 Pair The recreational post system is ideally suited for: tennis, badminton, volleyball, Sport-Thieme® e Sport-Thieme® Plastic Stand

Set

82

beach volleyball, high jump, fistball, netball, scoop, indiaca, indiaca tennis, shuttle ball, catchball, etc.

h Sport-Thieme® Net Holding

A free-standing system with mobile and fillable plastic bases. They can be set up in no time and the game can begin. Suitable for indoors and outdoors. With fibreglass telescopic poles, can be adjusted individually to suit height requirements for each game.

For a simple way of attaching all nets. Just place the straps around the tubing and fix with their Velcro fastening. 71 227 0018-1  Pack of 4

System

k

Post System Set

The set consists of: • 2 bases e • 1 pair of telescopic tubes g • 1 net j 71 227 0050 Set

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


® Street Hockey with Sport-Thieme

Teamsport

a Street Hockey Stick “Kinder”

Birch wood stick in sandwich construction (6 layers), laminated several times. Shaft length including blade base approx. 95 cm. Straight, moulded blade in sturdy ABS plastic. Suitable for left and right-handed shots. 2-coloured shaft: grey/red. 71 226 9203 Each

Set

a

c

g “Turnier” Street Hockey Goal, 183x122 cm

Strong goal made from steel tubing (ø approx. 5.5 cm) with double frame. Easy to fold away and transport. With weatherproof net made from polyethylene. Official tournament size (WxHxD): 183x122x75 cm, approx. 19.7 kg. 71 226 4442 Each

4 Collapsible for easy transport

d

h Goal Nets for Street Hockey

f Street Hockey Goal b Street Hockey Set “Kinder” plus 3 balls

Special school set. The set consists of 10 street hockey sticks a and 3 balls with gel filling m. 71 226 9304 Set

A stable goal made of powder-coated steel tubing (ø approx. 3.45 cm). Can easily be folded down and moved around. With a weather-proof polyethylene net. 71 226 4413 WxHxD: 71x46x51 cmEach 71 226 4400 WxHxD: 127x107x66 cmEach

Goals

Made from all weather polyethylene. Mesh width 3.5x3.5 cm. Suitable for goals f and g. 71 226 4439 For 71x46 cm goalsEach 71 226 4426 For 127x107 cm goalsEach 71 116 5845 For 183x122 cm goalsEach

c “Junior” Street Hockey Stick

A birch wood stick in sandwich construction (12 layers), multi-laminated. Shaft length including blade approx. 125 cm. Blade made from strong nylon. The blade has a roughened surface for better ball control. Shaft: orange/white. 71 226 4240 Right-handedEach 71 226 4253 Left-handedEach

4 All wooden shafts can be shortened as required

The Right Stick

There are right and left handed street hockey sticks. The hand that grips nearest the blade on the shaft is the hand that determines which stick is required. • Right shooter: right hand holds near the blade, blade points to the left • Left shooter: left hand holds near the blade, blade points to the right Right-handed Left-handed

4 Collapsible for easy transport

Street Hockey Stick i Sport-Thieme® Folding d “Senior” A birch wood stick made in sandwich construction (12 layers), multi-laminated. Shaft length including blade approx. 150 cm. Blade made from robust nylon. Roughened blade surface for better ball control. Shaft silver/white. 71 226 4266 Right-handedEach 71 226 4279 Left-handedEach

e Replacement Blade for “Senior” and “Junior” Models

Mini Goal

j Sport-Thieme® Mini Street

Can be used as a training goal for football, street hockey or fun sports like beach football and beach handball. Its special folding mechanism means that it is easy to transport and set up. This makes it ideal for a variety of uses. When in use the folding mechanism can be locked securely in place. The net is permanently connected to the goal with a special net pole that covers the whole frame. Frame is made of powder-coated steel tubing, net is made from polyethylene. 60x90x70 cm, approx. 5 kg 71 115 1712-1 Each

Goal

Strong aluminium goal with fully welded goal frame including net with 4.5 cm mesh width. With hinged net brackets. 71 115 2223-1 1.20x0.80 mEach 71 115 2526-1 1.80x1.20 mEach

net For 27x17 mm shafts. Made from high quak Replacement Mesh width 4.5 cm. lity nylon. 71 115 1813-1 For 1.20x0.80 m goal Each 71 226 4282 Right-handedEach 135x100x110 cm, approx. 8 kg 71 226 4295 Left-handedEach 71 115 1738-1 Each 71 115 1914-1 For 1.80x1.20 m goalEach

Street Hockey Accessories l

n m

l Gliding Street Hockey Puck

m “AGS Gel” Street Hockey Ball Made of high-quality vinyl with gel filling. The AGS design (Active Gravity System™) prevents the ball from bouncing. This provides excellent ball control. The gel filling ensures a stable flight when taking shots. ø approx. 70mm. Orange. 71 226 4309 Each

Abrasion-proof puck, made from a special vinyl mixture. With additional glin Street Hockey Puck High quality vinyl puck, resistant to ding pimples for more power. Ideal for smooth surfaces. Ideally suited for outdoor abrasion. Can be used outdoors or indoors. ø approx. 70 mm. Orange. and indoor use. ø approx. 70 mm. 71 226 4325 Each 71 226 4312 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

New! o Floorball Goalie Mask

Goalie helmet made of impact resistant plastic. The helmet can be adjusted to fit the goalie‘s head. With black eye visor to reduce the reflection from the hall lights and to ensure best visibility for the goalie. With integrated air slits for good ventilation under the helmet. 71 226 9405 Each

83


Teamsport Set

Set

Buy Now!

Buy Now!

4 Shaft length 70 cm 4 For children up to 140 cm tall

a “Kids Mini” Floorball Set

Exceptionally soft and flexible floorball stick. 70 cm long and particularly suitable for children up to 140 cm tall, ø approx. 2.5 cm. Shaft and blade made from polyethylene. One set consists of 6 sticks each with red and yellow blades, and 6 perforated balls. Suitable for right and left-handed shooters. 71 173 0005  Set of 18

b “Kids Mini” Floorball Stick

4 Shaft length 80 cm 4 For children up to 150 cm tall

d

New! “Kids Maxi”

Floorball Set 71 173 0106 Red bladeEach 71 173 0119 Yellow bladeEach The soft and flexible stick makes playing the game very easy for beginners and children alike. The sticks are made from durable c Replacement Blade for “Kids Mini” Stick polyethylene. Shaft length: 80 cm, ø approx. Yellow or red polyethylene blade for “Kids 2.5 cm. One set consists of 12 sticks (6 yelMini” stick. low and 6 red blades) and 6 balls. Suitable 71 173 0409 YellowEach for right and left-handed shooters. 71 173 0412 RedEach 71 173 0207  Set of 18

Set

Stick developed with the advanced youth player in mind. Very strong polycarbonate shaft, blade made from polyethylene. Shaft length: approx. 80 cm, ø 2.5 cm. One set consists of 6 sticks of each with 6 black and 6 blue blades, and 6 balls. Suitable for right and left-handed shooters. 71 173 0500  Set of 18

84

h Floorball Stick “Liga”

f Replacement Blade

for “Kids Maxi” Stick

Green or yellow polyethylene blade for “Kids Maxi” stick. 71 173 1402 GreenEach 71 173 1415 YellowEach

Buy Now!

4 For advanced youth players 4 Suitable for up to 150 cm tall players

New! “Liga” Floorball Set

71 173 0308 Yellow bladeEach 71 173 0311 Green bladeEach

Set

Buy Now!

g

e Floorball Stick “Kids Maxi”

j

4 For youth players and adults up to 185 cm tall 4 Shaft has a fibreglass inlay

New! “Champ” Floorball Set

Particularly suitable for young peo71 173 0601 Black bladeEach 71 173 0614 Blue bladeEach ple and adults alike. Good ball control due to reinforced blade. Greater stick stability due to additional fibreglass insert. Shaft i Replacement Blade for length: 95 cm, ø approx. 2.6 cm. One set “Liga” Stick Black or blue polyethylene blade for “Liga” consists of 6 sticks of each with 6 black and 6 blue blades, and 6 balls. Suitable stick. 71 173 0702 BlackEach for right and left-handed shooters. Set of 18 71 173 0715 BlueEach 71 173 0803 

k Floorball Stick “Champ”

71 173 0904 Black bladeEach 71 173 0917 Blue bladeEach

l Replacement Blade for “Champ” Stick

Black or blue polyethylene blade for “Champ” stick. 71 173 1008 BlackEach 71 173 1011 BlueEach

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Teamsport Set

With taped handle for perfect ball control

Buy Now!

Available in two different shaft lengths: 87 cm and 95 cm

a a “Flow” Floorball Set

The ideal set for advanced players and professionals. Strong shaft made from high-quality polycarbonate, reinforced with additional fibreglass insert, ø approx. 2.3 cm. Blade made from polyethylene, black. With taped handle for perfect ball control. The set consists of: • 3 right-handed sticks, lime green blade • 9 left-handed sticks, cyan blue blade • 6 balls 71 118 0800 Shaft length 87 cm Set of 18 71 118 0813 Shaft length 95 cm Set of 18

Shaft with a fibreglass insert Polyethylene blades

b “Flow” Floorball Stick

87 cm 71 118 0901 Left-handedEach 71 118 0914 Right-handedEach 95 cm 71 118 0927 Left-handedEach 71 118 0930 Right-handedEach

c Replacement Blade

Incl. 6 balls

Left-handed

Right-handed

for “Flow” Stick

Polyethylene blade for “Flow” stick. 71 173 1503 Left shooter, cyan blueEach 71 173 1516 Right shooter, lime greenEach

With right and left blades

Set

d “Winner” Floorball Set

The ideal stick for more demanding, rapid and precise moves. Strong shaft made from polycarbonate, blade made from polyethylene. Shaft length approx. 85 cm, ø approx. 2.8 cm. The set consists of: • 6 sticks with a black and 6 sticks with a red blade • 6 balls Suitable for right and left-handed shooters. 71 173 1109  Set of 18

Set

Buy Now! Great Product!

e

e “Winner” Floorball Stick

71 173 1200 Black bladeEach 71 173 1213 Red bladeEach

f Replacement Blade

Sold individually

f

for “Winner” Stick

Black or red polyethylene blade for “Winner” stick. 71 173 1301 BlackEach 71 173 1314 RedEach

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

85


Teamsport Unihockey/Floorball Set

New!

Buy Now!

Complete Sets • 12 floorball sticks • 6 balls • 2 goals • 1 stick bag

Sets

a

New! “Liga” Floorball Entry Level Set

The complete set for children and young people between 121-150 cm tall. The set consists of: • 18 piece floorball set “Liga” incl. 6 balls, page 84 g • 1 floorball stick bag, page 87 n • 2 floorball goals 90x60 cm, page 87 e 71 173 1806 Set

b Floorball Entry Level Set

c

The complete set for children and youth players between 141-160 cm tall. The set consists of: • 18 piece floorball set “Winner” incl. 6 balls, page 85 d • 1 floorball stick bag, page 87 n • 2 floorball goals 60x90 cm, page 87 e 71 173 1907 Set

The complete set for youth players and adults between 161-190 cm tall. The set consists of: • 18 piece floorball set “Champ” incl. 6 balls, page 84 j • 1 floorball stick bag, page 87 n • 2 floorball goals 60x90 cm, page 87 e 71 173 2001 Set

“Winner”

New! Floorball Entry Level

Set “Champ”

d

New! Floorball “Flow”

Combi Set

The complete set for youth players and adults from 176-185 cm tall. The set consists of: • 18 piece “Flow” floorball set 95 cm, including 6 balls, page 85 a • 1 floorball stick bag, page 87 n • 2 floorball goals 90x60 cm, page 87 e 71 183 8103 Set

e 4 Made from high quality carbon composite 4 Perfect ball control

4 IFF approved

New! f

New! e

New! Unihoc® “Custom Line

86

4 Shaft length 70 cm 4 Stick length and blade are smaller – perfect for children

32” Competition Stick

The approved top performance stick for ambitious players. Shaft made from high quality carbon composite, with EVO3 blade. Light curvatures and a strengthened blade allow for perfect ball control and precise passes/shoots. Flex 32 mm, with X-ercise non-slip taped handle. IFF approved. 80 cm 96 cm 71 183 8305 Left-handedEach 71 183 8347 71 183 8318 Right-handedEach 71 183 8350 87 cm 100 cm 71 183 8321 Left-handedEach 71 183 8363 71 183 8334 Right-handedEach 71 183 8376

f Left-handedEach Right-handedEach Left-handedEach Right-handedEach

New! Unihoc® “Infinity

Youngster 36” Stick

Special stick for nursery and primary school use. Stick length and blade are smaller and are perfectly tailored to the needs of children. These little players can therefore learn the techniques of the game much more quickly. With a high grade composite shaft and soft NINO blade.

Shaft length 70 cm, flex 36 mm, with X-ercise non-slip taped handle. IFF approved. 71 183 8204 Left-handedEach 71 183 8217 Right-handedEach

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Floorball Equipment Teamsport ab

a Floorball Ball

c

d

c Unihoc® “Cr8ter” Ball

The official IFF match ball! The ball Plastic, with holes, ø approx. 70 mm. 71 116 8509 WhiteEach features slightly angled edges on the holes 71 118 0028 RedEach (craters) that allow for improved air flow inside the ball. As a result, the pressure inside the ball is increased which causes less turbulence and allows the ball to achieve a much more stable flight. Thin grooves along the surface allow for more precise passes as well as shots at higher speed. Made from plastic, ø approx. 70 mm. White. Floorball Balls, set of 10 b 71 118 4307 Each The set consists of: 10 white or red floorball balls a. 71 116 8554 White Set of 10 71 118 0031 Red Set of 10 d Floorball Puck Plastic, approx. ø 70 mm, approx. 25 g. Orange. 71 117 4700 Each

Set

4 The original floorball goal for competition and training

e Floorball Goal

A high quality stable goal made from powder coated steel tubing for use in schools and clubs. Suitable for indoors and outdoors. Collapsible and easy to store away. The hinged net brackets have f Net for Floorball Goal Goal net suitable for goal e. Mesh a safety lock. Includes net. White. 71 117 4609 WxHxL: 90x60x40 cmEach size approx. 4.5 cm. Black. 71 117 6009 For 60x90 cm goalsEach 71 117 5804 WxHxL: 140x105x40 cm Each 71 117 6100 For 105x140 cm goalsEach

j Floorball Competition Goal, 160x115 cm

g Official Floorball Competition Rink Boards - IFF approved

Playing area 40x20 m. Made from fibreglass reinforced plastic. All elements of the modular system fit together quickly. Fronts are impact and shock proof. Consists of: 52 straight elements each 2 m long, 4 straight elements each 1 m long, 4 corner pieces (90 degree angle), 2 transport carts made from powder coated steel. Dimensions when loaded up (LxWxH): approx. 200x80x150 cm. 71 117 6302 Set

i

New! Unihoc “Blocker”

Goalkeeper Mask

Goalie helmet made of impact resistant plastic. The helmet can be adjusted to fit the goalie‘s head. With black eye visor to reduce the reflection from the hall lights and ensure best visibilty for the goalie. With integrated air slits for good ventilation under the helmet. 71 118 6202 Each

The official competition goal made of powder coated steel tubing, IFF approved. Includes a black goal with a white catching net. Ready for immediate use. Assembled size: (WxH) 115x160 cm, net depth at the top: 40 cm, net depth at the bottom: 65 cm. ø approx. 32 mm. Red. 71 117 6403 Each

k Net for Floorball Goal, 115x160 cm

Goal and catching net for all 115x160 cm goals. Mesh width approx. 4.5 cm. Goal net black, catching net white. 71 117 7608 Each

4 Can be folded

New!

h Floorball Training Boards

Consisting of: 20 or 30 straight elements at 2 m in length, 4 straight elements at 1 m in length, 4 corners (angle 90 degrees), 1 trolley made from powder-coated steel. Dimensions in loaded condition (LxWxH): approx. 220x80x170 cm. 71 118 3809 20x10 mSet 71 118 3812 24x14 mSet

l

New!

j

4 Official competition goal with catching net

l

New! Flex Ball Bag

4 For up to 20 sticks

An exclusive ball bag for storing and transporting up to 150 floorball balls. When empty, the bag can be folded up and stored away saving space. With carrying handles for easy transport. 100% nylon. Approx. 37 cm high, ø approx. 34.5 cm 71 168 1404 Each

Set

m

n

o

4 For up to 3 sticks

New! Flex Ball Bag Set

Exclusive “Flex” ball bag l with 50 or 100 white floorball balls a. 71 168 1505 Bag includes 50 ballsSet 71 168 1518 Bag includes 100 ballsSet

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

n Sport-Thieme® Floorball

o Sport-Thieme® Floorball

This strong nylon bag will hold a complete set of sticks. Ideal for storing and transporting up to 20 sticks. Suitable for sticks up to 102 cm in length. LxWxH: approx. 124x19x28 cm. 100% nylon. 71 173 1705 Each

For storage of up to 3 floorball sticks. Suitable for sticks between 92 cm and 102 cm in length. Made from strong nylon material with zip and carrying strap. LxWxH: approx. 118x7x22/12.5 cm. 100% nylon. 71 173 1604 Each

Bag XL

Bag M

87


Teamsport

a Sport-Thieme® “Classic” Hockey Stick

The hockey stick for school sports. The most popular model for school sports, also suitable for general sport training. Top quality sticks made of multi-bonded mulberry wood, with coated head and non-slip taped handle. Options: • 33’’  - for children • 36.5’’  - for youths and adults over 150 cm tall. All sizes in inches (1 inch = 2.54 cm). 33’’ (approx. 84 cm) 71 118 4509 FieldEach

a

Hockey Balls For competitions and training

36.5’’ (approx. 93 cm) 71 118 4512 FieldEach 33’’ (approx. 84 cm) 71 118 4600 IndoorEach

Great Value!

36.5’’ (approx. 93 cm) 71 118 4613 IndoorEach

Buy Now!

b “Allround” Hockey Ball Field

Top Rated

sport-thieme.com Indoor

Different heads

Plastic ball with smooth surface. Available as a field ball in white or as a hall ball in yellow, ø approx. 70 cm, approx. 150 g. 71 118 1803 WhiteEach 71 118 1816 YellowEach

d Field Hockey Goal Nets c

Field Hockey Goal

New!

4 Made from aluminium 4 Can be completely dismantled

c

New! Field Hockey Goal

Strong aluminium construction, WxH: 3.66x2.14 m, depth at bottom 1.20 m, 0.90 m at top, based on international regulations. Crossbar and posts enamelled. Boards made from robust, multiple glued plywood. Board height 460 mm. Completely dismantles including boards. Net not included. Options: • Without transport castors • With wide transport castors (1 set of 2 castors) For one goal, 2 castors are required. 71 114 2701 Without castorsEach 71 114 2714 With castorsEach

Made from high strength polypropylene, knot-free, green. Net size (WxH): 3.66x2.14 m, net depth at top 90 cm, depth at bottom 120 cm. 2.5 mm thick cord, mesh width 2.5 cm 71 118 8400 Pair 3 mm thick cord, mesh width 4.5 cm 71 118 8413 Pair

e Indoor Hockey Goal Nets

Made from high-strength polypropylene, knot-free, cord thickness 2.5 mm or 3 mm, green. Net size (WxH): 3.1x2.1 m, net depth at top 80 cm, net depth at bottom 100 cm, mesh width 4.5 cm. For 3x2 m goals. 71 118 8501 Cord thickness 2.5 mmPair 71 118 8514 Cord thickness 3 mmPair

Also take a look at: Indoor Hockey Goal 3x2 m, on page 73

g

With plastic

g

10

year

guarantee

f Transport Cart for Indoor

g Rink for Indoor Hockey

Made from multi-laminated solid wood, white lacquered. Strong wooden To transport indoor hockey rink boards rink boards, suitable for standard field quickly and easily. Strong steel tube conlength of 40 m. Angled inner side. Understruction, powder-coated with tray to store side has rubber pads to protect hall floors. connecting pins. 4 smooth running swivel The single boards are connected together castors. Capacity approx. 450 kg. 10 year by means of wooden pegs. Optional with guarantee. plastic impact protection on the playing 71 131 0203 Each field side. This causes the ball to rebound,

Hockey Boards

88

Impact protection

making very little noise and greatly increases durability of the boards. 20 boards h Sport-Thieme® Portable each 4 m long, includes wooden pegs. Storage and Transport Trolley not included. Container Without plastic impact protection For hockey sticks. ø 280 mm, total height 71 118 3001 Set 95 cm, with metal handle and wheels. Contents not included. 10 year guarantee! With plastic impact protection 71 118 8006 Set 71 116 9007 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Hockey Teamsport

a c

Sets

d School Hockey Sticks

b a Hockey Ball

Made from soft, flexible plastic, does not bounce. Ideal for playing indoors and outdoors. ø approx. 7 cm, approx. 62 g. Orange. 71 116 3009 Each

b Safety Hockey Puck

Made from a soft, flexible plastic material. In revolutionary aerodynamic design. The curve on the bottom and top ensure that the puck flies flat along the ground and the puck is not as inclined to flip. ø 10 cm, 73 g. Orange. 71 116 2905 Each

c Safety Ball with Holes

Plastic. For safety, beginners use a ball with holes, ø approx. 70 mm. 71 116 8509-1 WhiteEach 71 118 0028-1 RedEach

Sets

Buy Now!

Made from high quality polyethylene. Blade made from stiff foam. Shaft length including blade, approx. 89 cm. 71 116 8408 Yellow stickEach 71 116 8411 Red stickEach

Round plastic shaft

Front and back same as competition sticks Foam bonded head

Sets e Sport-Thieme® “School” Hockey Stick Set

Hockey stick with the original hockey head! Front and back the same as competition sticks. Round easy to grip shaft made from high quality polyethylene, approx. 89 cm long. Head made from stiff foam. Head and shaft glued together.

Advantages: • Glides well over hall floors • The head does not leave a “trail” behind on the floor • Head the same as on competition sticks • Flexible and break-proof • The soft head prevents injuries

Sets

g Sport-Thieme® “Mini”

Buy Now!

Hockey Goal

f Sport-Thieme® “Mini” Hockey Set

The 15 piece set consists of: 6 “School” hockey sticks in yellow and 6 in red, 3 hockey balls without holes. 71 116 8307  Set of 15

The ideal goal for training games and other ball games both indoors and outdoors. The mini goals are quick to set up, easy to transport and can be folded away for compact storage. With plastic end caps to protect the floor. Made from steel tubing, WxHxD: approx. 100x100x60 cm. Without nets. 71 118 2806 Pair

Complete set of hockey equipment for schools and clubs. The supplied goals can also be used for a variety of other ball games. This practical and attractively priced hockey set consists of: • 1 pair of mini hockey goals g h “Mini” Hockey Net • 1 pair of nets h For mini hockey goals. Made from d • 12 hockey sticks (6 yellow and 6 red) polypropylene, approx. 3 mm thick, for a • 3 hockey balls 100x100x60 cm goals. Green. 71 116 9108 Set 71 118 0103 Pair

Sets ijlm Safe end caps

i

l Fibreglass insert

Safe All-Round Hockey Sticks for all Age Groups

Safety was key when these new hockey sticks were designed. The partially hollow shaft is made from polyethylene. Two parallel inner reinforcements running through the shaft ensure hardness and durability without losing any flexibility.

i “Junior” Hockey Stick Set

This flexible stick is ideal for children. The hollow shaft is reinforced in two places making it virtually unbreakable. The shaft length including the blade is approx. 92 cm. Dual screw joint between shaft and blade. The thick end of

Cross section the shaft also ensures good grip. The 16 piece set consists of: 6 blue and 6 red “Junior” hockey sticks, 2 safe pucks and 2 hockey balls. 71 117 0001  Set of 16

j Junior Stick Hockey Stick

71 117 0102 Blue bladeEach 71 117 0115 Red bladeEach

All-round Hockey Sticks

These hockey sticks are suitable for both indoor and outdoor use. The robust design with fibreglass inserts make the shaft virtually unbreakable. Therefore, the sticks are excellent for street hockey as well as ice hockey and indoor hockey.

l “Cup” Hockey Stick Set

These all-round hockey sticks will withstand even the toughest use. The shaft is made from high quality polyethylene and is reinforced k Replacement Blades for with a fibreglass insert, which makes it virtu“Junior” Hockey Sticks ally unbreakable. Shaft length including blade is For the “Junior stick” hockey stick, to be approx. 120 cm. Dual screw joint between blade attached to the shaft. 71 116 9704 Blue bladeEach and shaft. The thick end of the shaft also ensu71 116 9717 Red bladeEach res good grip. The 16 piece set consists of: 6

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

blue and 6 red “Cup” hockey sticks, 2 safe pucks and 2 hockey balls. 71 116 9805  Set of 16

m Cup Hockey Stick

Made from high quality polyethylene and reinforced with a fibreglass insert. Shaft length including blade is 120 cm. Weight: approx. 750 g. 71 116 9906 Blue bladeEach 71 116 9919 Red bladeEach

n Replacement Blades for “Cup” Hockey Sticks

For “Cup” hockey sticks, to attach and screw onto the shaft. 71 116 9603 Blue bladeEach 71 116 9616 Red bladeEach

89


Teamsport Table Tennis Bats

4 Inverted pimples

a

4 External pimples 4 1.5 mm thick padding

Sport-Thieme® “Paris” Table Tennis Bat

b

4 Inverted pimples 4 1.8 mm thick padding 4 Surface is ITTF approved

4 Inverted pimples 4 1.5 mm thick padding 4 Surface is ITTF approved

Sport-Thieme® “Rom” Table Tennis Bat

® c Sport-Thieme® “Wien” Table d Sport-Thieme “Berlin”

Tennis Bat

A bat for schools and club sport. Inverted School bat for optimal ball control. External pimples, 1.5 mm padding, concave handle, Beginner‘s bat. Inverted pimples, pimples, with 1.5 mm padding, concave made from special 5-ply wood. ITTF approwithout padding, anatomic handle, handle, special 5-ply wood. ved surface. special 5-ply wood. H 71 110 8402 Each H 71 110 8415 Each B 71 110 8457 Each

Set

Buy Now!

Set

Set

Buy Now!

Table Tennis Bat

Schools and club bat with ITTF approved surface for more ball control and safety. Inverted pimples, 1.8 mm padding, concave handles, special 5-ply wood. A 71 110 8460 Each

Set

Buy Now!

Buy Now!

e Sport-Thieme® “Paris” Table f Sport-Thieme® “Rom” Table g Sport-Thieme® “Wien” Table h Sport-Thieme® “Berlin” Tennis Bat Set

Consisting of: • 2 Sport-Thieme “Paris” table tennis bats • 6 high quality training balls (40 mm) H 71 110 8428 White balls Set H 71 110 8633 Orange balls Set

Tennis Bat Set

Consisting of: • 2 Sport-Thieme “Rom” table tennis bats • 6 high quality training balls H 71 110 8431 White balls Set H 71 110 8646 Orange balls Set

Tennis Bat Set

Consisting of: • 2 Sport-Thieme “Wien” table tennis bats • 6 high quality training balls B 71 110 8473 White balls Set B 71 110 8659 Orange balls Set

j Sport-Thieme® Mini Table Tennis Bat

This mini bat has a much smaller hitting surface than other table tennis bats. The ø of 10 cm makes targeted serves and returns difficult. 1.5 mm padding, inverted pimples. Ideal for technique training, games and leisure. 71 229 1013 Each

j

90

Buy Now!

Use the H-B-A-System:

i Sport-Thieme® “Champion”

Mini Table Tennis Table, on page 100

Set

Which bat for which player?

i

Also take a look at:

Table Tennis Bat Set

Consisting of: • 2 Sport-Thieme “Berlin” table tennis bats • 6 high quality training balls A 71 110 8486 White balls Set A 71 110 8662 Orange balls Set

Table Tennis Bat

Optimal ball control is ensured with this ITTF approved school and club bat. Special 5-ply wood, 1.7 mm padding. For advanced players. A 71 229 1000 Each

H B A

Hobby – playing occasionally for fun and to keep fit. Beginner – playing regularly, applying skills and good ball control. Skill levels are constantly improved. Advanced – training regularly, applying good technical skills and tactics.

k Sport-Thieme® “Champion” Table Tennis Set

Set consists of: • 2 Sport-Thieme “Champion” table tennis bats • 6 high quality training balls 71 229 1130 White balls A Set 71 229 1143 Orange balls A Set

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Table Tennis Bat and Ball Sets Teamsport Set

Buy Now!

a Sport-Thieme® “Berlin” School and Club Sport Table Tennis Set

This table tennis set contains: • 12 “Berlin” high quality table tennis bats (ITTF approved surface with 1.8 mm padding, inverted pimples) • 1 storage bag for the bats • 1 bucket with 144 training balls (40 mm) Ideal for centres where table tennis is played regularly. A 71 110 8604 White bucket Set A 71 110 8617 Orange bucket Set

Don’t forget to order:

• Table Tennis Nets, on page 95 • Table Tennis Tables, from page 96

Set

Set

Buy Now!

Buy Now!

Set

Buy Now!

® Mini Table Tennis Bat Set d Sport-Thieme® “Rom” Table Tennis b Sport-Thieme® “Champion” Table Tennis c Sport-Thieme The set for technique training, fun and leisure use School Set Set for Schools and Clubs

The top bat from Sport-Thieme! Comes in a set for technique training in schools and clubs. Set consists of: • 6 “Champion” table tennis bats • 30 high quality training balls (40 mm) A 71 229 1101 White balls Set A 71 229 1114 Orange balls Set

consisting of: • 10 mini table tennis bats • 50 large, orange table tennis balls, ø 55 mm • Ball bucket for storing table tennis balls 71 229 1127 Set

New!

e

Ideal for schools and leisure centres. The set consists of: • 12x “Rom” table tennis bats with 1.5 mm padding, external pimples, concave handles • 1x ball bucket containing 144 training balls (40 mm) H 71 110 8444 White balls Set 71 110 8620 Orange balls H Set

Set

Buy Now!

New! Cornilleau “Tacteo 30” School Set

These high quality table tennis bats and practical ball bucket are ideal for school sports. The set contains: • 12 high quality “Tacteo 30” table tennis bats • 1 bucket with 144 balls, ø 40 mm 71 251 8002 White balls Set 71 251 8015 Orange balls Set

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

4 Perfect for schools 4 Extremely durable

91


Teamsport Table Tennis Bats a Joola® “Team Germany

School” Table Tennis Bat

Beginner‘s bat, inverted pimples with 1.5 mm padding and a straight handle, special 5-ply wood. Ideal for school sports. H 71 110 7760 Each

b Joola® “Team Germany

Master” Table Tennis Bat

Light bat with ITTF approved “Tramp” surface, 1.8 mm padding, concave handle, special 5-ply wood. B 71 110 7773 Each

b c

a

c Joola® “Team Germany

Premium” Table Tennis Bat

Good bat control thanks to this bat‘s special 5-ply wood, ITTF approved “Teacher” surface, 1.8 mm padding and concave handle. A 71 110 7786 Each

d Donic® Schildkröt

“Team Germany 400” Table Tennis Bat

Special schools bat with concave handle, 1.4 mm padding for maximum ball control. ITTF approved surface. B 71 110 7630 Each

e Donic® Schildkröt

“Young Champs 400” Table Tennis Bat

e

f

d

Schools bat, ideal for training technique. With a vibration absorbing, concave handle for better ball control. 1.8 mm “Elite” surface (ITTF approved). B 71 110 7656 Each

g

® g Donic Schildkröt “Waldner f Donic® Schildkröt “Persson

h 4 40  % larger

Table Tennis Methodology and

Oversize bats are a part of the 3-stage table tennis learning concept. Beginners start with the Maxi bat (+40%) and 55 mm balls. The ball is easier to hit because of the bat size and the slower flight properties of the ball. Beginners have higher success rates and more fun while playing.

92

Donic® Schildkröt “Oversize Maxi” Table Tennis Bat

A methodical bat for more fun while learning table tennis techniques. These bats are 40% larger than normal bats but weigh the same. This makes it easier for beginners and small children to control the ball. External pimples, without padding, special 5-ply wood, 145 g. H 71 110 7643 Each

600” Table Tennis Bat

Tactical attack bat with 2.0 mm padding, ITTF approved Donic *** surface. Concave handle. A bat for technically ambitious players. Comes with “TechnikTaktik-Tricks” DVD (in German). A 71 250 0209 Each

Which bat for which player? Use the H-B-A-System:

Training

The Midi bat (+10%) is used in stage 2. Hitting and playing is made more difficult, but still easier due to the larger bat surface. Switching to the normal bat and the 40 mm ball occurs only when the player feels confident.

Line 500” Table Tennis Bat

A school and club bat for advanced players. The anatomic cork handle fits perfectly in the hand and will ensure the perfect hold for all techniques. 1.8 mm “Prestige” surface (ITTF approved). A 71 110 7669 Each

i Joola® Table

Tennis Bat Storage Bag

Padded bag for up to 14 bats. 71 110 8503 Each

H B A

Hobby – playing occasionally for fun and to keep fit. Beginner – playing regularly, applying skills and good ball control. Skill levels are constantly improved. Advanced – training regularly, applying good technical skills and tactics.

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


“Tacteo Outdoor” Cornilleau Table Tennis Bat

new A weatherproof bat made with d by composite materials develope sts. The Michelin, the rubber speciali ing, sit bats are very strong, long last good playeasily in the hand and have intensive ing characteristics. Ideal for re cenuse in schools, clubs and leisu rs, Tacteo tres. Tacteo 30: for beginne 50: for regular training.

a H 71 b

B

® tdoor Cornilleau Tacteo Ou

amsport Te Teamsport

al for An all-round bat – ide nal schools and recreatio ly organisations. Extreme robust!

111 0207 Tacteo 30Each

b

a

Each 71 111 0210 Tacteo 50

Buy Now!

More great value table

tennis bats

Top Rated

m

sport-thieme.co

eme.com on www.sport-thi

Sets

Set

Buy Now!

c Cornilleau “nexeo X70” Table Tennis Bat

A new generation in table tennis bats. Similar to the Tacteo series, the “nexeo X70” is weatherproof and very strong. The surface has been greatly improved. For very good technique and ball control. A 71 250 0007 Each

Set

Buy Now!

Set

Buy Now!

e “Nexeo X70” Table Ten-

f “Tacteo 50” Table Tennis

g “Tacteo 30” Table Tennis

Consisting of: • 2 Cornilleau “nexeo X70” table tennis bats • 6 high quality training balls (40 mm) A 71 250 0108 White balls Set 71 250 0111 Orange balls A Set

Consisting of: • 2 Cornilleau “Tacteo 50” table tennis bats • 6 high quality training balls (40 mm) B 71 111 0425 White balls Set B 71 111 0438 Orange balls Set

Consisting of: • 2 Cornilleau “Tacteo 30” table tennis bats • 6 high quality training balls (40 mm) H 71 111 0409 White balls Set H 71 111 0412 Orange balls Set

nis Set

Bat Set

Bat Set

Set

Buy Now!

Great Value!

Buy Now!

contains 144 b alls

d Outdoor Table Tennis Bat

Ideal for outdoor use in schools, swimming pools and at festivals. The plastic bat is strong and weatherproof. H 71 110 6334-2 Each

h Cornilleau “Tacteo 30” Outdoor Table Tennis Set

This outdoor set consists of:

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

• 12 high quality “Tacteo 30” table tennis bats • 1 bucket with 144 training balls, ø 40 mm. Ideal for organisations with a need for

robust bats and many replacement balls. H 71 111 0294 White balls Set H 71 111 0281 Orange balls Set

93


Teamsport Table Tennis Accessories Great Value!

4 More visible 4 Slower 4 Ideal for beginners and method training 4 50 balls

Buy Now! Top Rated

sport-thieme.com

4 144 competition balls

Size comparison: Method ball and tournament ball

a Sport-Thieme® Table Tennis

b Sport-Thieme® Table Ten-

Practice Balls Bucket

nis Method Balls Bucket

Competition quality practice balls for schools and clubs. The bucket contains 144 balls, ø 40 mm. 71 110 7803 White ballsEach 71 110 7832 Orange ballsEach

Bucket with 50 table tennis balls, in orange, ø 55 mm. These balls are slower and more visible. 71 110 7816 Each

d New!

c

c Joola® Table Tennis Ball Set

Different ball sizes to ensure more fun. The set consists of: • 3 balls, ø 40 mm • 2 jumbo balls, ø 44 mm • 2 elephant balls, ø 55 mm 71 110 8200 Each

New! e

d g

New! Schildkröt 3* Table

Tennis Balls

ITTF approved. ø 40 mm, hand selected and extra hard. White. 71 250 5709 Each

e f

i

New! Schildkröt 3* Table

h

Tennis Balls

ITTF approved. ø 40 mm, hand selected and extra hard. 4 balls for the price of 3. White. 71 250 5608  Set of 4

g Double Circle Table Tennis

4 Available with and without print

h Playing Area Border Screen

Competition quality. Dark green PVC cover with or without Sport-Thieme nis Balls ø 40 mm. Original Chinese training ball, print. Individualised printing on request. i Transport Trolley Top quality, from training to competition, ø ideal for school and club sports. 6 balls 200x67 cm. Takes 48 playing area border screens 40 mm, jade ball, white. in a box. 71 110 9115 With Sport-Thieme logoEach (200 cm). Assembled size (LxWxH): 71 110 9607 White balls Set of 6 71 187 8309 White balls Set of 6 71 110 9102 Without Sport-Thieme logo 238x80x180 cm. 71 110 9610 Orange balls Set of 6 71 187 8312 Orange balls Set of 6 Each 71 110 9506 Each

f Donic Schildkröt Table Ten®

Balls

j TSP® Table Tennis Score Counter

Easy to use and very practical. Score counter made of hard plastic with luminous numbers. The special ring mechanism prevents the numbers being torn out. Can be displayed on both sides. Set numbers from 0-5 and points from 0-31. 39x22 cm. 71 110 4400 Each

94

k Joola® Electronic Score Counter

Portable electronic counter for displaying the score in table tennis, badminton and volleyball. The display is easy to read with up to 9 sets, 99 points and a serving side display. Digit height: 12.5/7.5cm.

Simple to use. Power supply: 18 DC 1.5 V battery size: D (R20) - approx. 100 hours display time or DC 18 V mains connection. Batteries and mains adapter are not included. Size (HxW): 48x28 cm, 3 kg (without batteries). 71 110 4426 Each

l Joola® Table Tennis Score Counter

In a practical plastic folder that can be folded together. With numbers 1-30, 5 sets. Size: 49x28 cm. 71 110 4413 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Table Tennis Nets and Robots Teamsport Competition Net Sets complying with ITTF regulations d Sport-Thieme®

“Special Indoor” Table Tennis Net Set

Great Product! 4 Sturdy school sports equipment

Top of the range, strong metal design in accordance with ITTF regulations. Handy star grip for finer height adjustment. Net holders with wide support and net made of particularly robust fabric. 71 110 4703 Each

e Sport-Thieme® Replacement Net

a Joola “Klick Indoor” Net Set ®

Solid net set with height adjustment and clamping system. 71 110 4833 Each

b Joola® “Klick Indoor” Repla-

71 110 4918 Each

c Sport-Thieme® “Timo Click Indoor” Net Set

A strong metal table tennis net set with height adjustment and clip on clamps. cement Net 71 110 4934 Each 71 110 5315 Each

j Joola® “Europaliga Indoor” Net Set

4 Weatherproof

f Sport-Thieme “Timo Out®

door” Net Sets

Very solid metal net set for clubs, with micro height adjustment in practical storage bag. 71 110 4820 Each

Table Tennis Bats, page 90-93

Complies with ITTF regulations, stable metal body, cotton/steel net, micro height adjustment with integrated net bar lock. 71 110 4817 Each

h Sport-Thieme® “Perfect EN” k Joola® “Europaliga” Replace- o Joola® “WM” Replacement Table Tennis Net Set

Compatible for table tennis tables: • Sport-Thieme “Berlin Indoor” Weatherproof table tennis net set made • Sport-Thieme “Berlin Outdoor” of robust plastic. Easy to set up and take • Sport-Thieme “Timomatik” down with handy clamping bolt, height • Sport-Thieme “Timo-Patent” adjustment and tensioning chains. 71 110 5302 Each • Sport-Thieme “Training Indoor” • Sport-Thieme “Training Outdoor” g Sport-Thieme® “Timo Out- • Sport-Thieme “Master” door” Replacement Net • Sport-Thieme “Profi” 71 110 4905 Each 71 110 4716 Each

Don’t forget to order:

n Joola® “WM Indoor” Net Set

i Sport-Thieme® “Perfect

EN” Table Tennis Replacement Net

ment Net

Net

71 110 4918-1 Each 71 110 4921 Each

l

New! Donic® “Stress” Net

Set

Made to ITTF regulations, very stable sheet steel construction, plastic coated. With micro height adjustment and large clamping bolts. 71 251 7403 GreenEach 71 251 7416 BlueEach

m Donic® “Stress” Replace-

New!

ment Net

71 251 9500 GreenEach 71 110 4729 Each 71 251 9513 BlueEach

“Robo-Pong” Table Tennis Robot

New! New! p

New! Donic® “Robo-Pong

2050” Table Tennis Robot

The perfect training partner for competition players and clubs. Throws up to 170 balls per minute with a ball speed of up to 120 km/h. With this training device you can train your topspin, counter hitting, side and backspin. The digital control unit allows precise control over the speed of the ball, interval and/or position to allow for unpredictable table tennis training. In

addition there are 64 exercises installed to suit every game level. The surround net collects all the balls and guides them back to the robot‘s pump system and therefore its operation is uninterrupted. Windows compatible, includes a set-up DVD and an q New! Donic® Table Tennis Robot “Robo-Pong 1050” operating manual. Dimensions (HxWxD): 60x152x30 cm, 8 kg. The more price concious version of the digital Robo-Pong 2050. The functions are Balls not included. 71 251 7504 Each identical to the 2050. However, this model

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

does not have a ball return system, surrounding net or collecting pan. Dimensions (HxWxD): 60x35x30 cm, 4.5 kg. Balls not included. 71 251 7605 Each

95


New!

Competition Tables b

a 4 Arrives “ready to play” 4 Easy to put up and fold away

a

New! Donic® “Delhi SLC”

Table Tennis Table

The perfect club table with ITTF approval complying with DIN EN 14468-1 Class A standards for high performance sports. Equipped with the super compact system, the table is quick to set up and fold away. With 22 mm thick, scratch-proof surface and robust steel construction. Easy to transport thanks to the 4 castors, 2 of which

b have brakes. With height adjustment for a secure stand. Approx. 110 kg. Dimensions when folded up (LxWxH): 152.5x44x160 cm. Includes Donic “Stress” net. Delivered ready to play, no assembly required. Its 40 cm leg room makes the table suitable for wheelchair users. 71 251 7100 GreenEach 71 251 7113 BlueEach

4 Compact storage 4 Simple assembly

New! Donic® “Delhi 25”

Table Tennis Table

Competition table with ITTF approval for EN 14468-1 Class 1 for high performance sports. Thanks to its super compact system, the table is quick to set up and fold away. With a high quality and scratch-proof 25 mm thick surface, a particularly stable construction and protected from corrosion. Easy to transport with its 4 castors, 2 of which have brakes, and height

Available Colours RAL 5002 blue RAL 6002 green adjustment. Approx. 135 kg. Dimensions when folded up (LxWxH): 152.5x47x160 cm. Includes Donic “Stress” net. Game ready delivery, no assembly required. Its legroom of 40 cm makes the table suitable for wheelchair users. It is used in German Championships by the DBS‘ (German Association of Disabled Sports) department of table tennis. 71 251 7009 GreenEach 71 251 7012 BlueEach

c Joola® “3000-SC” Table Tennis Table

EN 14468-1 class A / high performance sports. Thanks to its super compact system, this table can be set up and put away very quickly. The table features the high quality 22 mm Joola® competition surface. Safe to move around and more stable as a result of the 4 castors of which 2 are fitted with brakes and the solid hard rubber height adjusters. 115 kg. Compact storage: (HxW) 160x56 cm. Without net. Green 71 110 4325 Each Blue 71 110 4341 Each Green, suitable for wheelchair users 71 110 4370 Each

Table Tennis Tables, suitable for wheelchairs

provide 40 cm leg room. Look out for this symbol:

Blue, suitable for wheelchair users 71 110 4383 Each

Available Colours RAL 5002 blue RAL 6002 green

Also take a look at:

• Table Tennis Bats, from page 90 • Net Sets, page 95

d Cornilleau “Competition

640” Table Tennis Table, ITTF approved

Competition table that complies with EN 14468-1 class A. 22 mm thick chipboard table with a special coating. This allows for a perfect ball bounce and a longer life span. Very stable and very easy to set up and put away thanks to the patented folding mechanism, the stable frame and the height adjustment. An ITTF approved net is included. 110 kg. Dimensions when folded up (LxWxH): 184x65x158 cm. 71 111 0337 Each

96

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Teamsport

New! 4 Compact storage 4 High performance table 4 25 mm thick table top a New! Sport-Thieme® “Liga” Table Tennis Table

A real winner!

a

A table tennis table for high performance sports and competitions complying with EN 14468-1 class A standards. Multi-coated 25 mm chipboard table with very good playing characteristics. The advantage of this table is that it can be folded away to save space. With snap-lock system for fixing the legs to play or store away. Each table top half has two wheels (128 mm) with rubberised tread. Dimensions when folded up (LxWxH): 152.5x16.5x142 cm, 103 kg. Net not included. 5 year guarantee! 71 250 6207 Each

5

year guarantee

5

year guarantee

b

b

New! Sport-Thieme® “Winner” Table

Tennis Table

The new Sport-Thieme “Winner” for high performance and competition sports in accordance with EN 14468-1 Class A. The 22 mm competition plywood table guarantees very good playing characteristics. The table halves can be rolled along separately. When upright, the table halves slide into one another to save space. Stable supporting frame with rubberised swivel castors. Height adjustable, without net. 5 year guarantee. 95 kg. 71 250 6409 Each

New!

c Joola® “Rollomat” Table Tennis Table

Competition table that complies with EN 14468-1 class A for high performance sports, with mobile underframe. 22 mm thick competition top. Easy to use, strong and stands very stable with automatic folding bases. Table top halves are secured with steel springs when in the upright position. Approx. 115 kg. Dimensions when folded up (LxWxH): 152.5x60x187 cm. Without net. Green 71 110 4309 Each Blue 71 110 4312 Each Green, suitable for wheelchair users 71 110 4354 Each

c

Available Colours RAL 5002 blue RAL 6002 green

Joola® “Permanent” Net Set

Blue, suitable for wheelchair users 71 110 4367 Each

d Joola® “Permanent” Net Set

Permanent net set for the Joola® “Rollomat” and “Olympic” tables. 71 110 4859 Each

e

e Joola® “Duomat” Table Tennis Table

An ITTF approved competition table that complies with EN 14468-1 class A for high performance sports. The ideal table for clubs with a large number of youth members and a lot of intensive training. Each half of the table is mounted on 4 wheels and stored by pushing the tops together. The surface is 22 mm thick and very fast. The tubing of the metal frame comes with a rounded glued-on PVC edge that protects the playing surface. Approx. 126 kg. Size when folded: 135x75x167 cm. Without net. 71 110 2505 GreenEach 71 110 2518 BlueEach

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

Available Colours RAL 5002 blue RAL 6002 green

97


Teamsport Indoor Table Tennis Tables

4 Ideal for schools and clubs 4 Comes completely assembled 4 Scratch resistant surface 4 Especially long lasting a New! Donic® “Waldner High 4 Compact storage School” Table Tennis Table Available Colours RAL 5002 blue RAL 6002 green

Available Colours RAL 5002 blue RAL 6002 green

b Joola® “World Cup” Table Tennis Table

A table tennis table for school and club sports complying with EN 14468-1 class B. 22 mm thick table top, super fast playing surface, metal frame made of 50 mm tubing. Each table top half sits on 4 castors. Compact storage possible as the

The Donic “Waldner High School” table tennis table is a school and club sport table complying with EN 14468-1 Class B standards. The table is lightweight and easy to handle and caters to the needs of clubs, schools or other organisations.

Now Even Better

4 An even quicker surface

New! 19 mm thick top, scratch-proof and especially long lasting. The table has already proven its worth at many tournaments. The solid steel structure is multi-coated and the metal components are finished with an Epoxy lacquering which offers long lasting protection against corrosion.The Donic “Waldner High School” table tennis

table is delivered fully assembled and includes the Donic “Clip” net set. Dimensions when folded up (WxHxD): approx. 152.5x156.5x45.5 cm. No tedious screwing together required. Simply remove from the special packaging - open up and play. 71 251 7302 GreenEach 71 251 7315 BlueEach

Available Colours RAL 5002 blue

4 Compact storage

RAL 6002 green

c Joola® “Transport S” Table Tennis Table

A table tennis table for school and club halves can be pushed into one another. sports complying with EN 14468-1 class Very easy to set up and put away. Approx. B. Both table top halves can be moved 106 kg. Without net. separately and the table can be set up and 71 110 2202 GreenEach put away without any great effort. 71 110 2215 BlueEach The 19 mm thick table tops sit on a

stable metal frame. Ball bearing mounted castors make transport easier. Approx. 90 kg. Dimensions when folded up (LxWxH): 153x49x167 cm. Without net. 71 110 3306 GreenEach 71 110 3319 BlueEach

d Stiga® “Privat Roller” Table Tennis Table

Complies with EN 14468-1 class B for schools and clubs. The 19 mm thick table top is coated in blue, pre-assembled frame made of 40x45 mm tubing. Semi-automatic frame with 30x30/50x30 mm rectangular tubing, plastic coated. Mobile with 4 wheels (100 mm) per table half, all wheels are steerable. 2 wheels come with a brake. Dimensions when folded up (LxWxH): 152.5x66.5x154 cm. With assembly instructions, without net, weight: 80 kg. 71 110 7106 Each

98

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Indoor Table Tennis Tables Teamsport a

4 Net set bolted on permanently 4 Compact storage

New! Sport-Thieme® “Mas-

ter” Table Tennis Table

Table tennis for schools and club sports complying with EN 14468-1 class B. The 19 mm thick chipboard top ensures perfect ball spin and makes the table strong and stable. The table also has a playback position for training on your own. The black frame, made from robust square tubing, is plastic coated. Four large double swivel castors ensure easy transport. Comes with SMS securing system – can be unlocked using only one hand! Includes bats, ball holder (balls not included) and net. Dimensions when folded up (LxWxH): 152.5 (with net 184) x72x155 cm. 5 year guarantee! 87 kg. 71 250 5800 Green playing surfaceEach 71 250 5813 Blue playing surfaceEach

a

Smart Manual System

5 Smart Manual System

Sport-Thieme® “Profi” Table Tennis Table: the Advantages

• Setting the table up and putting it away is also possible for people in wheelchairs • There is a large amount of legroom for wheelchair users • Easy to assemble and dismantle the table tops thanks to the special frame construction • Additional brakes provide improved and stable stand • Automatic anti-tip mechanism • Premium workmanship. All connections between the playing surface and the frame are both bolted and glued together

year guarantee

New!

SMS (Smart Manual System)

Very convenient safety system for one handed operation. The prominent handle is visible from all positions and sides of the table. The pull rod under the table unlocks both safety catches at the same time. To ensure that the automatic locking mechanism snaps into place, the table tops must be set to an upright position. In the playing position, the locking mechanism safely clicks into place before reaching the horizontal position. In doing so, the table tennis table also provides you with higher stability on uneven floors.

New!

b

Smart Manual System

Exclusive to Sport-Thieme®

b

5

year guarantee

New! Sport-Thieme® “Profi''

Table Tennis Table

The Professional for integrative sports. Manufactured to EN 14468-1, Class B standards, “Profi” is ideal for use in school and club sports. Wheelchair users and children can set up the table themselves. With 400 mm of legroom, the table meets international wheelchair sport requirements. The 22 mm thick blue fine chipboard table top provides great playing conditions. Additional stability is provided from the frame made of 50 mm tubing. All metal parts are powder coated and scratch-proof. The large castors ensure easy transportation. Comes with 2 brakes for and improved and stable stand.

4 Ideal for wheelchair users 4 Includes height adjustment and brakes

c Table Tennis Half Board Replacement

Replacement top half for table tennis tables: “Master”, “Profi” and “Training Indoor”. 19 mm multi-ply chipboard with Uneven floors can be dealt with using the glare-free plastic lacquer coating and all height adjusting rear support leg. The around PVC edging. Please note: replacetable is also suitable for single player trai- ment tops may have slight colour diffening (playback). Permanent net set inclurences to the original table top. Prices for ded. Dimensions when folded up (LxWxH): additional replacement parts are available 184x69.5x155 cm, 100 kg. 5 year guaupon request. rantee! 71 110 2606 Green table top halfEach 71 250 6308 Each 71 110 2619 Blue table top halfEach

d Cornilleau® “Sport 250

Indoor” Table Tennis Table

Complying with EN 14468-1 class B. This means the table is particularly suitable for school sport training. 19 mm chipboard with good playing characteristics and a reinforced frame made of 30 mm tubing. The four steerable double castors with brakes and the stable folding mechanism guarantee easy transport and that it is quick to set up and put away. Dimensions when folded up (LxWxH): 161x75x156 cm. Includes retractable net. Balls and bats are not included. 76 kg. 71 111 0395 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

99


Teamsport For hobby and recreational use

Great Value!

a

Buy Now!

Information on page 99

5

year guarantee

Available Colours RAL 5002 blue RAL 6002 green

“Training Indoor” Table Tennis Table

Robust recreational table that complies with EN 14468-1 class C (recreational table, not weatherproof). The 19 mm chipboard table (green) guarantees optimal ball performance. The compact frame is quick to set up and put away. Its safe SMS system allows the table to be released with just one hand! Four steerable double castors. Includes net set, ball and bat holders on sides (without bats or balls) and assembly instructions. Size when stored away (LxWxH): 152.5x69x163 cm. 5 year guarantee! 87 kg. 71 250 5901 Each

New!

Smart Manual System

New! Sport-Thieme®

b Table Tennis Half Board Replacement

4 Single sided play possible 4 Compact storage 4 With permanently attached net

Don’t forget to order: Net Sets, on page 95

Replacement top half for table tennis tables: “Master”, “Profi” and “Training Indoor”. 19 mm multi-ply chipboard with ® Sport-Thieme “Perfect EN” glare-free plastic lacquer coating and all c Table Tennis Net Set around PVC edging. Please note: replaceSuitable for the following Sport-Thieme ment tops may have slight colour diffetable tennis tables: “Profi”, “Master”, rences to the original table top. Prices for “Training Indoor” as well as “Berlin additional replacement parts are availaIndoor”, “Berlin Outdoor”, “Timomatik” ble upon request. (EN-Tables), “Training Outdoor” 71 110 2606 Green table top halfEach 71 110 4716-1 Each 71 110 2619 Blue table top halfEach

Set

Strong construction

d Cornilleau Mini Table Tennis Table

A strong table tennis table for leisure, fun and games. Ideal for small spaces. Quick to set up and put away thanks to its folding mechanism. Blue playing surface: 137x76 cm. Height adjustable: 60, 68 and 76 cm, 17 kg, including net. 71 203 3727 Each

Height adjustable: 60, 68 and 76 cm

e Mini Table Tennis Table

This mini table is perfect for smaller spaces. Place it on a table, fold down the height adjustable legs and you are ready to begin.The extremely solid structure with metal frame also makes the mini table suitable for classroom use. Once you are finished playing, simply fold the legs in again. With a storage height of 5.5 cm, the table can be quickly stowed away. 10 mm thick Quick to set up and put plywood board with surrounding frame. away thanks to the fol- Playing size (LxWxH): 62x38x28 cm, 6 kg. 71 230 0708 Each ding mechanism

Set Buy Now!

f Mini Duo Table Tennis Bat Set

More fun when playing table tennis. The bat has a much smaller playing surface compared to other table tennis bats. ø 10 cm. The set consists of 2 mini bats and 6 training balls (40 mm). 71 229 1156 White balls Set 71 229 1169 Orange balls Set

With permanently attached net

Available Colours RAL 5002 blue RAL 6002 green

Great Value!

Buy Now!

4 Weatherproof 4 Collapsible g

New! Sport-Thieme®

“Training” Outdoor Table Tennis Table

Weatherproof recreational table that complies with European standard 14468-1 class D (recreational table, weather resistant). The 5 mm thick melamine resin table top will continue to keep its play-

100

ing characteristics even when exposed to sunlight and rain. The compact base frame with the safe SMS system (table can be released with just one hand) allows even children to set it up and put it away quickly. Four steerable double castors, so the table can be moved around easily even on uneven surfaces. The net, ball and

5 year guarantee

h

bat holder (without contents) and assembly instructions are included. Storage size h Cover (LxWxH): 152.5x69x163 cm. A waterproof cover for the “Training 5 year guarantee! Outdoor” and “Berlin Compact Outdoor” 71 250 6005 BlueEach table tennis tables. 71 250 6018 GreenEach 71 110 3029 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


A real winner!

Teamsport

Set a

New! Kettler®

“Smash 9” Outdoor Table Tennis Set

The set to meet the highest requirements! Included: • 1 Kettler “Smash 9” outdoor table tennis table • I Kettler dust cover (weatherproof) - protects the table from dust and dirt • 4 high quality Cornilleau “Tacteo 30” table tennis bats • 6 original “Double Circle” table tennis training balls 71 251 8204 Set

b

New! Kettler® “Smash 1

Outdoor” Table Tennis Table

Weatherproof table tennis table for recreational use. 22 mm aluminium composite board with anti-glare playing surface. With its 4 steerable castors and a lockable folding mechanism, it is quick to set up and put away. Single player use with one board half is possible. A permanently attached net set & a bat and ball holder (empty) are also included. Size when stored away (LxWxH): 62x183x171 cm. TÜV/GS approved, five year guarantee on the aluminium composite board, 48 kg. 71 251 8103 Each

c

Set Buy Now!

b

New!

New! Kettler® “Smash 5”

Outdoor Table Tennis Table

A weatherproof table tennis for higher demands in leisure use. 22 mm Alu-Tec composite board with an anti-glare playing surface. Frame made of 35 mm aluminium tubing. 4 steerable double castors with rubber tread and a folding mechanism with guiding system allow the table to be set up and put away quickly. Single player training is possible with one half board in an upright position. A permanently fixed height adjustable net set and a bat and ball holder (empty) are also included. Size when stored away (LxWxH): 68x183x165 cm. TÜV/GS approved, five year guarantee on the Alu-Tec composite board. 65 kg. 71 251 8116 Each

c

New!

d New! Kettler® “Smash 9”

Outdoor Table Tennis Table

This is the top model from Kettler®‘s table tennis table range. A weatherproof outdoor table tennis table that meets the highest demands. With very good playing characteristics thanks to the 22 mm thick anti-glare Alu-Tec composite board. Stable base construction, 4 steerable double castors with rubber tread, height leveller. Single person training is possible with one table top half folded up. Permanently attached and height adjustable net set and a bat and ball holder (empty) are included. Size when folded up (LxWxH): 68x183x165 cm. TÜV/GS approved , 5 year guarantee on the Alu-Tec composite board, 78 kg. 71 251 8129 Each

d

New!

Weatherproof dust cover for Kettler outdoor table tennis tables. Protects from damp, dust and dirt. For Kettler outdoor table tennis boards up to dimensions of LxWxH: 160x80x170 cm 71 110 3016 Each 80 cm

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

170 cm

e Table Tennis Table Cover

Also take a look at: 160 cm

• Table Tennis Bats, from page 90 •N  et Sets, page 95

101


Teamsport Outdoor Table Tennis Tables 135 cm

160

cm

85 cm

a Dust Cover

Weatherproof. For collapsible Cornilleau outdoor table tennis tables. LxWxH: 160x85x135 cm. 71 110 3032 Each

4 Anti-glare playing surface 4 Excellent playing characteristics

b b Cornilleau “Sport 300 M

Outdoor” Table Tennis Table

A stable outdoor table in a new design. With stability and an elegant shape in an appealing colour. The 5 mm thick melamine resin board is fully anti-glare. The folding mechanism is easy to use. The double castors are fitted with a lock. Balls and bats are not included. This weatherproof table includes the net. 61 kg. Dimensions when folded up (LxWxH): 161x75x156cm 71 111 0366 Each

c Cornilleau® “Sport One Outdoor” Table Tennis Table

A stable weatherproof leisure table for garden and hobby use. Light weight, simple folding mechanism and 4 double castors allow the table to be set up by children. The anti-glare 4 mm thick melamine resin board is reinforced by the 40 mm thick frame and is therefore very stable. The table can be used in playback position (single player). Dimensions when folded up (LxWxH): 161x75x156 cm. Bats are not included. With height adjusters on the outer legs to even out uneven ground. Comes with a permanently attached net. 44 kg. 71 111 0382 Each

c

d

Available Colours RAL 5002 blue Corner padding

102

RAL 7021 anthracite

d 4 Quickly collapsible 4 Includes additional indoor net

New! Cornilleau “PRO 540”

Outdoor Table Tennis Table

A very robust table tennis table for intensive, sporting use in indoor and outdoor areas. Specially developed for places where the table needs to be put away quickly. This makes it ideal for schools, camping grounds, open air swimming pools and youth clubs. The folding design allows for single player playback games. 7 mm thick melamine resin board, includes metal net for outdoor areas and an additional net for indoor training. Storage dimensions (LxWxH): 154x75x155 cm, 84 kg. 71 250 6614 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Outdoor Table Tennis Tables Teamsport Outdoor - recommended for intensive use

a

New! Cornilleau “PRO 510”

Outdoor Table Tennis Table

A permanent table tennis table for intensive, sportive use for both indoors and all year round outdoor use. Balls and bats are not included. Includes steel net. 7 mm thick melamine resin board, under frame made from galvanised steel sheet, 77 kg. 71 250 6627 AnthraciteEach 71 111 0311 BlueEach

Sport-Thieme® AllWeather Outdoor Table Tennis Table b Sport-Thieme® Weatherproof

Corner padding

Available Colours RAL 5002 blue RAL 7021 anthracite

4 Can be used outdoors, all year round 4 Scratch and impact proof 10 mm thick melamine resin playing surface 4 Option of either green or blue 4 Weatherproof 4 Includes net set

Outdoor Table Tennis Table

Manufactured to EN 14468-1, class B standards. This table can be used outside all year round. The 10 mm melamine resin playing surface is scratch and impact resistant, in green or blue. The frame is made of 50x20 mm galvanised and plastic coated tubing and galvanised and powder coated steel sheet, includes 4 mm steel sheet net set. Can be assembled by two people in approximately one hour. Due to the low net weight of 116 kg, the table is ideal for use in places that are tricky to access. It is possible to anchor the table to a concrete foundation using the loops provided at the feet. 5 year guarantee! 71 110 7207 GreenEach 71 110 7210 BlueEach

c

5 Available Colours RAL 5002 blue

year guarantee

• Very stable construction •N  et weight 116 kg

RAL 6002 green

New!

New! Donic® “Sky” Table

Tennis Table

A first class recreational table for all year round playing in outdoor areas. It is totally weatherproof and equipped with a 8 mm thick melamine resin board. The frame is made from hot dip galvanised precision steel tubes making it extremely robust and enabling floor mounting. Includes net made from hot dip galvanised steel sheet. Approx. 160 kg. 71 251 7201 Each

d “Top-Spin” Weatherproof Table Tennis Table

All year round, safe table tennis fun for public areas. Very stable table made from 4 mm thick solid steel sheet (2K liquid coating, can be retreated at any time), a 8 mm thick aluminium net and 6 hot dip galvanised steel table legs. The rounded corners reduce the risk of injury. Easy to assemble. Ideal for children and youth centres, camp sites and schools. Comes with a green or blue playing surface. Other colours available on request. LxWxH: 274x152.5x76 cm, 200 kg. 15 year guarantee! 71 229 1202 GreenEach 71 229 1215 BlueEach

15

year

guarantee

Available Colours RAL 5002 blue

4 Rounded corners reduce the risk of injury 4 More colours available on request 4 Can withstand up to 10 t

RAL 6002 green

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

103


Teamsport Concrete Table Tennis Tables b

4 Can be assembled without professional help

a

10

year

guarantee

Available Colours

10

RAL 5002 blue

year

RAL 6002 green

guarantee

b Sport-Thieme® “Standard”

Available Colours

Replacement Parts for ab Table Tennis Table Top Halves

RAL 5002 blue

Polymer Concrete Table Tennis Table

This polymer concrete table is ideally suited for outdoor use. Its 30 mm thick playing surface is scratch proof and resistant to frost, heat and UV rays. The non-porous surface with inlaid markings means that the bounce of the ball is precise. Framed with impact resistant hard PVC, the table Base Frame for Table Tennis the appearance of any outside recreatiois perfectly protected against breakage nal area with its elegant frame. The table Table “Profi” on the edges. Simple assembly and set top is the same as “Standard” (30 mm). For concrete table “Profi” a. Although “Profi” is considerably heavier 71 152 0301 Each up: Thanks to the hot dip galvanised and height adjustable metal frame, no other at 415 kg, its heaviest individual part only Base Frame for “Standard” Table base support is necessary. The ground weighs 120 kg. Net set not included. 10 should be even and solid. Three adults year guarantee. Tennis Table will be enough to assemble the table as its 71 110 3700 GreenEach For concrete table “Standard” b. 71 110 3713 BlueEach 71 151 9509 Each heaviest part is only 120 kg. Net not included. Total weight approx. 300 kg. 10 year guarantee. 71 110 3609 GreenEach 71 110 3612 BlueEach

RAL 6002 green

Made of 30 mm thick polymer concrete for table tennis tables “Standard” b and “Profi” a. 71 152 0109 Each

a Sport-Thieme® “Profi” Polymer Concrete Table Tennis Table

This is a particularly attractive table tennis table as it is stable and the solid polymer concrete frame is very elegant. The components of the frame are connected by a patented interlocking system making assembly simple. Locking pins that point inwards ensure great stability. This table is not only very stable but also improves

c

Buy Now!

4 Includes net

c Dywidag Concrete Table Tennis Table

Set

Accessories 4 Weatherproof

e 4 Aluminium 4 Weatherproof

e Aluminium Table Tennis Net d Table Tennis Metal Net Set

Protected design.This net is weatherproof and has a particularly sturdy design. Specially reinforced net edges set this item apart. The perforated steel net is galvanised and painted matt green. Comes with fixtures; compatible for our concrete tables. LxH: 152.50x12 cm. 71 110 6608 Each

104

An extremely stable, one piece table tennis table. Delivered fully assembled and ready to play. 6 cm thick table top made from a grey-green concrete block and a smooth exposed concrete frame with a weatherproof, grey protective coating. Very stable thanks to high net weight of 750 kg. The table is framed with aluminium edging. Includes a strong aluminium net set. LxWxH: 274x152x76 cm. 71 111 0005 Each

Made of aluminium for outdoor concrete tables. Suitable for our outdoor tables. 4 mm thick material. LxH: 152.5x12 cm. 71 110 6800 Each

f Aluminium Table Tennis Net Set (8 mm)

Made from 8 mm thick aluminium. Suitable with our concrete outdoor table tennis tables. LxH: 152.5x12 cm. Not illustrated. 71 110 6813 Each

Set Buy Now!

contains 144 balls

g Cornilleau “Tacteo 30 Outdoor” Table Tennis Set

This outdoor pack consists of: • 12  high quality “Tacteo 30” table tennis bats • 1 bucket with 144 balls, ø 40 mm Ideal for organisations where robust bats and many replacement balls are required. 71 111 0294-1 White ballsSet 71 111 0281-1 Orange ballsSet

h Outdoor Table Tennis Bat

Ideal for outdoor use in schools, swimming pools and at festivals. The plastic bat is strong and weatherproof. 71 110 6334 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Concrete Table Tennis Tables Teamsport

a Sport-Thieme® “Premium”

Polymer Concrete Table Tennis Table

The table tennis table for the most demanding situations. The finely coated playing surface of this very stable table is 45 mm thick. It is anti-glare and nonporous which ensures perfect playing conditions and makes the playing surface even more scratch-proof and resistant to weather influences. The solid construction from special concrete ensures that the table stands very securely. The table weighs approx. 700 kg (short legs) or 750 kg (long legs). As the heaviest part of the table weighs only 180 kg it can be assembled by four adults without lifting equipment. It is simple to assemble the table top, which is screwed into the base frame giving the table great stability.

a

Buy Now!

4 Table  top thickness 45 mm

Tip:

All rectangular table tennis tables comply in size with international regulations (LxWxH): 274x152.5x76 cm.

An aluminium edge all around the table protects the playing surface perfectly from damage and the rounded off edges make it safe and prevent injury. Net is not included. Table tennis tables with long legs Replacement Parts for a are to be concreted in foundations. 10 year guarantee. “Premium” Table Tennis Half Green Table Top Short legs, free-standing Made from acrylic concrete (45 mm) for 71 110 4006 Each table tennis table a. Long legs, to be concreted in 71 152 0200 Each 71 110 4019 Each Base Frame “Premium Short” Blue For table tennis table a with short legs. Short legs, free-standing 71 152 0402 Each 71 110 4022 Each Base Frame “Premium Long” Long legs, to be concreted in For table tennis table a with long legs. 71 110 4035 Each 71 152 0415 Each

10

year

guarantee

b

b Sport-Thieme® “Rondo”

Polymer Concrete Table Tennis Table

Made from polymer concrete, including net! Take a new approach to table tennis! The “Rondo” round table offers several players great fun and combines this great idea with the well loved “normal” concrete table for outdoor use. The finely coated playing surface will not scratch. The PVC edging protects both you from injury and the table edges from damage. The table tops are screwed to the base frame, which is made from solid polymer concrete to form a stable unit. This table is 30 mm thick and 240 cm in diameter with special materials that make the table top totally resistant to frost and other weather influences. Assembly is very easy too. The heaviest individual part of the table weighs 150 kg, with a total of approx. 500 kg. 10 year guarantee!. 71 110 3508 GreenEach 71 110 3511 BlueEach

Replacement Parts for b Base Frame “Rondo”

For round table tennis table b. 71 151 9701 Each

Extension Set “Rondo” for Cross Net Set

For round table tennis table b. 71 152 0604 Each

“Rondo” Table Tennis Half Table Top

For round table tennis table b. 71 151 9600 Each

4 Especially suited for fun games such as “running around the table”

10

year

guarantee

Available Colours RAL 5002 blue RAL 6002 green

c Sport-Thieme® “Champion” Polymer Concrete Table Tennis Table

This table tennis table is made from polymer concrete with rounded edges. This top class table tennis table features rounded edges making it safer. The 30 mm thick playing surface is non-scratch and absolutely weatherproof. The components of the frame are connected by a patented interlocking system making assembly simple. The table is therefore suitable for self assembly. Although the “Champion” weighs 415 kg, the heaviest individual part only weighs 120 kg. With its elegant design it is not only very stable but also improves the appearance of any outside recreational area. 4 mm thick aluminium net included. 10 year guarantee. 71 110 3726 GreenEach 71 110 3739 BlueEach

c

10

year

guarantee

For Advice and Ordering – give us a call! Phone: +49 5357 181-543

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

Made from polymer concrete

Rounded corners

105


Teamsport Victor® Badminton Racquets Accessories

New! a

b

c

d

e j Hanging Rack for Badminton Racquets

d

4 Strung with high quality competition strings

New! Victor® “AL 6500 I”

Badminton Racquet

A high quality badminton racquet in onepiece design for an amazingly low price. ® b Victor Badminton Racquet Robust, reliable carbon shaft topped off An all-round racquet in one piece with an aluminium head and an isometdesign for heavy duty use. Hardened steel ric head shape. Inside T-joint for high stashaft with aluminium, isometric shaped bility and durability. Strung with Ashaway head. Strung with Ashaway Rally 21 strings. Rally 21 strings. The ideal racquet for every Approx. 98 g. advanced club player. Approx. 90 g. 71 117 2209 Each 71 114 3805 Each

c Victor® “Atomos 600” Badminton Racquet

e Victor “G 7500” Badminton Racquet

An ideal low torsion one-piece racquet made from 100% graphite, with isometa Victor® Badminton Racquet A balanced one piece racquet for a conric head, strung with Ashaway Ralley 21 Very balanced school racquet, harde- trolled and dynamic game. Carbon shaft strings. With “Navigator Farrel” vibration with aluminium head, isometric head ned steel shaft with aluminium head, isoabsorption. Includes 3/4 insulation bag. shape. Lawntex strings, balance point metric head shape. Strung with Ashaway Approx. 85 g. approx. 32.9 cm. Approx. 96 g. Rally 21 strings. Approx. 98 g. 71 117 2108 Each 71 116 7506 Each 71 116 9300 Each

Victor® School Sport Concept

For an easy view and theft-proof storage of up to 20 badminton racquets. Strong and stable metal frame for wall mounting. WxH: approx. 62x8 cm. Rack only 18 cm deep so requires little space. Lockable, including lock. Badminton racquets not included. 71 117 8207 Each

k Floor Marking Tape

For marking out badminton courts. The tape sticks to all smooth, dust-free and non-greasy floors. It is supple and lies in straight lines. The durable tape can be removed easily and without leaving any residues. Approx. 4 rolls are required for an entire court. Length of roll 33 m, 38 mm wide, white. 71 129 9700 Roll

f Victor® “Starter” Badminton Racquet

A beginner‘s racquet for children from 4-6 years of age. The racquet for an optimal introduction to badminton. With an aluminium head, without a shaft, approx. 43 cm long. With teardrop-shaped head and Lawntex strings. Handle specially designed for children’s hands. Approx. 90 g. 71 116 7304 Each

The basic idea of the school sport concept is to teach beginners an optimal stroke technique. The tailored, shortened racquets and the teardrop-shaped head allow for durability and make hitting the shuttlecocks easier. For more information on this concept, please see page 128.

g Victor® “Advanced” Badminton Racquet

i

A beginner’s racquet for children from 6-8 years of age. Shortened steel shaft with aluminium head, approx. 53 cm long. With child friendly teardrop head and Lawntex strings. Optimal handling thanks to the shortened handle. Approx. 93 g. 71 116 7317 Each

l Badminton Racquet Tape, Set of 10

Vibration absorbing and non-slip tape (overgrip). Length approx. 110 cm, for one badminton racquet. Assorted colours. 71 117 2326  Set of 10

h Victor® “Training” Badminh g f

106

ton Racquet

A learning racquet for children from 9-11 years of age. With a shortened shaft and aluminium head, approx. 58 cm long. With teardrop-shaped head and Lawntex strings. Approx. 99 g. 71 116 7320 Each

i Victor® “Pro” Badminton Racquet

m Ring Binder Score Board

An innovative learning racquet for children over 12 years of age. Steel shaft with aluminium head, approx. 66 cm long. Classic head shape, with Lawntex strings. The oval handle makes holding the racquet easier. Approx. 102 g. 71 116 7333 Each

This practical score board in a ring binder can be taken anywhere. Easy and practical to use - suitable for a variety of sports. Displays scored points from 0-99 and sets from 0-7. The reverse side of the binder serves to record passes, game plans, etc. 71 115 6007 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Teamsport Sport-Thieme® Badminton Racquets Badminton Shuttlecocks

A real winner! A great combination of price and performance, making these racquets ideal for school and club sports! Great Value!

Buy Now!

a Victor® “Shuttle 2000”

Badminton Shuttlecocks

Top level tournament and game shuttlecocks. Excellent flight characteristics, nylon basket in white or neon yellow. Base made of high quality Portuguese cork. Approved by all German state associations. 71 117 2850 Green, slow, white Tube of 6 71 117 2847 Blue, medium, white Tube of 6 71 117 2876 Green, slow, yellow Tube of 6 71 117 2863 Blue, medium, yellow Tube of 6

Exclusive to Sport-Thieme®

e

Steel head

Sealed T-joint

Hardened steel shaft

b Victor® “Shuttle 1000”

Badminton Shuttlecocks

Training and centre shuttlecocks with a cork base, in three speeds. Nylon feathers in white or neon yellow. Neon yellow shuttlecocks are ideal for dark halls where they are up to 30% more visible. 71 117 2834 Red, fast, white Tube of 6 71 117 2805 Blue, medium, white Tube of 6 71 117 2821 Green, slow, white Tube of 6 71 117 2818 Blue, medium, neon yellow Tube of 6

Aluminium head Especially strong multi-filament strings

g

f

Especially durable taped handle

c Victor® “Pro Court” Shuttlecocks

Ideal training and centre shuttlecocks with very good flight characteristics. Made from selected duck feathers and high quality cork base. Considerably better playing characteristics compared to a nylon shuttlecock. More opportunities for spinning and improved shuttlecock control. Blue (=medium). 71 116 7900  Tube of 12

e Sport-Thieme® “School” Badminton Racquet

The classic school sport racquet from Sport-Thieme. A balanced racquet, with hardened steel head and shaft, classic shaped head with PVC band on handle. Strung with multi-filament plastic strings. Also suitable for outdoor use. Approx. 115 g. 71 117 1903 Each

Neon-coloured badminton shuttlecocks. Made of nylon. Easy to see and good flight characteristics set these shuttlecocks apart. The shuttlecocks for hobby and leisure players. Assorted colours. 71 116 8701  Tube of 6

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

Racquet

Standard ready strung racquet, with steel head, steel shaft and PVC handle. Also suitable for outdoor use. Approx. 119 g. 71 117 1945 Each

g Sport-Thieme® “Club” Badminton

d Badminton Shuttlecocks with Colourful Plastic Feathers

f Sport-Thieme® “Junior” Badminton

Also take a look at:

• Badminton Equipment, page 109 • Speedminton, page 113

Racquet

The Sport-Thieme racquet with hardened steel shaft and aluminium head. Classic head shape, PVC handle, reinforced T-joint. Strung with high quality multi-filament plastic strings. Approx.105 g. 71 117 2007 Each

107


Teamsport Badminton Sets

Sets

Set Buy Now! 4 With exercise instructions 4 19 piece set

® a Sport-Thieme School

Badminton Set

Badminton school set containing 19 items - ideal for school sports. The set consists of: • 10 badminton racquets with steel head and durable multi-filament strings • 6 shuttlecocks with nylon feathers and cork base • 1 large storage bag with strong carrying strap • 1 instruction booklet with visual explanations of the most important shots and exercises • 1 brochure with instructions for many exercises (in German) 71 117 2906 Set

a

Set b

4 35 piece set

b Sport-Thieme® “Premium”

Buy Now!

Badminton Saver Set

Badminton set containing 35 items specially for schools and clubs. The set consists of: • 20 badminton racquets with steel head and multi-filament strings • 12 shuttlecocks with nylon feathers and cork base • 1 large storage bag with carrying strap • 1 instruction booklet with visual explanations of the most important shots and exercises • 1 booklet with instructions for many exercises (in German) 71 117 2922 Set

Top Rated

sport-thieme.com

“Club” Badminton Set

Set Buy Now!

c

The ideal set for advanced and experienced players in schools and clubs!

c Sport-Thieme® “Club” Badminton Set

The ideal set for advanced and experienced players in schools and clubs. The set consists of: • 10 carbon/aluminium badminton racquets in one-piece design, with strong multi-filament strings • 6 Victor Shuttle 2000 competition shuttlecocks, blue (=medium) • 1 spacious storage bag with carrying strap • 1 school sport booklet with many practical exercises (in German) • 1 Victor instructional DVD (in German) 71 117 2948 Set

Victor® Concept for School Sport The Basic Concept:

Teaching beginners the optimum racquet technique. The racquets are tailored (shortened) to suit the age group. Their teardrop-shaped heads ensure good handling and facilitate hitting the shuttlecock.

Set Buy Now!

The Benefits:

• The  racquets are excellent for learning the best technique • All racquets have been equipped with a new type of learning handle that makes it impossible to hold the racquet incorrectly • The racquets are available in different shaft lengths to suit players of all ages and to offer optimum handling as the players‘ technique is getting better • The teardrop-shaped heads on “Starter”, “Advanced” and “Training” models optimise the point of contact on these shorter racquets, as timing and hand/eye coordination are not yet fully developed in children • Perfect  entry level racquets for learning the sport •A  ll racquets are tailored to suit children‘s requirements

Set

d Victor® “Concept

Set” for School Sport

A set of 21 items specially designed for school and club sports. The set consists of: • 2 Victor “Starter” badminton racquets, page 106 f • 4 Victor “Advanced” badminton racquets, page 106 g • 4 Victor “Training” badminton racquets, page 106 h

108

• 2 Victor “Pro” badminton racquets, page 106 i • 6 badminton shuttlecocks with nylon feathers and cork base, page 107 a • 1 booklet with exercise instructions (in German) • 1 badminton rules poster (in German) • 1 large storage bag 71 116 7405 Set

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Badminton Posts Teamsport Badminton Posts

a Sport-Thieme® Portable Badminton Posts

Complying with the latest DIN EN 1509 and DBV regulations. The low overall construction that has no additional struts, reduces the risk of injury. Stable steel structure, 40x40x3 mm tubing, blue lacquered, approx. 155 cm tall. Solid base material, LxW: approx. 66x62 cm. Includes two castors fitted on the side and 4 rubber buffers. Comes with tensioning devise d. Net not included. Each post weighs approx. 65 kg Advantages: Can easily be taken apart and therefore the posts can be set up and put away quickly. The high net weight and the 4 rubber buffers underneath make this product very stable. The post base has a welded eyelet which allows regulated tensioning of the net and height precision. 10 year guarantee! 71 116 3504 Pair

b Sport-Thieme® Portable Badminton Posts with Additional Weights

As a. These posts have an additional weight (approx. 100 kg) and are therefore very stable. They are ideally suited for multiple courts. Each base has a welded on eyelet allowing regulation standard net tensioning. 10 year guarantee! 71 116 8105 Pair

New! g

Sport-Thieme® Pulley Clamping Device

Suitable for posts a, b and i. Practid Champion Badminton Tour- cal system for effortless tensioning of badminton nets. Specially designed for play nament Net and leisure facilities, fully assembled. With Complies with international regulations. hooks to fix to the posts and rope secuMade from polypropylene, approx. ring device. To protect against injury it has 1.2 mm thick. Kevlar rope 6.6 m long. WxH: 6.02x0.76 m. Mesh width: approx. 18 a 100% cotton fabric cover. Fully stretched length approx. 100 cm. mm. Without polyester bars. Black. 71 116 7708 Each 71 114 4707 Each

e “Competition” Badminton

h Tensioning Device for Bad-

Complies with DIN 1509. Polypropylene, approx. 1.2 mm thick. With fibre glass bars on the side that ensure a perfect fit. The Kevlar rope is 8 m long and has a tensioning mechanism on one end, see e. Net width: 6.02 m, net height: 76 cm, mesh width approx. 18 mm. Black. 71 117 1600 Each

To go with posts a, b and i. Belt tensioner with clamp and two hooks for tensioning the net to competition standard. Made from approx. 25 mm wide and approx. 100 cm long polyester webbing. Tensioning can be adjusted anywhere from 15 to 60 cm. Can also be fitted to existing badminton or volleyball nets. 71 117 1701 Each

ple Courts

These nets can be used in schools and training to make the best possible use of the hall length or width and enable larger groups to practice at the same time. Individual nets are 6.02 m long and 76 cm high. They can be altered in any way on the kevlar rope. Polypropylene, approx. 1.2 mm thick. Mesh width: approx. 18 mm, black. 71 117 1323 2 nets - 15 mEach 71 117 1336 3 nets - 23 mEach 71 117 1349 4 nets - 31 mEach

a

10

year

guarantee

b

Accessories

Training Net

f Badminton Nets for Multi-

year

guarantee

Tip:

4 Precise height adjustment 4 High  net weight of this unit makes it very stable

c “Olympia” Badminton

Tournament Net

10

Tensioning device d is required to play.

Badminton Nets

Made from polypropylene, approx. 1 mm thick. With 6.60 m long kevlar rope. Net width 6.02 m, net height 76 cm, mesh width 18 mm, black. 71 116 6907 Each

Complying with the most recent regulations of the DIN EN 1509 and the DBV. The low overall height, without additional struts, reduces the risk of accidents.

k

New! Sport-Thieme® Bad-

minton Posts in Ground Sockets

k

New!

Badminton posts made from high quality anodised aluminium, to be inserted in ground sockets. Approx. 195 cm. Matt silver, with net and tensioning hooks. Insertion depth 350 mm. Without ground sockets. 71 114 1506 80x80 mm tubingPair 71 114 1519 ø 83 mm tubingPair

minton Nets

i Sport-Thieme® Ground

Socket for 80x80 mm and ø 83 mm Posts

4 With base

l Sport-Thieme® Support

Posts with Base Plate Made from aluminium, 350 mm long. These posts are necessary to obtain the With cover. 71 114 1102 For ø 83 mm postsEach regulation height for nets on multiple 71 114 1115 For 80x80 mm postsEach courts. Plastic, incl. base approx. 1.55 m high, ø approx. 50 mm. With groove for attaching net to post. Nets not included. j Replacement Wheel 10 year guarantee! For badminton posts a and b. 71 150 5708 Each 71 116 3605 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

l

109


Teamsport Tennis Racquets and Balls Set Buy Now!

b c d b Victor® “Winner” Tennis Racquet

Entry level tennis racquet. Aluminium frame, fully strung, synthetic leather taped handle. Approx. 350 g, 68.5 cm long. 71 218 2807 Each

Set

TI” Tennis Racquet

27” Tennis Racquet

a Winner Tennis Set

4 Includes  a detailed poster with the tennis rules

d Victor® “Tour Energy

c Victor® “Tour Energy

An ideal set for school sports and clubs! The set consists of: • 10 Winner racquets b • 20 high quality non-pressurised balls e • 1 storage and carrying bag • Detailed poster with tennis rules 71 218 2849 Set

This high value, robust racquet is well strung for advanced players. This racquet is easy to control with good • Material: fused graphite playing characteristics for beginners and • Head: heart advanced players. • Approx. 310 g • Aluminium • Handle: medium • Approx. 305 g • Max. stringing: approx. 26 kg • Handle: medium • Multi-filament synthetic strings • Max. stringing: approx. 26 kg • 680 mm • Multi-filament synthetic strings • String pattern: 16/19 main/cross • L: 690 mm • Bag: thermo bag • String pattern: 16/17 main/cross 71 218 2810 Each 71 218 2823 Each

4 72 balls

f

4 60 balls

e Sport-Thieme® “Trainer” Tennis Balls

e

Excellent quality non-pressurised training balls. Hard wearing felt and a special rubber mix ensure the bounce is always the same. Suitable for ball machines. Set of 4 71 137 4621  Set of 4 Set of 60 including bucket 71 137 6409 

Set of 60

f Wilson® Training Balls

Non-pressurised, arm friendly ball. Quality for use in schools and training. Excellent woven felt quality, good bounce characteristics and very durable. 72 balls in a bucket. 71 137 7532  Set of 72

g Wilson® “US Open” Tennis Balls

g

110

Official ball for arguably the most challenging tennis tournament in the world since 1978. Extra durable felt for longer use on all types of surfaces. 71 137 7545  Pack of 4

h Tennis Marking Machine

Developed for marking medium tennis courts • For chalk • Spreading width approx. 50 mm 71 137 0733 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Children‘s Tennis Teamsport b

c

4 60 balls

Junior 43

Junior 49

Junior 53

Junior 58

Junior 63

Junior 53 7-8 years 00 218 g 53 cm 71 137 5451

Junior 58 8-9 years 00 230 g 58 cm 71 137 5464

e “Junior” Tennis Racquet

The easy to use and methodically correct way to start with tennis. Recommended by leading experts as the right racquet for children. Strong and very light mid-size aluminium racquets. Fully strung.

d

a

c Tennis Practice Racquet

Made of multi layered wood, suitable for tennis, softball and indiaca balls. The perforated hitting surface is approx. a First Step Bat Boards Wooden bats for children, the official 21x23 cm, handle length approx. 14 cm. Recommended for children from the age and approved practice racquet for school of 6. Comes with taped handle and wrist and children‘s tennis. 71 137 3208 BlueEach loop, 275 g. 71 137 3211 RedEach 71 137 3501 Each

b Softball Tennis Ball

Model Age group Handle Weight Length Product code

f

Junior 49 5-6 years 00 210 g 49 cm 71 137 5493

Junior 63 10-11 years 0 245 g 63 cm 71 137 5477

Set

Buy Now!

Tennis ball design, suitable for d Tennis Training Ball Made from soft, flexible plastic. Very practice racquets and bat boards. Bounces good for training shots and coordination. well, yellow, ø 70 mm. 71 109 8105-2 Each 71 116 3009-1 Each

Methodology Balls

Junior 43 up to 4 years 00 195 g 43 cm 71 137 5480

Set g

i “Level 1” Youth Tennis Set

• 10 “Junior” racquets 58 cm e • 12 “Funny Soft” practice balls g • 12 “Funny Tour” practice balls f • High quality storage bag 71 217 5339 Set

Set

Buy Now!

h

f “Funny Tour” Practice Balls Play & Stay level 1, green. A little lighter and slower than balls for adult players. • Suitable for U10/U12 • Yellow/green • 25% reduced pressure 71 137 5679 Set of 4 71 137 5682 Set of 60 in a plastic bag

h “Funny Start” Practice

Play & Stay level 2, orange. Light and soft practice ball. • Suitable for U9/U10 • Yellow/orange • 50% reduced pressure 71 137 5611 Set of 4 71 137 5666 Set of 60 in a plastic bag

Play & Stay level 3, red. This ball is very soft and a little bigger than normal tennis balls. • Suitable for U8/U9 • Yellow/red • 75%  reduced pressure 71 137 5901 Set of 4 71 137 5914 Set of 60 in a plastic bag

g “Funny Soft” Practice Balls

Set

Balls

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

j “Level 2” Youth Tennis Set

• 10  “Junior” racquets 53 cm e • 12  “Funny Start” practice balls h • 12  “Funny Soft” practice balls g • High  quality storage bag 71 217 5326 Set

111


Teamsport Tennis Court Training

c

Buy Now!

4 Rounded rungs 4 Indoor/outdoor 4 Adjustable

a

Buy Now!

b Sport-Thieme® “Agility” Coordination Ladder

a Sport-Thieme® “Agility”

Double Coordination Ladder

This coordination ladder is available in 4 and 8 m lengths. It is characterised by either 2 x 10 or 2 x 18 spaces and adjustable rungs with a width of approx. 40 cm per

The training of coordination and fitness skills is an essential part of all modern and performance orientated football lessons. rung (total width approx. 80 cm) includes This new methodical training aid will help ground hooks for fixing to a sports field you develop your leg work, coordination and suction cups for attaching to an indoor and speed, using different types of exerhall floor. The coordination ladder comes in cises. For example, the co-ordination lada practical carry and transport bag. der is ideal for use in developing a sense 71 137 3963 4 mEach of rhythm. Width approx. 42 cm, 71 137 3976 8 mEach extra flat adjustable rungs. Ground

anchors included for securing the ladder in sports fields and suction cups for attaching it to hall floors. The coordination ladder comes in a practical storage and transport bag. 71 137 3934 4 mEach 71 137 3921 8 mEach

c Sport-Thieme®

8 m Coordination Ladder and Exercise Handbook

71 137 3950 Set

4 Targets training topspins 4 Perfect for training slice moves

e Net Height Extender for Tennis Nets

Don’t forget to order:

Proprioceptive training products, page 301-308

112

Small Area Tennis Set d Mobile Very fast and simple to set up thanks

to the plug-in connections. • Includes a practical carrying bag • WxH: 300x90 cm 71 137 3019 Each

The net height extender allows the impact zone to be adjusted. In addition, the net extender targets training topspins and slice moves. • Includes telescopic bars, adjustable to any height between approx. 1.16 and 2.06 m • Extender attaches to the net posts • LxW: 1,280x60 cm 71 226 8415 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


New!

Set

Speedminton® Teamsport

New!

New!

a

New! Speedminton® School Set

The set consists of: • 1 spacious black Speedminton sports bag • 12 colourful speed rackets made from hardened light aluminium, 58 cm long, 169 g • 15 Fun speeders • 10 Match speeders • 48 cones • Game instructions 71 133 8209 Set

Accessories

d

b

New! Speedminton® “S-JR” Junior Set

Speedminton Junior Set for children between 6 and 12 years. Two rackets made from hardened aluminium with shorter length of 54 cm, lower weight of 160 g, smaller handle and larger hitting area. Includes two slow Fun speeders, 3/4 cover and instructions. 71 207 3170 Set

c

New! Speedminton® “S65” Set

Two hardened aluminium speed rackets in orange and red, mixed pack of 3 speeders (1 Fun, 1 Match, 1 Night), 2 lights, wind ring, racket bag with carrying strap and game instructions. Length 65 cm, 180 g. 71 306 6254 Set

New!

New!

New!

New! Speedertube Mixed Pack

The set consists of: • 1 Fun (short distances) • 2 Match (medium distances) • 1 Cross (large distances) • 1 Night (for night use) • 1 wind ring 71 133 8212 Each

g

h

e

New! Speedminton® “S90” Set

2 Speed rackets made from hardened aluminium in green and yellow. Variety pack of 5 speeders (1 Fun, 2 Match, 1 Night, 1 Cross), 1 wind ring, 4 Speedlights, in racket bag with carrying strap, instructions included. Length 65 cm, 180 g. 71 306 6267 Set

New!

f

New! Speedminton®“S200” Set

2 speed rackets made from hardened lightweight aluminium in black, blue and white, mixed pack of 5 speeders (1 Fun, 2 Match, 1 Night, 1 Cross), 1 wind ring, 4 Speedlights, Easy Court including anchoring pegs in a sling bag with carrying strap. Instructions included. Length 58 cm, 180 g. 71 306 6270 Set

i

New!

Speeder Tube g “Fun” A somewhat slower and lighter speeder for

speeds of up to 260 km/h. Ideal for beginners‘ training, short distances (e.g. indoors) or for children. 1 tube with 5 speeders. 71 207 3154 Each

Speeder Tube h “Match” Competition speeders for distances of 15-23 m

and speeds of up to 290 km/h. One pack contains five speeders and 1 wind ring. 71 207 3138 Each

i Easy Court

Court marking kit with fluorescent 2.5 cm wide strapping and pegs. It is the court you can bring with you, simple to set up. 8 straps each 5.5 m to be arranged in 2 squares. With instructions. 71 207 3109 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

j

New! Speedminton®

“S200” Racket

Speed racket made from hardened light aluminium in blue and white, ideal for schools, clubs and recreational use. Length 58 cm, 175 g. 71 306 6283 Each

k

New! Speedminton® Set “S400”

2 composite graphite “Pro‘‘ speed rackets in white, silver and red, multi-filament strings, mixed pack of 5 speeders (1 Fun, 2 Match, 1 Night, 1 Cross), 1 wind ring, 4 Speedlights, Easy Court including anchoring pegs, in a sling bag with carrying strap, instructions. Length 59 cm, 175 g. 71 306 6296 Set

113


Athletics Children‘s Athletics e d

a

f

b

g a “Pegaline 2000” Practice

h

Javelin

c

The fun and safe way of learning and training javelin technique outdoors and indoors. The stabilising wings ensure that the javelin flies well. Its shape makes it popular with children and students - everyone wants a use it. Made from plastic, for training sessions without fear, length 100 cm, weight approx. 220 g. 71 185 4103 Each

c Rings

b Nerf Vortex Mega Howler

e

The flying siren you can hear when it‘s in the air. A mega howling sound is created when it‘s thrown. The steering plume ensures perfect spiral rotation. The special notches mean you can hold it well and let the Howler rotate super fast. Its aerodynamic design makes it very accurate. Suitable for children from 5 years of age, 35x16x9 cm, 130 g. 71 133 4803-1 Each Attention! Keep away from children under 3 years. Contains individual parts that may be swallowed. Danger of suffocation.

Air filled in blue and red. 71 135 3802-2 BlueEach 71 135 3815-2 RedEach

d Nock Balls

f New! Throwing Ball Suitable for indoor javelin training. A throwing and rounders ball made 71 124 8702-1 600 gEach 71 124 8715-1 800 gEach from porous rubber, ø 6.5 cm, red, 80 g. 71 108 0504-1 Each ® New! Sport-Thieme

Children's Discus

A newly developed sports item, ideal for school sports. A discus specially developed for children, particularly suitable for psychomotor exercises for catching and throwing as well as for improving technique. The outer rubber ring protects from injury and damage and provides children with better grip. ø 17 cm, weighs only 350 g. 71 124 3244-1 Each

g

New! WV Throwing Ball

h

New! Rounders and Thro-

Training ball made from rubber, doesn‘t bounce, with filling, ø 6.5 cm, red, 80 g. 71 108 0302-1 Each

wing Ball

Competition throwing ball. Made from leather, white, ø 6.5 cm, 80 g. Does not bounce. 71 108 0605-1 Each

Sets

k BlockX Basic Set

Set of 20 blocks (basic set) with five each of red, green, yellow and blue blocks. 71 186 5501  Set of 20

l BlockX Set Consisting of: • 20 large blocks • 40 connectors • 10 hurdle bases 71 186 5530 

Set of 70

m BlockX Set in a Carrying Bag

i i Connection Plugs for BlockX

j

j Hurdle Base for BlockX

You can attach large BlockX blocks to For combining and connecting several make hurdles. Two bases are required for BlockX large blocks. one hurdle. 71 186 5514  Pack of 20 71 186 5527  Pack of 10

The set consists of 20 blocks, 5 red, 5 yellow, 5 green and 5 blue blocks. Hassle-free transporting and storing of BlockX, so they can be used to their full potential both inside and outside. Fits perfectly in the equipment cabinet. Bag 60x60x45 cm, yellow. 71 186 5556 Set of 20

n Indoor Starting BlockX®

An indoor starting block made from PE foam with anti-slip film to ensure a problem-free start in halls. Suitable for plastic or parquet floors. Specially developed for children‘s athletics to practise starts effortlessly. Different block lengths available: 35 / 25x15x8 cm. 71 125 0510 Pair

Set o Children's Hurdle

Made from PE foam. As it is so soft, this hurdle will remove children‘s fear of hurting themselves. No risk of injury. Height adjustable at 19, 38 and 50 cm. Width 70 cm. Can also be used as an obstacle on an obstacle course. Suitable for indoor and outdoor use. 71 123 4666 Each Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Contains individual parts that may be swallowed. Danger of suffocation.

114

p Mini Hurdles Set

p

Expand your training program with this set of six complete hurdles. The best way to combine play and training. The set consists of 18 100 cm long gymnastic bars, 12 bases and 12 bar and hoop holders. Set of 6  71 144 6106  Set of 6

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Run-up Tracks, Starting, Measuring Athletics Regupol® Run-up Track a Regupol® Tracks

Ideally suited for: • Long jump, high jump, triple jump, pole vault, javelin, etc. Weatherproof, water permeable, can easily be rolled up, spike proof. • Can easily be laid or glued to any even surface. The ideal protection for turf and cinder tracks. • Will provide you with consistently good sporting conditions in any type of weather. No aquaplaning. No special maintenance required. Can be combined with other materials, if necessary. • Regupol tracks for cinder running tracks - a strong protection against football studs. • Regupol tracks are available in other lengths on request. Standard width is 125 cm.

4 Available in various widths and lengths 4 High quality recycled rubber material 4 To improve athletes' performance

c Regupol® Run-Up Square

b Regupol® Tracks

12 mm thick. 71 235 0035 20 m longEach 71 235 0048 25 m longEach 10 mm thick. 71 235 0006 30 m longEach 71 235 0051 30 m longEach 71 235 0019 40 m longEach 71 235 0064 40 m longEach 71 235 0022 45 m longEach 71 235 0077 45 m longEach

Ideal aid to learn step sequence for many types of sports. Also suitable as protective mats. • 100x100x0.8 cm • 6 kg • Can be used with chalk • Weatherproof, water permeable • Non-slip  and spike proof • Easy  to transport • Can be laid on any surface • No  maintenance required 71 235 0080 Each

d Buy Now!

d Long Jump Cover

This cover will protect your long jump from dirt and flying sand. 100% polyester mesh, water permeable, approx. 400 g/m², hemstitch all around and cut out sections at the corners to take a steel rope. Alternatively it can be weighed down with sand bags. 71 111 9738 m²

4 Good acoustic effect 4 Visible from a long distance 4 Protective hook to prevent unintended clapping

e Steel Rope

6 mm galvanised with 2 tensioning clips for attaching the steel rope. 71 111 9741  per m

f

Bag

c

g

Long jump pit smoother

Powder coated steel sheet, anthFor weighing down long jump pit racite, 40 cm wide, 10 cm high. Wooden cover. Made from white polyester fabric. handle, 130 cm long. Without filling. Not illustrated. 71 123 9166-1 Each 71 111 4108 Each

h Sport-Thieme® Start Clapper

Good acoustic effect and visible from a long distance. The use of this start clapper ensures accurate timing of all races. It is therefore an essential tool for all clubs and schools. 46x26x6 cm, approx. 1 kg. 71 130 2400 Each

50 m

j Fibreglass Tape

Complies with EU class II = (tolerance ±2.3 mm in 10 m). Made from extruded plastic, reinforced with fibreglass, 13 mm wide with cm measurements on one side. Stainless, break proof and good legibility. Up to 25 m in length supplied in case, 50 m on frame. i Relay Baton Made of light alloy, assorted 71 130 3054-1 10 mEach colours. Length: 299 mm. 71 130 3067-1 20 mEach 71 124 8904 Juniors, ø 30 mmEach 71 130 3070-1 25 mEach 71 124 8917 Seniors, ø 38 mmEach 71 130 3083-1 50 mEach IAAF-Certificate Nr. E-04-0399

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

k Steel Tape

White varnish. Made from rustproof steel, 13 mm wide with cm measurements on one side, Flextop film made of transparent and highly flexible plastic (which prevents breakage at the start of the tape). Heavy duty and easy to read. 71 226 1414-1 10 mEach 71 226 1427-1 20 mEach 71 226 1430-1 25 mEach 71 226 1443-1 50 mEach

20 m

Measuring Tape in Case

• Highly shockproof plastic case • Easy to use thanks to its large winder with resting position

115


Athletics Long Jump, Triple Jump

f

IAAF-Certificate Nr. E-09-0584

a “Multi Jump” Solid Rubber Take-Off Board

Weatherproof take-off board made from solid rubber. Can be inserted into any mounting frame. Its non-slip super grippy take-off surface is suitable for any type of sports trainers and spikes. The contact board can be exchanged for a competition board with plasticine. DLV tested and approved. IAAF certification E-09-0584. 122x34x10 cm, 38 kg. 71 123 5555 Each

New!

Replacement insert

a

4 Flexible take-off surface for individual adjustment

b

4 Wood 4 Plywood

c

4 Wood 4 Plywood

d

4 Weatherproof

® Training Take-Off Board b Sport-Thieme For long jump. Made from wood, varnished white,

multi-bonded, 122x20 cm, 10 cm thick. 71 123 5409 Each

c

Sport-Thieme® Take-Off Board

® Take-Off Board “GFK” d Sport-Thieme For long jump. Made from white plastic, weather-

For long jump, made from wood, 122x34 cm, 10 cm proof, take-off surface made from strong plywood, replaceable, 122x34 cm, 10 cm thick, with insert. thick, with insert. 71 123 5412 Each 71 123 6806 Each

Accessories e Aluminium

h Inlay Strips

For training. Pine wood, resistant to dampness, 122x10x1.5 cm. Not illustrated. 71 123 7001 Each

i Replacement Take-Off Surfaces

Made from resistant plywood, 122x20x1.5 cm, for Sport-Thieme GRP take-off board d. 71 123 6907 Each

g

g Inlay Boards

j Plasticine

Competition design. Plywood, bonded waterproof, 22 mm thick. 10x7 mm grooves on both sides for plasticine. Complies with the latest IAAF and DLV guidelines. f Replacement Insert For take-off board “Multi Jump” a. LxW: 122x10 cm. 71 123 5539 Each 71 123 7014 Each

Set

7 mm

i

e Base Frame

Permanent fitting. This frame will enable you to easily remove the take-off board and to store it in the equipment room. Aluminium angular frame, length 123cm, for 34 cm wide boards. 71 123 7102 Each

10 mm 45° 17 mm

Complies with new IAAF 2006 regulations and DLV (German athletics association) guidelines. Made from micro wax and therefore does not dry out. Set consists of 12x 20.5 cm strips, angled at 45°. This set will be sufficient for 2 take-off boards or 1 double-sided insert. 71 123 6620 Set

Set Buy Now! ® Set of Take-Off Boards k Sport-Thieme With this set of take-off boards, you are always

ready to do the long jump. The specially selected equipment has a proven track record. It consists of: • 1 take-off board d • 1 base frame e • 1 replacement take-off insert i 71 124 9109 Set

116

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Starting Blocks, Speed Training Athletics 4 Always  ready for both left or right footed starters 4 Stride length can be adjusted

Top Rated

sport-thieme.com

4 With sturdy aluminium centre bar

IAAF-Certificate Nr. E-02-0340

a Sport-Thieme® Vario Starting Block “School”

This starting block does everything without needing adjustments. Can be used immediately on synthetic or cinder tracks. L: 70, W: 33 cm. • Patented 3 block solution • Always ready for both left or right

f

footed starters • Stride length can be adjusted at any length • Starting pads are covered with Regupol • With 3 ground anchors • Sunken spike system for tartan tracks 71 123 5119 Each

b Super Starting Block

With short spikes specially developed for synthetic tracks, suitable for competition at the highest levels. Adjustable angle on aluminium blocks with tartan covering prevent the feet from slipping. With the three ground anchors supplied

Block c Replacement For starting blocks b.

71 125 0015 RightEach 71 125 0028 LeftEach

4 Incl. bolted spikes 4 For competitions at the highest levels

d

g

d Sport-Thieme® Aluminium Starting Block

Aluminium blocks coated with Regupol, can be easily adjusted using the two bolts f Ground Anchor Galvanised, suitable for all centre with wing nuts. The centre bar has additibars. Order some spares at the same time. onal guide grooves so the blocks sit perTotal length 14.5 cm. fectly, as well as marks for width adjustPerformance Starting Block 71 125 0204  3 beams h For national or international compement. Comes with two galvanised ground anchors. Starting Block Fittings with titions at the highest levels. IAAF appro71 125 0507 Each g ved. Centre bar and blocks are made from

e Replacement Block d

the “Super” starting block can also easily and safely be attached to a cinder track. 71 125 0305 Each

Spikes

Made from galvanised steel. These fittings For starting blocks made from alu- enable the above starting blocks to be fixed to synthetic tracks. Just screw them minium, coated with Regupol. Not illusunder the centre bar. trated. 71 125 0002 Each 71 125 0103 Each

Great Value!

IAAF-Certificate Nr. E-10-0611 cast aluminium. The blocks are coated with running track material and their angle is adjustable. The bars have carrying handles and M6 screw-on spikes. 71 125 0318 Each

4 Non-slip 4 Slopes forward

Buy Now!

New! ® i Sport-Thieme Starting

Block “School”

4 Can  easily be adjusted 4 Can  be fixed to ground with spikes or ground anchors

This starting block is designed for schools and club training facilities. Galvanised centre bar to hold the starting blocks with simple protective mechanism for mounting and adjusting. Textured surface starting blocks, easy inclination adjustment. Centre bar mounted with spikes for tartan track. Includes ground anchor for cinder track. 71 125 0523 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

j Sport-Thieme® Indoor Starting Block

Starting block with non-slip underside and anti-glide coating for a good start. The base slopes forward to prevent tripping. The base is approx. 65 cm long and 28 cm wide. Starting blocks can quickly and easily be adjusted. A must have for every hall! 71 125 0406 Each

k Run-up Markers

For marking the start of the runup for long jump, high jump etc., available in different colours. Strong steel markers. With a large footprint (ø 6 cm) , height 5 cm. 71 124 0102 Each

117


“Get Up” Hurdle – Leichtathletik

Taking the fear out of training

Top Rated

sport-thieme.com

4 Point of toppling is adjustable 4 Quick assembly 4 Stable stand

5

year guarantee

The Benefits at a Glance:

a

Sport-Thieme® “Get Up” Hurdle

The ideal school and training hurdle for inside and outside. At last! Hurdle training with no fear of injury and no time wasted setting them back up. • Automatically returns to upright position after having been struck • This enables a very high training frequency

• The hurdles can be jumped in both directions • Padded crossbars ensure that no injuries are caused • Rapid adjustment to all competition heights: 76-106 cm. • Hurdling information on the bases • Bases can be removed for easy transportation and storage. 5 year guarantee! 71 123 4914 Each

• Resetting and point of toppling can be adjusted individually (slow, fast)! • Professional training is guaranteed thanks to self-righting hurdles (from either side) and their 100% upright position. • Point of toppling can be adjusted. • Adjustable to competition heights: 76-106 cm. • Automatically returns to upright posi-

tion from either side: • Tested by an independent institute. • Quick assembly • Stackable • Secure positioning • Padded aluminium crossbar

Training Hurdle 4 3 different sizes

b 4 Helps hurdle training enormously

4 Collapsible 4 Self-righting

b Zacharias Hurdles

Helps hurdle training enormously, as the well known problems of fear and danger of injury are forgotten. They have been developed especially for beginners but are also good for competitive athletes as there are no sharp edges. Training can therefore be carried out without any risks. The product is also good for jump training, as a height guide for long jump training or it can be used in circuit training. Powder coated, strong steel tube or light aluminium

118

frame, tubing diameter 11 mm (2.8 kg or 1.6 kg), height can be adjusted to any level between 8 and 107 cm, smooth joints, foam padding. 112 cm wide. 71 123 4507 Steel tubingEach 71 123 4510 AluminiumEach

e Training Hurdle “Return” Midi

d “Return” Mini Training Hurdle

This innovative hurdle is self-righting and will therefore save time as you will no longer need to go around putting hurdles up again. It is a perfect training device offering a wide variety of uses. Stable, light aluminium construction with folding-in feet. Adjuster (Joint) Height adjustable from 40-60 cm in 5x 5 c Two joints for one Zacharias hurdle. cm stages, width 81 cm. 1.6 kg. 71 151 6904 Pair 71 124 3114 Each

Height adjustable from 55-84 cm. Seven heights: 55-70 cm in 5 cm stages, 76, 80, 84 cm, width 83 cm. 2.2 kg. 71 124 3101 Each

f “Return” Maxi Training Hurdle

Height adjustable from 66-106 cm. Seven heights: 66, 71, 76, 84, 81, 100 and 106 cm, width 88 cm. 2.6 kg. 71 124 3127 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Hurdles Athletics b

IAAF-Certificate Nr. E-99-0148

a

IAAF-Certificate Nr. E-99-0148

b “International” Competition Hurdle

The “international” model is a weatherresistant and completely maintenance-free hurdle with a coloured wooden crossbar. The competition design is adjustable from a “Basic” Competition Hurdle 762 mm to 1,067 mm using the simple Aluminium/tubular steel design, our spring catches on the posts. Internal counattractively priced competition hurdle. IAAF terweights ensure the hurdle tips at the right moment. With IAAF certification. certified. 71 123 4800 Each 71 123 4709 Each

d

c 4 Will take away any anxiety 4 Reduces risk of injury

Accessories e 4 Incl. rubber protectors

d Sport-Thieme® Outdoor Training Hurdle

f Replacement Crossbar

No pre-drilled holes, can be used on all hurdles. 120x7 cm, 12 mm thick. 71 124 3000 Each

Steel tubing, six adjustable levels (with g Hurdle Transport Cart pins). As c but with crossbar instead of ning Hurdle For approx. 40 hurdles (depending elasticated band. Steel tubing, adjustable to six levels with 71 123 4611 Each on type), easy to load and unload. Load pins. The crossbar is replaced with a Vario from the rear, ideal space saving alternaelasticated band (80% polyester, 20% tive for storage and transportation of all e Sport-Thieme® Indoor and elastane), that stretches from 60-120 cm. hurdles. Aluminium structure, steering Training Hurdle Fluorescent colours, very easy to see. This controlled wheels, galvanised steel bar Adjustable to competition heights. Equipproduct will take away any anxiety of the for manual use or towing, large pneumatic ped with rubber protectors, without crossbar and reduces the risk of injuries. wheels. LxWxH: 335x119x50 cm. weights. 71 123 4682 Each 71 123 4608 Each 71 131 1408 Each

c Sport-Thieme® Outdoor Trai-

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

119


Athletics Javelins Accessories

New!

f Javelin Bag

Competition Javelins c Sport-Thieme®

Training Javelins a Sport-Thieme® “Super

Training” Training Javelin

The “Super Training” javelin from SportThieme is a durable and very well balanced aluminium training javelin that complies with IAAF regulations. The body is made from multi-hardened aluminium alloy with a steel tip and firmly attached grip. This javelin has excellent flight characteristics and energy transmission values. It is ideal for beginners, clubs, schools and all sports grounds. Recommended by leading trainers. 71 124 6357 400 gEach 71 124 6360 500 gEach 71 124 6373 600 gEach 71 124 6386 700 gEach 71 124 6399 800 gEach

“Competition” Javelin

b Polanik® Javelin “Air Flyer”

Basic model for beginners. Training javelin, low degree of stiffness (increased strain on the joints is prevented during error throws). Can also be used to perfect throwing technique. Galvanised steel tip, powder-coated shaft. Transparent/blue. The javelins are designed for the following throwing ranges: 500 g: IAAF I-11-0537 600 g: up to 50 m; IAAF I-11-0500 700 g: up to 55 m; IAAF I-11-0538 800 g: up to 60 m; IAAF I-11-0503 71 254 1004 400 gEach 71 239 0967 500 gEach 71 239 0970 600 gEach 71 239 0983 700 gEach 71 239 0996 800 gEach

Javelin Details: Which one is right for you? German DLV Regulations

Competition Weight incl. cord grip

Men‘s: Men‘s: Men‘s: 60-65 yrs. 30-45 yrs. 50-55 yrs. and U 16s and U 20s and U 18s Ladies‘: 30-45 yrs. and U 20s

Men‘s: 70-75 yrs. Ladies‘: 50-55 yrs. and from 1/1/2013 U 16s / U 18s

For 10 javelins up to 800 g 71 123 2383 Each

New!

d Polanik® “Sky Challanger” Competition Javelin

Men‘s: 80 yrs. and U 14s Ladies‘: 60 yrs. and U 14s

min. 800 g 700 g 600 g 500 g 400 g Manufacturer information: Tolerance for compe- 805 705 605 505 405 tition equipment 825 g 725 g 625 g 525 g 425 g Overall length of javelin min. 2,600 mm 2,300 mm 2,200 mm 2,000 mm 1,850 mm max. 2,700 mm 2,400 mm 2,300 mm 2,100 mm 1,950 mm Length of metal head min. 250 mm 250 mm 250 mm 220 mm 220 mm max. 330 mm 330 mm 330 mm 270 mm 250 mm Distance between the tip of the metal head and the centre of gravity min. 900 mm 860 mm 800 mm 780 mm 750 mm max. 1,060 mm 1,000 mm 920 mm 880 mm 800 mm Diameter of the shaft at its thickest point min. 25 mm 23 mm 20 mm 20 mm 20 mm max. 30 mm 28 mm 25 mm 24 mm 23 mm Width of the cord grip min. 150 mm 150 mm 140 mm 135 mm 130 mm max. 160 mm 160 mm 150 mm 145 mm 140 mm Circumference of the should not increase the diameter of the shaft by more than 8 mm cord grip

120

These competition javelins are designed for maximum flight even if the athlete‘s technique is not yet perfected. This is a forgiving javelin. This javelin is made with special attention paid to durability and long-term use. The body is made from multi-hardened special alloy with steel tips and firmly attached grip. The centre of gravity has been carefully selected to allow great flight and excellent energy transmission values. This is the ideal essential competition equipment for clubs, schools and all sports grounds. Recommended by top trainers. 71 124 7158 400 gEach 71 124 7161 500 gEach 71 124 7174 600 gEach 71 124 7187 700 gEach 71 124 7190 800 gEach

The javelin bag is made from a waterproof, synthetic material. The ends of the bag are reinforced, which prevents any piercing. The inside of the bag has Velcro straps for holding the javelins in place. Fully sewn around carrying handles. For 5 javelins up to 800 g 71 123 2370 Each

Javelin for advanced throwers, medium degree of stiffness, thinned shaft end, galvanised cigar-shaped steel tip, powdercoated shaft. Transparent/red. The javelins are designed for the following throwing ranges: 600 g: 60-70 m; IAAF I-11-0501 700 g: 65-75 m; IAAF I-11-0539 800 g: 70-80 m; IAAF I-11-0504 71 254 1017 500 gEach 71 239 0938 600 gEach 71 239 0941 700 gEach 71 239 0954 800 gEach

g Javelin Holder

The interior of this javelin holder is lined with strong PVC, the outer is made from a waterproof, synthetic material. This also protects the holder from getting dirty. The edging and ends are reinforced, which prevents any piercing. Fully sewn around carrying handles. Designed to hold 5 javelins up to 800 g. 71 123 2367 Each

h Javelin Stand Made from Tubular Steel

e Polanik® “Space Master” Competition Javelin

The top model among competition javelins. This is a very stiff javelin. Ultra-narrow ending, new sharp tip, powder-coated. Transparent/lime. The javelins are designed for the following throwing ranges: 600 g: 80 m; IAAF I-11-0502 700 g: 85 m; IAAF I-11-0540 800 g: 90 m; IAAF I-11-0505 71 254 1020 500 gEach 71 239 0909 600 gEach 71 239 0912 700 gEach 71 239 0925 800 gEach

Colour varnished, holds max. 16 javelins, can be dismantled, 75x42.5x34 cm. 5 year guarantee! 71 123 2338 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Javelins Athletics Exclusive to Sport-Thieme庐

bde

New!

a

b

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 路 www.sport-thieme.com

c

New!

New!

d

e

121


Athletics Discus, Hammer Throw 4 Particularly strong and durable 4 Low-wear

a

4 Ideal for children‘s athletics

c

b

d a Sport-Thieme® Competition Discus

Complies with DLV and IAAF regulations, made from plywood, with calibrating screw and metal ring. Extremely durable and robust. Turns slowly. 71 124 4146 0.75 kgEach 71 124 4104 1 kgEach 71 124 4117 1.5 kgEach 71 124 4120 1.75 kgEach 71 124 4133 2 kgEach

Sport-Thieme® Competition Disb cus

Made from special durable plastic with metal ring and calibrating screw, complying with DLV and IAAF regulations. Good rotation and flight characteristics at all distances. 71 124 3606 0.75 kgEach 71 124 3619 1 kgEach 71 124 3622 1.5 kgEach 71 124 3635 1.75 kgEach 71 124 3648 2 kgEach

d Sport-Thieme® Indoor Discus c Sport-Thieme® Rubber Training Discus

Attractively priced. Does not bounce and therefore causes no damage to the hall floor. Ideal for training. 71 124 3202 1 kgEach 71 124 3215 1.5 kgEach 71 124 3228 1.75 kgEach 71 124 3231 2 kgEach

A newly developed sports item, ideal for school sport! Specially developed for use indoors, particularly suitable for psychomotor exercises for catching and throwing as well as for developing technique in children‘s athletics. The outer rubber ring ensures children‘s safety when holding it and also protects against injuries and damage. ø 17 cm, weighs only 350 g. 71 124 3244 Each

5

year guarantee

h Discus Rack

Made from Tubular Steel

Colour varnished, stores max. 30 discuses, can be taken apart, comes in a box. Dimensions: 88x42.5x76.5 cm. 5 year guarantee! 71 123 2312 Each

5

year guarantee

e e Sport-Thieme

®

Throwing Hammer

For training and competition, made from cast iron with swivel head and wire, standard handle. Throwing hammers are supReplacement Parts for plied in a dismantled state. 71 123 8639 3 kgEach Throwing Hammer 71 123 8642 4 kgEach Essential for competitions. 71 123 8600 5 kgEach f 71 123 8903 Wire, 98 cmEach 71 123 8655 6 kgEach 71 123 8626 7.25 kgEach g 71 123 8916 HandleEach

122

f 4 For training and competition

g

i Hammer Rack Made from Tubular Steel

Can be taken apart, comes in a box. 91x42.5x131 cm. 5 year guarantee! 71 123 2341 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Leichtathletik Shot Puts

For training and competition, for all performance levels – each weight in a different colour.

Don’t forget to order:

3 kg, white, ø 95 mm

Chalk, page 247

4 k g, black ø 102 mm

7.26 kg, yellow, ø 126 mm

5 kg, red, ø 109 mm

6 kg, blue, ø 119 mm

ab 4 Cast iron

4 Ideal for training and schools

Blue

Red

a Sport-Thieme®

Training Shot Put

Made from cast iron, ideal for schools and training (also for youth competitions). Each weight is a different colour. 3 kg, white, ø 95 mm 71 124 5211 Each

4 Plastic 4 Ideal for indoor use

e

4 kg, black, ø 102 mm 71 124 5224 Each

d

5 kg, red, ø 109 mm 71 124 5237 Each 6 kg, blue, ø 119 mm 71 124 5266 Each 7.26 kg, yellow, ø 126 mm 71 124 5240 Each

b Sport-Thieme® Competition

Green

4 Rubber 4 Ideal for halls and sports grounds

Blue

Orange

Yellow

Black Black

Shot Put, Calibrated

Made from cast iron. Each weight in a different colour. 2 kg, blue, ø 88 mm 71 123 6167 Each

4 Calibrated 100% 4 Polished  cast iron 4 Rounded  by machine 4 For  high performance sports

c

c WV Shot Puts

Made from rubber, suitable for halls and sports grounds. Filled with granules, 3 kg, white, ø 95 mm 71 123 6109 Each does not bounce. 71 124 4609 2.5 kg, blue, ø 105 mmEach 4 kg, black, ø 102 mm 71 123 6112 Each 71 124 4612 3 kg, blue, ø 105 mmEach 71 124 4625 4 kg, red, ø 115 mmEach 5 kg, red, ø 111 mm 71 124 4638 5 kg, red, ø 140 mmEach 71 123 6125 Each 71 124 4667 6 kg, red, ø 140 mmEach 71 124 4654 7.26 kg, red, ø 140 mm Each 6 kg, blue, ø 119 mm 71 123 6154 Each

Red

Blue

Yellow

d Sport-Thieme®

e Sport-Thieme® High

Does not bounce, suitable for indoor and outdoor use. Filled with iron pellets. Each weight is a different colour. 71 123 5311 2 kg, green, ø 114 mmEach 71 123 5324 3 kg, blue, ø 121 mmEach 71 123 5337 4 kg, orange, ø 134 mmEach 71 123 5340 5 kg, yellow, ø 135 mmEach 71 123 5379 6 kg, red, ø 121 mmEach 71 123 5366 7.26 kg black, ø 134 mmEach

Calibrated, made from cast iron, each weight is a different colour, polished, 100% round. 71 124 5804 3 kg, white, ø 97 mmEach 71 124 5817 4 kg, black, ø 102 mmEach 71 124 5820 5 kg, red, ø 110 mmEach 71 124 5859 6 kg, blue, ø 115 mmEach 71 124 5846 7.26 kg, yellow, ø 125 mm Each

Plastic Shot Put

Performance Shot Put

7.26 kg, yellow, ø 126 mm 71 123 6141 Each

Shot Put Training f

Throwing Stone

Calibrated, made from cast iron, black varnish, complies with DRKV competition rules. 71 124 6722 5 kgEach 71 124 6719 10 kgEach 71 124 6706 15 kgEach

g Throwing Bar

Ideal for throwing training, 300 g, 29 cm long, grey, rubber. 71 124 8207 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

Accessories

5

year guarantee

h Shot Put Rack Made from Tubular Steel

Colour varnished, for max. 20 shot puts, can be taken apart, comes in a box. 88x42.5x76.5 cm. 5 year guarantee! 71 123 2325 Each

123


Athletics High Jump IAAF Certificate number E-08-0519

IAAF Certificate number E99-0158

a

5

year guarantee

Dimensions of uprights Dimensions of uprights

3 mm

Great Product!

1.8 mm

1.8 mm

3 mm

a Sport-Thieme® High Jump Stand

Light alloy stand with recessed measuring tape, which can be read easily. Complete with screw clamps and scale for accurate adjustment of the crossbar. With non-slip rubber cushioning on the underside of the stable T-base and safety device to prevent the T-base falling unintentionally. 5 year guarantee! 71 123 8206 2 mPair 71 123 8219 2.5 mPair

Accessories

4 Can be adjusted to any height 4 IAAF certified 4 Precise height setting, down to the millimetre

c Competition High b Universal High Jump Stand

4 With diversion brackets

4 With protective pads Clamps d Screw With protective pads, to prevent

Jump Stand

With IAAF certificate E99-0158. Aluminium With IAAF certificate E-08-0519. T-base special tubing telescopic uprights, can be with height adjustable rubber buffers for adjusted using crank, which can be set levelling. Height adjustment using interprecisely, down to the millimetre. nally running aluminium rail, easy to read. Adjustable from 110-265 cm. Steel bases, Height scale from 50 to 250 cm. powder coated, adjustable. 71 123 8222 Pair 71 123 8235 Pair

f Screw Clamps

Section 45x45 mm inside

4 Adjusts to 9 different levels!

With diversion brackets. The crossbar is diverted and does not fall on the damage to the aluminium uprights. Inner high jump mat. This helps avoid accidents dimensions 45x42 mm for upright profiles and extends the working life of your crossof 40x40 mm. bar. Screw clamps 45x42 mm, with pads ® 71 123 8509 Each for protecting the aluminium uprights. Sui- i Sport-Thieme Crossbar Holder table for 40x40 mm uprights. 71 123 8512 Pair With diversion bracket and viewing window. Height adjustable using just one hand. The height (5 cm stages) can be Measuring Tape g easily read thanks to the new viewing winSelf-adhesive, 35 mm wide, for 1 pair dow. The additional diversion brackets of high jump uprights up to 250 cm. stop the crossbar falling on the athlete‘s e “Blue-End” Support End 71 151 6106 Pair landing surface, thus avoiding painful conPiece tact with the crossbar and increasing the Made from plastic, for crossbars with an h Aluminum Posts lifespan of the crossbar. Five year guaWith inserted measuring tape. outer diameter of 30.45 mm. The ends are 71 123 8004 2.0 m longEach rantee. placed on the high jump bar. 71 123 9906 Each 71 123 8017 2.50 m longEach 71 123 9805-1 Pair

124

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


High Jump Athletics cd

e

Sets c Sport-Thieme® High Jump Competition Crossbar

Heavy tubular crossbars made from triple reinforced fibreglass. Pullwinded 30/25 mm tube. Extremely strong and a great contrast to the background. Complies with IAAF standards. 71 124 0359 4 m bright yellowEach 71 124 0304 4.5 m bright yellowEach

a Sport-Thieme

®

High Jump Set 1

With this set you have absolutely everything you will need for high jump training and competitions. Excellent quality at an attractive price. Consisting of: • 1 pair of 2.5 m high jump uprights, page 124 a • 2 fibreglass reinforced plastic crossbars, 4 m c • 1 Zacharias crossbar g 71 123 7900 Set

d Sport-Thieme®

High Jump Crossbars

For high jump and pole vault. Unbreakable and tested, ideal for competitions and training. This design consists of triple reinforced fibreglass bars. Hard ends for maximum possible resistance. With rounded edges. Our bars have the diameter that is required by the DLV and have already been used for a variety of national and international meetings. Top quality, made in Germany.

High Jump Crossbar

Attractively priced crossbar for schools and training. Made from plastic and reinforced fibreglass inserts. Bright yellow. As illustrated f. 71 124 0506 4 mEach 71 124 0607 4.5 mEach

e Crossbar Pads

Two foam sleeves, each 1 m long, sui- f Sport-Thieme Rope for High table for all high jump crossbars - reduces Jump the risk of injury. Just pull the sleeve over Made from woven cord, approx. 5 m long the high jump bar. with suede weight bags and “signal flag”. 71 124 1408 Each 71 124 1105 Each ®

b Sport-Thieme®

High Jump Set 2

Set consisting of: • 1 pair of 2 m high jump uprights, page 124 a • 1 pair of screw clamps with diversion brackets, page 124 f • 2 fibreglass reinforced plastic crossbars, 4 m c • 1 Zacharias crossbar g 71 123 7913 Set

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

g “Zacharias” High Jump Crossbar

You have never been able to jump so high without worrying about getting injured. The multiple German champion Thomas Zacharias has developed this crossbar. It is a safe and uncomplicated device, which is ideally suited to meet the needs of beginners. It consists of a foil tube with an elasticated suspension cord.

It makes teaching and training easier. It almost never falls down, which saves valuable time. Training is easy and fun as the anxiety of injury is removed. Training will never be the same without it. The windproof crossbar is suitable for outdoor use. Holds air well, with valve. 71 124 1118 Indoor for hallsEach 71 124 1121 Wind-proof and inflatableEach

125


Athletics Athletics High Jump Mats and Covers 4 With spike-proof mat cover 4 Incl. ventilation holes 4 Mat complying with IAAF available on request

Mats ab Product Code 71 125 1106 71 125 1207 71 125 1308 71 125 1119 71 125 1210 71 125 1311 71 125 1122 71 125 1223 71 125 1324 71 125 1135 71 125 1236 71 125 1337 71 125 1148 71 125 1249 71 125 1340 71 125 1151 71 125 1252 71 125 1353

Dimensions 400x250x50 cm 400x250x50 cm 400x250x50 cm 400x300x50 cm 400x300x50 cm 400x300x50 cm 500x300x50 cm * 500x300x50 cm * 500x300x50 cm 500x400x50 cm * 500x400x50 cm * 500x400x50 cm 600x300x50 cm * 600x300x50 cm * 600x300x50 cm 600x400x50 cm 600x400x50 cm 600x400x50 cm

Sets a “Standard”

b “Super” c Rain cover style style • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

a “Standard” High Jump Set

b “Super” High Jump Set

Designs: see the table

Designs: see the table

Consisting of individual RG 17/25 foam blocks (mono, without hollow chamber system) and a spike-proof mat and cover. The cover is made from reinforced polyester fabric with the top layer made from spike-proof fabric mesh and the bottom side from non-slip gymnastics mat material. With ventilation holes on three sides and zip.

Made from hollow RG 17/25 foam blocks and a protective mat. The cover is made from reinforced polyester material. The bottom side is made from nonslip gymnastic mat material. The top has a spike-proof mesh and a zip for replacement. Ventilation holes and carrying loops are provided all round and the zip is covered. The high jump stands in the picture are not included.

“Super” Foam Core

* = Recommended minimum dimensions required by the DLV

IAAF compliance available on request

All high jump and pole vault mats can be made to your colour requirements. Combinations are also possible.

If no particular colour is requested, we will deliver the colours as shown in the photographs.

Exclusive to Sport-Thieme®

5

year guarantee

4 Can be adjusted to 9 different levels

d c Exclusive Duckboard

For high jump and pole vault mats, entire construction made from aluminium. Rectangular sections form the sub-structure. Aluminium planks 20x80 mm are welded to the sub-structure. The resilient

126

Section support grid is supplied in 2 or 3 parts, depending on size. High jump stands are not included. 71 125 3506 m²

45x45 mm inside

d Sport-Thieme® Crossbar Holder

With diversion bracket and viewing window. The height can easily be adjusted. From the new window, the height of the crossbar can be read easily in 5 cm intervals. The additional diversion brackets ensure that the crossbar does not fall on the landing area. Painful contact with the crossbar is therefore avoided and this also helps to protect the crossbar. 5 year guarantee! 71 123 9805 Pair

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Teaching Aids

e

New! a Universal Magnetic Tactics Board Set

This tactics folder is just the thing for quick instructions at the sideline. This board set contains 9 playing fields/courts on tear resistant magnetic, washable film sheets for football, handball, basketball, volleyball, badminton, ice hockey, rugby, Ame-

4 For 9 different types of sports 4 Incl. accessories

rican football, tennis as well as a blank white board. Playing field size: 30x19 cm, including a film marker and 26 icons. 71 144 0443 Each

b Set of Replacement Magnets

For the “Universal” Tactics Board. Consisting of 26 items. Not illustrated. 71 143 9726 Set

Board c Writing Magnetic dry wipe surface. Silver

c

anodised aluminium frame, comes with pen tray and fixtures and fittings. 71 197 2711 60x90 cmEach 71 197 2724 90x120 cmEach 71 197 2737 100x150 cmEach

e

New! Skillastics™ –

“Fitness” Learning Game

This game was developed as an educational tool (for 1-100 children of all age groups) to acquire and promote a multiplicity of required motor skills. Skillastics is intended to serve both as a motivating addition to the instruction in fitness activid New! Magnetic “Football” Tactics Boards ties as well as for teaching the basics. ConStrong aluminium frame with corner reintains 26 absorbing exercises, 150x190 cm forcement, two hanging eyelets, speplay mat, 6 coloured beanbag basketballs, cial magnetic coating for writing, dry wipe 6 coloured dice, 6 mini play mats made board, including magnets for 2 teams, 1 from nylon (50x63 cm), detailed game inspen and dry wipe eraser. tructions, practical carrying bag made 71 143 8622 45x30 cmEach from nylon. 71 143 8635 90x60 cmEach 71 221 7114 Each

Magnetic Sports Hall f

4 Facilitates  the day-to-day work! 4 Each  set includes 100 magnets!

Set A

4 Incl. pen holder, 4 board markers, 1 board wiper

Set B f White Board

independently. A laminated key for explaining the symbols is included in each set. Each set contains 100 magnets: Set A: Gymnastics benches, mats, vaulting horses, gymnastics rings, wall bars, parallel bars, high bar, marking cones, various balls, skipping ropes, mini trampolines and much more. g Magnetic Sports Hall 100 The magnetic sports hall is a new edu- Set B: can be used as add-on set: various pieces of equipment as in set A, but also cational tool, which facilitates the day-today work in sports instruction and training. with high jump equipment, shot put stop Its use helps to convey planned equipment boards, hurdles, start blocks and much assembly in a way which is quick and easy more. Magnetic board not included. 71 221 4900 Set AEach to understand and puts students in the 71 221 4913 Set BEach position to implement the plans Magnetic dry wipe board, silver anodised aluminium frame, comes with pen tray, 4 markers, 1 white board eraser. Incl. fixtures. 71 197 2779 60x90 cmSet 71 197 2782 90x120 cmSet

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

127


Teaching Aids Great Value!

Buy Now!

cm

7 cm

16 cm

35.5

m 35 c

ø 24.5 cm

Sets b

Sets

Sport-Thieme® Set I

Consisting of: • 6 red and 6 blue discs, each ø 24.5 cm • 10 red and 10 blue lines • 4 red and 4 blue corners 71 144 4807  Set of 40

c Sport-Thieme® Set II

The set consists of: • 2 blue, 2 red, 2 green and 2 yellow discs, ø 24.5 cm • 1 blue, 1 red, 1 green and 1 yellow disc, ø 40 cm • 20 blue and 20 red lines • 6 blue and 6 red corners • 4 blue and 4 red hands • 4 blue and 4 red feet 71 218 6001  Set of 80

Sets

f Sport-Thieme® Set: Lines

Consisting of: • 10 red and 10 blue lines • 2 red and 2 blue corners for marking playing area. 71 144 4836  Set of 24

Buy Now!

g Sport-Thieme® Set: ø 40 cm Discs

d Sport-Thieme® Set: Hands and Feet

Consisting of: • 10 red and 10 blue hands • 10 red and 10 blue feet 71 144 4865 

The set consists of 1 red, 1 blue, 1 green and 1 yellow disc. 71 144 5246  Set of 4 Set of 40

e Sport-Thieme® Set: Arrows The set consists of: • 10 red and 10 blue arrows. 71 144 5086 

h Sport-Thieme® Set: Discs ø 24.5 cm

The set consists of: • 2 blue, 2 red, 2 yellow and 2 green ø 24.5 cm discs. Set of 8 Set of 20 71 144 4881 

j

i

27. 5

ø 40 cm

i Floor Markings 1-30

Versatile marking discs with striking yellow numbers from 1-30. Made from non-slip smooth rubber, ø approx. 12.5 cm. Ideally suitable for creative learning and active games. 71 218 7310  Set of 30

j Floor Markings 0-9

ø 12.5 cm

Non-slip floor markings made from smooth rubber, ø approx. 22 cm, with embossed numbers from 0-9. Ideal for marking moves, routes or equipment. 71 218 7307  Set of 10

ø 22 cm

a Sport-Thieme®

Floor Markings

For pre-schools, schools and clubs. Just put them on the floor… and you‘re ready to go! A versatile must have: • As a methodical aid to learning and practising techniques and tactics • As an organisation and orientation aid (e.g. circuit training) • New markings are quickly set up and easily changed again • No tripping when walking on markings as they are non-slip and hard wearing The markings are made from a special rubber granulate. The material is extremely durable and non-slip. 71 218 5907-1 Disc, blue, ø 24.5 cmEach 71 218 5907-2 Disc, red, ø 24.5 cmEach 71 218 5907-3 Disc, green, ø 24.5 cmEach 71 218 5907-4 Disc, yellow, ø 24.5 cmEach 71 218 5910-1 Disc, blue, ø 40 cmEach 71 218 5910-2 Disc, red, ø 40 cmEach 71 218 5910-3 Disc, greenEach 71 218 5910-4 Disc, yellowEach 71 218 5923-1 Line, blueEach 71 218 5923-2 Line, redEach 71 218 5936-1 Arrow, blueEach 71 218 5936-2 Arrow, redEach 71 218 5949-1 Corner, blueEach 71 218 5949-2 Corner, redEach 71 218 5952-1 Hand, blueEach 71 218 5952-2 Hand, redEach 71 218 5965-1 Foot, blueEach 71 218 5965-2 Foot, redEach

Possible Uses

Example: Court marking

Example: Tactics on the court

128

Example: Basketball dribbling drills

Example: Volleyball tactics

Example: Gymnastics

Example: Vaulting

Example: Run up to Fosbury Flop (high jump)

Example: Starting line marking

Example: Hand position cartwheel

Example: Foot position when passing

Example: Range marking for jumping areas

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Reivo® Bands

a Reivo Bands ®

Teaching Aids

For a wide range of uses. Bands made from 80% polyester, 20% elastane: therefore can stretch to twice their length. Quick and easy fastening. With straps for connecting several bands together. Designs: see the table Model Reivo Band “Medi” Reivo Band “Short” Reivo Band “Ski” Reivo Band “Long” Reivo Band “Plus” Reivo Band “Super”

Product Code 71 143 7876 71 143 7818 71 143 7805 71 143 7821 71 143 7834 71 143 7850

Approx. Loop Length 45 cm 60 cm 70 cm 60 cm 60 cm 60 cm

Length 2m 4 m 4 m 8m 13 m 23 m

Stretches to approx. 4 m 8m 8m 16 m 26 m 46 m

Reel included

Looped connection for joining any number of bands

• • • • •

80% polyester and 20% elastane = can be stretched 100%

Set

Quick to assemble thanks to practical quick fasteners

b Reivo Band Set ®

For many uses. Bands made from 80% polyester and 20% elastane. The waistband is made from 100% polypropylene. The set consists of: • 1 “Medi” Reivo band • 1 short Reivo band • 1 long Reivo band • 1 Reivo waist belt 71 218 7903 Set

c Reivo® Adjustable Waist Belt

This belt has been developed for people with larger waists. Very comfortable to wear as you can adjust it to suit your needs from approx. 75-145 cm. It can be attached

Possible Uses

4 With practical quick release buckle adjustable to suit every waist

4 Adjustable between 75-145 cm

d Reivo® Resistance Belt

Elasticated Reivo band, 4 m long, with extra large Velcro loops. The long Velcro fastenings are very reliable for strength and speed training. 71 210 1301-1 Each

to all Reivo bands quickly and easily. Includes adjusting buckle and quick fastener, belt width 5 cm. 100% polypropylene. 71 143 7889 Each

Example: Playing & practising

• Net replacement in games • Removes fear when learning and practising swimming, gymnastics, skiing and athletics etc. • Dividing goal in sections • Training band for developing strength, speed and endurance • Ideal for use in rehabilitation • Great marking aid (e.g. closing off sections) • Towing in walking, trekking, swimming and cross-country skiing

4 Really easy to connect

Example: Running, jumping, playing

Reivo® Bands: 10 Benefits

Example: in P.E. lessons

Example: As a goal marker

Reivo® Band “Medi”

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

1. Quick and easy to attach to stands, goal posts, around the hips, arms, legs! 2. Can be stretched by 100%! 3. The Velcro system is very reliable! 4. Very easy to see luminous colours (red/yellow/red) 5. Very safe! No metal or hard plastic on the band! 6. Easy to attach and release several bands (infinitely) without knots 7. Every distance can be bridged (e.g. lengthways across a large sports hall) 8. Waterproof, washable and lightfast! 9. Ideal as a replacement net for all games, also for use in the water! 10. An ideal training band for athletics, swimming and rehabilitation!

129


Training Aids

Sport-Thieme Training Aid

For all types of sports! Versatile modular system with countless combinations Now Even Better

c

d

4 With holders for hoops

c

a

c b d

e

a Sport-Thieme® Training Aids

d

The training aid for all types of sports! A modular system that offers endless variations with a minimum number of components for pre-schools, schools, general sports up to high performance training. A bar, a base and a clip are the basic parts that can be assembled in any way you wish. All parts are made from supple plastic and the weight of the base guarantees high stability. The clip can be moved to any height on the 158 cm long bar. The crossbar can be fixed firmly into the clip or can

c

b

Set

Accessories b Stand Base

ø 20 cm, height 11 cm. With holders for hoops. 71 143 7401 Each

simply rest on it. The clip can be turned 360 degrees into any position. One training kit consists of: 2 bases with 2 posts, 2 clips with 1 crossbar. 71 143 7212 Set

d Rotating Hinge Fitting

71 143 7414 Each

f Training Aid Set with Hoops

e Hanging Steps

The set consists of: • 5 training aids a • 5 plastic gymnastics hoops, ø 70 cm 71 143 7225 Set

With six different ways to combine. The bars can be placed with 5 cm spacing. c Holder and Crossbar Made from strong plastic. Bars not included. 150 cm long. 71 143 7427 Each 71 143 7469 Pair

Sport-Thieme® Saturn Ring 4 Can be used with all cones

g Sport-Thieme® Saturn Ring

Patent 19820022. Versatile fun and training aid; perfect for indoor and outdoor use! This sports and fun product will captivate young and old, big and small with its almost endless combinations. Train and play with new combinations and using your own ideas. This isn‘t a problem for the Saturn Rings: You simply place the Saturn Rings on the floor or position them on the cones, quickly add the gymnastics bar and hey presto, you‘re ready. Use Saturn Rings for practising agility, skills and speed with obstacles of your choice at different heights. Great fun. Cones not included. 71 130 0505 Each

Also take a look at: Agility Coordination Ladder, on page 112

130

4 Training aid

4 Fun sports product

Sets

4 Versatile Don’t forget to order: • Marking Cones, on page 138 • Beanbags, on page 287

h

New! Saturn Ring Set I

Consisting of: • 12 Saturn rings • 12 marking cones, 38 cm high • 12 gym bars, 100 cm long 71 130 0518-1 Set

i Saturn Ring Set II

Consisting of: • 6 Saturn rings • 6 marking cones, 50 cm high • 6 gymnastics bars, 100 cm long 71 130 0521-1 Set

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Referee’s Equipment Sportswear

a “Sport-Thieme” Stop Watch

5

Features: 60 memory functions, display of individual or interval times, times up to 9 hours, 59 minutes and 59.99 seconds, 60 recallable interval and individual times, displays the fastest, slowest and average speeds, lap counter. Adjustable countdown, max. 10 hours, automatically repeats complete countdowns and counts complete countdowns. 30 second countdown for timeouts. Master oscillator adjustable from 10-320 tones per minutes, displays clock frequency, tone counter and total time covered. Displays hours, minutes, seconds, months, date, day and year, automatic calendar, with batteries. 71 130 5904-2 Each

year guarantee

Also take a look at:

More stop watches page 132

b Wizzball Hand Whistle

For hygienic reasons, this whistle is a must have for any school or training group where several people may have to share a whistle. This referee’s whistle consists of a handy bladder-type bag made from skin friendly PVC and a ring to attach the whistle to a lanyard. Approx. ø 70 mm, approx. 75 g. Assorted colours. 71 141 2794 Each

c Referee’s Compact Football Set

c

With extremely penetrating sound. The first whistle without a ball. Made from high quality plastic, ultra-sound welded. f Cup Referee’s Whistle Chrome plated, high and shrill 71 141 2710 BlueEach 71 141 2752 BlackEach sound, with flat mouthpiece. Set of 3 71 141 2749 RedEach 71 188 6418 Each

j

g

h

g Assistant Referee’s Flag “Quadro”

Fluorescent coloured material, 40x40 cm, diagonal yellow/red check pattern, unbreakable plastic bar with handle. 100% polyester. 71 193 1857 Each

i Referee’s “Coin” ø 35 mm 71 141 3003 

j Cardboard Game Record Pre-printed, for referee. 71 141 2909 Football 71 141 2912 Handball

Pack of 10 Pack of 10

h Assistant Referee’s Flag

Made from fluorescent nylon, yellow/red chequered flag: 30x40 cm with strong plastic bar including handle. Material 100% polyester. 71 111 6609 Each

DIGI Referee’s Wrist Watch

This watch is ideal for you: the referee. You select the playing time and start the time ticking when the game begins. If there is an interruption in play, you can start the parallel stop mode to record the interruption. Displays playing time, game interruptions and time of day at the same time on the three line display. The watch has a date related alarm function and runs on a 3 V lithium battery. With back light, waterproof and shockproof. 71 121 0301 Each

Easy to wear and turn on, whistling comes at the press of a button. Comes with a lanyard and batteries. 71 188 6463 Each

e FOX 40 Referee Whistles

i

k

d MIKASA® Electronic Whistle

Practical and quick to use. 1 neon red card, 1 neon yellow card, 1 game record card. (In German). 71 141 3452 Each

l

Nickel-plated metal

o

l Players’ Passes Folder

p ACME Tornado 2000

Brand new ball free whistle with 2 tone frequencies. As the sound gradually grows louder, it will even be heard over large crowds. Black. 71 141 2622 Each

Made from durable PVC, washable, with ring mechanism, 16.5x14 cm, clear sleeves not included. 71 210 0904 BlackEach 71 210 0917 RedEach 71 210 0920 BlueEach

m Single Clear Sleeves

Made from PVC for players‘ passes, 15x10.5 cm = DIN A6. 71 210 1008  Price for 13

n 50 Page Game Chronicle Notebook

Bakelite in “snail” shape

o ACME Referee’s Whistle

q First Referee’s Whistle

71 141 2808 Nickel-platedEach Plastic whistle with extremely shrill 71 106 1404 Bakelite in “snail” shape sound. Comes with a hanging ring. Each 71 188 6405 Each

For recording the course of the game, team selections, table results, goal shots etc. with room for newspaper cuttings. The entries are a permanent memento and r Referee’s Whistle String an important reference point for future Adjustable, black nylon, with snap awards. DIN A5. Not illustrated. hook, 48 cm long. 71 141 4703 Each 71 141 3306  Set of 3

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

131


Measuring Stopwatches

4 With night light function

b DIGI Stopwatch “DT 100”

This stopwatch has 100 memory spaces for laps and split times as well as an alarm, timer and pacer function. Features: 3 line display, time (12/24 h) with date, alarm, stopwatch function 9 hours, 59 a “PC-9-EL1” 60 Memory minutes, 59.99 seconds, timer: 9 hours, 59 DIGI Stopwatch minutes, 59.99 seconds with 30 seconds The stopwatch for ambitious trainers. time out function, pacer: 10-320 beats per Saves up to 60 laps and split times, with minute. Saves up to 100 laps/split times, night light function and a clip. Displays recall function for stopped times, recalls the fastest, slowest and average lap time. Ideal for training with groups. Time of day, the fastest slowest and average lap time, timer and pacer (10 to 320 beats/minute). strong, splash-proof and shockproof stainThe DIGI pressing point system guarantees less steel casing. Uses standard 3 V lithium CR2032 batteries, 125 g. Metal casing. reliable timing. With lanyard. 71 130 3201 Each 71 130 8509 Each

c “PC 110” and “PC 111” Multi-Functional Digital Watch

Top models with 500 or 2,000 memory spaces. Three line display, stopwatch function of 9 hours, 59 minutes, 59.99 seconds, beat measurement. Freely programmable. Speed measurement, time of day with date and alarm. Dual timer, splash-proof and shock-proof, connection to DIGI printer. With lanyard. 71 130 4608 500 (PC 110)Each 71 130 1407 2,000 (PC 111)Each

d DIGI Thermal Printer

The printing system. The printer can be connected to the DIGI PC 110 and PC 111 stopwatches c. The printout can be performed, either completely or partially, at the same time as the timing or at a later date. The printer is battery operated, with thermal print paper. 71 130 4709 Each

Set e Thermal Printer Set

Set contains: • DIGI multi-functional stopwatch c • DIGI thermal printer d Printer with PC 110 stopwatch 71 130 4800 Each

4 Waterproof and shockproof casing f DIGI “PC-73” Multi-Functional Watch with 50 Memory Spaces

4 Extra large display

With a large two line display, 50 memory spaces for laps and split times and pacer g “Stoptec 141” Stopwatch The excellent value digital stopwatch function. DIGI pressing point system guaranfor everyone. With hour signal and lanyard. tees reliable timing. With lanyard. 71 130 5005 Each 71 130 6907 Each Stopwatch

g Stoptec 141

Functions: start/stop/reset • Addition/split/dual Lanyard • Protective bag included Accuracy (sec.) 1/100 LCD display 6 digits Digit height 8 mm Displays 9 hrs., 59 min., 59.99 sec. Displays 59 min., 59.99 sec. • Size 75x53x15 mm Weight approx. 29 g No. of memory spaces for laps, split and finishing times Battery included Button cell SR 54 Life approx. 2 years Time (12/24 h) • Date display • Splash-proof Shockproof Countdown Alarm • Uses Sports with split times Special features Conical shape

Product code

132

71 130 6907

h Jumbo Display Stopwatch “Stoptec 143”

Printer with PC 111 stopwatch 71 130 4813 Each

Accessories

Affordable digital stopwatch with an extra i Thermal Paper d For DIGI thermal printer . 1 pack = large display and hourly signal. With 5 rolls of 3 metres. lanyard. 71 130 6503 Each 71 130 4901 Each

h Stoptec 143

f DIGI PC-73

a DIGI PC-91-EL

b DIGI DT 100

c DIGI PC 110

c DIGI PC 111

• • •

• • •

• • •

1/100 2 lines 7 mm •

1/100 3 lines 6 mm •

1/100 3 lines 5 mm •

• • • • 1/100 3 lines 6 mm •

• • • • 1/100 3 lines 6 mm •

65x61x16 mm approx. 61 g 50

63x59x16 mm approx. 65 g 60

75x60x15 mm approx. 125 g 100

71x60x17 mm approx. 64 g 500

71x60x17 mm approx. 64 g 2000

3 V lithium battery approx. 2-3 years

• 1/100 6 digits 12.4 mm • 75x53x15 mm approx. 49 g

• Sports with split times Jumbo display

Multiple uses

3 V lithium battery approx. 2-3 years • • • • • • Sports with predetermined duration Night light function

71 130 6503

71 130 5005

71 130 3201

Button cell SR 54 approx. 2 years • • •

• • • All sports

3 V lithium battery 3 V lithium battery 3 V lithium battery approx. 2-3 years approx. 2-3 years approx. 2-3 years • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • All sports, All sports All sports also a pacer function Recall function Can be connected to DIGI Can be connected to for measured times thermal printer d DIGI thermal printer d or PC connection with 10-320 beats per minute set of DIGI computer connections j 71 130 3201 71 130 4608 71 130 1407

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Stopwatches, Crown Stoppers Measuring

Now Even Better

4 Waterproof for 3 years guaranteed

d Hanhart Delta “E 100” Stopwatch

Although this stopwatch has a high level of technical features, it is easy to use. Made Hanhart “Stopstar 2” in Germany. Easy-to-read LCD display, fast a Hanhart “Profil 1” c search/memory. Functional display for lap, Stopwatch Stopwatch b Hanhart “Stratos 2” Stopwatch short lap, as well as adjustable split time ABS casing, very easy to read. Comes with Guaranteed simple and functional timing Ergonomic shape, simple and functional from normal time. Function mode key, dislanyard and protective bag. Very user without additional functions (chrono). The operation, ABS casing with lanyard. SR44 play and memory key, protective bag with friendly, with clear display and large vieideal watch for pros and amateurs. ABS button cell battery. lanyard. wing angle. casing with lanyard. 71 130 3100 Each 71 130 3504 Each 71 130 5409 Each 71 130 4002 Each Model

4 Wear on and operate with the same hand e Finger Watch “Chrono 100”

Worldwide the only finger watch with lap counter that can be operated with the same hand. This watch is the simple but efficient solution for the old problem: How many laps have I already run or how many lengths do I still have to swim? As there is only one function button, the watch can be used even in the hectic atmosphere of a competition. Popular with swimmers, runners, cyclists, speed and in-line skaters and many more. The Chrono 100 saves and counts up to 100 lap times, display of the fastest and the slowest lap time, average time of all lap/length times, all individual lap times, total time and number of total laps/lengths, with pause function. Battery: button cell CR1216. 71 162 0900-1 Each

b Stratos 2

Functions: start/stop/reset • Addition/split/dual • Lanyard • Protective cover included Accuracy (sec.) 1/100 LCD display 7 digits Digit height 6.5 mm Display 9 hrs., 59 min., 59.99 sec. • Size 66x70x21 mm Weight approx. 62 g No. of spaces for laps, Interval or end times Battery included Button cell SR 54 Running time approx. 2 years Time (12/24 h) Date display Splash-proof Shockproof • Countdown Uses Athletics Special features

c Stopstar 2

a Profil 1

• • •

• • • • 1/100 7 digits 8 mm • 82x61x28 mm approx. 90 g

1/100 7 digits 7 mm • 82x61x28 mm approx. 70 g

• Athletics Easy to use

71 130 3504

71 130 5409

f Sport-Thieme

• • Great • • t! Produc • • • 1/100 1/100 2.5 lines 3 rows 7 mm 6 mm • • 90x60x29 mm 63x56x17 mm approx. 90 g approx. 66 g 65 60

Mignon cell (AA) 1.5 V Mignon cell (AA) 1.5 V Micron cell (AAA) 1.5 V approx. 2-5 years approx. 2-5 years approx. 5-7 years •

Simple and functional

Product code

d Delta “E 100”

• •

• •

Sports with interruptions in play Very temperature resistant (-15°C to +60°C) 71 130 3100

Sports with laps/lanes

3 V lithium battery approx. 2-3 years • • • • • All sports

Waterproof

Great value and versatile

71 130 4002

71 130 5904

Price! Multi-Talent at a Great ® rt-Thieme Stopwatch f Spo , sloFeatures: displays quickest

counwest and average speed, lap max. 10 ter. Adjustable countdown, complehours, automatic repeat of of comted countdown and number nd countpleted countdowns, 30 seco erator can down for time out. Clock gen in, with disbe set from 10-320 beats/m beat counter play of impulse frequency, lay of hour, Disp . time sed elap l tota and date, day th, mon , nds seco , utes min r, with batand year, automatic calenda rantee! gua year 5 ard. lany tery and Each 71 130 5904 

!

Great Value

Buy now! ntee

5 year guara

Stopwatch, watch, calen for lue dar … our great va money winner!

Weitere Informationen Seite 631 · Tel. 05357–18181 · www.sport-thieme.de/messen

133


Measuring Time Timer, Stopwatches New!

Top Rated

sport-thieme.com

a Time-Timer with Acoustic Signal

Time ticking on is an abstract concept however recognising the elements of time is the first step towards independence for many people. Punctuality and time limits are often required e.g. at meetings, at work, at home etc. Time Timer makes the lapse of time clearer. Using this product, success can be measured by looking at the duration of measured actions. Use Time Timer in seminars, meetings and presentations, classes, computer and play times. Time Timer encourages people not to concentrate on the normal clock or to understand it. You see and “feel” the passing of time as the red disc clearly shows how much time is left. You can even set a subtle yet clear alarm to let you know

4 Lets you experience time 4 “Time Manager” at home, in the office, in meetings, etc. 4 Available in 2 different sizes

4 Helps children to plan better

b Timecoach

The timer helps children to plan better. Children learn how to manage time better with the help of the Timecoach. The timer runs on 2 AA batteries (not included). How much time do I have? How do I manage my time? when the time is up. Special features: Deep black, on and How much time do I have for my jobs and when can I join in? Children learn to act alone and in a group. How does off button for alarm, subtle beep when time has lapsed. Battery operated. Pocket model: Protective cover works as it work? The minutes scale resembles a normal clock. The task time can be set by the white disc in a clockwise direca stand (7.5x7.5 cm). tion. The white disc then turns back and the remaining Table model: With stand (18x18 cm). 71 123 1003 Pocket modelEach time is can be read in a clockwise direction. The passing of 71 123 1016 Table modelEach time is visualised in particular by signal colours. The entire period consists of 4 time periods, each with its own colour. Green = plenty of time; yellow (15 min.) = time is pressing; orange (10 min.) = hurry now! Red (5 min.) = alarm 4 With USB phase! Only a little time left. At the end of the task time, connection the LED signal lights up (at about 4 minutes). The time set originally can be adjusted with the arrow. Or a time allocation can be made between “resolve task on your own” and “ask for assistance” (without assistance). Another way to use the Timecoach is to incorporate the “Attention Block” on the top. You can determine the function of the colours yourself. Those that are tried and tested: Green = I would like to help!; Yellow = I have a question!; Red = Do not disturb! This unique combination makes the Timecoach multi-functional and promotes independent thinking from an early age. 71 175 9701 12 cm highEach 71 175 9714 25 cm highEach

4 With an acoustic alarm

d

New! Stop Watch “Stoptec USB-500”

with USB Connection

This watch has a file memory function with space for up to 500 records. After measuring the quickest, slowest and the interval times, the average is determined. All measurements are saved chronologically and can be retrieved or erased. With the integrated USB port, the data can easily c DIGI Stop Watch “DT-320” Coaching watch with stroke rate based on 3 strobe transferred to a PC (CVS standard) and the information kes and a file memory function with 300 memory locacan be archived, printed or processed (connection cable tions for lap and split times. File memory means that the and software included). With the dual timer function, eitstopped times can be stored with the date and be recalled her one or two timers can be used. Both timers run simulat a later date. A simple push of a button can change the taneously and are great for use in training for controlling stop mode to the stroke rate, so that both split time meaintervals and stress. The stopwatch has a watch funcsurements and stroke rates are possible at the same tion (12h/24h display) with date and alarm, a pacer functime. The clock has an outstanding pressure point and tion and pressure point. The ergonomically shaped case is it is our special recommendation for professional rowing shock resistant and splash-proof. Technical information: and swimming coaches. Technical data: Three line dis3 line display, 500 memory space for interval, lap and play, 24 h time indicator with date, stop function 9 h, 59 finish times, file memory function, stop function 9 hours, min. & 59.99 sec., auto start function, stroke rate basis 3, 50 minutes and 59.99 seconds, direct computer connecmemory for up to 300 lap and split times, recall function tion via USB with upload software, displays the quickest, for stored times, splash-proof and shock-proof, 3 V lithium slowest and interval times. Dual time for pause and finish battery CR2032. times, pacer function, 3V lithium battery CR2032. 71 160 5802 Each 71 160 5903 Each

134

e Timer With Stopwatch

Measures times quickly and easily. Comes with an acoustic alarm and magnet for attaching to training equipment. Display can easily be read, count up and count down function. White, up to 99 min. and 59 seconds. Includes battery. LxW: 9x4.5 cm. 71 142 8302 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Stopwatches, Table Stopwatches Measuring Table Stopwatches

a

b

4 Countdown function with 2 times

4 ø 11 cm, for schools, sports and industry

b Hanhart “Mesotron” a Hanhart “PRISMA 200” Table Timer

Practical interval-up-down timer for use in schools, sports, industry and privately. Optimal stability, good ergonomically arranged parts. Large LCD display (two rows and function windows) makes functions easy to understand, times can be read easily and precisely. Digit height: 22/8 mm, ABS plastic casing, choice of 2 timers 1/10 sec or 1/100 min. Functions: start/stop/reset, addition, fly-back, count-

Table Stopwatch

Affordable, easy to read, quartz analogue table/wall stopwatch. Suitable for use in all areas e.g. schools, sports, laboratory down with adjustable alarm tone, 2 fully and industry. Fluorescent dots on face, ø 11 programmable timers with the option to cm. The ergonomic design means that this separate or collective start/stop applicaclock stands perfectly. Functions: start/ tion, repeat, manual or automatic, norstop/addition any number of times/reset. mal time display, time resolution can be Measures: 0-60 seconds, 0-60 minutes. switched to a) 999 min., 99/100 min., b) 9 hours, 59 min., 59 sec., 175x130x40/90 Runs for approx. 20 hours. 175x130x40/95 mm, 390 g, batteries: Mignon cell (AA) R6, mm, approx. 375 g including 1.5 V Mignon cell battery (AA). lasts approx. 1-2 years. 71 130 4507 Each 71 130 6705 Each

c Kienzle “E 8” Table Top Clock In a high quality strong aluminium housing with shockproof glass. Made in Germany. With black face and easy to see hands. The second hand is red and the minute hand is yellow. Mechanical, displays 1 second to 60 seconds, face ø 207 mm, HxW: 220x 209.5 mm. 71 151 1707 Each

Crown Stoppers f g

f Hanhart “Amigo” 4 from 0,000 to 9,999

d “Tally Counter” Hand Counter

(Unit counter) counts everything that needs to be counted, hand counter for 0 to 9,999, metal casing, nickel-plated. 71 130 5308 Each

e Hanhart Crown Stopwatch

The Classic Stopwatch

Universally used for ice hockey and field hockey, basketball, handball, football etc., 1/10 second pitch, 15 min. display time in small display field. 71 130 3403 Each

These are the most frequently used mechanical stopwatches. The professional anchor quality protects against dust and water due to the great care taken in its production, diamond cut metal housing (55 mm) with bow ring and g Hanhart “Felix” Stopwatch Technically simple and strong stopshock-proof precision mechanics. 1/10 second pitch, display period: 15 min. pin watch with many uses, shock proof, with lanyard, winder at the rear. lever watch, seven jewels. 71 130 3302 Each 71 130 5601 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

h Hanhart “Amigo Allsport” Stopwatch

An affordable mechanical addition stopwatch. Robust ABS housing with lanyard. 1/5 second pitch, 60 min. display time. 71 130 5500 Each

135


Marking Team Identification

e Double Race Numbers

With straps. Approx. 30x23/46 cm, printed numbers in black (digit height approx. 10 cm) on the chest and back. Without advertising. Made of 100% cotton. Minimum order = 10 items. Numbers: 1 or 2 digits, white 71 218 7701 Each

d Double Number Vest

For draping, with round piped body cut and tie cords. White vest printed with black numbers on the chest and back. Number height approx. 10 cm. 100 % cotton, size approx. 30x44/88cm. White, 1 or Numbers: 3 digits, white 2 digit numbers. 71 218 7714 Each 71 141 6901 Each Numbers: 1 or 2 digits, red Extra Charge 71 218 7802 Each For single colour, black advertising print Numbers: 1 or 2 digits, blue above the number on the chest and back. 71 218 7815 Each 71 141 7210 Each Numbers: 1 or 2 digits, green Set-up Costs for Printing 71 218 7828 Each

Great Value! a Sport-Thieme Team Vests

Fits well, available in five different colours for men, youth and bambinis. 100% polyamide. Bambini 71 156 9807-2 RedEach 71 156 9810-2 YellowEach 71 156 9823-2 GreenEach 71 156 9836-2 BlueEach 71 156 9849-2 OrangeEach Youth 71 106 3400-2 RedEach 71 106 3413-2 YellowEach 71 106 3426-2 GreenEach 71 106 3439-2 BlueEach 71 106 3442-2 OrangeEach

Buy Now!

Advertising Text

71 141 7223 Each

g

Extra Charge

For single colour advertising print on double identification numbers, single-sided, on chest or back. 71 141 7236 Each

Top Rated

sport-thieme.com

f Starting Numbers on Tear-free Paper

Made from non-tear Tyvek material (100% polyethylene), 160x225 mm, highly durable, for all weather conditions, white with Start Number Set, Made of g Tyvek with Advertising Print black numbers, height of numbers 7.6 cm, 71 199 7154  Price on request without safety pins. 71 199 7109 Set 1-100Each 71 199 7112 Set 1-250Each h Safety Pin Set 71 199 7125 Set 1-500Each For Tyvek starting numbers. 71 199 7141  Price for 1,000 71 199 7138 Set 1-1000Each

h

Men 71 106 2104-2 YellowEach 71 106 2117-2 GreenEach 71 106 2120-2 RedEach 71 106 2133-2 BlueEach 71 106 2146-2 OrangeEach

Numbers: 1 or 2 digits, yellow 71 218 7831 Each

i

j

j Team Sash with Velcro

i Team Sash

b Reversible Vests

This vest can be worn on both sides. Each side is a different colour. Very nice to wear, flexible, allows quick exchanges of players during training. Simple to wash, very strong. 100% polyester. Adult size. 71 106 2407-2 Blue/green/navyEach 71 106 2410-2 Yellow/red/marineEach 

136

c “Ordner� (Steward) Vests

A must have for events such as football games, concerts, competitions, etc. Approx. 42 cm wide and 60 cm long, 100% polyester, with side straps. Fluorescent yellow with black print of ORDNER on front and back. 71 221 2106-1 Each

Fastener

Sash, 100% polypropylene, ecofriendly, approx. 4 cm wide. Children, approx. 50 (100) cm long 71 164 0801 RedEach 71 164 0814 YellowEach 71 164 0827 GreenEach 71 164 0830 BlueEach 71 164 0843 BlackEach

Sash, 100% polypropylene, eco-friendly, approx. 4 cm wide. Children, approx. 50 (100) cm long 71 165 0509 RedEach 71 165 0512 YellowEach 71 165 0525 GreenEach 71 165 0538 BlueEach 71 165 0541 BlackEach

Adults, approx. 60 (120) cm long 71 164 1006 BlackEach 71 164 1019 RedEach 71 164 1022 YellowEach 71 164 1035 GreenEach 71 164 1048 BlueEach

Adults, approx. 60 (120) cm long 71 165 0600 RedEach 71 165 0613 YellowEach 71 165 0626 GreenEach 71 165 0639 BlueEach 71 165 0642 BlackEach

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Starting

Starting, Measuring, Marking Measuring 4 With siren

a Hand Megaphone

Max output 12 W. Will reach up to 500 m in open air, approx. 32 cm, 1 kg. Source: 8 Mignon cell (UM 3) batteries. Batteries not included. 71 114 6309-1 Each

Also take a look at:

More megaphones on page 180

b Starting Clapboard

Good acoustic effect, visible from a long distance. Using this starting clapboard allows you to take accurate times for all runs. No club or school should be without it. 71 130 2400-1 Each

4 Good acoustic effect 4 Visible form a long distance 4 With safety latch to prevent unintended opening

Measuring f RollFix Easy Measuring Wheel

Measuring Tape in Case

c Steel Measuring Tape

• Highly shockproof plastic case • Easy to use thanks to its large winder with resting position

in Holder

• Holder constructed to an ergonomic design • Can be changed to suit left handed or right handed people in seconds • Hard-wearing guide mechanism • Resting position for the tape‘s starting ring and winder • Made of steel, varnished white Rust-proof steel, varnished white, 13 mm wide, cm measurement on one side, with Flextop film of transparent highly flexible plastic (prevents breaking at the start of the tape). 71 130 3038 50 mEach 71 130 3041 100 mEach

d Fibreglass Tape

Complies with EU class II = (tolerance of ±2.3 mm in 10 m). Made from extruded fibreglass reinforced plastic, 13 mm wide with cm measurements on one side. Rustproof, unbreakable and very easy to read. Up to 25 m in length supplied in case, 50 m in length supplied on frame. 71 130 3054 10 mEach 71 130 3067 20 mEach 71 130 3070 25 mEach 71 130 3083 50 mEach

e Steel Tape

White varnish. Made from rustproof steel, 13 mm wide with cm measurements on one side, Flextop film of transparent and highly flexible plastic (which prevents breakage at the start of the tape). Low wear and easy to read. 71 226 1414 10 mEach 71 226 1427 20 mEach 71 226 1430 25 mEach 71 226 1443 50 mEach

A handy measuring device with fold away handle bar for easy transportation. Indispensable for measuring playing fields, running tracks, cross country and obstacle courses, etc. The display shows the precise distance (in cm). Measuring range up to 99,9999.99 m. It is possible to measure both forwards and backwards. 71 130 1218 Each

Marking

g Marking Tape

For marking off sections, strong h Floor Marking Tape This marking tape will stick to all white tape, smooth floors as long as they are dry and 5 cm wide, roll = 100 m. 71 129 9713 Roll free from dust and grease. It is especially supple and facilitates curve marking without any folds. Approx. five rolls are necessary for marking tennis and games courts, Also take a look at: schools badminton requires approx. three Floor Markings, on page 128 rolls. The durable tape can be removed without any problems leaving no sticky residue. Roll length 33 m, 50 mm wide.

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

i Barrier Tape/ Marking Roll 71 130 1104 71 130 1159 71 130 1162 71 130 1133 71 130 1146

WhiteRoll RedRoll YellowRoll BlackRoll BlueRoll

This environmentally friendly polyethylene foil roll is easy to use. Comes in a strong roll out cardboard box meaning it is always ready to use. The 80 mm/500 m roll comes in double-sided, easy to see red and white sloping stripes. 71 130 1306 Each

137


Marking Marking Marking Cones and Plates a

Markers

c 4 Set of 10

d

LxWxH: 205x205x370 mm

Top Rated

sport-thieme.com

f

33 cm

23 cm

Indestructible and indispensable aids for marking out games and play areas. Very practical multi-purpose marking and barrier cones. Made of break proof polyethylene. Available in red and yellow signal colours. Available in different sizes, they also stack well. Ideal for sports halls or outdoor areas. The fully galvanised marking plates are also particularly useful for marking distances outdoors for all throwing sports. All products are made from very strong, all weather material.

d Marking Cones c 4 Set of 10

LxWxH: 130x130x230 mm

a Marking Cone

130x130x230 mm 71 130 0664 RedEach 71 130 0651 YellowEach 205x205x370 mm 71 130 0677 RedEach 71 130 0680 YellowEach

b

e 4 Set of 50 Sport-Thieme® Saturn Ring

b Luminous red with white stripes. Patent 19820022. The ideal traic Marking Cones 230x230x350 mm, without numbers ning aid with many uses, especially use10 cones, 2 of each colour. Orange, 71 130 1029 Each ful for jumping, agility and speed training. yellow, red, blue and green. 290x290x500 mm, without numbers Fits all cones. 71 130 0635 130x130x230 mm  Set of 10 71 130 1032 Each 71 130 0505-1 Each 71 130 0622 205x205x370 mm  Set of 10

Set

e Marking Cones

The practical games and training aid for schools, clubs and leisure sports. 50 cones in five different colours: green, yellow, red, blue and pink, ø 7.5 cm, height 7.5 cm, 30 g. 71 130 0824  Set of 50

f Marking Plate

Triangular, stainless steel, 100% weatherproof. 71 130 0202 Each

g Numbers for Marking Cones

Self-adhesive numbers for attaching to marking triangles and cones. Digit height 10 cm, numbers ascending from 5, 10, 15 to 75. 71 130 0648 Set

g h Saturn Ring Set I

Consisting of: • 12 Saturn rings • 12 marking cones, 38 cm high • 12 gym bars, 100 cm long 71 130 0518 Set

i Saturn Ring Set II

Consisting of: • 6 Saturn rings • 6 marking cones, 50 cm high • 6 gymnastics bars, 100 cm long 71 130 0521 Set

Also take a look at:

• Information on Saturn Rings, on page 130 • Gymnastics Bars, on page 291

j 4 Set of 40

15 cm

l 4 Set of 30

Marking Cones and Domes

Practical training aids for schools, clubs and leisure sports. Made from shockproof plastic, easy to carry, no risk of injury, quick to set up and put away.

ø 30 cm

j Marking Discs

ø 19 cm, 5 cm high, 40 in 4 different colours on 1 stack and transport holder. 71 130 0808  Set of 40

k Marking Domes

ø 20 cm, 8.5 cm high, 40 saucers in 4 different colours on a carrying bar. 71 130 0811  Set of 40

Caps l Marking Made from durable plastic, with 4

k 4 Set of 40

138

recesses that can be used as bar holders creating mini training hurdles. 30 caps in 3 different colours with a practical carrying stand. Height 15 cm, ø 30 cm. 71 130 0909  Set of 30

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Boundary Poles, Marking Flags Marking

Sets

c

Buy Now!

c

c

b ø 50 mm

a 4 Articulated joint 4 Very flexible 4 No risk of injury 4 ø 50 mm

a Safety Boundary Pole

With articulated joint of particularly thick-walled plastic. The special joint made from stainless steel means that the post can be moved in all directions. Once the pressure has been released the post returns to its original upright position. The risk of accidents and injuries is virtually eliminated. White, ø 50, insertion area ø 30 mm, 175 cm long. Supplied with a ground socket and protective cover, without flag. 71 111 6410 Each

e

d ø 28 mm

h

Good to know

Our boundary poles and flags are extremely weather-proof, non-corrosive and perfectly suited for versatile indoor and outdoor use.

Don’t forget to order:

• Referee’s Supplies, on page 131 • Marking Paints, on page 141 • Marking Carts, on page 140-142 • Football Training, on page 65-69

Boundary Pole Accessories

b ø 50 mm

b Sport-Thieme® “All-Round” Pole

Made of flexible synthetic material, is therefore very safe and versatile. Weatherproof and colour-fast. The all-round pole can be fixed to the ground in the right spot with the supplied socket. Length above ground approx. 150 cm. The pole can also be installed in the all-round base. Approx. 160 cm long, ø 50 mm. Without flag. 71 111 7224 Each

c Flag for Border Poles ø 50 mm

4 For firm and hard grounds

For boundary poles up to ø 50 mm a+c. Approx. 40x40 cm. 100% polyester. 71 111 6306 YellowEach 71 111 6319 Red/whiteEach

d Sport-Thieme® “Club” Boundary Pole

Made from plastic with spike and protective cap, white, 1.65 m long, ø 28 mm. Without flag. 71 111 7602 Each

e Flag for Boundary Poles

For all boundary poles up to ø 30 mm d. Approx. 40x40 cm. 100% polyester. 71 111 6205 YellowEach 71 111 6218 Red/whiteEach

® f Sport-Thieme Ground

Support for Boundary Poles

These innovative ground supports enable you to firmly fix your poles into almost any ground. The bottom spike is simply hammered into the ground and it is ready for use. Suitable for poles of up to 30 mm diameter. Plastic poles with a diameter of 50 mm are placed over the socket. 71 111 7716 Each

g Sport-Thieme® “All-Round” Base Plate

Marking made quick and easy - just set up this base, insert the pole and you are ready. Its heavy weight (approx. 2.5 kg) and large footprint of approx. 26.5 cm ensure a stable stand of the “All-round” base. It is compatible with “All-round” poles and all wooden or plastic poles with a diameter of up to 28 mm and ø 50 mm. 10 year guarantee! 71 111 7703 Each

Sets

f 4 Available for wooden and plastic poles

h Sport-Thieme

“All-Round” Ground Sockets

Made from plastic, approx. 25 cm long. Compatible with the “All-round” boundary poles b. 71 111 7240 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

i Sport-Thieme® “All-Round” Boundary Pole Set

g h

The set consists of: • 6 “All-round” poles, ø 50 mm, white or yellow, incl. ground sockets d • 6 flags red/white or yellow e j New! Tilting Boundary White pole, red/white flag Pole Set 71 111 7631 Set The set consists of: • 6 tilting boundary poles ø 50 mm, White pole, yellow flag white, including ground sockets a 71 111 7657 Set • 6 flags white/red or yellow c Yellow pole, red/white flag 71 111 7107 Red/white flag 71 111 7660 Set Set 71 111 7110 Yellow flag Yellow pole, yellow flag 71 111 7673 Set Set

139


Marking Line Marking Machines Set

4 Really easy to operate 4 Removeable sprayer for marking individual areas

a Sport-Thieme® “Line Up”

b Sport-Thieme® “Line Up”

The set consists of: • 1 line marking machine b • 20 kg marking paint m 71 111 5055 Set

Includes transparent paint container for 11 litres of marking paint and plastic hand pump for manual compression. • Frame made from high-quality aluminium tubing • With pressure gauge and safety valve • Supplied with 3 smooth running, inflatable pneumatic tyres, ø approx. 26x8.5 cm

Line Marking Machine Set

Great Value!

Buy Now!

Line Marking Machine

• Filling quantity scale on the paint container - filling quantity always visible The required injection pressure of approx. 3 bar for the marking process is produced by operating the hand pump. In order to mark difficult locations, e.g. the penalty spot, the spraying device with the spray tube can be taken out of the mounting bracket. Build up the pressure in the container and away you go. 71 111 5042 Each

New!

4 The paint does not need 4 The paint can be stored in to be mixed prior to the container after marking application 4 Required pressure is gene4 Marking can be begin rated by operating the as soon as the water hand pump 4 The  required pressure is gene4 Easy to use and paint canisters 4 Paint can easily be mixed rated by pushing the trolley 4 Easy to clean have been attached in the container thanks to  marking is achieved 4 Paint is applied with 4 Consistent 4 Quick and easy marking stirring blade at all times by means of roller system the even build-up of pressure g Sport-Thieme® “Stadium” ® Line Marking Machine i New! Sport-Thieme “Easy ® Sport-Thieme “Club” Line Line” Line Marking Machine Patented line marking machine with intege rated stirring blade and plastic hand pump Sturdy and weatherproof machine with an c Sport-Thieme® “Roll Liner” Marking Machine Line Marking Machine electric pump system for marking sports Sturdy, weatherproof machine for marking for creating pressure. Line marking trolley with roller system for paint application to lawns. Fill the container with paint and away you go. • Sturdy frame made from powder-coated steel tubing • With 4 inflatable pneumatic tyres, ø approx. 26x8.5 cm • Steel paint container for approx. 15 litres of marking paint • Easy and reliable The paint is applied to lawns via the roller system. Paint intensity and consumption are controlled via spring-loaded, adjustable brushes. After completion of the marking process, the remaining paint can be returned to the original container. Containers and rollers can be cleaned quickly and easily with clean water. 71 111 5404 Each

• Sturdy frame made from powder-coated steel tubing • Maintains a long operating pressure • Paint can be stored in the container • With 4 inflatable pneumatic tyres, ø approx. 26x8.5 cm • Height of steering handle bar can be adjusted • For approx. 11 litres of marking paint • Includes paint filling funnel and filter The hand pump is provided with a stirring blade, you can mix the paint in the container by operating the hand pump. At the same time, build up the required operating pressure of approx. 4 bar. After completion of the marking process, the paint can remain in the container, emptying is not necessary. 71 111 5710 Each

Set

Set

Set

f Sport-Thieme® “Club”

® h Sport-Thieme “Stadium”

The set consists of: • 1 “Roll Liner” line marking machine c • 20 kg marking paint m 71 111 5417 Set

Set consists of: • 1 “Club” line marking machine e • 20 kg marking paint m 71 186 5325 Set

The set consists of: • 1 “Stadium” line marking machine g • 20 kg marking paint m 71 306 5831 Set

Line Marking Set

grounds. As soon as the water and paint canisters have been attached, marking can begin. • Powder-coated, steel tubular frame • With 4 pneumatic tyres, ø approx. 26x8.5 cm • Adjustable line width from 50 to 120 mm • Battery and battery charger are included • Includes a colour funnel and sieve The wet marking machine has 1 plastic container with a capacity of approx. 19 litres of water. It can easily be removed for emptying or cleaning out. The required pressure of max. 9 bar comes from the electric pump (12 V, 2.1 A). The transported volume is approx. 5.5 litres per min. The pump can be turned on and off using the convenient button on the handle. 71 116 6301 Each

Set

® d Sport-Thieme “Roll

Liner” Line Marking Set

140

sports fields with automatic pumping compression. • Sturdy frame made from powder-coated steel tubing • With 4 inflatable tyres, ø approx. 26x8.5 cm • Height of steering handle bar can be adjusted • 2 containers for approx. 20 litres of marking paint • Easy to handle and precise line guide • Includes paint filling funnel and filter The required spray pressure (approx. 2 to 2.5 bar) for the marking process is produced by a robust aluminium gear pump, “powered” through pushing the trolley. The even build-up of pressure guarantees consistent marking. 71 186 5309 Each

Line Marking Set

j

New! Sport-Thieme®

“Easy Line” Line Marking Set

The set consists of: • 1 “Easy” line marking machine i • 20 kg marking paint m 71 114 3603 Set

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Markieren Marking Paint

Great Product!

mn 4 Also available in

4 The ideal marking machine for all lawns and hard sports areas 4 Developed by experts

premium quality

“Champ” k 4 Fill with the mixed paint and start marking 4 Quick to clean 4 Electrical pump 4 For 26 litres of marking paint

Great Value!

Buy Now!

k Sport-Thieme® “Champ” Line Marking Machine

Sturdy and weatherproof machine for sports field marking with electrical pump system. The spraying pressure is created by rechargeable high-performance batteries. • Sturdy frame made of powder-coated steel tubing • With 4 inflatable tyres, ø approx. 26x8.5 cm • Height of steering handle bars can be adjusted • Easy to clean • 2 containers for approx. 26 litres of marking paint • Includes paint filling funnel and filter The required spraying pressure of approx. 4.8 bar for the marking process is produced by an electrical pump (12 V, 2.1 A). The transportable volume amounts to approx. 2.6 l/min. A switch on the handle turns the pump off and on. 71 306 5802 Each

Set

Line Marking Set

The set consists of: • 1 “Champ” line marking machine k • 20 kg marking paint m 71 306 5815 Set

In contrast to other dispersion paint on the market, our marking paint is free from solvents. Solvents and hardening agents block up and destroy the spraying mechanism and also affect the grass.

Paint “Extra White”

This marking paint is specially designed for grass pitches. It can be used in all line marking trolleys currently available on the market. • Environmentally  friendly marking paint for sports fields • 1 canister = 20 kg • Mixing  ratio 1:5 • Improved  formula with greater opacity • Top quality – very economical The paint is non-toxic for humans, animals and the environment. It has a high degree of opacity and luminosity and is quick-drying at temperatures from 5°C. You‘ll require approx. 1.5-2 kg to mark an average sports field. Depending on weather conditions and grass growth, the markings are durable and visible for up to 4 weeks. 71 111 4906 Each

Expert Tip for k

l Sport-Thieme© “Champ”

Marking Paint

m Sport-Thieme® Line Marking

Time saver: Fill one container with the marking paint and the second container with water for cleaning the hoses, pump and sprayer at a later stage. Another time saver: Use the liquid that you have from cleaning the hoses and tank for the next time you are marking.

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

Accessories for cgk

o Replacement Spray Head n Sport-Thieme®

“Premium”Line Marking Paint

For “Stadium”, “Club” and “Champ” line marking machines. 71 186 5312 Each

Accessories for g

Same as the “Extra White” paint but with p Replacement Pump 30% more opacity and longer durability. Replacement pump for “Club” line Mixing ratio 1:6. 1 canister holds 20 kg. marking machines. 71 111 4935 Canister 71 186 5338 Each

b“Line Up” c“Stadium” e“Roll Liner” k“Champ” g“Club” i“Easy Line” Model With pressure pump manual manual – – – electric With suction pump – – – electric manual – Roller feed – – • – – – Paint container 11 litres 12 litres 15 litres 2x 13 litres 2x 10 litres 19 litres Line width 5-12 cm 5-12 cm 10 cm 3-12 cm 5-12 cm 5-12 cm Wheels 3 4 2 4 4 4 Great ct! Produ Net weight 5 kg 14 kg 20 kg 25 kg 25 kg 25 kg Special features aluminium with stirring blade easy to easy smooth and conti- no mixing frame in paint container use to clean nuous pressure required Product code 71 111 5042 71 111 5710 71 111 5404 71 306 5802 71 186 5309 71 111 5723 Price Each Each Each Each Each Each

141


Marking Dry Marking Machines Dry Marking Machines

Dry marking machines are equipped with brushes to be used with chalk, gypsum or lime. The innovative slit spreader guarantees exact and even marking lines. New: All marking machines are powder-coated and are therefore better protected against rust and corrosion.

c 4 50 litres

4 With vibrating sieve for controlled dosage 4 Adjustable line width of 50-120 mm

a 4 35 litres

4 With round brush

b 4 With round brush

4 35 litres 4 Optional stirrer

a “Liga 1” Manual Dry Marking Machine

Accessories

Dry marking machine with 1 guiding wheel and 35 litre capacity. • Metal marking machine with lid • With 2 solid rubber wheels, ø approx. 25 cm • Height adjustable guiding bars • With a hand lever to activate and deactivate spreading • Line width 120 mm • With perlon round brush • Approx. 17 kg 71 111 4704 Each

with its integrated stirrer. The spreading material is moved around from below in the conical container, is not given a chance to settle and therefore won‘t stick to the bottom. 71 111 5606 Without stirrerEach 71 111 5619 With stirrerEach

b “Bundesliga” Dry Marking Machine

c “Soccer” Dry Marking Machine

Dry line marking machine with 2 guiding wheels and a 35 litre capacity, suitable for use with sports ground chalk, lime or gypsum. • Metal marking machine with lid • With 2 solid rubber wheels, ø approx. 25 cm • Height adjustable guide bars • With a hand lever to activate and deactivate spreading • Line width 120 mm • With perlon round brush • Approx. 19 kg As almost all spreading material can absorb air moisture, we recommend the ‚‘Bundesliga‘‘ line marking machine

Markers

For all marking machines

d

e f

The professional dry marking machine with a 50 litre capacity and adjustable line widths from 50-120 mm. • Metal marking machine with lid d Replacement Brush • With 4 large, air filled wheels, ø approx. 26 cm 12 cm wide. • Navigation guide 71 111 3903 Each • Adjustable guide bar • With a hand lever to activate and deactivate spreading e Replacement Sieve • Adjustable line width from 50-120 mm Adjustable. • With perlon round brush and innovative vibrating sieve 71 111 6540 Each for controlled dosage • Approx. 28 kg f Sieve Cog Wheel 71 111 5101 Each 71 111 6566 Each

4 For permanent markings of sports grounds 4 Will naturally blend in with the lawn

g Plifix® Markers

Plifix® Good to know

Can be used on many sports grounds where there are no permanent markings, e.g. American football, hockey, athletics, throwing disciplines, etc.

142

Synthetic grass markers for marking sports grounds. Quick and easy marking An innovative product that ensures the football pitch is always ready to be marked. No preparation work required after the seasonal break, no errors when re-measuring. The Plifix® “screw” with the tufts is 17 cm long and is inserted in the playing surface, where it sits permanently and safely, always clearly visible - no risk of injury for the players. 1 Plifix set (25 markers) with an insertion rod, will be sufficient for one football pitch. 71 111 6700 WhiteSet 71 111 6739 redSet 71 111 6742 YellowSet

25x Plifix = basic ground marking

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Transport Trolleys Interiors f

26 cm

d

4 Collapsible 4 For approx. 20 size 5 balls

e 62 cm

62 94 cm

cm

4 Stackable, make full use of the height of the room 53 cm

69

10

year

guarantee

cm

90 Litre capacity! 72x42x30 cm, robust and stackable!

5

year guarantee

d Ball Carrier

31.5 cm

Collapsible transport and storage carrier for balls. The ideal “training partner” as a collecting basket. Approx. 62x62x84 cm, sufficient for approx. 20 (size 5) balls, 168 litres. 71 130 8701-1 Each

Buy Now!

a Sport-Thieme®

52

cm

Set 80 cm

Made of high quality polypropylene, LxWxH: 72x42x30 cm. 5 year guarantee! 71 186 4700 RedEach 71 186 4713 YellowEach 71 186 4726 BlueEach 71 186 4739 GreenEach

Sport-Thieme® Storage Boxes

90 Litre Storage Box

b Sport-Thieme®

Storage Box Lid

Made from polypropylene. Five year guarantee. 71 186 4742 RedEach 71 186 4755 YellowEach 71 186 4768 BlueEach 71 186 4771 GreenEach

Set

Box, Set of 4 c Storage Consisting of:

• 4x 90 litre boxes • 4 lids in green, blue, yellow and red. Five year guarantee. 71 186 4784 Set

81

72 cm

The storage box can be used for storing your items and create order and keeping track of your sports, game, leisure, home, workplace and warehouse items. • Stack away saving space • Handy and robust • Environmentally friendly, can be recycled • Size in litres displayed on the side Product details: • Made from high-quality, special plastic • Special edge reinforcement • Smooth inside, easy to clean • Edges with safety ventilation • Size in litres displayed on the side • Lid can be clicked closed and fully removed Dimensions and weight: • Outer dimensions (WxHxL): approx. 80x31.5x52 cm • Approx. 3.2 kg • Can hold up to approx. 150 kg

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

e Stackable Ball Trolley

cm

f “Classic-Rollbox N°5”

Equipment Transport Trolley

A must have for small sports halls and equipment rooms. Electro-galvanised steel frame construction (ø 22 mm), close mesh (50x50 mm). Plastic bottom shelf with metal bars to reinforce the frame, with 2 guide castors and 2 fixed wheels for easier transportation. Maximum capacity: 500 kg. Can be locked with a padlock if required. Capacity 990 litres. WxHxD: 72x180x81 cm. Only for dry areas. Contents and padlock not included. 10 year guarantee! 71 131 1769 With 1 shelfEach 71 131 1798 With 2 shelvesEach

For all areas where there is little storage space. This trolley uses height: the trolleys can be stacked on top of each other. Each class or group can have their own trolley. Also suitable for pre-schools. Steel wire construction, lacquered blue with 4 easy moving castors. Overall dimensions WxHxD: 69x94x53 cm, supports approx. 30 kg, capacity of 245 litres. Con- g Shelves For equipment transport trolley f. tents not included. Only for use in dry 10 year guarantee. areas. 10 year guarantee. 71 131 1512 Each 71 131 1772 Each

h Sport-Thieme® Wall Storage Bracket

Space saving, sturdy steel rod construction for storing horizontal bars and volleyball posts against the wall. Each rack can store 2 posts clearly arranged. Posts not included. • With 4 racks - approx. 111 cm long • With 6 racks - approx. 169 cm long 10 year guarantee! 71 131 6302 With 4 racksPair 71 131 6315 With 6 racksPair

10

year

guarantee

143


Your Mobile Storage Giants Objekteinrichtung Plenty of room for your equipment: with a capacity of up to 1,580 litres and a height of 1.70 m!

Shelved trolleys “Standard” and “Maxi” for dry areas

Top Attachment

c

a a “Standard” Shelved Trolley

140 cm

The “Standard” shelved trolley creates order in every equipment room. 3 height adjustable mesh shelves with front panels offer ample space for small and big balls. You can divide up the trolley as you like. Tightly meshed, high gloss, galvanised steel frame with 50 mm pressed steel caging. Lockable design with two double doors and catch. With 4 easy running guiding castors ø 125 mm. 1,300 litre capacity. Suitable for dry areas. • Without railing, WxHxD: 150x140x62 cm • With railing, WxHxD: 150x156x62 cm The model with the 16 cm high railing provides additional storage space for marking cones and other small items. Without contents and padlock. 10 year guarantee! Without additional top attachment 71 131 1525 Each

62

cm

150 cm

10

year

guarantee

Including additional top attachment 71 131 1554 Each

125 cm/ 150 cm

170 cm

15 cm

Railing

62

cm

b “Maxi” Shelved Trolley

150 cm

10

year

guarantee

Accessories for ab

The same as the “Standard” shelved trolley a but with 4 shelves and a capacity of 1,580 litres. Only suitable for dry areas. • Without railing, WxHxD: 150x170x62 cm • With railing, WxHxD: 150x186x62 cm The model with the 16 cm high railing offers additional storage space for marking cones and other small items. Without conc Railing for Shelved Trolley tents and padlock. 10 year guarantee! For the “Standard” and “Maxi” Without additional top attachment models. This is an attachment that sits on 71 131 1538 Each top and increases the capacity of the trolley, 16 cm high. Including additional top attachment 71 131 1567 Each 71 131 1541 Each

144

8 cm

m/14 125 c

62 cm

cm

10

year

guarantee

4 Shelves can be adjusted to any height Pool Shelf Trolley 4 Shelved trolley suitable d Swimming with Railing for wet areas For storing pool products. Thanks to its wave-effect mesh, the water can easily drip off allowing the trolley to dry quickly. The 3 shelves can be adjusted to any height. Its practical sliding doors enable you to access your items quickly. Enclosed design in aluminium. Lockable. Capacity of 1,376 litres, WxHxD: 148x150x62 cm. Suitable for wet areas. Contents and padlock not included. 10 year guarantee! 71 130 9906 Each

e “Mini” Aluminium Caged Trolley

As item d but with 2 adjustable shelves and a capacity of 970 litres. WxHxD 125x125x62 cm. Suitable for wet areas. Contents, railing and padlock not included. 10 year guarantee! 71 130 9977 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Objekteinrichtung

! r e n n i w l a e Ar e®

Sport-Thiem Variety

Get Tidy!

rt Balls for almost every spo can be found from page 4!

with Lockable, mobile and ing ov an extra flap for rem items more easily!

!

Great Value

Buy Now!

rantee

10 year gua

Top Rated

sport-thieme.com

Easy to set up Folds away saving space

Extra easy ball removal for children

me® “Jumbo XXL”

rt-Thie a Sponsp ort Trolley

104 cm

Tra trolley is a must have for The “Jumbo XXL” transport ul piece of equipment for usef ly real A s. all sports hall storage of balls and other g nisin orga and transporting l construction with stee hed mes e small items. Clos able folding lid and lock a , ions sect s additional cros Comes with an addiors. cast e guid four easy running can reach down to ren child ller sma tional flap so that es. When not filled, selv them s item the bottom and get saves space. h whic flat, ed the trolley can be fold Overall dimensions when Will hold approx. 100 kg. x62.5 cm, dimensions assembled (WxHxD): 100x104 100x100x20 cm. Can be when folded down (WxHxD): 600 litres. Contents and locked if necessary. Capacity suitable for dry areas. padlock not included. Only 10 year guarantee! Each 71 131 1785  ety Padlock b Saf ent trolleys. Made For locking ball and equipm

. steel shackle and two keys from brass with hardened Each  3 158 71 131

More Storage Systems

.5

100 cm

for Balls:

62

cm

m

www.sport-thieme.co

145 .sport-thieme.com 7 181-543 · www +49 535 Weitere Informationen Seite 631 · Tel. 05357–18181 · www.sport-thieme.de/objekt Phone:

145


Sport-Thieme速 Tailor-Made Changing Benches!

All changing benches on this double page are resistant to corrosion Objekteinrichtung and available in all lengths!

40 cm

Model: single sided compliant with DIN 7917

a 4 Can  be made to any length you need!

45 cm

Model A

a Sport-Thieme速

Changing Room Bench

DIN 7917, Model A. Frame made from varnished steel tubing, seat slats have a natural varnish. 10 year guarantee. 71 131 3749 Without shoe shelf per m 71 131 3752 With shoe shelf per m

Accessories for a

Optional shoe shelf

10

year

guarantee

Hook Rail b Wall-Mounted For above benches, can be placed at

any height, approx. 10 cm wide, 4 double hooks per metre. 10 year guarantee! 71 131 5602  per m

Spacers c Wall-Mounted b

For hook rails . Made from metal, colour lacquered. Comes with fixings. Each metre of rail requires 2 holders. For lengths over 200 cm, holders must be placed every 150 cm. 10 year guarantee! 71 131 5615 Each

Front hook rail

d 4 Can be made to any length you need!

Model B

16 cm

Model: single sided with backrest compliant with DIN 7917 165 cm

Backrest

45 cm

35 cm

速 d Sport-Thieme Single Sided

Changing Bench with Back Rest

Optional shoe shelf

10 146

year

guarantee

Complies with DIN 7917 Model B. Base frame made from varnished steel tubing. Seat slats, back rest and hook rails are pine wood with a natural varnish. The hook rail has double coat hangers. 10 year guarantee. 71 131 3778 Without shoe shelf per m 71 131 3765 With shoe shelf per m

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


The right choice for your changing room

Objekteinrichtung

All changing benches come with rounded edges, manufactured in compliance with DIN 7917. Very comfortable to sit on – 10 year guarantee! Sport-Thieme Changing Benches

Sport-Thieme benches are modular systems and can be made to any length. • Dimensions and designs according to DIN 7917 • Suitable for dry rooms, corrosion resistant • Individually manufactured to order • Delivered pre-assembled for easy transport Product details: • Base frame made from square steel tubing with end caps • Silver lacquered (additional charge of 10% for other colours) • Seat slats, back rest and hook rail made from bonded wood • With rounded edges • Transparent varnish, with natural wood grain • Very comfortable to sit on • Available with or without shoe shelf • Hook rail with plastic double hooks Bevelling We can supply your Sport-Thieme bench

Front hook rail

e 4 Can be made to any length you need!

With back rest on both sides

Bevel

with bevelled edges on request. Pre-assembled seat slats, back rest and hook rail All changing benches are delivered fully assembled which saves time on site.

Do you already have the plans for your changing rooms but do not yet know how you want to arrange them? Just send us your floor plan with dimensions, including doors, windows and radiators and we will be more than happy to help you decide where to place the changing benches and will gladly provide you with a personal quotation. Contact us! We will advise you free of charge:

Phone: +49 5357 181-543

10

year

Model C

Design 1: double sided with back rest compliant with DIN 7917

35 cm

45 cm

More Changing Room Benches

Rosconi changing room benches – modern, functional design, extremely high quality and attractive appearance, resulting in a perfect changing room system. Available in many designs. Can be made to suit your space requirements. Please request our special brochure.

Optional with shoe shelf

guarantee

165 cm

Design Service

Front hook rail

f 4 Can be made to any length you need!

® e Sport-Thieme Double Sided

Changing Bench with Backrest

10

year Complies with DIN 7917 Model C. Base frame made from varnished steel guarantee tubing. Seat slats, backrest and hook rails are pine wood with a natural varnish. The ® hook rail has double coat hangers. 10 year f Sport-Thieme Wallguarantee. Mounted Changing Bench 71 131 3794 Without shoe shelf per m For fixing directly to the wall, the supports 71 131 3781 With shoe shelf per m are made of steel. The bench and back

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

40 cm

rests are made of wood. Detailed assembly instructions are enclosed. 10 year guarantee. 71 131 3736  per m

147


Changing Benches

10

a Pine

Version 1: for dry areas Steel frame with wooden slats.

on all products on this page

Sypro Wolf® Changing Bench System

4 Stable frame with height adjustable sliders 4 Available with or without shoe shelf

Model A

year

guarantee

45 cm

35 c m

Powder-coated steel

There are many spaces where changing benches must offer something special to meet the particular requirements. The Norm Bench System from Sypro Wolf has been developed as a construction kit and is available in 1.01, 1.50 and 2.0 m lengths. Product details: • Sturdy frame made from square steel tubing with height-adjustable sliders for ground levelling • Lacquered in light grey or anthracite • With bench slats and back rest made from wood, aluminium or stainless steel • Clothes rail with fixed hidden coat hooks • Hook spacing approx. 32 cm • Available with or without shoe shelf Easy to assemble All benches are delivered disassembled in a box, making it easier to transport the benches, even through narrow hallways and stairwells. The benches are easily assembled and no special tools are required. When assembled, there is no limit to the number of benches that can be con-

nected together. Version 1: for dry areas Square steel tubing, powder coated (RAL 7016 anthracite). Wooden seat slats and back rest, clear varnished with natural wood grain effect. Version 2: for damp areas Square steel tubing, powder coated (RAL 7016 anthracite). Coated aluminium seat slats and back rest. This bench is resistant against mould and bacteria and can withstand moisture. Version 3: for wet areas and outdoor use Stainless steel frame, powder coated (RAL 7035 light grey). Seat slats and back rest made from powder coated aluminium. • 100% weatherproof • Salt water resistant • Resistant to mould and bacteria • Perfect for wet areas and outdoor use

Model B

Version 2: for damp areas Steel frame with aluminium slats.

b 165 cm

Model C

Version 3: for wet areas Stainless steel frame with aluminium slats. 165 cm

33.5 cm

c

Aluminium

33.5 69.5

Powdercoated steel

Made from aluminium with 3 hooks per metre. Suitable for changing bench models B and C on this page. 71 131 5628  per m

Dry areas

With shoe shelf

Damp areas Wet areas

148

Without shoe shelf With shoe shelf Without shoe shelf With shoe shelf

Stainless steel

a Changing Bench

b Changing Bench

c Changing Bench

10 year guarantee! Shipping weight: 1.01 m: 10 kg 1.50 m: 15 kg 2.00 m: 18 kg

10 year guarantee! Shipping weight: 1.01 m: 19 kg 1.50 m: 26 kg 2.00 m: 33 kg

10 year guarantee! Shipping weight: 1.01 m: 33 kg 1.50 m: 45 kg 2.00 m: 53 kg

Model A

Length Without shoe shelf

cm

Aluminium

d Individual Hook Racks d

1.01 m 71 226 3120 Each 71 226 3159 Each 71 226 3250 Each 71 226 3234 Each 71 226 3351 Each 71 226 3335 Each

1.50 m 71 226 3117 Each 71 226 3146 Each 71 226 3247 Each 71 226 3221 Each 71 226 3348 Each 71 226 3322 Each

Model B

2.00 m 71 226 3104 Each 71 226 3133 Each 71 226 3218 Each 71 226 3205 Each 71 226 3319 Each 71 226 3306 Each

cm

1.01 m 71 226 3423 Each 71 226 3452 Each 71 226 3508 Each 71 226 3537 Each 71 226 3609 Each 71 226 3638 Each

1.50 m 71 226 3410 Each 71 226 3449 Each 71 226 3511 Each 71 226 3540 Each 71 226 3612 Each 71 226 3641 Each

Model C

2.00 m 71 226 3407 Each 71 226 3436 Each 71 226 3524 Each 71 226 3553 Each 71 226 3625 Each 71 226 3654 Each

1.01 m 71 226 3700 Each 71 226 3739 Each 71 226 3801 Each 71 226 3830 Each 71 226 3902 Each 71 226 3931 Each

1.50 m 71 226 3713 Each 71 226 3742 Each 71 226 3814 Each 71 226 3843 Each 71 226 3915 Each 71 226 3944 Each

2.00 m 71 226 3726 Each 71 226 3755 Each 71 226 3827 Each 71 226 3856 Each 71 226 3928 Each 71 226 3957 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Sets

Diving Goggles and Snorkles Swimming For Children

For Teens

For Adults

4 In blue or pink

New!

a Aqua Lung® “Reef”

Children's Snorkelling Set

A mask and snorkel set. Extremely light (65 g) “Seal Kid” snorkel mask with silicone nose piece for children from 4 to 9 years old. With a 180 degree panoramic field of view. Anti-allergic seal with very good sealing qualities. Scratch and fog protection. Shaped snorkel for a more natural fit with silicone mouthpiece. Flexible middle section for a comfortable fit. Quick Clip snorkel holder. Available in transparent blue and transparent pink. 71 227 0702 Transparent blueSet 71 227 0728 Transparent pinkSet

For Children

New! Professional “Diving”

b “Java” Professional Snorkel

c

Double lense diving mask for teens and adults with slim faces. Silicone mask with with a good fit. Turnable buckle system for easily adjusting the mask strap. Shaped snorkel valve for more natural fit. Silicone mouthpiece. Adjustable snorkel holder and splash protection, silver. 71 227 0715 Set

High quality diving mask for adults. Transparent seal, wide silicone mask strap. Hardened, double lense mask, polycarbonate frame and silicone snorkel. With flexible attachment point and silicone mouthpiece. Curved shape with purge valve. Blue 71 242 0110 Set

Set for Youths

Snorkel Set for Adults

For Adults

d ABC Diving Set for Children

Mask, snorkel, flippers: the complete diving set, ideal for children. Double lense children‘s diving mask. Quick Snap System for easily adjusting the mask strap. With shaped snorkel for more natural fit. Silicone mouthpiece. High quality purging system. Adjustable snorkel holder. Children’s flippers with adjustable open heel. The blade of the flipper offers optimal propulsion. Suitable for shoe sizes 32-35. Comes in an attractive mesh carrying rucksack. 71 230 2704 Set

e ABC Diving Set for Adults

Mask, snorkel, flippers: the complete diving set for adults. Double lense diving mask with safety glass. Silicone mask with excellent sealing properties. Silicone strap for fine adjustment. Shaped snorkel valve for more natural fit. Silicone mouthpiece. Adjustable snorkel holder. Flippers with open shaped heel. Reinforced, increased side stabilisers allow excellent individual propulsion

and control. Available in 2 sizes. Includes an attractive mesh rucksack. 71 230 2805 36-40Set 71 230 2818 40-44Set

Individual Parts f

Polyvinyl seal and mask strap. Transparent ‚Apiflex‘ mask, safety glass and adjustable elastic mask strap. Blue. 71 242 0501 Each

g

New! Diving Mask for Teens and Adults

h

New! Silicone Snorkel for Children

High quality transparent Apiflex mask with pressure balance mechanism, safety glass and adjustable elastic strap. Silflex, safety lenses, polycarbonate frame. Blue. 71 242 0309 Each Silicone snorkel, patented, with flexible attachment point and silicone mouthpiece. Tube made from Silflex. Curved shape with purge valve. Blue. 71 242 0602 Each

i

New!

New! Diving Mask for Children

New! Silicone Snorkel for Adults

Silicone snorkel, patented with a flexible attachment point and silicone mouthpiece. Tube made from Silflex. Curved shape with purge valve. Blue. 71 242 0400 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

For Adults

f For Children

i

For Children

g

h

For Teens & Adults 149


Swimming Learning to Dive New!

4 With numbers printed on

4 Reversible puzzle 4 In 2 sizes

a

New! Double-sided Underwater Jigsaw

Puzzle

Fun and challenging at the same time for your swimming pool guests! 12 piece jigsaw puzzles, with fun designs on both sides. The individual plastic pieces sink to the bottom where they must

be assembled. Available in two sizes: • Large = 100x75 cm with an octopus on one side and a fish on the other • Small = 75x56.5 cm with a pirate ship on one side and a treasure chest on the other. Large, octopus and fish 71 204 1517 Set

b Diving Batons

Set of 6 coloured plastic batons, with numbers printed on. The batons sink slowly and vertically to the bottom of the pool and remain there. 100 g, approx. 21 cm, made from plastic that is difficult to break. 71 113 7008  Set of 6 Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. To be used under the direct supervision of an adult.

Small, pirate ship and treasure chest 71 204 1520 Set

c Buy Now!

4 Plastic

New!

c Diving Hoop Game

Great motivator for diving, opening your eyes under water and under water awareness. For all ages and water depths. High quality PE swimming hoops ø 70 cm with strong weight bags, height adjustable, everything is made from rust-proof material. The hoops can also be used without weights e.g. for diving training. 71 112 6206 Set of 4Set 71 112 6701 Set of 8Set

d Weights for Water Games

Set of four weights, 1,800 g each, including four tensioning cords, approx. 130 cm long. 71 112 6235  Set of 4 31 cm

15 cm

f

g

j

e

New! “Aqua Zoo” Diving Sticks

Jump into the water and learn how to dive! Set of 4 diving sticks, each of them being a friendly water creature. Made from plastic with integrated weights, which make the sticks sink slowly to the bottom. They are easy to grab. The friendly water creatures encourage to carry out fun under water competitions. Length of each stick approx. 22 cm, weight approx. 80 g. 71 242 3308  Set of 4 Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. To be used under the direct supervision of an adult.

New!

k

New!

h

i 14,5 cm

4 Plastic

4 One side is red 4 One side is green

24 cm

f Diving Ring

j "Schildi" Diving Ring

g Slatted Diving Ring

Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. To be used under the direct supervision of an adult.

Plastic, to DLRG standards (German regulatory Easy to see diving ring. Approx. 190 g, outer ø 14.5 authority), approx. 5 kg, outer ø 31 cm, inner ø 18 cm. cm, inner ø 11 cm. Assorted colours. Green, orange, yellow. 71 113 9004 Each 71 228 7502 Each Very easy to grip, made from flexible plastic. Approx. 150 g, ø 15 cm. Yellow. 71 113 8900 Each

k

New! Diving Fish

Find the fish. Friendly fish, both sides are a different colour, one red, the other one green. Very popular diving game for children. The fish sinks to the floor. Diving h Diving Ring and underwater awareness literally become child‘s play. Approx. 100 g, red, outer ø 14.5 cm, inner ø 12 cm. 71 113 8607 Each Fun diving toy lasting for years. Made from plastic coated fabric, stitched, filled with granules. 36x26 cm - very easy to spot. New! Diving Block i 71 242 3409 Each Made from solid rubber. 24x11x5 cm. 2 kg. Black. Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. To be used under the 71 241 0803 Each direct supervision of an adult.

150

k

New! "Aqua Zoo" Diving Rings

Jump into the water and learn how to dive! Set of 4 diving rings, each of them being a friendly water creature. Made from plastic with integrated weights, which make the rings sink slowly to the bottom. They are easy to grab. Each ring weighs approx. 80 g, size: approx. 21 cm with an inner ø of approx. 10 cm. 71 242 3207  Set of 4 Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. To be used under the direct supervision of an adult.

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Learning to Dive Swimming ab

4 With numbers 4 Rubber 4 Flexible

b Buy Now! a “Fun Sea Animals” Diving Rings

A set with four flexible rubber diving rings and integrated weights in fun animal shapes: a penguin, a dolphin, a tortoise and an octopus. They sink in the water and stand upright on the bottom of the pool. Ideal for fun competitions in the swimming pool. Also numbered from 10-40, diameter of each ring approx. 12 cm. 71 228 7300  Set of 4

b “Fun Animals” Diving Sticks

Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. To be used under the direct supervision of an adult.

Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. To be used under the direct supervision of an adult.

Set with 4 flexible rubber diving sticks in fun animal designs: a duck, a frog, a dragon and a seahorse. They c Stand-up Hoop sink into the water and stay upright on the pool floor. Ideal These hoops will stand vertically on the floor of the for fun competitions in the swimming pool. Also numbered pool. Ideal for diving through and for many games. Made from 10-40, length of each stick approx. 18 cm. from unbreakable polyethylene, ø 70 cm, tubing ø 2 cm. 71 228 7209  Set of 4 71 112 5809 Each

f "Seaweed" Diving Bags

A set containing 6 diving bags with three different animal pictures making up a pair. Come filled with sand Each shell half contains a different animal and there so they sink in the water and stand on the pool floor with are two of each kind. The winner is the person who can get interesting flapping flags that look like seaweed. Length of each bag approx. 30 cm. Not suitable for children under a matching pair up to the surface. Set of 3 sea shells in a 7 years. plastic bag. Diameter of sea shell approx. 8 cm. Set of 6 71 213 5713  Set of 3 71 228 7401 

e "Sea Shells" Diving Game d Slalom Diving Game

Diving game for people of all age groups. It is a fun way to improve diving skills. The 150 cm long plastic bands have a built-in float and are filled with ballast on the lower end. Simply throw the bands in the water and let the fun begin. 71 112 0804  Set of 8

Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. To be used under the direct supervision of an adult.

Attention! To be used under the direct supervision of an adult.

New!

h Neoprene Diving Set g

Swimming and Diving Hoops

Buoyant, a must have for teaching and free play. Specially made from unbreakable polyethylene for use in water. Welded waterproof, no gluing points. Hoop diameter approx. 75 cm, tubing ø 2 cm. 71 112 6105 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

Set consisting of 2 diving rings, 2 diving bars, and 2 diving balls. Made from a soft neoprene material making i "Sea Lion" Diving Game Set with 4 sea lions and different symbols underthem pleasant to grab. In neon colours and therefore easy to see in the water. Ideal for diving. Also great for catching neath the sea lion. Dive for the different symbols. Figure size approx. 10 cm. and throwing games outside of the water. Set of 4 71 234 0106  Set of 6 71 213 5700  Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. To be used under the direct supervision of an adult.

Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. To be used under the direct supervision of an adult.

151


Swimming Training Equipment Pull Buoys

Now Even Better

Benefits of the Original SportThieme® Pull Buoy with Strap a

• Safer for beginner‘s swimming • Does not slip away • No interruptions when practising as pull buoys won‘t get lost • Prevents leg cramps

4 Improved, higher quality EVA foam 4 Exceptionally strong and long-lasting

b a d

® Pull Buoy b Sport-Thieme As a, but without strap. 22x15 cm.

New!

c

New!

71 113 3514 Each

a

Original Sport-Thieme® Pull Buoy with Strap

One-piece, universal usage for all age groups with additional 100% polypropylene leg strap. Pull buoy fits well on the swimmer‘s leg so he or she can train without any interruptions. Made from strong closed-cell polyethylene foam. 22x15 cm. 71 113 3501 Each

Don‘t forget to order:

d Pull Buoy “Junior”

This Pull Buoy is smaller than the Original and therefore particularly suited Pink chic! Be trendy and fit too! This for children and smaller people. Ideal for ladies‘ Pull Buoy is the perfect aid for technique and endurance training. Skin technique and endurance training. Skin friendly, rounded edges. Strong, closedfriendly, rounded edges. Strong, closedcell polyethylene foam. 22x9 cm. cell polyethylene foam. 22x15 cm. 71 239 6907 Blue/whiteEach 71 239 7001 Each 71 239 6910 Pink-whiteEach

c Ladies Pull Buoy

e Safety Strap

Made form 100% polypropylene, with safety fastening. Length approx. 120 cm. Five straps in the replacement set. 71 113 4706  Price for 5

h

g Silicone Ear Plugs for Swimmers

Made from very soft silicone for a perfect fit. Special ergonomic design with douf Win Essential Nose Clip A comfortable, silicone coated nose ble seal. Extended hollow stem for easy clip. Seals the nose when doing water use keeping hearing impairment to a minisports. Fits to the shape of the face. With mum. Supplied in pairs with practical stosilicone coated nose piece ensuring it is rage box. Blue. One set contains 3 pairs comfortable to wear and seals well. of ear plugs. 71 227 2610  Set of 3 71 238 8713 Set ®

h Finis® Swimmer's Snorkel

This centre snorkel allows swimmers to concentrate on technique, position in the water, head position and stroke. They don‘t have to worry about breathing and get automatically into the perfect rhythm. Fitness training is increased as elongated airways increase the swimmer‘s breathing. Ideal for fin training. Flexible mouthpiece. Can be used with all standard goggles. Two designs: “Junior” for children up to 12 years of age and “Senior” for adults. 71 113 9424 JuniorEach 71 113 9437 SeniorEach

152

® i Kiefer Hand and

Ankle Cuffs

Universally fitting cuffs for ankles and wrists. Quick and easy to attach using the Velcro straps and safety fasteners. 100% j Aqua Resistance Belt neoprene cover. Approx. 400 g per cuff. For swimming strength training Chlorine and salt water resistant. Ideal for in water. An excellent and reliable traiuse in swimming training and aqua fitness. ning aid that enormously increases stroke 71 230 1307 Pair strength. The resistance can be adjusted

with the quantity of beakers and the swimming speed. Belt with five removable beakers and quick fasteners. 71 224 8006 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Swimming Floats Swimming Safety first!

The special shape with gliding grooves offers more stability and safety. cm 45

Great Value!

4 With gliding grooves 4 Unbreakable 4 Coated surface 4 5 cm thick

Buy Now!

m 29 c

a Sport-Thieme® “Top” Swimming Float

This swimming and training aid is of extremely high quality. The special shape with gliding grooves is made from light foam and is very safe and stable. Approx. 45x29x5 cm. 71 113 1837 RedEach 71 113 1811 YellowEach 71 113 1824 GreenEach 71 113 1808 BlueEach 

Top Rated

sport-thieme.com

Now Even Better

45 cm

45 cm

63 cm

4 Improved material 4 Exceptionally strong and long-lasting

Great Product!

36 cm

b “Float” Swimming Float

36 cm

4 Ideal grip hole position

c Sport-Thieme® “Kick” Swimming Float

36 cm

® d Sport-Thieme “Kids” Swimming Float

Child friendly size and very durable. This float 63x36 cm, hard polyethylene, with reinforcing Two grip holes in the upper part for perfect grip. The grooves and pre-moulded grip holes. A must have for float is made from high quality foam, very strong, 3 layers, is made from high quality foam so it is more difficult to knock pieces off. 37x24x3 cm. Red. swimming lessons and training sessions. Red. blue/yellow/blue. Approx. 45x31.5x3.8 cm. 71 113 0007 Each 71 213 6905 Each 71 210 2809 Each

Bite-proof

Scratch-proof

49 cm

Now Even Better 4 Improved, higher quality EVA foam 4 Extremely robust, sturdy and longlasting 4 Available in 2 colours

4 High buoyancy

e “Generation Plus” Swimming Float

Made from closed-cell, netted and rubberised PE foam. Maximum scratch and bite resistance. Absorbs absolutely no water. Unbreakable, will not age, disinte30 cm grate or crumble. Extra strong. Specially developed for ® intensive use. Ideal float for swimming classes. Blue/red. Sport-Thieme “Classic” Swimming f The large swimming float has two holes to hang it up. Float 32x24.5x2.5 cm Swimming Float Made from high quality super strong EVA foam, with a g Double 71 225 6506 Each smooth pored surface, elastic and unbreakable. As f but sized 49x30x6 cm, with greater buoyancy. 71 113 1303 Blue, 41x27x4 cmEach Ideal for water gymnastics. 46x24.5x2.5 cm with two holes 71 225 6519 Each 71 113 2612 Red, 44x30x4.5 cmEach 71 113 4100 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

153


Swimming Swimming Aids

c “Secumar 9 S”

Swimming Collar

Made from high quality synthetic material with skin friendly coating. Supports the head when swimming on your back ensuring breathing is kept above water. It is especially useful for less confident swimmers and disabled people as it makes

a “Sinbad” Swimming Vest

The swimming vest that will grow with your child. A very comfortable vest to wear with optimal freedom of movement. Two Velcro fasteners on the sides and shoulders will provide you with a perfect fit. Integrated floats ensure optimal buoyancy. The vest complies with EN 131381:2003 standards. Available in 3 sizes: Children: 2-6 years old up to 30 kg, Youth: 6-12 years old and weighing 30-60 kg, Adults: over 60 kg. Yellow. Covering material 100% polyester. 71 207 8700 ChildrenEach 71 207 8713 YouthEach 71 207 8726 AdultsEach

b “Swimy” Swimming Vest

For the perfect position in the water. This is achieved as this vest has highest buoyancy level and good arm freedom. The wide Velcro fastenings mean it will fit well with no fixed slots. Easy to put on and take off, as the head collar is wide and the vest is prevented from riding up. Very comfortable to wear. Foam filling. 100% polyester external material. Mini: 1-4 years old, up to 20 kg, approx. 86-104 cm. Midi: 5-8 years old, 20-30 kg, approx. 104128 cm. 71 203 6508 Swimy MiniEach 71 203 6511 Swimy MidiEach

them feel more at ease and safe in the water. Available in 3 sizes. Neck size 28-32 cm, small 71 113 7402 Each Neck size 33-38 cm, medium 71 113 7415 Each Neck size 39-43 cm, large 71 113 7428 Each

i

New!

4 Supports holistic therapy programmes 4 Relieves the spine 4 Suitable for active and passive exercises

d “Body Fit” Swimming Collar e Swimming Collar

This aid enables all muscles to completely relax when in the water. For highly effective workouts and running in the water. 71 114 1900 Each

For adults, made from skin friendly PE foam with Velcro fastening. Very safe as it is comfortable to wear and thanks to its good buoyancy. 44x27x10 cm. 71 113 6308 Each

g

Swimming Collar

154

g Swimming Collar for Aqua Reha Vest

The swimming collar supports head control in people with physical disabilities. It secures, supports and relieves the carer in their work with the patient in the water. Easy to attach to the Aqua Reha Vest with Velcro fasteners. Outer material 100% nylon. 71 112 4646 Each

f “Schwimmi”

Safe double chambered swimming collar with two safety valves. Absolute safety is assured for the user thanks to two separate air compartments. Swimmy will ensure the head is held vertically in the water. The body‘s natural buoyancy is fully used. This collar will support weights ranging between 40 and 45 kg. Also suitable for adults. 71 113 7301 Each

i

h

h Aqua Reha Vest

For swimming exercises with children and adults with disabilities. Fits different body sizes perfectly using the wide Velcro fasteners and has great buoyancy. Also great for non-swimmers. Outer material 100% nylon. 71 112 4604 S, 20-38 kgEach 71 112 4617 M, 39-84 kgEach 71 112 4620 L, 85-113 kgEach

New! Aqua Balance Ellipse

The closed oval shaped Balance Ellipse is an all round body support and encourages deep relaxation. It is a great tool for stretching muscles and ligaments and mobilising joints. The closed cell foam provides excellent buoyancy. Switching between tension and relaxation, between the passive and active state: both form part of a holistic and health-oriented exercise and therapy programme in the water. Aqua Balance is a completely new and unique workout experience combining stimulation, mobilisation and relaxation, i.e. combining elements from Pilates, Yoga, Aqua Fitness, Hydro Therapy and Watsu. Tension can be released. In the relaxed position on the Aqua Balance aid, spinal pressure is released whilst the body is supported from the side. In Aqua Balance arms and legs can be moved around freely. Both sitting and lying positions are possible. Good buoyancy for adults weighing up to 85 kg. Two-ply, high quality closed-cell foam with pearl finish. 125x40x3 cm. Yellow/black. Comes with detailed exercise instructions. 71 242 3702 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Children‘s Swimming Aids Swimming a

New!

c

b

c Dolphin® Swimming Discs

Unsinkable swimming aids. Ready to use immediately, no long inflation time required. Comply with EN 13138-1:2008. Buoyancy can either be increased or reduced with the number of discs. Closed-cell foam, 100% watertight and resistant to salt water. 3 discs per arm for beginners up to 60 kg. 2 discs per arm for slightly more experienced swimmers over 60 kg. Up to 12 years (2x 3 discs) 71 113 4504 Pair

4 New material 4 Rounded corners

® a Bema Armbands

Safety first. Tried and tested Bema® armbands with new material. The new material feels gentle on the skin, is odourless and of course 100% PVC free. Its thermoplastic properties adapt very well to all types of weather and fluctuating temperatures. Manufactured to the new EU standard 13138 with TÜV/GS safety certification. With a reliable double chamber system and a new shape with rounded corners. “Stiftung Warentest 2011” (independent German consumer organisation) winner and TÜV-Süd award winner for best armband 2011. 00, up to 11 kg, up to 1 year old 71 113 4009 Pair 0, 11-30 kg, 1-6 years of age 71 113 4012 Pair 1, 30-60 kg, 6-12 years of age 71 113 4025 Pair 2, over 60 kg, from 12 years of age 71 113 4038 Pair

4 Extra soft 4 Gentle on skin

b Bema® Neoprene Armbands

4 Now even safer! With the nonslip surface inside the arm hole

e

For children 11-30 kg (1-6 years). Bema neoprene armbands with double chamber system and additional inner cuff for a perfect fit. EN 13138-1:2008 tested. The new Bema neoprene armbands feature additional selfbuoyancy of the neoprene and will provide you with a very comfortable feel too. Depending on the child’s swimming skills the total buoyancy can be decreased by deflating the inner chambers. The inner cuff can be adjusted to the size of the arm with Velcro - a perfect fit is guaranteed, and the band cannot slip off the arm. 71 238 8306 Pair

e “Swimi” Baby

Swimming Ring

Swimi is a specially shaped float and used to give children up to 4 years of age confidence in the water. It is made up of an inner and outer air chamber with two safety valves that push inwards. Swimi is made of a red salt and chlorinated water resistant membrane. Available in 2 sizes. Size 0 for children up to approx. 1 year ø 15 cm, size 1 for children up to 4 years ø 18 cm. 71 224 2109 Size 0Each 71 224 2112 Size 1Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

12 years + (2x 2 discs) 71 113 4517 Pair

SwimSafe® Armbands f Flipper With Flipper SwimSafe your children have carefree

fun in the pool. The unbreakable PE foam core and the air chamber with valve give you perfect buoyancy. There is even enough buoyancy to keep your child above water when the air chamber is damaged. The buoyancy can be individually adjusted. Unrestricted free movement. The body is stabilised and the neck and back muscles are relaxed. For 1-6 year old children. Swimming schools recommend Flipper SwimSafe as the ideal product for beginners, to get the children used to the water and to make swimming easier. Complies with EU standards EN 13138:2008. Now even safer! Thanks to anti-slip foil in the arm hole area. 71 224 8703 Pair

155


Swimming Swimming Aids, Swimming Floats a

Now Even Better 4 Improved safety buckle 4 Improved foam 4 Even stronger and more durable

a “Win” Swimming Belt

Ideal for swimming lessons. Evazote float 140x100x28 mm with double elastic band and adjustable hook fastening, can be put on in seconds without any help, 5 part. Belt length 105 cm. Suitable for children from 15 to 30 kg. Assorted colours. 71 113 3208 Each

Top Rated

® c Sport-Thieme Swimming

Belt

b

Complies with EN 13138-1:2008. Float made from Plastazote. With safety belt and buckle. Fully adjustable. Comfortable to wear. Available in 2 sizes: 4-piece supporting up to 30 kg and 6-piece supporting up to 60 kg. Blue/white. 71 113 3136 Up to 30 kg, four-piece Each 71 113 3149 Up to 60 kg, six-pieceEach

b “Aqua Trainer” Swimming Float

A two-part swimming float with many uses: • Traditional swimming float • Resistance float for arm training • Resistance float for leg training • Pull buoy By turning the float, you change the level of resistance. Made from Plastazote, very elastic, skin friendly and will not crumble. 71 113 5002 Each

Float thickness:

6-piece belt

4-piece belt

d Sport-Thieme® Scooter Swimming Float

Registered design. Newly developed educational swimming aid. The integrated rubber bands mean that the swimming float can be used with Comfy Floats. It provides enough buoyancy for children to be able to concentrate on breathing, leg and arm techniques, depending on the exercise they are doing. Using the Comfy Floats various toys and objects can be “built”. The float is made of foam with elastic rubber bands and Velcro fastening. Float: 37x28x3.5 cm. 71 210 9002 Each

Also take a look at: • Swimming Floats, page 153

Also take a look at: Comfy Floats, page 167

e Large “Fish” Swimming

f

48cm

Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. To be used under the direct supervision of an adult.

Exclusive to Sport-Thieme®

g Sport-Thieme® Multi

Swimming Float, Large

Egg Flips

The innovative aid to help learn the correct breathing technique. If you blow strongly in the direction of the “egg”, it flips over. A nice reward for exhaling correctly that motivates to do it again. 71 112 0107  Pack of 10

156

70 cm

Float

Provides the perfect swimming position for beginners. The float‘s unique design, i.e. the side supports, will guide children into the optimal swimming position. Three holding options also promote the perfect position on the water, ensuring small and larger children lie flat on the water surface with outstretched arms. The float is strong and very resistant to toppling over. 70x48x5 cm. Suitable for children over 2 years of age. 71 227 0803 Each

4 Pack of 10

This float is especially suitable for back and chest training as the body is at an optimal stretch when gripping the float. The seven ergonomically designed holes in the float mean there are numerous uses for this float in water gymnastics. Made from Plastazote. 49x29x3.8 cm. 71 114 1001 Each

European patent no. 0930919

® h Sport-Thieme Multi

Swimming Float, Small

As this float is smaller, it has a lower water resistance, and is therefore ideally suited for use in water gymnastics for older people. It can also be used for beginners‘ swimming lessons. Plastazote, 35x22x3 cm. 71 114 1014 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Schwimmsport Swimming

! r e n n i w l a e r A The perfect Power Paddle

! Great Value

imming propulsion 4 Precise training of sw muscles

dles

Power Pad a Swim lable in six different sizes

Avai The large and corresponding colours. ngth traipaddles are for principal stre aring for ning, smaller paddles for prep ded. inclu competitions. Rubber straps : Advantages of Power Paddles buoyant • Shatterproof, colourfast, ming pro• Precise training for the swim pulsion muscles er adjust• Ergonomic shape and rubb lems ments prevent shoulder prob eved achi r wate for y itivit sens • A through the hole pattern

Buy Now!

Size XS, 17x13 cm, orange Pair 71 114 0109  n gree cm, Size S, 19x16 Pair 71 114 0112  w yello cm, 8 21x1 Size M, Pair 71 114 0125  Size L, 23x19 cm, red Pair 71 114 0138  Size XL, 24x20 cm, blue Pair 71 114 0141  le purp Size XXL, 26x21 cm, Pair 71 114 0154 

c "PoolMate" Swimming Watch

b Hand Paddles

In 3 different sizes. The large size paddles are mainly for strength training, while the smaller paddles are ideal to prepare for competition. • Unbreakable, colourfast, floating, with rounded edges

• With anatomically shaped hand blades and wrist shaping • Perfect fit thanks to highly adjustable straps • The pattern of the holes provides a good feel for the water

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

4 Automatic length and stroke counter

The Pool-Mate is the first (and only) automatic length and arm stroke counter for swimmers. It works for all common swim strokes and in any pool – no matter which performance class. With its highly sensitive movement sensors and its unique software algorithm the Pool-Mate automatically recognises every stroke and every turn. No more counting of lengths – times, average number of strokes per length, speed, distance, calories burned and efficiency index are all automatically saved. All parts, from wrist band to display and the electronics, are perfectly designed. The Pool-Mate is • Targeted training for the muscles used for light, has a flexible PU wrist band, an easy to read display, stainless steel buttons and propulsion 71 206 1001 Size S, 18x13 cm, yellowPair a doubly secured fastener. Minimum pool 71 206 1014 Size M, 20x14cm, bluePair length: 18 m. Black/blue. 71 206 1027 Size L, 23x19 cm, greyPair 71 159 8807 Each 

157


Swimming Sprint Fins

4 For improved leg strength and better propulsion

Great Value!

Buy Now!

4 Improves leg strength 4 Optimal propulsion

Sprint Flippers

For improved leg strength and better propulsion. Flippers with very hard and short blades, therefore ideal for sprint training. Sizes 35-46, made from latex, blue/yellow. Weight per pair approx. 600 g. 71 200 3610 36-37, L: 30 cmPair 71 200 3623 38-39, L: 32 cmPair 71 200 3636 40-41, L: 32 cmPair 71 200 3649 42-43, L: 34 cmPair 71 200 3652 44-45, L: 36 cmPair 71 200 3665 46-48, L: 40 cmPair

b Kiefer® Silicone Sprint Flippers

Latex-free, light sprint flippers. The short blade improves leg strength and increases forward propulsion. High quality and comfortable to wear. Made from 100% silicone. Weight per pair approx. 750 g. Chlorine and salt water resistant.

c Finis® “Zoomers Z2 Gold” Sprint Training Flippers

New!

4 Latex free 4 100% silicone

a Sport-Thieme® “Basic”

d

Innovative flipper design from Finis ensures improved leg strength and optimal propulsion. The innovative and extraordinary shape allows short, quick movements. Ideal for sprint training and in particular for improving quick swimming styles such as free style, backstroke or butterfly. Extremely comfortable to wear. Made from 100% natural rubber. 71 239 7203 38-39Pair 71 239 7216 40-42Pair 71 239 7229 43-44Pair 71 239 7232 44-45Pair ®

New!

4 Improved shape 4 Very comfortable

Mono Flippers

Ideal for butterfly stroke f

35-36, blue, L: 30 cmPair 37-38, black, L: 32 cmPair 39-40, purple, L: 32 cmPair 41-42, yellow, L: 34 cmPair 43-44, blue, L: 36 cmPair 45-46, purple, L: 40 cmPair

New! Aqua Sphere® ''Zip

VX'' Training Flippers

The perfect swimming flippers for aqua gymnastics, fitness and cardiovascular training in the water. Their short, narrow flipper blade reduces tiredness of the joints and guarantees effective swimming training. Perfect fit and comfortable to wear thanks to adjustable heel straps. The unique shape of the flipper blades provides excellent propulsion. 71 242 7805 S = 35-39Pair 71 242 7818 M = 40-44Pair 71 242 7821 L = 45-48Pair

e Finis® “The Wave” Mono Flipper

from

Children‘s flippers for children from 6 years of age. The flexible plastic fin makes quick and adventurous swimming possible, so you‘ll swim just like a dolphin. The adjustable heel strap makes it fast and easy to use, suitable for shoe sizes from approx. 32-39. LxW: 40x50 cm. 71 113 9408 Each

56,16

e g

New!

158

71 225 1107 71 225 1110 71 225 1123 71 225 1136 71 225 1149 71 225 1152

Flipper f Finis® “Rapid” Mono e

As “The Wave” model , but for adults with shoe sizes from 40-44. LxW: 50x54 cm. 71 113 9411 Each

g Finis® “Foil” Mono Flipper

Ideal flipper for learning the butterfly stroke. Suitable from 8 years old. The large propulsion area and the special design allow for particularly quick swimming. Easy to use with the flexible heel strap. Flippers made from 100% latex. LxW: 48x40 cm. 71 239 7304 S = 37-40Each 71 239 7317 M = 41-44Each 71 239 7320 L = 45-46Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


! r e n n i w l a e r A

Schwimmsport

Flippers

kes these High latex content ma flippers very durable!

! Great Value

Buy Now!

me® Swimming Flippers

lity, all-round flippers with

rt-Thie ble. High qua a Spo flippers makes them very dura The high latex content in our

Pair blade construction. closed heel and reinforced Pair k blac 9, 26-2 71 113 9206 Pair  blue 3, 71 113 9219 30-3 Pair 71 113 9222 34-35, orange Pair 71 113 9235 36-37, black Pair 71 113 9248 38-39, blue Pair 71 113 9251 40-41, orange Pair 71 113 9264 42-43, black Pair 71 113 9277 44-45, blue 71 113 9280 46-47, orange

b

with Adjustable b Sport-Thieme® “Power Safe” c Flippers Foot Strap Swimming Flippers Quality flippers with a large plastic blade and integrated flow channel. The large blade ensures great propulsion with minimum effort. The closed heel section made from rubber is very comfortable. Sizes from XS to XL, colour-coded sizes. 71 207 8609 Size XS = 33-35, pinkPair 71 207 8612 Size S = 36-38, yellowPair 71 207 8625 Size M = 39-41, bluePair 71 207 8638 Size L = 42-44, greenPair 71 207 8641 Size XL = 45-47, yellowPair

Innovative plastic flippers with adjustable foot straps. Ideal for training groups. They will fit any foot by adjusting the strap on the heels and sides. This makes them more comfortable to wear. Flippers with reinforced edges and four flow channels for optimal propulsion with very little effort. Ladies', XS-SM, 36-41, red 71 217 9908 Pair Men's, ML-XL, 42-47, blue 71 217 9911 Pair

d Power Flex Flippers

Extra strong sport flippers with open heel section. The special shape of the blade ensures optimal propulsion. Easy to adjust in size and fit with the adjustable heel strap. 71 214 0706 37-40Pair 71 214 0722 40-44Pair 71 214 0719 44-48Pair

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

c 4 For training groups 4 Suitable for all sizes with the adjustable foot straps

Adjustable heel strap

d

4 Extra strong sport fins with open heel section

159


Swimming Swimming Training 4 Particularly sturdy 4 Easy to move with 2 castors

ab Buy Now!

c Power Rack Swim Strength Training Machine

A resistance machine for training swimming strength and stamina in the water. Guaranteed to train the neuro-muscular processes specifically used for propulsion in swimming. The Power Rack stands steady on the edge of the pool, but it can be easily moved with two fixed castors. The tower has stackable weights that are attached to the swimming belt via a pulley system. An optional automatic timer is available for improving the training time. 71 223 6054 Each

a “Mini-Gym 190” Isokinetic Pull Trainer

A pull trainer with centrifugal force brakes for isokinetic strength training with optimal resistance in every phase of the arm pull, like in water. Mini-Gym with 6 different speeds, LCD display for performance, output, time, reps, average output. Comes with a wall bracket, T-pulling bar and one hand stirrup. 71 223 6168 Each

b ''Mini-Gym 101'' Isokinetic Pull Trainer

Mini-Gym 101 is similar to Mini-Gym 190, with 6 different speed levels but without the display. It can therefore easily be used as an additional training unit with MiniGym 190. Wall bracket, T-pulling bar and one hand stirrup included. Not illustrated. 71 223 6155 Each

4 The top model for performance diagnostics and training

4 The Bio Swim Bench for everyday training

d

d BioMeter®

Top level performance diagnostics and training bench. For all types of swimming styles, for children and record setting swimmers. You can use it all year round from intensive stamina building phases to pre-competition maintenance programmes. The top model for performance diagnostics and targeted training. Resistance created by a precise generator producing a isokinetic resistance for swim-specific dry land training. The resistance increases the more strength the person training applies.

160

9 different speed levels can be selected for power and sprint training. The computer on BioMeter will inform you about your weaknesses and progress: strength, work rate, speed, frequency, pull length, time and quantity are displayed, monitored and recorded. Port for PC connection. Software for evaluation of data on PC available on request. 71 223 6009 Without softwareEach 71 224 9403 Including software Set

e

e Bio-SwimBench

An isokinetic training bench with the same electronically controlled resistance as the BioMeter, but with less analysis. Displays work (in Nm) and speed regulation for 10 levels. Integrated computer port for using the optional software or a printer. Robust aluminium frame, stove enamelled, includes ropes, paddles and seat. 71 223 6012 Without softwareEach 71 224 9416 Including software Set

f “Bio SwimAnalysis” PC Software, 3.0

Software for swim training benches and analytical instruments presenting the performance in strength/time graphs or intracycle speeds on speedometers. Software comes with a data box for connecting to the Bio Swim Bench, BioMeter, speedometer or swimming strength measuring systems. More detailed product description available on request. Laptop not included. 71 223 6038 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Swimming Training Swimming

a StrechCordz® Aqua-Gym Long Belt

Swimming strength training in the water. Targeted training of the muscles needed for swimming! Special 7.5 m long latex tube, stretching up to 25 m. Will increase swimming strength. Intensive “strength training in the water” with the Aqua-Gym is required to increase your swimming strength to a level enabling you to reach the other side of the pool. Belt with quickfastening, high-quality latex rope and all fastening parts are rustproof. Silver, tensile strength 1.3-3.6 kg 71 224 6000 Each Yellow, tensile strength 2.2-6.3 kg 71 224 6013 Each Green, tensile strength 3.6-10.8 kg 71 224 6026 Each Red, tensile strength 5.4-14.1 kg 71 224 6039 Each

b StrechCordz® Aqua-Gym Short Belt

With the same characteristics as StrechCordz Aqua-Gym Long Belt a, but the special latex tube is shortened to 1.2 m in length, stretching to approx. 4 m. Ideal for

kick-off training and stationary swimming f StrechCordz® training, also in small pools. with Hand Paddles Green, tensile strength 3.6-10.8 kg Pull rope with hand paddles for targe71 224 6042 Each ted swimming strength training on land. Very elastic latex pull ropes do not increRed, tensile strength 5.4-14.1 kg 71 224 6055 Each ase the resistance too much during the pulling action. The progression of force is ideally adapted for swimming. High-quality latex ropes securely attached to the plastic parts. Length 120 cm. Available in four difc ferent strengths. Yellow, tensile strength 2.2-6.3 kg 71 213 0822 Each

f

Green, tensile strength 3.6-10.8 kg 71 213 0806 Each

c StrechCordz Drag Parachute ®

d

d

StrechCordz® Kick Trainer

• Resistance trainer for kicks • Stabilises ankles in breast stroke • Increases the resistance for the stomach muscles in butterfly stroke Yellow, tensile strength 2.2-6.3 kg 71 224 7117 Each

Red, tensile strength 5.4-14.1 kg 71 213 0819 Each

Blue, tensile strength 6.3-15.4 kg Swimming training aid for strength 71 213 0848 Each and stamina, the parachute is firmly attached to the belt. High-quality product. ® 71 224 6808 20 cm, yellow parachuteEach g StrechCordz with Hand Loops 71 224 6811 30 cm, blue parachuteEach 71 224 6824 40 cm, black parachuteEach StrechCordz pull ropes have been developed for swimming training, rehabilitation and general fitness training. Length of the latex ropes 120 cm. Particularly suitable for curls, triceps and pull exercises. Yellow, tensile strength 2.2-6.3 kg 71 213 0734 Each

Green, tensile strength 3.6-10.8 kg 71 224 7120 Each

e StrechCordz® Breast Stroke Pull Rope

Special pulling rope for breast stroke, crawl, back stroke and butterfly techniques. The special design and high-quality latex pull ropes allow correct training of the outward and inward pulls for the driving movements and muscles. Yellow, tensile strength 2.2-6.3 kg 71 224 5818 Each Green, tensile strength 3.6-10.8 kg 71 224 5821 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

g

Green, tensile strength 3.6-10.8 kg 71 213 0705 Each Red, tensile strength 5.4-14.1 kg 71 213 0718 Each

e

Blue, tensile strength 6.3-15.4 kg 71 213 0747 Each

h StrechCordz® Modular Set

Variable StrechCordz Set. With handles, paddles, foot loops and a suitable storage bag in the relevant strength. Yellow, tensile strength: 2.2-6.3 kg 71 224 5717 Set Green, tensile strength: 3.6-10.8 kg 71 224 5720 Set Red, tensile strength: 5.4-14.1 kg 71 224 5733 Set Blue, tensile strength: 6.3-15.4 kg 71 224 5746 Set

161


Swimming b Aqua Foot Floats

21 cm

31 cm

To strengthen legs and upper body. The new special shape of these floats increases the difficulty level for aqua jogging. They are therefore suitable for trained and advanced joggers. For an effective core muscle and balance workout. The adjustable foot loops with Velcro fastenings guarantee that they will fit perfectly. Coated, very robust material and attractive design. Available in S, M and L. 71 218 0609 Size S, shoe sizes 34-37Pair 71 218 0612 Size M, shoe sizes 38-41Pair 71 218 0625 Size L, shoe sizes 42-45Pair

a Size L

a Size XL

a Leg Floats

For more buoyancy in the water. Extra buoyancy for aqua jogging and aqua fitness in deep water. This float is comfortable to wear with wide Velcro straps for a perfect fit. Available in sizes L, height 21 cm (slightly less buoyant) and XL, height 31 cm (extra buoyancy).

Size L, blue, height 21 cm 71 200 1601 Pair Size XL, blue, height 31 cm 71 200 1614 Pair

c Twin II Professional c Aqua These power sandals will provide you with an effective legs, bums and tums workout in the water. The foot straps can be adjusted at several points. The surface is coated, making them not only extremely robust but also very comfortable to wear. Thanks to their new shape, the Aqua Twins can also be used as floats for resistance training for the arms. Training with the Aqua Twins is very efficient and is easy on

4 For arm and leg workouts 4 Coated surface

f Aqua Nordic JET

162

e “Aqua” Carrying Net

A carrying and storage net with a pull cord for holding aqua fitness products such as water jogging belts and weights. Also Soft PE foam leg floats, very comforideal for swimming floats and flippers. The table to wear. Although a universal size, water runs off easily and the products can the buckle bands with eyelets and stathe joints. Can also be used in deep water ble Velcro fasteners ensure a perfect fit. dry off. Available in two sizes: medium, to develop leg and bottom muscles. Availa- With good buoyancy for water jogging and 75x45 cm and large, 115x35 cm. 100% ble in medium and large. 23x20 cm. aqua fitness. Height approx. 18 cm. Assor- nylon. Black. Contents not included. 71 209 2007 M, shoe sizes 36-40, redPair ted colours. 71 213 6602 MediumEach 71 209 2010 L, shoe sizes 41-45, bluePair 71 113 7806 Pair 71 213 6628 LargeEach

4 Comfortable resistance in the water 4 Optimal strength endurance training 4 Improved movement and coordination

Aqua Nordic JET is the perfect training aid for Nordic Walking in shallow and deep water. The product is designed in such a way that the water flows through the hollow body. This leads to an even more efficient sequence of movement and therefore creates pleasant water resistance. It will lead to optimal strength-stamina training through the intensive push/pull motion and to an improvement in mobility and coordination. The two different cones, the

4 Extra soft PE foam

front smaller than the rear cone, are joined with a handle. The handle has pimples for a pleasant hand massage during training. Aqua Nordic Jet allows you to walk more safely through the water and stabilises movement. Ideal for use in Aqua Nordic Walking, aqua fitness, rehabilitation and sport for older people. Made from high quality E.V.A. foam. 71 233 4804 Pair

d Aqua Feet

g Nordic Aqua Handles™

The ideal aqua training product for Nordic Walking in shallow water, Nordic Jogging in deep water or for Nordic Aqua Fitness while standing. The Nordic Aqua Handles allow movement sequences typical to Nordic Walking and classic crosscountry skiing, as well as similar use of the upper body and arms as in many forms of Nordic sports. Two ergonomic Nordic Walking handles with adjustable hand loops. By simply holding in the furthest forward position the funnel will point to exactly the correct starting position for “operation of the stick“. The flow dynamics of the plastic funnel create higher water resistance in one direction and only low resistance in the opposite direction. As a result of the funnel shaped beaker opening a type of power and pressure input is produced, which is not possible with other buoyancy products. Orange. 71 230 1903 Pair

Don’t forget to order: Aqua Jogging Belts page 166

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Schwimmsport

Aqua Fitness Gloves

a Fitness Gloves

en Aqu a Op Fingerless version.

a aerobics Increase resistance in aqu ct. Improved and add to the training effe to grasp you wing allo r wate feel in the e easily the water jogging weights mor es. glov without having to remove the Sizes: • S = glove size 7,  = glove size 8, •M • L = glove size 9. Pair 71 112 9579 S, turquoise Pair 71 112 9582 M, red Pair 71 112 9595 L, blue

ves

a Fitness Glo b Aqu a Increase the resistance in aqu

ing effect. aerobics and add to the train prene. neo : side palm ile, text er: Upp the cuff. on g enin fast ro Velc a With Sizes: • XS = glove size 6, • S = glove size 7, • M = glove size 8, • L = glove size 9.

XS, 23x16 cm, red Pair 71 112 9508  e uois turq cm, 5 x16, S, 23.5 Pair 71 112 9511 

M, 25x18 cm, red Pair 71 112 9524  L, 26.5x19 cm, blue Pair 71 112 9537 

4 Strengthening, stretching and easing 4 Improvement of mobility, strength, coordination, balance and stamina 4 Strengthens tissue

c

New!

4 Can be worn 2 different ways

Aqua Cross Trainer

The Aqua Cross Trainer is suitable for a complete and highly efficient workout in shallow and deep water. Used for strengthening as well as stretching and loosening muscles in equal proportions. Improves flexibility, strength, coordination, balance and stamina. Useful for balancing out disharmonies and stabilising tissues. Comprehensively trains core, leg, bum, shoulder and arm muscles. Joints can be mobilised without any stress on them. The water offers pedal resistance: the faster you pedal, the higher the resistance. Made from flexible foam, 130x20 cm, yellow, can withstand up to 75 kg. 71 217 9100 Each

d

New! “Aqua-BElegx”

Leg Floats

BElegx - the innovative buoyancy product. BElegx is the ideal training aid for use in both shallow and deep water. They are well fitting and can easily be slipped on. Innovative and unique, these floats can be worn in 2 different ways so that one size fits all. BElegx will provide you with enough lift for intensive training in deep water. In more shallow water they are an effective resistance training aid. A real all-rounder. 30x10x5 cm. 500 g. EVA foam.

71 242 7603 71 242 7616 71 242 7629 71 242 7632

PinkPair PurplePair TurquoisePair Dark bluePair

Aqua Bodyflex II

e Aqua Bodyflex II

The multi-functional stabilisation trainer for use in water. The new Aqua Bodyflex II comes in three difficulty levels. • Classic: black/red for beginners • Advanced: black/blue for experienced users • Athletic: black/silver for professional users Aqua Body Flex II can be used as a stabilisation trainer for the core, shoulder and

Athletic for professional use

arm muscles by making circles with it and swinging, turning, paddling, and jabbing it etc. Length: 130 cm, approx. 700 g. 71 210 9507 Classic, black/redEach 71 210 9510 Advanced, black/blueEach

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

4 In 3 difficulty levels

Advanced for experienced users Classic for beginners

163


Swimming Aqua Step

Good stability thanks to suction cups

4 Can be used for working out with a partner

4 3 steps together make a circle

a “Moon Bite” Aqua Step

Brand new – the aqua step for two people. You can now train endurance and strength in the water with a partner. The half moon shape is also a lot of aqua stepping fun when used by one person. Three steps together make a circle. Simply ideal for the coordination and choreography of aqua aerobics groups. Safe positioning through 8 suction cups on the base. Recommended water depth 120 cm. 138x55x20 cm. 8 kg. 71 239 1306 Each

b Aqua Step

Training with Aqua Step will increase your fitness levels, stamina and strength. It can also be used for stretching and stability and exercises. Shockproof plastic, very robust and stable thanks to the rubber stoppers on the base. Height adjustable by adding the additional part c. Recommended water depth between 80 and 150 Good stabicm. Includes integrated galvanised weights (2x 1.4 kg), d Aqua Step with Suction lity thanks to approx. 68x36x19 cm, total weight 13 kg. Cups 71 112 9609 Each Stable thanks to suction cups. Specially suction cups developed for aqua aerobics. The high quality plastic training aid is specially designed for use c Additional Part for Aqua Step This attachment will allow the Aqua Step to be raised in the water: high net weight, textured surface and sturdy thanks to suction cups. 67x35x17cm, approx. 6 kg. from 18 to 23 cm. 71 149 0969-2 Pair 71 112 9638 Each

Aqua Aerobics for Children

f

f Children's Aqua Aerobics Belt e DynaPad

A must for all aqua aerobics in shallow water. Good posture begins with the feet. DynaPad develops the sense of balance and strengthens the entire body structure. It can be very useful for those with posture and balance problems. Extra benefit: the pimpled surface and arched shape massage and activate muscles. 28x23x4.5 cm. Blue. 71 227 2724 Each

Use of aqua aerobics products in chlorine and salt water

Aqua fitness products are made from foam and are in principle approved by the manufacturer for chlorinated and salt water pools. It is however advisable to wash out in fresh water immediately after use in salt or chlorinated water. This will extend the lifespan of the product.

164

One-piece, closed-cell PE foam, 12 cm wide, 30 mm thick. With nylon belt and quick-release buckle. Blue, 40 cm long, 15-30 kg 71 239 2309 Each Yellow, 50 cm long, 30-60 kg 71 239 2312 Each

g

Red, 60 cm long, from 60 kg 71 239 2325 Each

g Aqua Aerobics Gloves for Children

The little ones also enjoy aqua aerobics. Upper: textile, palm side: neoprene. With Velcro strap on the wrists. Red. 23x16 cm, for children from 8 years. 71 112 9508-1 Pair

h Aqua Foot Floats for Children h

Aqua Jogging also for children - ideal for strengthening the legs and upper body. The special shape of these floats and the adjustable foot loops with Velcro fastenings guarantee that they will fit perfectly. For extra buoyancy, an additional aqua jogging belt is recommended. Assorted colours. Suitable for children from 8 to 12 years. Size S, shoe sizes 34-37. 71 218 0609-1 Pair

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Aqua Jogging Weights Swimming Aqua Jogging Dumbbells!

bc

Essential for endurance exercises in the water! Now Even Better

b

a “Ergo Bells” Aqua Jogging Dumbbells

Ergonomic aqua jogging dumbbells in a modern design. New, innovative and modern. With ergonomic handles. Increase resistance in the water and therefore strengthen the whole upper body when carrying out stamina training in the water. Skin friendly foam. Cheerful, bright marbled yellow/orange colour. Ideal for women. Length approx. 35 cm, handle approx. 13 cm. Really light at approx. 100 g per dumbbell. 71 218 0801 Pair

Registered Design 20210014890

4 Improved foam material 4 Very sturdy and long lasting

New!

c

® Aqua Jogging Dumbbells b Sport-Thieme® Aqua Jogging Dumbbells c Sport-Thieme with holding strap Fit well in the hand. Increased water resistance.

Ideal for stamina exercises in the water. Made from skin friendly foam. Junior: handle length approx. 13 cm, foam disc width approx. 7.5 cm. Senior: handle length approx. 9 cm, foam disc width approx. 10.5 cm. Junior length: approx. 28 cm, ø 9 cm 71 112 9234 Pair

Same features as aqua jogging dumbbells b. Now with additional handle straps. Handle width 11 cm. Therefore also suitable for therapeutic exercises where open hands are required. Junior length: approx. 28 cm, ø 9 cm 71 239 4406 Pair

Senior length: approx. 35 cm, ø 15 cm Senior length: approx. 30 cm, ø 15 cm 71 112 9247 Pair 71 239 4419 Pair

Exclusive to Sport-Thieme®

d Aqua Pamps

Registered design. Innovative aqua jogging dumbbells. Exactly like Nordic walking – just enjoy a fun walk in shallow or deep water and keep your whole body moving. Each dumbbell now weighs approx. 250 g, thereby intensifying their use and fitness effect. A quick and easy changeover of the discs makes it possible to achieve two different levels of water resistance. The dumbbells will strengthen your upper arms, forearms, chest, upper and lower back muscles as well as abdominal and leg muscles. Furthermore, the right and left parts of the brain are exercised, which is beneficial for co-ordination and the body’s motor functions. Particularly suitable for older people, people in therapy, young people and children. Includes detailed exercise instructions. Included contents: • Two dumbbell bars (28 cm long) covered in easy-to-grip foam with practical straps • Two small (ø 10 cm) and two large (ø 14 cm) exchangeable discs 71 234 2001 Set

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

e “Hydro-Tone Power

Bells” Aqua Jogging Weights

The Hydro-Tone Power Bells are water weights that are perfect for intensive aqua aerobics thanks to their high water resistance. They can be used by ambitious sports people and also in therapy. You will get successful intensive muscle training for the upper body and arm muscles using the Hydro-Tone Power Bells. Made from polypropylene. Yellow. L: 30 cm, W: 20 cm. Weight approx. 600 g per weight. Instructions included. 71 230 2209 Pair

f “Dumbbells” Aqua Jogging Weights

With removable foam discs. Multi-functional weights, offering variable resistance for all kinds of exercises. The Tri-Blade technology ensures water resistance in every direction. Weight bars made from high-quality plastic. Two discs per weight included, which are removable, variable and made from coated foam. 71 227 3408 Pair

165


Swimming Aqua Jogging Belts The Super Buoyant! Now Even Better

4 High quality EVA foam 4 Even more sturdy and long lasting 4 Improved snap in clasp

Sport-Thieme® Aqua Jogging Belts – adjustable for all body types 4 High back section for support 4 Ideal for beginner groups

a

a Sport-Thieme® “Top” Aqua Jogging Belt

This belt is suitable for all aqua aerobics classes. Made from high quality foam with a fastening belt and snap in clasp. Very buoyant with a high back section for more safety and support. Belt length 150 cm. Will support up to 100 kg. 66x31x3.5 cm. 71 113 5608 Each

Great Value!

Buy Now!

b Sport-Thieme® “Top Fit”

Top Rated

Water Jogging Belt

sport-thieme.com

A strong belt made from high quality foam, ideal for advanced group training. With fastening belt and snap in clasp. Belt length 150 cm. Will support body weights up to 100 kg. 73x23x3.5 cm. 71 113 5709 Each

b

c Replacement Belt for Aqua Jogging Belt

For the “Top” aqua jogging belt a and “Top Fit” aqua jogging belt b. Made from 100% nylon. 71 113 5624 Each

e

e “Superior”

Aqua Jogging Belt

Unique and brand new modern design. This new style aqua aerobics belt offers maximum d ''Ergo'' Aqua Jogging Belt support in the waist area for low impact An ergonomic water jogging belt in water jogging providing you with top buoa modern design. This buoyancy belt is yancy and stability in the water. The 500 g suitable for low impact aqua jogging as it belt is really lightweight and comfortable supports the lower back. The belt can be to wear. The foam has a super soft skin adjusted to the user‘s size (belt length 135 cm) and has a snap fastener. The soft, and fits smoothly to the body. The material is very durable and can be disincoated foam, rounded edges and reinforced hip section mean this belt will fit the fected. The length of the belt (120 cm) can body perfectly. Bright yellow/orange colour. be individually adjusted with a snap fastener. 82x27.5x4 cm. Ideal for ladies, 55x20x6 cm. 71 218 0700 Each 71 238 9703 Each

f Airex® Hydro Buoy

Belt for therapy use and water gymnastics. The gentle hygienic Airex special foam fits the body‘s curves perfectly. Super soft and strong closed cell, easy dry material. Fastening belt with click-in clasp, 150 cm long. 88x40x2 cm. Available in two versions: 45 or 50. 45 (for 40-70 kg) 71 112 9700 Each

New!

h

50 (>70 kg up to max. 110 kg) 71 112 9713 Each

g 4 Maximum buyoyancy 4 Extra large 75x25x5 cm

g ''Maxi'' Aqua Jogging Belt

The extra large water jogging belt. Maximum buoyancy thanks to the extra large belt made from high quality PE foam. A wide belt with patented fastener that supports body weights of up to 120 kg. 75x27x5 cm. Belt length 160 cm. 71 225 0902 Each

166

4 Belt length 150 cm 4 Especially soft 4 Fits sizes from 60-120 cm

h ''Aqua Jogger Variosoft'' Aqua Jogging Belt

A particularly soft, skin friendly belt made from PE foam. With ridges on both sides to smoothly fit the body’s contours. Will fit waist circumferences from

60-120 cm. 100x18x5 cm. Will support up to 100 kg. Belt length 150 cm. 71 224 1702 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


The Fun Noodle

Great Value!

4 Flexible, waterproof and hygienic - the Fun Noodle ensures fun and games in all swimming pools. 4 Unbreakable special foam

4 Marbled

Buy Now! Top Rated

sport-thieme.com

Set a

New! Comfy Float Set

Fun and games with Comfy Float! This set will make your pool into a play paradise for your little guests. There is no end to the combinations that can be made. So make your pool more attractive and the set will pay for itself in no time. The set consists of: • 24 Comfy Floats b • 24 Connection pieces with 6 holes f 71 113 2029 Set

b Comfy Float / Fun Noodle

c A floating bar for water aerobics, therapy and disabled sports or just as a fun swimming aid for schools. Material: closed cell strong polyethylene foam. Comfy float is c Marble Effect Comfy Float / Fun Noodle Assorted colours in red/white and lilac/white. flexible, waterproof, hygienic and bacteria resistant. ø 7 cm, L: 160 cm. 160 cm x ø 7 cm. Colours depending on stocks. 71 113 2205 Assorted coloursEach 71 113 2263 Each Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Only to be used in water in which the child is within its depth and under adult supervision.

Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Only to be used in water in which the child is within its depth and under adult supervision.

4 The shortened version

d Pool Stick, Short Pool Noodle

Short Pool Noodle. The short version of the tried and tested Comfy Float/Fun Noodle. Ideally suited for aqua aerobics and water therapy. Extremely versatile. This shortened version of the Comfy Float is already used in many swimming pools and is part of the basic equipment for aqua aerobics classes. Very easy to store and to transport. High grade, closed cell PE foam. Length: approx. 76 cm, ø approx. 7 cm. Yellow. 71 234 0308 Each

e Compact Aqua Pool Noodle

The professional choice in aqua aerobics. More compact, more robust, even more long lasting. This improved, extremely robust model of the well-proven comfy float/fun noodle is an excellent choice for professional aqua aerobics classes. This noodle is made from more compact and stronger material than the conventional pool noodle, making it extremely durable, particularly for high usage and strain.

4 The compact design

Expert aqua aerobics instructors swear by this robust version for their classes. High quality, robust, closed cell PE foam. Length: 160 cm, ø approx. 7.5 cm. Orange. 71 234 1705 Each

Fun Noodle Accessories 4A  variety of combinations

g f

g Comfy Mat

f Comfy Connectors

Build your own play structures. The openings in the connectors mean there are endless ways of joining and building. Made from the same material as Comfy Float, approx. ø 10 cm, yellow.

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

With 8 holes for Comfy Floats. Another part of the 71 113 2335 14 cm, 2 holesEach Comfy family. Ideal for wet and dry areas. Made from 71 113 2348 22.5 cm, 4 holesEach strong, closed cell polyethylene foam. 150x50x3 cm. 71 113 2306 32 cm, 6 holesEach 71 113 2104 Each Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Only to be used in water in which the child is within its depth and under adult supervision.

Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Only to be used in water in which the child is within its depth and under adult supervision.

167


Swimming Aqua Aerobics, Aqua Therapy SharkBike Good handlebars Height of handlebar can be adjusted horizontally, 10 vertical settings

Sitting comfortably Seat height can be adjusted horizontally, 13 vertical settings

Round pedalling motion

Paddle system for ergonomic leg movements

Easy to transport

2 castors at the front of the base frame

Stands safely

4 suction cups ensure that it is extremely secure

c

4 Rebounding in the water a Shark Bike

Aqua Cycling is the new trend. It is ideal for the body and circulation. This stationary bike is made from 316 litre stainless steel and is only suitable for use in water. A certified medical product (TÜV Rheinland approved) so it is suitable for use in clinics and rehabilitation centres. Its design and handling have already won over many fitness fans. The water’s resistance when aqua training is much higher than if training with air resistance. This means: • You will reach your training target faster and with less stress on your body • The constant massage effect will help circulate blood in the skin, connective tissues and muscles • Your cardiovascular fitness is improved • Quicker recuperation after injuries and operations The many uses of the Shark Bike make it a unique training product. It is perfect for group training, physiotherapy, rehabilitation, personal fitness training programmes and professional sports people such as triathletes. 71 208 9603 Each

SharkBike Features

• Use at water depth: 110-170 cm • Total weight: 23 kg • Frame: entire frame made of stainless steel •  Base structure: frame adjustment for use in different water depths • Resistance: centrally aligned mechanism for changing the resistance to the right and left from two openings on the inner paddles

168

Aqua-NoWa Bouncer in conjunction with..

Try it Now!

SharkBike or Hydrorider Aqua Bike – Sport-Thieme supports you with the introduction of this new aqua cycling trend!

We are happy to provide you with a SharkBike or Hydrorider Aqua Bike so you can test it. Experience for yourself the high quality and the durability in training sessions. Fill in the application form now:

… Comfy Floats

… Nordic Walking Sticks

… Aqua Fitness Bands

c Underwater Trampoline

sport-thieme.com

Aqua Bouncing

Courses offered and more information on Aqua Bouncing can be found on: www.underwatertrampoline.com

Don’t forget to order:

• Comfy Floats, page 167 • Aqua Fitness Bands, page 191

A new type of sport is born. The first trampoline for bouncing underwater. New and innovative for all aqua aerobics enthusiasts. Frame structure, 28 steel springs and four V4A stainless steel removable legs. Suction cups on legs made from chlorinewater resistant rubber mix. Trampoline bed (73.5x73.5 cm) made of PVC coated mesh material. Shock absorbing frame padding made from high-quality neoprene sewn into the trampoline bed, 19 cm wide, 5 mm thick. 100x100x27 cm. 15 kg. Including demonstration DVD. 71 224 1601 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Aqua Aerobics Swimming 4 Power boxing

a Professional Aqua

Kickboxing Gloves

The latest generation of aqua kickboxing gloves. A new special design made from high quality PE foam, the surface is c Aqua Kickboxing Gloves coated, making it extremely robust. Ideal Power Boxing is the new aqua for effective training of the upper body. trend. Training is great fun and will banish Length approx. 26 cm. stress. The gloves are made from soft skin71 225 0801 Pair friendly foam with ergonomically shaped handles. 71 200 1513 Size L, length 26 cmPair 71 200 1526 Size XL, length 29 cmPair 

New!

4 For hands and feet

b Togu® Ruton Touchball

Completely new surface, with pleasant, rounded knobbles. Also suitable for people with disabilities who have problems with catching, throwing and hitting the ball. Can also be used in the water. Touching the knobbly surface stimulates the senses. 71 176 0011-1 ø 10 cm, blueEach 71 176 0082-1 ø 16 cm, blueEach 71 176 0095-1 ø 16 cm, redEach

d Aqua Fins

A new product for strength training and body shaping in aqua aerobics. Two floats are fastened to a wrist band and Velcro bands can be attached to wrist or ankle to increase the resistance. The set consists of 2 complete floats and a carrying and storing net. 71 200 0709 Set

e Aqua Disc

A must have for aqua aerobics, power fitness and much more. Training disc made from high quality foam with ergonomically shaped handle sections. Two discs produce enough buoyancy to hold one grown adult above the water. The innovative shape allows different aqua aerobics exercises.

Assorted colours. Approx. ø 25 cm, material thickness 5 cm. 71 113 0502 Assorted coloursEach 71 113 0515 BlueEach 71 113 0528 redEach 71 113 0531 YellowEach 71 113 0544 GreenEach

New! i

f Sport-Thieme®

“300” High Gloss Gymnastic Ball

• Easy to grip • Elastic • Holds its shape well, robust • Can be used in water • Secure valve, good sealing properties • ø 16.5 cm, 300 g 71 109 3807-1 blueEach 71 109 3849-1 redEach

4 Slightly curved

h Aqua Disc Pro

Innovative, versatile aqua aerobics training disc. Buoyancy and difficulty level can be adjusted for shallow and deep water by linking two discs. Suitable for men, women, teens or older people, fitness fans or athletes. One disc for professional training in shallow water or two discs will give enough buoyancy for power training in deep water. Made from high quality foam with an ergonomically g Tennis Rings Air filled, in blue and red. centred reach-through handle. Approx. For holding, pulling and throwing. ø 22 cm, thickness approx. 2 cm, yellow. 71 135 3802-1 BlueEach Weight per disc 100 g. 71 135 3815-1 RedEach 71 217 9201 Pair

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

i Aqua Fitness Discs “Happy Flower”

Say it with flowers. No more boring aqua aerobics equipment. These new and innovative aqua aerobics training discs are the latest trend. Enjoy perfect aqua aerobics training with an attractive design. The concave/convex shape of the disc generates more/less resistance in the water. When you use the convex side you generate medium resistance, with the concave side you generate medium high resistance. Extremely robust, closed cell foam. Weight per disc 200 g. ø approx. 26 cm. 71 238 9905 Pair

j Aqua Shaper

A 25 cm diameter plastic disc with an integrated handle in the middle. Ideal for aqua aerobics and keeping fit in the water. Its slightly curved shape is great for training your core muscles in chest deep water. By standing on the discs, you can twist in the water or push them lightly to the side or front. Each disc weighs approx. 450 g. 71 208 9805 Pair

169


Swimming Pool Fun Water Polo Balls j g

h

a Water Volleyball

Aluminium construction with net and tensioning equipment, 240 cm long. It can be dismantled, is easily assembled and does not tip over thanks to the stabilising

system. This set can be used at all depths for volleyball teams of up to 4:4. Includes 4 aluminium bars, 5 floats, 1 net and tensioning cords. Ball not included. 71 112 7007 Each

4 Does not tip over 4 Quick to set up

4 Easy to grip thanks to round knobbles

g Neon Rainbow Ball

A new, amazing feast of colours. The intensive colours blend into each other. Matt, non-slip surface. The “light” ball is suitable for all exercises and games in water. With needle valve. 71 109 1205-1 ø 18 cmEach 71 109 1218-1 ø 23 cmEach 71 109 1221-1 ø 27 cmEach

j

d

h Sunrise Rainbow Ball

Especially good for children. This ball is easy to catch, hold and throw. It can be individually inflated and is pleasant and easy to grip thanks to its new knobbly texture. Also suitable for gymnastics and relaxation. Can be used in water. 71 109 4334-1 ø 18 cm, 180 gEach 71 109 4347-1 ø 23 cm, 220 gEach

b

b Water Basketball Basket

Great fun for everyone, big or small, in schools, clubs or leisure time. Suitable for swimmers and non-swimmers. Can be used anywhere, quick to set up and very sturdy construction. Plastic ring with floats, hoop and net. Ball not included. 71 112 7108 Each Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Only to be used in water in which the child is within its depth and under adult supervision.

d Water Basketball Basket with Ring

Set c Water Basketball Set

Consisting of: • 2 baskets b • 1 plastic water ball j 71 112 7401 Set

e

Rust-proof plastic construction. The upper supports and ring are made from flexible plastic tubing. The complete unit is attached to an inflatable ring made from 0.5 mm thick plastic film. Fixing eyelets are welded onto the ring (ø 105 cm). Comes with nylon net. Ball not included. 71 230 3606 Each

More information on products on this page: sport-thieme.com

Goal e Water Universal goal for many school and

recreational games. It can be used in the deep end, shallow end and on the edge of the pool. Strong aluminium construction with net. Ball not included. 96.5x71x61 cm. 71 112 6903 Each

f Weights for Water Games

Set consisting of 4 weights, each 1,800 g, including 4 tensioning ropes, approx. 130 cm long. 71 112 6235-1  Set of 4

j

i i Beach Balls

For many water and beach games. Made from strong, inflatable PVC film, ø 35 cm. 71 114 1809  Price for 5

j Water Polo Ball

Plastic with non-slip surface. Weight and circumference comply with regulations. 71 108 0908 Each

170

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Educational Water Games Swimming

b Water Playbricks

a “Alphabet Soup”

Educational Water Game

Alphabet Soup has many uses in play. The letters float on the surface of the water and stick to glass, mirrors or tiles when wet. For creative games and learning. Particularly suitable for swimming schools, swimming pools, care centres and pre-schools. The letters are 18 cm high, 1 cm thick. This makes them very easy for small children’s hands to hold.

Alphabet Soup is packed in a waterproof polypropylene hollow chambered box. The set with 55 letters made from certified foam consists of the following: • 4 each of A, E, I, N, R, S • 2 each of B, D, F, G, H, K, L, M, O, T, U • 1 each of C, J, P, Q, V, W, X, Y, Z In 4 colours: red, yellow, green and blue. 71 230 3707  Set of 55

Even the smallest of children will have fun with this play brick set. Using only a few bricks, simple shapes can be made. They put no limits on creativity and imagination. Manufactured from floating, unbreakable PEM foam. The set consist of 48 size 20x10x5 cm bricks in assorted colours of yellow, green, red and blue. 71 242 2103  Set of 48 Attention! Only to be used in water in which the child is within its depth and under adult supervision.

c “Aquazoo” Swimming and Paddling Float Set

New! d “Number Soup”

Educational Water Game

A fun way to learn with numbers. A great addition to Alphabet Soup. The numbers float on the water and stick to glass, mirrors and tiles when wet. For creative learning and games. Particularly suitable for swimming schools, swimming pools, crèches and pre-schools. The numbers are 18 cm high, 2 cm thick and hence easy to grip for small children’s hands. They come

g

in a box made from waterproof PP twin walls. The set made from tested and approved foam consists of 21 numbers and 11 special characters: • 2x numbers 2-0 • 3x number 1 • Mathematical characters: 4x + or x, 5x -, 1x = and 1x / Assorted in the colours red, yellow, green and blue. 71 238 9400  32 items

Crock, Hippo and Fishy: set of three fun floats for swimming and paddling. Fun swimming and paddling floats that will inspire children’s imagination and bring more colour and fun to the pool. Made from high quality special foam. Approx. 80x35x3 cm. Assorted colours. 71 217 9214  Set of 3

e Sport-Thieme® AquaBodyRoll

The swimming Aqua-Roll guarantees lots of fun when frolicking and playing in the pool. Swim roll with strong buoyancy made from high quality PE foam. Blue/red. 95x15 cm. 71 238 9107 Each

New!

m 48 c

g f

h

Swimming Bars

64 cm

95

cm

i 92

g

f

cm

These bars were developed with fun and learning in mind, but it soon became clear how versatile they really are. The octagonal foam floats are connected to a strong bar. They can be used as building blocks to create goals for games and markings for an adventure diving area or to build swimming zones. All the swimming bars need is imagination.

c

h “Frog” Swimming Float

Make your pool more attractive by introducing new ideas. This colourful toy will add more colour to your pool and is a great source of new ideas. Made from high f Swimming Bar g Swimming Bar Float Consists of one 1 metre long bar and Octagonal foam float, ø 23 cm, with quality Plastazote. 92x64x5 cm. Blue/ two floats. six insertion holes. white. 71 112 7209 Each 71 112 7212 Each 71 112 7704 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

i Jive Float

A wave rider made from soft yet unbreakable Plastazote® foam. It can be used as a swimming or sitting float or as an aquaplane. Two colour design, 95x48x5 cm. 71 112 3803 Each

171


Swimming Water Games Equipment 4 The great value alternative!

Now Even Better

4 Material 4 Workmanship

a Buy Now! 4 Simple to attach

Top Rated

sport-thieme.com

b Sport-Thieme® “Kombi” Swimming Float

a “Giant” Swimming Float

The great value alternative: this swimming and playing float has fantastic buoyancy and stability. Available as

Simple to use and with universal applications. It can be used as a slide, bathing island or water catwalk. Ideally suited for making people at ease in the water, small children‘s swimming, club and school sports as well as special celebrations. Another advantage is that any number of floats can be combined to make a water catwalk to suit your needs. It is simple and easy to do. Just attach the first an approx. 145x100x5 cm rectangle and an float to a starting block or overflow channel and attach the rest using the four links approx. 145x95x5 cm oval. 71 112 3500 RectangularEach provided. The perfect solution for balance 71 112 3513 OvalEach exercises. 210x85x4 cm. Red. 71 112 3601 Each

b

ø 10 mm holes

4 For therapy and water familiarisation 4 Very durable d Float with Holes

c Tatami Water Mats

Tatami mats are perfect for use in the pool as a float or fun object. Their thickness is a real bonus. The mats greatly reduce the risk of accident or injury due to their highly flexible, shock absorbing qualities. Each mat is 1x1 m, 4 cm thick and

Also take a look at:

Leaning to dive, pages 150-151

Specially designed for use in therapy and familiarising people with water. Made from unbreakable Plastazote foam, very durable, with ø 10 mm holes, 95x70x1.5 cm. 71 112 3904 Each weighs 3 kg. Anti-bacterial coating, antiallergic. Also anti-slip due to the special rice straw embossing. Can be used on both sides. Colour combination: green/red, washable, waterproof. 71 119 7264-1 Each

New!

e Sport-Thieme®

Swimming Sack

Great fun for all water lovers. Swim sack made from the same tarpaulin material that is used on trucks. Extremely robust and hard-wearing. Perfect for frolicking and playing in the water. Holes at the sides for water drainage. Filled with PE foam cuttings for buoyancy. Outstanding load capacity. 120x80x20 cm. Approx. 5 kg light. Blue. 71 213 6703 Each

172

f Floating Tree Trunk

This floating imitation tree trunk is specially designed for children and young

people. Anyone who sees it will immediately want to play with it. 200 cm long, ø 16 cm. 71 114 9513 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Swimming Open top version

With lid

4 Shelves adjustable to any height a Swimming Pool Cage Trolley with Railing

Ideal for storing pool products. Thanks to its wave-effect mesh, the water can easily drip off allowing the trolley to dry quickly. The 3 shelves can be adjusted to any height. Its practical sliding doors enable

c

10

year

c REA® Plastic Equipment Storage Box Trolley

Ideal plastic storage trolley for quick and convenient storage of swim and aqua Cage Trolley aerobics equipment. Water can drain away b Aluminium a Same as , however with 2 shelves, perfectly. Can also be used for other sports you to access your items quickly. Enclosed which can be adjusted to any height, and a equipment. Easy to clean, extremely robust design in aluminium. Lockable. Capacity of capacity of 970 litres. WxHxD: 125x125x62 and sturdy. Rolls on four rubber/plastic 1,376 litres, WxHxD: 148x150x62 cm. Suicm, without rail. Suitable for wet areas. castors with two stoppers. 120x70x93 cm. table for wet areas. Contents and padlock Contents, railing and padlock not included. Available as open top version or with lid. not included. 10 year guarantee! 10 year guarantee! 71 130 9948 Open top versionEach 71 130 9906-1 Each 71 130 9977-1 Each 71 130 9951 With lidEach

guarantee

Pool Mats d Approved to DIN 51097 standards

d Pool Floor Mats

Floor mats are indispensable. They are safe for walking on in wet areas and do not spread athlete‘s foot and other fungi. They are made from shock proof plastic and are bonded together. Maximum length is 6 m, availabale widths 60, 80, 100 and 120 cm. Intermediate sizes are also available, the price for which is calculated at an additional 15% of the next largest size. Weight per square metre: 5 kg. Available in blue, green, grey and red. The underlays are always black. We will gladly send out a sample if required. Individual mats under 1 m² carry a surcharge of 20%. Blue 71 243 4807 60 cm per m 71 243 4908 80 cm per m 71 243 5002 100 cm per m 71 243 5103 120 cm per m

Grey 71 243 4823 60 cm 71 243 4924 80 cm 71 243 5028 100 cm 71 243 5129 120 cm

per m per m per m per m

Green 71 243 4810 60 cm 71 243 4911 80 cm 71 243 5015 100 cm 71 243 5116 120 cm

Red 71 243 4836 60 cm 71 243 4937 80 cm 71 243 5031 100 cm 71 243 5132 120 cm

per m per m per m per m

e

Back

per m per m per m per m

f

4 Strong and easy to clean 4 Water drains away from all angles 4 Anti-bacterial and anti4 S  oft and safe to walk on fungal effect, therefore 4 S  uitable for sauna especially hygenic areas

f “Durowalk” Pool Mats

Dampness and cosy warmth are a paradise for germs that cause dangerous diseases. There is the risk of athlete‘s foot and other infections being passed on anywhere there are many people walking bare foot through wet areas Approved to DIN day after day. “Durowalk” pool mats pre51097 standards vent bacteria and fungi from developing. The floor covering is designed in such a e Standard Mat way that the water under the mats will flow With rounded corners, for changing away at all angles. The rounded laths mean rooms or for cleaning off areas. Size 60x40 when walking on a Durowalk pool mat, it cm. Blue. feels soft underfoot and you can stand bet71 113 1707 Each ter. Width 60 cm.

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

Back

Colour: 71 112 8707 Light blue 71 112 8710 blue 71 112 8736 Grey

per m per m per m

173


Swimming Swimming Pool Equipment 168 cm

a “Igloo” Changing Cabin

c Lighthouse

Changing Cabin

Ship ahoy! A real eye catcher! Practical, universal changing cabin in the style of a lighthouse. Perfect for all beaches and bathing areas. FRP changing cabin made from high quality, fibreglass reinforced polyester resin with a polished, weather resistant and easy to clean surface. Easy to assemble. Robust construction. Offering storage space for clothing. Lockable. The cabin can be screwed or anchored into the ground at three fixing points. Height: 234 cm, ø 168 cm, approx. 80 kg. 71 229 0502 Each

234 cm

A practical universal changing cabin. Ideal for bathing beaches, lakes and lawns beside open air swimming pools. Ready for use, can be put up immediately anywhere. Made from weatherproof fibreglass reinforced plastic and with a non-tear curtain made from saran material (100% polyvinylidene chloride), incl. hooks. The igloo has a long life span without requiring maintenance work. It can simply be anchored to the ground with 5 dowels and screws. Height approx. 220 cm, ø at bottom 125 or 152 edge to edge, ø at top 105 cm. Approx. 30 kg. 25 year guarantee! 71 112 7863 Colours: redEach 71 112 7821 Colours: blueEach

b Replacement Curtain

25

year

guarantee

For “Igloo” changing cabin. Made from tear resistant saran material. (100% polyvinylidene chloride), 56 cm wide, 170 cm long. 71 112 8101 OrangeEach 71 112 8114 BlueEach

f 4 Exceptionally

g

sturdy design

Coat Hangers

i

e Leaf and Ground Net e

d Bar Shaped Pool Thermometer

Plastic, with handle. Floats vertically in the water and only the red handle protrudes. Water slits on the bottom mean the water temperature can be quickly determined. Measures up to 60 °C. Unbreakable housing. Can be used in swimming, bathing and pool areas as well as health spas. 55x12 cm. 71 229 0313 Each

Blue net skimmer with strong plastic frame. On the front of the plastic frame is a magnet, e.g. for picking up hair pins or small metal objects from the bottom of the pool. With a press clip for comfortably attaching the net to the telescopic bar. Leaf net skimmer with a flat, concave net 40x40 cm, pool net skimmer with a deeper net of 51x27 cm. Both net skimmers are compatible with the “DesignLine” telescopic bar. 71 229 0414 Leaf net skimmerEach 71 229 0427 Pool net skimmerEach

"DesignLine" Telescopic Bar

j h

Replacement Net Bag

g Clothes Hangers

Made from unbreakable plastic. Can be used for hanging many things including shoes. A net can also be attached. 44.5x43 cm. 71 200 1207 RedEach 71 200 1210 BlueEach 

f An extremely strong two-part tele-

scopic bar, anodised in glossy blue. Simh Replacement Net Bag For coat hangers. Made from 100% ple to tighten and loosen the plastic screw nylon with crocheted edges, fits all using the large screw handles. 1.80-3.60 hangers. Dark blue. m. Suitable for net skimmers. 71 229 0401 Each 71 112 8202 Each

m Finis® k Disposable Shoe Covers

“Underwater Pace Clock” Swimming Training Clock

With a clamp fastening made from robust plastic. 12 mm wide, approx. 27 cm long. 71 112 9306 BlueEach 71 112 9319 YellowEach 71 112 9335 RedEach

j Aluminium Number Plate

Accessory for the locker and key bands. Anodised and engraved aluminium number plates. Please submit numbers when placing your order. Price per 100. 71 112 9348 Each

n Lap Counter

The waterproof clock allows for an optimal Made from plastic film with rubber workout. With the large 12 inch display, the bands, suitable for all shoe sizes up to 45. l Re-Usable Shoe Covers number can be read from far away. Can be For use in sports halls, swimming pools Very strong and flexible, with non-slip used both out of and under the water. With and museums. 100 in bag with perforation design on bottom. PVC material. One size removable bar (approx. 78 cm) and integrafor easy removal. ted stand. Includes a 9 V battery. fits all up to size 45. 71 112 0501  100 covers 71 112 0602 Pair 71 239 6705 Each

174

i Locker and Key Bands

Display complies with FINA/DSV for medium to long distances. Displays the lengths still to be swum for 25 or 50 m pools. Proven by use at World and European championships. Made from impact resistant plastic with large numbers and integrated handle. Strong. 71 224 7205 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Swimming Lane and Marking Lines Swimming Swimming Lane Lines

Marking Lines b

c Find more at:

b Lane Dividers

sport-thieme.com

a Swimming Lane Lines

For marking individual swimming lanes. All lane dividers have white and red tubular ball floats that need no maintenance and are always ready to be used. They are made from 100% polypropylene. This material does not rot, is buoyant and will not stretch. The floats are approx. 90x70 mm. Snap hooks at either end for line attachment with an additional figure of 8 shackle at one end.

Lane Markers, with distanced tubular ball floats

Tubular balls are securely attached to the line. 10 year guarantee. A float every 100 cm 71 114 2600-3 25 mEach 71 114 2613-3 50 mEach

Accessories

Snap hook

Figure of 8 shackle

Hostalen floats: every 25 cm 71 114 4417  A float every 50 cm 71 114 2600-2 25 mEach Hostalen floats: every 50 cm 71 114 2613-2 50 mEach 71 114 4420  A float every 25 cm 71 114 2600-1 25 mEach 71 114 2613-1 50 mEach

International Standard Lane Markers

New! Floor Inlet for Swim-

ming Lines with Guiding Pulley

per m

Individual Tubular Floats

Available in 4 versions: per m For swimming lines: • Red, with 8 mm holes d • White, with 8 mm holes e For marking lines: • Red, with 12 mm holes f • White, with 12 mm holes g

ø of each ball 7 cm, length: 9 cm, 60 g per ball. With closely packed tubular ball floats, 114 5104 5 meter red balls on both ends, white d 71 Lane Marker End Hooks c Red, with 8 mm holesEach middle. 10 year guarantee. Double sided snap hooks (stain114 5117 71 114 2600-0 25 mEach e 71 White, with 8 mm holesEach 71 114 2613-0 50 mEach less steel) and 1 additional adjustable figure of 8 shackle (rust-proof VA material). 71 114 5120 71 114 4808 Each f Red, with 12 mm holesEach g 71 114 5133 White, with 12 mm holesEach j New! Ground

Inlet for Swimming Line

h

Available with red and white Hostalen floats. Please order the end hooks (illustration 3) at the same time. 12 mm thick rope. Hostalen floats: ball on ball 71 114 4404  per m

For feeding through swimming lane lines to the floor, made from 3 mm thick round tube, with waterproof cover. Attaching eyelet for mounting to the swimming line, can only be opened with a special key. Tube size: ø 170 mm, length: 450 mm. Stainless steel V4A (1.4571) K400 polished. Hole: 190 mm. 71 242 2507 Each

For the inlet of swimming lines into the floor. Made from 3 mm thick round tube, with waterproof cover. Attaching eyelets for holding the swimming line, with fold out pulley (protects the swimming line and k Line Holder Aluminium line holder, makes operation easier), can only be 150 mm long with attaopened with a special key. Tube size: ching loop. For use in ø 220 mm. 450 mm. Stainless steel V4A ground socket (see page (1.4571) K400 polished. Hole: 240 mm. 71 242 2608 Each 177 j). For attaching lines and water games. ø 40 mm, for ø 42 mm ground socket. 71 225 5428 Each

Also take a look at:

Competition Lines, page 176-177

Transport Trollies n

p

o q

l Lane Marker Holders

i

New! Collection Tank for

Floor Inlet

Collection tank for swimming lane lines with floor inlet. Tank, conically round, for a clean insertion of swimming lane lines including suspension cables, fixtures and fittings. Design: for 25 m or 50 m swimming lane lines. Tank made from fibreglass reinforced plastic. 71 242 2709 For 25 m swimming linesEach 71 242 2712 For 50 m swimming linesEach

Made from 2VA rust-proof material. For swimming lane lines with snap hook ends. 71 114 4909 Each

m Suction Cup Holder

For fixing ropes or water games. It attaches to all smooth surfaces (minimum size 12x12 cm) and can therefore be used anywhere, a holder is needed in the pool. Diameter of suction cup 13 cm. Will support a load of up to 80 kg. 71 112 6509 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

n Aluminium Reel

p Reel

90 cm wide reel for swimming lane Aluminium reel, will hold two 25 m lines, will take approx. one 50 m long ball normal swimming lane lines. Surface: untreated aluminium. Reel ø: approx. 0.98 m. on ball line or approx. two 25 m ball on 71 114 5410 Each ball lines. Hot dip galvanised with 6 spokes. 71 114 5407 Each Aluminium Reel Trolley

o

A reel trolley that can be taken apart. Made from strong aluminium tubing, so that the reel can be stored without damaging the swimming lines. Surface: untreated aluminium. Size: approx. 1.30x0.80x1.17 m. 71 114 5537 Each

q Reel Trolley

With rubber tyre disc wheels for transporting reels and simplifying putting down and taking up lines. Hot dip galvanised, without reel. 71 114 5508 Each

175


“Competitor” Competition Lane Dividers

10 cm

15 cm

Certified to LEN:

''Competitor'' Competition Lines

Used in the Olympic Games and high level competitions. With these lane dividers, manufactured to FINA and LEN standards, you have the optimal competition conditions, which of course are essential for top performance. The plastic discs are retained on a rust-proof steel wire rope. These lines have the best water calming performance. The discs break the waves before they can cause turbulence in the neighbouring lanes. The turnbuckle is covered with a cap and at the other end, there is a balancing spring to ensure that it lies well on the water. Standard colours red/ white/blue (with 5 m red at each end, centre alternates between white and blue.) Other colours are available on request: surcharge approx. 10%. 4 different versions: Competitor Standard, floats ø 10 cm • 25 m a • 50 m b Competitor Gold, floats ø 15 cm • 25 m c • 50 m d a 71 114 3704 Competitor Standard 25 mEach

b c d

71 114 3717 Competitor Standard 50 mEach 71 114 3906 Competitor Gold 25 mEach 71 114 3919 Competitor Gold 50 mEach

Accessories

for “Competitor” Competition Lane Dividers 4 Can be printed with your logo

e Lane Number

j Aluminium Trolley

For a choice of: • Approx. 6x 25 m Competitor “Gold”or Anti “Maxi” swimming lane lines, ø 15 cm • 12x 25 m Competitor “Standard” or Anti “Midi” swimming lane lines, ø 10 cm • 24 lane dividers with the standard float formation 2.45x1.18x1.50 m. 10 year guarantee! 71 114 5726 Each

j

10

k Aluminium Trolley year

guarantee

k

Particularly sturdy, easy to roll up and roll out the lane dividers, very easy to transport and convenient storage. Holds a choice of: • 3x 25 m Competitor Gold or Anti “Maxi” swimming lane lines, ø 15 cm • 6x 25 m Competitor “Standard” or Anti “Midi” swimming lane lines, ø 10 cm • 12 lane dividers with the standard float formation. 1.78x1.18x1.37 m. 10 year guarantee! 71 114 5700 Each

l

10 176

year

guarantee

Aluminium Trolley

For a choice of: • 2x 25 m Competitor “Gold”or Anti “Maxi” swimming lane lines, ø 15 cm • 4x 25 m Competitor “Standard” or Anti “Midi” swimming lane lines, ø 10 cm • 8 lane dividers with the standard float formation. Not illustrated, 1.40x1.40x1.35 m. 10 year guarantee! 71 114 5713 Each

For “Competitor” Competition Lines. Clear lane recognition is indispensable for any major event. Referees, those involved, the public and press will thank you for it. Soft foam board with screen printed number. Counter weights ensure an upright position in the water. Weights and numbers screw onto the line. Please inform us of the numbers of lanes and lines when placing your order. Competitor Standard ø 10 cm 71 242 2406 Each Competitor Gold ø 15 cm 71 242 2419 Each

g f

h i

f Replacement Rope

For 25 m “Competitor” lane dividers 71 150 6310 Each

Replacement Rope

For 50 m “Competitor” lane dividers 71 150 6307 Each

g Turnbuckle

For “Competitor” lane dividers 71 150 6323 Each

h Balancing Spring

For “Competitor” lane dividers 71 150 6336 Each

i Socket Spanner

For “Competitor” lane dividers 71 150 6349 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Racing Lane Lines Swimming nes

“Anti” Competition Li

The new generation of competition lines - made for the future!

“Anti” Competition Lane Dividers “Anti” Lines: The new generation in competition lane dividers. Made for the future. The original “Anti” competition lane dividers are said to be the most effective in the world. During the Olympic games in Sydney alone, 15 world records were broken in pools with the “Anti” swimming lane lines. Made to FINA and LEN standards for national and international championships. The geometry of the UV resistant polypropylene discs is an effective barrier against the waves. Floats made from high performance polyethylene. Stainless steel rope for more safety and for continuous use. Ratchet-free tensioning mechanism. Comes as standard in red/white/blue (5 m red at each end, middle alternating between white and blue). Other colour combinations are available on request and at an extra charge.

Midi floats, ø 10 cm

Available in four versions. Anti Wave Midi, floats ø 10 cm • 25 m a • 50 m b Anti Wave Maxi, floats ø 15 cm • 25 m c • 50 m d 225 3406 a 71 Anti Wave Midi 25 mEach 225 3419 b 71 Anti Wave Midi 50 mEach 225 3422 c 71 Anti Wave Maxi 25 mEach 225 3435 d 71 Anti Wave Maxi 50 mEach

Maxi floats, ø 15 cm

Accessories

for “Antiwave” competition lines

New!

e Turnbuckle

For “Antiwave” competition lines. The turnbuckle is easy to use without any tools. Also compatible with other swimming lane lines. 71 242 2305 Each

Competition Accessories

h Bunting

Back stroke indicator g. Made from flag fabric. Two flags per metre. Flag size 18x27.5 cm. Please state width of pool when ordering. 71 114 4101  per m

f False Start Display Unit

Set with two anodised aluminium posts with loop on one post and a release hook on the other post. Length 160 cm, 150 cm above ground sockets. Ropes and ground sockets not included. 71 225 5516 Set

g Back Stroke Visibility Unit

Set with four aluminium posts with attaching loops. Length 190 cm, 180 cm above ground sockets. Bunting and ground sockets not included. 71 225 5503 Set

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

i Line for False Start Unit

Polyester line ø 6 mm with two floats per metre, one in white and one red. Comes with snap hook and figure of 8 hook. Please state width of pool when ordering. 71 114 4303  per m

j Ground Sockets

Aluminium ground sockets with cover. For backstroke alerts, false start indicators, water polo goals and line holders. Insertion depth 100 mm. ø 42 mm, for ø 40 mm tubing. 71 225 5415  Set of 2

177


Swimming Training Clocks, Pool Equipment Training Clocks and Stopwatches 90 cm

4 Unbreakable synthetic glass

New!

60 cm

b

30 cm

a “Time” Training Clock

c

New!

Quartz clock, can therefore be used anywhere. Strong housing, approx. 30x30 cm with a light dial and 4 hands each in a 67 cm different colour. Start/stop switch on the Prima Super Training Clock b housing. Batteries included. A robust training clock designed for 71 210 0207 Each continuous use. Shows one 60 second cycle. Cross of hands in 4 colours. Strong aluminium housing with Perspex front. Face: black numbers on a yellow background. Electrically powered (24 V) with 20 metre lead. Protective transformer with mains plug. Two versions available: 67x67 cm, free-standing or 90x90 cm to be attached to wall without fixtures and fittings. 71 112 6408 67x67 cmEach 71 112 6411 90x90 cmEach

60 cm

Training Clock with Minute and Second Display

Training Clock with 4-Handed Second Display

e Training Clock with Minute and Second Hands

d Training Clock with Crossed Second Hands

Water resistant quartz clock. This training clock will enable you to see the intermediate times in swimming training and warm ups. Each swimmer takes their own times. The four hands, each in a different colour, show the time that has passed. One full rotation takes 60 seconds. 60x60 cm. 12 cm deep. White. Stands for “Prima Super” Available in two designs: c Training Clocks • Battery operated 1.5 V: Portable, can be The training clock will be particularily used anywhere. On/off switch. Can be put stable with these stands. Can also be used at the pool edge or hung on the wall. outdoors in windy conditions. Stainless • Mains operated 230 V: For permanent steel with inner lining. Suitable for fixing to the wall, mains power supply. 67x67 cm and 90x90 cm clocks. 71 230 4801 Battery operated 1.5 VEach 71 112 6424  Set of 2 71 230 4814 Mains operated 230 VEach

f f

New!

New! g 178

The training clocks de are also available in stainless steel housing – resistant to salt water and chlorine – and with luminous clock face! Enquiries:

Tel. +49 5357-181543 www.sport-thieme.com

New! Free-standing Shower

Complete unit made from thick walled stainless steel tubing with chromed, integrated rain shower head, includes 1/2‘‘ time valve and tap for connecting the hose. Height: 243 cm. Water outlet height: 225 cm, depth 53 cm. V4A stainless steel, electro-polished and glassbead blasted. Base plate (with 4 holes) for mounting. Water connection via integrated patented coupling valve. This timeless model has been popular for several years and is a very reliable outdoor shower. Thanks to its high quality, electrically polished surface and strong frame this shower is extremely well protected against corrosion and vandalism. During winter, you only need to unscrew the time valve to avoid frost damage. 71 242 3005 Each

g

Same as d, but displays the elapsed time in minutes and seconds. The minute hand is black, the second hand is red with an “eyelet”. 71 230 4902 Battery operated 1.5 VEach 71 230 4915 Mains operated 230 VEach

New! Lifeguard

Observation Chair

Extremely stable, sturdy construction. Maintenance free - made from aluminium. Seat and supporting parts can be folded down for space saving storage. Ladder with wide and non-slip steps. Its base ensures secure positioning. Sit comfortably even for longer periods thanks to anatomically designed plastic bucket seat, with holes. UV resistant. Includes weatherproof plastic notice board, storage net and 2 coat hooks. Seat height: 202 cm, 240x70x153 cm. 14 kg. Will support up to 100 kg. 71 242 3106 Each

h Fibreglass Diving Board

A specially produced diving board, with great spring, for daily use in pools and for general sport use. The board is resistant to dampness, is robust, flexible and maintenance-free. The silicone carbide cover gives it good grip. We recommend that it should be sprinkled with water on a daily basis to clean the upper surface. The following are included for assembly: • fixing bolts • upper panel • rubber intermediate panel The illustrated orange bottom section is not included.

Order information

All diving boards listed are delivered without any substructure.

5

year guarantee

4 Complies with DIN 13451-10 5 year stability guarantee if properly assembled. 71 112 2709 4.0 mEach 71 112 2712 4.5 mEach 71 112 2725 4.8 mEach

Diving Boards

50 cm wide. Only the most flawless end brackets and sub-structures will guarantee a long life span for your diving boards! Therefore we recommend: When purchasing a new board also buy a new end bracket. This ensures maximum safety.

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Water Polo Swimming More water polo goals online: sport-thieme.com

a

sport-thieme.com

b Goal net

4 Free floating 4 Collapsible  net brackets

d Mikasa® “W6000W” Men's

a Aluminium Water Polo Goal

3x0.9x1.35 m stable construction, posts made of 80x40 mm tubing, real enamel finish in white, collapsible net brackets, enabling compact storage. Goals incl. rust-proof screw-in net hooks, with aluminium net brackets. Front bevelled floats ensure it will not sink. Free floating. Goal nets not included. 71 112 7603 Pair

Water Polo Ball

FINA Game Ball. Official game ball of the Olympic Games, World and European championships. Best playing characteris® tics thanks to the high quality and particu- e Mikasa “W6009W” Ladies' Water Polo Ball larly non-slip special rubber. New design for improved visibility. Circumference 68-71 FINA Game Ball. Circumference 65-67 cm, 400-450 g. cm, 400-450 g. 71 108 1031 Each 71 108 1044 Each

Accessories

b Water Polo Goal Net

Polyethylene, 3 mm, not illustrated. Green. 3x1x0.8x0.8 m. 71 112 7906 Pair

Great Value!

Top Rated

sport-thieme.com

Buy Now!

f Conti® Water Polo Ball

c “Fun” Water Polo Goal

Made from high frequency welded very durable, strong and UV resistant canvas material (the same material as in rafting boats, 2.5 mm thick). Includes hand

pump, repair kit, two tensioning cords and a carrying bag. 200x100x100 cm. Weight per goal approx. 9 kg. 71 112 6802 Pair

g Water Polo Ball

Plastic with non-slip surface. Weight Excellent grip thanks to the special and circumference comply with regularubber coating and strong fluted surface tions. texture. Orange/yellow. Men‘s: circumfe71 108 0908 Each rence 68-71 cm, 400-450 g, Ladies‘: circumference 65-67 cm, ® 400-450 g, Sport-Thieme 71 108 1057 WP 5, Men'sEach 71 108 1060 WP 4, Ladies'Each Variety Water polo caps and equipment on: www.sport-thieme.com

Water Polo Timers New!

100 cm

New!

New!

i

New! Stramatel® “W-Top”

Water Polo Scoreboard

Portable, mains independent scoreboard that can be used anywhere. The board runs off the integrated battery. With a con150 cm venient LCD display, folding control panel j New! Stramatel® “SC30 ® h New! Stramatel on the back of the board. Displays: score, Eco” 30 Second Timer play time, pause time, time-outs and timer “452 PS 900” period, play time and time-outs. Number For timing ball possession. Incl. 2 in minutes and seconds. Digit height 16 height 9 cm, range of vision 35 m. With Water Polo Scoreboard digital displays with a digit height of and 15 cm, range of vision 60 m. With klaklaxon 86 dBA with a 3 m range. WxHxD: Radio controlled, electronic score 20 cm, 2 control cables and a control panel xon 116 dBA in a range of 1 m. WxHxD: 70x31x11 cm, approx. 6 kg. board for Water Polo sports, to be mounwith klaxon. 150x100x9 cm, approx. 24 kg. ted to the wall. Displays: score, period, 71 131 7103 Each 71 131 7204 Each 71 131 7305 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

179


Swimming Lifesaving b

e

a DLRG Lifesaving Belt

c

d 4 100% cotton

a Swimmer's Suit for Lifesaving

A suit for different training exercises, raw white, c Lifesaving Ball 100% cotton, plain, trousers without braces with two Styrofoam, ø 30 cm, polypropylene net with strong pockets, jacket with covered buttons, one chest pocket loop for attaching a rope, also suitable for swimming and two side pockets. Suit weight approx 240 g/m². 71 114 0008 40Each lessons. 71 114 0011 44Each 71 114 1405 Each 71 114 0024 48Each 71 114 0037 52Each d Safety Rope ø approx. 7 mm, one end has a snap hook and float 71 114 0040 56Each while the other has a strap. Made from pure polypropyb DLRG Lifesaving Belt lene, 20 m. Adjustable, therefore suitable for all sizes. This 71 114 1607 Each belt secures the lifeguard when in action. The rescue line attaches to the lifeguard reducing the risk. Rescue line e ''Baywatch'' Rescue Torpedo not included. The original top quality Baywatch style rescue tor71 113 7200 Each pedo. Foamed thermoplast material for lasting propulsion. 66x23x12.5 cm. 1.5 kg. Comes with rope and shoulder strap. Recommended for outside use. 71 114 0910 Each

f

Megaphones

f Lifesaving Poles

Made from light alloy tubing, ø 4.2 cm catching loop ø 43 cm firmly attached, extremely durable. 71 114 2105 2.80 mEach 71 114 2118 5.30 mEach

New!

g

New! Rescue Throw Bag

Compact and easy to carry, with Velcro fastening to attach to trouser belt. With an 18 m throwline. The weight makes it accurate to throw. Also suitable for use on boats and canoes. 71 243 1000 Each

h Waterproof Hand Megaphone

h

Maximum output 25 watts. This unique waterproof hand megaphone is perfect for intensive use in swimming, water sports and sailing. Made from ASA plastic, extremely handy and very light at only 1.1 kg. In open spaces sound will travel up to 1,000 m. Can be used for up to six hours. 32 cm long, powered by 6 (UM 2) batteries. Batteries not included. Red, with siren. 71 114 6716 Each

i

i Hand Megaphone j

g

4 With a siren

l

Max. output 25 W. Will reach up to 1,000 m in open air, approx. 38 cm long, 1.6 kg. Power source: 6x baby cell batteries (UM2). Batteries are not included. With a siren. 71 114 6400 Each

j Shoulder Megaphone

20 watt output. Handy design, for halls and external use. Will reach up to approx. 250 m, 33 cm long, no siren. Batteries not included. Weight: approx. 2 kg. 71 114 6107 Each

k Hand Megaphone k 180

Max output 12 W. Will reach up to 500 m in open air, approx. 32 cm, 1 kg. Power source: 8 Mignon cell (UM3) batteries. Batteries not included. 71 114 6309 Each

l “UltraSPINE” Lifesaving Board

Special carrier for injuries of the spinal column. Stable, light, it floats and can be used in a number of ways, made from high density polyethylene with a solid surface. Device for rapidly securing the head restraint, can be used for x-rays, CT and MRI scan compatible, CE certified. Includes 3 patient securing belts. 1830x450x45 mm, 7.5 kg 71 221 0403 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Lifesaving Swimming Find more at: sport-thieme.com

100 cm

a

a

c

New!

b

New! Lifesaving Dummy

Made to international regulations. Made from impact resistant plastic. Height approx. 100 cm. Interchangeable weight approx 8 kg. Special plug for complete draining. Orange with contrast colour on the head and body. 3 filling levels, with line attachment. When used in the water, it is comparable to an adult person. Can be used for head, upper arm and cross chest tow. 71 243 1101 Each

d

e

b “Standard” Lifebuoy

Manufactured from hard plastic. Complying with EN 14144 standards. 75x45 cm, 2.5 kg for day/night markers, comes with 4 reflective stripes and a holding rope the whole way round. 14.5 kp load bearing capacity. 71 206 8129 Each

c Lifebuoy for Boating and General Watersports

Made from flame retardant polystyrene, white ø 8 mm PP holding cord, oil resistant. 3 versions available: • 12  kp load capacity, white, outer ø 65 cm, inner ø 38 cm • 10  kp load capacity, red/white, outer ø 60 cm, inner ø 38 cm • 22  kp load capacity, red/white, outer ø 75 cm, inner ø 45 cm. 12 kp load capacity, white 71 114 0705 Each 10 kp load capacity, red/white 71 114 0750 Each 22 kp load capacity, red/white 71 114 0718 Each

New!

d Lifebuoy Holder

Made from aluminium, complies with EN 12145, version B for attaching to wall or rail, including cuffs for attaching to rails. 71 114 0747 Each

e Perryline

Floating polypropylene rope with a tear resistance of up to 250 kg, in a plastic container. Suitable for use with all lifesaving rings with an outer ø of 75 cm and an inner ø of 45 cm. Tidy storage of the rope in the container, also protecting it from environmental impact. Length of rope 30 m. The Perryline is attached to the ring with a loop. When throwing the lifesaving ring into the water, you‘ll keep the Perryline container in your hands, enabling you to uncoil the rope tidily and without it tangling up. 71 243 1303 Each

Don‘t forget to order this!

g

New! Sports Rest Tube

The Sports Restube is suitable for confident swimmers providing them with additional safety in the open water. It is the ideal companion for popular water sports such as kite surfing, wind surfing, stand-up-paddle and surfing. Simply buckle up the small back onto your hip f Lifesaving Night Light Electric LED night light. Includes holder. Retrospecevery time you go into the water. In a dangerous situation, tively fitted to the lifebuoy with a cord. Just pull the cord pull firmly on the release mechanism and within a few on the night light through a loop on the lifebuoy and tie a seconds it will fill with air. Hold onto it firmly or use the knot. Attached to the lifebuoy, the light will get actiwhistle to attract attention. Reusable by inserting a new vated and float vertically as soon as the lifebuoy has been gas cartridge. Approx. 75x20 cm, packed size: 14x7x5 cm, thrown into the water. 250 g, red bag. 71 114 0763 Each 71 242 8707 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

New!

181


Fitness Nordic Walking

Accessories 4 For up to 15 pairs of poles

e Pole Bag

For up to 15 pairs of poles. 140x29x29 cm. Poles not included. 100% polyester. 71 204 2709 Each

Great Product! 4 Telescopic, especially compact

New!

New!

4 With a clip for attaching to a belt or pocket f New! Digital Pedometer For measuring the distance when walking or jogging. Shows time of day, steps, distance or calories. Folding case with clip for attaching to belt or pocket, only weighing 26 g. 71 146 1174-1 Each

a

b

c

d

g Leki® Trigger 1 Hand Strap

a Axess® Telescopic Nordic

Easy to clip on and off. Compatible for all Leki poles with Trigger 1 straps (e.g. Amero, Response, Supreme). Adjustable universal size M/L/XL. 71 198 7616 Pair

Walking Poles

This 3 piece compact pole will fit in any rucksack and is therefore ideal for bringing along when going touring. Also suitable for small adults or children. The loops have a thumb guide and the length of the stick can be adjusted. Hardened aluminium with Nordic walking rubber pads. Length: 65-140 cm. 245 g per stick. Axess top quality from Sweden! 71 201 3901 Pair

b Leki® “Smart Traveller”

d Axess® “W40” Nordic c Axess® “W50” Adjustable

Walking Poles

Inexpensive, high quality branded pole for Aluminium Nordic Walking Nordic Walking Poles beginners and health-conscious recreatiThis practical telescopic pole combines onal athletes. Ergonomically shaped foam Poles rubber handle with adjustable strap and The handy pole to take with you anywhere, quality from Sweden and long standing experience in Nordic walking. The pole thumb section. Hardened airplane alumifits into almost every suitcase/rucksack! length and the ergonomically shaped hand nium and optimised pole diameter guaSuper-Lock-System for individual and safe strap are both individually adjustable, rantee perfect pole handling and great adjustment of the pole length. Very light making it the ideal pole for the whole transmission of strength. Perfect grip at all and with top swing characteristics thanks times thanks to removable asphalt pads. to the special aluminium alloy. Removable, family and for club use. Optimal swing characteristics thanks to its special 71 200 0507 105 cmPair breathable Trigger Shark-Strap. Guaranhardened aluminium. With safety reflectors 71 200 0510 110 cmPair teed holding load of over 140 kg. Packed and removable asphalt pads. 71 200 0523 115 cmPair size (collapsed): 52 cm. Telescopic length: L: 85-140 cm. 194 g/stick. 71 200 0536 120 cmPair 62-130 cm. 71 239 0202 Pair 71 201 8108 Pair 71 200 0549 125 cmPair  Model Uses Telescopic Fixed length Length Material Weight (115 cm) Handle Strap Tip

Special features Product code

182

d Axess “W40” recreational athletes • 105-120 cm aluminium 184 g foam rubber hand loop steel tip / asphalt pad inexpensive pole for beginners 71 200 0507 ff.

j

h

c Axess “W40” recreational athletes •

85-140 cm aluminium 194 g foam rubber hand loop steel tip / asphalt pad height can easily be adjusted, pole for beginners 71 201 8108

a Axess Telescopic Pole universal Great • Product! 65-140 cm aluminium 245 g foam rubber hand loop steel tip / asphalt pad ideal pole for rucksacks and travel 71 201 3901

b Leki “Smart Traveller” universal •

62-130 cm aluminium HTS 6.5 230 g plastic cork Shark (quick release system) smart tip professional pole, ideal for travel and holidays 71 239 0202

k

i

h Leki Silent Spike Pad ®

Optimal grip on almost any surface thanks to the six integrated spikes. Leki Silent Spike pads have four times the lifespan of normal asphalt pads. 71 198 7632 For Leki polesPair 71 239 0303 For Exel, Axess, etc.Pair

i Leki® “Powergrip” Asphalt Pads

The rubber pad for all Leki Nordic walking poles. Ideal swing characteristics and optimum adhesion thanks to its new shape and vulcanised material. 71 198 7658 Pair

j Leki® Smart Tip Pads

Replacement rubber pad for all Leki Smart poles (e.g Smart Traveller, Smart Carbon, etc.). 71 198 7661 Pair

k Axess® Asphalt Pads

71 201 3536 Pair

l Axess® Steel Tips

71 201 3549 Pair

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

l


Nordic Walking, Nordic Blading Fitness

a Leki® “Smart Carbon” Nordic Walking Poles

Very light poles made from 100% carbon with perfect swing characteristics. The breathable Trigger Shark strap is very comfortable and can be attached and released within seconds with a click system. Sweat absorbing cork handles guarantee great grip. Perfect grip on the ground thanks to Smart Tip pads. 71 239 0101 100 cmPair 71 239 0114 105 cmPair 71 239 0127 110 cmPair 71 239 0130 115 cmPair 71 239 0143 120 cmPair 71 239 0156 125 cmPair

b Leki® “Titanium Vario” Nordic Blading Poles

Ideal for blading or skating. Extremely strong yet light poles from specially hardened aluminium alloy. Can be adjusted to any height from 155-175 cm. Suitable for people who are approx. 170-195 cm tall. Extremely safe: when pressure is too high the Shark strap is released from the pole shaft. 71 215 5904 Pair

Trigger 1 quick release strap

New! a

b

c

d Adjustment mechanism

c Leki® “Amero”

Nordic Walking Poles

You will appreciate these! Light, elegant, 60% carbon poles with perfect swing characteristics and yet high stability. The ergonomic Cortec Trigger handles made from comfortable cork are angled for the 15° correction zone. With releasable straps. 71 208 3302 105 cmPair 71 208 3315 110 cmPair 71 208 3328 115 cmPair 71 208 3331 120 cmPair 71 208 3344 125 cmPair  ®

d Leki Nordic Walking Poles “Response”

Affordable original Leki poles for beginners and health-conscious recreational athletes. With ergonomically shaped Cortec handles and releasable Trigger straps. Perfect grip at all times thanks to the removable asphalt pads. Good swing characteristics thanks to specially hardened aluminium alloy. 71 208 3605 100 cmPair 71 208 3618 105 cmPair 71 208 3621 110 cmPair 71 208 3634 115 cmPair 71 208 3647 120 cmPair 71 208 3650 125 cmPair 71 208 3663 130 cmPair  ®

e Leki “Supreme” Nordic Walking Poles

The fast seller among Nordic walking poles. Individual and safe adjustment of pole length thanks to the patented Super Lock adjusting system. Super light thanks to smallest possible tubing diameter and the special hardened aluminium alloy. Strong and convenient. The handle is ergonomically angled for the 15° correction zone. Comes with instructions for use and Nordic walking rubber stoppers. Guaranteed to support over 140 kg. Length: 100130 cm, each pole weighing 222 g. With releasable straps. 71 198 0905 Pair

e

Nordic Walking

Cross country skiing without the skis is the joint friendly alternative to jogging. Particularly if you are looking for a stress-free and skid-proof way of upping your fitness levels. It is also a good workout preparing for winter sports. The arm/pole work provides targeted strength and stamina training for the whole chest, shoulder, arm area. This method of training will use up to 40% more calories than normal walking.

Exclusive to Sport-Thieme® Great Product!

4 Sport-Thieme® best-seller 4 Adjustable length

The Right Pole Length Pole length = 0.66 x user‘s height. Your pole is the right length when you can hold it with the arm almost at a 90° angle, as shown in the illustration.

Model Uses Telescopic Fixed length Length Material Weight (115 cm) Handle Strap Tip Special features Product code

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

d Leki “Response” recreational athletes • 100-130 cm aluminium HTS 6.0 200 g cork look Trigger 1 hard metal Flex tip / Powergrip pad for ambitious recreational athletes 71 208 3605 ff.

Rosi Mittermaier and Christian Neureuther train with Leki poles! e Leki “Supreme” universal Great • Product! 100-130 cm aluminium HTS 5.5 212 g cork look Trigger 1 hard metal Flex tip / Powergrip pad best-selling pole from Sport-Thieme 71 198 0905

c Leki “Amero” fitness • 105-125 cm 60% carbon 185 g cork look Trigger 1 hard metal Flex tip / Powergrip pad ideal pole for regular training sessions 71 208 3302 ff.

b Leki “Titanium Vario” a Leki “Smart Carbon” Nordic blading coaches, professionals • • 155-175 cm aluminium HTS 6.5 297 g plastic cork Shark (click-off) Safety tip

100-125 cm 100% carbon 170 g plastic cork Shark (click-off) Smart tip

very robust pole for blading 71 215 5904

professional pole for coaches 71 239 0101 ff.

183


Fitness

b

b XCO® Alu Premium Studio / Shape Set

Set a

3 different uses in just 1 training set! • Training at home/group fitness • Indoors on the treadmill • Outdoors for walking & running The aluminium XCO premium Shape set consists of two of the smallest XCO-Trainers – also known as XCO-Trainer Walking & Running – and the corresponding hand straps with Thermo handles for an even better grip. 71 204 1692 Pair

New! XCO® Club Set

The set contains 12 XCO® Studio/ Shape sets and a voucher for the training course to become a XCO® group fitness instructor. 71 203 6003 Set

New! New!

c XCO® ALUMINIUM

Premium Set incl. 2 training programmes on DVD

The set includes: • 1 x pair aluminium XCO premium set b • 2 x hand straps • 1 x “Home Training” workout plan

• 1 x “Walking & Running” pocket size workout plan • 1 x DVD XCO Walking & Running • 1 x DVD XCO Shape 71 204 5506 Set

d XCO® Walking & Running Belt

2 pockets for storing the XCOTrainers, 2 pockets for keys, workout plan, Mp3 player, etc. and one large pocket for storing a water bottle. 71 204 5519 Each

T-Bow® trains: 4 coordination 4 stability 4 endurance 4 strength

4 Ideal for studios and clubs

Sets

® Dynamic Drums Set g Togu The ideal addition for the 10 piece

group set or for individuals training at home. The set consists of: • 1 Drums ball • 1 Drums ball base • 2 Drums sticks 71 160 0009 Set

h

Set

e T-Bow® Training and Therapy Arch

The T-Bow is a multifunctional training and therapy arch for beginners and advanced athletes, adults and children, competitive athletes and older people. The training and therapy arch T-Bow is for improving stamina, strength, coordination, stability and flexibility. Because of its design it is “solid” and perfectly suited for cardiovascular training as well as a base for a wide variety of strength-

184

ening exercises. Upside down it is a see-saw - and an ideal piece of equipment for effective, coordinating and joint stabilising exercises. Light, robust design, stackable and space saving, easy to transport. LxW: 70x50 cm, 3.2 kg, Orange/blue. 71 225 1905 Each

f T-Bow® Set

The set contains: • 1 T-Bow training and therapy arch • 1 pair of elastic bands (2x 2 m) perfect for use at home • 1 T-Bow DVD with 6 different workouts 71 225 1918 Set

New! Togu® Dynamic

Drums 10 Piece Set

The new fitness concept! Make your workouts even more dynamic with this set, specially compiled for group workouts in studios and clubs. The aim is to combine all the classic aerobics elements with vigorous and rhythmic drumming to music. This way, fat burning exercises will be fun! The set consists of: • 10 Drum balls • 10 Drum ball bases • 20 Drum sticks 71 160 0012 Set

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Gymstick, Flowin, Bosu Fitness

a Gymstick™ Power Wheelz Pro The second generation of Power Wheelz is specially designed for professional use. The additional weight in the handles makes them even better to use. Developed for challenging full body workouts, Gymstick Power Wheelz Pro is most suitable for core training. • Incl. two pairs of tubes: red (light) and green (strong) - easy to change with mini snap hooks • Incl. X-Strap for attaching the tubes • Incl. exercise poster With Power Wheelz Pro you can conduct

Workout

4 Includes DVD and exercise poster efficient exercises in all positions; exercises on the floor are especially challenging. Rise to the challenge of your own bodyweight and gravity on Power Wheelz. 71 149 5658 Each

4 Simple, effective, versatile 4 Can be used anywhere

4 2 in 1: trains coordination and stability

b BOSU® Ballast™ Ball

The simplest of ideas often have the greatest effect. Bosu® Ballast Ball is a large exercise ball, ø 65 cm, filled with small granules weighing approx. 2.5 kg. These granules can move freely in the ball. Ballast Ball will not roll away. This means classic exercises can be widely developed. Ballast Ball can also be easily stacked and you will not need any special storage equipment. 71 218 4409 Each

Workout

Workout

4 Includes DVD

Workout

c Flowin® Training Mat with Accessories

4 Includes DVD

The unique “high friction training system” from Flowin® enables comprehensive and effective whole body workouts in a completely new manner. In cooperation with universities, physiotherapists and athletes the Swedish developers of Flowin® have succeeded in creating a versatile training product that is suitable for people of all ages and fitness levels and have no equal in terms of efficiency and functionality. Sport: 140x100x0.4 cm, The illustration shows Sport model including DVD and storage bag; 4 Core stabilisation Professional: 140x100x0.6 cm. 71 218 4425 SportEach 4 Abdominal  muscle training 71 218 4438 ProfessionalEach 4 Proprioceptive training

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

4 Improves cardiovascular fitness, strength, endurance, flexibility, balance and fat burning

4 Includes DVD

d Gymstick™

Gymstick is a simple, effective and versatile training aid for use in physiotherapy, gyms and clubs and for independent, individual training at home. It can be used for all exercises where free weights are used and improves cardiovascular fitness, strength, stamina, mobility, balance and fat burning. The 75 cm long latex tubes are attached to each end of the bar (130 cm long) and the two loops are held under the feet. Simply and easily adjust the resistance by wrapping the tubes around the bar. Includes storage bag and exercise instructions. 71 149 6000 Light, greenEach 71 149 6013 Medium, blueEach 71 149 6026 Strong, blackEach 71 149 6039 Extra strong, silverEach 71 149 6042 Ultra strong, goldEach

Broschüre

Sets

e Gymstick™ Club Set

The set consists of: • 2 green Gymsticks • 5 blue Gymsticks • 3 black Gymsticks • 2 exercise DVDs (Cardio & Muscle, Basic & Circuit) • 1 Gymstick book • 1 carry bag for max. 20 Gymsticks • 1 set of exercise posters (upper and lower body, torso, office lunch break, combined workout) 71 149 6097 Set

185


Fitness Flexi-Bars®, Bioswing Top Rated

sport-thieme.com

Set

13x Sport Flexi-Bars 2x Intensive Flexi-Bars

DVD Mini

a Flexi-Bar®

Flexi-Bar combines stamina training, coordination training and stabilisation of the core for improved posture and movement. Frequently used by specialists as a therapy aid for back and joint problems. TÜV approved. Includes exercise poster and DVD. • Flexi-Bar  Kids: 472 g, 118 cm, for children from 6-12 years old • Flexi-Bar  Sport (standard): 508 g, 153.5 cm, for beginners and advanced users • Flexi-Bar  Intensive: 516 g, 153.5 cm, for higher intensity • Flexi-Bar  Athletic: 746 g, 152.5 cm, for professionals 71 200 9924 KidsEach 71 200 9908 SportEach 71 200 9937 IntensiveEach 71 200 9911 AthleticEach

d

DVD Mini

e

DVD Mini

c Hanging Unit for Flexi-Bars

Sport Flexi-Bar

Registered design. Hanging shelf for approx. 25 Flexi-Bars. Wooden, LxWxH: 20x49x28 cm, 3 kg. 71 200 9995 Each

Set Buy Now! b Flexi-Bar® Club Set

Kids

d Stand for Flexi-Bar®

The set consists of: • 13 “Sport” Flexi-Bars • 2 “Intensive” Flexi-Bars‘ • 3 Trainer DVDs (wellness, toning & back) • Carry bag for 15 Flexi-Bars 71 212 5565 Set

Intensive Athletic FlexiFlexi-Bar Bar for Professionals

c

Holds up to 30 Flexi-Bars (suitable for all types of Flexi-Bars). Mobile, approx. 49x43x12 cm. Flexi-Bars® not included. 71 200 9979 Each

e Flexi-Bar® Transport Bag

A large carrying bag for all Flexi-Bar models in two designs. The bag provides optimal protection against bar damage and dirt. 71 212 5507 For 10 Flexi-BarsEach 71 212 5510 For 30 Flexi-BarsEach

4 Manually adjustable frequency regulator 4 High-tech spring steel 4 Reduces stress on the joints

f Artzt Vitality Bioswing 150 cm Coordination Trainer

A versatile training aid for strength and coordination training for use in in therapy and fitness. • Shock absorbing elements reducing the stress on joints • Intensity can be set at any level using the frequency regulator and shock absorbing elements • Posture stabilising whole body workout by activating leg, bottom, hips, chest, back, arm and shoulder muscles • Particularly good for strengthening deep muscles (shoulder, pelvic girdle and spine) Only the Original Bioswing® has a handle with shock absorbing elements to reduce the stress on joints, two frequency regulators for individual adjustment of the oscillation resistance and 4 weights. Length: 150 cm. 71 225 5242 Each

186

g ''Propriomed''

Haider Bioswing

The Propriomed helps to strengthen stabilising arm muscles, shoulder girdle as well as the spinal column. In addition, the nervous system is also activated. Can be used in neuro-orthapedic rehabilitation, for example in chronic muscle imbalances or after a shoulder or spinal injury. The Propriomed is made from specially tested high-tech spring steel. Absorption elements ensure that the bar responds gently to movements and reduces stress on the joints. In addition, the oscillation can be adjusted to any level by the frequency regulator. 71 225 3305 100 (3.29, 3 strands)Each 71 225 3318 100 (5.9, 5 strands)Each 71 225 3321 130 (7.0, spring steel)Each 71 225 3334 150 (7.0, spring steel)Each 71 225 3347 170 (7.0, spring steel)Each 71 225 3350 190 (7.0, spring steel)Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Sport-Thieme Physio Fit Bar Fitness Sport-Thieme® “Fitness Bar” Great for stamina, coordination and strength training, as well as rehabilitation. Carrying bag included.

Great Value!

Buy Now!

a Sport-Thieme® “Fitness Bar”

These days, an oscillating fitness bar is a must have for all aerobics classes. Sport-Thieme can provide you with an oscillating bar that is suitable for beginners, advanced users and professionals. The Sport-Thieme Fit Bar is suitable for training stamina, coordination and strength and can also be used in rehabilitation. • L: 155.5 cm • 575 g • Incl. carrying bag 71 231 0002 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

187


Fitness Strength Sports, Boxing and Sling Trainers

c TRX® Rip Trainer Basic Kit

New! New!

b

b

New! TRX Suspension

Home Trainer

The TRX Suspension Home Trainer consists of: • TRX Suspension Home Trainer • TRX Suspension anchor for optimum suspension door and door frame • TRX door anchor to prevent damage to • TRX Tender for a higher and wider vertithe door and door frame cal mount • Safety door sign • Safety door sign “STOP. Workout in Pro“STOP. Workout in Progress.” gress.” • Only 600 g • Large and strong mesh carrying bag a TRX® Force Kit Tactical • Practical carry bag • 12 week “Progressive Tactical ConditioThe TRX Force Kit Tactical consists of: • Stylish TRX wrist band ning Programme” on 2 DVDs or to be • Enhanced and improved TRX Tactical Sus• “Get Started” workout cards downloaded as an app pension Trainer • Online access to 6 training videos (also • TRX Suspension anchor for optimum sus- • 1 comprehensive training handbook possible with smartphones) • FORCE Super app pension • TRX door anchor to prevent damage to the 71 107 3397 Each 71 107 3427 Each

Sling Trainer

Sport-Thieme® Sling Trainer New!

Suspension Training is an innovative Sling Training, where your own body weight provides the resistance working with a non-elasticated belt and rope system, exercising either standing up or lying down. The load level can be changed individually and quickly by switching body position on the suspension point. With the help of suspension trainers, strength, coordination and flexibility are trained simultaneously and core stability is improved. Sling training has long been used in physiotherapy for rehabilitation of patients in clinics, hospitals and chiropractic practices.

The TRX Rip Trainer Basic Kit comes with the new TRX Rip Trainer, the basic training DVD, full colour reference guide, a high quality nylon carrying bag, a medium resistance cord with protective nylon cover and a door hook. The TRX Rip Trainer is the newest member of the TRX family. Use it to develop more rotation strength, speed and core stability, improving your endurance with the intensive (metabolic) workout at the same time. The TRX Rip Trainer is a pole with an elastic cord attached to it. The cord can be fixed in various ways, just like the TRX Suspension Trainer. The aim of the exercises is to work with powerful movements coming from the whole body against the resistance of the elastic cord. This makes the TRX Rip Trainer the perfect addition to the TRX Suspension Trainer. 71 107 3384 Each

Sling training provides great results in muscle, concentration, endurance, coordination and balance training. When training, a basic tension must be maintained at all times and in all exercises so that the deep muscles are strengthened, automatically training the core muscles at the same time. As the belts are constantly on the move during training, the small muscles in the joint areas are also activated. This “instability” provides a significantly higher training stimulus.

Great Value!

Buy Now! 4 Effective  full body workouts 4 Complete  set for home, gym, therapy use 4 Includes  a carry bag 188

d Sport-Thieme® Sling-Trainer

Sling-Trainer is the perfect fitness product for effective full body workouts. Suitable for home, gym and therapy use. Set contains 2 slings with handle and foot strap, 2 extension belts, 2 door anchors and 4 snap hooks. Incl. carrying bag.

Length adjustable from 150-350 cm. Resilient up to 300 kg. 71 231 0015 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Fitness Training with Small Devices Fitness Light

Plus

Brasil

a Togu® Senso® Walking Trainer

The handy companion. Small, pleasantly soft and easy to hold. Increases the circulation in hands. Can be washed hygienically and can easily be taken with you anywhere. Whether walking in the open air or on the treadmill - you will not want to go without the Walking Trainers. Available in two versions: • Light: Approx. 7.5x4 cm, 17 g, red • Plus: Approx. 11x5 cm, 250 g, blue

b Togu® Brasil®

The filling of weight and air gives you targeted feedback for your movement (shaking effect) • A deep muscle trainer • Strengthening of connective tissue and preventative back training through minimal movement amplitude Made from high quality Ruton with pleasant sensory pimples. Green/yellow, 71 147 2602-1 LightPair 270 g each. 71 147 2615-1 PlusPair 71 147 2631-1 Pair

d Bullworker “X5”

The classic for targeted muscle toning exercises. You can isolate and train a large number of muscle groups effectively with a wise combination of pull and pushing exercises. Incl. exercise instructions. A piece of training equipment for young and old and for use at home or on the road. L: approx. 87 cm. 71 149 1207 Each

Great Value!

Buy Now! Top Rated

sport-thieme.com

4 Plastic coating 4 Easy to clean 4 Cast iron c Dumbells

For working out, aerobics and fitness training. Cast iron with coloured plastic coating. The smooth surface prevents the absorption of sweat and can be easily cleaned. Handle length: approx. 9 cm. For use in gyms, clubs, fitness centres and at home.

Product Code

Design

71 146 3460-3

0.5 kg, yellow 1 kg, red 1.5 kg, mint 2 kg, purple 3 kg, green 4 kg, blue 5 kg, orange 7.5 kg, pink 10 kg, black

71 146 3402-3 71 146 3499-3 71 146 3415-3 71 146 3428-3 71 146 3431-3 71 146 3444-3 71 146 3473-3 71 146 3486-3

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

e Original Bali Impander

Training with Bali Impander will develop your cardiovascular fitness and breathing capacity very intensively. It cannot be compared with standard muscle strengthening equipment as these products mainly build up muscles. Bali Impander has a very low resistance level, similar to resistance levels in the water. This product will return your muscle tone to normal. Straps not included. 71 149 0002 2 kg,yellow, very lightEach 71 149 0015 3 kg, green, lightEach 71 149 0028 6 kg, red, mediumEach 71 149 0031 10 kg, blue, hardEach

f Foot and Hand Straps

For Bali Impander, adjustable. 71 149 0406 Pair

189


Fitness Fitness Training with Small Equipment Top Rated

4 Can be used on either side 4 Even more dynamic with a larger standing area and increased height

sport-thieme.com

a

New! a

New! Togu® Aero-Step Pro

The Aero-Step Pro is larger, more dynamic and even more versatile. It can be used on either side; standing, lying on your front, side or back. One side has a smooth surface and the other approx. 1000 round pimples to massage and promote blood circulation. The 2 chambered air system works as an unstable base and allows highly effective training. More intensive workout targeting and improving perception, stimuli processing and stability.

b c Togu® Aero Step XL

a

Aero Step XL has been specially developed for fitness and aerobic workouts. The surface and base are larger b Togu Aero Step than on the Aero Step which in turn Togu Aero Steps are used for coordinative and proprioceptive training in reha- increases the choice of possible exercises. Aero Step XL is made up of two separate bilitation, prevention, medical training air-filled chambers. The non-slip surface therapy (MTT) and fitness. Includes exerwith pimples massages the feet. The cise posters for keep fit workouts and for sports, injury prevention and therapy. The working principle of Aero Step XL is based on coordinative (movement controlling) air pressure can be adjusted to suit and proprioceptive (movement processing) personal needs using the needle valve. training methods. Comes with pump and Material: high quality Ruton. Surface with exercise poster. LxWxH: 51x37x8 cm. Will medium length pimples. LxWxH: support up to 150 kg. 46x32x8 cm. Supports up to 150 kg. 71 218 2504-1 BlueEach 71 188 0016-1 GreenEach 71 218 2517-1 GreenEach 71 188 0029-1 BlueEach 71 218 2520-1 RedEach 71 188 0032-1 Silver/greyEach ®

Ideal for therapy, rehabilitation, fitness or at home. LxWxH: 52x40x8.5 cm 71 201 9404 Silver/greyEach 71 201 9417 BlackEach 71 201 9420 RedEach 71 201 9433 BlueEach

4 Tested and patented by sports medics 4 Trains the whole body

ø 60 cm

ø 80 cm

e

New!

4 Includes exercise instructions 4 Now in 2 sizes

d Pendel® Ball

The novelty in back therapy - the new Pendel Ball! Inflatable, with a stopper, made from extremely durable Ruton, approx. 80 cm. The (seat) height is variable by means of a pump, adjustable from a minimum of 55 cm to a maximum of 70 cm. The Pendel Ball is an oval training and therapy tool. It was also designed to relax the back muscles. Different to a standard ball, the large contact surface prevents it from rolling away providing you with more stability when working on relieving tension. This makes the Pendel ball an ideal partner for prenatal and back strengthening exercises. Its stability is a huge advan-

190

e Fitness Scroll

The Fitness Scroll has been tested by sports medics and is patented. It is perfect for healthy whole body workouts to keep fit. When doing exercises it is more statage when doing a full body workout, proble and sits better than a standard exerviding you with more opportunities for cise ball. The Fitness Scroll can be used functional spinal exercises and for coordifor many purposes for example functional nation, balance and fitness training. Fitspine exercises, physio and occupational ted with sensory pimples on one side and therapy, coordination, balance, reaction, a velvety smooth surface on the other, the strengthening the stomach, legs and botstimulating massage effect as well as the tom, pelvic girdle training, pre-natal exerhigh bounce characteristics mean that is is cises and many more. excellently suited for physio and occupatio- • Includes  detailed exercise instructions nal therapy use. • Cover made from synthetic leather Has a very good bounce. • Polyurethane core 71 109 1739-1 ø 80 cmEach 71 225 1934 RedEach 71 109 1742-1 ø 60 cmEach 71 225 1947 BlackEach

f

New! Togu®

Functional Multiroll®

Specially designed for use in functional training. The unstable, air filled roll allows a variety of exercises when sitting, doing push-ups, lying or used as an accessory. The air filling can be released with a valve which makes this product very versatile. Includes pump. Can withstand up to approx. 200 kg. 80x18 cm, silver. 71 160 0126 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Resistance Bands Fitness

Sport-Thieme® Resistance Bands 4 Available in 4 strengths! 4 Can also be used in water 4 Kind to the skin 4 Versatile

Great Value!

Buy Now! Top Rated

sport-thieme.com

a b

Sets

c Sport-Thieme® Resistance Bands, 10 kg Set

a Sport-Thieme®

b Sport-Thieme®

The Maxi resistance band is very strong, 100 cm long and made from fabric band. Its 5 loops are 20 cm long and provide a wide range of new exercises thanks to their large size. 71 187 7090 Each

A very strong resistance band made from fabric with tensile strengths of 7, 10, 15 or 20 kg. The integrated loops are marked with numbers allowing different exercises without adjusting the length of the band. Length: 80 cm. Exercise poster included.

Maxi Resistance Band 15 kg

A strong resistance band for effective whole body workouts. Resistance and length can be adjusted, therefore great training for all muscles. Loops for hands, feet and thighs providing safe training with the band. Can also be used in the water.

d Sport-Thieme® Resistance

Resistance Band

100% nylon. 71 229 1404 7 kg, orangeEach 71 187 7074 10 kg, yellowEach 71 187 7045 15 kg, greyEach 71 187 7087 20 kg, greyEach

Bands, 15 kg Set

The set consists of: • 10 bands b with 15 kg resistance • 1 exercise poster • 1 DVD 71 187 7058  Set of 10

4 Can also be used in water

4 Can  also be used in water

e CM Band

Set consisting of: • 10 bands b with 10 kg resistance • 1 exercise poster • 1 DVD 71 229 1417  Set of 10

Covered in 100% nylon, therefore skin will not come into contact with the latex. Supplied with instructions. Tensile strength of approx. 15 kg. 71 187 7003 EachEach 71 187 7032 Set of 10Set

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

f Sport-Thieme® Rings, Set of 10

High quality resistance band made from rubber coated fabric (100% nylon) for exercising arms, legs and bottom. Can also be used in water. Comes in a set of 10, exercise poster included. 71 187 7061  Set of 10

Also take a look at:

• Pilates, page 202-203 • Sling Trainers, page 188 • Barbell Sets, page 212

191


Fitness Fitness Tubes b

c

a

Sport-Thieme® Fitness Tube

For training all large muscle groups. The classic fitness product. Ideal for use at home, at the gym or on the road. You can train the most important muscle groups at any time and anywhere. Reivo fitness tubes come in four different strengths. Exercise instructions included.

b Sport-Thieme® Vario Fitness

Individual 71 148 8018 71 148 8021 71 148 8034 71 148 8047

Green = lightEach Pink = mediumEach Purple = strongEach Red = extra strongEach

Set of 10 71 148 8050 71 148 8063 71 148 8076 71 148 8089

Green = lightSet Pink = mediumSet Purple = strongSet Red = extra strongSet

Tube, 20 m Roll

When combined with the Reivo® fitness tube handles, you can adjust the tubes to suit your height. It could not be easier: cut the tube to length and attach the handle. If the tube gets worn just replace it. The handles are not included. 71 148 8832 Green = lightEach 71 148 8845 Pink = mediumEach 71 148 8858 Purple = strongEach 71 148 8861 Red = extra strongEach

c Sport-Thieme® Fitness Tube Handles

Handles for Reivo® Vario fitness tubes with quick fastening system. Pleasant foam handle that is easy to clean. 71 148 8803  10 pairs

e Physio Basic Pro

d Reebok® Adjustable Tube

Professional fitness tubes made from latex. The length of the tube is adjustable with the padded handle.

71 225 6900 Level 1 = lightEach 71 225 6913 Level 2 = mediumEach 71 225 6926 Level 3 = strongEach

4 Improved durability 4 Perfect for latex allergy sufferers

4 Coated latex rope 4 Silicone top coat protects the band from wear and tear

Sets i

h Sport-Thieme® Fitness Tube Rings, Set of 10

4 10x h

This fitness tube ring is perfect for short, individual pulling exercises. Incl. exercise poster. 71 148 8601 Green = lightSet 71 148 8614 Pink = mediumSet 71 148 8627 Purple = strongSet

g

g Sport-Thieme® Cuff Tubes, Set of 10

f Sport-Thieme® Premium Tube Premium tube with nylon coating for more product safety. Less chance of overstretching, tear-proof for normal usage. No direct contact with the tube, therefore perfect for those with a latex allergy. PVC handles. Incl. exercise poster!

192

71 225 0407 71 225 0410 71 225 0423 71 225 0436

Green = lightEach Pink = mediumEach Purple = strongEach Red = extra strongEach

Extremely durable fitness band for use in gyms and clubs. The handles are made of foam. A latex rope coated with a strong woven material, silicone protection on foot section or for use in combination with a step. Length: 1.80 m. 71 149 3203 Blue = lightEach 71 149 3216 Red = mediumEach

Cuff tubes, also known as ankle tubes, are perfect for legs, bums ‘n‘ tums exercises. With extra strong padded Velcro straps. Exercise poster included. 71 148 8412 Green = lightSet 71 148 8438 Pink = mediumSet 71 148 8454 Purple = strongSet

i Sport-Thieme® Fitness Toners, Set of 10

Fitness toners suitable for short, individual pulling exercises. Available in three strengths. Incl. exercise poster. 71 148 8311 Green = lightSet 71 148 8337 Pink = mediumSet 71 148 8353 Purple = strongSet

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Resistance Bands Fitness

a Original Deuserband

The classic training band for physiotherapy with strong resistance. Perfect for exercising weaker muscle groups and strengthening muscles after an accident or illness. Endless rubber band approx. 35 mm wide and 100 cm long. Incl. exercise instructions. 71 148 5107 Each

b Deuserband Light

The light exercise band for physiotherapy with 40% less tensile strength. Specially designed for rehabilitation and therapy. Endless rubber band approx. 15 mm wide and 100 cm long. 71 148 5110 Each

4 With stainless steel snap hooks

d Bodylastics®

c Deuserband Plus

Targeted workouts for muscular deficits, weak posture, shoulder-arm syndrome or lower back problems. The Deuserband Plus is also ideal for training the pelvis floor muscles. The new Deuserband Plus is great for hyper-mobile stabilising and mobilising exercises, making it an ideal addition to popular dynamic and static exercises for regaining flexibility, improving coordination, strengthening weak muscles or increasing strength and endurance. • Light: 27x4 cm • Medium: 29x5 cm • Strong: 29x6.5 cm 71 148 5123 LightEach 71 148 5136 MediumEach 71 148 5149 StrongEach

Great Value!

Buy Now!

Bodylastics is an affordable alternative to multi-functional machines. You can do a huge range of exercises using the handles, door anchors and ankle loops. The following is included: • 1 door anchor • 4 tubes (level 1-4, approx. 110 cm) • 2 ankle straps • 2 foam covered handles • 1 set of exercise instructions • 1 nylon bag 71 148 7901 Each

e Tubes for Bodylastics

1x level 5, black. 1x level 6, orange. 71 148 7914  Set of 2

Set 4 10 of each ® f Sport-Thieme Set of 10

Rubber Bands

A small but effective training aid for sports groups. The rubber band, which is approx. 2 cm wide and 22.5 cm long, is used for stretching and strengthening exercises. Pack of 10, includes exercise instructions. 71 148 8702 Green = light Set of 10 71 148 8715 Pink = medium Set of 10 71 148 8728 Purple = strong Set of 10

New!

g Jumpstretch® Exercise Band

Jump Stretch® exercise bands are ideal for general stretching, muscle strength training and stretching shortened muscles thanks to their progressive and strong level of resistance. For intensive athletics, swimming and running training. You 71 105 8707 Red = level 1Each can train selected muscle groups using the 71 105 8710 Purple = level 3Each 71 105 8723 Green = level 4Each resistance of the Jump Stretch®. Available 71 105 8736 Blue = level 5Each in 5 different strengths. Length: approx. 71 105 8749 Orange = level 6Each 105 cm. Exercise instructions included.

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

h

New! Jumpstretch® Base

Training platform for attaching the fitness bands. Allows for an intensive total body workout when combined with various resistance strengths and for example long or short dumbbells. With steel frame to attach the bands securely. Non-slip rubber surface. Made from rust-proof, polished steel. Approx. 60x100 cm. Approx. 14.5 kg. Black. 71 148 8904 Each

193


Fitness Resistance Bands a Thera-Band®, 5.5 m

The linear build up of resistance when increasingly stretching this exercise ab band from Thera-Band is low impact and prevents injuries - an essential benefit in therapy and fitness training. Product details: • 100% natural latex • Linear stretching: strength increases proportionately with stretching • For therapy, general and competitive sports • Roll length: 550 cm, width: 13.8 cm, from blue 15 cm Product advantages: • The classic for professional use • Ideal for therapy, club and competitive sports • Virtually no limit to how it can be used in b Thera-Band® in 45.5 m Rolls strength and coordination training The classic latex band with a width • Beige to red: ideal for therapy use of 13.8 cm.

Versions and product codes: see table

Thera-Band Rolls ®

Beige = extra light

Yellow = light Red = medium

Green = strong

Versions and product codes: see table

a 5.5 m

b 45.5 m

Beige = extra light

71 218 3103-3

71 218 3350-1

Yellow = light

71 218 3116-3

71 218 3305-1

Red = medium

71 218 3129-3

71 218 3318-1

Green = strong

71 218 3132-3

71 218 3321-1

Blue = extra strong

71 218 3145-3

71 218 3334-1

Black = exceptionally strong

71 218 3158-3

71 218 3347-1

Silver = ultra strong

71 218 3161-3

71 218 3363-1

Gold = max. strength

71 218 3174-3

71 218 3376-1

Product code

Product code

Blue = extra strong

Black = exceptionally strong

Silver = ultra strong

Gold = max. strength

f

e

New!

c Artzt® Vitality Latex-Free Exercise Bands

Don’t forget to order:

• Exercise mats, p. 282-286 • Steps, p. 198-200 • Pilates equip., p. 202-203

Artzt Vitality resistance bands are latexfree and therefore suitable for people with allergies! Comparable stretching qualities to a latex band: linear strength/stretch behaviour. • Halogenated surface: non-slip and durable • No need for powdering or special care • Synthetic (polyisoprene) rubber Available in 4 resistance levels and 3 lengths: • 2.5 m with exercise instructions Versions and product codes: see table

Artzt® Vitality Latex-Free Exercise Bands 2.5 m

194

6m

25 m

Product code

Product code

Product code

Yellow = light

71 225 5109

71 225 5141

71 225 5200

Red = medium

71 225 5112

71 225 5154

71 225 5213

Green = strong

71 225 5125

71 225 5167

71 225 5226

Blue = extra strong

71 225 5138

71 225 5170

71 225 5239

f Thera-Band® 250 cm in a Zip Bag

Handy and versatile. Thera-Band is the smallest gym in the world. It can be stored ® and taken anywhere in its zip up bag. e Sport-Thieme • 100% natural latex Suction Cup • With practical zip-up bag Registered design. Universal fastening for any kind of bands and tubes.Thanks to the • Including 32 page instruction booklet “keep fit with the resistance band” suction cup, this mounting can be used 71 148 1509 Yellow, lightEach very easily for many applications. All you 71 148 1512 Red, mediumEach need is a smooth surface. By moving the 71 148 1525 Green, strongEach lever, the suction cup is quickly and fle71 148 1538 Blue, extra strongEach xibly adjusted. 71 194 7508 Each 71 148 1541 Black, extremely strongEach

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Resistance Bands Fitness Top Rated

sport-thieme.com

Buy Now! Green = light

Great Value! Pink= medium

Purple = strong

Red = extra strong Black = ultra strong

a Sport-Thieme® Exercise Band 75

The classic latex band or therapy band on a 2 or 25 m roll. Made from skin-friendly natural rubber that stretches extremely far and features progressive resistance. 7.5 cm wide band for increasing strength and stamina. Includes exercise poster! 2 m x 7.5 cm 71 227 0904 Green = light Each 71 227 0917 Pink = medium Each 71 227 0920 Purple = strong Each 71 227 0933 Red = extra strong Each 71 227 0988 Black = ultra strong Each

c Sport-Thieme® Exercise Band 150

The wider latex band (15 cm) for increasing strength and stamina. Available in 2 and 25 metre lengths. Exercise poster included! 2 m x 15 cm 71 227 1008 Green = lightEach 71 227 1011 Pink = mediumEach 71 227 1024 Purple = strongEach 71 227 1037 Red = extra strongEach 71 227 1079 Black = ultra strongEach 25 m x 15 cm 71 148 7510 Green = lightEach 71 148 7523 Pink = mediumEach 71 148 7536 Purple = strongEach 71 148 7549 Red = extra strongEach 71 148 7552 Black = ultra strongEach

25 m x 7.5 cm 71 227 0946 Green = light Each 71 227 0959 Pink = medium Each 71 227 0962 Purple = strong Each 71 227 0975 Red = extra strong Each 71 227 0991 Black = ultra strong Each

Which Sport-Thieme Resistance Band do I need? Stretch Green Pink strength 7.5 cm 15 cm 7.5 cm 15 cm 1.3 1.1 1.5 25% 0.9 1.6 1.4 1.8 50% 1.2 1.4 2.0 1.6 2.3 75% 2.4 1.8 2.8 100% 1.6 2.8 2.0 3.2 125% 1.8 3.0 2.2 3.5 150% 2.0 3.5 2.5 3.8 175% 2.3 4.0 2.8 4.3 200% 2.5 4.5 3.0 4.8 225% 2.7 4.8 3.2 5.0 250% 3.0

Red

7.5 cm 1.5 1.7 2.1 2.5 2.8 3.2 3.5 3.8 4.2 4.5

15 cm 2.1 2.5 3.0 3.5 3.8 4.2 4.8 5.5 6.0 6.5

Black 7.5 cm 15 cm 1.6 2.3 2.9 2.8 3.7 3.3 4.4 3.8 5.0 4.5 5.6 5.0 6.1 5.4 6.7 6.0 7.4 6.5 8.0 7.0

Resistance Levels Green Pink Purple Black Colour Red User older people/ rehabilitation beginners advanced experienced athletes professionals fitness strength Training objective stamina (+ strength) Progressive light medium strong extra strong ultra strong resistance up to 700% for optimal muscle training Stretch

e Body Band Ring®, Set of 10

Your personal fitness trainer! Use the Body Band Ring: b Clips 75 • As a mobile training aid for stretching Pack of 10 patented clips for Sportd Clips 150 and strengthening your muscles Thieme® exercise bands 75. Not Pack of 10 patented clips for Sport• For building up muscle tone and daily fitillustrated. Thieme® exercise bands 150. ness training 71 148 6403-1  Pack of 10 71 149 3359-1  Pack of 10

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

Purple 7.5 cm 15 cm 1.3 1.8 1.5 2.2 1.9 2.6 2.2 3.2 2.4 3.5 2.8 4.0 3.0 4.0 3.3 4.5 3.5 5.0 3.8 5.6

Resistance in kg

• As a training aid for rehabilitation and prevention This “endless band” is ideal for exercising the upper arm muscles, back and bottom muscles and the outer hips. Latex, red, 12.5x40 cm. 71 211 0602 Set

195


High Quality Exercise Mats from Movivit®

Fitness Long lasting, durable, skin-friendly, ... mats for everywhere!

Set

Set

Buy Now!

a

4 Optimal protection 4 Long lasting 4 Antibacterial foam 4 Latex free Sport-Thieme® Exercise Mats Product Name “Club” “Club 10” “Club 15” “Club 15” with eyelets “Gym” “Gym 15” “Gym 15” with eyelets “Studio” “Studio 15” “Studio 15” with eyelets

b c d

Size

Material thickness

Number of Distance beeyelets tween eyelets

Corners

Weight

Use

Blue

Red

Anthracite

– – 2

– – 48 cm

rounded rounded rounded

1.40 kg school 71 187 4206-1 71 187 4219-1 71 187 4222-1 1.71 kg sports, gyms, 71 187 4408-1 71 187 4411-1 71 187 4424-1 1.77 kg clubs 71 187 4802-1 71 187 4815-1 71 187 4828-1

approx. 190x80 cm approx. 1.5 cm approx. 190x80 cm approx. 1.5 cm

– 2

– 48 cm

rounded rounded

3.60 kg 3.66 kg

gyms, clubs

71 187 5906-1 71 187 6404-1

approx. 180x120 cm approx. 1.5 cm approx. 180x120 cm approx. 1.5 cm

– 4

– 48/12/48 cm

rounded rounded

3.20 kg 4.00 kg

gyms, clubs

71 187 4509-1 71 187 4512-1 71 187 4903-1 71 187 4916-1

Approx. 185x60x1.5 cm, rounded corners. Approx. 2.2 kg. Standard 71 126 9606-1 BlueEach 71 126 9619-1 GreenEach 71 126 9622-1 RedEach

196

Exercise Mat Set “Club 15”

The set consists of: • 10 Sport-Thieme exercise mats, approx. 180x60x1.5 cm, with eyelets, available in 71 187 5108-1 Mat set, blueSet blue, red or anthracite b 71 187 5111-1 Mat set, redSet • 1 hanging rack for exercise mats, page 71 187 5124-1 Mat set, anthraciteSet 283 c with 2 eyelets

approx. 180x60 cm approx. 1.0 cm approx. 180x60 cm approx. 1.5 cm approx. 180x60 cm approx. 1.5 cm

e Airex® “Coronella” Exercise Mat

New! Sport-Thieme®

4 CE  quality product 4 Latex free 4 Optimal  shock absorption

f

4 Ideal for partner exercises and physiotherapy 4 Includes exercise instructions Airex® Balance Pad “XLarge”

At approx. 98 cm, the new extra large With eyelets balance pad is longer, making it even more 71 126 9202-1 BlueEach versatile to use than the classic balance 71 126 9215-1 GreenEach pad. Ideal for partner exercises and physio71 126 9228-1 RedEach therapy.

The special closed cell foam is durable and easy to clean. Exercise instructions included. LxWxH: 98x41x6 cm. 71 201 3347 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Balance Pads a

Fitness

b

Buy Now! 4 Non-slip surface

Great Value!

Buy Now!

4 Includes non-slip coating 4 Easy to clean and long lasting 4 Non-slip textured surface on both sides

b Sport-Thieme® ''Premium'' Balance Pad

The new balance pad with non-slip surface on both sides. Ideal to improve coordination, reaction and balance. The “wobble effect” forces the users to continuously stabilise themselves. This stimulates the recepa Airex® Balance Pad “Elite” tors intensively and develops proprioceptive abilities. The The new Elite balance pad with additional effecSuper soft special foam structured non-slip surface on either side ensures a safe tive stimulation of the foot receptors can be used on stand. The closed celled super soft special foam is durable both sides, is non-slip, warm against the body and skinand easy to clean. Marbled, LxWxH: 50x40x6 cm. friendly. Approx. 50x41x6.0 cm. 71 113 0270 blueEach 71 132 0002 Each

Set

Be Balanced!

A completely new type of health training that is fun and arouses the senses. Whether for cardiovascular workouts, to increase stamina or strengthen your back muscles, BeBalanced! will provide you with a real feel good factor.

b

Buy Now!

e

c

4 Increase the intensity level Also take a look at:

Yoga and Pilates equipment, pages 201-203

e SoftX® Coordination Pro See-Saw d

An exercise product for coordination, reaction and balance training. The “wobble effect” forces the users to continuously stabilise their body. This stimulates the receptors intensively and develops proprioceptive abilities. Made from super soft closed cell special foam which is durable and is easy to clean. To increase the “wobble effect” more pads can be placed on top of each other. Blue, LxWxH: 50x41x6 cm. 71 113 0209 Each

Accessory to the balance pad. Blue, LxWxH: 50x45x9

4 Includes a voucher for a training course to become an Airex BeBalanced! group fitness instructor

g Airex® ''Elite'' Club Set E f f Airex® Balance Beam

Balance beam made from special foam. Blue, LxWxH: cm. 162x24x6 cm. 71 113 0241 Each 71 113 0254 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

DVD

(For improvers) as an add on to the Balance Pad. LxWxH: 50x45x9 cm, blue. 71 113 0267 Each

c Airex® Balance Pad

d Airex® Coordination Seesaw

Broschüre

The set consists of: • 10 Airex “Elite” balance pads • 1 Airex BeBalanced! group fitness DVD • 1 Airex BeBalanced! book • 1 voucher for an official training course to become an Airex BeBalanced! group fitness instructor 71 113 0296 Set

197


Fitness Step Aerobics

Great Value!

Buy Now!

Non-slip surface

Top Rated

Height adjustable

5

year guarantee

“Excellent value for money! The Aerobics Step from SportThieme is made to very high quality, height adjustable and has a really good non-slip surface. The value for money is really very good!” sport-thieme.com

® “Aerobics Step” a Sport-Thieme High quality step for gyms and clubs. Two

height levels, non-slip surface and base. Height adjustable at 13 and 18 cm. LxW: 90x41 cm. 5 year guarantee! 71 149 0956 Each

Set

Height adjustable

b Sport-Thieme® Step Aerobics Workout

Affordable, compact platform for individual fitness training and variable step aerobics. With non-slip surface. Height of step 13 cm, with the base 18 cm. Use the base c Sport-Thieme® Basic Step Inexpensive beginner‘s model. With non-slip surfor a more intensive workout. LxHxW: 70x40x13/18 cm. face, will support up to 300 kg, can easily be stacked. Supports up to 110 kg. 71 149 1119 With baseEach LxWxH: 70x40x10.5 cm, 2.5 kg. 71 149 1177 Without baseEach 71 217 3001 Each

e Reebok® Easytone Step

A new era of step has begun! The latest innovation from Reebok is called Easytone Step and is based on a step board. The product is modelled on the technology of the Easytone shoe, which has had huge worldwide success. The Easytone Step has a non-slip surface and 2 nonslip, inflatable air cushions, which can be inflated independently from one another according to the training objective. The Easytone Step can be used on both sides. By standing on the air cushion, all variations of step training are possible. Turn it over and it enables a whole new range of different training methods. A valve between the two air cushions controls the exchange of air. For balance training it stays closed and both air cushions have

198

Set of 10

The reliable Sport-Thieme tube with a reinforced middle section, specially designed for step aerobic training. Pack of 10 fitness step tubes for gyms and clubs (without exercise poster). 71 148 8210 Green = lightSet 71 148 8236 Pink = mediumSet 71 148 8252 Purple = strongSet

f

4 With an inflatable air cushion

e

d Sport-Thieme® Fitness Step Tube,

Plyometrics

Balance training

Upper body exercise Plyometrics Plyometrics

Balance Balance training training

f Reebok® “Train Pod” the same amount of air. For a combined step and balance training session the valve is left open, allowing the air to flow from one cushion to the other and back again. The stability can be varied according to the training objective. When the cushions are highly inflated they become far more unstable – which increases the intensity of the balance training! Take some air out and the surface is immediately larger, making it easier to balance and reducing the intensity of the exercises. The Easytone Step can be used for a wide range of different workouts, such as balance, flexibility, stability or core training. 66x41x16 cm, 6 kg. 71 129 9117 Each

Train Pod is an innovation by Reebok, with its central air cushion it is designed to provide effective balance and core training for the legs as well as a more specialist, coordinated workout to enhance muscle activation - a product for a huge range of different training exercises. It is designed to train the upper body, the legs and buttocks. Inflating the air cushion changes the intensity of the exercise, particularly in the case of balance and strength training. The Train Pod has a non-slip surface, providing a secure base for the feet. In addition, the Train Pod has 2 outer handles for upper body training (push-ups). It is compact, lightweight and highly versatile, for use at home or out and about. 53x29x12 cm, 2.8 kg 71 129 9104 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

UpperUb


Step Aerobics Fitness

3 settings: low

medium Top Rated

high

“Amazing quality! I am delighted with this Reebok step. It is very high quality and easy to use. I really praise the DVD that comes with it too! Really recommendable!” sport-thieme.com

a Reebok® “Step”

The new Reebok step! This step was developed based on scientifically accredited and sports medical research and has reached legendary status among the experts. It is simple to use and the non-slip floor parts make all workouts a pleasure. Professional model with a 5 year guarantee on gym use! • Will support up to 110 kg • LxWxH: 90x35x15, 20 or 25 cm Now 3 models available: • Semi-professional incl. DVD, white/blue • Professional: grey/blue • Professional Lady: grey/pink 71 149 0754 Semi-professional Each 71 225 6607 ProfessionalEach 71 225 6636 Professional LadyEach

Grey/blue: Professional

5

year guarantee

White/blue: Semi-professional incl. DVD

Pink: Professional Lady

“The Deck” A versatile platform for step, cardio and toning exercises!

Notches for tubes Adjustable back rest

Storage compartment

Height adjustable

b Reebok® “The Deck” Step

The Reebok Deck is a revolutionary, multi-purpose exercise platform. This further development of the original Reebok Step system is a very adaptable system. It serves as a step for aerobics, a sloping bench or a sitting bench. This makes it particularly suitable for step aerobics, cardiovascular and strength exercises. When used with weights and tubes, it is a compact whole body trainer. The Deck will support you in all the important exercise positions (as a step, flat and sloping bench and as a seat.) Assembled size (LxWxH): 110(121)x34.7x20.5(30.5) cm, 11.5 kg. Three adjustable sitting positions, compartments for tubes and weights, non-slip base, guides in the back rest and leg supports for affixing tubes. Easy to adjust using the spring locks. 71 225 6610 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

c T-Bow® Training and Therapy Arch Three settings:

The T-Bow is a multifunctional training and therapy arch for beginners and advanced athletes, adults and children, competitive athletes and older people. The T-Bow is a multifunctional product to improve stamina, strength, coordination, stabilisation and flexibility. Because of its design it is “solid” and perfectly suited for cardiovascular training as well as a base for a wide variety of strengthening exercises. Upside down it is a see-saw/ rocker - and an ideal piece of equipment for effective coordination and joint strengthening exercises. Light, robust design, stackable and space saving, easy to transport. LxW: 70x50 cm, 3.2 kg, Orange/blue. 71 225 1905-1 Each

199


Fitness Balance Training Step Aerobic training with coordination!

a

b

Includes tubes for attaching to side

a Sport-Thieme®

b BOSU® Balance Trainer

“Balance Step”

Bosu Balance Trainer is a versatile professional training product for balance training. The “core” of the Bosu Balance Trainer is balance and coordination training, but it can also be used for versatile and challenging cardio group workouts and abdominal muscle training. ø 63.5 cm, height max. 22 cm. 71 209 0216 Each

This professional balance step combines step aerobic training with coordination and is therefore an ideal training aid for classes or home use. Balance step comes with tubes, which can be attached to the side so that you will be able to vary your training even more. Can be used on both sides. Pump included. WxH: 59x22 cm. 71 103 0802 Each

d 4 Made from exceptionally hygienic Actisan

c

New!

Mini: 36x18 cm

d Togu® “Actisan” Jumper Standard: 52x24 cm

c Togu® Jumper

• Ideal pressure distribution thanks to the reliable Dynair technology • Extremely dynamic rebound (trampoline effect) • Good stability for ankles • Non-slip on all surfaces • Also designed for side jumps • “Better Grip” surface • Can be used on both sides • Transfers the vibrations back to the body

200

• No extra storage aid necessary thanks to the integrated Easy-Store-System • Base guarantees stability (Jumper Pro) Jumper Pro: 52x24 cm incl. base Jumper: 52x24 cm Jumper mini: 36x18 cm Includes pump and training chart. 71 223 9978 ProEach 71 223 9907 StandardEach 71 223 9910 MiniEach

Tip

All balance steps can be used on both sides: • The  top side acts as a step • The  underside acts as a balance pad

Offers all the advantages of the Togu Jumper c combined with the material properties of Actisan. Actisan is within the plastic of the product and its ionic properties are highly effective against viruses and bacteria. Harmless to humans, it continually builds ions. These attack the metabolic system of the cells of harmful organisms. The difference with Actisan: It is not only antibacterial but also antimicrobial. It does not only work against bacteria but also against viruses. It is therefore much more efficient than common disinfectant wipes and retains its full effectiveness for over 5 years. 71 223 9952 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Pilates, Yoga Fitness a Sissel® Allegro Reformer

The Allegro Reformer is the most versatile reformer in the world. It can be folded flat and stacked for easy storage. With an extra wide padded foot bar, there are four vertical and four horizontal adjustment levels. Therefore users of different sizes can work with this piece of equipment. Ideal for use at home or in gyms. Free exercise DVD included. • 8 wheel suspension system on the runners with ball bearings • 4 vertical support wheels and 4 side wheels for lateral stabilisation enabling a smooth and quiet ride • Resistant to sweat and bacteria • Washable • Integrated wheel system so it can easily be moved • Eyelets for foot strap • Built-in standing platform with non-slip coating • Extra wide foot bar with many options for positioning hands and feet, with non-slip cover • Spring system for up to 46 different resistance levels. 2 spring positions (neutral and tensioned) • Ergonomically shaped shoulder padding • Head piece with 3 adjustment levels

4 Light and compact 4 Up to 46 resistance levels 4 Bespoke ergonomic adjustment

• Rope pulls made from tear-proof material, simple length adjustment with clamping system • Guide pulleys so the ropes run perfectly • LxHxW: 236x58x14 cm 71 149 2978 Each

Yoga

Great Value!

c

Material: soft PVC foam

Buy Now!

Material: polyvinyl foam

b Sport-Thieme® “Exclusive” Yoga Mat

This yoga mat holds its shape well and is made from 6 mm thick polyvinyl foam which is very kind to the skin and insulates against the cold floor. The closed-cell material contains a fabric inlay that ensu-

d

res good non-slip properties and tensile strength. Sanitized® finish. Certified by the German “Öko-Tex” standard. Approx. 185x70x0.6 cm. 71 123 9401 GreenEach 71 123 9414 blueEach 

e

f

c “Classic” Yoga Mat

This yoga mat in trendy colours is ideal for all types of yoga. The surface is textured and non-slip on both sides. The mat will allow you to stand safely in all positions and provides excellent shock absorption. It is also pleasantly soft,

New!

g

flexible and insulating. Easy to clean. LxWxH: 180x60x0.5 cm. 71 123 6200 OrangeEach 71 123 6213 BlueEach 71 123 6226 PurpleEach 

h

d Strap for Yoga Mats

f New! Yoga Balance Cushion For transporting roll-up yoga mats The first air filled sitting cushion that easily. Suitable for all mats up to a length has specially been developed for yoga. For of 190 cm. 100% polypropylene. 71 125 9201 Each a relaxed yet upright sitting position. Bespoke height adjustment thanks to supplied pump. Will support up to approx. 150 e Cotton Yoga Strap Strap made from 100% cotton. kg. Made from Ruton, approx. 40x40x35 Tear-resistant belt with plastic buckle. cm, approx. 1.5 kg. Lilac. Includes pump 190x4x0.2 cm. with needle. 71 123 6402 Each 71 123 9007 Each Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

g Yoga Sitting Cushion

Comfortable and stable highquality sitting cushion. 100% cotton cover with draw string, can be washed up to 30 °C. The inner can be removed. Filled with cleaned spelt husks. Round, approx. ø 35 cm, 15 cm high. Approx. 1.5 kg. Will support up to approx. 100 kg. Blue. 71 123 8802 Each

h Yoga Blocks

Made from high-quality EVA foam. The perfect firmness for excellent support during yoga exercises. Set of two strong blocks with rounded edges. Purple, approx. 23x15x7.5 cm. 71 123 6301 Pair

201


Fitness Pilates, Balance Training Purple

b

Red

c ® d Sissel Fitness Toning Ball

b Sissel® Pilates Soft Ball

This ball is ideal for deep relaxation exercises and for strengthening muscles, especially abdominal muscles and the muscles along the spine. Blue, ø 22 cm. Incl. exercise instructions. 71 149 1816 Each

a Sport-Thieme® Pilates Soft

c Sissel® Pilates Toning Ball Set

The perfect addition for your Pilates mat programme. Suitable for training arms, Very soft and pleasant ball. Specially desi- shoulders and the upper body. A valuable gned for Pilates exercises that develop the asset in many Pilates exercises. 2x 450 g, core muscles. ø 26 cm, blue. blue, ø approx. 9 cm. 71 149 1526 Each 71 149 3607  Set of 2

Ball 26 cm

Set, incl. Straps

Everything in hand for toning exercises. • For upper body, arm and leg workouts • Handy and always ready to use • For fitness, aerobics, pilates and core training • Straps can be individually adjusted for comfortable use with no joint strain • Flexible alternative to weight cuffs • Solid filling of fine sand Available in 2 different versions: • Purple: 2x approx. 500 g. • Red: 2x approx. 1,000 g. 71 148 0229 Purple: 500 g Set of 2 71 148 0232 Red: 1000 g Set of 2

Balance & Core Training h Sissel® Pilates Band

For new dynamic mat training: the Sissel® Pilates Band made of 100% cotton with 6 integrated pockets. Put your hands and/or feet in the pockets, depending on exercise. • Increases core stability • Intensifies Pilates exercises • Approx. 20x125 cm, red • Includes exercise instructions 71 149 1887 Each

4 Non-slip  coating on both sides 4 Easy  to clean and long lasting 4 Textured surface

e

New! Sport-Thieme®

Pilates Pad “Premium”

The new Pilates pad with non-slip coating on both sides. Ideal for coordination, reaction and balance training. The “wobble effect” forces the users to continuously compensate and stabilise themselves, stimulating receptors intensively and improving proprioceptive abilities. You‘ll stand safely on the pad thanks to its textured, non-slip surface on either side. The closed-cell super soft special foam requires little maintenance and is extremely durable. Blue, LxWxH: 50x40x6 cm. 71 132 0028 Each

f Sissel® Balance Fit Pad

New!

The BalanceFit pad is perfect for developing a sense of balance and to improve coordination and reaction and for stability exercises. Suitable for indoor, outdoor and water use, with non-slip coating. 50x41x6 cm, 1 kg. 71 149 1845 Each

Bottom

g Sissel® Balance Fit Top

202

The multi-functional training aid for developing a sense of balance, coordination, strength and blood circulation. Specially shaped pimples in two different sizes on the standing surface increase perception and can also be used for foot massage if you‘re suffering from vein problems. Needle valve for individual pressure adjustment. ø approx. 34 cm. 71 149 2936 Each

i Sissel® Pilates Core Trainer

The mobile all-rounder for effective core training. • To strengthen core, arm and leg muscles • With 4 loops for parallel exercises for arms and legs • For  targeted problem zone workouts • Ideally suited for fitness, aerobics and therapy

• With hygienic Flex handles making the product safe and convenient to use • Medium intensity for effective resistance training • Exercise instructions included • Latex 71 148 0216 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Pilates, Balance Training Fitness Top Rated

4 Handles on the inside and the outside

4 Handles on the inside and the outside

sport-thieme.com

a FlexOring

A versatile pilates training product for strengthening muscles, especially the upper body, abdomen, arms and legs. 4 different holding positions mean that there are 4 different difficulty levels. Rubberised handles, ideal for classes. Non-slip. LxW: 50x50 cm, 670 g, grey/black. Training DVD included. 71 210 9204 Each

b Sissel® Pilates Circle

The Sissel Pilates Circle is a padded resistance circle with handles. Suitable for strengthening the upper body, torso and legs. This model is great for a wide range of different exercises thanks to the handles on the inside and outside of the ring. Black, ø 38 cm. Includes exercise poster. 71 149 1832 Each

c Sport-Thieme® “Deluxe” Pilates Ring

Now you can hold the ring on the inside and the outside providing you with even more training options. Training aid for the main muscle groups in chest, arms and

legs. Work against the resistance of the three-ply metal ring by compressing it. Stable anatomically shaped handles will enable you to also hold the ring between your legs or arms. ø approx. 35 cm, 400 g. 71 149 1715 Each

Pilates Rollers & Accessories New!

4 Soft and pleasant surface

e

h d

4 Hygienically closed pores

New!

4 Adjusts to the body

i

New!

g

d Sissel® Pilates Roller Center

Compact storage for up to 5 pilates rollers • Synthetic rubber • 95x19.5x6 cm Rollers not included. 71 148 0245 Each

New!

e Sissel® Pilates Roller

“Head Align Dynamic”

A smart solution for pilates exercises. The head is placed in the correct anatomical position. • Practical aid for pilates mat and roller exercises • Counteracts hyper-extending the cervical spine • Dynamic lying position thanks to rounded shape • Can be used with the rounded side up or down • Synthetic rubber that is gentle on the skin (soft EVA) • Fits onto any roller with ø 15 cm 71 148 0258 Each

f f Sport-Thieme “Basic” ®

Pilates Roller

4 Open-porous

The Sport-Thieme “Basic” pilates roller is primarily used in pilates training. Thanks to its dense PE foam it is ideal for stabilisa- h Sport-Thieme® Pilates Roller tion exercises. LxW: 90x14.5 cm, blue. “Premium” 71 149 1728 Each Very soft, pleasant surface for significantly enhanced comfort. The surface strucg Sissel® Pilates Roller “Pro” ture is non-slip and does not allow bacSuitable for pilates beginners and teria to penetrate the material. Can easily advanced users. Expands range of possible be washed. pilates exercises. Can also be used in gyms • Suitable for beginner and advanced level and practises. Blue, soft version, pilates 15x90 cm. Includes exercise poster. • Approx. 15x90 cm 71 149 1874 Each 71 132 0015 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

i Sissel® Pilates Roller “Pro Anatomic”

Perfect body position in roller training. • For targeted, effective core training • To strengthen abdominal muscles • Supports and stabilises the spine and discs • Ergonomic elliptical form adjusts perfectly to body shape • Gentle on neck and head muscles • Exercise poster included • Synthetic rubber • Approx. 90x15x15 cm 71 148 0203 Each

203


Fitness Weight Training New! New!

4 Breathable 4 Quick drying 4 Ideal for endurance sports c New! Ironwear® Short Sports Vest

a

Sports vest with 4.5 kg of additional weight for an intensive endurance, strength and stability training session. Ideal for increased efficiency in a variety of sports. Athletic cut for maximum movement freedom. Includes 20 Flex metal weights, each 230 g. Breathable and quick drying. Thanks to the Flex material, it can also be used in water. 100% polyester. 71 148 5602 Each

b

4 Waterproof 4 Extra weights can be added

4 Very good fit 4 Comfortable 4 Can also be used in water 4 Variable weight loads with 200 g weights

e Ironwear® Flex Training Vest 9 kgexpandable to 18 kg

Uni-Vest is an ideal weight vest ideally suited for fitness, strength and running training. Accurate and comfortable fit for any size thanks to high quality finish and variable weight loads. Can also be used în water. 38 Flex metal weights each 230 g. Total weight: 9 kg, can be extended up to 18 kg. 100% nylon. 71 198 2477 Each

New! a

New! Ironwear® Short Weight Vest

b

New! Ironwear® Weight Shorts

Weight vest with 4.5 kg of additional weight. For more intensive and effective workouts. With 18 Flex metal weights each 230 g for bespoke adjustment. Ideal for running, strength and fitness training. Weight can be increased to a max. of 9 kg. Thanks to the Flex metal weights, the vest can also be used in water. 100% nylon. 71 148 5615 Each

d Ironwear® Adjustable Wrist / Ankle Cuffs

These adjustable ankle and wrist cuffs can be added to in 200 g weights. They are great for aerobics, (kick) boxing, fitness and running training. The wide Velcro fasteners mean they fit the wrist perfectly. 100% nylon. Can also be used in water thanks to the Flex metal inlays. Available in two weight categories: 71 198 2448 2x 1.10 kgPair 71 198 2451 2x 2.25 kgPair

New!

Strengthens and stabilises the leg muscles. Shorts with 4.5 kg additional weight (can be extended up to 9 kg of extra weight). Open inner thigh section ensures maximum freedom of movement. Adjustable Velcro belt from approx. 65-135 cm. Includes 18 Flex metal weights of 230 g each. Flex metal also enables use in water. 100% nylon. 71 148 5703 Each

f

New! Ironwear® Shoe Cuff Weights

For strengthening ankles and leg muscles. Ideal for walking, jumping, running or climbing the stairs. Fits shoe sizes 36/37-48/49. Each of the 3 Flex metal weights is 230 g. Also suitable for use in water. 100% nylon. 71 148 5804 Pair

Accessories 4 For individually adding to Ironwear products

g Ironwear® Hand Irons™ Weight Gloves

Hand Irons are weight gloves for aerobics, (kick) boxing, karate, fitness and running training. Thanks to their triple fastening system, these gloves will adjust to fit all hands. 100% nylon. Can also be used in water. Available in 3 weight categories: 71 198 2406 2 x 0.45 kgPair 71 198 2419 2x 0.90 kgPair 71 198 2422 2x 1.35 kgPair

204

h Ironwear® Hand and Foot Cuffs

Wrist-Ankle Irons™ are wrist and ankle cuff weights for aerobics, (kick)boxing, karate, fitness and running training. They will fit all wrists perfectly thanks to their wide Velcro fasteners. 100% nylon. Can also be used in water. Available in 2 weight categories: 71 198 2435 2 x 0.45 kgPair 71 198 2464 2x 1.10 kgPair

i

New! Ironwear® Additional Weights

Additional weights for individually adding to the Ironwear products. The weights are particularly soft and flexible. With rounded edges for a safe and convenient workout. 10 Flex metal weights, each 230 g. 71 148 5628  Pack of 10

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Fitness

ight Vest

rt-Thieme We a Spofitne rt. ss training in all types of spo ®

For kg. With 9 removable 100% polyester, approx. 10 ple of all sizes. peo for able weight bags, suit Each 71 148 9239 

b

4 Extra weights can be added  small weight 49 bags each 1 kg

New! Kiefer® Hand and

Ankle Cuffs

Universally fitting cuffs for the ankles and wrists. Quick and easy to attach using the Velcro straps and safety fasteners. 100% neoprene cover. Approx. 400 g per cuff. Chlorine and salt water resistant. Ideal for use in aerobic classes, kick-boxing, karate, fitness and running training. 71 230 1307-1 Pair

4 Easy  to put on and take off 4 For  improving strength for jumps and speed

c Weight Cuffs

The wider and longer Velcro straps mean you can use these on both the wrists and ankles. 100% polyester. 71 218 3608 0.5 kgPair 71 218 3611 1.0 kgPair 71 218 3624 1.5 kgPair 71 218 3637 2.0 kgPair 71 218 3640 2.5 kgPair

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

New!

d Sport-Thieme “Premium” Weight Vest 38x 250 g

This vest is ideally suitable for fitness, strength and particularly running training thanks to the perfect fit. Customisation of the weight load is very flexible thanks to the 38 integrated pockets, also allowing you to even out the weight across your upper body. 38 x 250 g weights. The double Velcro system ensures the vest will stay in place. 100% polyester. 71 148 9242 Each

4 Extra weights can be added 4 38 small weight bags, each 250 g 205


Fitness Innovative Weight Concepts a “Handfix” Hand Fixing

New! a

4 In  3 different sizes

The hand fixing is a multifunctional aid for sports, therapy and rehabilitation. By relieving the hand and wrist, a greater dynamics and strength development arises in the whole shoulder area. Simple, L-shaped, integrated Velcro fastening sits across the wrist joint. A flexible band (70% polyester, 30% latex) stretches over the closed hand and is fixed with Velcro. Dumbbell not included. 71 217 1904 S (children)Each 71 217 1917 M (ladies)Each 71 217 1920 L ( men)Each

4 Combination of dumbbell and medicine ball 71 225 8007 71 225 8010 71 225 8023 71 225 8036 71 225 8049 71 225 8052 71 225 8065

c Reebok “Double ®

Also take a look at:

Medicine Balls, on page 21

Grip” Medicine Ball

A complete workout can be carried out using this combination of weight and medicine ball.

4 kgEach 5 kgEach 6 kgEach 7 kgEach 8 kgEach 9 kgEach 10 kgEach

4 Includes a workout DVD

b Gymstick™ Fitness Bag with Workout DVD

A completely new and innovative type of strength and core training. The robust but flexible Fitness Bags can be used indoors and outside. As there are so many different ways to use them, Fitness Bags provide a complete workout no matter what level you are at.

4 Will not roll away • Combines kettlebells, medicine balls, weights and boxing training • Incl. a workout DVD • Available in 4 different weight classes 71 111 6902 5 kgEach d Reebok® Vinyl Dumbells 71 111 6915 10 kgEach High quality vinyl covered dumbells. 71 111 6928 15 kgEach • Hygienic surface 71 111 6931 20 kgEach • Will  not roll away

71 225 8212 71 225 8225 71 225 8238 71 225 8241 71 225 8254

Green, 1 kgEach Orange, 2 kgEach Blue, 3 kgEach Purple, 4 kgEach Yellow, 5 kgEach

PowerBlock® Dumbbell Set 4 Equivalent to 37 pairs of weights 4 Complete compact dumbbell set 4 Simple weight adjustment with the “Selector Pin” mechanism

Set

New! g e PowerBlock® Sports Weight Set

A complete set of compact weights in just one dumbbell! • Individual weight adjustment • Patented “Selector Pin“ ensures the weight will be adjusted in seconds and guarantees risk-free training • Compact design • Only requires a small area, Power Block replaces up to 37 different weight combinations and only needs 46x56 cm storage space • Large selection of weights • Unique handle core • Colour coded weight scale • PowerBlock® weights can quickly and easily be adjusted with just one look at the colour scale and one hand • 15 year manufacturer’s guarantee

206

New!

Buy Now!

h

f h g

New! Finnlo® Vario Tech

Dumbbell System

71 225 0609 Sport 2.4 = 1.5-11 kgPair Practical dumbbell system for a time 71 225 0612 Sport 5.0 = 2.5-22.5 kgPair and space saving free weight training. 71 225 0625 Sport 9.0 = 1.0-22.5 kgPair The weights can easily and quickly be adjusted with the convenient sliding f New! PowerBlock® mechanism which allows up to 21 weight Collapsible Stand settings. Any discs that aren‘t required in The collapsible stand is the compact solu- the training session stay in the plastic stotion for storing your PowerBlock® Compact rage holder. When the dumbbell is put Dumbbells. So that your dumbbells are down, the discs are automatically realways to hand and you no longer have to inserted into the holder. Contains 20 stoop to the floor. Assembled dimensions: discs of 1.15 kg each. Includes plastic 50x45x60 cm (LxWxH). storage container. 71 225 0638 Each 71 147 1801 Pair

New! Finnlo® Vario Tech

Dumbbell Stand

The matching dumbbell stand for the Vario-Tech dumbbell system. The dumbbells can be safely and conveniently put away on the gently sloping storage stand. Dumbbells not included. Assembled size: 50x69x69 cm. 71 147 1814 Each

i

New! Finnlo® Vario-Tech

Complete Set

Complete set consists of 2 Vario-Tech dumbbells, plastic shelves and dumbbell stand. Quick and simple weight adjustment of 2-25 kg per dumbbell. Perfect for a time and space saving workout. 71 147 1827 Set

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Strength Training

Top Rated “I always like to use these dumbbells. Simple design, handy and easy to clean.” sport-thieme.com

b

b Sport-Thieme Vinyl ®

Hand Held Dumbbell

For working out, aerobics and fitness training. Cast iron with coloured plastic coating. The glossy surface prevents the absorption of sweat and can be easily cleaned. Handle length: approx. 9 cm. For use in gyms, clubs, fitness centres and at home.

4 With practical straps

a Aerobics Dumbbells

Coated with soft rubber, comfortable, adjustable hand and foot straps with Velcro fasteners. A pair. 71 147 4305 0.5 kg, grey/bluePair 71 147 4318 1 kg, grey/redPair 71 147 4321 1.5 kg, grey/greenPair 71 147 4334 2 kg, grey/purplePair 71 147 4347 3 kg, grey/blackPair

Dumbbell Sets

Great Value!

Buy Now!

Product Code

Design

71 146 3460 71 146 3402 71 146 3499 71 146 3415 71 146 3428 71 146 3431 71 146 3444 71 146 3473 71 146 3486

0.5 kg, yellow 1 kg, red 1.5 kg, mint 2 kg, purple 3 kg, green 4 kg, blue 5 kg, orange 7.5 kg, pink 10 kg, black

Aerobics Dumbbells d Soft High quality weights for aerobics and rehabilitation.

The weights are covered in soft rubber, making them very soft and pleasant to hold. 71 145 2004 2x 0.5 kg, pinkPair 71 145 2017 2x 1.0 kg, greenPair 71 145 2020 2x 1.5 kg, redPair

Set c

New! Sport-Thieme® Vinyl Hand

Weights Set

The set consists of 18 hand weights, 1 pair each from 0.5 to 10 kg. 71 146 4102 Set

d

Compact Dumbbells Top Rated

sport-thieme.com

e Sport-Thieme® Dumbbell Sets

Dumbbells with changeable cast iron discs, short bars 35 cm long, ø 30 mm, approx. 2.5 kg. Can be fitted with 10, 15 or 20 kg. • Set 1: 2x 1.25 kg, 2x 2.5 kg + bar = 10 kg • Set 2: 2x 1.25 kg, 2x 5 kg + bar = 15 kg • Set 3: 2x 1.25 kg, 2x 2.5 kg, 2x 5 kg + bar = 20 kg 5 year guarantee! 71 146 5509 Set 1 = 10 kg Each 71 146 5512 Set 2 = 15 kg Each 71 146 5525 Set 3 = 20 kg Each

4 With a practical carry case

f Sport-Thieme® Dumbbell Set, 10 kg incl. case

This set comes in a practical ABS storage case. Consisting of: • 1 chrome weight bar (30 mm) • 2 star seals • Chrome discs with rubber inlay (2x2.5 kg, 2x1.25 kg) 71 146 5613 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

g Sport-Thieme® Compact Dumbbells

The classic dumbbell set used in training by top athletes. Permanently screwed-on cast iron discs, non interchangeable. Price per item. 5 year guarantee! 71 227 0207 2.5 kgEach 71 227 0210 5 kgEach 71 227 0223 7.5 kgEach 71 227 0236 10 kgEach 71 227 0249 12.5 kgEach 71 227 0252 15 kgEach 71 227 0265 17.5 kgEach 71 227 0278 20 kgEach 71 227 0281 22.5 kgEach 71 227 0294 25 kgEach 71 227 0308 27.5 kgEach 71 227 0311 30 kgEach

Set h Sport-Thieme® Compact Dumbbell Set

Set of 24 dumbbell weights, 2 pairs each from 2.5 to 30 kg. 71 227 0324 Set

i Sport-Thieme® Chrome Dumbbells

For exercising and dumbbell training. 5 year guarantee! 71 146 7404 1 kgEach 71 146 7417 2 kgEach 71 146 7420 3 kgEach 71 146 7433 4 kgEach 71 146 7446 5 kgEach 71 146 7459 6 kgEach 71 146 7462 7 kgEach 71 146 8003 8 kgEach 71 146 8016 9 kgEach 71 146 7488 10 kgEach

Set

j Sport-Thieme® Chrome Dumbbell Set

The set consists of weight sets from 1 to 10 kg (1 pair of each). 71 146 7491 Set

207


Fitness Weight Bars, Barbell Sets a

New!

a

Great Value!

New! Sport-Thieme®

Compact Rubber Dumbbell

Compact dumbbell made from rubber for professional gym equipment. The dumbbell is especially long lasting and gentle to floor surface. Ergonomically shaped, chrome plated and knurled. 71 220 0503 1 kgEach 71 220 0516 2 kgEach 71 220 0529 3 kgEach 71 220 0532 4 kgEach 71 220 0545 5 kgEach 71 220 0558 6 kgEach

71 220 0561 7 kgEach 71 220 0574 8 kgEach 71 220 0587 9 kgEach 71 220 0590 10 kgEach 71 220 0604 12.5 kgEach 71 220 0617 15 kgEach 71 220 0620 17.5 kgEach 71 220 0633 20 kgEach 71 220 0646 22.5 kgEach 71 220 0659 25 kgEach 71 220 0662 27.5 kgEach 71 220 0675 30 kgEach

Buy Now! b Weighted Bars

4 7 weight categories

These weighted bars are used in aerobics and in therapy. They are particuNew! larly suitable for warming up. Using the 1.05 m long bar will develop shoulder, chest and buttock muscles. The bar diameters vary from 20 mm (1 kg) to 43 mm (6 kg). Weighted bars are made from flexible plastic and offer perfect protection when doing shoulder exercises. Can also be used in water. 71 146 6759 1 kg, greyEach 71 146 6762 1.5 kg, orangeEach 71 146 6704 2 kg, light blueEach 71 146 6717 3 kg, redEach ® 71 146 6720 4 kg, greenEach d New! Togu Ruton Mini Dumbbell 71 146 6733 5 kg, yellowEach 71 146 6746 6 kg, dark blueEach The classic dumbbell in a new look and in a new material. The Ruton protects the floor from damage. Great training effect thanks to the loose filling. Knobbly surface provides a safe and non-slip handle. Ruton is easy to clean and washable. The dumbbell can also be used in water and will not rust. 71 220 0301 250 g, spring greenEach 71 220 0314 500 g, pinkEach 71 220 0327 1 kg, blueEach

4 For 42 bars for Weighted Bars

This trolley offers enough space for approx. 42 bars. LxWxH: 53x53x85 cm, 15 kg. With wheels and handle. 71 146 6775 Each

g Sport-Thieme®

Cardio-Fitness Rope

Training Bar

Thera-Band Flexible Training Bar is a handy, non-slip and light resistance product used in rehabilitation for strengthening the hand and wrist as well as underarm and shoulder muscles. The Thera-Band Flexible Training Bar is 30 cm long and comes in four diameters that correspond to increasingly difficult

208

resistance levels. 71 218 3031 Yellow, 0.7 kgEach 71 218 3002 Red, approx. 1.5 kgEach 71 218 3015 Green, approx. 2.5 kgEach 71 218 3028 Blue, approx. 3.5 kgEach 71 218 3031-1 Yellow, 0.7 kgEach 71 218 3002-1 Red, approx. 1.5 kgEach 71 218 3015-1 Green, approx. 2.5 kgEach 71 218 3028-1 Blue, approx. 3.5 kgEach

Buy Now!

Set e Vinyl Dumbbell Set

Set consists of: • 2 each of: 1.5 kg, 3 kg and 5 kg weights • 1 practical stand for compact storage Perfect for gyms, clubs and home use. LxWxH: 38x38x28 cm. 71 146 4405 Set

h Thera-Band® Weight Balls

c Transport Trolley

f Thera-Band® Flexible

Set

“The swinging rope” – ideal fitness training for beginners and well honed athletes alike. It combines the mass and flexibility of a rope and enables intensive strength and endurance training. 3-strand twisted rope made of colourful polypropylene outside and heavy polyester inside. Approx. 15 m long, ø 35 mm. Sealed ends. Red-Black. Approx. 10.4 kg. How it works: Attach the middle of the rope to a hook and take both ends in your hands. Pull it to create a slight tension and start to swing it in rhythmic waves. 71 124 9301 Each

Soft weights from Thera Band® are the gentler alternative to weight cuffs or dumbbells. Easy to handle and in a ball shape, they offer a functional and pleasing way to do one or two sided exercises. ø 11 cm. 71 148 3707 Beige, 0.5 kgEach 71 148 3710 Yellow, 1 kgEach 71 148 3723 Red, 1.5 kgEach 71 148 3736 Green, 2 kgEach 71 148 3749 Blue, 2.5 kgEach 71 148 3752 Black, 3 kgEach 71 148 3707-1 Beige, 0.5 kgEach 71 148 3710-1 Yellow, 1 kgEach 71 148 3723-1 Red, 1.5 kgEach 71 148 3736-1 Green, 2 kgEach 71 148 3749-1 Blue, 2.5 kgEach 71 148 3752-1 Black, 3 kgEach

Set ® i Thera-Band

Weight Ball Set

The set consists of one ball of each colour. 71 148 3765 Set

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Group Fitness Fitness

Bodypump Individual Parts

4 With recessed handles

a

a

Bodypump™ Weight Discs

c

Original weight discs. Plastic coated discs with steel grit filling. 71 146 6616 1 kgPair 71 146 6629 2.5 kgPair 71 146 6632 5 kgPair 71 146 6687 10 kgPair

c Bodypump™ Barbell Set

b Bodypump™ Quick Locks

b

With quick release mechanism for ø 27 mm weight bars. 71 146 6674 Pair

New!

27.5 kg, rubbercoated set

The original barbell set from the Bodypump™ programme. The weights are plastic coated and therefore protect the floor. Discs with steel grit filling. Quick release locks make changing discs simple. The set (approx. 19 kg) consists of:

• 1 long bar (approx. 2 kg, 130 cm, ø 27 mm) • 1 pair quick release locks • 1 pair 1 kg weight discs • 1 pair 2.5 kg weight discs • 1 pair 5 kg weight discs 71 146 6603 Set

8 kg set

f 27.5 kg, chrome set with rubber inlay

d

16 kg set

New! Sport-Thieme® Barbell

Set 27.5 kg, Rubber-Coated or Chrome

Designed for you: barbell sets with a choice between high quality rubber-coated or chrome weight discs with 160 cm long weight bar including quick release. Weights in sets are as follows: • 27.5 kg set: 2x 0.5 kg, 2x 1.25 kg, 2x 2.5 kg, 2x 5 kg • Barbell bar 160 cm, approx. 9 kg, ø 30 mm Rubber-coated 71 146 5206 Set

26 kg set

4 High quality 4 Solid material

f Kit Fit'us Barbell Set

Chrome with rubber inlay 71 146 5219 Set

e

20 kg set

e Reebok® Rep Set

The Reebok Rep Set consists of highquality, rubber-coated weight discs and a long bar with spring lock. Includes: • 1 barbell bar (ø 30mm/140 cm) • 1 pair spring loaded quick release locks • 1 pair 5 kg discs

The sets consists of: • 1 long bar ø 28 mm, 140 cm, 1 kg • Weights discs: - Set of 8 kg = 2x 2 kg, 2x 1 kg, 2x 0.5 kg - Set of 16 kg = 2x 4 kg, 2x 2 kg, 2x 1 kg, 2x 0.5 kg - Set of 26 kg = 2x 5 kg, 2x 4 kg, 2x 2 kg, 2x 1 kg, 2x 0.5 kg • 1 pair of quick release locks

g

This training set has been specially developed for lessons in clubs. The weight discs are coated in plastic so that the floor underneath is protected when laying weights down or even when they fall • 1 pair 2.5 kg discs on the floor. g New! Kit Fit'us Shelf Stand Mobile stand for approx. 20 Kit Fit‘us • 1 pair 1.25 kg discs 71 146 6658 8 kgSet • Total weight approx. 20 kg 71 146 6661 16 kgSet barbell bars. 71 225 6812 Set 71 229 1606 26 kgSet 71 229 1619 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

209


Strength Training Dumbbell Rack

Individually adjustable bars

5

year guarantee

a Sport-Thieme® Wall Dumbbell Rack

For exercise and aerobics weights and dumbbells. Space saving solution for up to 50 dumbbells. Made from strong rectangular tubing. Wall fixings not included. LxWxH: 150x48x24 cm, 13.2 kg. Five year guarantee. 71 145 9281 Each

c Sport-Thieme® Chrome Dumbbell Rack

5

year guarantee

d Sport-Thieme® Mobile Barbell Rack

For barbell bars and weight discs with holes larger Stores up to 10 pairs of chrome dumbbells (1-10 kg). than ø 28.5 mm. Equipped with four castors. LxWxH: 60x40x100 cm.  bar holders 71 145 9265 Each • 10 • 6 disc holders • Will support up to 750 kg • LxWxH:  121x65x110 cm 71 145 7621 Each

® Mobile Dumbbell Rack b Sport-Thieme For exercise and aerobics weights and dumbbells.

Mobile storage rack for gym and club use. Holds up to 80 dumbbells. The strong double castors make it fast to transport to the next training location. 28 kg, Storage size: LxWxH: 112x65x86 cm. Five year guarantee. 71 145 9278 Each

5

year guarantee

4 Very robust 4 Each  bar can hold up to 100 kg

e

e Sport-Thieme® Storage Rack and Squat Stand

Made of steel tubes, adjustable height 105-185 m. Approx. f Sport-Thieme® Weights Storage Rack Compact and neatly arranged storage rack for four 160x60x120 cm. Will support up to 300 kg (when loaded barbells. Dumbbells, kettlebells and discs can also anchored to the floor). With safety device. be stored. LxWxH: 77x71x79 cm. 5 year guarantee. 5 year guarantee! 71 145 7605 Each 71 145 9294 Each

5

year guarantee

h Sport-Thieme® Double Storage Rack for Dumbbells

The Sport-Thieme® dumbbell storage rack is suitable for: • Compact weights • Dumbbells/kettlebells • Chrome weights • Gym weights The sloping shelves are designed for ergonomic use. The g Sport-Thieme® Disc Storage Rack Sturdy disc storage rack with 7 stainless steel bars distances can be adjusted individually to enable the for compact storage of discs with 30 mm holes. LxWxH: storage of different types of weights. Sturdy steel con78x45x100 cm. 5 year guarantee! struction with double storage option. 150x65x73 cm. 71 145 9210 30 mm, 7 barsEach Each row can hold 150 kg. 5 year guarantee! 71 145 3108 50 mm, 6 barsEach 71 145 9252 Each

210

4 Sturdy design 4 Each row can hold up to 150 kg Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Kettlebells & Accessories Fitness a Buy Now!

4 Rubber coating protects floor and kettlebell 4 Stylish design

New!

Set Buy Now!

10

year

guarantee

Sets

c

Rubber-Coated Kettlebell with Chrome Handle

The rubber coating not only protects the floor but also the kettlebell itself. The chrome handle provides an excellent hold, similar to a dumbbell or barbell.

a Sport-Thieme® Cast Iron Kettlebells, painted

Kettlebells are mainly used for ballistic type exercises, e.g. snatches, lunges, swings or long cycles, developing speed but also muscular endurance. Kettlebells are more compact than dumbbells and are therefore more suitable for plyometric training or throwing exercises. They can however also be used in strength training, e.g. bent presses. 10 year guarantee! 71 217 4352 4 kgEach 71 217 4307 8 kgEach 71 217 4310 12 kgEach 71 217 4323 16 kgEach 71 217 4336 20 kgEach 71 217 4349 24 kgEach 71 217 4365 28 kgEach 71 217 4378 32 kgEach

New! Sport-Thieme®

b

New! Sport-Thieme® Kett-

New!

lebells

Easy: 1x 4 kg, 1x 8 kg, 1x 12 kg, 1x 16 kg Medium: 1x 12 kg, 1x 16 kg, 1x 20 kg, 1x 24 kg Difficult: 1x 20 kg, 1x 24 kg, 1x 28 kg, 1x 32 kg Expert: 1x 4 kg, 1x 8 kg, 1x 12 kg, 1x 16 kg, 1x 20 kg, 1x 24 kg, 1x 28 kg, 1x 32 kg 71 219 8008 EasySet 71 219 8011 MediumSet 71 219 8024 DifficultSet 71 219 8037 ExpertSet

4 Dumbbell, medicine ball and kettlebell all in one 4 Ideal for dynamic, functional training

e d Kettlebell Storage Rack

A very stable storage rack. Suitable for approx. 150 kg per row. LxWxH: 150x60x80 cm. 20 kg. 5 year guarantee! 71 145 7618 Each

5

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

year guarantee

71 220 1304 4 kgEach 71 220 1317 8 kgEach 71 220 1320 12 kgEach 71 220 1333 16 kgEach 71 220 1346 20 kgEach 71 220 1359 24 kgEach 71 220 1362 28 kgEach 71 220 1375 32 kgEach

New! Sport-Thieme® Rubber

Medicine Ball with Handles

Durable medicine ball with handy moulded handles for dynamic, functional training. Can be used as a dumbbell, medicine ball or kettlebell. Very abrasion proof, shaperetaining, hygienic and washable. 3-5 kg ø approx. 23.5 cm, 6-10 kg ø approx. 26 cm.

71 220 0200 3 kgEach 71 220 0213 4 kgEach 71 220 0226 5 kgEach 71 220 0239 6 kgEach 71 220 0242 7 kgEach 71 220 0255 8 kgEach 71 220 0268 9 kgEach 71 220 0271 10 kgEach

211


® Sport-Thieme Weight Sets Kraftsport Strength

A power package at a clever bargain price – put together specially for you!

Cast Iron

Rubber

4 4x 2.5 kg, 4x 5 kg, 2x 10 kg

4 4x 2.5 kg, 4x 5 kg, 2x 10 kg

a Sport-Thieme Cast Iron Weight Disc Set, 50 kg

b Sport-Thieme® Rubber Weight Disc Set, 50 kg

Chrome

Competition

®

Set consisting of 10 high quality weight discs made from cast iron with 30 mm Set consisting of 10 high quality rubber coated weight discs with 30 mm holes (4x holes (4x 2.5 kg, 4x 5 kg, 2x 10 kg). 2.5 kg, 4x 5 kg, 2x 10 kg). 71 300 3608 Set 71 300 3611 Set

4 4x 2.5 kg, 4x 5 kg, 2x 10 kg

4 4x 2.5 kg, 4x 5 kg, 2x 10 kg

c Sport-Thieme Chrome Weight Disc Set, 50 kg ®

d Sport-Thieme® Competition Weight Disc Set, 50 kg

Set consisting of 10 high quality chrome weight discs with rubber inlay with 30 mm Set consisting of 10 high quality cast iron competition weight discs with 50 mm holes (4x 2.5 kg, 4x 5 kg, 2x 10 kg). holes (4x 2.5 kg, 4x 5 kg, 2x 10 kg). 71 300 3624 Set 71 300 3637 Set

e

New!

New! ''Power''

Fitness Training Gloves

The cotton wrist wrap stabilises the wrists with adjustable pressure. Durable stretch inserts over the back of the hand and between the fingers not only increase flexibility and fit but also the glove‘s breathability. The leather parts on the palm area make the gloves very comfortable and give the fingers a natural grip. Furthermore, the gloves have a durable section on the fingers to help you take the gloves off. 60% leather, 30% polyester, 10% cotton. 71 138 7706 MPair 71 138 7719 LPair 71 138 7722 XLPair

Set Cast iron

Sets

Chrome with rubber inlay

Buy Now!

g Sport-Thieme® Barbell Set, 50 kg or 75 kg

f Adidas® Weightlifting Belt

The Adidas Weightlifting Belt is a robust nylon belt for general strength training and specific weightlifting. It has a durable Velcro fastening with a sturdy metal strap for a secure and comfortable adjustment to the waist. Available in sizes M, L and XL. Black/red. 65% nylon, 30% EVA, 5% polypropylene.

212

Sizes (waist): • M (91-103 cm) • L (96-108 cm) • XL (101-113 cm) 71 138 7100 Size MEach 71 138 7113 Size LEach 71 138 7126 Size XLEach

Put together for you: barbell sets with a choice between high quality cast iron or chrome weight discs with 180 cm long weight bar including quick release. Weights in sets are as follows: • 50 kg set: 4x 1.25 kg, 6x 2.5 kg, 4x 5 kg • 75 kg set: 4x 1.25 kg, 4x 2.5 kg, 2x 5 kg, 4x 10 kg

50 kg 71 300 3507 Cast ironSet 71 300 3523 Chrome with rubber inlay Set 75 kg 71 300 3510 Cast ironSet 71 300 3536 Chrome with rubber inlay Set

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Barbells Strength Training Cast Iron

Rubber-Coated

4 For short and training dumbbells 4 Hole: ø 30 mm

4 Very long lasting and rust-free 4 Quiet 4 Cast iron core 4 Hole: ø 30 mm

b

a Details and product codes: see table

Details and product codes: see table

Chrome

Competition

c

d

4 Cast iron 4 Hole: ø 50 mm 4 Recessed handles

4 Chromed, with rubber inlay 4 Hole: ø 30 mm

Details and product codes: see table

Details and product codes: see table

Type ill. 0.5 kg

Cast iron a 71 146 4809

Rubber-coated b 71 146 4900

Chrome c 71 145 8709

Competition d –

1.25 kg

71 146 4812

71 146 4913

71 145 8712

2.5 kg

71 146 4825

71 146 4926

71 145 8725

71 146 2311

5 kg

71 146 4838

71 146 4939

71 145 8738

71 146 2324

10 kg

71 146 4841

71 146 4942

71 145 8741

71 146 2337

15 kg

71 146 4854

71 146 4955

71 145 8754

71 146 2340

20 kg

71 146 4867

71 146 4968

71 145 8767

71 146 2353

25 kg

71 146 2366

Accessories from Sport-Thieme® e Competition Barbell Bar

Made of special steel, black. Length 220 cm with pivot bearing, ø 50 mm, bar 30 mm, grip range 131 cm, 450 kg max. capacity, 20 kg. Please order collars separately. 5 year guarantee! 71 146 2409 Each

f Competition SZ Bar

Black, approx. 120 cm with 50 mm disc mounting section, 9.5 kg. Collars included. 5 year guarantee! 71 146 2425 Each

g Shoulder Protection Roll

i Long Weight Bar, ø 30 mm

160 cm long, approx. 9 kg 71 146 6515 Each 180 cm long, approx. 10 kg 71 146 6502 Each 200 cm long, approx. 11 kg 71 146 6531 Each 220 cm long, approx. 12.5 kg 71 146 6573 Each

j Long Weight Bar, ø 30 mm

With safety thread, 180 cm, approx. 10 kg. 71 146 6557 Each

e

220 cm

f

g

120 cm

k

h

l i j

4 Threaded

m Replacement Spinlock

m

n

Collars

For ø 30 mm threaded dumbbell bars. For 30 mm diameter dumbbell bars. p 71 150 6020 Pair o Black, antibacterial finish, leather effect k Dumbbell Bar surface structure. 38 cm long, 8.5 cm thick. ø 30 mm, 35 cm long, approx. 2.5 kg. 71 209 0001 Each 71 146 5802 Each n Spinlock Collars o Collars, 30 mm Whether for bench presses, shoulFor barbell bars with locking screw, der presses or squats, it is essential that Dumbell Bar l ø 30 mm. the discs are firmly secured to the barCurl Bar Threaded bar with collars, ø 30 mm, h 71 150 6004 Pair bell bar. With this spinlock collar, you can Approx. 120 cm long, ø 30 mm, approx. 2.5 kg, 350 mm for approx. 2-3 easily and safely add or remove discs. 7.5 kg. discs, 400 mm for approx. 4-5 discs. p Spring Collar Clips, 30 mm 71 146 6528 StandardEach 71 146 5815 350 mmEach Weight: 2.5 kg. For ø 30 mm weights bars. 71 146 6560 ThreadedEach 71 146 5828 400 mmEach 71 146 2412 Each 71 150 6033 Pair

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

213


Boxing Punch Bags, Training Dummies and Accessories f

d

e

4 Swivelling 4 For punch bags of up to 60 kg

5

year guarantee

New! Real leather

a Great Value!

With contact zones to increase accuracy

b

Buy Now!

Real leather

c

4 Steel rings for long lasting durability 4 Double laminated leather

b Hammer® Sparring Punch Bag

The punch bag with contact points helps learn punch combinations, for reaction training, building up muscles and improving stamina. The swivel means that the succession of punches is continually changing. Made from tearproof nylon fabric. Comes filled with hanging chain and swivel. LxW: 80x28 cm, approx. 18 kg. 71 150 0237 Each

d

c

Made from double laminated high quality leather. With steel carrier ring at the top to prevent unhooking. This increases the lifespan of the bag considerably. 150 3630 90x35 cm, 25 kgEach a Sport-Thieme® Punch Bag “Studio Line” 71 71 150 3643 100x35 cm, 27 kgEach A professional punch bag made from particularly 71 150 3656 120x35 cm, 40 kgEach tear-resistant material. Filled, includes 4 point hanging 71 150 3669 150x35 cm, 48 kgEach chain and swivel. Black. 71 150 0309 35x80 cm, 25 kgEach 71 150 3672 180x35 cm, 60 kgEach 71 150 0312 35x100 cm, 30 kgEach 71 150 0325 35x120 cm, 35 kgEach 71 150 0338 35x150 cm, 45 kgEach 71 150 0341 35x180 cm, 55 kgEach

2 Leg Training Dummy

Training dummy made from robust vinyl. Provides excellent conditions for safely training throwing, moving, gripping techniques and boxing punches. Suitable for all styles in the ring and Judo. With an anatomically correct weight distribution. 71 151 3048 XS, 15 kgEach 71 151 3051 S, 25 kgEach 71 151 3064 M, 30 kgEach 71 151 3077 L, 40 kgEach

e Green Hill® Leather Punch Bag

New! Foeldeak® “Fit”

New! Foeldeak® “Team” 2 Leg Training

Dummy

Extremely durable leather training dummy. Suitable for all combat sports. Throw, punch and grip techniques can be powerfully and safely practised with this strong yet soft leather dummy. Its ideal weight distribution provides the athlete with optimal conditions for any upper body and leg attack training exercises. 71 151 3006 XS, 15 kgEach 71 151 3019 S, 25 kgEach 71 151 3022 M, 30 kgEach 71 151 3035 L, 40 kgEach

Don’t forget to order: • Skipping Ropes, on pages 288-289

Punch Bag Accessories f

Sport-Thieme® Punch Bag Wall Bracket “Pro”

The steel construction has been developed to meet professional demands. For punch bags of up to 60 kg. Overhang approx. 100 cm. Incl. snap hook, without punch bag and wall plug material. 5 year guarantee! 71 150 1940 Non-swivellingEach 71 150 1911 SwivellingEach

g Sport-Thieme® Ceiling Mounts for Punch Bags

Steel, galvanised, includes snap hook. Dowels and screws not included. Will hold up to 55 kg. 71 150 1908 Each

214

75 cm

New! h

i

4 Overhang approx. 75 cm 4 Can withstand up to 50 kg 4 Swivel arm can also be locked to the wall with the punch bag

h Sport-Thieme® Punch Bag Bracket “Basic”

A practical bracket for punch bags. Overhang approx. 75 cm. Will support up to 50 kg. Incl. eyelets, wall plugs and screws. 71 150 1979 Each

i New! Rotating Attachment Head for Speed Ball

The chrome plated and ball-bearing mounted device from Bremshey is suited for professional use in the gym and for home use. The ideal swivel bracket for speed balls, speed bags and punch balls. 71 151 3602 Each

j Replacement Chain for Punch Bag g

With four hanging points. Not illustrated. 71 150 2103 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Punch Cylinders, Boxing Dummies Boxing d 4 Height adjustable

Height can be adjusted up to 1.75 m

4 Height adjustable

4 Height adjustable Height can be adjusted from 1.70 to 1.90 m

a

f

e

Height can be adjusted from 1.65 to 2.05 m

4 Height adjustable

Height can be adjusted from 1.55 to 2.05 m

c

e “BOB XL” Boxing Dummy

An even more realistic training aid for many techniques. Bob‘s longer body c Sport-Thieme® means more space both for punches and Free Standing Bag a Anti Agression Punch Strong training aid for gyms and recrea- for kicks. Cylinder • Height adjustable from: 155-205 cm tional use. The upper body has a A sporty way to break down aggression. Offers 1 cm thick anti-shock coating. Foam • Polyethylene base to be filled with sand the boxer great fun. Can be used indoors or or water. Round so that BOB can simfilling inside the bag, 75 cm long, outdoors. Base made of plastic, can be filled ply be rolled into place, ø approx. 60 cm, ø 35 cm. Simple to adjust height up to with sand or similar material. Cylinder filled height approx. 40 cm 1.75 m. The base can be filled with sand with air, very strong. Height 150 cm. • Weight when full approx. 122.5 kg or water (approx. 100 litres). 71 133 7219 Each 71 150 4301 Each 71 149 3506 Each

Set b

Anti Aggression Set

Consisting of: • 1 punch cylinder a • 1 pair of boxing gloves, 8 oz. 71 133 7280 Set

g

d Sport-Thieme® Punch Cylinder

f Sport-Thieme® Free Standing Punch Bag Evolution

More fun in fitness boxing. The pro“Stand up” punch bag. Ideal for workfessional training equipment for gyms and outs and breaking down aggression. The ambitious fitness sports people. Large yelrotating upper body is 75 cm long and low punching area (130x40 cm). Height ø 30 cm. Simple to adjust height from adjustable from 165-205 cm. Stable base, 1.70-1.90 m. The base can be filled with ø 75 cm, can be filled with sand or water sand or water (approx. 80 litres). (approx. 100 litres). Height: 165 cm. 71 150 4314 Each 71 150 4327 Each

with Target Zones

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

Buy Now!

i Sport-Thieme® Boxing Set “Evolution”

New! Wavemaster® 2XL Pro

With 10 target zones which represent key body areas. 71 149 3737 Each

Set

4 With target zones

New! Wavemaster® 2XL Pro

The punching surface is made from durable vinyl which covers high density foam. The low base and the large sand bag provide the best conditions for punch and kick training. The low central point of the base offers stability and functionality. An extra large filling hole and an integrated closing cap ensures the filling is secure and at the same time allows the base to be easily filled with sand or water. • LxW: 174x45 cm (pad: 135 cm long) • Filled weight approx. 140 kg • Red, black or blue 71 149 3708 BlackEach 71 149 3711 BlueEach 71 149 3724 RedEach

h

Set

New!

Professional fitness boxing training for use in gyms or at home. Contents: • 1 pair of 10 oz. training gloves with Velcro fastening, page 216 a • 1 pair of boxing hand wraps (60% cotton, 40% elastane), page 216 c • 1 free standing Evolution punch bag, f 71 150 4330 Set

215


Boxing Boxing Gloves, Boxing Wraps 4 3 layer foam padding 4 Wide Velcro fastening 4 100% leather

Great Value!

4 Can easily be put on without any help

Buy Now!

c Sport-Thieme® Boxing Hand Wraps

With thumb loop and Velcro fastening. Protects and stabilises hands and wrists. Black, elasticated, approx. 400x4 cm. 71 150 0963 Pair

a Sport-Thieme® “Knock-Out” Boxing Gloves

Very high quality boxing gloves made of leather. Incl. storage bag, fixed thumb, ventilation holes and slot on the inside and a wide Velcro fastener making them easy to put on. The surface material is 100% leather, inside 100% polyester, three-ply hand shaped foam (latex, soft and firm foam) and wide Velcro fastening. 71 150 0022 10 oz.Pair 71 150 0035 12 oz.Pair

4 Glove and pad in one

b Sport-Thieme® “Workout” Boxing Gloves

High quality training gloves with Velcro fastening making them easy to put on and take off. With fixed thumb to avoid injuries. Ideal for workouts, boxing aerobics and home boxing. Outer material: 100% polyurethane. Inner padding: 100% polyester. 71 150 4037 8 oz.Pair 71 150 4008 10 oz.Pair 71 150 4011 12 oz.Pair 71 150 4024 14 oz.Pair

f Green Hill® “Pro” Ball Gloves

Straight gloves made from high quality leather. Sizes: S-XL. High quality leather, 100% cotton filling, integra71 150 3500 SPair ted shell, Velcro fastening with printed target point. 475 71 150 3513 MPair g, 34x18x8 cm. 71 150 3526 LPair 71 150 3627 Pair 71 150 3539 XLPair

e Green Hill® Trainer Mitts

d Boxing Hand Wraps

New workout hand wraps. Protects and stabilises the hand. Simple and fast to put on and remove. Ideal for use in classes. 60% cotton, 40% elastane. 71 150 0918 S-MPair 71 150 0921 L-XLPair

g Boxing Gloves with Open Fingers

Leather, with open fingers and elasticated fastening. Ideal for equipment training and self-defence. 71 149 9940 SPair 71 149 9953 MPair 71 149 9966 LPair

New!

4 DBV (German Boxing Association) logo available on request 4 Competition gloves 4 Especially good for sparring 4W  ith gel padding 4 Leather Hill® “Tiger” Boxing Gloves h Green Made from leather, pre-shaped, with target area,

wrist protecting Velcro fastening, perfect performance: 10 and 12 oz., red or blue. DBV (German Boxing Association) logo available on request for a surcharge (without target area). 71 150 3425 10 oz., redPair 71 150 3438 10 oz., bluePair 71 150 3441 12 oz., redPair 71 150 3454 12 oz., bluePair

216

i Adidas® “Mexican” Indoor Gloves/

j Adidas® “Shadow Dynamic” Boxing

Inner glove (also suitable as a training glove) with 10 mm thick gel padding over the knuckles. Hand section made from 22 mm thick neoprene with flexible finger loops. Breathable palm section with Climacool technology. Includes a 2 m long wrap with Velcro fastening for securing the wrists. 71 149 5049 S/MPair 71 149 5052 L/XLPair

These gloves are very robust thanks to the innovative “Maya” Nubuc PU. Pre-shaped with inserted gel padding. Adidas ClimaCool technology. 6.5 cm wide Velcro strap. Available in 4 sizes. 71 149 5036 8 oz.Pair 71 149 5007 10 oz.Pair 71 149 5010 12 oz.Pair 71 149 5023 14 oz.Pair

Training Gloves

Gloves

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Boxing Sets, Punch Pads Boxing

Sets

4 Especially for children

Great Value!

4 Boxing set for practised teens and men

Buy Now! a Hammer® Boxing Set “Kids”

The ideal beginner‘s package for children, especially suited to “messing around” and breaking down aggression. The set consists of: • 1 punch bag (11 kg) made from durable 100% nylon fabric, 28x60 cm, filled, including hanging chain and swivel hook • 1 pair of 8 oz. boxing gloves, with Velcro fastening (enabling children to put gloves on and remove them without any help) Only for private use. 71 150 4444 Set

c Hammer® Training Boxing 4 Great  for teens and women

Set “Chicago”

The complete training package for home use. The set consists of: ® Hammer “Women & Teens” • 1 punch bag made from strong 100% b Boxing Set nylon material, 30x100 cm, approx. 23 For boxing training and breaking down kg, including hanging chain aggression. Suitable for teens and women. • 1 pair of 10 oz. black boxing gloves, with The set consists of: Velcro fastening, easy to put on and • 1 tear-proof 100% cotton punch bag, remove approx. 30x80 cm, 18 kg, filled. Red, • 1 skipping rope with rotating joint hanging chain included. • 1 storage bag. The skipping rope and • 1 pair of 10 oz. boxing gloves. gloves can be attached to the punch bag Only for private use. after training. Only for private use. 71 150 4415 Set 71 150 4431 Set

Punch Pads

d Sport-Thieme®

“Professional” Boxing Set

This training set for boxing, made from professional materials, is ideally suitable for organisational use. The set consists of: • 1 strong 100x35 cm punch bag (30 kg) with a four point hanging chain • 1 ceiling mount (without fixing material) • 1 pair of 10 oz. gloves with Velcro fastening and fixed thumbs. 71 150 1966 Set

Great Value!

Buy Now!

e Sport-Thieme® Hand Punch

f Sport-Thieme® Makiwara /

Ideal for punching exercises and sparring with a partner. Tear-proof. ø 27cm, filling approx. 6 cm. 71 150 0123 Each

With a high quality PU surface and polyester foam padding. Includes four fixing plates. LxWxH: 60x60x25 cm. 71 150 1751 Each

Pad

Wall Punch Pad

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

g Kick Boxing Arm Makiwara

Combination model, with 4 handles h Sport-Thieme® Punch Pad for vertical or horizontal use and eyelets Punch pad. For partner exercises for wall attachment. LxWxH: 60x35x25 cm, in kicking and punching. Red, LxWxH: 75x35x15 cm. approx. 6 kg. 71 150 1719 Each 71 150 1748 Each

217


Fitness Fitness Exercise Bikes

Home Use

Professional

Great Value!

Buy Now! 4 Suitable for exercise bike classes

Multifunctional handlebars Horizontal and vertical adjustment

Resistance adjustment with emergency switch off

3 mm thick 27.6 kg flywheel Shimano dual function pedals Castors

Height levellers

a Sport-Thieme®

“Professional” Exercise Bike

Indoor bike for professional and commercial use. • Strong oval 3 mm tubing • Flywheel 27.6 kg • High-quality slatted belt drive • Orange powder-coated

b

New!

Schwinn® “A.C. Performance” Exercise Bike

Ideal for group workouts and personal training. Enjoy highly motivating workouts with the Schwinn “A.C. Performance” indoor cycle: thanks to the chain drive and extra large balanced flywheel you will feel • Shimano double function pedals as if on a real race bike. The improved (normal/click) workout functions will let you experience • Handlebars and saddle are horizontally an authentic ride and top performance. and vertically adjustable at any level • Innovative  “Virtual Contact” resistance • 30 mm stainless steel axle technology • 5 year guarantee on the frame • Comfortable and strong “Dual Density” • LxHxW: 130x62x120 cm saddle • Max. user weight: 150 kg 71 206 9148 Each • SPD pedals and toe clips

• Comfortable multi-grip handlebars • Double bottle holder • Transport castors and height levellers • Stretch-Pads on feet • Non-slip, protective film for stretching exercises • Sturdy aluminium frame, rust-proof • Tubing and sliding parts made from strong, stainless steel • Quiet chain drive • Flywheel approx. 16 kg • Magnetic braking system • 51 kg • Maximum user weight: 159 kg • Dimensions (LxWxH): 127x53x130 cm • Pearl white • MPower Console (optional) 71 145 9988 Each

c Sport-Thieme® “Speed” Exercise Bike

An entry level model for indoor cycling with a very stable frame. • Horizontal and vertical saddle adjustment • Multi-grip handlebar • Height levellers • Fly wheel: 13 kg • Assembled dimensions (LxWxH): 137x57x110.5 cm • 38.5 kg • Max. user weight: approx. 120 kg 71 206 9180-WA Each

218

d Schwinn® ''IC Pro'' Exercise Bike

Classic look and classic performance. The next model in the successful IC Elite Series. With a permanently fixed gear. • Flywheel weight: 19.5 kg • Chain drive • Standard silver • Frame: fully galvanised steel • Assembled dimensions, LxWxH: 127x57x99 cm 71 145 9959 Each

e Vision-Fitness® “ES 700” Exercise Bike

• Strong galvanised steel frame • Saddle support and handlebar stem made from non-rusting steel with precision cast metal • Vertical and horizontal adjustment and position display • Maintenance-free  belt drive

• Friction brakes with adjustable controller and “emergency stop” • 21 kg flywheel • With alloy pedals and wire toe clips • Multi-position handlebars • Assembled dimensions (LxWxH): 117x60x130 cm • Max. user weight: 140 kg 71 207 4317 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Exercise Bikes Fitness

Home Use

Do you need

help choosing? Call our personal and competent advisers on:

Display

+49 5357 181-543

a Kettler “Golf M” Exercise Bike

The successful model from Kettler has a modern and easy to use training computer. Very wide and low entry point. 71 225 2126 Each

4 With comfortable, fabric seat cover

Display Display

More information on exercise bikes: sport-thieme.com

b Kettler® “Polo M”

c Kettler® “Golf R”

The low entry point, variably adjustable hand pulse sensors and 7 kg flywheel weight allow for a regular, healthy and targeted endurance workout. 71 145 7373 Each

The new recumbent exercise bike of the Golf series with comfortable seat cover made of fabric. Seat can be adjusted horizontally and at an incline. 71 225 2171 Each

Exercise Bike

Model Manufacturer Timer, training distance, total kilometres, speed, rate, energy consumption Target heart rate Hand pulse/ear clip/chest belt Max. heart rate signal display/sound Pulse recovery rate with fitness level Specification settings Manual load control Programme/heart rate controlled Braking system Flywheel weight Resistance levels Power supply Dimensions (LxWxH) Max. user weight Guarantee Product code

Exercise Bike

c Polo M Kettler •

a Golf M Kettler •

d Golf R Kettler •

• • / o / o • / • • • • –/– magnetic 7 kg 1–10 manual batteries 98x53x130 cm 130 kg 3/–/– 71 145 7373

• • / o / o • / • • • • –/– magnetic 7 kg 1–10 manual batteries 110x53x135 cm 150 kg 3/–/– 71 225 2126

• • / o / o • / • • • • 8/1 magnetic (motor) 10 kg 1–15 motorised 230 V 171x56x123 cm 150 kg 3/–/– 71 225 2171

{

}

{

}

{

• = Included

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

}

{

}

o = Available separately

{

}

{

}

– = Not included

219


Fitness Exercise Bikes

Home Use

Semi-Professional

Professional

Display Display

a New! Kettler® “E3” Exercise Bike

b

New! Kettler® “E 5” Exercise Bike

Display

c

New! Kettler® “Axiom” Exercise Bike

Exercise bike with high standards of workmanship, The new “E 5” model with LCD display, heart rate Entry level model in the Kettler E-Series, with a dynaquality and training comfort. Exceptionally stable thanks mic and sporty design. With 2 programmes including heart warning light, user memory, 2 heart rate controlled proto the double tube frame construction. grammes and 6 user defined resistance levels. rate controlled training. 71 240 2303 Each 71 240 2505 Each 71 240 2606 Each

Display Display

Display

Do you need some

4 In compliance with MPG (Medical Product Law)

help choosing? For personal and competent advice call us:

+49 5357 181-543

New! Kettler® “E 7” Exercise Bike

e Ergo-Fit® ''Cardio Line 407''

f Vision Fitness® “U 70” Exercise Bike

The features of this top model in the Vision Fitness Exercise Bike The new top model of the E-Series. With VGA/LCD The Ergo Fit “Cardio Line 407” exercise bike is super user- series are the training feedback and 12 programme multi-display and user memory for 4 people. Ideal for friendly, e.g. easy to use, low entry point, etc. The “Cardio settings including 4 HRT (heart rate threshold), 5 user programmes and watt control. ambitious recreational sports people. Line 407” meets MPG standards (Medical Product Law). 71 207 4287 Each 71 240 2404 Each 71 146 0953 Each

d

220

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


sport Fitness Team

! r e n n i w l a e r A Adjustable multi-functional handlebar

Heart rate is measured through hand grip

New!

Display

! Great Value

Great Product!

Buy Now!

sive 4 Includes comprehen operating instructions 4 9 programmes

g Sport-Thieme

®

Exercise Bike “ST 300”

ld in the gym. The Train at home just as you wou easy to use. It shows German language display is rmation, such as watt, you the most important info , body fat measuretion ump heart rate, energy cons statistical training se cour Of ment and fitness level. ding distance, time, data is also displayed, inclu plied with comprehenspeed, revolutions/min. Sup in German. sive operating instructions Each 71 240 1401 

h

New!

a

® or New! Sport-Thieme Flo

tion Mat

Protec for noise absorption, For protecting the floor and k. thic mm 6 Each 71 201 9303 160x90 cm Each cm x110 220 6 931 71 201

Model Manufacturer Timer, training distance, total km, speed, RPM, energy consumption Hand pulse/ear clip/chest belt Max. heart rate signal display/sound Recovery heart rate Programmes/heart rate controlled PC interface Brake system Flywheel Resistance levels Adjustable Watt levels Power supply Dimensions (LxWxH) Max. user weight Guarantee Product code

Great Product! g Exercise Bike

Sport-Thieme •

aE3 Kettler •

• / – / o • / • – 9/3 – induction 15 kg 25-400 Watts 5 Watts 230 V 120x60x140 cm 150 kg 3/–/– 71 240 1401

– / • / o • / • • 2/1 USB / front USB induction 8 kg 25-400 Watts 5 Watts 230 V 115x54x125 cm 150 kg 3/–/– 71 240 2606

{

}

{

bE5 Kettler • }

dE7 Kettler •

– / • / o • / • • 8/2/– USB / front USB induction 8 kg 25-400 Watts 5 Watts 230 V 115x54x125 cm 150 kg 3/–/– 71 240 2505 {

}

– / • / o • / • • 48 / 5 / – USB / front USB induction 10 kg 25-400 Watts 5 Watts 230 V 115x54x125 cm 150 kg 3/–/– 71 240 2404 {

• = Included

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

}

c Axiom Kettler –

e Cardio-Line 407 Ergo-Fit •

f U70 Vision Fitness •

– / • / o • / • • 8/2/– USB / front USB induction 10 kg 25-600 Watts 5 Watts 230 V 119x54x120 cm 180 kg 3/2/– 71 240 2303

–/–/o – – 9/6/1 • induction – 15-400 Watts 5 Watts 230 V 120x60x140 cm 180 kg 3/1/1 71 146 0953

– / • / • – – 14 / 4 / 5 – generator – 25-400 Watts 5 Watts self-sufficient 100x54,5x135 cm 190 kg 3/1/1 71 207 4287

{

}

o = Available separately

{

}

– = Not included

221


Fitness Cross Trainers

Display “Unix M”

Display “Unix P”

Display “Unix E”

Home Use

Semi-Professional

Professional

Display

d

Display

e Adjustable incline

abc Space-saving folding design

a Kettler® “Unix M” Cross Trainer

A modern training computer with a particularly easy to use and large LCD display. The successor to “Satura M”. 71 229 1518 Each

b Kettler® “Unix P” Cross Trainer Each model f has its own unique display:

A cross trainer with 8 programmes and electronically adjusted resistance levels in stages from 1-15. Successor to the “Satura P”. 71 229 1534 Each

c

New! Kettle® “Unix E” Cross Trainer

d Kettler® “Unix PX” Cross Trainer

Similar to the “Unix P”, but the “PX” comes with a three colour display and reliable “EXT” technology. This creates longer, more even and therefore more enjoyable movements. The successor to the “Satura P EXT”. 71 229 1547 Each

e Kettler® Cross Trainer “Elyx 7”

Comfortable cross trainer from the Unix series with A front drive cross trainer with ergometer function. induction brake system in a slim and compact design. The Particularly flat, long elliptical design for optimal training. successor to the successful “Satura E” model. Includes folding running rails and TFT display. 71 242 5317 Each 71 108 0722 Each Classic: LED display, 5 programmes

Touch: Elegant: LED colour display, HG touch-screen display, 16 programmes 11 programmes

Display

New!

f

Display

Great Product! 4 No electricity connection required 4 2 year gym guarantee 4 Very stable

New! Vision Fitness® Elliptical Trainer

“X20”, 2012 Model

Simple to use and very sturdy with an ergonomic motion. The “X20” series is available in 3 versions. 71 201 8704 ClassicEach

g U.N.O. Fitness Cross Trainer “XE6000”

h Vision Fitness® “X70” Cross Trainer

The top series from U.N.O. Fitness is noted for its A professional elliptical trainer, designed for comstability and the generator system, which means it does mercial use. The machine has its own generator and there71 201 8717 ElegantEach not need to be connected to a power supply. With a 2-year fore does not require any awkward electricity cable. Very gym guarantee! little distance between pedals for optimal movements. 71 201 8720 TouchEach 71 240 1603 Each 71 207 4290 Each

222

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


sport Fitness Team

A real winner!

! Great Value

Buy Now!

LCD display

ct!

Great Produ

New!

g 4 Personalised trainin y la  colour LCD disp 4 24 12 programmes

me i Sport-Thie ”

®

Cross Trainer

“ST 300 iding the right training A versatile cross trainer, prov er is equipped with a for everybody. The cross train a 2-colour, illuminatraining computer, including ted LCD display. Each 71 240 1414  hieme j New! Sport-T Mat

®

Protection

Floor

i

for noise absorption, For protecting the floor and k. thic 6 mm Each 71 201 9303 160x90 cm Each cm x110 220 6 931 71 201

New!

Great Product!

i ST 300 a Unix M b Unix P c Unix E d Unix PX e Elyx 7 f X20 Classic Model Sport-Thieme Kettler Kettler Kettler Kettler Kettler Vision Fitness Manufacturer • • • • • • • Time, distance, total km, speed, RPM, energy consumption – / • / o • / • / o • / • / o • / • / o • / • / o • / – / • • / – / o Hand pulse/ear clip/chest belt • • • • • • – Upper heart rate signal – • • • • • – Recovery heart rate 12 / 3 / 1 –/–/– 8/1/6 10 / 2 / 6 8/1/6 27 / 2 / 15 6/1/– Programmes/heart rate controlled/users – – – USB / front USB – USB USB PC interface induction magnetic magnetic (motor) induction magnetic (motor) induction magnetic (motor) Brake system 22 kg 18 kg 20 kg 22 kg 20 kg 22 kg 10 kg Flywheel weight in kg 25-400 Watts 8 levels 15 levels 25-400 Watts 15 levels 25-400 Watts 25-400 Watts Resistance levels in Watt 5 Watts – computer controlled 5 Watts computer controlled 5 Watts 5 Watts Adjustable wattage 230 V batteries 230 V 230 V 230 V 230 V 230 V Power supply 158x69x164 cm 144x56x152 cm 144x56x152 cm 144x56x152 cm 144x56x162 cm 201x68x170 cm 189x63x158 cm Dimensions (LxWxH in cm) 150 kg 150 kg 150 kg 150 kg 150 kg 150 kg 135 kg Max. user weight 3/–/– 3/–/– 3/–/– 3/–/– 3/–/– 3/1/– 3/–/– Guarantee 71 240 1414 71 229 1518 71 229 1534 71 242 5317 71 229 1547 71 108 0722 71 201 8704 Product code {

}

{

}

{

}

{

}

{

}

{

• = Included

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

}

f X20 Elegant Vision Fitness •

f X20 Touch Vision Fitness •

g XE6000 U.N.O. •

h X70 Vision Fitness •

• / – / • • / – / • • / – / o • / – / • – – – – – – – – 11 / 3 / – 16 / 2 / 5 4 / 2 / – 21 / 4 / 5 USB USB – – magnetic (motor) magnetic (motor) magnetic (motor) generator 10 kg 10 kg 13.5 kg – 25-400 Watts 25-400 Watts 25-1000 Watts 25-400 Watts 5 Watts 5 Watts – 5 Watts 230 V 230 V generator generator 189x63x158 cm 189x63x158 cm 198x70x170 cm193x76x183 cm 135 kg 135 kg 180 kg 190 kg 3/–/– 3/–/– 3/2/2 3/1/1 71 201 8717 71 201 8720 71 240 1603 71 207 4290

o = Available separately

{

}

– = Not included

223


Fitness Treadmills

Home Use

Semi-Professional

Professional

a Kettler® “Track Motion”

Track Experience

Treadmill

4 Made in Germany 4 3D display 4 Magnetic absorption system

A treadmill equipped with gradient, routes and time programmes, as well as a heart rate controlled programme. You can tailor programmes to suit your needs. Training computer with 3D Matrix display. 71 145 4895 Each

b Kettler® “Track

Performance” Treadmill

71 145 4882 Each Display “Track Motion”

Display “Track Performance”

c Kettler® “Track Experience”

Display “Track Experience”

Display

Treadmill

The successor to the top model Kettler Marathon TX 5. With a 3D black matrix display and the patented magnetic absorption system. 71 240 0509 Each

Display

d

e

3.499,–

d Vision Fitness® “T9800” Treadmill

Fitted with a belt diameter of 7.6 cm, powerful 3 PS output AC motor and a generous 157x56 cm running surface, this treadmill is an excellent choice for your commercial facilities. The drive system, with its 3 PS output AC motor, allows the user to have smooth running and a pleasurable workout as well as providing long-lasting, problemfree use. The considerably larger running

224

surface of 157x56 cm provides the user with a generous running space and comfortable training. The exceptionally strong frame creates a solid and stable platform for walking and running. 71 207 4232 Each

e U.N.O.“LTX 6 Pro” Treadmill

The top model in the LTX series for professional use. Runs on the extremely strong and silent 2.2 kW AC motor (continuously running). Guarantee: 3 years for private use, 2 years in a semi-professional

capacity, 1 year for commercial use. Extended handles are optional. Includes Polar chest strap. 71 206 0327 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


sport Team Fitness

! r e n n i w l a A re

ct! Great Produ e 4 With 25 configurabl programmes 4 Speed adjustment  nning surface folds 4 Ru away 4 Incl. chest belt ur  cludes delivery to yo 4 In door alue!

Display

Great V

Buy Now!

New!

rt-Thieme g New! SpoTre admill

®

“ST300”

hieme f New! Sport-Ttion Mat

®

Floor Protec

for noise For protecting the floor and k. thic mm 6 ion, absorpt Each 71 201 9303 160x90 cm Each cm x110 220 6 71 201 931

Great Model Product! Manufacturer Time, distance, speed, calorie consumption Hand pulse/chest belt Recovery heart rate (fitness level) Programmes/heart rate/users Output (continuous) Speed, min./max. km/h USB connection iPod® docking/MP3 connection Speakers Incline Dimensions of running track (LxW in cm) Dimensions (LxWxH in cm) Dimensions when folded away (LxWxH in cm) Max. user weight Guarantee Product code

rt-thieme.com

on www.spo More fintess products

s recreationEntry level model for ambitiou ble programal runners. With 25 configura tailored to mes that can be individually le incline and your training needs. Adjustab s away. speed. Running surface fold Includes chest belt. Each 71 240 1430 

g ST300 Sport-Thieme •

a Track Motion Kettler •

b Track Performance Kettler •

c Track Experience Kettler •

d T9800 Vision Fitness •

e LTX 6 Pro U.N.O. •

• / • – 25 / – / – 1.84 kW 1 - 18 – – – 0 - 20% 140x50 cm 183x85x130 cm 80x107x158 150 kg 3/–/– 71 240 1430

• / o • 8/2/– 1.3 kW 1 - 16 – – – 0 - 12% 132x48 cm 186x84.5x137 cm 94x84x171 cm 130 kg 3/–/– 71 145 4895

• / o • 16 / 4 / – 1.8 kW 0.8 - 18 • – – 0 - 12% 145-51 cm 202x88x136 cm 106x88x185 cm 140 kg 3/–/– 71 145 4882

• / o • 38 / 8 / 10 2.2 kW 0.8 - 20 • – – 0 - 12% 150x51 cm 207x88x136 cm 106x88x190 cm 150 kg 3/–/– 71 240 0509

• / • – 16 / 4 / 5 2.2 kW 0.8 - 20 – – – 0 - 15% 157x56 cm 213x78x147 cm – 200 kg 3/1/1 71 207 4232

• / • – 6/1/4 2.2 kW (AC) 0.8-25 – – – 0 - 15% 158x55 cm 210x83x146 cm – 200 kg 3/2/1 71 206 0327

{

}

• = Included

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

{

}

o = Available separately

{

}

– = Not included

225


Fitness Rowing Machines a Kettler® “Coach E” Rowing Machine

• Rope-pull rowing ergometer with sliding seat on ball bearings and new linear guidance system • Training computer with easy to read LCD display and load diagrams, 12 programmes including heart rate training and heart rate controlled input for fat burning and fitness zones, PC interface • Polar chest strap monitors heart rate (included) • Displays percentage of the upper heart rate limit, optical and acoustic signal • Induction braking system, speed dependent resistance levels up to 500 W • Castors on the front • Max. user weight: 130 kg • Overall dimensions (LxWxH): 180x55x59 cm • Space saving as it can also be stored vertically 71 146 9367 Each

Display “Coach E”

b Vision Fitness® “AR 700 HR”

Vision Fitness “AR 700 HR” Rowing Machine ®

Rowing Machine

The “AR 700 HR” is designed for professional use and also for high performance use at home. It simulates real conditions with the same seat distance as you would find when rowing. The design of the seat means that it is comfortable to use and meets the challenges that arise from the size of different users. • Programmes: manual, competition, training • Display shows: time, distance, SPM (strokes per minute), current strokes, Watts, heart rate, calories • Heart rate can be monitored with chest strap (included) • Combination of ECB-Plus (motor driven permanent magnet) and air resistance system • Assembled size (LxWxH): 269x51x102 cm • 1 year guarantee for professional use • Max. user weight: 160 kg 71 207 4359 Each

Sitting distance is individually adjustable so real conditions can be simulated.

Display Display

d c

d First Degree “FR-E520s Fluid Rower” Rowing Machine

c Concept 2 “Model E” Rowing Machine with PM4 Monitor

The Concept 2 Model E indoor rowing machine has long been the top professional rowing machine worldwide. The new “E” model will train your whole body safely and effectively. Extremely stable thanks to the new leg style, more comfortable with a higher sitting

226

Professional training for the whole body! The rowing resistance is created with water. Of all resistance types, water is the most natural. During training you will expeposition, integrated digital heart rate moni- rience the feel and the sounds as if you tor, incl. Garmin chest belt and PM4 moni- were really rowing on the water. tor with race function. Computer display of Features: stroke rate, calories and metres rowed. The • Stainless steel paddle pre-programmed and manually set pro• Easy  to use training computer with time, grammes will add to the variety of training. 500 m split times, distance, strokes per Assembled (LxWxH): 240x61x51 cm. minute, calorie use, Watt, interval 71 207 2917 Each training and heart rate

• Includes heart rate monitor • 20 different training styles • Ergonomically shaped seat and comfortable foot straps • Transporting castors • 2 year guarantee, 3 years on the tank, 10 years on the frame • LxWxH: 190x80x91 cm 71 217 3102 not translatedEach

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Fitness ! Great Value Buy Now! ® Sport-Thieme Rowing Machine

mputer  ludes a training co 4 Inc t  kg flywheel weigh 48 sliding  ll-bearing mounted 4 Ba seat

New!

Comfortable seat

LCD display Easy increase of resistance level

Maintenancefree rail

a Sport-Tnehieme

®

Machi

Folds away saving space

b

New!

b

® or New! Sport-Thieme Flo

Protection Mat

for noise For protecting the floor and absorption, 6 mm thick. Each 71 201 9303 160x90 cm Each 71 201 9316 220x110 cm

products on More affordable fitness m 543 · www.sport-thieme.co 7 1815355357 ne: +49+49 PhoPhone: 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

ST 300 Rowing

display supports A training computer with LCD machine. Check ng rowi the on ing train your , strokes/minute and your achievements in time use while you are rgy ene e mat roxi app see your rowing. ations: Rowing machine – specific c braking system • Maintenance-free magneti l • 8 kg flywhee xH): 191x59x50 cm • Overall dimensions (LxW em syst • Floor levelling nt • Castors for ease of moveme • Ball-bearing mounted seat cable-free chest Heart rate measurement via separately). Nonstrap possible (to be ordered offer you great grip. slip treads with foot straps ng machine are Frame and runner of the rowi profile rails. made of robust aluminium Each 71 240 1427 

m

www.sport-thieme.co

227 227


Fitness Pull-Up Bars & Door Bars

10

year

guarantee

b f With shaped handles on the side

d

With safety screws

Great Product! 4 High-quality steel/stainless steel construction 4 Exceptionally sturdy 4 A variety of uses

10

e

Hanging: simple and safe

With additional connecting bar for simple use.

year

guarantee

b Sport-Thieme® Pull-Up Bar

Can be hung at any height on your wall bars. For pullups and stretching exercises. Width: 108 cm, overhang: 65 cm. With additional handlebars on both outer sides Made from high-quality steel/stainless steel consisting of 3 parts. Many different ways to grip for different (approx. 19.5 cm) for even more uses. Strong metal construction with wooden bar and connecting bar incl. safety exercises. LxW: 115x60 cm. Overhang: 37.5 cm. Handlebolts. The pull-up bar folds away for storage, therefore bars on side: approx. 22 cm, handlebars at front: approx. saves space. Will support up to 90 kg. 10 year guarantee! 10 cm. 10 years guarantee! 71 198 3207 Each 71 122 6919-1 Each

10

a Wall-Mounted Pull-Up Bars

Size L

year

guarantee

Set e Sport-Thieme® Wall Bars with PullUp Bars

Size M

c Wall-Mounted Pull-Up Bars

Two piece steel tubing construction for mounting to the wall. Will support up to 120 kg. Various choices of where to hold on, non-slip handlebars. Overhang: 45 cm. Black/chrome. Fixing materials not included. 71 198 3210 Each

d

Hanging Shoes/Gravity Boots

Made from sheet steel with foam padding for hanging from wall bars or pull-up bars. Supports up to a maximum of 100 kg. Size M, ø approx. 87 cm 71 147 1407 Pair

When combined with a pull-up bar, our wall bar unit is the ideal training equipment for pull-ups and stretching exercises. The set consists of: • 1 wall bar unit 210x80 cm, page 264 a • 1 pull-up bar, page 264 c 10 year guarantee! 71 122 7000-2 Each

f Sport-Thieme® Pull-Up Bar

Can be hung at any height on your wall bars. For pullups and stretching exercises. Approx. 69 cm wide, overhang: 65 cm. Strong metal construction with wooden bar. The pull-up bar folds away for storage, therefore saves space. Will support up to 90 kg. 10 year guarantee! 71 122 6906-1 Each

Door Bars

g Horizontal Door Bar

For strengthening arm, abdomen and back muscles. Easily installed and secured using non-slip safety holders inside door frame. It will not slip. Length of bar adjustable (70-100 cm) to fit almost all door widths. Will support up to 100 kg. 5 year guarantee! 71 149 1412 Each

228

h Sport-Thieme® Multi-Functional Door Bar This door bar does not screw-in between the door posts but is clamped on the top frame. After training simply remove it again. The door bar has different gripping positions for pull-ups. But you can also be used for pushups, sit-ups or dips.

• Door bar • Push-up bar • Sit-up bar • Dip training • For  door frames 70-78 cm wide and 11-6 cm deep • Maximum  user weight: 100 kg 71 226 0714 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Abdominal Trainers & Body Trainers Fitness

New!

New!

b Finnlo “Ab Tech ” Abdominal Trainer

a

4 Relaxes the back muscles 4 Relieves the intervertebral discs New! Kettler® “Apollo” Gravitational Trainer

The “Apollo” gravitational trainer relieves the intervertebral discs and relaxes the back muscles with the orthopedically recommended “upside down” position. TÜV/GS approved construction offers safety against unintentional turning.

Specifications: • Assembled size (LxWxH): 150x85x226 cm • Folded (LxWxH): 40x85x200 cm • Max. user weight: 110 kg 71 242 6307 Each

Ultimate efficiency thanks to pre-tensioned muscles. Quality chrome tubing with patented “Power Bullhorns” for extensive and complete abdominal muscle workouts in an exercise sequence based on pre-tensioning the muscles. The patented shape of Ab Tech allows for particularly neck friendly training. Optional additional weights for even more training resistance. 71 149 1353 Each

c 1 Pair of Additional Weights

For “Ab Tech” abdominal trainer (2x 1 kg). 71 149 1366 Pair

d

New! “Power Ab Roller”

Abdominal Trainer

The ideal fitness instrument for young and old. The adjustable neck support ensures the correct training posture and relieves pressure on the spine. The abdominal trainer comes with an extensive workout booklet. Dimensions: approx. 65x73x65 cm. 71 149 1379 Each

Don’t forget to order: Exercise mats, pages 282-285

f Body Solid Dips

and Pull-Up Station

A very stable and robust steel structure with many different uses. The 10 degree angle increases the movement radius.

4 New, improved design

Details: • Push-up bars • Pull-up bar • Dip bars • Dip armrests • Back padding with lumbar support • Simple to get onto thanks to the foot step

g Sport-Thieme®

Mini Stepper with Computer

Exercise machine for cardio fitness with simultaneous Specifications: upward and downward movements. Computer displays • LxWxH: 145x109x208 cm e Sport-Thieme Push-up Handles For versatile training. Made from steel tubing with time, steps and calories used. Maximum user weight: 100 • 52 kg non-slip floor protectors. kg. LxWxH: 50x35x18 cm. • Max. weight: 500 kg 71 147 2804 Pair 71 111 1806 Each 71 147 3357 Each ®

New!

4 3 way use 4 Can rotate

4 With non-slip padding

i Sport-Thieme® Push-Up Ball

The perfect training aid for beginners and advanced. The combination of comfortable grip (ball bearing) and a robust plastic ball creates this strength and coordination exercise aid. The ball can be inflated with more air or deflated to enable you to change the intensity level of the workout. ® • Total width approx. 53 cm h Sport-Thieme Therapy Top With non-slip padding. Easy to stand on and comfor- • Handles approx. 13 cm table. Also suitable as a slide walker. ø 40 cm. With ins• 1.75 kg tructions! • Max. weight capacity: approx. 120 kg 71 127 7731-1 Each 71 103 0828 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

j Sport-Thieme® Push-Up Twister

The ideal portable training device. The Push-Up Twister can be used in 3 ways: • Push-up bars for simple push-ups • Rotating push-up bars for rotary motion push-ups • Turntable for leg and hip muscles Advantages: • Versatile training • High-quality workmanship • Pleasant materials • Resistant up to 120 kg 71 103 0815 Pair

229


Strength Training Chest/Shoulders/Back

Professional

Chest a

b

New! a

New! Sport-Thieme® “JS”

Chest Press Machine

Adjustable seat position and release pedal to easily start and stop the exercises. • Weights: 100 kg • Dimensions (LxWxH): 162x136x182 cm • Total unit weight: 300 kg 5 year guarantee! 71 236 1101 Each

b

c

d

New! Sport-Thieme® “JS”

Butterfly Pec Deck Machine

Adjustable sitting position and release pedal to easily start and stop the exercises. • Weights: 102.5 kg • Dimensions (LxWxH): 146.5x116x197 cm • Total unit weight: 308 kg 5 year guarantee! 71 236 1303 Each

New!

New!

New!

4 Multi-Purpose Machine

c

d

New! Sport-Thieme “JS” ®

Reverse Butterfly Shoulder Machine

Adjustable seat height for the best posture when exercising. • Weights: 102.5 kg • Dimensions  (LxWxH): 118x87x193 cm • Total unit weight: 263 kg 5 year guarantee! 71 236 1404 Each

New! Sport-Thieme® “JS”

Butterfly and Reverse Butterfly Pec / Shoulder Machine

Adjustable seating position and 8 arm starting positions. • Weights: 100 kg • Dimensions (LxWxH): 119x87.5x197.5 cm • Total unit weight: 270 kg 5 year guarantee! 71 236 2902 Each

Shoulders/ Back g

f

e

h

New! New!

New!

5 e

New! Sport-Thieme® “JS”

Rowing Machine

g f

New! Sport-Thieme® “JS”

year guarantee

New! Sport-Thieme® “JS”

Back Strength Machine

h

Fully adjustable foot support and several Shoulder Press adjustable levels of the back roll provide The rotatable handles and adjustable The adjustable seat and the easy access an optimal starting position. seat will provide you with the ideal starprovide a comfortable starting position. • Weights: 102.5 kg ting position. • Weights: 100 kg • Dimensions (LxWxH): • Weights: 100 kg 112.5x118.5x168.5 cm • Dimensions (LxWxH): 114x116.5x168.5 cm • Dimensions (LxWxH): 194x137x188 cm • Total unit weight: 275 kg • Total unit weight: 227 kg • Total unit weight: 258 kg 5 year guarantee! 5 year guarantee! 5 year guarantee! 71 236 0603 Each 71 236 0300 Each 71 236 1505 Each

230

New!

New! Sport-Thieme® “JS”

Abdominal Crunch Machine

Adjustable foot support and adjustable back rolls at different levels for an optimal starting position. • Weights: 102.5 kg • Dimensions (LxWxH): 100x118.5x168.5 cm • Total unit weight: 278 kg 5 year guarantee! 71 236 0704 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Hip and Leg Training Strength Training

Professional Hips and Legs a

5

New! Sport-Thieme® “JS”

Leg Press

This machine can be easily adjusted to your height thanks to its simple adjustment options. • Weights: 222.5 kg • Dimensions (LxWxH): 198x100.5x188 cm • Total unit weight: 475 kg • 5 sitting positions • 3 backrest positions 5 year guarantee! 71 236 1202 Each

year guarantee

Strength Machines from Sport-Thieme®

a

The strength machines from Sport-Thieme have been developed by a team of sports practitioners, researchers, physiotherapists and engineers with the following objectives: • Professional machines • Correct bio mechanics • Maintenance free, high quality • Safety • Quick and easy to use without any previous experience required • An affordable price Coordinating fitness and health sports, this series inspires with its sophisticated technology and quality. The numerous small details give the trainer and user safety and trust in the machines, that have a powdercoated, silver frame finish.

Quiet:

30 mm wide, maintenance free, rubberised steel band

Comfort:

60 mm thick padding with washable imitation leather

New! Usability:

Bio mechanics:

Simple adjustment, in part due to the pneumatic springs

Excellent adjustment e.g. for the best bio-kinetic sitting position

Engineering:

All moving parts are equipped with high-quality industrial parts

Stability:

3 mm thick and powdercoated, quality oval tubing

Do you need

t More information abou s our strength machine op: can be found in our sh sport-thieme.com

help choosing? Call our personal and competent advisers on: +49 5357 181-543

New!

New!

New!

b

New! Sport-Thieme® “JS”

Leg Press Machine

Comprehensive back rest and foot rest adjustment for a perfect sitting position. • Weights: 102.5 kg • Dimensions (LxWxH): 94.5x115.8x168.5 cm • Total unit weight: 275 kg 5 year guarantee! 71 236 0209 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

c

New! Sport-Thieme® “JS”

Leg Extension Machine

Comprehensive back rest and foot rest adjustment for the best sitting position. • Weights: 102.5 kg • Dimensions (LxWxH): 94.5x115.8x168.5 cm • Total unit weight: 295 kg 5 year guarantee! 71 236 0805 Each

d

New! Sport-Thieme® “JS”

Adductor / Abductor Machine

Adjustable back rest and leg starting position. • Weights: 102.5 kg • Dimensions (LxWxH): 141x130x168.5 cm • Total unit weight: 260 kg 5 year guarantee! 71 236 3006 Each

231


Strength Training Sport-Thieme® Strength Machines

5

Professional

a

year guarantee

New! Sport-Thieme “JS” 4

Station Multi Gym

This Multi Gym comprises of 4 stations: • Lat pull-down: 100 kg • Long pull: 100 kg • Triceps station: 52.5 kg • Height-adjustable cable pull: 100 kg • Dimensions (LxWxH): 300x190x240 cm • Total unit weight: 673 kg 5 year guarantee! 71 236 2700 Each

New!

Do you need

help choosing? Call our personal and competent advisers on:

New!

+49 5357 181-543

New!

b

c

New! Sport-Thieme® “JS”

Biceps Machine

New! Sport-Thieme® “JS”

Pull-Up Machine

Thanks to the counter weight pull-up and Seat height adjustment and rotating hand- dip exercises can be supported at all training levels. les provide an excellent sitting position. • Weights: 75 kg • Weights: 53.75 kg • Dimensions  (LxWxH): 108.5x98x168.5 cm • Dimensions (LxWxH): 138x115x220 cm • Total unit weight: 302 kg • Total unit weight: 213 kg 5 year guarantee! 5 year guarantee! 71 236 2003 Each 71 236 0502 Each

t More information abou s ne chi ma our strength op: can be found in our sh sport-thieme.com

New! New!

New!

d

New! Sport-Thieme® “JS”

Cable Crossover

Height adjustable with a cross beam and pull-up handles • Weights: 2x 75 kg • Dimensions (LxWxH): 356.5x86.5x228 cm • Total unit weight: 325 kg 5 year guarantee! 71 236 2306 Each

232

e

New! Sport-Thieme® “JS”

Triceps Machine

Excellent sitting position and foot supports for easy triceps training. • Weights: 100 kg • Dimensions  (LxWxH): 176x131x182 cm • Total unit weight: 280 kg Dumbbell bar and weights not included. 5 year guarantee! 71 236 1707 Each

f

New! Sport-Thieme® “JS”

Leg Press with Dip Bars

Sturdy frame construction and comfortable arm padding allows for excellent training. • Dimensions (LxWxH): 97x76.5x161 cm • Total unit weight: 78 kg 5 year guarantee! 71 236 3208 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


5

Sport-Thieme® Strength Machines Strength Training Professional

year guarantee

New! New!

New!

b New! Sport-Thieme® “JS” Ab Bench

New! Sport-Thieme® “JS”

Multifunctional Bench

The seat has 3 adjustable gradient points, the backrest has 12. Ab Bench with 4 different gradient settings. • Dimensions (LxWxH): 149.5x66.5x141 cm • Dimensions (LxWxH): 157.5x66.5x100 cm • Total unit weight: 54 kg • Total unit weight: 58 kg 5 year guarantee! 5 year guarantee! 71 236 1606 Each 71 236 2609 Each

a

New!

c

New! Sport-Thieme® “JS” Multi Press

With 30 mm and 50 mm bar for weights and 4 storage spaces for discs. • Dimensions (LxWxH): 220x133x211.5 cm • Total unit weight: 300 kg Barbells and weights not included. 5 year guarantee! 71 236 2508 Each

New!

New! d

New! Sport-Thieme® “JS” Weight Bench

Adjustable seat gradient for optimal starting position. With 2 different barbell heights. • Dimensions (LxWxH): 148x123x140 cm • Total unit weight: 86 kg Bar and weights not included. 5 year guarantee! 71 236 2205 Each

e

New! Sport-Thieme® “JS”

Bench Press Bench

Sturdy bench with 3 different height barbell holders. f New! Sport-Thieme® “JS” Flat Bench • Dimensions (LxWxH): 110x68x38.8 cm • Dimensions (LxWxH): 136x123x119 cm • Total unit weight: 35 kg • Total unit weight: 73 kg 5 year guarantee! 5 year guarantee! 71 236 1808 Each 71 236 2104 Each

New!

New!

New!

g

New! Sport-Thieme® “JS”

Decline / Ab Bench

h

New! Sport-Thieme® “JS” Curl Bench

Robust design, adjustable sitting position for optiDecline bench with 3 different barbell levels. mal training angle. • Dimensions (LxWxH): 164x123x119 cm • Dimensions (LxWxH): 111x70x107 cm • Total unit weight: 88 kg • Total unit weight: 30 kg Bars and weights not included. Bar and weights not included. 5 year guarantee! 5 year guarantee! 71 236 3107 Each 71 236 2407 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

i

New! Sport-Thieme® “JS”

Back Extension Bench

Height adjustable, split pelvis padding, comfortable heel/ calf padding. • Dimensions (LxWxH): 131.5X69.5X102.5 cm • Total unit weight: 55 kg 5 year guarantee! 71 236 2801 Each

233


Gymnastics Sport-Thieme® Vaulting Boxes & Accessories e c

6 part

4 part

Real Leather

15

year

guarantee

From sustainable resources

1 part

3 part

a Buy Now!

b Buy Now!

Accessories SPORT-THIEME

4 swivel castors

EXPERTS

Markus Trienen Sports Teacher, Head of State Gymnastics School

Without weight: mobile

With weight: will not move

Slide in operating lever

Registered design. This moving device was developed to provide more safety and protection against incorrect use when transporting vaulting boxes. This transporting device can carry the own weight of the vaulting box making it easy to move the box around. As soon as any weight is added to the vaulting box the device lowers itself down automatically the vaulting box stands now on its feet and is not mobile. Once the weight is removed, the transportation device will rise and the box can be moved again. • Strong metal construction • 4 smoothly running swivel castors • With automatic dropping mechanism • With adjustable springs • Material protection for the boxes • Can be used with all DIN standard boxes • With comprehensive assembly instructions 10 year guarantee! 71 121 7344 Each

234

4 With 4 swivel castors

g Sport-Thieme® Transporting Wheels for Vaulting Box Top Part

h Sport-Thieme® Swivel Castor Feature (Add-On Kit)

No Sport-Thieme vaulting box should be without this useful product. The 4 swivel castors make moving vaulting boxes around the sports hall safe and easy. They can therefore also be moved effortlessly by children. And the best part is: they can easily be fitted to your existing vaulting boxes. Comes with detailed instruction manual. Maximum load 110 kg. 10 year guarantee! 71 121 7302 Each

Patent 102008007533. An ingenious idea providing many new uses for vaulting boxes. Children can move on the top part of the box, sitting, kneeling or lying on it, alone or with others. Can be fitted to all existing vaulting boxes. Once the castors are installed, the upper box can still i Replacement Rubber Padding be placed on to vaulting boxes. Does not for Vaulting Boxes include vaulting box top. 10 year guaø 50 mm, approx. 20 mm high, white. Not rantee! illustrated. 71 121 7328 Set 71 155 8106 Each

As a qualified sports instructor and sports therapist, from my many years of practical work I know that sports equipment is a matter of trust, especially when it comes to gymnastics equipment. A vaulting box has to withstand quite exceptional loads. This is why at the regional gymnastics academy in Melle we use solid-construction vaulting boxes from Sport-Thieme. I find the different sizes of the various parts a particularly valuable feature. This provides us with a large number of possible height settings. „

f Sport-Thieme® Stabiliser

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Our Classic

Turnen

Sport-Thieme® Vaulting Boxes with a real leather cover Best material, top performance quality and TÜV safety approved! Premium leather

Multiplex corner edge joints

4, 5 and 6 part boxes with openings for the Vario system, page 240 

All 4, 5 and 6 part boxes come with space for holding gymnastics benches, making them even more versatile!

Very precise measurements to an accuracy of ± 0.5 mm

Double dovetail corners

Real Leather

15

From sustainable resources

5 part

d Buy Now!

4 Made in our own factory

All parts can be combined in any way

4 Perfect craftsmanship 4 High level of stability Certified Safety from Sport-Thieme

Comprehensive equipment testing on Sport-Thieme vaulting boxes. Your safety is paramount to us, therefore we leave nothing to chance. Each vaulting box is systematically tested with the best technology and highest expertise. Only when all the tests are completed and all safety requirements are met, will the product receive the much sought after „GS“ the German TÜV certification, Your guarantee of certified safety!

Repairs, Maintenance

Sport-Thieme installs, repairs and maintains all types of gymnastics equipment complying with the Quality and Safety Standard RAL GZ 945. We are members of the RAL Quality Association. Request your free quote by calling:

year

guarantee

Sport-Thieme® Vaulting Boxes with real leather covers Opening for swivel castor feature, page 234 h 

The best material, top performance quality and TÜV safety approved - convincing arguments for Sport-Thieme vaulting boxes that are made in our own factory. Solid design, made from the best softwood and high-quality, real leather should be considered when choosing a new vaulting box as well as perfect workmanship and a

high level of measurement accuracy. A cleverly devised system provides stability: All separate parts are, in addition, double screwed together and have multiplex corner edge joints. The sturdy feet on the base have a non-slip, and non-marking rubber padding. To make moving your boxes easier, we recommend fitting castors. The necessary openings are provided as standard in the manufacturing process on all vaulting boxes.

Sport-Thieme® “Original” Vaulting Boxes Design a Single part b 3 part

Dimensions (LxWxH) 70x50x40 cm 70x50x40 cm

c

4 part

150x50x90 cm

d

5 part

150x50x110 cm

e

6 part

150x50x110 cm

+49 5357 181-530

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

Swivel Castor Feature p. 234 h – – – • – • – • – • – • – •

Safety Transport System p. 234 f – – – – • – – – • – – – • –

Equipped with Castors in Top Box p. 234 g – – – – – • – – – • – – – •

Product Code 71 121 4707 71 121 4710 71 121 4505 71 121 4518 71 121 4534 71 121 4521 71 121 4736 71 121 4778 71 122 3040 71 122 3024 71 121 4749 71 121 4765 71 121 3053 71 122 3037

235


Gymnastics Sport-Thieme® Vaulting Boxes and Accessories a

Padded edges

Real Leather

10

year

guarantee

® Sloping a Sport-Thieme® Original b Sport-Thieme Vaulting Boxes Upper Part Sloping Vaulting Box

Facia padding Real Leather

From sustainable resources

Set

GUV Recommendation

The GUV (the Bavarian Community Accident Insurance Association) comments on the Sport-Thieme sloping vaulting box: • Eliminates fear when vaulting the box lengthways • Reduced risk of injury • Extremely versatile educational tool

This practical training aid was designed based on the latest educational findings and offers even more safety when training. The difference: The upper part and the additional removable front board have a soft padding. For jumping and gymnastics exercises without fear. The box has many uses e.g. for squat or straddle vaults, warm ups for the back flip or as a take-off aid (either lengthways or sideways). Can also be combined with existing vaulting boxes. LxWxH: approx. 150x50x105 cm. 10 year guarantee! 71 122 3402 Each

Make the most of the sloping vaulting box with the matching top part. DBGM (registered design). Can be fitted to all existing 4, 5 and 6 part vaulting boxes and even other manufacturers‘ boxes. It‘s possible thanks to a new SportThieme connecting system. LxWxH: approx. 152x50x35.5 cm. 10 year guarantee! 71 122 3431 Each

Also take a look at:

• Sport-Thieme Modular Gymnastics Box Systems, from page 238

c Sport-Thieme® Vaulting Box Set

This sloping vaulting box set from SportThieme is an offer that can‘t be missed. It can also be used as a standard 6 part vaulting box. The set consists of: • 1x 6 part vaulting box with leather cover, page 235 e • 1 sloping upper part b • 1 front board padding, 70x50 cm 10 year guarantee! 71 122 3705 Set

10

year

guarantee

4 Quick and easy to assemble 4 Fits to all makes of vaulting boxes 4 With anti-skid protection

d Sport-Thieme® Gymnastics Box Seesaw Set

This seesaw set allows you to make more use of your vaulting boxes. Children can stand, lie, or sit, on their own or with others and rock side to side. Quick to assemble by simply placing the top part of the vaulting box into the seesaw set. The lower part of the runners is covered with non-marking plastic strips. Suitable for all types of vaulting boxes. Top section of box not included. 10 year guarantee! 71 121 0819 Pair

236

e Transport Trolley for 1 and 3 Part Vaulting Boxes

The ideal trolley for small boxes. The easy and safe way to transport up to 6 small vaulting boxes. It can be stored away in the equipment room without taking up too much space. Vaulting boxes not included. 10 year guarantee! 71 131 1307 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Turnen Sport-Thieme® “Multiplex” Vaulting Box 4-, 5- and 6-part boxes with openings for the Vario system, page 240

c 4-part

All 4, 5 and 6 part boxes come with space for holding gymnastics benches, making them even more versatile!

d 5-part

Choose between: Real Leather and imitation leather

e 6-part

New!

All parts can be combined in any way

Opening for swivel castor feature, page 234 h

a 1-part

Great Value!

b 3-part

Buy Now! 5 year guarantee Very precise measurements to an accuracy of ± 0.5 mm

Great Value!

From sustainable resources

Buy Now! Sport-Thieme® “Multiplex” Vaulting Box

All parts of the box are made of robust laminated birch wood and are joined both with glue and screws to ensure stability and an exact fit. Great advantages: All boxes are covered with highgrade real leather or imitation leather. The rounded edges increase safety and reduce the risk of injury.

Sport-Thieme® “Multiplex” Vaulting Box Description

Size (LxWxH)

a Single part vaulting box70x50x40 cm b 3 part vaulting box

70x50x40 cm

c 4 part vaulting box

150x50x90 cm

d 5 part vaulting box

150x50x110 cm

e 6 part vaulting box

150x50x110 cm

Don’t forget to order:

• Swivel Castor Feature, page 234 • Vaulting Box Stabiliser, page 234

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

Swivel Castors p. 234 ill. 8 – – – – – – • • – – • • – – • •

Cover of Top Section

Colour

Product Code

Synthetic leather Real leather Synthetic leather Real leather Synthetic leather Real leather Synthetic leather Real leather Synthetic leather Real leather Synthetic leather Real leather Synthetic leather Real leather Synthetic leather Real leather

Red Natural Red Natural Red Natural Red Natural Red Natural Red Natural Red Natural Red Natural

71 122 7215 71 122 7202 71 122 7316 71 122 7303 71 121 8608 71 121 5104 71 121 8611 71 121 5117 71 121 8709 71 122 6300 71 121 8712 71 122 6313 71 121 8800 71 122 6401 71 121 8813 71 122 6414

237


Sport-Thieme® Modular Gymnastics Box Systems

Exclusive to Sport-Thieme®

10

The Sport-Thieme® Modular Gymnastics System

4 Can be combined in a variety of ways with standard gymnastics equipment 4 Recommended by the DTB (German Gymnastics Association) 4 Easy to transport 4 Chosen for the German Gymnastics Youth Forum: “Exercise for Children”

year

guarantee

Make simple modifications to the standard equipment you already have and add new parts in order to build a versatile equipment unit! For use with Sport-Thieme vaulting boxes only. Other products have a different connection system.

From a single unit to an equipment set

• Stable and durable • High quality workmanship for long lasting use • Very versatile • Extremely easy to transport • Space-saving and practical Extract from a report of “Förderverein Psychomotorik e.V.” Bonn Germany, Chief Executive Rudolf Lensing Conrady.

d a e g f c Sport-Thieme®

Kombi Horizontal Bar

b

Made from a galvanized steel tube, 119.5 cm long, ø 3.4 cm, with 2 hooks for attaching to Kombi boxes. 10 year guarantee! 71 120 6702 Each

c

d Sport-Thieme® a Sport-Thieme® Kombi Box Top

Made of pine wood. Upper covered with leather, galvanised steel equipment hanging rails on the sides. LxWxH: approx. 150x50x26 cm. Only compatible with original Sport-Thieme vaulting boxes. 10 year guarantee! 71 120 6500 Each

h

i

b Sport-Thieme®

Kombi Box Middle Section

Made of pine wood with galvanized steel equipment hanging bars. LxWxH: 145x44.7x20 cm. Only compatible with original Sport-Thieme vaulting boxes. 10 year guarantee! 71 120 6601 Each

j

k

f Sport-Thieme®

Kombi Wedge Mat

With foam core and non-slip cover made from gymnastics mat material, 100% polyKombi Platform ester. LxWxH: approx. 150x100x25/1 cm. Plywood with needle felt cover. LxWxH: 10 year guarantee! approx.150x50x7 cm. 10 year guarantee! 71 120 6803 Each 71 120 6409 Each ® e Sport-Thieme

® g Sport-Thieme

Made of plywood. Corner connections and bars made of ash, ø 3.5 cm. LxWxH: approx. 50x50x25 cm. 10 year guarantee! 71 120 7008 Each

Made of plywood, with 4 swivel castors. LxWxH: approx. 46x46x10 cm. 10 year guarantee! 71 120 7109 Each

Kombi Gymnastics Stool

l

Kombi Roller Board

m 150 cm

n

8 24

24

cm

m 8c

cm

cm

m 8c

24

248

248

150

Brackets for safe attachment!

10

year

guarantee

10 cm

24 cm

j Sport-Thieme®

24 cm

35 cm

l Sport-Thieme®

Kombi Half-Ladder

cm

40 cm

33 cm cm

100 Made of wood, with approx. 15 cm long Kombi Storming Plank rungs, ø approx. 3.5 cm, distance bet® h Sport-Thieme Made of wood, with integrated rungs, ween rungs approx. 24 cm. With two braKombi Balance Beam hooks for hanging. 10 year guarantee! ckets to hang to other equipment. 10 year n Sport-Thieme® Made of wood, 10x6 cm, with 2 brackets. 71 120 7604 Each guarantee! Kombi Climbing Frame 10 year guarantee! ® 71 120 7301 Each To be attached horizontally or at a slope to 71 120 7200 Each k Sport-Thieme ® Kombi Climbing Ladder Vario and Kombi boxes, Kombi stools, wall m Sport-Thieme Made from high quality wood, rungs Kombi Ladder bars or parallel bars. Sturdy wooden frame i Sport-Thieme® Kombi Climbing Slide approx. ø 3.5 cm. Distance between the Made of wood, with rungs, ø approx. 3.5 with climbing net made from 16 mm thick Made of wood with semi circular edge for rungs approx. 24 cm. With semi-circular cm, distance between rungs approx. 35 Hercules rope. With four hanging hooks. hanging to other equipment. 10 year gua- part at one end for hanging to other equip- cm. With brackets to hang to other equipDistance between hooks approx. 80 or 40 rantee! ment. 10 year guarantee! ment. 10 year guarantee! cm. 10 year guarantee! 71 120 7402 Each 71 120 7705 Each 71 120 7503 Each 71 120 8203 Each

238

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Kinderturnen

Sets

Buy Now! Save money with 10 year guarantee Sport-Thieme® Modular Gymnastics Box Sets

a

Swivel castor feature

Sport-Thieme® Kombi Gymnastics Expansion Set

Set consists of: • 1 Kombi box top part, page 238 a • 1 Kombi box middle part, page 238 b 10 year guarantee! 71 120 7806 Set

Don’t forget to order: For 2 boxes, we recommend the bar on page 238 c

b Sport-Thieme® Kombi Gymnastics Set

This Kombi gymnastics set provides a variety of ways to combine with existing ladders, gymnastics benches, balance beams, etc. Your existing equipment can be used in a wealth of new ways with this box. The set consists of: • 1 Kombi box top part, page 238 a • 1 Kombi box middle part, page 238 b • 2 Solid middle parts (each 10 cm)

• 1 Solid middle part (20 cm) • 1 Solid wooden bottom part (25 cm) Castors for easy transport optional. 10 year guarantee! Without swivel castor feature 71 120 8001 Set With swivel castor feature 71 120 8014 Set

1 Kombi platform 2 Kombi mini mats

c

4 Kombi gymnastics stools

c Sport-Thieme® Kombi

d Sport-Thieme® Kombi

Gymnastics Stool Set I

d

2 Kombi roller boards

Gymnastics Stool Set II

Consisting of: This set replaces your small vaulting boxes • 4 Kombi gymnastics stools, and will provide you with more options. page 238 e Consisting of: • 2 Kombi roller boards, page 238 g • 2 Kombi stools, page 238 e • 1 Kombi platform, page 238 d • 1 Kombi mini mat • 2 Kombi mini mats 10 year guarantee! 10 year guarantee! 71 120 7907 Set 71 122 4216 Set

Practical Examples:

The advantages of the system:

Raised Level Routines Cartwheel Over 2 Balance Beams Backflip Warm-Ups

4 Kombi gymnastics stools, 2 Kombi balance The slope consists of two Kombi ladders beams, 2 Kombi mats, Sport-Thieme and a Sport-Thieme multifunctional mat multifunctional mat (page 276 c) (page 276 c)

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

Kombi box top part, attached Kombi platform and parallel bars

Don’t forget to order:

Hildesheim Roller Ramp, on page 255

• Provides teachers and coaches with more teaching methods and ideas • Increases the opportunities for students to work independently • Can be combined with existing equipment and equipment systems • Easy to transport: With the right roller boards, setting the equipment up is fun. Three Kombi gymnastics stools can easily be stacked on top of each other without becoming unsteady. • Compact size: the mats have also been adapted to fit the new modular size (50x50 cm) and feature - of course - the excellent Reivo quality!

239


Gymnastics “Vario” Vaulting Boxes

Sport-Thieme® Vaulting Box “Vario”

Sets Buy Now!

Real Leather

10 year guarantee

c d

The Original! A universal piece of sports equipment offering a great variety of exercise possibilities. To some extent, it can replace horizontal or parallel bars. It is a very valuable educational tool as the incline of the ladder can be set at different angles. The “Vario” vaulting box set is ideally suited for PE lessons in nurseries and primary schools as well as with people with disabilities. It is a great asset to every school or club thanks to its versatility.

d

Sets

e

a Sport-Thieme® “Vario” Vaulting Box Set

The set consists of: • 2x 5-part vaulting boxes, 150x50x110 cm, optional with swivel castor feature, page 235 d • 4x hanging bars c • 1x ladder 40 cm wide d • 1x ladder 120 cm wide d 10 year guarantee! 71 122 3008 Without castorsSet 71 122 3011 With castorsSet

b Sport-Thieme® “Vario” Mini Box Set

The set consists of: • 2 “Vario” mini boxes, optional with swivel castor feature e • 1 ladder, 40 cm wide d • 2 hanging bars c 10 year guarantee! 71 122 3907 Without castorsSet 71 122 3910 With castorsSet

Set for “Vario” Mini e Sport-Thieme® “Vario” Mini f Castor Boxes Boxes - 3-Part

Vaulting Box Accessories d Sport-Thieme® “Vario” c Sport-Thieme® “Vario”

Climbing Ladder

Side panels made from high quality pine Bars wood, 5 rungs made of ash, ø approx. 4 Made from solid ash, 140 cm long. cm. With brackets to hang to other equipApprox. 3.4x4 cm, with rounded edges. ment. 150 cm long. 10 year guarantee! 10 year guarantee! 71 122 3109 40 cm wideEach 71 122 3301 Each 71 122 3112 120 cm wideEach

With 4 swivel castors for moving the Vario mini boxes safely, conveniently and easily. Can also be added to existing vaulting boxes. Similar to illustration on page 234 h. 10 year guarantee! 71 122 4001 Each

Don’t forget to order: • Lüne-Combinato®, page 257 • Gymnastics Mats, from page 268

Set

h

Mini Multi-Coloured j Blue Bar Buy Now! h “Vario” Made of solid ash, 150 cm long. Oval Vaulting Box, 3-Piece

j

Things are brightening up now!

Our popular, classic sports equipment is now also available in bright colours. All modules are designed to be childfriendly and to meet the needs of children. The individual boxes, benches and add-on units offer you a wide range of opportunities for climbing, balancing and gymnastics exercises. They are literally child‘s play to move, are compact and of course, last but not least, have an attractive colourful design, enhancing any nursery or primary school. Every child will thoroughly enjoy their gymnastics lessons with this new equipment.

shaped approx. 3.4x4 cm. Supports up to Made of high grade laminated wood, approx. 150 kg. 10 year guarantee! top part covered in red synthetic leather. 71 121 9803 Each Extra openings along the sides for a ladder and bar attachments. Ends with openings for attaching benches. (LxWxH): approx. 100x50x70. Green base unit, yellow middle section, red top part. 10 year guarantee! 71 121 9308 Without castorsEach 71 121 9311 With castorsEach

Set

g

240

For our little ones! Same workmanship and materials as their “big brothers”. Additional openings on the long side for a 40 cm wide ladder and for 2 hanging bars. Openings at the ends for attaching gymnastics benches. LxWxH: 100x50x70 cm. 10 year guarantee! 71 122 3806 Without castors Each 71 122 3822 With castors Each

i

k “Vario” Mini

Multi-Coloured Vaulting Box Set

i Gymnastics Bench, g Multi-

Multi-Coloured

Made of solid pine plywood. Feet in laminated wood with 4 non-slip grips for floor Coloured Climbing Ladder protection. All edges on the bench top With brackets for attaching to vaulting rounded for enhanced sporting safety. With boxes. Side bars made of high-grade pine wooden bar for attaching to Vario vaulting wood, painted yellow. 5 ash rungs in red, boxes. LxW: approx. 150x24 cm, approx. ø approx. 4 cm. LxW: approx. 150x43 cm. 30 cm high. Red bench top, yellow feet, Supports up to approx. 150 kg. 10 year green beam. 10 year guarantee! guarantee! 71 121 9601 Each 71 121 9500 Each

The set consists of: • 2 multi-coloured mini vaulting boxes h • 1 multi-coloured ladder g • 2 blue bars j Without castors 71 122 0009 Set With castors 71 122 0012 Set

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Plywood feet guarantee stability!

Sport-Thieme® “Original” Gymnastics Bench 4 Made in our own factory

From sustainable resources

25

year

guarantee

Rounded edges for more safety

Screw-on with cross-threaded bolts and strong brackets

Sturdy centre section for best stability

Holes for attaching transporting castors c

Hanging rail for hanging to wall bars, horizontal bars or vaulting boxes

Bench top and beam made from plywood

Anti-skid protection non-slip and protects the gym floor

a Sport-Thieme® “Original” Gymnastics Bench

Accessories for a

SPORT-THIEME

Without castors 71 121 7908 1.50 mEach 71 121 8406 2 mEach 71 121 8419 3.0 mEach 71 121 8422 3.5 mEach 71 121 8435 4 m, DIN 7909Each 71 121 8448 4.5 mEach

10

Registered design. Made from strong webbing material with Velcro fastening. Suitable for all DIN standard gymnastics benches. Secures the bench when hung on the bars of a set of wall bars. 71 121 8930 Each

TEAM Markus Trienen Sports Teacher, Head of State Gymnastics School

year

With a Velcro safety strap

d Gymnas-

tics Bench Seesaw

This seesaw can be securely fixed between two vaulting boxes using the Vario openings. The gymnastics bench is then attached to the seesaw. Only suitable for gymnastics benches complying with DIN standards with middle support. The seesaw is secured with a strap from below and is then ready to use. Supports up to 150 kg. 10 year guarantee! 71 119 9909 Each

d

e

e Seesaw Block for c Transporting Castors for

EXPERT

guarantee

Exclusive to Sport-Thieme®

4 Provides additional security for mounting b Gymnastics Bench Holder

With castors 71 121 7911 1.50 mEach 71 121 8464 2 mEach 71 121 8477 3.0 mEach 71 121 8480 3.5 mEach 71 121 8493 4.0 mEach 71 121 8927 4.5 mEach

Gymnastics Benches

Wedge the block in place under the bench Gymnastics Benches and children can use it as a seesaw. Made Makes moving gymnastics benches child‘s from laminated wood, with non-slip ribplay. Easily fitted even to existing gymnas- bed-rubber inlay. Can be used in combinatics benches. Includes assembly instion with all DIN gymnastics benches up to tructions. max. 3 m length. Bench not included. 71 121 8914 Pair 71 121 8943 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

e

“ As you would expect, gymnastics benches are part of the basic equipment for a sports academy such as ours here in Melle. As a sporting centre for people of all ages and weight categories, our sports benches are therefore subjected to a variety of demands. This is why for many years now we have been relying on gymnastics benches from Sport-Thieme. Their solid construction ensures the benches are especially sturdy, so that even the oldest benches show very little sign of wear and tear. „

The original design gymnastics bench - a real classic in all sports halls! Made of solid plywood. A top quality product! With a sturdy centre section, feet made from solid plywood with non-slip protection which also protects the gym hall floor. The beam has rounded edges - providing more safety in sports. With a hanging rail for attaching to horizontal bars or vaulting boxes. All gymnastics benches 3 m or more in length can also be hung by the hanging rail to wall bars. 25 year guarantee!

241


Gymnastics Springboards

4 Fibreglass-coated jumping surface 4 High level of spring

a

c

New! b

d

Also take a look at: Vaulting Bucks, page 245

4 5 springs for a soft setting

4 Upholstered with golden-yellow felt

d Spieth® “Ergotop 5” Springboard

Original Reuther high-performance springc board with 5 lacquered steel springs for ® ® Spieth “Standard” a a soft range setting of the new FIG 2004 b Spieth “Standard” Original Reuther springboard with 4 interSpringboard Padded Springboard equipment standards. Upper side has carchangeable metal springs. The springboard bon fibre hybrid sandwich construction. Original Reuther springboard in stanOriginal Reuther springboard in standard for the most challenging demands. High dard design, springy plywood construcdesign, padded with composite foam and Even distribution of load over the whole level of spring thanks to the fibreglasstion, complies with DIN 7915. Not padded. covered with durable, golden-yellow felt. spring board with very high spring effect. 120x60 cm. Flexible plywood construction. 120x60 cm. covered jumping surface. 120x60 cm. 120x60 cm. 71 122 2005 Each 71 122 2106 Each 71 120 9727 Each 71 120 2508 Each

Spieth® “Ergotop 4” Springboard

4 8 springs for a hard spring setting 4 High  spring effect

4 5 extra long metal springs 4 Very high spring effect

g

e

New!

f

h

4 6 interchangeable springs 4 Spring position, board height and preload can all be individually adjusted e Spieth® “Ergotop 8” Springboard f Bänfer® “Wiemers Vario” Original Reuther high-performance springSpringboard board with 8 lacquered steel springs for a hard setting in accordance with the new FIG equipment standards of 2004. The upper section is a “sandwich” construction of carbon fibre hybrid which ensures an even distribution of load across the whole board with very high spring effect. 120x60 cm. 71 120 9743 Each Model Certification Spring type Design to FIG standards Spring level 1-6* Uses** Suitable for Recommended bodyweight Product code

242

4 Flat access point 4 With a trampoline spring bed 4 Height adjustable

h

High-performance springboard with 6 slide-in steel springs. The spring position, board height and preload can all be adjusted to meet the performance and weight class of each athlete. Therefore the board is suitable for beginners, advanced and top-ranking athletes. 120x60 cm. 71 121 7807 Each

New! Spieth® “Ergotramp”

Springboard

Innovative “Ergotramp” springboard with a trampoline bed and full frame padding. g A combination of a classic springboard The springboard with 5 extra long and a trampoline. Adjustable steel frame, springs. This hugely increases the spring 135x100 cm, with a trampoline style bed effect. The ideal board for training and 93x57 cm, frame padding and castors. practising. LxWxH: 120x60x35 cm. Adjustable height from 26.5 to 32 cm. 71 122 2311 Each 71 121 6501 Each

Spieth® “Skippy” Springboard

a “Standard” Springboard

b “Standard” Padded Springboard

k “Strassburg” Springboard

j “Junior” Springboard

Wood

Wood

Wood

Wood

1 School/clubs

2 School/clubs

3 School/clubs

4 School/clubs

Beginners

Beginners

Beginners/practiced

up to 50 kg 71 122 2005

up to 50 kg 71 122 2106

up to 50 kg 71 122 2106

i “Budapest” Springboard

g “Skippy” Springboard

l “Ergotop 2” Springboard GS mark

f “Wiemers Vario” Springboard

soft 5 Club/competition

Interchangeable metal springs

Wood/metal springs replaceable

Interchangeable metal springs

5 Club/competition

5 Club/competition

variable Club/training

Children

Advanced

Children

Advanced

up to 40 kg 71 122 2409/2412

up to 70 kg 71 122 2308

up to 45 kg 71 122 2311

up to 60 kg 71 120 9701

Beginners/ experienced up to 80 kg 71 121 7807

Great Product!

Wood

* = 1 = low, 6 = very high ** = Body weight and performance level of the user must also be taken into consideration.

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Great Product!

Springboards Gymnastics

i Spieth® “Budapest” Springboard

i

Original Reuther double-spring competition springboard with the highest drive thanks to its specially coordinated spring features. With upholstered red jumping surface. Very high level of spring. 120x60 cm. 71 122 2308 Each

j Speith® “Junior” Springboard

Original Reuther springboard for children and teens. Same construction as the “Budapest” springboard i, however specially made for body weights up to a max. of 40 kg. World champion springboard 120x60 cm 71 122 2409 Each Mini springboard 100x55 cm 71 122 2412 Each

j 4 For  children and teens up to 40 kg

k Spieth® “Strassburg” Springboard

Original Reuther high-performance springboard with improved spring level compared to standard versions. As an introduction to the World Championship springboard. Special foam underlay. Jumping area is upholstered with a red carpet. 120x60 cm. 71 122 2207 Each

l Spieth® “Ergotop 2”

k 4 Increased spring force 4 For  schools and clubs

Springboard

The Original Reuther World Championship springboard with 2 interchangeable springs. The board combines quick reactions of the metal springs with the absorption of the “Budapest” springboard. The springboard responds to the smallest amount of load and thanks to its progressive curved shape has an extremely active spring effect. 120x60 cm. 71 120 9701 Each

l 4 With 2 interchangeable metal springs 4 High  level of spring

New!

m Eurotramp® “Advanced” Booster Board

The Booster Board combines the functionality of a conventional springboard with the drive, lightness and jumping fun of a trampoline. It has been specially developed for learning jumping exercises whilst being low impact and is suitable for jumpers of all ages and levels. With a flat, non restrictive entry point (open-end design). The unique Eurotramp spring cover safety system provides a high level of safety. Really easy to move around thanks to the integrated castors. With a 93x57 cm spring bed. Height adjustable from 26.5 to 32 cm. 135x100 cm. 71 122 5105 Each Model Certification Spring type Design to FIG standards Spring level 1-6* Uses** Suitable for Recommended bodyweight Product code

Accessories

m

m

4 Height adjustable 4 Flat, easy access entry point 4 Excellent drive when taking off

d “Ergotop 5” Springboard FIG certified

h “Ergotramp” Springboard

e “Ergotop 8” Springboard FIG certified

c “Ergotop 4” Springboard GS mark

m “Advanced” Booster Board

Metal springs interchangeable soft 6 Clubs/competitions

Trampoline bed

Interchangeable metal springs hard 6 Club/competition

Interchangeable wooden/ metal springs soft 6 Clubs/competitions

Trampoline bed

Competition level athletes

Beginners/ experienced up to 90 kg 71 122 5105

Competition level gymnasts 40-70 kg 71 120 2508

5 Schools/clubs

Children/beginners Competition level athletes up to 45 kg 71 121 6501

70-90 kg 71 120 9743

40-70 kg 71 120 9727

* = 1 = low, 6 = very high ** = Body weight and performance level of the user must also be taken into consideration.

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

5 Schools/clubs

n o n Springboard Padding

For existing springboards. 71 122 2500 Each

o

New! Sport-Thieme®

Springboard Stand

Metal stand with castors. For storing up to 4 springboards, either upright or on their side. A useful investment for more organisation and space in equipment rooms. Springboards not included. LxWxH: 113x58x59 cm. 71 119 7307 Each

243


Gymnastics Vaulting Tables Integrated metal spring allows for higher and longer vaults

a

Built-in shock absorption

c

b Cover for a

d

Easy height adjustment to any level

4 Height adjustable in 5 cm increments 4 Can be rolled for easy transport

a Spieth® “Ergojet” Vaulting Table

The FIG-certified competition vaulting table with integrated metal springs is the ideal vaulting table for higher and longer jumps. It is ideally suited for men and women. Dimensions (LxW): approx. 114x94 cm, approx. 160 kg. Support area: • 2-piece fibreglass saddle, (LxW): approx. 120x95 cm • Safe, tapered impact protection • Upper material: hygroscopic imitation leather Height adjustment: • With a crank, to any height from 110 - 140 cm Advantages: • Arch-shaped, on a slight incline making it easier to mount and preventing user from slipping off • High absorbency - gentle on the joints and shoulder area • 2-piece protective padding for additional safety Without transporting mechanism 71 121 0705 Each

4 Height adjustable 90 - 135 cm 4 With integrated castors 4 For  use in youth sports

d Spieth® “Ergojet Junior” Vaulting Table

The Ergojet “Junior” is an alternative to the vaulting buck. Thanks to its large surface area, it is an ideal vaulting table for children and youth sports. Dimensions (LxW): approx. 85x68 cm, approx. 50 kg. c Spieth® “Ergojet Club” Vaulting Table Supporting surface: The new “Club” vaulting table with its large surface • LxW:  approx. 72x67 cm is an ideal piece of training equipment for vaulting exer• With integrated spring system cises in schools, clubs and for youth sports. • Patented  metal springs for additional spring level Dimensions (LxW): approx. 114x94 cm, approx. 160 kg. • Upper  material: hygroscopic imitation leather Supporting surface: • 2-part  protective padding for additional safety • 2-piece fibreglass saddle, (LxW) approx 120x95 cm Height adjustable: • Upper material: hygroscopic artificial leather • From  85-125 cm, in 5 cm increments • Easily removable cover with fleece Velcro fastening With transporting mechanism • Height  adjustable feet, similar to vaulting buck feet Height adjustable: 71 121 0604 Each • Height adjustable, in 5 cm increments from 90-135 cm Advantages: • Larger  surface area in comparison to conventional vaulwith a crank ting bucks b Woven Material Top Cover for “Ergojet” Advantages: Vaulting Table • Safe impact protection thanks to angled surface • Larger surface than the “Junior” model Original fleece cover to protect the top of the vaulting • Newly developed front shape • Ideal training aid also for younger gymnasts table. Sewn edges, with integrated tightening system. • High  absorbency - gentle on joints and shoulder area • Double column system with padded cover Vaulting table not included. • Integrated,  non-marking castors • With integrated, non-marking transport castors 71 121 1809 Each 71 121 0721 Each 71 121 0734 Each

e Spieth® “Original Reuther“ Pommel Horse

The FIG-certified pommel horse has been tried and tested at many national and international competitions. This is the number 1 choice for top performance sports as well as in clubs and schools. • Dimensions (LxW): approx. 160x110 cm Height adjustable • 2-leg frame from 110-150 cm • Tensioning chain with turnbuckle for anchoring • Height adjustable from 110-150 cm • Body (LxWxH):160x35x28 cm • Professionally padded with a leather cover • Two hygroscopic aluminium pommels • 4 retractable castors 71 116 3722 Each

244

f Spieth® Gymnastics Mushroom 4 retractable castors

Approx. ø 60 cm, height approx. 48 cm. Strong plywood base with ø 60 cm. Gymnastics mushroom body made from seam-free shaped polyurethane foam. 71 121 0750 Without pommelEach 71 120 5709 With pommelEach

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


sport TeamTurnen

! r e n n i w l a e r A 10

Real Leather

year

guarantee

a

legs Vaulting buck with metal

® Sport-Thieme Vaulting Bucks k for school

The classic vaulting buc DIN EN 12196. and club sports as per den leg conwoo or l stee lar Sturdy tubu g rubber feet struction, with non-markin of the legs. and with castors on two increments. 1 Height adjustable in 5 cm for fine tuning. leg with clamping device ding, approx. 55 Body with special pad cover. 10 year cm long, with real leather guarantee!

b

legs Vaulting buck with wooden

Vaulting

me a Sport-Thie h Metal Legs ®

Buck wit

cm Height adjustment: 90-130 Each 71 121 8507  cm Height adjustment: 100-150 Each 71 121 8510  cm Height adjustment: 110-170 Each 71 121 8523 

Vaulting

me b Sport-Thie h Wooden Legs ®

Buck wit

cm Height adjustment: 90-130 Each 71 122 2920  cm Height adjustment: 100-150 Each 71 122 2917  cm Height adjustment: 110-170 Each 71 122 2904 

10

year

guarantee

Real Leather

c Vaulting horse

with wooden legs

c Sport-Thieme® Gymnastics Horse

Complies with DIN EN 12196. The 160 cm body has special padding and a real leather cover. Height adjustable from 110-170 cm, in 5 cm increments. 1 of the feet can be adjusted to any height to enable levelling on uneven ground. The rubber feet do not mark the floor and work in combination with the tensioning chain to provide a sturdy stand. The 2 castors enable the vaulting horse to be moved around easily. 10 year guarantee! Vaulting horse with metal legs 71 121 3515 Each Vaulting horse with wooden legs 71 121 3502 Each

d

Sport-Thieme® Pommel Horse

d Pommel horse

with metal legs

Same as vaulting horse c, but with plastic pommels. Height adjustable from 95-150 cm 10 year guarantee! 71 116 3706 With metal legsEach 71 121 3603 With wooden legsEach

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

245


Competition Parallel Bars “Original Reuther” Turnen 4M  en's competition bars with fibreglass-reinforced bars 4“  Original Reuther” – pre-tensioned construction design to support movement and reduce stress on the gymnast's body

a Spieth® “Champion

Stuttgart” Competition Parallel Bars

High quality, Original Reuther competition bars, FIG-certified. Sturdy frame made from thick-walled steel tubing. Triple safety clamp. The horizontal bars are also additionally secured to the frame. Plywood bars with 3 fibreglass inserts to increase flexibility and provide protection against breakage, approx. 350 cm long. Height is adjustable in 5 cm increments, from 160210 cm. Width adjustment from 40-61 cm. Without transporting mechanism 71 120 8900 Each

a

With transporting mechanism 71 120 8913 Each

b Spieth® Fitted Mat

For Spieth “Champion Stuttgart” men‘s parallel bars. With needle felt surface, with cover on the cross beams. LxWxH: approx. 300x70x20 cm. Not illustrated. 71 120 9310 Each

c Spieth® Wooden Bar with Fibreglass Inserts

c

For men‘s bars. With 3 fibreglass inserts and special tensioning for increased elasticity providing optimal swinging support, approx. 350 cm long. 71 120 9206 Each

Asymmetric Bars h

4 Available  in 3 designs

New! de e Spieth® Asymmetric Bars “L”

d Spieth® “Dortmund” Asymmetric Bars

Original Reuther asymmetrical bars - the bars specifically for schools and clubs. These bars have the same basic function as the “Dortmund” model, however the height is adjustable from 210-250 cm and the width of the bars can be adjusted from 75-115 cm. 71 120 8607 Each

FIG-certified competition asymmetric bars, Original Reuther. Sturdy steel tube frame, approx. 252x120 cm, base bars approx. 15 cm wide, with castors and floor protectors. Width between the bars can be adjusted up to a max. of 180 cm. Height adjustment of the lower bar ranges from 140-180 cm, the upper bar can be adjusted from 220-270 cm. “Carbo-flex” wood-covered fibreglass bar, ø approx. 40 mm. With patented double tensioning system and markings for essential tension settings. Optional with 2 large tensioners to reduce peak loads f Spieth® Conversion Kit for (TÜV/GS approved). Asymmetric Bars Without a load-reducing tensioner This conversion kit contains all 71 120 9408 Each necessary parts for converting the width distance of “L” bars up to 180 cm. With a load-reducing tensioner 71 120 9411 Each 71 120 9509 Each

246

4 Simple spring support height adjusment 4 Includes inlay mat for covering the base bars 4 Free-standing

h

New! Spieth® “Club”

Free-Standing Asymmetrical Bars

These new free-standing asymmetrical bars have been developed for halls that don‘t have the option of fixed tensioning. On these pages you will find a selecSuitable for children and youths. Sturdy tion of products from the Spieth range steel tube frame (WxD) approx. 253x150 – Sport-Thieme can supply you with all cm, base bars approx. 15 cm wide, with Spieth “Original Reuther” gymnastics castors and floor protectors. Diagonal equipment. Give us a call: width between the bars is adjustable at tel. +49 5357 181-543 any distance between 130-205 cm. Height adjustment of the lower bar ranges from 143-193 cm, upper bar from 218-266 cm. Wood-coated fibreglass “Carbo-flex” bar, ø approx. 40 mm. For experienced gymnasts ® we recommend tensioning the asymmetrig Spieth Asymmetric cal bars. The tensioning consists of 2 ropes Bar Rail of each length, 3 m, 2 m and 1.2 m, chains Shatter-proof, “Carbo flex” wood-covered fibreglass bar, ø 40 mm. Can also be used and quick release. Includes an inlay mat for covering the feet between the bars. as a horizontal bar on a Spieth “Original 71 121 6309 Free-standingEach Reuther” product. 71 120 8708 Each 71 121 6312 With tensioningEach

Spieth® Gymnastics Equipment

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Parallel Bars, Chalk and Accessories Gymnastics a Sport-Thieme® “Schulsport” School Parallel Bars

Made to DIN EN 914. Sturdy steel tube frame 250x124 cm (LxW), with integrated castors. Upright tubes made from steel, with double secured clamping mechanism. Height adjustable from 110-160 cm. Distance between the bars can be adjusted from 34-50 cm. Bars made from special plywood, 350 cm long. Without inlay mat. 10 year guarantee! 71 120 8421 Each

ab 4 With smoothly running castors 4 Sturdy base frame

10

b Sport-Thieme® “Männer” Men's Parallel Bars

Parallel bars comply with DIN EN 914. Sturdy steel tube base frame 250x149 cm (LxW), with integrated castors. Steel upright frame bars with double-secured clamp. Height adjustable from 120-180 cm in 5 cm increments, Distance between bars is adjustable from 40-56 cm. Bars made from special plywood, 350 cm long. Inlay mat not included. 10 year guarantee! 71 120 8418 Each

year

guarantee

d

c Sport-Thieme®

Multi-Purpose Parallel Bars

c

10

d Sport-Thieme® 3-Piece Bar

Mat Set with Beam Padding

year

guarantee

d Cross section of bar

50 mm

3-piece mat set that fits perfectly over the frame. With foam filling and non-slip PVC gymnastics mat cover. The mat set provides padding for the whole lower frame including the long bars. Fits school gymnastics bars a, men‘s bars b and multipurpose bars c. For other bar models, please request the mat dimension sheet before ordering. For safe gymnastics, we recommend ordering the mats at the same time as the bars. For school parallel bars 71 120 6047 Set

120–180 cm

4 Wide base frame for a secure stand 4 Telescopic height adjustment 4 2-in-1 height adjustment: asymmetric bars and parallel bars

120–230 cm

Complies with DIN EN 914. An excellent multi-purpose unit for men‘s gymnastics and asymmetric bar gymnastics up to an intermediate level. Dimensions and features correspond with the “men‘s” bars. Height adjustable from 120-180 cm, in 5 cm increments, two of the posts can also be made longer up to 230 cm. The distance between the bars can be adjusted from 40-56 cm. With integrated castors. Bars made from special laminated wood with steel inlay, 350 cm long. Without inlay mat. 10 year guarantee! 71 120 8405 Each

f Sport-Thieme® Handstand Training Bars

40 mm

With their adjustable width, these handParallel Bar stand bars offer excellent conditions for For men’s bars and multi-purpose parallel e Made of special laminated wood with children and youth training. The width can bars rounded ends, approx. 50x40 mm, 3.5 m be adjusted to any distance from 30-60 71 120 6050 Set long. Without steel inlay. For school, youth cm. Bars are 70 cm long, 5x4 cm, approx. For other parallel bar models and competition bars. 10 year guarantee! 35 cm high. 71 120 6063 Set 71 120 8304 Each 71 121 3430 Each

4 Width is f individually adjustable

Accessories g Gloves for Horizontal and Parallel Bars

Made from high-quality leather, 3 holes with a roll and Velcro fastening. 71 120 9802 Size 1, largePair 71 120 9815 Size 2, mediumPair 71 120 9828 Size 3, smallPair

h

Universal Hand Protector

i

For horizontal bars, parallel bars and rings. Made of strong leather with buckle i Chalk Powder strap, size 2 (medium). In a plastic bag, 2.5 kg. 71 120 9860 Pair 71 119 1400 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

j

h

g

j Sport-Thieme® Chalk Block

1 pack contains 8 bricks (55 g each). Per box approx. 440 g. 71 119 0609 Each

k Sport-Thieme® Chalk Stand

Sturdy metal construction, approx. 81 cm high. With ø 34 cm stainless steel bowl, 10 cm high, holds approx. 4.5 litres. With castors. 71 119 1006 Each

k

247


Turnen a New! Sport-Thieme

Great Value! ®

Balance Beam

Balance beam for training use in schools and clubs. The Sport-Thieme beam meets the highest demands in terms of stability and functionality. Double leg steel base and caps on the feet to prevent floor marking. The height can easily be adjusted in 5 cm increments from 70-120 cm. Aluminium beam with 3 mm thick fleece cover, 500x10x16 cm (LxWxH). With flexible, padded balancing surface, approx. 5 mm thick. Footprint (LxW): 504x117 cm, approx. 65 kg. 71 120 1808 Each

Buy Now!

Balance Beams

a

New!

b Spieth® Vario “Club Soft” Beam

New, specially padded balance beam with “Servolift” height adjustment. Ideal for use in schools and clubs. The beam is the same as the “Barcelona” but with an addition of a softer surface. The height can be adjusted in 10 cm increments from 50-90 cm and in 5 cm increments from 90-130 cm. The feet will remain in the same position regardless of the height. Adjustment up to 130 cm allows the beam to be used with additional soft landing mats during training.

b d Height adjustable from 70-125 cm

Height adjustable from 50-130 cm

Advantages: • Perfect balance between soft surface and essential stability • Reduces stress on joints • Minimises risk of injury • Suitable for regular use Footprint (LxW): 504x117 cm, approx. 86 kg. 71 120 8825 Each

d Spieth® “Barcelona” Balance Beam

Original Reuther, FIG-certified competition balance beam. 2 leg steel frame, feet have caps that do not mark the floor. Height can be adjusted and clicked into place from 75-125 cm, beam is made from non warping special light metal. It has a flexible, hygroscopic synthetic leather Height adjustable cover with padding, 500x10x16 cm (LxWxH). Beam ends from 50-130 cm made from PUR foam which reduces the risk of injuries when dismounting. Advantages: • Very sturdy • Base  with integrated absorption sections - improved peak load absorption Standard width 10 cm c Width 20 cm • Shock absorbing elements allow difficult manoeuvres to be performed with low impact • Special foot construction allows height adjustment witAdvantages: c Spieth® Vario “Maxi” Balance Beam The training balance beam with extra wide 20 cm hout moving the mat • Extra wide surface of 20 cm surface - ideal for training in schools and clubs and for • Includes  safety padding around the beam feet in line • For learning difficult routines learning new routines. Height adjustment is identical to with FIG regulations • Suitable for frequent use the “Club Soft” model. Beam is the same as “Club Soft” Footprint (LxW): 504x117 cm, approx. 67 kg. Footprint (LxW): 504x120 cm, approx. 116 kg. however has the dimensions of (LxWxH): 500x20x18 cm. 71 120 8838 Each 71 120 8812 Each

Accessories

e Spieth® Beam Widening Cover

This cover increases the beam h Sport-Thieme Training Balance Beam Wooden, with glued-on, non-slip felt cover. With 2 width and is indispensable for traiwooden feet. LxWxH: approx. 300x10x18 cm. 10 year guaning and learning new routines. Velcro bands hug all shapes and contours, ensuring that this cover can be used rantee! 71 122 4607 Each with any balance beam. The cover provides a 20 cm wide surface, with a red central marking line. Can also be used on the floor as a practise beam. Available in lengths of 200 and 300 cm. 71 122 4838 200 cmEach 71 122 4841 300 cmEach

10

®

year

guarantee

j Sport-Thieme®

Foam Training Beam

For training purposes - simply use the Velcro straps to attach it to a gymnastics bench. Made from foam, with non-slip canvas cover, 100% polyester. LxWxH: approx. 350x30/10x20 cm. 10 year guarantee! 71 122 4854 Each

f Transport Trolley

For all balance beams with T-shape feet. With 4 swivel castors. 71 122 4812 Pair

Balance Beam Cover

i Spieth® Safety Mat for Balance Beams

This mat is perfect for learning new and difficult routines. Made from synthetic leather with a fleece cover on the upper surface. The whole mat is padded with special foam. High level of shock absorption providing low impact on joints and reducing the risk of injury. The Velcro strap fixing ensures that it can be attached to almost all balance beams. Available in lengths of 100 and 200 cm. 71 122 4870 100 cmEach 71 122 4825 Each 71 122 4883 200 cmEach

g

Plain, non-padded beams can be covered to competition regulation standard with this cover kit. Velcro fastening make it easy to fit. With a non-slip surface. Suitable for 5 m long balance beams without end caps.

248

Practice Foam Balance Beam k Spieth Made from special hard foam, with a central white ®

line marking. Beam surface width 15 cm. The bottom of the beam has Velcro band strips for attaching to landing mats. With Velcro at the ends to enable extending the length. LxWxH: 300x25x8 cm. 71 121 2004 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Minitramps Gymnastics Minitramp

The Sport-Thieme® Minitramp is an angled take-off trampoline that can also be adjusted to a horizontal position for stationary jumps. The feet can be adjusted both in height and angle and have non-slip rubber caps and 2 castors. Frame and feet are made from galvanised special spring steel. The trampoline bed is made from robust nylon bands. It comes with frame padding made from a shock absorbing material and a PVC cover.

d

a Sport-Thieme® Minitramp with Integrated Cover

The 112 and 125 Minitramps are angled take-off trampolines. They have a wide variety of uses in schools, therapy and general sports. Galvanised steel tube frame and a nylon trampoline bed. The height and angle of the feet can quickly and easily be adjusted from 34.6-40.7 cm at the front and 40.7-53.2 cm at the rear. All-round frame padding. Minitramp 112: frame size 112x112 cm, Trampoline bed 60x60 cm Minitramp 125: frame size 125x125 cm Trampoline bed 70x70 cm 71 122 8104 Minitramp 112Each 71 122 8205 Minitramp 125Each

Accessories

Castors

4 With integrated cover 4 Trampoline bed and cover are tightly sewn together 4 Horizontal setting for stationary jumps

Tip

Your safety is important to us. Therefore all trampolines have been safety tested.

d Trampoline Bed for Minitramps

Made entirely of perlon with integrated cover, comes with mounting rings. Options: f Elastic Cord Retainers for Minitramps End fixing retainers for attachment of elastic cord. 1 set is sufficient for a 112x112 cm or 125x125 cm • 60x60 cm - for 112x112 cm Minitramp For a 112x112 or 125x125 cm Minitramp, 10 retainers are Minitramp. For repairs, order 10 elastic cord retainers f • 70x70 cm - for 125x125 cm Minitramp and 32 hooks c at the same time. 71 122 7808 For 112x112 cm MinitrampEach needed. Pack of 10 71 122 7909 Each 71 122 7811 For 125x125 cm MinitrampEach 71 122 5772 

b Elastic Cord for Minitramps

g Corner Cord for Minitramps

c Replacement Hooks for Minitramps

For attaching the elastic cord. For a 112x112 cm or e Minitramp Floor Protector 125x125 cm Minitramp you will need 32 hooks. Made of rubber, includes screws. For one Minitramp 71 122 5600 Pack of 8 Set 4 floor protectors are required. 71 122 5613 Pack of 32Set 71 122 8306 Each

For securing the frame padding cover to the frame, approx. 21 cm long. For one 112x112 cm or 125x125 cm Minitramp, 4 corner cords will be required. 71 122 6720 Set of 2Set 71 122 6717 Set of 4Set

4 Trampoline bed with integrated frame padding

h

Minitramp “Super”

With integrated frame padding so that every jump goes smoothly. Spring bed and frame padding are integrated together as one section, therefore preventing the cover from moving away and the feet between the spring bed and cover from sliding out. With the patented brackets, the angle and height can quickly and easily be adjusted. Height and angle of the feet can be adjusted between 30-40 cm at the front and 43-55 cm at the rear. 71 123 0404 Each

4 For difficult moves

k Eurotramp® Open-Ended Minitramp “Standard”

4 Very stable mini trampoline with high rebound

This open-ended Minitramp is an adapted version of the tried and tested Minitramp. The front and back are free ® m Eurotramp Minitramp from any frame or barrier offering improved safety and “Teamgym Premium” making this trampoline great for difficult jumps. The galvanised steel tube frame is adjustable from 35.5-37.5 cm. The take-off trampoline for high-performance sports and acrobatics as well as show groups. The Teamgym MiniIncludes side frame padding. i Elastic Cord 71 123 0808 Each tramp is ideal for gymnasts looking for exceptional stabiFor tensioning Minitramp bed, approx. 2.5 m long lity and an exceptionally high level of rebound. With its with hooks on both sides. Four cables are required per special frame construction, this is the take-off trampoline l Eurotramp® Open-Ended Minitramp trampoline. for anyone who has reached the limit of their performance “School” 71 305 3108 Each on other mini trampolines. With frame padding. 36 steel The alternative model with simplified frame leg springs, 185 mm long, ø 32 mm. Height adjustable from j Trampoline Bed for Minitramp ''Super'' construction and a bed of 13 mm wide nylon 60x60 cm with integrated frame padding, includes 4 bands. The low-cost model for school sports and 23.7-28.5 cm. Legs with movable, large area base plates. attachment cables for the padding. Not illustrated. This model comes with detachable castors as standard. hobby use. Incl. complete frame padding. 71 122 5769 Each 71 119 3800 Each 71 119 3608 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

249


Turnen

Eurotramp® Service Bag

Eurotramp® Full-Size Trampolines

Every Eurotramp full-size trampoline on this page is supplied with a service bag. The bag contains certificates, instructions for assembly and maintenance and - depending on the type of equipment - a variety of spares such as springs, securing straps and floor protectors. The bag also includes a service passport in which important details such as serial number and maintenance intervals can be recorded.

Eurotramp full-size trampolines are the trampoline equipment of preference for many athletes and coaches. For decades, these competition trampolines have provided sterling service at Olympic Games, World and European Championships, World Cups, major international events and national championships. The processing of high-grade materials, optimum balance between performance and athlete control and outstanding rebound and standing properties mean that these trampolines are excellent equipment for high-performance sports and schools and clubs alike!

Transporting Equipment

All full-size Eurotramp trampolines come with the option of a rolling stand, a telescopic rolling stand or the new “Safe & Comfort” telescopic rolling stand. For safety reasons, we recommend the “Safe & Comfort” telescopic rolling stand.

a

Premium 4x4

4 One of the highest-performing competition trampolines in the world 4 Very well-balanced rebound properties 4 Maximum spring performance

Also available open-ended

Details Overview Description Premium 4x4 Grand Master Exclusive Premium 6x4 Grand Master Exclusive 6x4

yes yes yes

Grand Master Exclusive 6x6

yes

Grand Master Super Special

no

Grand Master School

no

Master Super Special 13 mm

no

Master School Grand Master Exclusive Open End 6x4 Grand Master Exclusive Open End 6x6

250

FIG Target Group Certified

no no no

PerforMax. Required Frame Trampoline mance Required Depth = Ceiling Dimensions Bed Category Equipment Height Height (LxB) high-perforvery 426x213 cm mance sports high 1.15 m min. 7 m 5.20x nylon bands 3.05 m 4x4 mm high-perfor426x213 cm mance sports high 1.15 m min. 7 m 5.20x nylon bands 3.05 m 6x4 mm high-perfor426x213 cm mance sports high 1.15 m min. 7 m 5.20x nylon bands 3.05 m 6x4 mm advanced 426x213 cm users high 1.15 m min. 6 m 5.20x nylon bands 3.05 m 6x6 mm general sports, 426x213 cm therapy, medium 1.08 m 6m 5.20x nylon bands schools 3.05 m 13 mm general sports, 426x213 cm medium 1.08 m 5.20x therapy, 6m synthetic schools 3.05 m material general sports, 366x183 cm therapy, medium 0.99 m 6m 4.64x nylon bands schools 2.81 m 13 mm general sports, 366x183 cm therapy, medium 0.99 m 6m 4.64x synthetic schools 2.81 m material 426x213 cm training high 1.15 m 5.5 m 5.20x nylon bands 3.05 m 6x4 mm 426x213 cm training high 1.15 m 5.5 m 5.20x nylon bands 3.05 m 6x6 mm

Springs

Stands

110 steel springs 258 mm ø 29 mm 8 corner springs 258 mm ø 39 mm

rolling stand telescopic rolling stand S+C telescopic rolling stand rolling stand telescopic rolling stand S+C telescopic rolling stand rolling stand telescopic rolling stand S+C telescopic rolling stand rolling stand telescopic rolling stand S+C telescopic rolling stand rolling stand telescopic rolling stand S+C telescopic rolling stand rolling stand telescopic rolling stand S+C telescopic rolling stand rolling stand telescopic rolling stand S+C telescopic rolling stand rolling stand telescopic rolling stand S+C telescopic rolling stand rolling stand telescopic rolling stand S+C telescopic rolling stand rolling stand telescopic rolling stand S+C telescopic rolling stand

110 steel springs 258 mm ø 29 mm 8 corner springs 258 mm ø 39 mm 110 steel springs 258 mm ø 29 mm 8 corner springs 258 mm ø 39 mm 110 steel springs 258 mm ø 29 mm 8 corner springs 258 mm ø 39 mm 118 steel springs 235 mm ø 30 mm 118 steel springs 235 mm ø 30 mm 100 steel springs 235 mm ø 30 mm 100 steel springs 235 mm ø 30 mm 90 steel springs 258 mm ø 29 mm 8 corner springs 258 mm ø 39 mm 90 steel springs 258 mm ø 29 mm 8 corner springs 258 mm ø 39 mm

Weight Product Code in kg 265 265 250 250 220 220 190 190 235 235

71 123 5601 71 123 5614 71 123 5627 71 123 5702 71 123 5715 71 123 5728 71 123 5803 71 123 5816 71 123 5829 71 123 5904 71 123 5917 71 123 5920 71 119 3103 71 119 3116 71 119 3129 71 123 6008 71 123 6011 71 123 6024 71 119 3204 71 119 3217 71 119 3220 71 119 3305 71 119 3318 71 119 3321 71 119 3406 71 119 3419 71 119 3422 71 119 3507 71 119 3510 71 119 3523

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Wall Bars Gymnastics 200 cm

100 cm

The first and third bars are offset

10 cm

The first and third bars are offset

40 cm

The first bar is offset

40 cm

25.2 cm

3.5 cm

Great Value!

Buy Now!

4 Includes all fixings for safe and secure fitting

guarantee

210/230 cm

25

year

14 cm

80 cm

Single Wall Bars

Double Wall Bars

a Sport-Thieme Wall Bars

b Sport-Thieme® Single Wall

®

Sport-Thieme wall bars are a versatile sporting equipment for a wide range of gymnastics exercises and are the ideal training equipment for enhancing fitness and condition. Made of the best materials, top-class workmanship and TÜV-tested safety – convincing arguments for Sport-Thieme wall bars! When a new set of wall bars is built we use solid pine sidebars and rungs made of strong,

oval-shaped ash. For increased stability all rungs are screwed into the side bar at a number of points. Our wall bars are ideal for use in sports halls, studios or at home. The 1st and 3rd rungs from the top are offset, making them ideal for taking the strain off the spine and for exercises involving bearing one‘s own weight. All wall bars are supplied complete with all fitting materials (brackets, dowels and screws).

Pull-Up Bars

Sport-Thieme® Wall Bars, comply with DIN EN 1234

25 year guarantee. 71 122 6599 HxW: 260x200 cmEach 71 122 6586 HxW: 280x200 cmEach

Bars

Ideal for nurseries, primary schools or home use. With side bars made from strong pine. With round ash rungs ø 35 mm. Easy to install. Can withstand up to 100 kg. Comes with all fixings (brackets, screws and dowels). 25 year guarantee! 71 122 6560 HxW: 210x80 cm, 8 rungs Each 71 122 6557 HxW: 230x80 cm, 9 rungs Each

year

guarantee

e

Exclusive to Sport-Thieme®

Simple and safe mounting

With curved side handles and with a soft grip cover

With additional connecting bars for ease of use

With safety screws

Can be hung at any desired height on wall bars. For pull-ups and stretching exercises. Width 108 cm. Overhang: 65 cm. With additional holding sections on both sides (approx. 19.5 cm) for even more uses. Sturdy metal construction with wooden bar, with connection bar and safety screws. The pull-up bar is collapsible thus saves space. Can withstand up to 90 kg. 10 year guarantee! 71 122 6919 Each

HxW: 260x100 cm. 25 year guarantee! 71 122 6573 Each

10

c

c Sport-Thieme® Pull-Up Bar

Sport-Thieme® Single Wall Bars, comply with EN 12346

Sets Sets

Buy Now!

d Sport-Thieme® Wall Bars

e Sport-Thieme® Pull-Up Bar

with Pull-Up Bar

In combination with a pull-up bar, our wall bars create the ideal training product for pull-ups and stretching exercises. The set consists of: • 1 wall bar unit 210x80 cm or 230x80 cm • 1 pull-up bar 10 year guarantee!

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

Wall bars 210x80 cm 71 122 7000 Set Wall bars 230x80 cm 71 122 7013 Set

Can be hung at any height on your wall bars. For pull ups and stretching exercises. Approx. 69 cm wide. Overhang: 65 cm. Sturdy metal construction with wooden bar. The pull-up bar folds down thus saving space. Can withstand up to 90 kg. 10 year guarantee! 71 122 6906 Each

251


Children’s Gymnastics Gymnastics Walls

230 cm

a

Now Even Better

322 cm

a

Wall distance when folded out:

b

4 Middle part can be pulled out at an angle

New! Sport-Thieme®

Gymnastics Wall

10

year

K F

d

New! Sport-Thieme®

3-piece climbing and gymnastics wall set made from high-quality beech wood. Folds back against the wall therefore saving space. Consists of: horizontal bar with turning roll, wall bars, climbing net. Preassembled. WxD: 122X123 cm. Folded to the wall: 210x24 cm. 10 year guarantee! 71 197 3932 Folds back to the rightEach 71 197 3945 Folds back to the leftEach

K F

guarantee

Tilting Gymnastics Wall

A three-part climbing wall made from highquality beech wood. The removable net can also be laid on a gymnastics box or bench. This increases the variety of climbing and fun uses. The frame sits 40 cm away from the wall, therefore can be accessed from both sides by children. This is a real hit for children‘s gymnastics and P.E. lessons. Consists of: climbing pole with ladder, climbing net, wall bars. WxH: 300x230 cm. 10 year guarantee! 71 197 3714 Each

KF

KF

KF

K F

New! Sport-Thieme®

Fall Protection Mat Inlays

For gymnastics wall a. Set of 8 mats with fleece (F) and Velcro bands (K) on the sides. Core made from RG 80 foam. Cover made from blue, Polygrip gymnastics mat material, 100% polyester, with grain embossing. The set consists of: • 4 mats, 100x100x6 cm • 4 mats, 150x100x6 cm 71 232 3246 Each

4 Rotating wall bars

F K K F

e

Fall Protection Mat Inlays

New! Sport-Thieme®

Fall Protection Mat Inlays

For tilting gymnastics wall c. Set of 6 mats with fleece (F) and Velcro bands (K) on the sides. Core made from RG 80 foam. Cover made of blue Polygrip 100% polyester with grain embossing. The set consists of: • 4 mats, 150x100x6 cm • 2 mats, 150x39x6 cm 71 232 3233 Each

4 With feet 4 Can be set upright, at an angle or horizontally

h Sport-Thieme®

Tilting Wall Bars

g Sport-Thieme®

Rotating Wall Bars

Swivel them around into the room and these high-quality beech wall bars will open up a wealth of new opportunities. Can be climbed on from either side. When included in an obstacle course they can be climbed over and climbed through. HxW: 230x100 cm. 10 year guarantee! 71 216 2300 Right wall beamEach 71 216 2313 Left wall beamEach

f

For gymnastics wall b. Set of 4 mats with fleece (F) and Velcro bands (K) on the sides. Core made from RG 80 foam. Cover made from blue Polygrip 100% polyester with grain embossing. Set consists of: • 2 mats, 200x100x6 cm • 1 mat, 120x100x6 cm • 1 mat, 100x100x6 cm 71 232 3220 Each

4 Can be tilted 4 Wall bars or climbing net

K F

K = Velcro edging F = Fleece edging

F K

New! Sport-Thieme®

4 All climbing walls are made from high-quality beech wood

252

year

c Sport-Thieme®

Suitable Mat Sets

guarantee

Gymnastics Wall

year

guarantee

A 5-piece climbing and gymnastics wall made from high-quality beech wood. Folds flat against the wall therefore saving space. Consists of: high bar with rotating roll, climbing pole with ladder, wall bars, climbing net, wide wall bars. Pre-assembled. WxH: 322x123 cm. Folded against the wall: 410x24 cm. 10 year guarantee! 71 195 0700 Folds back to the rightEach 71 195 0713 Folds back to the leftEach

b

10

10

4 Can also be mounted on floors with underfloor heating

10

year

guarantee

Climbing These tilting wall bars made from high net quality beech will open up new dimensions in children’s gymnastics. In just a few steps you will have changed the wall bars from vertical to horizontal position and locked them in place. When in a horizontal position, the feet fold out. When used Wall bars with a mat, you are provided with a range of new opportunities for exercising. Can be used in combination with ladders and boards from the Varianta system. HxW: 235x110 cm. Can withstand up to 120 kg bodyweight. 10 year guarantee! 71 216 2209 Wall barsEach 71 216 2212 Climbing netEach

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Gymnastics Walls and Accessories Children’s Gymnastics Sport-Thieme® Gymnastics Wall Combinations

a Sport-Thieme®

4 Made from high-quality beech wood 4 Pre-assembled Now Even Better 4 Multiple uses 4 Can also be

Kombi Tilting Gymnastics Wall

Strong, high-quality construction. Made from selected beech wood, meticulous finish, clear varnish. Distance to wall approx. 40 cm with hot-dip galvanised wall brackets. The sections of these gymnastics walls can be purchased and set up individually or as a complete set. The individual sections are 230 cm high and 100 cm wide. All corners and edges have been rounded. The climbing net and the wall bars can be folded down and outwards and can be set at three different slope levels or fully horizontal e.g. on a vaulting box or supporting stand. With 40 cm distance from the wall, it can be accessed by the children from either side. Consisting of: half ladder section, climbing net, wall bars, climbing pole with ladder, high bar with roller (can be folded out into the room). Mats not included. 10 year guarantee! 71 197 3701 Each

10

a

year

guarantee

mounted on floors with underfloor heating

Climbing Net

Wall Bars

Half Ladder

Distance from wall

c Gymnastics Roll

Climbing Pole with Ladder

Accessoires

New! b

Set of Mats

c Sport-Thieme® Gymnastics Roller

Ideal complement to the horizontal bar unit. The foam roller with its comfortable, hard-wearing cover (73% polychloride, 27% polyester) is simply pushed over the horizontal bar. ø 30 cm. 71 129 9306 Each

Matching Set of Mats b Fall Protection Mat For Kombi Folding Gymnastics Wall a. Set of 5 mats with fleece and Velcro bands on the sides. The set consists of: • 2 mats, 200x100x6 cm • 1 mat, 150x100x6 cm

This will enable you to swivel a gymnastics wall element by 90 degrees from the wall into the room, if there is a fixed element permanently attached to the wall in the immediate vicinity. With telescopic bar, bracket, securing bar and stopper. 71 197 6830 Each

K = Velcro edging F = Fleece edging

• 2 mats, 205x39x6 cm 71 232 3217 Each

Individual Sections for Wall Mounting

Assembly Set, Long

New: Can be used on underfloor heated surfaces! For attaching 1-2 gymnastics wall sections with a 40 cm distance from the wall - therefore allowing the climbing wall to be used from either side. Contains 4 wall spacers, screws and dowels which you can also be used for anchoring to the wall. 71 185 4422 Set

K F

i h

l

j k

230 cm

e

K F K F

Set 1

d Pivoting Mechanism

a

f Assembly Set, Short

For fixing a gymnastics wall with short distance to the wall (6-8 cm). Contains 4 short wall spacers, dowels and screws. Product does not need to be fixed to the floor. 71 185 4406 Set 100cm

g

New! Sport-Thieme

Gymnastics Mat as Fall Protection

®

200x100x6 cm, RG 80 foam, blue, textured, Polygrip gymnastics mat, 100% polyester. Suitable for all gymnastics wall bars products for individual combinations. 71 119 2461-1 Each

10

k Climbing Pole with Ladder

year

guarantee

i Climbing Net

Registered design. Distance between rungs: 27 cm, length of rungs: 33 cm. 10 year guarantee! 71 186 6605 Each

Net made of 16 mm propylene material, round plastic knot covers, mesh width l Wall Bars 24 cm. 10 year guarantee! Ideal in children‘s gymnastics and h Climbing Wall 71 127 2404 Each Consists of: therapy. Suitable for children over 3 years • 1 beech climbing wall of age, complies with EN 1176. Distance j Large Span Wall Bars • 16 different climbing holds Distance between rungs: approx. 30 between rungs 10.5 cm. 14 round rungs, ø 10 year guarantee! cm. Rungs ø 35 mm. 10 year guarantee! 35 mm. 10 year guarantee! 71 186 7103 Each 71 127 3609 Each 71 127 2202 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

253


Gymnastics Accessories for Wall Bars Don’t forget to order:

• Gymnastics Benches, page 241 • Vaulting Boxes, from page 234

10

year

guarantee

200 cm

4 Easy to assemble: Velcro straps are wrapped around the rungs

a Sport-Thieme® Impact Protection For Wall Bars

For adding to existing wall bars. For protection against unsupervised climbing. Core is made from Neopolen foam. Cover made from polygrip gymnastics mat material. 100% polyester. Easy to attach with Velcro straps that are sewn tightly to the cover and placed around the bars. HxWxD: 200x100x6 cm, 7 kg. 71 208 9746 Each 100 cm

b Sport-Thieme® Rolling Bar Slide

Simply hang onto wall bars that have a large distance between rungs - and you are ready to go! Rolling in all positions is fun: on your stomach, back, sitting upright, on knees, forwards, backwards. You can also climb it, with or without a rope, and carry balls, parts of mats etc. up there. Rolling things over it playfully trains attention and responsiveness. A real versatile product for children‘s gymnastics. 71 200 5818-1 250x60 cmEach 71 200 5821-1 300x60 cmEach

c Climbing Wall for Hanging to Wall Bars

With this climbing wall children are offered the chance to make the most of exercises and their energy. 10 different climbing holds allow them to find a new way to climb the wall and come back down safely. On the reverse of the climbing wall there are brackets for hanging it to standard wall bars. Wall bars and landing

10

mat not included. (WxH) 61x200 cm. Can withstand up to 120 kg. 10 year guarantee! 71 119 0407-1 Each

Also take a look at: Mats, from page 268

year

guarantee

Tip

Only hang these attachments on a slope of up to approx. 45°.

i Sport-Thieme®

Kombi Storming Plank

Made from wood with integrated rungs and hanging brackets. LxW: 248x24 cm. 10 year guarantee! 71 120 7604-1 Each

g

f e d

35 cm

10 cm

24 cm

Balance Beam

Wood, 10x6 cm, with 2 brackets. LxW: 248x10 cm. 10 year guarantee! 71 120 7200-1 Each

d Sport-Thieme® Sloping

e Sport-Thieme® Kombi

f Sport-Thieme® Kombi

Athlete model, for hanging onto wall bars. Wooden frame construction with synthetic leather cover, padded with rubber foam, suitable for many exercises. LxW: 200x50 cm. 10 year guarantee! 71 122 6805 Each

Wooden, with rungs approx. 15 cm long, ø approx. 3.5 cm, distance between rungs approx. 24 cm. With 2 hanging brackets. LxW: 248x33 cm. 10 year guarantee! 71 120 7301-1 Each

Made from high-quality wood, rungs approx. ø 3.5 cm, distance between rungs approx. 24 cm. With semi-circular hanging bracket. LxW: 248x24 cm 10 year guarantee! 71 120 7705-1 Each

Board

Half Ladder

24 cm

g Sport-Thieme® Kombi

33 cm

50 cm

254

i

h

Climbing Ladder

h Sport-Thieme® Kombi Climbing Slide

Made of wood with semi-circular hanging bracket edge. LxW: 248x24 cm 10 year guarantee! 71 120 7402-1 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Ramps Children’s Gymnastics Hildesheim Roller Slide / Ramp

Now we are bringing some “oompf” to the sports hall! You can transform your vaulting boxes or wall bars into a slide in no time! Fun can be had by young and old when sliding sitting down, lying or even on your knees. • Made from durable plywood and almost indestructible • Can easily be mounted on existing boxes or wall bars •  The starting plateau will fit on every DIN vaulting box and slides can be attached on both sides •  The platform can also be hung from wall bars • The track width can be changed without any great effort from 60 to 120 cm • The slide panels can be joined together without the use of tools thanks to the couplings. Adjustable trestles offer support at different heights. • Suitable for almost every type of roller board •  With extensive assembly instructions and ideas for use

Ramps on Vaulting Boxes

4 Simple and safe lock

• Can be connected to a vaulting box with the starting plateau b • Compatible  with all top parts of DIN vaulting boxes • Can be combined with the gymnastics box systems on page 238

60 cm

a

Sets Buy Now!

e

d

a Ramp

As a slide

Exclusive to ® Sport-Thieme

Ramps on Wall Bars

Examples of Use Stable wooden structure for hanging to wall bars or platform. Can also be used as a slide. With side bars. Size 208x63 cm. 10 year guarantee! 71 128 5648 Each

b

Courageous jumps

c

• The platform c can be combined with wall bars • The hanging hooks f can also be combined with wall bars

b Starting Platform

Made from plywood with safety rails to put onto the top of vaulting boxes, with practical clamping fasteners and couplings for attaching ramps on both sides. Size 120x50 cm. 10 year guarantee! 71 128 3802 Each

Use of roller boards

Sets

c Platform

The platform is designed to hang the ramp to existing wall bars. Sturdy plywood material 20 mm, with bracket for hanging. 76x60 cm. 10 year guarantee! 71 128 5622 Each

a

d Support Trestle

d

e

For lengthening the slide. Height adjustable, stable steel tubing construction, 65x50 cm with stoppers to protect the floor. 10 year guarantee! 71 128 5651 Pair

Buy Now! Don’t forget to order:

• Roller boards, page 257 • Vaulting boxes, from page 234 • Wall Bars, page 251

e Metal End Ramp

Clamp attachment (see illustration above)

The starting plateau b can be used on both sides

Offers a smooth landing on the floor. One end ramp is all that is necessary for a complete slide. 10 year guarantee! 71 128 5677 Each

f Hanging Hooks

These are necessary if the ramp is hung directly on the wall bars or ladder wall without any platform. Not illustrated. 71 128 5664 Pair

Ramps: Vaulting Box Sets

g Vaulting Box Set with Ramp I

The set consists of: • 1 starting platform b • 2 ramps a • 2 end ramps e • 1 pair of support trestles d 10 year guarantee! 71 128 3815 Set

Ramps: Wall Bars Sets

h Vaulting Box Set with Ramp II

The set to lengthen the track consisting of: • 1 ramp a • 1 pair of support trestles d 10 year guarantee! 71 128 3828 Set

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

i Wall Bars Ramp Set I

The set consists of: • 1 platform c • 2 ramps a • 1 pair of support trestles d • 1 end ramp e 10 year guarantee! 71 128 5619 Set

j Wall Bars Ramp Set II

Consisting of: • 1 platform c • 1 ramp a • 1 end ramp e 10 year guarantee! 71 128 5606 Set

255


Children’s Gymnastics Varianta System, Lüneburger Stegel The Varianta System

The Varianta System

Versatile and variable thanks to many great extension parts!

b

a

c

d

The ideal modular system for jumping, climbing and balancing exercises in nurseries and schools. Thanks to the open design of the vaulting box, equipment can be attached from all sides providing a wide variety of possible combinations. The practical quick attach connections ensure that the combined unit of vaulting box and beam is held firmly together. You can set up our Varianta system for use as an obstacle course, off-floor or balancing equipment, or as a climbing frame with a ladder and chute. Even children will have no problem putting the system together. All modules can be safely attached to wall bar rungs.

f

e

a Varianta Vaulting Box

Consists of 4 plywood boxes, with round rungs made from ash on the sides. The box upper has a synthetic leather cover. On the ends there are open sections for hanging Varianta equipment. Base feet have a ribbed rubber tread. LxWxH: 130x47x88 cm. 10 year guarantee! 71 129 7906 Each

e Varianta Ladder

Made from high-quality wood, rungs approx. ø 3.5 cm, distance between rungs approx. 24 cm. With semi-circular hanging bracket. LxW: 248x35 cm. 10 year guarantee! 71 129 8101 Each

f Varianta Half Ladder

Made from wood, with rungs approx. 15 cm long, ø approx. 3.5 cm, distance between rungs approx. 24 cm. With 2 hanging h Trapeze Stand brackets. LxW: 248x15 cm For use with Varianta equipment or 10 year guarantee! balance boards. WxDxH: 84x70x57 cm. 71 129 8303 Each 71 216 8917-1 Each

b Varianta Balance Beam

Made from wood, 10x6 cm, with 2 brackets. LxW: 248x10 cm. 10 year guarantee! 71 129 8000 Each

c

g Sport-Thieme®

Rolling Bar Slide

Simply hang the slide onto a Varianta vaulting box and off you go. Rolling down is fun in every position: on your stomach or back, sitting, kneeling, forwards or backwards. You can also climb up either with or without a rope. This method can be used to transport balls, mats, etc. If objects are rolled down this slide, attentiveness and responsiveness are developed in a fun way. A very versatile item for children‘s P.E. lessons. 250x60 cm. 71 200 5818-2 Each

Varianta Chicken Ladder

Made from wood, with integrated rungs and clamping lock for hanging. LxW: 248x24 cm. 10 year guarantee! 71 129 8404 Each

d Varianta Climbing Slide

g

Made from wood, with semi-circular hanging bracket. LxW: 248x31 cm, inner approx. 24 cm. 10 year guarantee! 71 129 8202 Each

“Lüneburger Stegel” the variable modular system

For halls and school playgrounds. Very reliable product, suitable for all exercises!

Set

k j

Buy Now!

l j

Wooden Support Stands

Well designed, approx. 110 cm high. Can be used for all other equipment. 71 122 0171 Pair

m Gliding Board

Made from wood, approx. 175 cm k Made from wood, approx. 82x82 mm, long, with 2 hanging brackets. 71 122 0142 Each approx. 400 cm long. 71 122 0113  Set of 3 n Net Posts With height measurement (can also l Ladder be used as high jump stands), with screw Made from wood, approx 4.10 m sliders and a high jump rope. long, with 2 hanging brackets. 71 122 0126 Each 71 122 0139 Pair

Balance Beams

256

n

Practise Set i Varianta The set consists of:

• 1 Varianta vaulting box a • 1 Varianta ladder e • 1 Varianta slide d 10 year guarantee! 71 129 8606 Set

Lüneburger Stegel

With our “Lüneburger Stegel” modular system children have a wide variety of opportunities for exercising and play. The extremely robust units of the multipurpose gymnastics equipment are ideal for use in either the sports hall or in the school playground. Whether the activity is jumping or climbing over, crawling through, balancing or swinging, the modular system encourages children to a wide range of exercises. By trying out and practising new things, children are constantly setting themselves new targets, training skills, improving safety and mobility and strengthening muscles and tendons. The “Lüneburger Stegel” modular system provides ideal conditions for further equipment-based gymnastics.

Set

m j

Set

2 net posts with screw slider and high jump rope = high jump stands

o “Lüneburger Stegel” Set

The set consists of: • 1 pair of wooden stands j • 1 set of 3 balance beams k • 1 ladder l • 1 gliding board m • 1 pair of net posts n with screw sliders and high jump rope 71 122 0168 Set

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


10

Lüne-Combinato®

With Lüne-Combinato children create their own games, exercise and obstacle courses.

Kinderturnen

year

guarantee

Exclusive to Sport-Thieme®

The elements are very convenient and can be combined, without being permanently attached, in many different combinations. Examples: Bridges, catwalks, bouncing bridges, slides, steep slopes, seesaws, carousels, or for role-play, creating vehicles, seats and huts

® Lüne Combinato The Modular Lüneburger Exercise Set

Educational value: • Children play and move without fixed structures • They gain a wide range of exercise experiences • They can experiment and design creatively • Material and spatial awareness, selfawareness and perception of others, development of cooperative behaviour

Sport-Thieme sponsors the University of Lüneburg for developing educational exercise products and games. Many years of research and insights gained from the Braunschweig project “modular exercise set” went into the development of the Lüne Combinato.

Sets Buy Now!

Just a few combination examples:

Material: Varnished spruce wood covered with fluted rubber, which has a non-slip surface. Cubes, boards and rolls have a glued-on soft felt coating (70% polyester, 30% polypropylene).

Don’t forget to order: Combines well with the Kombi gymnastics stool, on page 239

Individual elements a

b

c

d

i

j

k

l

e

f

g

m

n

o

h

New!

Lüne-Combinato® Individual Parts

a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o

Cuboid * Prism (supporting triangle) Half moon * Carousel ** Board with blocks * Board with felt covering * Beam ** Cube * Half cube * Roll ** Fluted rubber plate Balancing swing ** Corner * Transporting roller board “Standard‘‘ roller board **

Size LxWxH: 40x19x13 cm 40x19x16 cm 52x18x19 cm H: 9 cm, ø 35 cm 200x27x3 cm 200x27x3 cm 200x10x6 cm 50x50x50 cm 50x50x25 cm ø 40x50 cm 25x25 cm 200x10x30 cm 75x50x75 cm 82x35 cm 62x35 cm

Sets q Starter Set**

Product Code 71 128 0500 71 128 2001 71 128 0702 71 128 0803 71 128 2203 71 128 1008 71 128 2102 71 128 1109 71 128 1200 71 127 2000 71 128 1402 71 128 2157 71 128 0614 71 127 9102-1 71 128 5404-1

Set product code

Suggested basic set Consists of: 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 4

1 71 128 1617

r Maxi Set** s Vesti Set** t Steps Obstacle** ComprehenFor building 3 level steps or sive set carousels, turntables obstacle and seesaws Consists of: Consists of: Consists of: 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 71 128 1718 71 128 1516 71 128 2605

New!

* Attention! To be used under the direct supervision of an adult.

** Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years.

To be used under the direct supervision of an adult.

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

257


Gymnastics Vaulting Boxes a Sport-Thieme® Trapeze Boxes

With RG 30/50 foam inner core. These practical and fun training aids have been developed to meet safety standards, to be versatile, cope with high demands and to be durable. The high-quality, durable cover is made from 100% polyester Polygrip material. The trapeze-shaped individual parts can be joined together with a fixed Velcro band and can also be used individually. This makes the boxes very versatile. They can be used in P.E. lessons, therapy, rehabilitation and also for leisure. The innovative way the Velcro bands are positioned allows the boxes to be connected to make a soft floor mat.

Sport-Thieme® Vaulting Boxes Also take a look at:

Product Code

Total Height 71 121 4329-1 3 piece set 75 cm 71 121 4303-1 3 piece set 120 cm 71 121 4316-1 4 piece set 120 cm

Vaulting Boxes from page 234

Design

Footprint (LxWxH) Upper Part Height (LxW) Individual Parts 85x60x75 cm 85x30 cm 25 cm 130x90x120 cm 120x45 cm 40 cm 130x90x120 cm 120x45 cm 30 cm

cks Reivo® Vario Round Blo

An endless array of uses in play, gymnastics and as a seat!

Set Buy Now! b Reivo® Vario Round Block

Core made from high-quality flexible polyether foam (RG 30-40). Base is made from strong flexible PE foam. Cover made from strong 100% polyester canvas. Cover of the base is made from non-slip, textured 100% polyester gymnastics mat material (complies with EN 12503-5 and EN 12503-6 standards). Integrated “Velcro safety system” means there is a smooth connection with Reivo Kombi gymnastics mats as well as Reivo landing surfaces. The round blocks can also be joined to each other. “Maxi” Round Block: HxWxT: 76x85x66 cm, 13 kg. “Midi” Round Block: HxWxT: 66x75x66 cm, 10 kg. “Mini” Round Block: HxWxT: 56x65x66 cm, 8 kg. “Kids” Round Block: HxWxT: 46x55x66 cm, 6 kg. 71 119 5633 Maxi round blockEach 71 119 5620 Midi round blockEach 71 119 5617 Mini round blockEach 71 119 5646 Kids round blockEach

Sets

Reivo® Vario Round Blocks

This innovative sports product encourages the user to playfully learn important movement techniques. The soft but flexible core guarantees safe learning and practising free of any fears.

Reivo® “Velcro System”

Guarantees an absolute secure connection between Reivo Kombi gymnastics mats and Reivo Kombi landing mats.

Don’t forget to order: • Reivo® Mat with Sealing Flaps for Secure Connection, on page 274 • Non-slip Mats, on page 277

258

c Reivo® Vario

Round Block Set

1x “Maxi”, 1x “Medi”, 1x “Mini”, 1x “Kids”. 71 119 5659 Set

d Reivo® Vario

Round Block Set

1x “Maxi”, 1x “Medi”, 1x “Mini”. 71 119 5604 Set

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Gymnastics Equipment Children’s Gymnastics

10

year

guarantee

4 With additional suspension rails 4 40  mm padding 4 41  mm padding 4 42  mm padding 4 Sturdy lateral support

a

a

4 With colourful cover

Real Leather

b

a Sport-Thieme® Jumping and Gymnastics Stool

Also take a look at: Kombi Gymnastics Stools, page 239

LxWxH: 70x50x40 cm. Can withstand up to approx. 160 kg. 10 year guarantee! Leather cover, natural 71 121 4404 Each Synthetic leather cover, blue 71 121 6006 Each Synthetic leather cover, red 71 121 6019 Each

b Board with Felt Cover

LxW 200x27 cm 71 128 1008-1 Each

70 cm

50

cm

Stacks as a training stool for jumping exercises

Greizer® Step System The Greizer® Step System

It encourages the development of balance and promotes creativity in children and people with disabilities. The system is used in support centres, children‘s day-care centres, schools, therapeutic practices, etc. The aim is to keep or reestablish balance once the body‘s centre of gravity has been changed. The user practises movements on a narrow supporting surface, standing upright after stimulation of the vestibular analyser, rotational movements and movements in unsupported situations. Suitable for many other motor-diagnostic exercises. In addition, the system is ideal for establishing specific levels of balancing skills. It is particularly valuable to be able to have developmental progress properly documented (orientation by individual reference standards).

a

50 cm

Suitable for many exercises, especially for use in pre-schools and primary schools. The completely new design has an additional hanging bar for boards and ladders. The stools also stack well and take up very little room when stored. The base frame is made of oval metal tubing with non-slip rubber foot caps. The upper part has either a durable leather cover or a coloured synthetic leather cover,

c

Set

d

b Greizer® Step System Set

The complete set made up of 10 steps from the “short” and “long” systems, meaning you can design a comprehensive obstacle course. The steps fit into each other and can be stored away saving space. Greizer steps are made of strong plywood with a non-slip surface and are 102, 94, 86, 78, 70, 62, 54, 46, 38 and 30 cm in length. The width of each step is 15 cm, height 11.5 cm. 10 year guarantee! 71 188 1888 10-piece

Set

Buy Now!

10

year

guarantee

e

Balancing: • Widely varying, slow and fast walking, turning and standing upright • Walking whilst throwing and catching a ball • Children walk past each other without leaving the equipment Climbing: • Climbing up and down in different variations Creating stories through motion: • Setting balancing sections and mastering them • Connecting places with stories/associations and talking about them

Recognising rhythm and converting it into movements

c Greizer® “Short”

d Greizer® “Long”

The practical set for beginners or for testing and when there is not much space available. Suitable as an addition if you want to extend an existing system. 5 steps from 30-62 cm, total length 2.3 m. 10 year guarantee! 71 188 1862 5-piece

Five long steps for extending existing systems. When added to the “short” system you will have a complete set. This will extend your obstacle course by 4.3 m. (step length from 70-102 cm.) 10 year guarantee! 71 188 1875 5-piece

Step System

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

Step System

step More exciting Greizer shop: equipment in our online sport-thieme.com

259


Gymnastics Ceiling and Wall Mounts

Sets

Swing Mounting Set

The multi-functional hanging system provides you with flexibility as the „sliders“ can be adjusted to the desired position on the ceiling or wall. Separate ball bearing hooks are not needed as the integrated pendulum hook offers required functions. Especially recommended if you are

Practical mounting tips s page: for all products on thi sport-thieme.com sport-thieme.nl

Ceiling Cross Bar - the universal ceiling mount

working with different swings. Mounting is best when attached to the ceiling with an 8 cm wide and 10 thick laminated beam.

4 Also suitable for suspended ceilings

a Ball bearing mounted pendulum hook

a Ceiling Rail Set

The set consists of: • 2x 3 m suspension rails • 4x sliders with pendulum hooks • 4x end caps 71 174 8505 Set

c Universal Ceiling Cross Bar

b Wall Rail Set

The set consists of: • 4x 2 m suspension rails • 4x sliders with pendulum hooks • 4x end caps 71 174 8518 Set

Individual Parts of the Swing Mounting Set

e Slider with Pendulum Hook d Hanging Rail

All movements in all positions this universal hook completes your rail system. The swivel hook is ball bearing mounted and fitted with a pendulum ring. 71 174 8853 Each

Specially developed rail system for hanging swings. The hanging points can be individually adjusted. Ideal for mounting onto wooden beams. Exceptionally robust. 71 174 8811 1 mEach f End Cap With rubber buffer preventing sli71 174 8824 2 mEach 71 174 8837 3 mEach des being pulled out of the rail. 71 174 8840 4 mEach 71 174 8879 Each

4 Friction-free and safe swinging

Registered design. Universally adjustable ceiling mounting. With 17 eyelets (ø 15 mm) in total, all types of swings can be hung. Diagonal mounting requires a space of 131x131 cm (cross beam L: 180 cm) Includes 5 screw chain links. Direct mounting onto concrete

j Marathon® Swing Hangings

Experience a new swinging sensation. Swing gently, for a long time and silently backwards and forwards.

ching Gymnastics Rings

g

260

Suspended ceiling up to 60 cm 71 207 4838 Each

h

h

i

q

k

New!

i l

New! Sport-Thieme®

Belt Loop

Combines celling hooks with a snap hook or a screw chain link. Thanks to reduced friction an improved swing performance is achieved. Reduces hazardous metal fragments that can be a result of hanging directly. High quality, black polyamide. L: approx. 45 cm. W: 25 mm. Can withstand up to 230 kg. 71 168 0805 Each

New! Screw Chain Link

Very resilient connector for hooks, rings, eyelets. Ideal as a swing suspension hanger. Thickness: 10 mm. Can withstand up to 550 kg. 71 168 0007 Each

h

k Rotating Swivel Hook

To allow full rotations when swinging. Runs smoothly and allows free swinging even when fully weighted. Can withstand up to 200 kg. 71 174 7108 Each

Ceiling Rail

Can be used for gymnastics, sports and games. The safe hanging mechanism for gymnastics, swings and climbing elements for use in sports halls, nurseries, pre-schools, schools and rehabilitation centres.

l Safety Snap Hook

With screwing lock to connect hanging items quickly and safely. L: 10 cm. Can withstand up to 350 kg. 71 174 7313 Each

o Recessed Eyelet

For wall mounting of swinging hammock Very durable strap style products and for securing swings or other items that are other equipment to a pair at a lower height. When this eyelet is not of gymnastics rings or to used, it sits inside the recessed plate. Suim Protective Sleeve ceiling hooks. You can table for use with snap hooks. The outer Protect hands and fingers when swinalso, for example, comedges of the frame are rounded. WxH: ging. The flexible protector made from plebine a climbing net with a bar, product 22x22 cm. For mounting there must be an asantly soft, extra strong neoprene reduapprox. 9x9 cm and 2 cm thick space on ces the risk of catching fingers in the snap code 71 120 8304, and gymnastics rings. For this you will need 4 straps. The weight the installation wall. The recessed eyelet hooks or hanging rings. The sharp corcapacity per strap is 350 kg. Strap 53x5 is an ideal wall bracket as when attaching ners of snap hooks are safely covered cm, with screw fastening. Gymnastic rings items under 2 m high, protruding hooks and hands are protected. Comfortable for not included are not acceptable. hands. LxW: 25x5 cm. 71 201 7903 Each 71 127 3700 Each 71 215 7708 Each

4 Protects hands and fingers when swinging

Suspended ceilings up to 40 cm 71 207 4825 Each

To hang swings etc. safely. Solid steel construction, takes up to 200 kg. 30x15cm. With screw closing chain link. 71 177 3806 Each

Accessories n Strap for Atta-

Suspended ceilings up to 20 cm 71 207 4812 Each

g Ceiling Mount with Half Ring

p The ball bearing mounted rolling joint with a safety mechanism provides a frictionfree and safe swing. Includes drilling template, snap hooks and fixings with technical approval. Each pair can withstand up to 300 kg. 71 196 1502 For concrete ceilingsPair 71 196 1515 For wooden beamsPair

71 207 4809 Each

p Swing Rope

Extremely strong, height adjustable polyamide safety rope, 3.5 metres long, with thimble and figure of eight hook. Tensile strength: 800 kg. 71 174 7209 Pair

q Safety Device

for Fixings to a Ceiling

Ideal protection for all fixings to a ceiling. The 1.5 m long loop rope with chain quick release fastening is attached next to the actual ceiling mount on the supplied mini ceiling plate and pulled through all parts of the attaching parts. This prevents falling if the hook breaks. A must have for all swing suspensions! 71 174 8039 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Turnen

Rolling Bar Slide

When rolling in different positions the body is massaged, stimulated and sensitised Exclusive to Sport-Thieme®

Suitable for attaching to wall bars

Set

g

Buy Now!

Rolling Bar Slide

Kombi Platform: • Low Platform e •H  igh Platform f

a c

d

Roller Board Track

Floor Mat

4 Laminated, robust foam rollers 4 Hygienic, washable a Sport-Thieme®

New: extra wide! When pushing up, positioning and climbing on a roller board you are developing balance compensation, bilateral coordination and motor planning. When going downhill, postural stretching in the stomach area occurs and muscles get toned. Simply hang the roller board track onto the Kombi platform and you will be provided with the optimal rolling speed for therapy. LxW: approx. 150x60 cm. 71 201 5402 Each

71 cm

cm

Roller Board Track

61

c Sport-Thieme®

42 cm

91 cm

Rolling Bar Slide

A superb slide! The body is massaged, stimulated and sensitised as you roll down this slide in different positions (stomach, back, sitting, kneeling, forwards or backwards). When rolling on the stomach, the neck muscles are stimulated and tonic stretching is promoted. You can also climb up either with or without a rope. When doing so, you can transport balls, mats, etc. If objects are rolled down this slide, attentiveness and speed of reaction are developed in a fun way. The Rolling Bar Slide can be hung on wall bars or on step platforms. A very versatile item for sports and therapy. Very stable, will support up to 150 kg. Platform not included. 71 200 5805 200x60 cmEach 71 200 5818 250x60 cmEach 71 200 5821 300x60 cmEach

e Sport-Thieme® Low Platform

61 cm

64

cm

f Sport-Thieme® High Platform

The ideal starting point for the roller board The ideal starting point for the rolchute which can be attached to a rung at ler board chute. There is a protective strip the front or rear. Can be combined with fitted at the opposite side to prevent the the Sport-Thieme low platform. WxDxH: roller board sliding down. Can be com64x61x91 cm. Roller board chute, low bined with the Sport-Thieme high platform. platform and roller board chute not WxDxH: 71x61x42 cm. included. 71 201 7408 Each 71 201 7411 Each

Set Set b Rolling Bar Slide Set

Set consists of: • Rolling bar slide 250x60 cm a • Roller board track c • Kombi platform g 71 200 5889 Set

d Floor Mat

Ideal for laying out on floors of rooms for exercises. With PE foam filling providing perfect shock absorption and making the mat very light compared to standard foam mats. Velcro band on the corners to enable several mats to be connected together side by side or behind each other. Cover made from nylon reinforced vinyl (87% polyvinyl chloride, 13% polyester). 71 121 3300-1 100x200x6 cm, 5.8 kgEach 71 121 3313-1 100x200x8 cm, 6.9 kgEach 71 121 3326-1 100x150x6 cm, 4.4 kgEach

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

g Sport-Thieme®

Kombi Platform

The combination of high and low platform is everything you need when using your roller board and roller chutes: crawling under, climbing through, climbing up and sliding down. Versatile uses: the lower platform can be fitted at either the right or left side and the roller slide can be attached at either the front or the rear. WxDxH: 135x61x91/42 cm. 71 200 5919 Each

261


Gymnastics Gym and Swing Equipment a Crumply Bag

This bag is very inviting to lie on it, sit on it, snuggle up and relax on it. The crumbly bag is particularly attractive for children and is therefore ideal for therapy and developing deep sensibility. Cordura material (100% polyamide), filled with polyester wadding. With 2 loops. Rope not included. Approx. 135x90 cm. Can withstand up to 100 kg. 71 203 8100 Each

b Platform Swing

DBGM (registered design). Padded. ø 100 cm. With ropes. Can withstand up to 120 kg. 71 174 5304-1 Each

d a

c b

c Hammock

Exceptionally robust. Especially suited for sports halls and also for hanging directly with a snap hook. Usable surface 260x180 cm, 100% cotton made from certified organic cultivation. Can withstand up to 160 kg. 71 174 7847-2 Each

d Sport-Thieme® Swing

Increase the ways you can use your rings. Children can swing either sitting down or standing up. Quick to fit by simply placing the board into the rings. Velcro straps for safe attachment. Can withstand up to approx. 120 kg. Rope and rings not included. 71 186 4364-1 Each

e

e Telescopic Bar Hook

For pulling down rings, made of aluminium, can be extended to 450 cm. 71 166 8618 Each

Climbing Nets 4 Climbing net including fixings to attach to 2 pairs of gymnastics rings

f Climbing Net

Let the gymnasts race up the net, swing off it, jump into it, climb away etc. Just lay out soft mats for safety. Fixtures and fittings not included. Will support up to 400 kg. Rope - ø 2 cm, mesh width 25 cm. 2x2 m Polypropylene, orange 71 127 2677 Each 3x2.5 m Polypropylene, orange 71 127 2664 Each Soft spinning fibre, natural colours 71 127 2635 Each

Climbing Net Tip

Hang or tie colourful chiffon scarves to the net. Who can get the green scarf quickest? Who is skilled enough to untie the scarf from the net? Use soft mats as fall protection.

Don’t forget to order: • Chiffon scarves, 338 • Soft mats, 275

Set

g Climbing Net

for Gymnastics Rings

Includes hanging mechanism to be attached to two pairs of existing gymnastics rings. Contains a 2.5x3 m net, plywood bar, attaching straps. 71 127 2606 Polypropylene, orange Each 71 127 2648 Natural spinning fibre Each

262

h Climbing Net

with Wall Brackets

Contains a 2.5x3 m net, wall brackets, holding bar and raising mechanism. 71 121 1102 Polypropylene, orangeEach 71 121 1160 Natural spinning fibreEach

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Now Even Better

Swings, Tripez Gymnastics

4 Integrated rotating hook with ball bearings

Now Even Better

4 Ergonomic shape 4 Secure

a

Top Rated

sport-thieme.com

Swaying, swinging, turning... The height of the net seat changes in reaction to the other partner‘s pushing. Very versatile!

a Sport-Thieme® Mobile Swing Protected design. Now comes with ball bearing swivel hook and two attaching steel ropes. Accelerating, slowing down, swinging and rotating are all basic movements that make the Mobile Swing a particularly versatile product. There are always new surprising movements with this swing. The height of the very comfortable seat changes on the opposite side

4 “Free swinging”, swaying and turning

when one partner takes off. If partners manage to communicate well, fluid movements will soon follow. This swing develops coordination and sensory perception and the joy of movement is awoken. Can be hung from one pair of existing gymnastics rings in halls. Hanging height approx. 3 m. Will support up to 160 kg. 71 204 9902 Each

Tripez®

5

Examples of use:

b Sport-Thieme® Flying Swing Mounted in gymnastics rings, the flying swing moves back and forth. Physically impaired children gain important insights and quickly learn to trust this swing. Strengthens and tones. Suitable for all positions whether lying on your front, back or sitting up. Can be adjusted to suit the user. Cover: lined canvas (100% cotton).

year guarantee

Can support up to 100 kg body weight. Includes ropes and suspension straps. 71 127 1922-1 Each

Don’t forget to order:

Gymnastics Mats, pages 268-278

Set

Exclusive to Sport-Thieme®

4 With an instruction manual

Swing

c Sport-Thieme® Tripez® “Premium”

Gymnastics Bench Swing

Includes a safety strap with Velcro fastening - allows the product to be attached to gymnastics benches

Patent no. 10005331, protected design. The intelligent improvement of trapeze bars. The Tripez is a versatile piece of equipment for adventure sports. One trapeze can be used on its own or several can be used by one person or for partner exercises. Whether sitting, standing or hanging from the Tripez, it is great for twisting and swinging in all directions. 3 bars made from unbreakable ash and connected at a 90 degree angle on a sturdy metal frame. Outer ø approx. 46 cm, approx. 73 cm wide, can withstand approx. 200 kg. Includes • 2 Isilink ropes • 2 safety snap hooks

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

Now Even Better 4 With connecting eyelets • 2 bench attachments for attaching to gymnastics benches following DIN standards, registered design • With a comprehensive instruction manual 5 year guarantee! 71 120 0616 Each Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Long cord. Danger of strangulation. To be used under the direct supervision of an adult.

® ® d Sport-Thieme Tripez

“Premium” Set

Increase the ways you can use your Tripez. The set consists of: 2 Tripezes, incl. 4 Isilink ropes, 4 safety snap hooks, 4 bench attachments for attaching to gymnastics benches as well as instructions. 71 120 0629 Set

263


Gymnastics

10

Swings, Gymnastics and Swing Sets

year

10

Top Rated

guarantee

sport-thieme.com

year

guarantee

b a

a Stainless steel trapeze bar

Wooden trapeze bar

a

Sport-Thieme® ''Profi'' Trapeze Bar

This trapeze bar is daring and adventurous, exhilarating fun when swinging and flying, as well as introducing totally new forms of exercise. The huge variation in movements on a trapeze include: swinging, rocking, propping oneself up, balancing, jumping, hanging and other essential movements. Wooden trapeze bar: • Made from ash, ø 35 mm, approx. 75 cm wide • Suitable for indoor use • Will support up to approx. 80 kg Stainless steel trapeze bar: • Made from V2A Nirosta, ø 35 mm, approx. 75 cm wide • Suitable for indoor and outdoor use • Will support up to approx. 150 kg

Stainless steel trapeze bar

b Wooden trapeze bar

4 Easy  to attach to all ring b Sport-Thieme® Trapeze Bars Sway and swing through the air like units Both designs come with holding ropes made from weather-proof poly rope, approx. 300 cm long. With a figure of 8 hook, the length of the ropes can be adjusted in situ as required. The ropes will adjust at any level up to approx. 180 cm. Sport-Thieme tip: Wrap adhesive tape around the bar and ropes – this will provide you with more grip. 10 year guarantee! Wooden trapeze bar 71 119 1208 Each

the professionals with our trapeze bars made from either wood or stainless steel. Wooden trapeze bar: • Made  from ash, ø 35 mm, approx. 75 cm wide • With hanging brackets for safely hanging the swing rings • Bracket  with silicone cover, therefore the rings will not get damaged • Side eyelets allow other trapezes to be attached • For  indoor use • Can withstand up to 80 kg

Stainless steel trapeze bar 71 119 1211 Each

Set

Buy Now!

Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Long cord. Danger of strangulation. To be used under the direct supervision of an adult.

5

year guarantee

Exclusive to Sport-Thieme®

Stainless steel trapeze bar: • Made from V2A Nirosta, ø 35 mm, approx. 75 cm wide • With a snap hook for hanging • Eyelets allow for other trapezes to be attached • Weather-proof for both indoor and outdoor use • Can withstand up to approx. 150 kg Gymnastics rings not included. 10 year guarantee! Wooden trapeze bar 71 119 0902 Each Stainless steel trapeze bar 71 119 0928 Each Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Long cord. Danger of strangulation. To be used under the direct supervision of an adult.

c Connecting Ropes for Trapeze Bars

With these ropes, multiple trapeze bars can be connected to a rope ladder for climbing and swinging. Also ideal for hanging the Tripez. Sturdy rope made from Isilink cable, can withstand up to 200 kg, with safety hooks on both sides. The 1.25 m long rope can be individually adjusted. 71 119 0915 Pair

Set e Sport-Thieme® Hildesheim Increase the number of ways you can use your rings: attach a swing bar to them so that several people can swing at the same time. Made from unbreakable wood, 3.5 m long, oval-shaped, approx. 51x41 mm, with 4 hanging eyelets for simple and secure mounting. Ring and ropes not included. 5 year guarantee! 71 121 1405 Each

New!

d Trapeze Bar Set

c

Swing Bar

The set consists of: • 2 trapezes with wooden bars b • 2 pairs of connecting ropes c 71 119 1107 Set Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Long cord. Danger of strangulation. To be used under the direct supervision of an adult.

Set

i Sport-Thieme® Ring Set

for Indoors and Outdoors

g Gym and Swing Set for Gymnastics Halls

Includes plywood rings and chain, 16 mm thick long hemp rope with WV weights. Total length 12 m. All lengths available upon request. 71 118 9605 Pair

f

New! Gymnastics Rings with

Rope

Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Long cord. Danger of strangulation. To be used under the direct supervision of an adult.

Suitable for children‘s gymnastics both indoors and outdoors. Non-slip handles for a secure grip when turning, swinging and swaying. With hooks for length adjustment. Galvanised handle with red plastic cover. Rope end with rings for hanging. h Gymnastics Rings Made from plywood, competition Total length: approx. 205 cm. ø gymnastics rings: 14 cm. ø rope: 10 mm. Can withstand quality for indoor use. ø approx. 28 mm, outer ø 236 mm, inner ø 180 mm. Will supup to approx. 50 kg. 71 118 9100 Pair port up to approx. 700 kg (traction). 10 year guarantee! Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Long cord. Danger of strangulation. To be used under the 71 118 9706 Pair direct supervision of an adult.

264

Ceiling mount brackets

The set consists of: • 1 pair of swing ropes 3.50 m long, adjustable to half the length • 1 pair of metal ceiling mounts, page 214 g • 1 pair of plywood gymnastics rings for indoor use h Supports up to approx. 120 kg, without screws or dowels. 71 186 4377 Set Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Long cord. Danger of strangulation. To be used under the direct supervision of an adult.

j Sport-Thieme® Swing Board

Extend the number of ways you can use your gymnastics rings. Children can stand or sit on the seat and swing. Quick to assemble by simply hanging the board in the rings. With Velcro straps for safe attachment. Board size (WxDxH): approx. 60x22x2 cm, sitting surface approx. 46.5x22 cm. Can withstand approx. 120 kg. Ring and ropes not included. 71 186 4364 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Swinging and Climbing Gymnastics

All-round protection

Height-adjustable special bracket

Great Product! 22 cm 30 cm

a

b

c

a Sport-Thieme® Poly Rope

c Sport-Thieme® Hard Fibre

With 7 six-hole ash rungs, poly rope ø 16 mm, 2.10 m long with hanging ring at both ends. Can withstand up to 200 kg. 71 186 4335 Each

Smooth climbing rope, ø 30 mm, hanging eyelet at top, plastic seal cap on bottom. Only suitable for outdoor use. 71 118 9807 3 m longEach 71 118 9810 4.25 m longEach 71 118 9823 per meterMetre

Ladder

Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Long cord. Danger of strangulation. To be used under the direct supervision of an adult.

Outdoor Climbing Rope

Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Long cord. Danger of strangulation. To be used under the direct supervision of an adult.

d

34 cm

e

f

e Sport-Thieme®

g Sport-Thieme® Rope Plate

Plate Swing

Strong ash wood, ø 30 cm wooden disc with 16 mm poly rope. Rope length 3 m, upper hanging eyelets, smooth height adjustment with hook. Can withstand up to 120 kg. 71 186 4348 Each Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Long cord. Danger of strangulation. To be used under the direct supervision of an adult.

b Sport-Thieme® Classic

Gymnastics Climbing Rope

Sport-Thieme® Sisal Rope Ladder

For using on climbing rope facilities. Made from hemp, ø 33 mm, with hanging ring at top end, lower end with a plastic end cap. 71 118 9979 3.0 mEach 71 118 9908 3.5 mEach 71 118 9911 4.0 mEach 71 118 9924 4.5 mEach 71 118 9937 5.0 mEach 71 118 9940 5.5 mEach 71 118 9953 6.0 mEach 71 118 9966 6.5 mEach

d

Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Long cord. Danger of strangulation. To be used under the direct supervision of an adult.

Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Long cord. Danger of strangulation. To be used under the direct supervision of an adult.

With solid rungs made from beech wood, width approx. 28.5 cm. Sisal rope ø 10 mm, with hanging ring. Each strand of the rope has a safety inlay made from polyamide. This protects the rope ladder against snapping at the fixing when it is frequently twisted. Can withstand up to 100 kg. 71 186 4322 With 6 bars, 2 m longEach 71 186 4319 With 8 bars, 2.70 m longEach

g

Due to the risk of accidents, climbing ropes in sports halls should not have any knots. With our rope plate, it is possible to swing or rock on the climbing rope, whether sitting or standing, without any risk. Suitable to be fitted to existing climbing ropes. The height can be adjusted using the special bracket. Fits all climbing ropes from 30 to 35 mm. Rope not included. Can withstand up to 100 kg. 71 118 9302 Each Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Long cord. Danger of strangulation. To be used under the direct supervision of an adult.

f SwingTop® Swing Seat

The professional way to swing. With the SwingTop, when used with a rope, you get a variety of sports and game possibilities for swinging, swirling and twisting. Sturdy plastic plate, ø 22 cm, approx. 7 cm high, approx. 400 g. Can withstand up to 90 kg. Fits all standard ropes (ø 30 mm). Rope not included. 71 118 9315 Each Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Long cord. Danger of strangulation. To be used under the direct supervision of an adult.

Info for Structural Engineers:

Load-bearing capacity for the attachment of rope ladders, swings, ropes, etc., in accordance with DIN 1055, part 3, for each suspension unit a vertical load of 2000 N and a horizontal load of 900 N must be taken into account (without the dynamic coefficient).

Tau-Trapez®

For varied P.E. lessons. This special system can be easily and safely used with existing climbing rope systems. It has lots of different uses when used with climbing nets and other play equipment. The trick: thanks to the simple and fast way of assembling the trapeze bars and ropes using the clamps, the Tau-Trapez® bars are a real alternative to using standard large equipment. This clamp system can be used on all ropes with a diameter greater than 20 mm without requiring any additional knots or ties. Use this perfect system for adventure sports in the sports hall!

h Sport-Thieme® Tau-Trapez®

With our Tau-Trapez you can make even more use out of your climbing equipment. Each trapeze bar is made from wood (100 cm long, ø 35 mm) and comes with 2 clasps. Can withstand up to 80 kg. Ropes not included. With fairly little effort you can create: • A swing • A simple trapeze • A swinging bar ladder or • A multiple trapeze with different levels 71 119 8300 Each

5 Tau-Trapeze® bars in use

Clamping device for fixing to the rope

Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Long cord. Danger of strangulation. To be used under the direct supervision of an adult.

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

265


Gymnastics Judo Mats and Accessories a “Peter Seisenbacher” Judo and Universal Floor Mat

This new mat was developed together with double Olympic Champion Peter Seisenbacher and was specially developed to be a universal mat for use in school sports. When folded down, the mat is the size of a standard soft floor mat i.e. 300x200 cm, is only 8 cm thick and can therefore be stored on any soft mat trolley. When fully folded out, it is 400x300x4 cm and can be used as a martial arts mat for a small group. Four of these mats will cover 48 m², enough space for a whole class to train on. A great advantage to this mat is its weight, as the whole mat only weighs 28 kg. Core: Polyethylene light foam (approx. 30 kg/m³) Cover: Upper judo mat material, 100% high-strength polyester with PVC coating and rice-straw embossing. The bottom surface is also tear-proof, a 100% polyester fabric with an anti-slip coating. There is also an inner facing zip. 71 119 7251 Each

4 Can be folded

New! Children‘s Judo Mat

b Judo Mat

Underside made from non-slip waffle-textured material

4M  anufactured and approved to European standard EN 12503-3

Complies with EN 12503-3 Suitable for competitions. Nationally and internationally recognised. Upper and sides are laminated with vinyl ricestraw embossing, 100% polyester. Welded corners and edges, waffle effect bottom surface, sealed all-round. Core made from composite 235 kg/m³ foam.

Medium design. Dimensions 100x100x4 cm 71 119 7206 GreenEach 71 119 7219 RedEach

4 High level of stability 4 Smooth connection to other mats 4 Only weighs 3 kg, light and easy to manage

Dimensions 200x100x4 cm 71 119 7222 GreenEach 71 119 7235 RedEach

d “Superlight” c Transport Trolley

Children's Judo Mat

This new children‘s Judo mat has the same properties as the “Profi” professional Great for storing and transporting mats mat but is considerably lighter. The speeasily. With a 12 mm MDF board screwed cial sandwich construction core offers even onto strong rectangular 70x40 mm tubing. more stability. Max. load capacity 400 kg, with 2 rigid • Core made from sandwich PE/PU foam and 2 swivel castors ø 125 mm. Holds mats • Upper and sides laminated with Judo sized 100x100 cm. Suitable for up to 30 mat material mats. 10 year guarantee! • Blue, yellow and red 71 122 1305 Each • Underside made from non-slip waffle

for Judo Mats

266

Only weighs 3 kg also easy for children to move

material • Smooth connections to additional mats guaranteed • Light and easy to handle • Only weighs 3 kg and therefore easy for children to set up • Easy to clean • Skin-friendly material • 100x100x3 cm 71 236 0007 BlueEach 71 236 0010 YellowEach 71 236 0023 RedEach

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Tatami Mats and Accessories Gymnastics

Accessories

Set

Tatami Fitness Mats

Buy Now!

4 2 cm thick for fitness 4 Can be used on either side

b Tatami Fitness Mat

a Mat Set with Transport Trolley

The set consists of: • 9 mats with interlocking teeth all around, approx. 100x100x2 cm per mat • 4 pairs of edge pieces, each edge piece approx. 100x10 cm • 1 set of 4 corner pieces with a side length of 50 cm • 1 transport and storage trolley With this set you will have a mobile fitness and gymnastics area of 3.15x3.15 m. 71 187 3607 Set

This sports floor covering provides very good absorption properties and meets the high demands of karate martial arts mats. • Anti-bacterial and hypo-allergenic • Completely odourless material made from polyethylene foam • Closed cell, washable and does not absorb moisture • Excellent non-slip surface • Can be used on both sides, red and blue • Easy to clean with a mild soapy water With the intelligent all-round interlocking teeth, single mats (1x1 m) can be easily attached to other mats and they are guaranteed to stay together securely. Special edge sections (frame pairs) and corner protectors will provide you with clean mat edges. Includes handling instructions. With all-round interlocking teeth, approx. 100x100 cm, 2 cm thick. 71 207 7303 Each

c d c Tatami Mats Corner Set

For Tatami fitness mats. For sealing off corners. This set consists of 4 corner pieces with a side length of 50 cm. Grey. 71 207 7329  Pack of 4

d Tatami Mats Frame Set

For Tatami fitness mats. For closing off open edges. Frame pair consists of 2 pieces. LxW 100x10 cm. Grey. 71 207 7316 Pair

e Mat Trolley for ''Tatami'' Mats

The practical transport and storage aid for your Tatami mats. The trolley moves easily from room to room with its smooth rolling castors. Dimensions (LxWxH): 76x41x115 cm. 71 187 3506-1 Each

Tatami Combat Sports Mats 4 4 cm thick for martial arts 4 Can be used on either side

How many corners/edges are required?

g

h

f Trocellen Tatami Judo Mat

Example: 16 m² area (4x4 m)

• 16 mats

• 1 corner set with 4 pieces • 6 frame sets of 2 pieces each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

The density of Trocellen Judo Tatami mats is a real breakthrough in technical mat production. Complex factors influenced even the development phase of this innovative Judo mat. These mats greatly reduce the risk of accidents and injuries thanks to their highly elastic shock absorption. Water jet cutting technology guarantees a homogeneous base and extremely even impact absorbing properties. Size of each individual mat: 100x100x4 cm, weight: 3 kg. Anti-bacterial coating, hypo-allergenic. Non-slip thanks to special rice-straw texture embossing. Mat can be used on either side, colour combination: green/red. Washable and waterproof. 71 119 7264 Each

g Tatami Mats Corner Set

For Trocellen Tatami Judo mats. For closing off corners. One set consists of 4 corners with a side length of 50 cm. Grey. 71 119 7280  Pack of 4

h Tatami Mats Frame Set

For Trocellen Tatami Judo mats. To close off open edges. One frame set consists of 2 pieces. LxW 100x10 cm. Grey. 71 119 7277 Pair

267


Gymnastics Quality in Gymnastics Mats Materials: Gymnastics Mat Cores

Composite Foam

Neopolen

PE Foam

PU Foam

• Foam from foam flakes that have undergone a special pressing and gluing process • Very resistant yet also flexible • Volumetric weight (RG): 800, 100 or 120 kg/m³ (for gymnastics mats) • Use: as a gymnastics equipment mat (RG 100 + RG 120) for landing and falling heights of up to 60 cm or as a floor gymnastics mat.

• Expanded polypropylene foam, mainly sealed foam particles • Good resilience to static and dynamic loads • Volumetric weight (RG): low • Use: as a gymnastics equipment mat (light gymnastics mat) for pre-schools and primary schools for landing and falling heights of up to 60 cm

• Many layers of polyethylene foam glued on top of each other (sandwich design) • Very stable yet a low weight • Volumetric weight (RG): 30kg/m³ (for gymnastics mats) • Use:  as a floor mat • Do not mix PE foam up with polyester, as this is of a lower quality and not suitable for gymnastics mats.

• Polyurethane foam • Very stable shape • Density: minimum 20kg/m³ • Use: as a soft mat

Canvas

Needle Fleece

• Polyester: 100% • Tensile strength: 2,500 N • 650g/m² • Smooth surface • Abrasion resistance complies with EN 12503-5 + -6

• No wrinkling thanks to the strong adhesive attached core and cover • No burns • Skin friendly • Stable underfoot

Materials: Gymnastics Mat Surfaces Polygrip Mat Material

• Polyester: 100% • Tensile strength: 2,500 N • 600g/m² • Grained structure • Slip resistant

Textured Mat Material

• Polyester: 100% • Tensile strength: min. 2,500 N • Slip resistant • Textured structure • Protects against skin grazes

Tested, Checked and Standardised Types that comply with EN 12503-1 standards

Safety Requirements on Absorption Properties

Classified by type and use Type Typical use

Max. braking acceleration g (1 g = 9,81 m/s)

1 2 3 4

Mat for floor exercises without vaulting (beginners) Mat for floor exercises with a vault (gymnastics floor mat 4 cm) Mat for floor exercises with a vault for small jumps (6 cm mat) Mat for simple lining between equipment with controlled landing (12 cm low jump mat) 5 Landing mats (15 cm mat) 6 Mats for difficult moves ( 20 cm competition mats) 7 Soft floor mats for simple exercises (30 or 40 cm) 8 Soft floor mats (30 cm), density/ weight 23 kg

≤ 80 ≤ 65 ≤ 30 ≤ 40

Insertion depth Restore coefficient % mm (rebound height) not required ≤ 35 ≤ 50 ≤ 110

≤ 40 ≤ 14* ≤ 35 ≤ 20

≤ 110 ≤ 105* ≤ 185 ≤ 250

not required 20 – 60 ≤ 55 ≤ 50 ≤ 50 ≤ 15* ≤ 25 ≤ 25

* comparable to FIG (Federation Internationale de Gymastique) rules 1997

For your safety:

Sport-Thieme® Mats

These mats continually undergo quality control checks. This is the only way to guarantee that the quality the customer demands is delivered. A pivotal element of this is complying with European standards (EN) 12503-1. These standards apply technical safety standards to 8 types of gymnastics mats for use in schools, training and competition. There are specified values that must be complied with for the shock absorption and anti-slip properties of the upper and base of mats in order to guarantee the safety of users.

Always use gymnastics mats for their intended purpose and be especially careful to ensure you have enough shock absorption in line with European regulations.

Reivo® Kombi Mat System

SPORT-THIEME

EXPERT

Andreas Aguilar

„ Joining and fixing flaps

268

Non-slip

High-quality materials

Andreas Aguilar on our Sport-Thieme® Kombi Mats Safety is a very important aspect when children and young adults are partaking in gymnastics. The joints bet-

ween sports mats when laid next to each other present a huge risk in this regard. This is why the intelligent solution of using flaps at the joints in Reivo sports mats appeals to me so much. It prevents injury. Reivo have been manufacturing sports mats for 30 years and clearly this experience shows in their well thought out designs, their high product quality, precise workmanship and long lifespan. Therefore my recommendation is clear: You too should choose Reivo sports mats.

• Advantage 1: All mats have the “Reivo Velcro Safety System” • Advantage 2: No fear of the mats separating • Advantage 3: Mat underneath is extremely non-slip • Advantage 4: All soft mats can be converted into soft flooring • Advantage 5: DIN/EN certified, high-quality materials

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Which mat to be used for what purpose? Gymnastics Tip Decision Making Factors for Mat Types The decision as to which type of mat, with different characteristics, should be based on the following criteria: • Age group/body weight (primary or secondary level) • The pupil’s abilities • Exercises they will undertake • Jumping or falling height • Type of landing The mat should have the optimal shock absorbing qualities but also the optimal firmness.

1. Equipment Gymnastics Mats

on pages 270-274

EN12503-1 Type 3 These gymnastics equipment mats are for simple exercises and vaulting for floor gymnastics. They are suitable for landing and falling heights of up to 60 cm.

2. Landing Mats

on pages 278-279

Sinking Depths:

Do not sink much:

• 1.  Gymnastics Equipment Mats • 4 . Floor Gymnastics Mats

EN 12503-1 Type 5 und 6 Landing mats are suitable for use with equipment for landing heights of over 60 cm. They ensure a safe stand thanks to the high level of shock absorption. Landing mats are particularly recommended if the acrobatic movement contains a flip in flight or more than one complete body rotation. It is recommended that more shock

3. Soft Floor Mats Sink moderately: • 2 . Landing Mats

Sink deepest:

• 3 . Soft Floor Mats

absorption is used for lighter people and for those who are beginners. In this case you should combine the landing mat (see page 279) with the soft floor mats (see

on page 277

EN 12503-1 Type 7 and 8 Soft floor mats are suitable for flat landings such as the Hecht vault, over gymnastics boxes, high jump, or uncontrolled landings. As the user will sink deep with good shock absorption ensuring safety. The relatively deep level that the user sinks to when landing on the feet or from equipment presents a problem. Sinking deep can cause a “vice effect” and lead to injury. This risk can be reduced by using landing mats (see page 279) or floor gymnastics mats (see page 276-277). This avoids “swing bridges“ and the gymnast has a higher level of stability when standing. With the Sport-Thieme® Kombi Reversible Mat (see page 278) you can combine both mat designs ideally: • Point elastic soft floor mat with 100%

polyester canvas for uncontrolled landings • Flat elastic side with needle felt cover

4. Floor Gymnastics Mats (Roll-Out) Environmentally Friendly

At your request we will take back your old gymnastics and soft landing mats when you buy new mats from us, at an additional charge. The foam will be recycled and used again in the manufacturing process. Please enquire for collection costs.

pages 276 and 277), or use a Sport-Thieme Kombi Reversible Mat (see page 278).

for a high level of standing stability on landing.

on pages 280-281

EN 12503-1 Type 2 For floor gymnastics, a discipline for women and men with tumbling and gymnastic elements over an area of 12x12 m or 14x14 m  . It can be used in schools as a covering between mats or for a more secure stand on soft mats.

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

269


The Light Gymnastics Mat for Children! Turnen High density, lightweight mat for safe gymnastics

a Sport-Thieme® Children's

Lightweight Gymnastics Mat

Complies with EN 12503, type 3. This light gymnastics mat is ideal for preschools and primary schools. Core made from RG 28 polyethylene. Very light compared to standard foam mats (yet much firmer), making it ideal for children to use and carry. This mat is not suitable for heavier people as the mat is light and therefore not fully non-slip. Velcro straps on the corners, which can be used to connect several mats. Cover made from nylonreinforced vinyl (87% polyvinyl chloride, 13% polyester). Models and product codes: see table a

Top Rated

sport-thieme.com

Mat Properties Uses: Users: Surface: Core: Base:

Floor exercises Pre-schools and primary, nurseries Canvas Alveo Gymnastics mat material

With Velcro corners

a Sport-Thieme® Children‘s Lightweight Gymnastics Mats

With Alveo foam filling

Canvas upper surface 100% polyester

Size in Blue cm 150x100x6 71 121 3326 200x100x6 71 121 3300 200x100x8 71 121 3313 200x125x8 71 208 9704

Yellow 71 208 8903 71 208 8932 71 208 8961 71 208 9717

Green 71 208 8916 71 208 8945 71 208 8974 71 208 9720

Red 71 208 8929 71 208 8958 71 208 8987 71 208 9733

“Sportime” Gymnastics Mat

Core and cover are glued together making a wrinkle free gymnastics area that is 100% non-slip

Mat Properties Uses: Users:

Equipment and floor gymnastics mats Schools and clubs

Surface: Core: Base:

100% polyester gymnastics mat material Composite foam Waffle base

Gymnastics mat material 100% polyester

270

Waffle-textured material on underside of mat

RG 100 composite foam core with securely glued gymnastics mat material (100% polyester)

b Sport-Thieme® “Sportime” Gymnastics Mat

The great value alternative. RG 100 composite foam core, securely attached to 100% polyester gymnastics mat material. This gives extra assurance that the mat will not wrinkle. The bottom has a non-slip waffle textured surface to give more security against slipping. It is not possible to add accessories such as Velcro straps, car-

rying loops or carrying handles to this type of mat. 71 120 2045 150x100x4 cm, 9 kgEach 71 120 2003 150x100x6 cm, 12 kgEach 71 120 2058 200x100x4 cm, 12 kgEach 71 120 2016 150x100x8 cm, 15 kgEach 71 120 2029 200x100x6 cm, 16 kgEach 71 120 2032 200x100x8 cm, 19 kgEach

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Gymnastics Mats Gymnastics a

The “Super Light” Mat

Sport-Thieme® “Super Light” Gymnastics Mat

The very precise edge dimensions, non-slip waffle-textured base and its light weight make this a safe mat for gymnastics. The choice of 4 colours adds to the attraction.

Complies with EN 12503-1, type 3

Suitable for school and club sports. Floor and apparatus gymnastics for dismounts up to 60 cm. Also suitable for use in nurseries. With this new super light universal gymnastics mat, no Velcro straps or other equipment is necessary to join with other mats. This is because the base is bonded with non-slip waffle-textured material guaranteeing a secure position on the floor and preventing slippage between mats. The precise dimensions of the mat edges ensure the mats can be placed up closely against each other. The surface is bonded to the foam core, making the mat wrinklefree and increasing safety during gymnastics. A special sandwich core (Neopolen and soft foam) provides very good shock absorption. Polygrip 100% polyester gymnastics mat material with an embossed surface. Models and product codes: see table a

Mat Properties Uses:

Great Value!

Users: Surface: Core:

Buy Now!

Base:

Equipment gymnastics mat for simple dismounts Schools, clubs Polygrip glued to core Sandwich, composite foam/Neopolen foam Waffle-textured base glued to core

a “Super Light” Gymnastics Mats

Size in cm

100x50x6 150x100x6 200x100x6 200x100x8

Blue 71 222 9805 71 222 9007 71 222 9049 71 239 0808

Yellow 71 222 9818 71 222 9010 71 222 9052 71 239 0811

Green 71 222 9821 71 222 9023 71 222 9065 71 239 0824

Red 71 222 9834 71 222 9036 71 222 9078 71 239 0837

Cross section: Waffle texture Sandwich construction underneath

Available in 4 colours

The 2-in-1 Mat

4 User sinks in deeper than on conventional gymnastics mats 4 Landing properties 4 Great stability 4 Optimum shock absorption

b Sport-Thieme® “GTM 3000” Gymnastics Equipment Mat

Complies with EN 12503-1 type 3 for 6 cm and type 4 for 8 cm thick mats with landing absorption properties! This gymnastics mat has the best shock absorption properties. The core is made from VEV 120 high-quality special foam. Cover made from tear-proof, non-slip 100% Polygrip gymnastics mat material. Underside with non-slip 100% polyester gymnastics mat material. Upper and under side are glued tightly to the foam core. Square cut, in order to join mats together smoothly. With coloured carrying handles. The innovative foam used has extremely good shock absorption properties and is capable of immediately absorbing and breaking down any impact energy. Thanks to the quick build up of force, this newest development from our own factory is most suited to equipment exercises in schools. Models and product codes: see table b

Mat Properties Uses:

Top Rated

sport-thieme.com

Blue

200x100x6 71 207 7606 200x100x8 71 207 7648

Yellow

71 207 7619 71 207 7651

Exclusive to Sport-Thieme®

Test Results

Base:

Very secure dismounts when using the bouncy landing mat side EN Standard Type 4 (landing mat)

b Sport-Thieme® Gymnastics Mat “GTM 3000“

Size in cm

Users: Surface: Core:

Green

71 207 7622 71 207 7664

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

Red

71 207 7635 71 207 7677

Max. Braking Acceleration

Equipment gymnastics mat for simple dismounts Schools, clubs Polygrip glued to core VEV 120 special composite foam Gymnastics mat material glued to core

≤ 110 mm

Results GTM 3000 (8 cm) (complies with type 4) 62 mm

Sinking Depth

≤ 40 g

35 g

Rebounding Coefficient

≤ 50%

≤ 10%

271


Gymnastics Gymnastics Mats

Don’t forget to order:

4 Non-slip cover material 4 Leather corners for wear protection 4 Flame retardant foam

Gymnastics mats “Super” a and “Super P” b are heavier - for optimal handling we recommend Carry Handles c.

Mat Properties Uses:

Equipment gymnastics mat, floor gymnastics mat Users: Schools and clubs Upper surface a gymnastics mat material, b Polygrip mat material and base: Core: Composite foam

Gymnastics Mat

Manufactured to EN 12503-1, type 3. With high-quality RG 120 composite foam filling 120 kg/m³, with removable core. Can also be used as a small floor gymnastics mat. The cover has a hidden zip, made from 100% polyester textured gymnastics mat material, non-slip, washable and with leather corners, without carry handles, squared off for a flush fit when laid besides other mats. Velcro band can be attached.Don‘t forget to order: Carry Handles c. Details and product codes: see table a

b Sport-Thieme® “Super P” Gymnastics Mat

ab

a “Super” Gymnastics Mats

b “Super P” Gymnastics Mats

Cover made from 100% polyester gymnastics mat material RG 120 complies with EN Size Blue

Cover made from 100% polyester Polygrip mat material RG 120 complies with EN Blue Yellow Green Red

150x100x6 cm 150x100x8 cm 200x100x6 cm 200x100x8 cm 200x125x6 cm 200x125x8 cm

a Sport-Thieme® “Super”

71 120 4403 71 120 4429 71 120 4416 71 120 4432 71 120 4458 71 120 4445

71 207 7707 71 207 7749 71 207 7781 71 207 7824 71 207 7866 71 207 7909

71 207 7710 71 207 7752 71 207 7794 71 207 7837 71 207 7879 71 207 7912

71 207 7723 71 207 7765 71 207 7808 71 207 7840 71 207 7882 71 207 7925

71 207 7736 71 207 7778 71 207 7811 71 207 7853 71 207 7895 71 207 7938

Don’t forget to order:

de

Gymnastics mats “Special” d and “Special P” e have a higher weight - for optimal handling we recommend Carry Handles f.

4 Inner can be changed 4 In 4 bold colours

Complies with EN 12503-1 type 3. With RG 120 composite foam filling (120 kg/m³). Polygrip 100% polyester gymnastics mat material with grain embossing, 2500 N tensile resistance, 600 g/m², in bold blue, yellow, green and red. Mat material sewn all around, with leather corners, without carry handles. It has the same non-slip properties as standard mat material. Velcro bands can be attached. Don‘t forget to order: Carry Handles c. Details and product codes: see table b

c Carry Handles for Mats

Thanks to the special design of these handles, tightly fitted to the mat, there is no risk of tripping over them. They do not need to be tucked away under the mat. 4 handles per mat. 4 handles 71 120 5233  Extra price per mat

Mats abde are particularly safe:

Concealed zip reduces risk of injury!

d Sport-Thieme® “Special” Gymnastics Mat

Filled with RG 80 composite foam, blue, non-slip, washable with leather corners and without carry handles, squared-off for a flush fit when laid besides other mats. Ideal for floor exercises and very easy to transport, textured 100% polyester gymnastics mat material. It is possible to attach carry handles or a Velcro band. Don‘t forget to order: carry handles f. Details and product codes: see table d

Mat Properties

Uses: Users:

Floor exercises Schools, clubs pre-schools Upper surface d gymnastics mat material, e Polygrip mat material and base: Core: Composite foam Non-slip mat material

d “Special” Gymnastics Mats

Cover made from gymnastics mat material. 100% polyester, core RG 80 Size Blue

150x100x6 cm 150x100x8 cm 200x100x6 cm 200x100x8 cm 200x125x6 cm 200x125x8 cm

272

71 120 3309 71 120 3325 71 120 3312 71 120 3338 71 120 3354 71 120 3341

e Sport-Thieme® “Special P” Gymnastics Mat

e “Special P” Gymnastics Mats

Cover made from Polygrip mat material. 100% polyester core RG 80 Blue 71 119 2344 71 119 2386 71 119 2461 71 119 2504 71 119 2546 71 119 2588

Yellow 71 119 2357 71 119 2399 71 119 2474 71 119 2517 71 119 2559 71 119 2591

Green 71 119 2360 71 119 2403 71 119 2487 71 119 2520 71 119 2562 71 119 2605

Red 71 119 2373 71 119 2416 71 119 2490 71 119 2533 71 119 2575 71 119 2618

With RG 80 composite foam filling. The mat is made of 100% polyester embossed Polygrip material, 2500 N tear resistance, 600 g/m², in strong blue, yellow, green, and red. Handles not included. Mat material sewn all around with the same nonslip qualities as normal mat material. Velcro bands can be attached. Don‘t forget to order: Carry Handles f. Details and product codes: see table e

f Carry Handles for Mats

Thanks to the special design of these handles, tightly fitted to the mat, there is no risk of tripping over them. They do not need to be tucked away under the mat. 4 handles per mat. 71 120 5220  Extra price per mat 4 handles

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Gymnastics Mat Trolley: Full of Possibilities! Turnen ® a Sport-Thieme

Gymnastics Mat Trolley Set

Registered design. Mat trolley with 12x 100x100x6 cm gymnastics mats. RG 120 kg/m³ flame retardant composite foam core. Surface and sides are laminated with tear-proof, textured non-slip gymnastics mat material (100% polyester), blue. Underside with new extremely non-slip waffle back. As the surface is laminated, it will not wrinkle making the mat safer for gymnastics than standard mats. The adhesive used in the lamination is environmentally friendly and guarantees long lasting adhesion to the foam. Flush fit of the mats when laid next to each other thanks to their square edges. Other additions to this gymnastics mat are not possible.

And the best part: they do not need much storage space, the mats can be stored away in the smallest of spaces!

4 Compact, safe and clean mat storage 4 With practical lockable castors

The trolley has 4 non-marking castors, ø 10 cm, two of which can be locked. With lockable protective canvas cover. • Ideal for children to move around • Can be individually laid out to create 12 m² mat surfaces • Does not need much space 100x100x80 cm • Mats comply with EN12503-1 type 3 71 120 4474 Each

b Reivo® ''Safety''

Gymnastics Mat Trolley

Registered design. Mat trolley with 12 Reivo gymnastics mats 100x100x6 cm. 3 of each colour in blue, yellow, green and red. RG 120 composite foam, Polygrip mat material, 100% polyester. Using the Reivo connecting system you will get an area of 12 m² or 2 single tracks of 6x1 m. Other combinations are also possible, e.g. a 200x100 cm gymnastics mat, etc. Also includes a lockable protective cover for the mats. • Does not require much space, 100x100x80 cm for 12 gymnastics mats • Durable protective cover, prevents unauthorised use • Mat trolley has a protective padding all around to almost completely prevent injuries • 4 non-marking castors ø 10 cm, 2 of which can be locked • 12 m² of mat space to arrange as required • Ideal for children to handle • Complies with EN 12503-1 type 3 71 120 6249 Each

Reliable quality and safety: thanks to the connecting system and EN standards, these mats take away the fear of performing exercises and gymnastics routines whilst offering safety.

4 Compact, safe and tidy mat storage 4 With practical lockable castors

Gymnastics Mat Accessories d Gymnastics Mat Transport Trolley

With solid platform for better transportation and storage. With two each of rigid and swivel castors, ø 125 mm. Will support up to 400 kg. 71 122 1507 150x100 cmEach 71 122 1510 200x100 cmEach

c Velcro Fasteners

These fasteners can be used to connect several mats with each other to create a larger surface. 71 120 5103  Extra price per mat

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

273


Gymnastics Kombi Gymnastics Mat Reivo® Kombi Gymnastics Mat the Ideal Gymnastics Mat 4 Flaps covering the joining edges reduce the risk of accidents and injuries 4 Extremely slip resistant

a

Safety experts and the BAGUV* state that:

1) “There is always a gap when gymnastic mats are laid next to each other the cause of many injuries” 2) “Gymnastics mats are only secure for dismounts from a height of up to 60 cm” Reivo Kombi gymnastics mats offer optimal safety. * BAGUV = Bundesverband der Unfall-Versicherungsträger (German association of insurance companies)

a

Mat Characteristics a

Reivo® Kombi Gymnastics Mat

Complies with EN 12503-1 type 3 standards. Composite foam inner 120 kg/m3, coated in fleece. High-quality composite foam, which is very flexible due to the coating and very stable for landing on. Cover: made from strong gymnastics mat material with tear-proof, 100% polyester backing fabric that complies with EN standards. With flaps for covering joins and a concealed zip. 71 119 2009 150x100x8 cm, 17 kgEach 71 119 2012 200x100x6 cm, 18 kgEach 71 119 2025 200x100x8 cm, 23 kgEach

b Reivo® Light

4 The ideal mat for primary schools and nurseries

c Reivo® Gymnastics Mat

c

Complies with EN 12503-1, type 3. The core is made from sandwich style construction. Super light yet firm, flexible Neopolen light foam 120 kg/m³ inner which provides high elasticity yet good stability. The mats are much lighter to handle. With connecting system and a concealed zip. Available in two different covers: 1. Cover made from Polygrip mat material: 100% polyester in blue, yellow, red or green with grained embossing. Tensile strength of 2500 N, 600 g/m². The Polygrip mat material has the same non-slip characteristics as standard gymnastics mat

4 In 4 cheerful colours 4 Very tear resistant 4 Both sides made from 100% polyester

c Size 150x100x6 cm 150x100x8 cm 200x100x6 cm 200x100x8 cm

274

1. 100% polyester gymnastics mat cover Blue 71 119 2100 71 119 2113 71 119 2126 71 119 2139

Yellow 71 119 1875 71 119 1888 71 119 1891 71 119 1918

Green 71 119 1921 71 119 1934 71 119 1947 71 119 1950

Joining and fixing flaps

Blue, smooth 100% polyester gymnastics mat material upper cover

Neopolen foam filling

Joins and cover flaps

material but with a higher tensile strength. 2. Cover made from gymnastics mat material: strong 100% polyester, durable with tear-proof support fabric. Complies with EN. 150x100x6 cm, 10 kg Details and prices: see table

Mat Characteristics c 1. Cover made from 100% polyester gymnastics mat material 2. Cover made from 100% Polygrip polyester mat material

2. 100% polyester Polygrip mat material cover Blue 71 119 1833 71 119 1846 71 119 1859 71 119 1862

Core high-quality composite foam

Mat Characteristics b

Gymnastics Mat

Complies with EN 12503-1 type 3. The ideal mat for primary schools and nurseries. The Neopolen foam filling makes it light in comparison to standard mats (yet much stronger), therefore making it ideal for children to move around. With flaps to cover joins so that several mats can be connected. The upper cover is made from smooth, blue, 100% polyester gymnastics mat material whilst the underside is nonslip. Without carry handles. 71 121 3339 150x100x6 cm, 6 kgEach 71 121 3342 200x100x6 cm, 7.5 kgEach 71 121 3355 200x100x8 cm, 8.5 kgEach

b

Cover gymnastics mat material 100% polyester

Red 71 119 1963 71 119 1976 71 119 1989 71 119 1992

Joins and cover flaps

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Kombi Soft Mats Gymnastics

Soft Landing!

The “Velcro Safety System‘‘ is excellent quality and guaranteed to fulfil all functions.

a Reivo® Kombi Soft Mat

Manufactured in accordance with EN 12503-1 type 7. Core made from highquality RG 20 polyether foam. Cover made from blue, very strong 100% polyester canvas. With vent eyelets that expel the air very well when landing. 4 tear-resistant carry handles. Complete with Reivo “Velcro safety system”: integrated tear-resistant join flaps on all edges for use when connecting to other mats. 4 additional connecting flaps for joining to the Reivo Kombi landing support and Reivo Kombi landing mat. Integrated join flaps to ensure a smooth connection between the soft mats. 10 cm fleece band on top. 71 119 2214 2x3x0.25 mEach 71 119 2201 2x3x0.3 mEach

b Half Reivo® Kombi Soft Mat

Ideal for transport and storage. 2 “half” mats are the size of one standard mat. Blue. 71 119 2230 2x1.5x0.25 mEach 71 119 2227 2x1.5x0.3 mEach

Completely non-slip and seamless when joined together! The Velcro system allows for a variety of great combinations!

ab

Benefits of Reivo® Kombi Soft Mats

• Integrated loops and flaps for compactly connecting any number of soft mats. This means that there is no need for fleece bands and loose flaps. Fixing loops cannot be used as carrying handles. • You can combine a Kombi Soft Mat with a landing mat to change it from a point-elastic to an area-elastic mat. • With “Velcro safety system” • Landing mat to prevent rotation fractures

The “Half” Reivo® Kombi Soft Mat

Compact connection of mats, next to or on top of each other

Seamless joining and connecting flaps

• High-quality,  RG 20 spe- Loops for attaching Reivo® Kombi Soft Mat combined with cial flexible foam filling landing surfaces and Reivo® Reivo® Kombi Landing Mat landing mats without any joins for a safe • 1 00% polyester blue canpositioning vas cover

2 individual mats (standard size 200x300x50 cm)

Seamless joins

Locking mat attachment, fast and safe

c Reivo® Kombi “Super” Soft Mat

Tip

In high jump, for safety reasons, the landing area should be at least 300x400 cm.

Mat inner: high quality polyether foam with air chamber system (therefore super soft). Mat cover: 100% polyester canvas material - underside is 100% polyester gymnastics mat material. 100% polyester mesh material on the sides of the mat ensures the air is expelled very well when landing.

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

Includes “Velcro safety system”: integrated, tear-resistant sewn-in cover and edge flaps on all sides ensuring connection to other mats is smooth. With additional fixing straps (not included), the locking mat can be securely attached. Upper has an all round 20 cm fleece band. 200x300x50 cm. 71 119 4803 Each

Mat d Locking Locking mats (support for 2 soft

mats). Locking mat inner: high quality polyether foam (solid). Locking mat cover: upper made from special, 100% polyester mesh fabric - spike proof. Underside made from non-slip, 100% polyester. 400x300x10 cm. Not illustrated. 71 119 4829 Each

275


Gymnastics Soft Mats

b a

b Sport-Thieme® Foldable Soft a Sport-Thieme® Foldable Soft Mat

Ideal for high jump training. Stores away in the smallest areas. Consists of polyether foam block inner. Upper cover is 100% polyester, cover underside is non-slip 100% polyester with ventilating holes, zip

Gymnastics Mat

This type of soft mat is ideal as a huge gymnastics mat when opened up and, and carry handles. Size 1: 3x2x0.25 m, fol- to save space, can also be used as a soft ded: 1.5x2x0.5 m, Size 2: 3x2x0.3 m, folmat when folded. ded: 1.5x2x0.6 m. Size when folded: 150x200x30 cm; ope71 120 5419 Size 1Each ned: 300x200x15 cm. Upper side 100% 71 120 5406 Size 2Each polyester non-slip gymnastics mat mate-

rial. While the other half is covered with 100% polyester canvas. It is a combination of gymnastics mat and soft mat. Core: RG 23/35 foam, 4 carrying loops (all around cover) without leather corners, with side air holes. 71 120 5448 Each

Reivo® Multi Mat Exclusive to Sport-Thieme®

Gymnastics mountain

Gymnastics hill

Non-slip mat

Gymnastics slope

Goal for hockey, handball and football

c Reivo® Multi-Functional Mat Jumping track

Gymnastics landscape

276

Gymnastics area, soft mat

Hill & valley

A soft mat that can be folded over twice, with Velcro and fleece band. This multi-purpose mat is great because it can be used in so many different ways, including: • Gymnastics hills in many variations • Gymnastics landscapes • Gymnastics tracks • 2x3  m goal (2 mats) • 1.5x1  m mini goal • 2x1  m mini hockey goal • Impact protection • With a non-slip band

The RG 20 foam has been made pollutant-free. The middle section and cover are of 100% polyester smooth canvas material, with carrying handles, Velcro straps on the corners and 2 connecting Velcro bands. Size 200x150x25 cm, when folded 100x150x50 cm. 71 120 1909 Each

Don’t forget to order: Varianta Vaulting Boxes, page 256

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Turnen

A real winner !

refore the gle piece foam core: the 4 Strong cover with sin t, ma ly into the user will not sink deep in the middle art ap t ma the pushing cover the 4 Wrapped core within it gets delivered te nu mi 4 Ready to use the With special high-quality, flexible foam filling 100% polyester blue canvas cover Underneath: non-slip 100% polyester gymnastics mat material

With practical carry handles

ab ®

® t a Sport-ThiemeMaSof t

Gymnastics

type 7. Complies with EN 12503-1 ty in gymFor the highest level of safe ection nastics, especially as fall prot the body in schools and clubs when mat. For comes into contact with the with condismounting from equipment also recomtrolled landings we would

Soft Mat

rt-Thieme b Spo Manufactured to EN 12503-1

tration type 8. Same features as illus a. However the foam core has a net 0x30 cm, weight of 22 kg/m³. 300x20 not illustrated. Each 71 120 5901 

landing mat mend laying a floor mat or a secure on top of the mat to ensure quality, positioning. Filled with high is made of r Cove 20. RG , foam ble flexi with air blue 100% polyester canvas de. The ersi und -slip non a and s vent dles. mat comes with 4 carry han

Soft Mat Accessories

Each 71 119 8010 1.5x1x0.25 m Each 71 119 8007 2x1.5x0.3 m Each m 5 x0.2 3x2 3 802 119 71 Each 71 119 8049 3x2x0.30 m Each m 0 x0.4 3x2 5 806 71 119 Each 71 119 8036 3.5x2x0.30 m Each  m 0 x0.6 4x3 2 805 71 119

d Sport-Thieme® Wall Fastening Strap

For soft mats and landing mats. Polypropylene strap, 5 cm wide, with metal fastening which attaches to the front of the mat. Adjustable strap, eyelets at both ends. With screws and dowels for attaching to wall. 71 120 5305 4 mEach 71 120 5321 5 mEach

Order Information

mat 71 119 8052 Due to its oversize, soft s, i.e. the cover part 2 in lied supp will be separately. ped ship be will and core

e

d

e Protective Mat Corners

4 ball bearing mounted castors

c Sport-Thieme Mat Trolley with Platform ®

The solid platform provides a better way of transporting and storing mats. With 4 smoothly running ball bearing mounted castors, ø 50 mm, approx. 300x100 cm. Galvanised steel frame. Height with mat 210 cm. Belts straps with snap hooks and adjustable figure of 8 hook for securing the mats. 71 122 1015 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

Patent number 102004039795. To dramatically extend the lifespan of your mats and landing areas. No more bends or cuts as the pressure is spread over a large area. Simple to attach to any 5 cm strap. Flexible plastic. 20x10x5 cm. 71 120 5507 Pair

Set Protection Set f Mat The set consists of:

• 1 wall fastening strap 4 m d • 1 pair of protective mat corners e 71 120 5510 Set

Set

f

g Anti-Slip Underlay for Gymnastic Mats

For the secure positioning of playing blocks, soft landing mats or other equipment. Both sides have a waffletextured surface, 190x95 cm. 71 119 6809 Each

h Anti-Slip Underlay

g

For super soft landing mats and soft mats. 3x0.96 m. 71 119 7105-1 Each

277


2 in 1: the Kombi Reversible Mat: Turnen

A landing mat and soft mat in one!

4 2 in 1 - the mat with 2 sides 4 The ideal mat for school, club and competitive sports 4 Skin friendly needle felt cover - securely glued to the core: no wrinkling

a Landing Mat

Soft Mat Canvas upper surface 100% polyester

Flexible soft floor side made from highquality polyether foam for uncontrolled landings.

Flat, flexible landing side for stable standing when jumping

Needle felt cover on upper surface

The mat has been manufactured complying with EN 12503–1 type 4 a nd 7 standards

Flat, flexible landing side for stable standing when jumping

Variable „non-slip system“

Wrong side for landing

Joining and fixing band

a Reivo Kombi Reversible ®

Mat

Sandwich construction style core: The universal mat for school sports. One side is a flat, flexible landing mat with needle fleece cover and light foam inner. The other side is a soft mat made from high-quality polyether foam (RG 20). Top and sides are made from coated 100% polyester tear-resistant material (3000 N/5 cm), weight 680 g/m², with 10 cm wide fleece band, 6 tear-proof carrying handles and air vents. The “non-slip band” (width 90 cm) is attached, similar to a hinge, to the side of the mat ensuring the mat can be made non-slip when required. Size: 300x200x30 cm. 71 119 4601 Each

278

b Joining and

Fixing Bands

Seamless joins one behind the other with the fixing band

Advantages • Landing and soft mats compactly combined into one mat! • Low purchase costs • Takes up less space • Sport-Thieme Velcro safety system • Produced in an environmentally friendly manner • Non-slip mat cover on both sides • Seamless Velcro connecting strips • High-quality needle felt cover which complies with EN 12503-6

• These mats are recommended by accident insurance experts! • There are no creases in the cover. The risk of accidents is therefore greatly reduced.

racteristics: 1. lt must be as soft as a soft mat. 2. Its density and surface flexibility must be like a landing mat, i.e. spreading the load evenly on the entire mat.

teristics is: The Reivo® Kombi Reversible Mat.

In contrast to other mats, the Reivo Kombi Reversible Mat has the safety feature both EN standards and the BAGUV consider an indispensable safety prerequisite: the “Non-Slip Base”.

For securely joining two Sport-Thieme Kombi Reversible Mats together. Important: a joining and fixing band is only necessary if there is more than one mat. The joining and fixing bands are approx. Safety experts and BAGUV* have established that: 3.50 m long and approx. 30 cm wide. 71 119 4702 Each An ideal mat must have the following cha- The ideal sports mat with these charac-

Don’t forget to order: Reivo® Mat Trolley, on page 273

* BAGUV = Bundesverband der UnfallVersicherungsträger (German association of insurance companies)

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Landing Mats Gymnastics Sport-Thieme® Landing Mat 4 12 + 15 cm thick mats: comply with EN 12503-1 type 4 and 5 4 20 cm thick mats: comply with EN 12503-1 type 6

® a Sport-Thieme Landing Mat

Complies with EN12503-1 type 6 (20 cm thick) or type 4 and 5 (12 + 15 cm thick). These mats prevent the user from sinking deep into the mat upon landing, they provide great posture support and therefore prevent fractures and sprains. You should not be without this product. A special sandwich design construction, wide reinforced edges stabilising the mat with composite foam and properties to spread the load evenly across the whole mat. The upper velour surface is securely glued to the core. Sides 100% polyester canvas with ventilation holes and a zip on three sides. Non-slip base and Velcro connections on the edges guarantee that you have the best product. 71 119 2780 200x100x12 cmEach 71 119 2777 200x100x15 cmEach 71 119 2810 200x125x8 cmEach 71 119 2807 200x100x8 cmEach 71 119 2764 200x125x12 cmEach 71 119 2751 200x125x15 cmEach 71 119 2748 200x125x20 cmEach 71 119 2735 200x150x12 cmEach 71 119 2793 300x200x8 cmEach 71 119 2722 300x200x12 cmEach 71 119 2719 300x200x15 cmEach 71 119 2706 300x200x20 cmEach

ab Includes Velcro band for the best way to connect the mats

Recommendation

Insurance companies recommend buying landing mats to prevent sports injuries.

b Sport-Thieme Landing Mat ®

Complies with EN12503-1 type 4 and 5. The economic variation for schools. Upper side bright blue needle fleece, 100% polyester canvas on the sides, underside 100% polyester gymnastics mat material. With Velcro corners for attaching to other mats. Sandwich structured mat with reinforced edges. The mat has good stability, increased shock absorption and spreads to

load evenly across the entire mat providing rotational freedom. There is a 2 year guarantee against tearing. 71 119 2881 200x100x12 cmEach 71 119 2878 200x100x15 cmEach

71 119 2865 71 119 2852 71 119 2849 71 119 2836 71 119 2823

200x125x15 cmEach 200x150x12 cmEach 300x200x12 cmEach 300x200x15 cmEach 300x200x20 cmEach

c Sport-Thieme® Super Soft Landing Mat

A great value for money alternative with a special sandwich construction. The yellow side is made of 100% polyester canvas and filled with 50 mm light foam which is very firm for a secure positioning. The blue side is filled with 25 cm EN standard polyether foam, to be used as a soft floor mat. For additional safety we recommend the nonslip underlay. Size: 300x200x30 cm. 71 119 7004 Each

PU foam core bonded to PE foam

c

Yellow side made from canvas 100% polyester

d Anti-Slip Underlay

For super soft landing mats and soft mats. 300x96 cm. 71 119 7105 Each

e e Spieth “Happy Landing” Soft Mat

Low impact soft floor mat to be laid on top of landing mat. Cover made of PVC material and 100% polyester gymnastics mat material. Can be used on both sides. Core made from special soft PU foam. Authorised thickness for women: 5 cm, thickness for men: 10 cm. 71 120 3905 200x200x5 cm Each 71 120 3918 200x200x10 cmEach 71 120 3921 400x200x10 cmEach

Non-slip underlay

Special soft foam core

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

279


Gymnastics Sport-Thieme® Floor Gymnastics Mats Sport-Thieme® Training Mat 4 Can be used as gymnastics floor area 4 PE foam with skin-friendly needle felt 4 Manufactured in accordance with EN 12503-1 type 2 standards

The gymnastics mats are glued using a heating procedure that bonds skin-friendly needle felt to a PE foam

a

a Sport-Thieme® Training Mat

The ideal training and exercise partner for beginners‘ training sessions on the balance beam, next to the balance beam or gymnastics benches, for floor gymnastics, as an additional mat at the end of an acrobatics track or as a lining for soft mats. These are just a few examples how this mat can be used. Skin-friendly needle felt which is highly abrasion proof and heat sealed to the PE foam.

4 Easy to transport 4 Stacks well

4 Seamless joins

b Velcro Strips

For lightweight mats and surfaces. With the strips, single mats can be seamlessly joined together on any side. 5 cm wide. Brown. 71 119 6001  12 m

To join several mats together we recommend using our Velcro bands. Amber. 71 120 6207 200x100x3.5 cm, 4 kgEach 71 120 6210 200x150x3.5 cm, 6 kgEach

c Transport Trolley for Gymnastics Mats

c

With solid platform, therefore protects mats during storage and transportation. With two rigid and two swivel castors ø 125 mm. Carries up to 400 kg. For mat size 200x100 cm. 71 122 1510-1 Each

d

The Innovative Floor Gymnastics Carpet With numerous uses: simply roll it out and you‘re ready to go!

e Flexi-Roll Floor

Gymnastics Mat

d

Sport-Thieme® ''Innovative'' Gymnastics Carpet

Uses: • P.E. lessons • Gymnastics • Cheerleading • Tumbling • Acrobatics • Games carpet

Advantages: This roll-out mat is characterised by the new technology used in its production, which gives it huge advantages over conventional rolling mats:

280

• Rolling up and out are child‘s play and can be carried out by 1 person • No need to turn the mats over any more • The carpet is well protected against dirt • No mat roller necessary • Saves space • Saves time • Innovative • Amber, 35 mm thick 71 119 6447 6x2 mEach 71 119 6450 12x2 mEach

The floor gymnastics mat that rolls out The new production technology for these Flexi-Roll mats has many advantages for daily use: • Suitable for schools and clubs • Easy to use • No need for a mat roller • Does not require much space • Carpet is protected by the new rolling method Made from 40 mm thick special foam with blue needle fleece velour glued on. 71 119 6476 6x2 mEach 71 119 6489 12x2 mEach 71 119 6492 14x2 mEach

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Sport-Thieme® Gymnastics Mats, Accessories Gymnastics

4 No burns 4 No grazes 4 Needle felt 4 35 mm thick mat thick complying with 12503-1: type 2

a Sport-Thieme® Floor

Gymnastics Mats and “Super” Floor Mats

Amber-coloured needle felt cover with a light foam core, resistant PE foam. For school and club sports, floor gymnastics and also lining for soft mats when using gymnastics equipment.

b Sport-Thieme® Light Floor Gymnastics Mat 12x12 m

Set of 6 lengths of 12x2 m or 8 lengths of 12x1.5 m with wooden rollers. Delivery includes Velcro strap and buckle. 71 119 6418 25 mmEach 71 119 6421 35 mmEach

Minimum order: 3 m length. Price per m² 25 mm c Sport-Thieme® Light Floor 71 119 7509 Width: 150 cmm² Gymnastics Mat, 14x14 m 71 119 7512 Width: 200 cmm² Consisting of 7 lengths, 14x2 m, thickness 35 mm 35 mm, including wooden roller, 71 119 7600 Width: 150 cmm² Velcro band and buckle straps. 71 119 7613 Width: 200 cmm² 71 119 6434 Each

Also available in blue upon request.

Floor Mat Trolleys and Accessories

Fastening Straps

Vertical Trolley

e

d

Wooden Mat Roller

f

d Sport-Thieme®

Vertical Trolley

For upright transport of a single, rolled, floor gymnastics mat. The upright positioning of the mats provides more space in equipment rooms. Can support up to 150 kg. Size of the supporting base 35x20 cm. 71 122 1129 Each

h

g f Sport-Thieme® Wooden Mat

g Sport-Thieme®

Transport Trolley

h Sport-Thieme®

Transport Trolley

For gymnastics flooring and mats, made Roller Carries 2 or 3 rolled gymnastics mats. Var- from steel tubing, approx. 140x110 cm with e Buckle Straps For floor gymnastics mats of all types Essential for floor gymnastics mats. Makes nished frame with 4 double castors, ø 75 4 double castors, ø 75 mm, for rolled up up to 14 m in length, with practical belt transport and handling easier. Extends the mm. For 1.5 m - 2 m wide mats. 140x190 floor gymnastics mats. With a 140x61 cm fastening which prevents the mat from lifespan of your mats. cm. With 140x140 cm MDF board to protect MDF board for protecting the mat against unravelling. 71 119 6102 1.5 m longEach the mat from pressure points. pressure marks. 71 119 6304 Each 71 119 6115 2.0 m longEach 71 122 1116 Each 71 122 1103 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

281


Gymnastics Mats Practical and space saving!

Folding exercise mats save a lot of space: a giant mat can easily be converted into a handy underlay!

a b

Great Value!

Exercise Mat

This handy folding mat is made from SPE foam. The material does not age or crumble and will not absorb moisture. The upper side is made from a skin friendly material (60% polyester/40% viscose) while the underside is non-slip. Approx. 145x60x0.8 cm, transport and storage size approx. 35x60 cm, blue. 71 127 1300 Each

b Sirex® “Therapy Plus”

4 Knobbly structure makes the surface easy to grip

Buy Now!

a Sport-Thieme® Foldable

4T  he handy folding mat 4 F olds down to 35x60 cm Convenient folding

Structured surface

Foldable Exercise Mat

This folding mat is suitable for floor exercises and for use in water. The closed cell material prevents the absorption of moisture, dirt and bacteria. The textured surface is extremely robust and easy to clean. Very good buoyancy in water. Particularly hygienic and skin friendly and can be folded down 6 times to save space. This mat comes in green, with 2 stretch bands. 71 125 7700 Approx. 190x60x1.5 cmEach 71 125 7713 Approx. 190x100x1.5 cmEach

New!

4 Non-slip 4 Antimicrobial 4 Spit and sweat proof

4 Ideal  flooring for early learning groups

c Rollable Games and Exercise Mat

“Flockan“ is the ideal flooring material for toddlers‘ areas. • The vinyl mat is very durable and easy to cut • The material insulates against cold floors, is skin friendly and non-slip • The textured surface is easy to clean and extremely resistant

• Its sanitized finish provides a long lasting and reliable protection against bacterial and fungal infections • LxWxH: approx. 400x125x1 cm, approx. 12 kg • Colour: sky blue Also available in other lengths and widths (max. width available 1.25 m). 71 125 2705 400x125x1 cmEach 71 125 2718 Per square metrem²

d

New! Everroll® “Floorworks” does not absorb any moisture. Further-

Exercise Mat

The sports mat for high demands. In terms of elasticity, size and cover the mat has been designed to meet the needs of sports people. It consists of medium grade composite foam. This guarantees a secure positioning and grip when performing standing exercises. The light cover surface is antimicrobial, spit and sweat proof and

more the non-slip, grippy surface is easy to clean and flame retardant. The exercise mat will securely remain in place thanks to its non-slip underside. Great as an individual mat or even as an interlocking Tatami mat. LxWxH: approx. 100x75x2.5 cm, approx. 5.5 kg. 71 125 3203 CobaltEach 71 125 3216 RedEach

Mat Storage 4 Height  adjustable on both sides 4 For  up to 35 mats

e Exercise Mat Storage Trolley

The sturdy design for transporting hanging exercise mats. Very stable as made from steel. The hanging bars can be individually adjusted to either 120 or 180 cm. The spikes are also adjustable to any width up to a max. of 80 cm eyelet spacing. Suitable for all Sport-Thieme exercise mats with eyelets. This trolley will transport up to 35x 9 mm thick or 25x 15 mm thick mats thanks to the large durable castors. Assembled size (WxDxH): approx. f Mat Transport Trolley 80x70x194 cm. Mats not included. Perfect storage for mats with a width 71 126 4920 Each of up to 85 cm. This practical transport device takes up to 20 mats and keeps

282

4 10 hanging bars 4 For up to 20 mats your equipment room tidy. Assembled size: (WxDxH:) 126x90x120 cm. Mats not included. 71 126 4917 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


The Sport-Thieme® Exercise Mat Gymnastik 4 Extremely resilient 4 Easy to clean 4 Especially hygienic 4 Insulates against cold floors and is gentle on the skin a

Dista nc eyele e between ts: 50 cm

Textured surface

a

Set

Sport-Thieme® “Fit&Fun” Exercise Mat

This modern exercise mat will meet the highest demands at a low price. Exercises on 10 mm thick vinyl foam, developed using the latest research. • Textured surface – extremely robust and easy to clean • Very resilient and hygienic • Insulates against the cold and is skin friendly • Sanitized finish, reliable and permanent protection against bacteria and fungal infections

Mat Storage

® b Sport-Thieme “Fit&Fun”

Exercise Mats Set

• Each mat has two hanging eyelets for simple storage Approx. 120x60x1.0 cm 71 127 4107 BlueEach 71 127 4110 RedEach Approx. 180x60x1.0 cm 71 127 4208 BlueEach 71 127 4211 RedEach

The set consists of: • 10 Sport-Thieme exercise mats, approx. 180x60x1 cm, in a choice of red or blue a • 1 hanging rail c for exercise mats with 2 eyelets Mat set, blue 71 127 4309 Set Mat set, red 71 127 4312 Set

Set Buy Now!

4 Individually adjustable hooks

For mats with 4 eyelets

c Sport-Thieme® Hanging

System for Exercise Mats

New design with individually adjustable hooks. Suitable for all Sport-Thieme exercise mats with eyelets. Enough storage space for approx. 20x 10 mm thick or for approx. 13x 15 mm thick mats. Aluminium wall bar, stainless steel hooks, approx. 25 cm long, ø 1.2 cm. Includes fixtures and fittings for wall mounting. Mats not included. Designs: • For mats with 2 eyelets, approx. 90 cm long

For mats with 2 eyelets

d Sport-Thieme® Hanging Unit for Exercise Mats

Stationary hanging rail, made from metal for clearly arranged storage of up to 15 • For mats with 4 eyelets, approx. 120 exercise mats. You can also store skipping cm long ropes on the rail. Fixtures and fittings for 71 126 8007 For mats with 2 eyeletsEach wall assembly are included. Equipment 71 126 8023 For mats with 4 eyeletsEach shown not included.

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

• For mats up to a width of max. 70 cm: (WxDxH): approx. 95x44x50 cm • For mats up to a width of max. 120 cm (WxDxH): approx. 145x47x50 cm For mats with a width of up to 70 cm 71 126 8603 Each For mats with a width of up to 120 cm 71 126 8629 Each

283


Gymnastik 9 different colours:

Airex® Mats

A high-quality, versatile branded product with excellent product characteristics! • Made from closed-cell special foam that is resistant to dirt and water • Very skin friendly, hygienic and feels warm to the body • Optimal shock absorption • Latex free • Sanitized finish • Easy to roll up • Easy to clean • Can be used in water • Suitable for club and school sports, rehabilitation and physiotherapy as well as water therapy

New!

c “Coronella” d “Coronella 200” with special eyelets

The new generation of mats - AIREX® Premium Line

The new Airex Premium Line exercise mats combine quality with new, comfortable characteristics. With a length of 2 m, the Premium Line mats offer more exercise opportunities and new uses. The new inner material improves their durability, increases their hygiene protection and expands the life span of the mat. The improved hygiene formula ensures pathogens and even the aggressive MRSA bacteria have no chance to develop on the Airex mats. Modern colours offer variety and look great in all fitness and workout rooms.

a i

4 Latex free 4 Excellent absorption 4 Tested CE quality

Airex® Exercise Mats Description a “Fitline 140“ b ”Firline 180“

Size LxWxH Number approx. in cm of Eyelets 140x58x1.0 – 180x58x1.0

Weight Corners rounded approx. 1.2 kg

Users gym, club

Aqua Blue 71 127 0509

rounded approx. 1.2 kg

gym, club

71 127 0512

185x60x1.5 185x60x1.5 d ”Coronella 200“ 200x60x1.5 200x60x1.5 e “Coronita“ 200x80x1.5 f ”Corona“ 185x100x1.5 g “Corona 200“ 200x100x1.5 h ”Hercules“ 200x100x2.5

– 2 – 2 – – – –

– approx. 40 cm – approx. 40 cm – – – –

i “Atlas“

c “Coronella“

284

200x125x1.5

New!

Eyelet Spacing –

approx. 2.2 kg school sports, approx. 2.2 kg gym, club approx. 4 kg school sports, gym, club approx. 4 kg gym, club approx. 4 kg approx. 3.8 kg gym, club gym, club approx. 4 kg approx. 6.6 kg rehabilitation physiotherapy squared approx. 5.5 kg rehabilitation physiotherapy

rounded rounded rounded rounded rounded rounded rounded squared

Blue

Green

Red

71 126 9606 71 126 9619 71 126 9622 71 126 9202 71 126 9215 71 126 9228 71 109 0000 71 126 9707 71 126 9710 71 126 9723 71 126 9808 71 126 9811

Slate

New! Platinum

New! Terracotta

71 108 9905 71 108 9918 71 108 9921 71 109 0101 71 109 0114 71 109 0127 71 108 9804 71 108 9817 71 108 9820

71 127 0310 71 127 0323

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Gymnastik 3 different colours:

Sport-Thieme® Mats

High-quality exercise mats for use in therapy, rehabilitation, workouts and for leisure. • Closed-cell special foam, dirt and water-repellent • Skin friendly, sweat and saliva proof • Anti-bacterial protection - reliable and durable protection against bacteria and fungal infestation • Can be used on both sides, warm under the body and insulated against the cold floor • Easy to roll up, light and handy • Strong with a long lifespan • Easy to clean with lukewarm water and a mild cleaning agent • Can be used in water

a Exercise Mat Strap

To transport rolled-up exercise mats more easily. Suitable for all exercise mats up to 180 cm long. 100% polypropylene. 71 125 9009 Each

Set

b Sport-Thieme® “Club 15” Exercise Mat Set

The set consists of: • 10 Sport-Thieme exercise mats, approx. 180x60x1.5 cm, with eyelets, available in blue, red or anthracite b • 1 hanging rack, page 469 c, for exercise mats with 2 eyelets Mat set, blue 71 187 5108 Set

Great Value!

Buy Now!

Set Mat set, red 71 187 5111 Set

4 Optimal protection 4 Long lasting 4 Antibacterial foam 4 Latex free

Set Mat set, anthracite 71 187 5124 Set

c

New! Movivit “Gym 15”

Exercise Mat Set

The set consists of: • 10 Sport-Thieme exercise mats, approx. 190x80x1.5 cm, with eyelets, blue f • 1 hanging rail, page 455 c, for exercise mats with 2 eyelets 71 187 6909 Set

Sport-Thieme® Gymnastics Mats Description d “Basic” “Basic 10” “Basic 15” “Basic 15” with eyelets e “Club” “Club 10” “Club 15” “Club 15” with eyelets f “Gym” New! “Gym 15” “Gym 15” with eyelets g “Studio” “Studio 15” “Studio 15” with eyelets h “Therapy” “Therapy 25”

Buy Now! Top Rated

sport-thieme.com

Dimensions

Material thickness

Number of eyelets

Distance between eyelets

Corners

Weight

Users

Blue

Red

Anthracite

approx. approx. approx.

approx. approx. approx.

– – 2

– – 48 cm

rounded rounded rounded

1.14 kg 1.40 kg 1.46 kg

children’s gymnastics, recreational, camping

71 187 4105 71 187 4307 71 187 4701

71 187 4118 71 187 4310 71 187 4714

71 187 4121 71 187 4323 71 187 4727

approx. approx. approx.

approx. approx. approx.

– – 2

– – 48 cm

rounded rounded rounded

1.40 kg 1.71 kg 1.77 kg

school sports, gyms, clubs

71 187 4206 71 187 4408 71 187 4802

71 187 4219 71 187 4411 71 187 4815

71 187 4222 71 187 4424 71 187 4828

approx. approx.

approx. approx.

– 2

– 48 cm

rounded rounded

3.60 kg 3.66 kg

gyms, clubs

71 187 5906 71 187 6404

approx. approx.

approx. approx.

– 4

– 48/12/48 cm

rounded rounded

3.20 kg 4.00 kg

gyms, clubs

71 187 4509 71 187 4903

71 187 4512 71 187 4916

approx.

approx.

squared

4.40 kg

71 187 4600

71 187 4613

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

rehabilitation and therapy

285


Gymnastik

A real winner !

4 Versatile 4 Exceptionally hygien ic 4 Latex free

Great Value!

Buy Now!

Safety embossing on the surface

a ''Comfort'' Exercise Mat

An easy care exercise mat made from high-quality soft foam , approx. 8 mm thick. Special design for schools, clubs, home use and therape utic exercise. The special surface stru cture prevents the skin sticking upo n contact. • P articularly hygienic beca use of the

g cin spa let Eye cm 80

50

and

closed-cell structure and spe cial foam • Non-slip base • Rounded edges, good ene rgy absorption, insulating Approx. 180x65x0.8 cm • Latex free material Approx. 180x100x0.8 cm 71 127 1603 Blue • With eyelets; eyelet spacing : 50 cm (65 cm 71 127 1616 Green Each 71 127 1704 Blue mat width) 80 cm (100 cm Each mat width) 71 127 1629 Red Each 71 127 1717 GreenEach Each 71 127 1720 Red Each

Sport-Thieme® Medica Mats Large, wide, strong – an extremely robust, versatile exercise mat. The ideal mat for daily use! Perfect for all age groups!

4 Kind to the skin 4 Special hygienic protection 4 Latex free

Sport-Thieme® Medica Mats

Extremely robust, versatile therapy mats. The ideal alternative for daily use! Suitable for all age groups! • Made from skin friendly, special closed-cell foam • Water resistant and insulates from the cold • Extended lifespan thanks to a special manufacturing process • Hygienic, washable surface • Latex free • Uses: exercising and workouts, therapeutic exercise, rehabilitation or physiotherapy

286

b Sport-Thieme® “Classic” Medica Mats

c Sport-Thieme® “Classic XL” Medica Mats

Approx. 187.5x57.5x1.1 cm Approx. 187.5x97.5x1.1 cm 71 126 9000 BlueEach 71 127 0408 BlueEach 71 126 9013 GreenEach 71 127 0411 GreenEach Approx. 187.5x57.5x2.8 cm Approx. 187.5x97.5x2.8 cm 71 126 9101 BlueEach 71 127 0600 BlueEach

High foam density

Don’t forget to order: Resistance Bands, page 296

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Gymnastics Balls, Bean Bags Gymnastics a Sport-Thieme® High Gloss Gymnastics Ball “300”

• Very good bounce • Non-slip • Flexible • Holds shape well, robust • Can be used in water • Valve tightly bonded, good seal • ø 16.5 cm, 300 g 71 109 3807-2 BlueEach 71 109 3810-2 YellowEach 71 109 3823-2 GreenEach 71 109 3836-2 PinkEach 71 109 3849-2 RedEach

Great Value!

Buy Now!

b Sport-Thieme® High Gloss

Competition Gymnastics Ball “420 FIG”

• Official competition gymnastics ball with FIG certification • Shape-retaining, robust • Very good bounce • Valve tightly bonded, good seal • Can be used in water • Non-slip • Meets highest demands • ø 19 cm, 420 g 71 109 3908-1 BlueEach 71 109 3911-1 YellowEach 71 109 3924-1 GreenEach 71 109 3937-1 PinkEach 71 109 3940-1 RedEach

Bean Bags

c Sport-Thieme®

d Sport-Thieme®

Ideal for gripping and throwing exercises. These high-quality durable bags are made from 100% cotton (195 g/m²). The hygienic filling is made from fine balls of plastic granulate and encourages tactile stimulation. Comfortable and soft to handle. Odour free, can be washed up to 30 °C. (wash with similar colours). 120 g, approx. 15x10 cm 71 126 6304-2 BlueEach 71 126 6317-2 YellowEach 71 126 6320-2 GreenEach 71 126 6333-2 RedEach

The natural filling in the bags is made from dried beans. The soft 100% cotton material (195 g/m²) is pleasant to touch and very durable. 120 g, approx. 15x10 cm 71 126 6708-2 BlueEach 71 126 6711-2 YellowEach 71 126 6724-2 GreenEach 71 126 6737-2 RedEach

Washable Bean Bags

500 g, approx. 20x15 cm 71 126 6405-2 BlueEach 71 126 6418-2 YellowEach 71 126 6421-2 GreenEach 71 126 6434-2 RedEach Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Contains individual parts that may be swallowed. Danger of suffocation.

Sets

Bean Bags

Bean Bags

Bean bags develop movement and perception. There are many uses for these bags: Grasp them with hands and feet, throw and catch them, balance them on the head, sort them by colours and sizes, display shapes and figures with them.

4 Pleasantly soft 4 120 g and 500 g

500 g, approx. 20x15 cm 71 126 6809-2 BlueEach 71 126 6812-2 YellowEach 71 126 6825-2 GreenEach 71 126 6838-2 RedEach Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Contains individual parts that may be swallowed. Danger of suffocation.

Don’t forget to order:

Plastic granulate or bean filling

Numbered Bean Bags, on page 337

e Set of 4 Sport-Thieme® Bean Bags

The set consists of 4 bean bags with natural or plastic granulate filling in 120 g or 500 g, 1 of each colour (blue, yellow, green and red). Washable, 120 g, approx. 15x10 cm

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

71 124 7507-1 

Set of 4

Natural, 120 g, approx. 15x10 cm 71 124 7608-1 

Set of 4

Washable, 500 g, appprox. 20x15 cm 71 124 7709-1  Set of 4

Natural, 500 g, approx. 20x15 cm 71 124 7800-1  Set of 4 Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Contains individual parts that may be swallowed. Danger of suffocation.

287


Gymnastics Skipping Ropes, Tug of War e bc

f

b Soft Fibre Skipping Rope

d Swing Rope Made from

With knots at the end and reinforced middle section. 71 125 9706 2.50 mEach 71 125 9504 2.80 mEach

Triple woven, reinforced middle section, with looped ends and snap hooks. 71 126 0801 5 mEach 71 126 0814 8 mEach

(Triple Woven)

a Swing Rope

d

Natural Hemp

Swinging & skipping Woven rope made from a soft synthetic fibre with a particularly strong snap hook and swivel clasp. You only need one person c Soft Fibre Skipping Rope e Skipping Rope With wooden handles and swivel to swing. Rope with looped end and rein(4 Thread) handle. Particularly strong quality. 2.80 forced middle section. Length 5 m. MateStrong quality, with knots at the ends. m long. rial: 100% polypropylene. Reinforced middle section, 2.8 m long. 71 126 0902 Each 71 125 9605 Each 71 125 9908 Each

f Competition Skipping Rope

Made from woven natural hemp of even thickness. 3.00 m long with knots at the ends. 71 125 9403 10 mm thickEach 71 125 9302 13 mm thickEach

4 With a reel for rolling up quickly

h Sport-Thieme® Exercise Rope

Many uses, covered rubber cable for exercises and games. Looped at ends. This ® Sport-Thieme g cord will stretch by approx. 50% at maxiDouble Dutch Rope mum stretch, ø 6 mm. Comes with reel so Skipping fun for groups with it can be rolled up quickly. approx. 4.8 m long ropes. 71 125 8602 8 mEach 71 126 2009 Cotton, approx. 300 gPair 71 125 8615 10 mEach 71 126 2100 Plastic, approx. 257 gPair 71 125 8628 12 mEach

i Magic Cord

Ideal for group activities in schools and clubs. This special exercise rope consists of elastic rubber and is suitable for a variety of exercises. Comes with exercise instructions. 71 126 0609 8 mEach 71 126 0612 10 mEach

Tug of War

j

New! Sport-Thieme®

Pull Ball

Tug of war but not with a rope. Up to 6 people can pull or tug or spin around the ball at the same time and let new ideas develop. Develops social interaction and breaks down aggression. ø 55 cm. 71 204 7007-1 Each

Hard fibres

k m Rhythmic Scarves (Chiffon Scarves)

Made from hard wearing, lightweight 100% polyamide. For rhythmically swinging, shaking and for slow routines, 65x65 cm. Hemmed edges. Assorted colours. Washable up to 30°C. 71 136 0208-1  Set of 3

k Sport-Thieme® Tug of War Rope

For sports and leisure. This rope is in a hemp effect design, comes with a centre mark and plastic end caps. All outdoor ropes have a high resistance to rotting. The soft fibre in the centre is easily gripped and supple. The Sport-Thieme range will have the perfect rope for your needs. We will deliver in other lengths or strengths if required. Hard fibre, for outdoor use 71 124 9200-1 L: 10 m, ø 20 mmEach 71 124 9213-1 L: 12 m, ø 25 mmEach 71 124 9226-1 L: 14 m, ø 28 mmEach 71 124 9239-1 L: 23 m, ø 30 mmEach

288

Soft fibres

l Sport-Thieme®

Competition Tug of War Rope

An extremely strong polypropylene rope, 35 mm thick. All markings comply with standards, ends with black plastic stoppers. Rope length: 33.5 m for outdoor use, 32 m for indoor use. Soft fibre, for indoor use 71 124 9604-1 L: 10 m, ø 20 mmEach Hard fibre, for outdoor use 71 124 9617-1 L: 12 m, ø 25 mmEach 71 124 9242-1 Each 71 124 9620-1 L: 14 m, ø 28 mmEach Soft fibre, for indoor use 71 124 9633-1 L: 23 m, ø 30 mmEach 71 124 9646-1 Each

Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Contains individual parts that may be swallowed. Danger of suffocation.

n Chiffon Scarves, Juggling and Dance Scarves

Perfect for movement games, dancing, rhythmics and juggling. Made from 100% polyamide, as light as a feather. 140x140 cm, assorted colours. Washable at 30°C. 71 136 0211-2 Each Attention! Not suitable for children under 3 years. Contains individual parts that may be swallowed. Danger of suffocation.

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Gymnastics Ropes, Skipping Ropes Gymnastics

a b Sport-Thieme®

Gymnastics Rope

a Sport-Thieme® Speed Rope

Skipping rope for schools and clubs, leisure and competitive sports. The Speed Rope consists of an elasticated PVC band and, as a result, is very fast. Fitness, rhythm and balance are all developed when using this rope. Each length has its own unique colour and black plastic handles. Rope length can be individually adjusted. Product code, colour, rope length/ body height

Red, approx. 2.13 m/1.38 m 71 125 9100 Each Blue, approx. 2.43 m/1.58 m 71 125 9113 Each Yellow, approx. 2.74 m/1.65 m 71 125 9126 Each Turquoise, approx. 3.00 m/over 1.78 m

Professional Ropes f f Sport-Thieme®

High Speed Rope

Innovative rope structure

A premium quality high speed rope for effective workouts. The rope is made from an elasticated PVC band with plastic handles. The rope outer diameter is approx. 8 mm. Rope middle section approx. 10 mm reinforced, therefore it is easy to pick up a good speed when using the rope. The unique waved shape means that the rope is almost silent when it hits the ground. Length can be individually adjusted. Maximum length: 2.60 m, black. 71 195 0104 Each

e Sport-Thieme®

Premium Beaded Rope

An innovative skipping rope with soft pods (beads). The rope is made from woven nylon core with coloured plastic links threaded through. The elastic bean shaped beads create a unique beaded rope sound. The skipping rhythm or speed are therefore well supported. Length can be adjusted. Maximum length: 2.60 m, with plastic handles. Black/white. 71 195 0205 Each

Top Rated

sport-thieme.com

This classic skipping rope complies with international regulations. It is made from 100% polypropylene. Length 3 m, ø 9 mm thickness throughout, approx. 95 g. 71 126 0104 BlueEach 71 126 0120 GreenEach 71 126 0117 YellowEach 71 126 0133 RedEach 

Great Value!

Buy Now! Top Rated

c Sport-Thieme® Competi-

sport-thieme.com

tion Skipping Rope

High-quality competition skipping rope complying with FIG regulations. Made from 100% polypropylene. L: 3 m, ø 9 mm thickness throughout. Design: approx. 120 g. 71 126 1413 BlueEach 71 126 1426 YellowEach 71 126 1439 GreenEach 71 126 1442 RedEach 71 126 1468 BlackEach

Set

d Set of 40® Sport-

Thieme Gymnastics Ropes

10 skipping ropes of each colour in blue, green, yellow and red c. 71 126 1602 Set

Reel

h Sport-Thieme®

Detail

Dual Colour Competition Gymnastics Rope

New, double coloured skipping rope in trendy, modern colours. Woven in compliance with international regulations. Made from 100% polypropylene. Length 3 m, ø 9 mm thickness throughout. Style: approx. 95 g. 71 126 0700 Blue/whiteEach 71 126 0713 Red/whiteEach 71 126 0726 Green/whiteEach 71 126 0739 Purple/whiteEach

i Sport-Thieme®

Roll of Skipping Rope

Material 100% polypropylene in 9 mm thick quality. By heat-sealing the ropes the ideal length for all heights can be created. In 100 m rolls. 71 126 1006 BlueRoll 71 126 1022 GreenRoll 71 126 1019 YellowRoll 71 126 1035 RedRoll

g Beaded Rope

Classic skipping rope with stringed beads. The rope is heavier than speed ropes and is suitable for training exercises, tricks and partner exercises. 300 cm. 71 126 0423 Each

Accessories

j Sport-Thieme® Skipping Rope Storage Rack

Registered design. New design of this practical storage solution for over 180 ropes. Sturdy, galvanised metal rail for wall mounting with 6 hooks. Approx. 48 cm long, hook length approx. 16 cm. Ropes not included. 71 126 7903 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

k Sport-Thieme® Boxing

Skipping Rope including additional weights

The professional skipping rope for boxing, fitness, high performance and school sports. Adjustable, plastic coated steel rope, approx. 280 cm long. Unbreakable plastic swivel handles including removable 190 g weights. 71 150 1432-1 Each

4 With additional weights

k

l Sport-Thieme® Speed Rope with Counter

For high speeds during endurance training. The length of the rope can be adjusted. With counter. 71 146 1028-2 Each

l 4 With counter

289


Gymnastics Gymnastics Hoops and Accessories Top Rated

sport-thieme.com

Set

Buy Now!

4 Joints welded at an angle for ultimate strength

a Sport-Thieme® Plastic Gymnastics Hoop

Plastic, complying with DIN 7912. Non-slip texture, unbreakable and shatter-proof. Size approx. Blue Yellow Green Red

Inner ø 50 cm 71 129 3409 71 129 3412 71 129 3425 71 129 3438

Trolley without contents

Slant welded joints. Can also be used in water. Fashionable colours available: blue, yellow, green and red.

Inner ø 60 cm 71 129 3500 71 129 3513 71 129 3526 71 129 3539

Inner ø 70 cm 71 129 3601 71 129 3614 71 129 3627 71 129 3630

Inner ø 80 cm 71 129 3702 71 129 3715 71 129 3728 71 129 3731

Trolley including contents

b Sport-Thieme® Storage Trolley

Extra large storage capacity on three shelves: will support approx. 100 kg. This storage trolley can be easily moved around on 4 castors. All small items will be stored away clearly arranged. Strong construction of 18 mm thick plywood with addi-

Set sport-thieme.com

Buy Now! d Sport-Thieme® Set

Gymnastics Hoop

Beech, plywood, laminated, smooth finish. 20x10 mm tubing to DIN 7912 standards. ø 90 cm competition design, complies with FIG regulations.

e

Gymnastics Equipment

Our product recommendation for the storage trolley for gymnastics exercises and games. The set consists of: • 12  coloured gymnastics bars, 1 m • 10  wooden gymnastics bats, 38 cm • 8 coloured gymnastics hoops, ø 70 cm • 12  coloured skipping ropes, 3m • 1 gong tambourine, ø 22 cm with felt drum stick • 6 coloured tennis rings

c Sport-Thieme® Wooden

Trolley including contents 71 126 8717 Set

Sets

Top Rated

4 Plywood

tional hooks for hoops, ropes, clubs and bars. Easy to assemble with pre-prepared screw threads. LxWxH approx: 110x61x88 cm. Optional with contents. Trolley without contents 71 126 8704 Each

71 125 8208 Outer ø 60 cmEach 71 125 8211 Outer ø 70 cmEach e Sport-Thieme® Competition 71 125 8224 Outer ø 80 cmEach Gymnastics Hoop 71 125 8237 Outer ø 90 cmEach FIG certified. This new hoop has been specially developed to meet the regulations for rhythmic gymnastics. The FIG certification confirms the hoop‘s suitability for official competitions. Stable round shape, ø 20 mm. The outer diameter of the hoop is approx. 89.5 cm and it weighs approx. 305 g. Also suitable for water gymnastics. 71 125 8501 Medium blueEach 71 125 8514 Summer yellowEach 71 125 8527 Turquoise greenEach 71 125 8530 Cardinal redEach 71 125 8543 WhiteEach

• 12 coloured 120 g bean bags • 6 coloured gymnastics balls • 1 of each medicine ball, 800 g and 1,500 g • 12 rubber balls • 1 gymnastics rope 10 m • 1 multi-ball, ø 21 cm • 1 rainbow ball, 7“ Even when filled with all these items, there will still be space in the storage trolley for more. Ball pump also included. 71 126 8805 Set

Accessories

Can be locked

g Sport-Thieme ® Gymnastics Hoops Bracket

Simple and problem-free assembly. You should not be without this useful aid. f Sport-Thieme Training Gymnastics Hoop Hoops can be sorted clearly and according Ideal training hoop made from unbreakato size. The hinged frame with padlock ble plastic. Round tube approx. 20 mm ø, ensures hoops are protected against unauexternal diameter 80.5 cm, approx. 311 g. thorised use. Holds 25 hoops. Contents White. Not FIG recognised. Not illustrated. not included. 71 125 8400 Each 71 126 8300 Each ®

4 Round tubing 4 Competition approved

290

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Gymnastics Clubs, Gymnastics Bars and Accessories Gymnastics Sport-Thieme® Gymnastics Bars Now Even Better

Sport-Thieme® Gymnastics Clubs

a

4 Unbreakable and shape retaining 4 Slip-resistant thanks to flat end caps

b Ash, solid

c Beech, solid

Great Value!

Buy Now! Length: ø :

80 cm 25 mm

100 cm 25 mm

120 cm 25 mm

80/100 cm 100 cm 25 mm 28 mm

a Sport-Thieme® Plastic Gymnastics Bar

Made from flexible plastic, available in red, blue, yellow and green. Quality tested under extreme conditions. Can be used in Length / ø Blue Yellow Green Red

80 cm / 25 mm 71 126 4803 71 126 4816 71 126 4829 71 126 4858

temperatures varying from -15°C to +50°C, very durable. Also suitable for aqua aerobics. With end caps on both ends. 100 cm / 25 mm 71 126 4500 71 126 4513 71 126 4526 71 126 4555

120 cm / 25 mm 71 126 5705 71 126 5718 71 126 5721 71 126 5734

d Sport-Thieme® Children's Gymnastics Club

Made from plastic, approx. 35 cm. 71 126 5806 BlueEach 71 126 5819 YellowEach 71 126 5822 GreenEach 71 126 5835 RedEach 

e Sport-Thieme® Standard Gymnastics Club

For sports gymnastics. Made from plastic, approx. 45 cm, approx. 160 g. 71 126 6203 BlueEach 71 126 6216 YellowEach 71 126 6229 GreenEach 71 126 6232 RedEach

f Sport-Thieme® Competition Gymnastics Club

Sport-Thieme® Wooden Gymnastics Bars Type of wood Length Product code

b

Ash, sanded, clear varnish, ø 25 mm 80 cm 100 cm 71 126 4601 71 126 4614

c

Beech, smooth finish, unvarnished, ø 28 mm 100 cm 71 126 5008

Accessories

Complies with FIG regulations. Made from plastic. Approx. 44 cm, weight approx. 160 g. 71 126 6001 BlueEach 71 126 6014 YellowEach 71 126 6027 GreenEach 71 126 6030 RedEach

g Sport-Thieme® Wooden Gymnastics Club

Regulation shape, with clear varnish. Made from beech wood. 71 126 5503 36 cmEach 71 126 5516 38 cmEach 71 126 5529 40 cmEach

4 For up to 40 gymnastics clubs 4 Lockable

i Sport-

Thieme® Storage and Transporting Bin for Gymnastics Bars

Mobile. With this bin, you can bring your bars directly onto the gym floor. After use, all equipment can be locked up again ® in the equipment h Sport-Thieme Bag for room. Metal contaiGymnastics Hoops ner ø 280 mm holds A practical way to store and transport up approx. 70 gymnasto 15 gymnastics hoops with an inner ø of 50-80 cm. Bag made from 100% polyester, tics bars, with metal with carrying strap, handle and a zip. Blue. handle and wheels. Contents not included. Hoops not included. 71 129 3816 Each 71 116 9007-1 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

j Sport-Thieme® Wall

Mounted Club Storage

Registered design. Practical storage for approx. 40 gymnastics clubs. Strong galvanised metal structure. For wall moun-

ting, with padlock to prevent theft. Length: approx. 77 cm. Overhang approx. 24 cm. Contents not included. 71 126 9404 Each

291


Gymnastics Gymnastics and Dance Ribbons a Sport-ThiemeÂŽ Competition Gymnastics Ribbon

Yellow

Cornflower blue

Red

Green

White

Light pink

Orange

Light blue

Purple

Whirlpool of colour

Complies with DTB (German Gymnastics Association) and international regulations. 5 cm wide replaceable satin-silk ribbon with fibreglass baton and swivel. 100% nylon. Training, 4 m long 71 126 3842 Cornflower blueEach 71 126 3855 Light pinkEach 71 126 3868 RedEach 71 126 3813 YellowEach 71 126 3800 OrangeEach 71 126 3826 GreenEach 71 126 3839 Light blueEach 71 126 3972 PurpleEach 71 126 3985 WhiteEach Girls, 5 m long 71 126 4005 OrangeEach 71 126 4018 YellowEach 71 126 4021 GreenEach 71 126 4034 Light blueEach 71 126 4047 Cornflower blueEach 71 126 4050 Light pinkEach 71 126 4063 RedEach 71 126 4076 PurpleEach 71 126 4089 WhiteEach

Great Value!

Buy Now!

Competition, 6 m long 71 126 4106 OrangeEach 71 126 4119 YellowEach 71 126 4122 GreenEach 71 126 4135 Light blueEach 71 126 4148 Cornflower blueEach 71 126 4151 Light pinkEach 71 126 4164 RedEach 71 126 4177 PurpleEach 71 126 4180 WhiteEach

A satin-silk ribbon with baton and swivel that comply with DTB (German Gymnastics Association) regulations

Ribbon b Rhythmic 5 cm wide satin ribbon with plas-

c Rhythmo Double Ribbon Set

tic baton (40 cm) and swivel. Children‘s, length 2m. 71 127 6507 YellowEach 71 127 6510 GreenEach 71 127 6523 Cornflower blueEach 71 127 6536 RedEach 71 127 6549 WhiteEach 71 127 6552 Light pinkEach 71 127 6565 OrangeEach 71 127 6578 Light blueEach 71 127 6581 PurpleEach 

6 double ribbons in orange, yellow, cornflower blue, green, red and purple. Each 90 cm long, 2 cm wide, baton 22 cm, baton is the same colour as the ribbon. 71 165 5504 Set

f Gymnastics Ribbon e The Original KiwiDo d Gymnastics Ribbon

Rainbow coloured, 5 cm wide satin-silk ribbon with fibreglass baton and swivel. Complies with German Gymnastics Association (DTB) regulations and international standards. 100% nylon. 71 126 3204 6 m, competitionEach 71 126 3217 5 m, girlsEach 71 126 3220 4 m, trainingEach

292

A combination of dynamic, aesthetic, and a strong visual presence with elements of dancing. Swinging is the basic rhythmic movement. The colourful lines of the 145 cm long ribbons and the rustling will liberate and stimulate those who join in. A comprehensive feast for the senses. This model is of particularly high quality. 71 201 2302 Pair

Also take a look at:

Rhythmic Scarves, page 338

Multi-coloured satin-silk ribbon with fibreglass baton and swivel, complying with German Gymnastics Association and international regulations. 2 m and 3 m long ribbons are 4 cm wide; 4 m, 5 m and 6 m long ribbons are 5 cm wide. 100% nylon. 71 126 2908 2 mEach 71 126 2911 3 mEach 71 126 2924 4 mEach 71 126 2937 5 mEach 71 126 2940 6 mEach

g Replacement Baton for Gymnastics Ribbons

Fibreglass with swivel 0.5 m. 71 126 4308 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Mirrors, Stools Gymnastics a

Foil Mirror

Check your posture, walking and exercises. Ideal for physiotherapy. The mirror has a plastic foil instead of glass making it very light and unbreakable. Lockable castors.

b

a Foil Mirror

71 129 8912 175x100 cmEach

Tipping mirror 71 129 8909 175x100 cmEach 71 129 8925 200x150 cmEach

b Foil Mirror

Fixed position mirror

Mirror face can be tilted

3-part, folds down. Total width when open: 3 metres. 71 129 8954 175x150/74/74 cmEach 71 129 8970 200x150/74/74 cmEach

Exercise stools

Ideal for exercising, gymnastics, therapy and rehabilitation.

Adjustable angle from 15-35 degrees

f g

h f-h

4 Stackable

45 cm

Crystal glass with polished edges. Angle can be adjusted by 15 degrees to the front and 35 degrees backwards. The whole surface is double-glued to a wooden board to avoid injuries. Swivels. Size of mirror: 143x50 cm. Total height approx. 180 cm. 71 129 5708 Each

46 cm

c Mirror

48 cm

Rear view

5

year guarantee

e f Stackable Birch 4 Can withstand up to 180 kg

d Sirex® Insulating Leisure Mat

An all-round mat made from waterproof, closed-cell and environmentally friendly polyethylene foam. Both sides embossed with a PE foil. The material insulates against the cold and wet ground when used outdoors. LxWxH: approx. 180x60x0.9 cm. Blue. 71 129 2800 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

Exercise Stool

Stackable, H: 48 cm, approx. ø 35 cm. Will support up to approx. 100 kg. 5 year guarantee! 71 125 7814 Each

g Padded Exercise Stool Stackable, chrome frame. Can withe Square Beech Exercise Stool Very stable with lots of leg room thanks to the open struts. With a hole as a handle. Beech wood, natural varnished. Seat 35x35 cm. Supports up to 180 kg. 5 year guarantee! 71 125 8107 45 cmEach 71 125 8110 50 cmEach 71 125 8123 55 cmEach

stand approx. 120 kg. H: approx. 46 cm. ø 34 cm. 5 year guarantee! 71 125 7827 Each

h Stackable Exercise Stool

Plastic beech effect seat, chrome frame. Supports up to approx. 120 kg. H: 45 cm. ø 34 cm. 5 year guarantee! 71 125 7801 Each

293


Gymnastics Ballet Mirrors c

4 F olding Wall Mirror

Also take a look at: Exercise balls, pages 34-35

4 Hardly ever fogs up or steams up 4 No irritating wiping

a Folding Wall Mirror

This mirror protects itself against damage when it is folded up. The folding mirror consists of 2 separate mirrors that are connected with hinges. The fold-out mirror part is at the top and at the bottom approx. 2 cm smaller than the fixed part. This lightweight mirror is not made from glass but from a high quality polyester film. The film is mounted on an aluminium frame and the back consists of a polyurethane foam board. When open, the width is doubled. Support rails are included. We recommend mounting the rails at a height of 25-40 cm.

d

b Super Light Mirror 71 122 8423 71 122 8436 71 122 8449 71 122 8452 71 122 8465 71 122 8478

HxW: 150x100 (200) cmEach HxW: 150x150 (300) cmEach HxW: 175x100 (200) cmEach HxW: 175x150 (300) cmEach HxW: 200x100 (200) cmEach HxW: 200x150 (300) cmEach

Foldable Mirror Wall

Accessories for b

c Support Rail for Light Mirror

The mirror slots into the support rail at the top and bottom. Order double the length of the required mirror width. Aluminium tubing. Z-shape. 71 122 8410  per m

d Ballet Bar Base

To be dowelled to the floor. With 2 brackets for ø 40 mm ballet bars, height upper bar 110 cm, lower bar 87.5 cm, distance 28/22 cm. Ballet bars not included. 71 122 4362 Each

180 cm

4 Crystal glass mirror with shatterproof foil 4 Recommended for public places

This lightweight mirror offers unimaginable possibilities. It can be mounted virtually anywhere on the wall or the ceiling. There is no glass in this mirror, only highquality polyester foil that is mounted on an aluminium frame. The back consists of a very light polyurethane foam board making the mirror both lightweight and sturdy. Thanks to its construction, it is super easy to wall mount the mirror. Several mirrors

can be joined together by connecting the hidden aluminium frame to support rails. The super light mirrors slot into practical support rails when mounted to the wall. • 20 mm thick • 2.0 kg/m² • Distortion-free surface • 100% unbreakable • Very bright and clear reflection • Will not steam up so does not need to be wiped • Easy to attach to walls and ceilings using the support rail c (support rail is not included and must be ordered separately) • Mirror foil is neither ball impact resistant nor shockproof 71 226 2000 150x50 cmEach 71 226 2013 150x75 cmEach 71 226 2026 150x100 cmEach 71 226 2039 150x125 cmEach 71 226 2042 200x75 cmEach 71 226 2055 200x100 cmEach 71 226 2068 200x125 cmEach 71 226 2071 250x100 cmEach 71 226 2084 250x125 cmEach

g

17 cm

g Braig Ballet Bars

e

Mirror Wall 300x180 cm

f

Mirror Wall 400x180 cm

Three piece, width when folded Two piece, width when folded 150 cm. 200 cm. 71 178 4015 Without shatterproof filmEach 71 178 4031 Without shatterproof filmEach 71 178 4028 With shatterproof filmEach 71 178 4044 With shatterproof filmEach

Folding Crystal Glass Mirror Walls Ideal for dance and gymnastics schools or multi-use rooms. After use simply fold it together and push it to the side on its

294

eight stable castors. Solid wooden frame, total height 197 cm.

The first perfect mobile yet sturdy ballet bar for intensive daily use in ballet schools and academies. Both bars are made of special wood (350 cm long) with a cross section that ensures good grip, tightly mounted to movable stands. Upper bar 110 cm, lower bar 87.5 cm high. Well proven in practical use by all age groups. 71 122 7505 Each

h Extra Transporting Tray

With 4 integrated castors for long distance transport. You will need 2 for moving equipment more easily. Not illustrated. 71 122 7518 Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.


Ballet and Callanetics Gymnastics

4 With transport system

110 cm

350 cm

a Ballet Set

Free-standing ballet set for dance studios, ballet schools, clubs and schools. With two ash ballet bars, 350 cm long and ø 50 mm. The higher bar is 110 cm and the lower is 87.5 cm. Both metal bases provide a stable and secure stand of the set, no additional anchoring is required. Simple to move around thanks to the 2 part transport device with four castors (included). 71 122 4388 Each

87.5 cm

4 No  additional anchoring required 4 Very stable and secure stand

Exclusive to Sport-Thieme®

Round Ballet Bar System Ballet Bar Wall Brackets

b Ballet Bars Made-to-Mea-

c Made-to-Measure Polished Ballet Bars

d

e Ballet Bar End Finishing

28 cm

Set

Both ends are rounded off. 71 122 6629  Additional charge

f Rails for Wall Brackets

Stable aluminium rail tubing for wall mounting. Single and double wall brackets can be adjusted to any height and are easily removable. Includes fixtures and fittings. Ballet bar and bracket not included. Length of rail 90 cm with an adjustment range of 80 cm. 71 306 8133 Each

Design is the same as b, but these ballet Ballet Bar Wall Bracket bars are double-varnished with a two com- g Double bracket with 2 different ponent paint. depths. Upper 28 cm, lower 22 cm. Dis71 122 6661  per m tance between bars 22 cm. Will hold 2 ballet bars with a ø of 40 mm. The lower bar is d Round Ballet Bars, 300 cm suitable for children and for leg stretching Indispensable for any ballet school. exercises. Single bracket, depth 28 cm. For Made of non-warping wood. Length 300 one 3 m long bar 3 brackets are required. cm, ø 40 mm, two-part, 2x 150 cm long This means that the ends are joined in the bars. Suitable for bracket g. Brackets not brackets. Ballet bars not included. included. 71 306 8146 DoubleEach 71 122 6603 Each 71 306 8159 SingleEach

g

Single

f d

h Ballet Bar with

28 cm

Wall Brackets

22.5 cm

sure

Precise measurements and made-to-measure. Made from warp-resistant ash wood, ø 40 mm, untreated, smooth and without processed ends. Varnishing and end finishing available at an additional charge. Available in 5 m lengths. For any length required over 5 m, the bars must be glued on-site. The bars must be mounted on brackets to the wall every 120 cm. Suitable brackets are: single bars g and for double bars on top of one another g. 71 122 6616  per m

All ballet bar wall brackets can be mounted to the wall rail or the wall plate.

22 cm

g

Double

• For home, club or studio use • 1 ash wood ballet bar • Length 200 cm • ø 40 mm • 2 galvanised steel wall brackets • Distance from wall 28 cm • Can be mounted at any height Recommendation: For children approx. 87 cm, adults 110 cm bar height • Comes with all fixtures for solid walls 71 122 6658 Set

Oval Ballet Bar System Oval Ballet Bar

The oval shape (51/41 mm) is especially easy to grip. It is unbreakable and does not warp. 350 cm long, can be shortened to any length. Fits to bracket j. Does not include bracket. 10 year guarantee! 71 119 6708 Each

i 28 cm

k 110 cm

i Sport-Thieme®

j Ballet Bar Wall Bracket

j

Single

28 cm

k Wall Fixing Panel

The panel is attached directly to the wall allowing the ballet brackets to be screwed on or off. Includes fixing screws and dowels. Wall bracket not included. 10 year guarantee. 71 306 8120 Each

Phone: +49 5357 181-543 · www.sport-thieme.com

k

4 Adjustable to any height between 85 and 110 cm

85 cm

i

22.5 cm

For professional use. Wall bracket made of sturdy and elegantly designed galvanised steel. Comes as single or double bracket, permanent or removable version. Ballet bars can easily be attached or detached from bracket without using any tools. Double bracket upper depth 28 cm, lower depth 22 cm, distance between bars 22 cm. Single bar bracket depth 28 cm. Ballet bars not included. 10 year guarantee! 71 306 8104 SingleEach 71 306 8117 DoubleEach

22 cm

j

Double

Exclusive to Sport-Thieme®

l Freestanding Ballet Bars

Suitable for every dance and ballet school or club. Free-standing without any additional anchoring - will stand stable and secure. With two height adjustable

galvanised metal stands. Can be adjusted at any height between 85-110 cm. Bars made from ash wood, ø 4 cm, 200 cm long. 71 122 4375 Each

295


® nds Bewegungstherapie Thera-Band Resistance Ba

The smallest gym in the world!

Accessories d

e New!

f a c

a Thera-Band

d Thera-Band® Handles

Increases the ways the Thera-Band and Thera-Band Tubes can be used. 71 148 4003 Pair

®

Bodytrainer Resistance Tube, 1.4 m with Handles

The tube is light, easy to use, saves space and is extremely durable. It facilitates low impact whole body workouts. Tubes can also be used in therapy. The Bodytrainer is available in 4 strengths.

71 148 3202 71 148 3215 71 148 3228 71 148 3231

e Thera-Band® Door Anchors

Red, lightEach Green, mediumEach Blue, strongEach Black, extra strongEach

c

Set

b Bodytrainer

Resistance Tube Set

The set consists of: • 1 of each colour Bodytrainer tube a in red, green, blue, black • 1 Bodytraining resistance tube book “Muscle training with the TheraBand” g 71 148 3303 Set

New! Thera-Band® 250 cm,

in a Practical Zip-Up Bag

Handy and versatile. Thera-Band is the smallest fitness studio in the world. It can be stored safely and taken anywhere thanks to the practical zip-up bag. • 100% natural latex • Includes a practical zip-up bag • Including 32 page exercise booklet “Fit with the resistance band” 71 148 1509-1 Yellow, lightEach 71 148 1512-1 Red, mediumEach 71 148 1525-1 Green, strongEach 71 148 1538-1 Blue, extra strongEach 71 148 1541-1 Black, extremely strongEach

New!

Top Rated

with Hand Straps

“Elastiband” Resistance Bands, 10 kg Set

296

Included: • 1x pulley, ø 4.5 cm • Nylon rope 190 cm • H